Skip to main content

Full text of "Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College"

See other formats 


1V3 


HARVARD  UNIVERSITY 


LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology 


BULLETIN 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE,  ZOOLOGY 


HARVARD  COLLEGE,  IN  CAMBRIDGE. 


VOL.  I. 
Nos.    1-13. 


CAMBRIDGE,   MASS.,  U.  S.  A. 

18G3-18G9. 

Reprinted  with  the  permission  of  the  original  publisher 

KRAUS  REPRINT  CORPORATION 

New  York 

1967 


5-tf/fc 


Printed  in  U.S.A. 


CONTENTS. 


Page 
No.  1.  —  List  of  the  Fishes  sent  by  the  Museum  to  different  Institutions,  in 
Exchange  for  other  Specimens,  with  Annotations.     By  F.  W.  Putnam    .         2 

No.  2.  —  List  of  the  Echinoclerms  sent  to  different  Institutions  in  Exchange 
for  other  Specimens,  with  Annotations.     By  A.  Agassiz  .        .        .17 

No.  3.  —  List  of  the  Polyps  and  Corals  sent  by  the  Museum  of  Comparative 
Zoology  to  other  Institutions  in  Exchange,  with  Annotations.  By  A.  E. 
Verrill 29 

No.  4.  —  List  of  the  Brachiopoda  from  the  Island  of  Anticosti,  sent  by  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  to  different  Institutions  in  Exchange  for 
other  Specimens,  with  Annotations.     By  N.  S.  Shaler    ....       61 

No-  5. —  The  Fossil  Cephalopods  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 
By  Alpheus  Hyatt  ..........       71 

No.  6.  —  Contributions  to  the  Fauna  of  the  Gulf  Stream  at  Great  Depths 
By  L.  F.  de  Pourtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey        ....     103 

No.  7. —  Contributions  to  the  Fauna  of  the  Gulf  Stream  at  Great  Depths. 
(2d  Series.)     By  L.  F.  de  Pourtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey  .         .     121 

No.  8.  —  Catalogue  of  the  Mammals  of  Massachusetts;  with  a  Critical  Re- 
vision of  the  Species.     By  J.  A.  Allen  .  .         .         .         .         .         .143 

No.  9.  —  Preliminary  Report  on  the  Echini  and  Star-fishes  dredged  in  Deep 
Water  between  Cuba  and    the    Florida  Reef,  by  L.  F.   de  Pourtales, 

Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey  ;  prepared  by  Alexander  Agassiz       .         .  253 

I.     Catalogue  of  the  Echini 253 

II.    On  the  Young  Stages  of  Echini 279 

III.  Bathymetrical  and  Geographical  Distribution     ....  2% 

IV.  List  of  the  Star-ri>hes 307 

No.  10.  —  Preliminary  Report  on  the  Ophiuridas  ami  Astrophytidae  dredged 
in  deep  water  between  Cuba  and  the  Florida  Reef,  by  L.  F.  de  Pourtales, 
As>i>t   I".  S   Coast  Survey.    Prepared  by  Theodore  Lyman         .        .    309 
I.    General  Remarks 309 

II.    Descriptions  of  New  Genera  and  Species,  with  Critical  Remarks        31G 


iv  CONTENTS. 

Nci.  11  — List  of  the  Crinoids  obtained  on  the  Coasts  of  Florida  and  Cuba, 
by  the  United  States  Coast  Survey  Gulf  Stream  Expeditions,  in  1SG7, 
1868,1869.     By  L.  F.  de  Pocrtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey  .        .     355 

No.  12.  — List  of  Holothuridse  from  the  Deep-Sea  Dredgings  of  the  United 
States  Coast  Survey.  By  L.  F.  in;  Lourtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast 
Survey 359 

No.   L3.  —  Report  upon  Deep-Sea  Dredgings  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  during 
the  Third   Cruise  of  the  U.  S.  Steamer  Bibb,  addressed  to  Pkofesso 
Benjamin   Peirce,   Superintendent    U.    S.    Coast    Survey,    by    Louis 
Agassiz  363 


BULLETIN 


MUSEUM  OE  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY, 


CAMBRIDGE,   MASSACHUSETTS,   U.  S.  A. 


March  1,  1SG3. 

In  order  to  leave  no  doubt  respecting  the  authority  of  the 
names  adopted  in  our  collections,  as  well  as  to  explain  various 
changes  in  the  nomenclature  of  the  specimens  sent  to  other 
institutions  by  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  rendered 
necessary  by  the  careful  investigation  to  which  they  were  sub- 
mitted while  arranging  our  own  series,  it  is  proposed  from  time 
to  time  to  issue  a  Bulletin,  calling  attention  to  the  evidence 
upon  which  the  names  adopted  may  rest.  This  will  render  the 
duplicates  available  for  exchanges  before  a  full  account  of  the 
results  thus  reached  can  be  published.  Although  the  responsi- 
bilitv  is  left  to  those  who  may  sign  them,  it  is  proper  that  I 
should  add,  that,  in  almost  every  instance,  I  have  satisfied 
myself,  by  a  direct  revision,  of  the  accuracy  of  the  identifica- 
tions. 

Much  important  scientific  work  has  been  stored  up  with  the 

specimens  in  the  galleries  of  the  Museum,  during  the  past  years, 

and   left   unpublished  ;    but,    in    order  to   give   proper   credit   to 

all    those   connected  with   our  progress,  it  is    recorded    in    this 

Bulletin  with  the    date   at  which   the  investigation  was    made, 

though  no   claim  of  priority  is  thus  intended.     It  is  merely  a 

matter  of  justice  to  those  concerned  in  the  arrangement  of  the 

collections. 

L.  AGASSIZ, 

Director  of  tlte  Museum,. 


2  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

No.  1. — List  of  the  Fishes  sent  by  the  Jfriseum  to  different  In~ 
stitutions,  in  exchange  fur  other  Specimens,  with  Annotations. 
By  F.  W.  Putnam. 

[Authentic  labels  accompany  the  specimens,  having  numbers  on  the  left  corre- 
sponding to  those  attached  to  the  specimens.  The  figures  on  the  right  margin 
designate  the  number  of  specimens  forwarded  of  each  species.] 

From  the  Fresh  Waters  of  Forth  America. 

Lcpidosteus  osseus  LaCepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  V.  p.  333.     1803. 

Lepidosteus  oxyurus  Rafixesqce,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  73.    1820. 

Cylindrostcus  platostomus  Rafinesqce,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  72.    1820. 

The  synonymy  of  the  species  of  the  genera  Lepidosteus  and  Cylindros- 
teus  is  very  complicated.  The  specimens  included  under  the  name  of 
Lepidosteus  osseus  LaCepede  are  from  South  Carolina,  the  locality  of 
Linnscus's  Esox  osseus,  which  LaCepede  has  confounded  with  the  Lepi- 
dostt  its  ferox  of  authors,  from  the  Mississippi  lliver,  under  the  name  of 
Lepidosteus  spatula. 

Polyodon  folium  LaCepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  I.  p.  403.    1798. 

Amia  calva  Lixx.eus,  Syst.  Nat.  (12  ed.)  I.  p.  500.    17C6. 

Pimelodus  atrarius  DeKay,  Fishes  N.  York.  p.  185.    1S42. 

The  specimens  of  Pimelodus  forwarded  are  undoubtedly  identical  with 
the  species  described  by  DeKay  under  this  name,  but  it  remains  to  be 
proved  that  DeKay's  species  is  not  synonymous  with  some  one  of  Ra- 
finesque's. 

Pctromyzon  americanus  LeSueuh,  Trans.  Am.  Phil.  Soc.  (New  Series.) 
I.  p.  3S2.     1818. 

Ichthyomyzon  argenteus  GmAnn,  Pac.  P.  P.  Surv.  X.  p.  381.    1S59. 
Svx.    Pelromyzon  argenteus  Kiutlaxd,  1838. 

Anguilla  bostoniensis  LeSuedr,  Jour.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  I.  p.  S2. 
1817. 

We  question  the  validity  of  the  several  species  of  Anguilla  that  are 
described  from  our  sea-coast  and  fresh  waters. 

Uranidea  gracilis  Putnam,  MS.  1856. 

Svx.     Cottus gracilis  Heckel,  Ann.  Wien.  Mus.  II.  p.  148,  1837;    Ura- 

quiescens  DeKay,  1842. 
We  do  not  see  the  necessity  of  the   name  AcantJtocotlus,  proposed  by 
Girard  for    the  marine   species  of  the    old    genus   Cottus,   when    DeKay, 
many  years  before,  by  giving  the  name  of  Uranidea  to   one  of  our  fresh- 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  6 

water  specie?,  recognized  tlic  two  genera.  It  may  be  that  DeKay  did  not 
have  the  Cottus  gobio  in  view  when  he  proposed  the  name  of  Uranirfea,  but 
his  U.  quiescens  is  the  American  representative  of  the  Cottus  gobio  of  Eu- 
rope ;  and  therefore,  as  he  was  the  first  to  distinguish  the  two  genera 
in  lu. led  under  the  name  of  Cottus,  his  name  should  be  retained  for  the 
fluviatile  species,  and  that  of  Coitus  for  the  marine,  called  by  Girard  Acan- 
ilwcottus.  If  the  principle  adopted  by  Girard  were  followed,  it  would 
involve  the  change  of  such  a  large  number  of  generic  names  as  to  create 
the  greatest  confusion  in  nomenclature. 

Catonotus   lineolatus    Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sei.   Arts,  (2')  XVII.  p.  304. 
1854. 

Catonotus  flabellatus  Putxam,  MS.    i860. 

Syx.  Elheosloma  flabdlalum  Rafixesque,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  30,  1820; 
Eljieosloma  Linsleyi  II.  R.  Stoker,  1851  ;  Oligocephalus  Jnimeralis  Gikard, 
1859;  Oligocephalus  Linsleyi  Girard,  1859;    Catonotus  fasciatus  Girard, 

1809. 

Catonotus  Kennicotti  Pctxam,  MS.    i860.    (Nov.  sp.) 

We  have  dedicated  this  species  to  Mr.  It.  Kennicott.  who  has  collected  a 
number  of  fine  specimens  in  "a  rocky  brook  in  Southern  Illinois."  It  is 
closely  allied  to  C.  lineolatus  Agassiz,  but  the  scales  are  larger,  and  there 
arc  no  distinct  longitudinal  stripes  as  in  that  species.  The  males  have  the 
scales  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  tail  spotted  ;  the  first  dorsal  fin  is 
black,  with  a  white  base  ;  the  second  dorsal,  black,  with  spots  of  white  upon 
the  rays.  Females,  of  a  light  brown  color,  with  mottlings  of  a  darker 
shade  ;  no  transverse  bars,  as  in  the  females  of  the  other  species  of  the 
genus  ;  with  eggs  in  April  and  May. 

Nothonotus  Agassiz,  MS.     1SG0.     (Nov.  gen.) 

This  genus  differs  from  Catonotus  l>y  having  the  body  more  compressed, 
by  the  smaller  and  more  numerous  scales,  and  by  the  longer  and  higher 
first  dorsal  fin.  Nothonolus  maculatus  Agassiz,  MS.  (Ethcosloma  macula- 
tuw  Kirtlaxd)  and  the  following  species  are  the  only  known  representa- 
tives of  the  genus. 

Notlionotus  punctulatus  Agassiz,  MS.    i860. 

Syx.  Pcecilichthys  punctulatus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sei.  Arts,  (2°) 
XVII.  p.  301,  1S54  ;  Pacilichthjs  mirab'dis  Girard,  MS.  1859;  Boleichtltys 
Wfiipplei  Girard,  18.39. 

Poeoilichthys  cceruleus  Agassiz,  MS.    i860. 

Syx.  Etheostoma  cvcruleum  Storer,  Proc.  P>ost.  Soc.  X.  IT.  II.  p.  47, 
1845;  Pcecilosoma  erytJirogastrum  Kirtlaxd,  1854 ;  Pcecilichthys  erythro- 
gastcr  Agassiz,  1854  ;  Pozcilichtliys  versicolor  Agassiz,  1S5-1  ;  Pileoma  cy- 
malogramma  Arbott,  lsGO. 


•1  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Pcccilichthys    spectabilis   Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.   Sci.  Arts,  (2C)  XVII 
p.  304,   1854. 

Mici'operca  Putnam,  MS.     18G0.     (Nov.  gen.) 

Body  much  compressed  ;  tail  long  and  broad ;  scales  very  large ;  no 
lateral  line ;  first  dorsal  fin  composed  of  six  to  seven  rays ;  anal  fin  deep ; 
pectorals  and  ventrals  long;  caudal  slightly  rounded. 

Microperca  puuctulata  Putnam,  MS.    1860.    (Nov.  sp.) 

This  is  the  only  known  species  of  the  genus,  and  is  the  smallest  one  in 
the  family ;  the.  average  length  of  the  specimens  being  only  an  inch  and  a 
half.  The  color  is  buff,  with  dark  brown  zigzag  markings.  All  the  fins 
spotted,  except  the  ventrals.  Pectorals,  and  ventrals,  reaching  the  com- 
mencemc-r.it  of  second  dorsal.  We  have  received  specimens  from  various 
points  in  Michigan,  Wisconsin,  Illinois,  and  Alabama. 

tlololypia  agassiz,  MS.     1860.     (Nov.  gen.) 

Body  much  compressed  ;  lateral  line  strongly  arched  over  the  pectorals  ; 
dorsal  fins  of  nearly  equal  size  ;  caudal  fin  slightly  rounded ;  head  covered 
with  small  scales.     Only  two  species  known. 

Ilololopis  Barratti  Agassiz,  MS.     i860. 

Syx.  Boleosoma  tenue  Agassiz,  1850,  without  description  ;  Boleosoma 
Barratti  IIoldkook,  Journ.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  (New  Series,)  III.  p.  56, 
1855. 

Hololcpis  fusiformis  Putnam.  MS.     1860. 

Syx.    Boleosoma  fusiforme  GiRARD,Proc.  Bost.  Soc.N.II.  V.  p.41,1854. 

Boleichthys  CXilis  Gikard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XI.  p.  103.     1859. 

Boloichthys  Warreni  Gieard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XL  p.  104 
1859. 

Ethcostoma  blennioidos  TCafinf.sque,  Ichth.  Ohicn.  p.  37.    1820. 
Syx.     Diphsion  blennioides  Girard,  1859. 

Hadropterus  nigrofasoiatus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII. 
p.  303.     1S5  J. 

Hadropterus  variatus  Agassiz,  MS.  i860. 

Syx.  Elheostoma  variatum  Kirtlaxd,  Zobl.  Ohio,  pp.  1GS,  192,  1838; 
Etheosloma  notatum  Agassiz,  1850;  Pozcilosoma  variatum  Agassiz,  1850; 
Pozcilichtliys  varialiis,  Agassiz,  1854. 

Hadropterus  maeulatus  Gikard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XL  p.  100 
1859. 

Syx.    Alcordius  maeulatus  Girard,  1859. 

Cottogaster  Putnam,  MS.     I860.     (Nov.  gen.) 

General  form  of  body,  and  position  of  mouth,  as  in  Boleosoma;  lateral 
line,  straight  ;  first  dorsal  fin  with  ten  rays,  lower  than  the  second,  which  is 
of  the  same  si/  rminal  with  the  anal;  caudal  fin  slightly  forked. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  5 

Cottogaster  tessellatus  Putnam,  MS.    i860. 

Syn.  Boleosoma  tessellalum  Thompson,  App.  Hist.  Vt.  p.  31,  1853. 
(Xot  of  DeKay.) 

Boleosoma  Olmstedi  Agassiz,  Luke  Sup.  pp.  299,  .304.     1850. 

Syx.  Etheostoma  Olmstedi  Storkk,  1842;  Perca  (Percina)  minima 
IIaldemax,  1812;  Boleosoma  tessellalum  DeKay,  1842;  Boleo  oma  tessi  - 
latum  Agassiz,  1850;  Boleosoma  maculatum  Agassiz,  1850 ;  Boleosoma 
Olmstedi  Storer,  1853;  Arlina  effulgens  Girard,  1859;  Estrclla  alro- 
maculata  Giraud,  1859. 

Hyostoma  trausversum  Putnam,  MS.    lsr,o. 

Syx.  Poecilosoma  transversum  Abbott,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci 
XII.  p.  32G.     I860. 

Percina  caprodes  GlRARD,  rroc.  PhilacL  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XL  p.  C6.  1S59. 
Syx.  Scicena  caprodes  Kafinesque,  1818  ;  Etheostoma  caj>rodes  K.v- 
eixesque,  1820;  Perca  (Percina)  nelndosa  IIaldemax,  1842;  Pileoma 
semifasciatum  DeKay,  1842;  Percina  bimaculata  IIaldemax,  1843  ;  Ethe- 
ostoma nehulosum  Storer,  184G  ;  Etheostoma  semifasciatum  Storer,  184G  ; 
Etheostoma  bimaculatum  Storer,  1846;  Pileoma  caprodes  Agassiz,  1850; 
Pileoma  Zebra  Agassiz,  1850  ;  Etheostoma  Zebra  Agassiz,  1850  ;  J'ercina 
nebulosa  Girard,  1859;  Percina  semifasciata  Girard,  1859;  Percina 
Zebra  Girard,  1859. 

PleUl'Olepis  Agassiz,  MS.     18G0.     (Nov.  gen.) 

Body  cylindrical,  flattened  above,  and  slightly  tapering  to  the  base  of  the 
caudal.  Mouth  terminal.  Dorsal  fins  distinctly  separated,  of  equal  height, 
first  longer  than  the  second.  Anal  fin  as  large  as  the  second  dorsal,  and 
placed  opposite.  Caudal  slightly  emarginate.  Pectorals  and  ventrals  long 
and  pointed.  Scales  deeply  imbedded  and  placed  wide  apart.  The  row  con- 
taining the  lateral  line  and  the  one  each  side  of  it  are  the  most  conspicuous. 
Cheeks  and  operculum  covered  with  scales.  Lateral  line  straight.  The 
following  is  the  only  known  species :  — 

Pleurolepis  pellucidus  Agassiz,  MS.     I860.     (Nov.  sp.) 
Syx.     Etheostoma  pellucidum  Baird,  MS.     1853. 

From  ten  to  fourteen  small  square  olive  blotches  on  the  back  and  on 
each  side,  the  rest  of  the  body  of  a  light  cream-color;  fins  unicolored. 

The  last  twenty  species  mentioned  belong  to  the  Etiieostomata,  a  fam- 
ily of  small  fishes  inhabiting  the  fresh  water.-  of  North  America  east  of  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  no  species  of  which  has  thus  far  been  discovered  else- 
where. This  family  was  first  characterized  by  Professor  Agassiz,  in  1850, 
in  "  Lake  Superior,"  p.  298. 

A.mblodon  grunniens  Rafixesque,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  24.     1S20. 


BULLETIN   OF   THE 


Amblodon  lineatus  Aoassiz,  Am.Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2c)  XVII.  p.  307.    1854. 
Perca  flavescens  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  cd.)  II.  p.  33.     1828. 

Merone  americana  Gill,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XI.  p.  115.    i860. 
Svx.     Pirca  americana  Gmklix,  1788;  Merone  rufa  Mitch  ill,  1814; 
Bodianui  ru/us  Mitcuill,  ISM  ;   Labrax  mucronatus  Cuv.  &  Val.  1828; 
Labrax  ruf us  DkKay,  1812;  Labrax  americanus  IIolbkook,  1855. 

Grystes  nobilis  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (28)  XVII.  p.  298.     1854. 
Pomoxis  hcxacantllUS  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2C)  XVII.  p.  209.  1854. 
Centrarchus  irideus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  III.  (4°  cd.)  p.  66.    1829. 
CalliurUS  gulcsus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  300.     1854. 
Ichthelis  incisor  Holbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  12.    i860. 
Ichthelis  rubricauda  Holbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  15.    1860. 
Bryttus  Obesus  GlRARD,  Froc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XL  p.  04.     1859. 

Pomotis  auritus  Rafixesque,  Ichth.  Oliicn.  p.  29.    1820. 

Svx.  Perca  JluviatiUs  gibbosa  Catksby,  II.  PL  8,  f.  3,  1742;  Labrits 
auritus  Lixv.v.rs,  1 7GG  ;  ?  Merone  macuiata  Mitcuill,  1814;  Ichtlielis 
(Pomotis)  aurita  Rafinksquk,  1820;  Pomotis  Catesbei  Cuv.  &  Val.  1831  ; 
Pomotis  vulgaris  of  all  authors  except  Cuv.  &  Val. 

There  seems  to  have  been  such  a  general  misunderstanding  in  regard  to 
this,  our  most  common  species  of  the  genus,  that  a  few  words  of  expla- 
nation are  necessary  to  show  the  reason  for  restoring  the  specific  name  of 
auritus  to  the  species  in  question. 

In  the  tenth  edition  of  the  "  Systema  Naturae,"  Linnaeus  mentions  a  fish 
from  Philadelphia  under  the  name  of  Labrus  auritus.  This  fish  is  undoubt- 
edly a  Pomotis;  but  from  the  short  description  given  it  would  be  impossible 
to  refer  the  species  with  precision  to  any  of  the  many  that  inhabit  our  fresh 
waters,  were  it  not  for  the  reference  in  the  twelfth  edition  of  the  "  Systema 
Naturae"  to  the  figme  of  Cateshy,  which  unquestionably  represents  our 
common  "Bream,"  or  "  Pond-fish,"  —  thus  settling  the  species  which  Lin- 
naeus had  in  mind,  though  we  think  lie  confounded  villi  it  some  other 
species  sent  him  by  Dr.  Garden  from  South  Carolina,  probably  the  Ich- 
thelis rubricauda  of  Holbrook. 

In  1820,  Rafinesque  described  the  species  in  question  under  the  specific 
name  given  by  Linnaeus,  referring  it  to  bis  sub-genus  Pomotis. 

In  the  third  volume  of  the  "Ilistoire  Naturelle  des  Poissons,"  the  authors, 
overlooking  the  description  by  Rafinesque,  describe  and  figure  a  species  of 
the  genus  under  the  name  of  Pomotis  vulgaris,  referring  the  Labrus  auritus 
of  Linnaeus  to  it.  This  species  is  very  different  from  the  one  figured  by 
Catesby,  and  is  probably  identical  with  the  Labrus  appendix  of  Mitchill 
(Pomotis  appendix  Pi  Kay),  though  in  the  second  edition  of  the  '•  Regno 


MUSEUM   OF   COMrAFwATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  7 

Animal"  Cuvier  refers  the  figure  of  Catesby  to  it.  In  this  mistake  Cuvier 
and  Valenciennes  have  been  followed  by  all  subsequent  authors,  who  seem 
to  have  taken  it  for  granted  that  the  species  bearing  the  name  of  vulgaris 
must  be  the  common  one,  or,  omitting  to  look  up  the  authority  of  the  spe- 
cific name  auritus,  have  considered  that  name  as  obsolete.  In  the  seventh 
volume  of  the  "  Ilistoire  Naturelle  des  Poissons,"  referring  to  the  figure  in 
Catesby,  the  authors  have  again  described  the  Labrus  auritus  under  the 
name  of  Pomotis  Catesbei.  In  the  illustrated  edition  of  the  "Rcgne  Ani- 
mal," the  Pomotis  auritus  is  very  well  figured  under  the  name  of  Pomotis 
vulgaris. 

Percopsis  guttatus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  286.     1850. 
Syx.     Salmoperca  pellucida  TnoMrsox,  1853. 

ESOX  reticulatus  LeSdeur,  Journ.  Fhilad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  I.  p.  414.     1818. 

ESOX  fasciatUS  DeKay,  Fishes  of  N.  York,  p.  224.     1842. 
Syx.     Esox  ornalus  Gikard,  1854. 

Amblyopsis  spelseus  DeKay,  Fishes  of  N.  York,  p.  187.    1842. 

This  is  the  well-known  "  Blind-fish  "  of  the  Mammoth  Cave,  Kentucky. 

Fundulus  multifasciatus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  cd.)  XVLU. 
p.  150.     184G. 

Hydrargyra  catenata  Agassiz,  Am.  Jouvn.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  353.  1854. 

Plargyrus  americanus  Putnam,  MS.    1861. 

Syx.  Cijprinus  americanus  LrxN^EUS,  17G6  (not  of  the  10th  ed.  Syst. 
Nat.)  ;  Cyprinus  americanus  LaOepede,  1803  ;  Ci/primis  cJirysoleucits 
MiTCIULL,  1815;  (Rulilus)  Plargyrus  chrysolcucus  RAFIXESQUE,  1820; 
(Cyprinus)  Leuciscus  cJtrysoleucus  Riciiardsox,  1837  ;  Leuciscus  chryso- 
leucus  Storkr,  1839  :  Stilbe  cltrysoleucus  DeKay,  1842  ;  Abramis  versicolor 
DeKay,  1842;  Leuciscus  Doscii  Cuv.  &  Val.  1844  ;  Leuciscus  america- 
nus Storer,  184G  ;  Leucosomus  americanus  Girard,  1853;  Luxilus  amer- 
icanus Girard,  1856. 

Elypsolepis  COrnutus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  359.  1854. 
Syx.     Cyprinus  cornulus  Mitciiii.l,  1817  ;  Leuciscus  cornutus  Storer, 
1842  ;  Plargyrus  cornulus  Girard,  185G. 

Hypsolepis  frontalis  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  356.  1854. 
Syx.     Leuciscus  frontalis   Agassiz,  (male,)    1850  ;    L.cuciscus  gracilis 
Agassiz,  (female,)  1850  ;    Plargyrus  frontalis  Girard,  185G  ;    Plargyrus 
gracilis  Girard,  1856. 

Hypsolepis  diplcmius  Pctxam,  MS.    1861. 

Syx.  Semotilus  diplemius  Rafixesque,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  50,  1820  ;  Leu- 
ciscus  diplemius  Kieti.axd,  1S45. 


8  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Semotilus  argenteus  Putnam,  IMS.    1861. 

Syx.  Leuciscus  argenteus  Stoker,  (young,)  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  90, 
1839  :  Lt  uciscus  pulchellus  Stoker,  (adult,)  1839;  ?  L<  ucosomus  argenteus 
Heckkl,  1841  ;  ?  Leucosomus  chrysoleucus  Heckel,  1841;  ^Leuciscus  niti- 
dus  DeKay,  1842  (young?);  Leuciscus  Storeri  Cuv.  &  Y.u..  1844  ;  Chei- 
lomenus pulchellus  Girakd  (in  Stoker),  1S55;  Leucosomus  pulchellus  Gi- 
rard,  185G  ;  ? Hybognathus  nitidus  Girard,  1S5G  (young?). 

Semotilus  corporalis  Abbott,  Proc.Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.XIII.  p.  154.  18G1. 
Sy\.  Cyprinus  corporalis  Mitciiill,  1817;  Cyprinus  alromaculatus 
Mitchill,  1817;  Semotilus  dorsalis  Rafixesque,  1820  ;  Semotilus  cepha- 
lus  RAFlXESQui?,  1820;  Leuciscus  atromaculatus  DeKay,  1842;  Leuciscus 
iris  Cuv.  6c  Val.  1844  ;  Semotilus  atromaculatus  Girard,  1S5G  ;  Semotilus 
corporalis  Putnam,  MS.  18G1  ;  Semotilus  corporalis  Abbott,  18G1 ;  Semo- 
tilus alromaculatus  Abbott,  1SG1  ;  Leucosomus  rhotheus  Corn,  1SG1;  Leu- 
cosomus alromaculatus  Con-:,  1861. 

Gobio  plumbeus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  366.     1850. 

Syx.     Leucosomus  plumheus  GiRARD,  1856. 

As  Professor  Agassiz  has  stated  in  "  Lake  Superior,"  tins  species  differs 
generically  from  the  true  genus  Gobio ;  but  as  it  has  not  yet  been  referred 
to  its  proper  genus,  we  send  it  under  the  original  name  of  the  describer. 

Ceratickthys  biguttatus  Laird  ;  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  VII. 
p.  112.     1856. 

Syx.    Semotilus  biguttatus  Kirtlaxd,  1840 ;  Leuciscus  biguttatus  DeKay, 
1842. 
Chrosomus  erythrogaster  Rafinesque,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  47.    1820. 

Syx.  IRutilus  ruber  Rafixesque,  1820;  Luxilus  erythrogaster  Ivtrt- 
laxd,  1842  ;  Leuciscus  erythrogaster  Stoker,  184G. 

Pirnephales  promelas  Rafixesque,  Ichth.  Ohien.  p.  5.3.    1820. 

Syx.  ?  Pirnephales  maculosus  Girard,  1856  ;  Pirnephales  fasciatus  Gi- 
rard,  1856  ;  Plargyrus  melanocephalus  Abbott,  I860. 

Exoglossum  maxillingua  Haldemabt,  in  Rufp.,  Hist.  Lane.  Co.  Pa.  p.  474. 
1844. 

Syx.  Cyprinus  maxillingua  LeSueur,  1817  ;  Exoglossum  LcSueurianum 
Rafixesque,  1818;  Catostomus  maxillingua  DeKay,  1842. 

Campostoma  anomalum  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2r)  XIX.  p.  219. 

1855. 

Syx.  Rutilus  anomalus  Rafixesque,  1820;  Exoglossum  dubium  Kirt- 
laxd, 1838;  Exoglossum  spinicephalum  Cuv.&Val.  1844  ;  Leuciscus  pro- 
lixus  Storer,  1845;  Chondrostoma  ]>rolixum  Agassiz,  1854;  Chondros- 
loma  pull  urn  Agassiz,  1854. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  0 

Hybognathus  nuchalis  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2C)  XIX.  p.  224 
1855. 

Clinostornus  elongatus  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Aca'd.  Nat.  Sci.  VII.  p.  112. 
185G. 

Syx.  Luxilus  elongatus  Kirtlaxd,  1838  ;  Leuciscus  elongatus  DeKay. 
1842;  ? Leuciscus productus  Stoker,  184G  ;  Alburnus  pleuriticus  Agassiz, 

MS.  1854. 

Hybopsis  StoreriariUS  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2°)  XVII.  p.  358. 
1854. 

Syx.    Rutilus  Storerianus  Kirtlaxd,  1S42;  Leuciscus  Storerianus  TS.ir.t- 

LAXD,  1845. 

Hybopsis  dorsalis  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  358.     1854. 

Hybopsis  hudsonius  Putnam,  MS.     1  SGI . 

Syx.     Clupea  Jiudsonia  Clinton,  Ann.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist.  N.  Y.  I.  p.  49, 

1824;  Leuciscus  hudsonius  DeKay,  1842;   Hudsonius  fluviatilis  Girard, 

1856. 
Alburnus  rubellus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  364.     1850. 

Alburnus  lineolatus  Agassiz,  MS.     1854.     (Nov.  sp.) 

Body  light  brown  with  a  broad  silvery  band  having  dark  points,  extend- 
ing from  the  head  to  the  caudal  fin.  Average  length,  two  and  a  half  inches. 
From  the  Osage  River.     Collected  by  Mr.  G.  Stolley. 

Alburnus  zonatus  Agassiz,  MS.     1S54.     (Nov.  sp.) 

Brown  upon  the  back  ;  a  silvery  band  from  the  nose  across  the  eye  to 
the  caudal  fin,  beneath  this  a  slightly  broader  dark  band,  which  extends 
from  the  snout  to  the  tip  of  the  central  rays  of  the  caudal  fin  ;  silvery 
below  the  dark  band.  Head  large  and  rounded.  Average  length  of  speci- 
mens, three  inches.     Osage  River,  Mr.  Stolley. 

Alburnus  formosus  Putnam,  MS.     1861.     (Nov.  sp.) 

Specimens  of  this  species  were  collected  near  Mobile,  Alabama,  by  Judge 
LeSene  and  Albert  Stein,  Esq.  The  body  is  more  arched,  the  scales  arc 
larger,  and  the  anal  fin  is  longer  and  deeper,  than  in  any  other  species  of 
the  genus  with  which  we  are  acquainted.  Color  brown  above,  with  a 
lighter  shade  bordering  the  broad  chocolate  band  on  the  side  ;  light  brown 
below.     Average  length,  two  inches. 

Rhinichthys  atronasus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  354.     1850. 

Syx.  Cyprinus atronasus  Mitchill,  1815;  Argyreus  atronasus  Heckf.l, 
1841  ;  ?  Argyreus  rubripinnis  Heckel,  1841  ;  Leuciscus  atronasus  Cuv.  & 
Val.  1844. 

Ehinichthys  nasutus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  354.     1850. 

Syx.  Leuciscus  7iasutus  Ayres,  1843;  Argyreus  nasutus  Girard  ;  Sto- 
ker, 1855. 


10  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Rhinichthys  obtusus  Aoassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2')  XVII.  p.  357.  1854. 
Syx.     Argyreus  obtusus  Gikakd,  1S5G. 

Rhiniehthys  marnioratus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  354.    1850. 
Syn.     Argyreus  marnioratus  Gikard,  185G. 

Bubaliehthys  Urus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2°)  XIX.  p.  194.    1855 

Ichthyobus  Rauehii  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2°)  XIX.  p.  197.    1855. 

Ptychostomus  aureolus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2°)  XIX.  p.  205. 
1855. 

Hyloinyzon  nigricans  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2')  XIX.  p.  207.  1855. 

Moxostoma  Oblonguni  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2°)  XIX.  p.  203. 
1855. 

Moxostoma  tenue  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XIX.  p.  203.     1855. 

Trloxostoma  Sucetta  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XIX.  p.  203.     1855. 

CatOStomus  bostoniensiS  LeSuelr,  Journ.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  I.  p.  106 
1817. 

Catostomus  Posterianus  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  358.    1850. 

Catostomus  aurora  Agassiz,  Lake  Sup.  p.  360.     1850. 


From  the  Atlantic  Coast  of  North  America  and  the  West  Indies. 

Myxine  limosa  Girakd,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  X.  p.  223.     1858. 

This  Myzont  is  very  abundant,  at  certain  seasons,  on  the  eoast  of  Grand 
Menan.  It  has  never  been  compared,  as  far  as  we  are  aware,  with  Myxine 
glutinosa  Linn.kis,  and  as  we  are  doubtful  of  its  being  distinct,  specimens 
from  the  Old  World,  or  at  least  the  results  of  a  comparison,  would  be  very 
acceptable  to  the  Museum. 

MusteluS  CaniS  DeKaY,  Tm-1ics  of  New  York,  p.  355.     1842. 

Acanthias  americanus  Stoker,  Synop.  Fishes  N.  A.  p.  254.     1 S4R. 
This  species  is  viviparous.     We  send  young  taken  from  the  mother. 

Raja  lecvis  Mitciiiix,  Am.  Month.  Mag.  IT.  p.  327.     1817. 

The  synonym}' of  the  genus  Raja  i>  in  such  a  confused  state,  that  we  are 
not  certain  about  the  identification  of  a  single  species  found  on  our  coast. 

Cyelopterus  lumpus  Linnveus,  Syst.  Nat.  (12  cd.)  I.  p.  414.    17G6. 

We  have  not-  been  able  to  compare  this  with  the  species  of  the  same  name 

on  the   European  coast,  and  therefore  cannot  answer  for  its  identity.      We 

should  be  happy  to  receive  specimens  from  Europe. 
Muramoides  mucronatus  Gill,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XIII.  App. 

p.  45.      1861. 

Syn.     Gunnellus  mucronatus  Cuv.  &  Val.  1836. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  11 

Anarrhichas  voinerinus  Agassiz  ;  Storer,  Mem.  Am.  Acad.  (2*)  V.  p.  265. 
1855. 

Soarces  anguillaris  Storer,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  06.     1839. 

Gasterosteus  biaculeatus  Mitchill,  Trans.  Lit.  Phil.  Soc.  N.  Y.  I.  p.  430 

1815. 

The  specimens  included  under  this  name  are  undoubtedly  representatives 
of  Mitchill's  Gasterosteus  biaculeatus,  but  it  remains  to  be  proved  that  the 

G.  biaculeatus  of  Shaw  and  Mitchill  are  identical.  There  are  two,  if  not 
three  species,  of  two-spiued  Gasterostei  inhabiting  the  Atlantic  coast  of 
North  America. 

Pygosteus  DeKayi  Brevoort;  Gill,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sei.  XIII. 
A])]>.  p.  45.      1861. 

Syx.      Gasterosteus   occidcntalis    DeKay,   1842  (not  of  Cuv.  &   Val.)  J 

Gasterosteus  DeKayi  Agassiz,  1850. 

Cryptacanthod.es  maculatUS  Stoker,  Hep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  23.     1839. 

Cottus  grcenlandicus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.Poiss.  (4°ed.)IV.  p.  135.    1329. 
Syx.     Acanlhocottus  grcenlandicus  Giraud,  1850. 
We  doubt  the  distinction  of  Cottus  variabilis  AyreS. 

Cottus  OCtodecimspinosus  Mitchill,  Trans.  Lit.  Phil.  Soc.  N.  Y.  I.  p.  380. 
1815. 
Syx.     Cottus  virginianus  Storer,  1839  ;   AcanOtocotlus  virginianus  Gi- 

RARD,    1850. 

Hemitripterus  acadianus  Storer,  Mem.  Am.  Acad.  (2e)  V.  p.  8.3.    1855. 

Sebastes  norvegicus  Cvv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  cd.)  IV.  p.  240.     1823 

Prior) otUS  palmipes  Storer,  Mem.  Am.  Acad.  (2')  V.  p.  66.     1855. 
?  Trigla  Carolina  Lixx.eus. 

Ephippus  faber  Cuyier,  RegncAn.  II.  p.  190.    1S29. 

Holaeanthus  Ciliaris  LaCepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  IV.  p.  367.     1802. 

Chsetodon  striatus  Linbleus,  Syst.  Nat.  (10  ed.)  I.  p.  275.    1758. 

Mesoprion  chrysurus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat  Poiss.  (4°cd.)  II.  p  347.  1823. 

Mesoprion  uninotatus  Cuv.  &  Val.  nist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°cd.)  II.  p.  339.   1828. 

Diplectrum  fasciculare  Holbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  32.    1855. 

Holocentrurn  longipinne  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°ed.)  III.  p.  138. 
1S29. 
The  Ilolocentrus  soglio  Blocii  is  a  distinct  species. 

Centropristes  nigricans  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  cd.)  III.  p.  28. 

1829. 
Centropristes  atrarius  Holbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  42.    1855. 


12  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Centropristes  trifurcus  Cov.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.j  III.  p.  32 

1829. 

Iloinoprion  xanthurus  IIolbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  170.     1S55. 
V  Perca  punctatus  Linn-iE  us,  17GG.    (Sic!!) 

Considerable  confusion   exists  in   regard  to  this   species.      We  send  it 
under  the  name  given  by  Dr.  IIolbrook,  though  he  may  be  wrong  in  con- 
sidering it  as  identical  with  LaCdpcde's  Liostomus  xanthurus. 
Licr,tonius  obliquus  DlKay,  Fishes  of  X.  Y.  p.  69.     1S42. 
Johnius  ocellatus  Girard,  Ichth.  Mex.  Bound.  II.  p.  14.     1859. 
Sv.\.     Corcina  ocellata  Cuv.  &  Val.  1830. 

Otolithus  cai'Oliuensis  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  IX.  p.  351. 

1833. 
Otolithus  regalis  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  V.  p.  50.     1S30. 

PogOIlias  faseiatus  LaCepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  III.  p.  138.     1S02. 

TJmbrhia  alburnus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  V.  p.  133.     1830. 

Umbrina  littoralis  IIolbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  142.     1855. 

Micropogon  Ulldulatus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.    (4°  cd.)  V.  p.  163. 
1830. 

Larimus  faseiatus  IIolbrook,  Ichth.  S.  Car.  I.  p.  153.     1855. 

Orthopi'istis  duplex  Gikard,  Ichth.  Mex.  Bound.  II.  p.  15.     1859. 

Orthopi'istis  fulvomaculatus  Gill,  Pioc.  rhilad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XIII.  App. 

p.  32.     1861. 
Hsemylum  formosum  Cuv.  &  Val.  IlistNat.  Poiss.  (4°  cd.)  V.  p.  174.   1830. 
In  accordance  with  its   etymology,  the   name   Ilozmulon  is  changed   to 

Ilccmylum,  as  stated  in  the  "  Noinenclator  Zodlogieus." 

Ha3mylum  elegans  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  cd.)  V.  p.  169.     1830. 
Hssmylum  Arara  Poky,  Mem.  de  Cuba,  II.  p.  177.     1S60. 
Diabasis  albus  Scuddkr,  MS.    Apr.  1862. 

Svx.     Hcemulon  album  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  V.  p.  179, 
1830. 
Anarmostus  flavolineatus  S<  ctdder,  .MS.    Apr.  1SG2. 

Svx.     Diabasis  Jlacolinealus  Desmarest,  Decade   Ichth.  p.  35,    1823; 
Ilajmuhn  heterodon  Cuv.  &  Val.  1829. 

Anarmostus  serratus  Scodder,  MS.    Apr.  1862. 

Sy.v.     ? Hcemulon  serratus  Poky,  Mem.  de  Cuba,  IT.  p.  181,  1860. 

Bathystoma  melanurum  Scddder,  MS.    Apr.  1862. 

Syn.     Ptrca  melanura  Linn.i.us,  Syst.  Nat.  (10  ed.)  I.  p.  292,  1758 

Bathystoma  Jeniguarno  Scodder,  MS.    Apr.  1S62. 

Syn.     Hiemulon  J*  niguarno  Poey,  Mem.  de  Cuba,  II.  p.  183,  1800. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  13 

Bathystoma  chrysopterum  Sccdder,  MS.    Apr.  1 S62. 

Syx.     Hcsmulon  chrysopteron  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Foiss.  (4°  ed.)  V. 
p.  179,  1830. 

Ctenolabrus  Burgall  Ccv.  &  Yal.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  XIII.  p.  172. 
1839. 
Syx.     Ctenolabrus  cceruleus  DeKay,  1842. 

Pleuronectes  maculatus  Mitchill,  Rep.  Fishes  of  N.  Y.  p.  9.    1814. 

Platessa  oblonga  DeKay,  Fishes  of  X.  York,  p.  299.    1842. 

Platessa  plana  Stoker,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  140.     1839. 

Achirus  mollis  Cdvier,  Regno  An.  II.  p.  343.     1829. 

Scomber  vemalis  Mitchill,  Trans.  Lit.  Phil.  Sop.  X.  Y.  I.  p.  423.     1815. 

Peprilus  triacanthus  Storer,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  GO.     1839. 

Temnodon  Saltator  Cuvier,  Regne  An.  II.  p.  207.    1829. 

Atherina  notata  Mitchill,  Trans.  Lit.  Phil.  Soc.  X.  Y.  I.  p.  446.     1815. 

Ammodytes  americanus  DeKat,  Fishes  of  X.  York,  p.  317.    1842. 

Phycis  americanus  Storer,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  138.     1839. 
Phycis  filamentosus  Storer,  Mem.  Am.  Acad.  VI.  p.  367.     1859. 
Merluccius  albidllS  DeKat,  Fishes  of  X.  York,  p.  280.     1842. 
MerlangUS  purpureus  Storer,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  130.     1839. 
Morrhua  americana,  Storer,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  120.     1839. 
Gadus  JEglefinus  Linxsus,  Syst.  Nat.  (10  ed.)  I.  p.  251.     1758. 
Clupea  elongata  LeSueur,  Journ.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  I.  p.  234.     1818. 
Alausa  Menhaden  Storer,  Rep.  Fishes  of  Mass.  p.  117.     1839. 

Osmerus  viridescens  LeSueur,  Journ.  Philad.  Acad.  Xat.   Sci.  I.  p.  230. 

1818. 
Mallotus  villosus  Cdvier,  Regne  An.  II.  p.  306.     1829. 

Fundulus  pisculentus  Cut.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poi-s.  (4°  ed.)  XVIII.  p.  143. 
1846. 

Fundulus  heteroclitus  Cuvier,  Regne  An.  II.  p.  280.    1829. 

Syx.     Cobilis  lieleroclita  Lixn.etjs,   1766;    Fundulus  cccnicnhis  Cuv.  & 
Val.  1S4G. 

Fundulus  spilotus  IIolbrook,  (MS.?)     1854. 

Syx.     Fundulus  guttatus  Agassiz,  MS.  1854  (female). 

Hydrargyra  majalis  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Xat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  XVIII.  p.  155. 
1846. 

Syx.     Hydrargyra  flavula  Storer,  1839. 

ITydrargyra  similis  Baird  &  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  VL 
p.  389.     1853. 


14  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Zygonectes  chrysotus  Agassiz,  MS.    1861. 

Syx.     Fundulus  chrysotus  Agassiz;  IIolhkook,  1853  (MS.?). 

Cyprinodon  variegatus  LaCepede,  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  V.  p.  487.    1803. 
Pcecilia  latipiuua  Agassiz,  MS.    1858. 

Syx.    Moltinesia  latipinna  LkSueur,  (male)  ;   Patilia  mulldineata  Le- 
Sceur,  (female,)  Journ.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sei.  II.  pp.  3,  4,  1821. 
Gambusia  Holbrookii  Girard,  Proe.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  NI.  p.  61. 

1859. 

Sv.v.     Hfterandvia  Hoibrookii  Agassiz,  185.3. 

Girardinus  formosus  OmArm,  Proc.  Philad.  Ac-ad.  Nat.  Sci.  XI.  p.  62.    1859. 
Syx.     IFeteraiidria  formosa  Agassiz,  1853. 

Tlu-se   last  three   species  are   viviparous.     G.  formosus  is  the  smallest 
known  Vertebrate. 


From  the  Pacific  Coast  of  North  America. 

Triads  semifasciata  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  VII.  p.  196.  '.854. 
Syx.     Muslelus  Fdis  Avkks,  1854. 

Triads  Eenlei  Putnam. 

Syx.     TsQjitofjiodon  sp.   Gii.l,   1862;    lildnotriacis  Ilenlei  Gn.i-.  Ti-oc. 
Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  XIV.  p.  486,  1862. 

The  characters  given  by  Mr.  <iill  to  the  genus  IUdnofriacis  are.  in  our 
estimation,  only  of  specific  value.  Mr.  Gill's  specimen  being  immature 
probably  accounts  for  the  apparent  difference  "between  the  teeth  of  this 
species  and  those  of  '/'.  aemifasciata,  for  in  our  numerous  examinations  we 
have  found  teeth  on  both  jaws  having  two  distinct  notches  on  each  side  of 
the  central  point,  although  these  fivc-lobcd  teeth  are  more  numerous  in  the 
lower  than  in  the  upper  jaw.  T.  Ho.nlei  differs  principally  from  '/'.  semi- 
fimciata  in  its  longer,  flattened,  and  pointed  snout;  in  its  scales  not  being 
so  strongly  tri-lobed,  and  in  the  color,  which  is  of  a  uniform  brownish  gray 
e,  becoming  lighter  below.  In  young  individuals  the  color  is  redder 
above  and  white  below.  In  all  specimens  the  two  dorsals  and  the  caudal 
are  tipped  with  black.  T.  Henlei  is  more  slender  than  T.  semifasciata,  hut 
ittaiirs  about  the  same  length. 

Acanthias  Suckleyi  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sri.  VII.  p.  196.   1854. 

Porichthys  notatus  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  VII.  p.  141.    iw"4 

Leptocottus  armatus  Girard,   Proc.  Philad.  Arm!.  Nat  Sci.  VII.  p.  131. 

1*54. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  15 

Scorposniehthys  marmoratus  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  VII. 

p.  131.     1854. 

Ambloplites  interruptus  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  VII.  p.  129. 
1854. 

Genyonemus  lineatus  Gill,  Proc  Philad.  Acad.  Nat  Sci.  XIII.  p.  87.    18G1. 
Syx.     Leiostomus  lineatus  Ayres,  1855. 

Embiotoca  Jacksoni  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2«)  XVI.  p.  387.    1853. 
Syx.     Ilolconotus  fuliginosus  Gibboxs,  1854  ;    Embiotoca  Cassidyi  Gi- 
rard,  1854  ;  Embiotoca  Weill  Girard,  1855. 

Hypsurus  Caryi  A.  Agassiz,  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  VIII.  p.  133.    1861. 
Syx.     Embiotoca  Caryi  Agassiz,  1853  ;  Ilolconotus  Gibbonsii  Cal.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  1854. 

Taeniotoca  lateralis  A.  Agassiz,  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  VIII.  p.  133, 
1861. 

Syx.  Embiotoca  lateralis  Agassiz,  1854;  Ilolconotus  A gassizi  Gibbons, 
1854  ;  Embiotoca  lineata  Girard,  1854  ;  Embiotoca  ornata  Girard,  1855; 
Embiotoca  perspicabilis  Girard,  1855;  Damalichthys  lateralis  Gill,  18G2. 

This  species  is,  without  doubt,  congeneric  with  Ditrema  of  the  "  Fauna 
Japonica." 

Damalichthys  Vaeca  Girard,  Proc.  Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  VII.  p.  321. 
1855. 

Cymatogaster  aggregatus  Gibbons,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  May  18, 
IS  54. 

Syx.  Micrometrus  aggregatus  Gibbons,  1854  ;  Holconotus  rliocloterus 
Girard,  1854  (not  of  Agassiz)  ;  Metrogaster  Uneolatus  Agassiz,  MS. 

Micrometrus  minimus  Gibbons,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.    May  30,  1854. 
Syn.      Cymatogaster  minimus   Gibbons,   1854  ;    Ilolconotus    Troicbritlgii 
Girard,  1854  ;  Abeona  Troicbridgii  Girard,  1855  ;  Abcona  viinima  Gill, 
1862. 

Bhacoehilus  toxotes  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  367.  1854. 
Syn.     Pachylabrus  variegatus  Gibbons,  1854. 

Amphistichus  argenteus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  367. 
1854. 

Syn.  Mytihphagus  fasciatus  Gibbons,  1854  ;  Amphistichus  similis  Gi- 
rard, 1S54. 

Holconotus  rhodoterus  Agassiz,  Am.  Journ.  Sci.  Arts,  (2e)  XVII.  p.  368. 
1854  (not  of  Giiiard). 

Syx.  Cymatogaster  LarHnsii  Gibboxs,  1854  ;  ?  Cymatogaster  ellipticus 
Gibboxs,  1854;  Amphistichus  Hermanni  Girard,  1854;  Ennichlhys  Her- 
manni  Girard,  1855. 


16  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Hyperprosopou  argenteum  Gibbons,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.    May  18, 

is;>4 

Syx.  Holconotus  megalops  Girard,  1854  ;  Ennichthys  megalops  Girard, 
1855;  Bramopsis  Mento  Agassi/..  IMS. 

Hyperprosopon  arcuatum  Gibbons,  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.  Nat  Sci.    May  30, 

1S34. 

Syx.  Hypt  rprosopon  argenteum  var.  punctalum  Gibbons,  1854  ;  Ilyper- 
prosopon  Agassizi  Gill,  1862. 

For  a  full  revision  of  the  Synonymy  of  the  Ilolconoti,  see  No  ten  on  the 
Described  Species  of  Ilolconoti  found  on  the  Western  Coast  of  North  Amer- 
ica, by  A.  Agassiz,  in  the  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  Vol.  VIII. 
p.  122.     1861. 

Platichthys  rugosus  Girard,  Proc.Philad.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  VII.  p.  139.  1854. 
We  send  both  natural  and  reversed  specimens  of  this  species. 


From  the  East  Indies. 

Pegasus  natans  Linn.f.us,  Syst.  Nat.  (12  ed.)  I.  p.  418.    17G6. 
Scatophagus  Argus  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  VII.  p.  103.    1831. 


From  Europe. 

Trachinus  Vipera  Cuv.  &  Val.  Hist.  Nat.  Poiss.  (4°  ed.)  III.  p.  189.     1829. 
Agonus  cataphractus  Blocii,  Syst.  Ichth.  ed.  Sciiv.  p.  104.    1 801. 
Tinea  vulgaris  Ccvier,  Regne  An.  II.  p.  193.    1817. 
Gobio  fiuviatilis  Agassiz,  Mem.  Soc  Neuch.  I.  p.  3G.     1S34. 
Leuciscus  rodens  Agassiz,  Mem.  Soc.  Ncuch.  I.  p.  39.     1834. 
Leueiscus  prasinus  Agassiz,  Mem.  Soc.  Neuch.  I.  p.  46.     1834. 

Publ'ished,  April  28,  1863. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  17 

No.  2.  —  List  of  the  Ecldnoderms  sent  to  different  Institutions  in 
Exchange  for  other  Sjjecimens,  with  Annotations.  By  A. 
Agassiz.* 

Phyllacanthus  Br.  Prod,  (emend.).  —  Leiocidari s  Desor,  Synop. 

Phyllacanthus  imperialis  Br. 

Under  the  name  of  Cidaris  imperialis  two  very  distinct  species  have 
been  confounded,  one  of  which  (Ph.  fustigerus  A.  Ac)  is  found  in  New  Hol- 
land and  the  East  India  Islands,  while  the  other  species  (Ph.  imperialis),  of 
which  a  good  figure  is  given  by  Seba,  is  found  at  Zanzibar  and  Mozambique. 

Cidaris  Klein,  Disp.  Nat.  Echin.  (emend.). 
This  genus  is  here  limited  in  such  a  way  as  to  include  only  the  following 
and  allied  species  :  — 
Cidaris  Thouarsii  Val.  Ag.  Cat.  Bais. — Panama. 
Cidaris  tribuloides  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Bed  Sea. 
Cidaris  annulata  Gray.  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.     1855. — Florida. 
Cidaris  baeulosa  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert,  (non  Mich.).  —  Bed  Sea. 

A  good  figure  of  this  species  is  given  by  Savigny,  Descrip.  Egypt.  Zool., 
PI.  7,  fig.  1,  which  is  very  different  from  the  figure  given  by  Michelin,  Mag. 
Zool.,  IV.,  PL  8.  The  last  is  a  Prionocidaris,  and  probably  the  C.  pistil- 
laris  Lamk. 

Gymnocidaris  A.  Ag. 

Gymnocidaris  metularia  A.  Ag. 

Syx.     Cidaris  metularia  Lamk.  An.  s.  Yert.  —  Zanzibar. 

Gymnocidaris  minor  A.  Ag. 

This  species,  which  is  found  at  the  Sandwich  and  Kingsmills  Islands, 
differs  from  the  G.  metularia  in  the  proportions  of  the  ovarian  and  ocular 
plates.  The  genital  plates  are  much  smaller  than  in  the  C.  metularia,  in 
which  they  cover  nearly  the  whole  of  the  abactinal  system. 

Orthocidaris  Ag. 
Orthocidaris  hystrix  Ao. 

Syn.     Cidaris  I/ystrix  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Nice. 

Orthocidaris  affinis  Ag. 

Syn.  Cidaris  affinis  Phil.  Wieg.  Archiv.,  1845  ;  Cidaris  Stokesi  Ag. 
Cat.  Rais.  —  Mediterranean. 

To  this  genus  belongs  also  Cidaris  papillata  Flf.m. 

*  Descriptions  of  the  new  genera  based  upon  species  already  known  may  be 
found  in  the  "Illustrated  Catalogue  of  the  Museum."  — L.  Agassiz. 
3 


BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Teranocidaris  A.  Ac. 
Unlike  the  other  genera  allied  to  Cidaris,  the  abactinal  system  of  this 
genus  is  deeply  notched  in  the  angles  of  the  interambulacral  plates. 

Temnocidaris  canaliculata  A.  Ao. 

The  spines  of  this  species  resemble  those  of  Orthocidaris  Jiystrix;  they  are 
very  short,  hardly  equal  in  length  to  the  diameter  of  the  test.  Coronal 
plates  high,  tubercles  with  a  large  scrobicular  circle  sunk  below  the  level 
of  the  miliaries.  —  Caroline  Islands. 

Prionocidaris  A.  Ag. 

Prionocidaris  pistillaris  A.  Ao. 

Syx.     Cidaris  pistillaris  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Zanzibar. 

Stephanocidaris  A.  Ac 

Stephanocidaris  tubaria  A.  Ag. 

Syx.     Cidaris  tubaria  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert. — New  Holland. 

Cbondrocidaris  A.  Ag. 
The  whole  test,  with  the  exception  of  the  scrobicular  circle,  covered  with 
very   small,   closely-packed  granules,    supporting  minute   spines.      Spines 
resembling  those  of  the  genus  llhabdocidaris.     Median  ambulacral  area 

convex. 

Cbondrocidaris  gigantea  A.  Ao. 

The  scrobicular  circle  is  small,  not  occupying  more  than  half  the  length 
of  the  plate.  Plates  of  actinal  system  covered  with  long,  narrow  spines. 
Median  ambulacral  space  containing  eight  rows  of  small  tubercles,  of  uni- 
form size.  The  primary  spines  are  large,  with  a  tendency  of  the  angles 
of  the  grooves  to  run  into  thin,  sharp  lamella;,  and  spread,  fan-shaped,  at 
the  extremity.  —  Sandwich  Islands. 

Gonioeidaris  Ao.  Cut.  Rais. 
Goniocidaris  geranioides  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Ilobart  Town. 

Astropyga  Gray,  Ann.  Phil.     1828. 
Astropyga  radiata  Cray,  Ann.  Phil.  1828. —  Zanzibar. 
Syx.     Astropyga  MossambicaFET.  Seeig.  v.  Moss. 

Garelia  Gray,  Proc.  ZoiH.  S.  Lond.  1855.  —  Savitjnya  Des.  Syn. 

Garelia  subularis  A.  Ag. 

Syx.     Astropyga  subularis  Ag.  Cat.  Pais.;  EchinotJirix  subularis  Pet. 
Seeig.  v.  Mossambique  ;  Savignya  subularis  Des.  —  Red  Sea. 
Garelia  cincta  A.  Ag. 

Interambulacral  space  with  six  vertical  rows  of  large  tubercles,  four  ver- 
tical rows  of  small  tubercles  in  ambulacral  space,  which  increases  regularly 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  19 

in  width  towards  the  abactinal  region,  where  it  is  slightly  petaloid.  Porif- 
erous zone  broad.  Spines  of  intcrambulacra  equalling  in  length  two  thirds 
of  the  diameter  of  the  test ;  polar  diameter  depressed.  This  species  may 
be  the  Echinolhrix  turcarum  of  Peters,  which  is  undoubtedly  a  Garelia,  and 
not  an  Echinothrix.  —  Kingsmills  and  Sandwich  Islands. 

Echinothrix  Pet.  Seeig.  v.  Moss,  (emend.).  —  Savignya  Des.  Svn. 

This  genus  has  been  restricted  in  such  a  manner,  that  the  species,  such 
as  Diadema  suhulare  Ac,  D.  turcarum  Rumph.,  placed  by  Peters  in  this 
genus,  have  been  removed  to  the  genus  Garelia  of  Gray,  containing  species 
which  can  at  once  be  distinguished  from  Echinothrix  by  their  short  and 
longitudinally  striated  spines,  while  the  genus  Echinothrix,  as  limited  here, 
contains  species  having  broad  ambulacra,  and  spines  resembling  those  of 
Diadema. 

Echinothrix  artnellata  Pet.  Seeig.  v.  Moss.  —Zanzibar. 

Echinothrix  aperta  A.  Ag. 

Eight  rows  of  large  tubercles  in  interambulacral  space ;  bare  space  of 
interambulacrum  extending  below  the  equatorial  line  of  test.  Anal  mem- 
brane very  large ;  genital  and  ocular  plates  small ;  anal  plates  very  small, 
disconnected.  The  spines  vary  much  in  color ;  in  some  specimens  they 
are  yellowish,  in  others  perfectly  black,  in  others  whitish  mixed  with  black. 
—  Society  Islands. 

Echinothrix  scutata  A.  Ag. 

Ambulacra  more  pointed  towards  the  abactinal  region  than  in  the  preced- 
ing species.  Spines  shorter  and  more  slender  in  proportion  to  the  test.  Can 
at  once  be  distinguished  by  the  large  size  of  the  genital  and  ocular  plates, 
and  the  coating  of  prominent  plates  over  the  greater  part  of  the  anal  mem- 
brane, which  is  quite  small.  One  row  of  small  tubercles  extending  along 
the  poriferous  zone  in  interambulacral  space.  —  Sandwich  Islands. 

Diadema  Gray,  Ann.  Phil.     1828. 
Diadema  antillarum  Piul.  Wieg.  Archiv.     1845.  —  Florida. 

Syx.      Cidaris  diadema   Lamk.  An.  s.   Vert,   (non  Diadema  turcarum 

PiUMFH.). 

Diadema  Savignyii  Mich.  Gue'r.  Mag.  Zool.  1845;   Ag.  Cat.  Pais.  1847.— 
Zanzibar. 

Diadema  paucispinum  A.  Ag. 

Outline,  when  seen  from  above,  pentagonal ;  ambulacra  very  prominent, 
large  openings  for  suckers,  poriferous  zone  narrow  near  actinostome.  Cuts 
of  actinal  system  deep.  Interambulacral  tubercles  arranged  in  six  rows, 
four  large  and  two  small  median  rows  ;  high  coronal  plates,  which  gives  this 
species  the  appearance  of  being  but  sparingly  covered  with  spines;  spines 
stout,  equalling  in  length  diameter  of  test.  —  Sandwich  Islands. 


20  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Diadema  mexicanum  A.  Ag. 

Abactinal  system  much  smaller  in  proportion  to  actinal  than  in  any  other 
species  of  the  genus.  Spines  exceedingly  long,  equalling  in  length  twice 
the  diameter  of  test,  moderately  stout.  Outline  of  spherosome  perfectly 
circular,  regularly  arched  in  profile.  Cuts  of  actinal  system  slight.  The 
large  tubercles  extend  almost  to  abactinal  system.  —  Acapulco. 

Diadema  globulosum  A.  Ag. 

This  is  a  small  species,  perfectly  globular,  with  only  four  rows  of  large  tu- 
bercles in  interambulaerum ;  abactinal  system  depressed.  Remarkable  for 
the  great  length  and  extreme  slenderness  of  the  spines ;  they  are  at  least 
three  times  the  diameter  of  test;  actinal  portion  of  test  very  convex. — 
Kingsmills  and  Society  Islands. 

Echinocidaris  Desml.  Etud.  Echin.  (emend.).  —  Agaritcs  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. 

Eehinocidaris  punctulata  Dbsml.  Etud.  Echin. 

Syn.  Echinocidaris  (Agarites)  punctulata  Ac  Cat.  Eais.  —  Charleston, 
South  Carolina. 

Echinocidaris  Davisii  Ao. 

Differs  from  the  South  Carolina  species  in  having  a  greater  number  of 
tubercles  closely  packed  together.  Spines  quite  short,  granulation  round 
the  primary  tubercles  very  prominent.  Color  of  test  and  spines  dark  vio- 
let, almost  black.  Tubercles  very  crowded  in  ambulacral  space.  —  Naushon, 
Massachusetts,  south  of  Cape  Cod. 

Echinocidaris  incisa  A.  Ag. 

Abactinal  system  very  prominent,  sutures  between  the  plates  well  marked ; 
tubercles  large,  spines  short,  stout,  color  yellowish-brown.  —  Guayamas, 
Panama. 

Arbacia  Grat  (non  Ac).  —  I'drapjgus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. 

A.rbacia  nigra  Geay. 

Syn.     Echinocidaris  (Tetrapygus)  nigra  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. —  Mejillones. 

Arbacia  asquituberculata  Gray. 

Syx.    Echinocidaris  (Tetrapygus)  aquituherculalu  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Fayal. 

Echinostrephus  A.  Ag. 
Small  sea-urchins  with  tubercles  resembling  those  of  Holopneustes  in 
their  arrangement,  witli  narrow  poriferous  zones,  pores  arranged  in  arcs. 
Abactinal  system  raised  above  level  of  abactinal  part  of  test.  Large  geni- 
tal plates  occupying  nearly  the  whole  of  this  system.  Actinal  system  large, 
circular,  no  indentations.  Spines  long,  slender,  longitudinally  striated. 
Test  convex  near  actinal  portion,  flattened  above,  the  greatest  diameter 
being  nearer  the  abactinal  pole.  Auricles  of  medium  size,  with  a  large 
opening  and  no  connecting  ridge.     Teeth  provided  with  transverse  arc. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  21 

Echinostrephus  aeiculatus  A.  Ao. 

Tubercles  of  ambulacral  and  interambulacral  space  of  the  same  size. 
Spines  long,  equalling  diameter  of  test.  Anal  system  small,  pores  arranged 
in  arcs  of  four  pairs.  —  Kingsmills  and  Sandwich  Islands. 

Heterocentrotus  Br.  Prod,  (emend.) 

Heterocentrotus  mammillatus  Br.  Prod. 

Syn.  Heterocentrotus  carinatus  Br.  Prod. ;  H.  Postellsii  Br.  ;  Acrocla- 
dia mammillata  Ac.  Cat.  Kais. ;  A.  hastifera  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. —  Sandwich 
Islands. 

Acrocladia  Ao.  (emend.) 

Acroeladia  trigonaria  Ao.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Kingsmills  Islands. 

Acrocladia  cuspidata  A.  Ao. 

Syn.     Acrocladia  trigonaria  Mich.  Faune  de  Maurice  (non  Ag.) 

Circular  outline  of  test,  uniform  size  of  tubercles,  distinctness  of  ocular 
and  genital  plates,  distinguish  this  species.  Spines  triangular,  rather  short, 
tapering  rapidly.  —  Mauritius. 

Podophora  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  (emend.). 
Podophora  atrata  Ao.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Mauritius. 

Podophora  Quoyi  A.  Ag. 

Syn.     Echinometra  Quoyi  Bl.  non  P.  Quoyi  Ag.  —  Sandwich  Islands. 
Colobocentrotus  Leskei  Br.  belongs  to  a  different  genus.     Podophora  has, 
therefore,  been  retained  for  the  preceding  species,  although  Brandt  included 
the  P.  atrata  in  his  genus  Colobocentrotus.    (See  Cat.  Echin.  N.  P.  Ex.  Ex.) 

Echinometra  Bretn. 
Echinometra  Miehelini  Des.,  Ag.  Cat.  Pais. — Florida. 

It  is  with  some  doubt  that  the  common  Echinometra  of  Florida  is  referred 
to  this  species. 

Echinometra  Oblonga  Bl.  Diet.  Sc.  Nat.  —  Sandwich  Islands. 
Echinometra  acufera  Bl.  Diet.  Sc.  Nat.  —  Zanzibar. 
Echinometra  lucunter  Lamk. 

Echinometra  Mathcei  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  p.  p.  (non  Bl.)  —  Sandwich,  Society, 
and  Kingsmills  Islands. 

Echinometra  VanBrunti  A.  Ag. 

Remarkable  for  its  flatness,  the  height  of  its  tubercles,  and  the  narrowness 
of  the  poriferous  zone.  Spines  long  and  slender,  of  uniform  size,  color  dark 
violet.  —  Acapulco. 

Echinometra  rupieola  A.  Ag. 

Closely  allied  to  E.  VanBrunti ;  differs  from  it  by  the  smaller  number 
of  tubercles,  the  great  difference  in  size  between  the  ambulacral  and  inter- 


22  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

ambulaeral  tubercles,  large  ocular  and  genital  plates,  smaller  spines,  and 
broad  poriferous  zone.  —  Panama. 

Eehinometra  microtuberculata  A.  Ao. 

Can  easily  be  distinguished  from  E.  lucunter,  to  which  it  is  closely  allied, 
by  the  great  height  of  the  polar  diameter,  the  large  number  and  uniform 
size  of  the  small  tubercles,  the  arched  test,  and  short,  stout  spines.  Color 
light  green.  —  Sandwich  and  Kingsmills  Islands. 

Eehinometra  viridis  A.  Ao. 

The  genital  plates  are  greatly  developed,  smooth,  occupying  nearly  the 
whole  of  the  abactinal  area.  Tubercles  very  prominent.  Spines  short, 
stout.     Color  generally  light  green.  —  Florida. 

Eehinometra  plana  A.  Ao. 

Flat  species  with  a  circular  outline ;  abactinal  region  less  covered  with 
spines  than  rest  of  test.  Spines  long,  sharp,  equalling  in  length  the  diam- 
eter of  test.     Tubercles  distant,  not  numerous.  —  Hayti. 

Parasalenia  A.  Ao. 
Resembles  Salenia  in  having  the  abactinal  system  raised.     There  are 
only  four  anal  plates,  as  in  Echinocidaris,  otherwise  resembles  Eehinometra. 
The  genital  and  ocular  plates  are  smooth.    Fores  in  pairs,  forming  an  irreg- 
ular vertical  line. 

Parasalenia  gratiosa  A.  Ag. 

Outline  elliptical.  Tubercles  arranged  in  two  vertical  rows  in  ambula- 
eral and  interambulacral  spaces.  Spines  moderately  long,  tapering  grad- 
ually. Tubercles  of  ambulacra  closely  crowded ;  miliaries  small,  not  nu- 
merous. —  Kingsmills  and  Society  Islands. 

Helioeidaris  Desml.  (emend). 
Heliocidaris  variolaris  Desml.  Etud.  Echin.  —  Zanzibar. 

Toxocidaris  A.  Ao. 
Toxccidaris  Delalandi  A.  Ao. 

Syn".     Heliocidaris  Delalandi  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Port  Jackson. 

Toxocidaris  mexieana  A.  Ao. 

Syn.     Heliocidaris  mexieana  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Acapulco. 

Toxocidaris  franciscana  A.  Ao. 

This  species  grows  to  a  very  large  size.  High  coronal  plates,  large  open- 
ings for  suckers.  Pores  arranged  in  arcs  of  nine  pairs.  Two  very  promi- 
nent rows  of  large  tubercles  in  interambulacral  space.  The  large  tuber- 
cles of  ambulacra  of  same  size  as  secondary  of  interambulaera.  Spines  long, 
tapering  gradually,  equalling  in  length  two  thirds  the  diameter  of  test.  — 
San  Francisco. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  23 

Toxopneustes  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  (emend.). 

Toxopneustes  drobachiensis  Ao.  Cat.  Rais. 

Syn.    E.  drobachiensis  Mull.  Zool.  Dan.  ;  E.  chlorocentrotus  Br.  Prod. ; 

E.  yranularis  Say,  Journ.  Phil.  Ac.  v.  182;  E.  granulatus  Gould,  Invert. 

Mass. ;  E.  neglectus  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Massachusetts  Bay,  Grand  Me- 

nan,  Buget  Sound. 
Toxopneustes  lividus  Ao.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Fayal. 

Loxechinus  Des.  Synops.  Echin.  Foss. 

Loxeehinus  albus  Des.  Synops. 

Syn.     E.  albus  Mol.  ;  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Mejillones. 

Loxechinus  purpuratus  A.  Ac. 

Syx.     E.  purpuralus   Stimps.    Crust.  Echin.  Pacif.   Sh.  N.  A. —  San 
Francisco. 

Psamm.ech.inus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  (emend.). 

Psammechinus  miliaris  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. — Norway. 
Psammechinus  microtuberculatus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. —  Mediterranean. 

Psammechinus  chloroticus  A.  Ag. 

Syx.     Heliocidaris  chloroticus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. ;   Psammechinus  asleroidcs 
Giu.  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  —  New  Zealand. 

Echinus  L.  (Des.  emend.) 

Echinus  esculentus  L. 

Syx.     Echinus  sphcera  Mull.  Zool.  Dan.  — Norway. 

Echinus  melo  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Nice. 

Echinus  Flemingii  Ball,  Forb.  Brit.  Starfishes.  —  Great  Britain. 

Spheerechinus  Des.  Synops.  Echin.  Foss. 

Sphserechinus  brevispinosus  Des.  Synops. 

Syx.     Echinus  brevispinosus  Risso,  Hist.  Nat.  Eur.  Mer.  —  Nice. 

Sphaerechinus  granularis  A.  Ag. 

Syx.     Echinus  granularis  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Fayal. 

Temnopleurus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. 

Temnopleurus  toreumaticus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  East  India. 

Temnopleui'us  Reevesii  A.  Ac. 

Syx.    Toreumalica  Reevesii  Gkay,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1855.  —  Hong-Kong. 

Toreumatica  Gray. 
Toreumatica  COncava  Gray,  Rroc.  Zool.  Soc.   1855.  — Hong-Kong. 

Salmacis  Ag.  Cat-Rais. 
Salmacis  bicolor  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. —  Zanzibar. 


24  BULLETIN   OF    THE 

Melobosis  Gir.  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.     1850. 

Melobosis  rarispinus  A.  Ag. 

Syn.     Salmacis  rarispinus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. —  East  India. 

Lytecllinus  Ag.  —  Psa.7)imechinus  Ao.  p.  p. 

Lytechinus  carolinus  Ag. 

Syn.  Echinus  variegatus  Rav.  (non  Lamic),  Cat.  Echin.  So.  Car. — ■ 
South  Carolina,  Georgia,  and  Florida. 

Lytechinus  variegatus  A.  Ao. 

Syn.  Echinus  variegatus  Lamk.  (non  Rav.)  ;  Psammechinus  variegatus 
Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Cienfuegos,  Ilayti. 

Lytechinus  atlanticus  A.  Ag. 

Readily  distinguished  from  the  South  Carolina  species  by  the  large  num- 
ber of  tubercles  in  each  vertical  row,  and  from  the  L.  variegatus  by  the 
smaller  size  of  its  spines.  —  Bermudas. 

Boletia  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. — IJemiecItinus  Gir.  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  N.  H.  1850. 

Boletia  granulata  A.  Ag. 

Remarkable  for  its  comparatively  long  spines.  Tubercles  uniform  in 
size,  very  closely  crowded  together. —  Sandwich  Islands. 

Boletia  rosea  A.  Ag. 

Spines  exceedingly  short  and  stout ;  the  exterior  row  of  tubercles  in  am- 
bulacral  and  interambulacral  space  of  greater  size.  —  Acapulco. 

Tripneustes  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  (emend.) 
Tripneustes  ventricosus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Florida. 

Syn.  Heliechinus  Gouldii  Gir.  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  1850. 
The  genus  is  here  limited  to  species  in  which  the  median  ambulacral  and 
interambulacral  space  is  covered  with  tubercles.  There  is  in  the  collection 
of  the  Smithsonian  a  species  from  Guayamas,  T.  depressus  A.  Ac,  closely 
allied  to  T.  ventricosus,  which  differs  from  it  in  the  flatness  of  the  test,  the 
large  and  uniform  size  of  the  tubercles,  and  the  stoutness  of  its  spines. 

Hipponoe  Gray,  1841  ;    Proc.  Zool.  Soc.  1855. 
Hipponoe  sardica  Gray,  Proc.  Zool.  Soc.    1855. 

Syn.     Tripneustes  sardicus  Ao.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Zanzibar. 

Hipponoe  violacea  A.  Ag. 

Tubercles  small,  numerous,  of  uniform  size  ;  abaetinal  portion  of  test  reg- 
ularly arched.  Spines  short,  slender;  color  of  test  dark  violet.  —  Sand- 
wich and  Kingsmills  Islands. 

Hipponoe  nigricans  A.  An. 

Row  of  large  tubercles   in   interambulacral   space  near  the  oral  area 
other  tubercles  small.      Ambulacral  zone  broad  near  abaetinal  region,  with 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  25 

double  concave  outline  near  the  middle  of  test.    Color  of  test  black  ;  spines 
of  same  color  mixed  with  spines  of  straw-color.  —  Society  Islands. 

Echinoneus  Van-  Phel. 
Echinoneus  elegans  Des.  Monog.  des  Galerites.  —  Hayti. 

Echinocyamus  Van  Phel. 
Echinocyamus  angulosus  Lkske,  Addiment.  ad  Klein.  Ech.  —  Norway. 

Fibularia  Lamk. 
Fibularia  volva  Ao.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Red  Sea. 

Clypeaster  Lamk.  (emend.).  —  Echinanthus  Gray  (non  Des.). 
Clypeaster  rosaceus  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Florida. 

Stolonoelypus  Ac. 

Stolonoclypus  placunarius  Ag. 

Syx.     Clypeaster  placunarius  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Red  Sea. 

Stolonoclypus  prostratus  Ag. 

Syx.     Clypeaster  prostratus  Rav.  Cat.  Echin.  So.  Car.  —  Florida. 

Stolonoclypus  rotundus  A.  Ag. 

Closely  allied  to  S.  prostratus,  from  which  it  differs  by  its  almost  circular 
outline,  its  thin  edge,  the  great  size  of  the  ambulacral  rosette,  and  width 
of  the  ambulacral  system.  —  Acapulco. 

Rhaphidoclypus  A.  Ag. 

Rhaphidoclypus  scutiformis  A.  Ag. 

Syx.     Clypeaster  scutiformis  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Red  Sea. 

Rhaphidoclypus  microtuberculatus  A.  Ao. 

Differs  from  R.  scutiformis  by  its  elongated  ambulacral  rosette,  and  the- 
great  number  and  small  size  of  the  closely  crowded  tubercles.  —  Kingsmills 
Islands. 

Rumphia  Des.  Synop.  Echin.  Foss.  —  Polyaster  Mien.  Guer.  Rev.  de 
Zool.  1859.  —  Michelinia  Dcj.  et  Hupe,  Ech.'n. 

Rumphia  Lesueuri  A.  Ac 

Syx.  Laganum  Lesueuri  Ac.  Cat.  Rais.;  Polyaster  elegans  Mien.  Guer. 
Rev.  de  Zool. ;  Michelinia  elegans  Duj.  et  Hupe. 

This  species  is  mentioned  by  Professor  Agassiz  as  coming  from  Guade 
loupe  ;  this  is  probably  a  mistake.  There  are  no  specimens  of  his  L.  Lp 
sueuri  in  the  Museum,  and  the  present  species  is  identified  with  the  figures 
in  his  Monog.  des  Seutelles.  It  is  undoubtedly  the  Polyaster  elegans  of 
Miehelin.  —  Hong-Kong. 
4 


26  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Laganum  Kl.  Nat.  Disp.  Echin. 
Tjaganum  depressum  Less.,  Ao.  Cat.  Rais. 

Syx.      Laganum  attenuatum  Ac;    Laganum  pentagonum   Ag.  MS. — 
Kingsmills  Islands. 

Eehinarachnius  Van  Fuels. 

Echinarachnius  parma  Gray,  An.  Phil.    1825. 

Syx.     Echinarachnius  atlanticus  Gray  ;  Ac  Cat.  Rais.  —  New  England, 
Grand  Menan. 

Dendraster  Ao.  Cat.  Rais. 
Dendraster  exceiltricus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  San  Francisco. 

Echinodiscus  Breyn.  (Gray,  non  Desor),  Brit.  Mus.  Cat.  (emend.).* 

EchinodlSCUS  biforus  Gray,  Cat.  Brit.  Mus. 

Syx.     Lobophora  bifora  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Madagascar. 

Lobophora  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  (emend.). 
Lobophora  biflssa  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. — Zanzibar. 

Eehinoglycus  Van  Puels.  (Gray),  Brit.  Mus.  Cat.  (emend.). 
Eehinoglycus  Stokesi  Gr\y,  Cat.  Brit.  Mus. 
Syx.     Lobophora  Stokesi  Ag.  —  Panama. 

Encope  Ao.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Eehinoglycus  Git.  p.  p. 

Encope  Valenciennesii  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Cumana. 
Encope  grandis  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Gulf  of  California. 
Encope  Michelini  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Tampa  Bay,  Florida. 

Rotula  Kl.  Nat.  Disp.  Echiu. 
Rotula  Rumphii  Kl.  Nat.  Disp.  Echin.  —  Cape  Palmar. 
Rotula  Augustii  Kl.  Nat.  Disp.  Echin.  —  Cape  Palmas. 

Mellita  Kl. 
Mellita  testudinata  Kl.  Nat.  Disp.  Echin.  —  South  Carolina,  Florida,  Texas. 
Mellita  quinquefora  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Cumana. 
Mellita  hexapora  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  "West  Indies,  Florida. 
Mellita  longiflssa  Mich.  Rev.  Mag.  Zool.     1858.  —  Panama. 

*  In  order  not  to  introduce  additional  names,  the  old  genera  Echinodiscus  and 
Eehinoglycus,  as  adopted  by  Gray,  have  been  circumscribed  so  as  to  include  the  spe- 
cies which  are  here  separated  from  Lobophora  and  Encope  of  Agassiz,  as  representa- 
tives of  new  genera. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  27 

Pygorhynchus  Ac 
Pygorhynchus  pacificus  Ac. 

This  species  is  a  living  representative  of  the  genus  Pygorliynclius,  thus  far 
only  known  as  fossil.  It  resembles  in  outline  Echinolampas.  The  vent  is 
transverse,  supra-marginal.  The  lower  side  is  almost  flat,  the  edges  of  the 
test  being  slightly  raised.  The  very  broad,  smooth  band,  shaped  like  a 
dagger,  extending  entirely  round  the  mouth  and  reaching  the  anterior  and 
posterior  edge  of  the  test,  and  the  rosette  of  large  pores  round  the  mouth, 
are  characters  of  the  genus  which  are  not  easily  seen  in  fossil  specimens.  As 
specific,  whole  upper  surface  covered  with  short  silk-like  spines.  Tubercles 
of  lower  side  large,  sunken,  increasing  in  size  as  they  approach  the  smooth 
band.  Spines  long,  sharp,  very  slightly  arched,  comparatively  much  stouter 
than  on  upper  part  of  test.  —  Acapulco. 

Spatangus  Kl. 
Spatangus  purpureus  Mull.  Zool.  Dan. —  North  Europe. 
Spatangus  meridionalis  Risso,  Hist.  Nat.  Eur.  Me'rid.  —  Mediterranean. 

Maretia  Gray,  Cat.  Brit.  Mus. 

Maretia  planulata  Gray,  Cat.  Brit.  Mus. 

Syx.  Spakmc/us  plamdalus  Lamk.  An.  s.  Vert.  ;  Trichoproctus  tenm 
AG.  MS.  —  Kingsmills  Islands. 

Lovenia  Ac  Cat.  Rais. 
Lovenia  hystl'ix  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  Zanzibar. 

Eehinocardium  Gray,  Cat.  Brit.  Mus.  (emend.).  —  Amphidetus  Ao. 
Cat.  Rais.  p.  p. 
Eehinocardium  cordatum  Gray,  Cat.  Brit.  Mns. 

Syx.     Amphidetus  cordatus  Ag.  Cat.  Rais.  —  North  Europe. 

Amphidetus  Ac  (emend.) 
Amphidetus  ovatus  Ac  Cat.  Rais.  —  North  Europe. 

Bl'issus  Kleix  (Ac  Cat.  Rais.). 
Brissus  carinatus  Lamk.  (non  Ac),  An.  s.  Vert.  —  Sandwich  Islands. 
Brissus  COlumbaris  Ac  Cat.  Rais.— Florida. 

Kleinia  Gray,  Ann.  &  Mag.     1851. 
Kleinia  nigra  A.  Ac 

Test  rather  depressed,  ambulacral  rosette  narrow,  long;  peripetalo^  r 
fasciole  extending  almost  to  the  circumference  ;  spines  rather  short,  sha  ;  , 
stout,  black.  —  Acapulco. 

It  is  with  some  doubt  that  this  species  is  referred  to  the  genus  Kleimi  : 
should  it  prove  a  different  genus,  I  would  suggest  the  name  Rhyssobris- r.«r 
for  it. 


28  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Xanthobrissus  A.  Ao. 
This  genus  is  closely  allied  to  Meoma  of  Gray  ;  differs  from  it  by  the  po- 
sition of  the  vertex,  which  is  near  the  anterior  extremity.  Lateral  ambu- 
lacra of  equal  size,  anterior  ambulacrum  in  a  deep  groove.  Subanal  fasciole 
heart-shaped,  with  lateral  branches  extending  to  the  side  of  the  anal 
system. 

Xanthobrissus  Garretti  A.  Ao. 

Syn.     Brissopsis  Garretti  Ag.  MS. 

Anal  system  large,  pointed  at  both  extremities.  Posterior  ambulacra 
arched  exteriorly ;  few  large  tubercles  near  the  apex  of  rosette  on  both 
sides  of  anterior  ambulacra.  Tubercles  numerous,  small.  Spines  very 
slender,  quite  long.  —  Kingsmills  Islands. 

Brissopsis  Ao.  Cat.  Rais. 
Brissopsis  lyrifera  Ac.  Cat.  Rais.  —  North  Europe. 

Agassizia  Val.,  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. 
Agassizia  scrobiculata  Val,  Ag.  Cat.  Rais. — Panama. 

Moera  Mien.  Rev.  et  Mag.  de  Zool.  1855. —  Schizaster  Ag.  p.  p. 

Moera  atropos  Mich.  Rev.  et  Mag.  de  Zool. 

Syn.  Schizaster  atropos  Ac.  Cat.  Rais.  ;  Schizaster  lachesis  GiR.  Proc. 
Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  1850.  —  Charleston,  S.  C,  and  Texas. 

Published  August  15,  18G3. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  29 

No.  3.  —  List  of  the  Polyps  and  Corals  sent  by  the  Museum  of 
Comparative  Zoology  to  other  Institutions  in  Exchange,  with 
Annotations.     By  A.  E.  Verrill. 

ALCYONARIA. 
Renilla  reniformis  Cuvier,  RegneAn.  2d  ed.  III.  p.  .319,  1830  (non  IIer- 

KLOTZ). 

Syx.  Pennatula  reniformis  Pallas,  Elench.  Zooph.  17GG  ;  Renilla 
americana  Lamarck,  1816  ;  Renilla  reniformis  Agassiz,  Proc.  Amer. 
Assoc.  1850. —  Charleston,  South  Carolina;  L.  Agassiz. 

Renilla  Danes  Verrill,  MS.    1861. 

Sy.v.  Renilla  americana  (pars)  DANA,  Zooph.  PL  57,  f.  1  ;  Renilla  reni- 
formis Herklotz. 

This  differs  widely  from  R.  reniformis  in  its  broad,  rounded  form,  it  being 
wider  than  long,  while  the  preceding  is  longer  than  broad ;  in  its  much 
deeper  sinus  and  overlapping  posterior  lobes  ;  in  its  costate  and  granulous 
under  surface,  which  in  the  other  is  nearly  smooth  with  lighter  radiating 
lines;  in  its  more  crowded  and  smaller  polyps;  and  in  having  much  more 
prominent  spicula  on  the  upper  surface  around  the  cells.  Its  color,  also,  is 
darker  purple.  —  Rio  Janeiro  ;  J.  D.  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Renilla  peltata  Verrill. 

This  is  a  very  large  species,  readily  distinguished  by  its  very  broad,  thick 
frond,  nearly  straight  on  the  outer  margin,  shallow  sinus,  and  central  posi- 
tion of  the  peduncle.  The  cells  are  larger  than  in  any  other  known  spe- 
cies, and  armed  with  five  prominent  spicula.  Color  of  alcoholic  specimens, 
light  purple.  —  Breton  Island,  near  the  mouth  of  the  Mississippi  River; 
C.  T.  Pierce. 

Renilla  patula  Verrill. 

Very  large  and  thin,  with  a  broadly  reniform  frond,  regularly  rounded 
at  the  outer  margin  ;  sinus  very  deep,  dividing  the  frond  beyond  the  middle, 
with  the  posterior  lobes  considerably  overlapping.  Cells  rather  small,  with 
five  slightly  prominent  lobes.  Polyps  very  long  when  expanded.  Lower 
surface  slightly  scabrous,  marked  with  scarcely  raised  radiating  lines.  Pe- 
duncle attached  close  to  the  margin  of  the  sinus.  —  Cumana,  Ven.,  South 
America ;  J.  P.  Couthouy. 

Renilla  amethystina  Verrill. 

Broad  reniform,  wider  than  long  ;  sinus  narrow  ;  peduncle  inserted  near 
its  edge.  Under  surface  rough,  with  numerous  large  spicula.  Cells  small 
and  crowded.  Color  deep  purple  ;  spicula  amethystine.  —  Panama  ; 
T.  Rowell. 


SO  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Stylatula  Verriix. 
Elongated,  slender,  nearly  cylindrical;  near  the  base  naked,  bulbous  at 
the  end.     Pinna;  short,  supported  by  numerous  strong  radiating  spines,  the 
polyps  clustered  on  their  upper  surface.     Axis  sub-cylindrical,  extending 
through  nearly  t-lu;  wU.»Uj  length. 
Stylatula  gracilis  Verriix. 

Very  slender,  nearly  cylindrical  above  ;  base  swollen.  Pinna;  at  first  very 
narrow,  leaving  a  linear  naked  space  between  the  two  rows  on  both  sides; 
higher  up  they  overlap  and  are  much  crowded,  thirty-two  in  an  inch. 
Length,  a  foot  or  more;  diameter,  .12  inch.  Cape  St.  Lucas,  California ; 
J.  Xantus. 
Stylatula  elongata  Verriix. 

Svx.  Virgrdaria  elongata  W.  M.  Gai5I5,  Proc.  California  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  II.  107,  18G3. 

Larger  and  stouter  than  the  preceding.  Pinna?  broader  and  more  over- 
lapping, leaving  a  naked  space  between  the  rows  for  only  a  short  distance  : 
in  the  middle,  twenty  occupy  an  inch.  The  spines  are  also  larger  and 
fewer. —  San  Francisco,  California;  A.  Agassiz. 

Fuuiculina  Foi'besii  Verriix. 

Syx.     Paconaria  quadrangularis  (pars*)  Johnson. 

A  careful  examination  of  several  perfect  specimens  of  this  species,  col- 
lected on  the  coast  of  Scotland  by  Mr.  Stimpson,  proves  it  to  be  distinct 
from  that  of  the  Mediterranean,  first  figured  and  described  by  Bohadsch, 
and  afterwards  named  Pennatula  quadrangularis  by  Pallas. 

It  is  much  more  slender  than  the  latter,  with  far  less  numerous  and 
crowded  polyps ;  these  are  arranged  in  oblique  series  of  two  or  three,  in- 
stead of  five;  the  miter  ones  are  the  largest,  those  occupying  the  central 
region  being  rudimentary  and  papillitbrm,  but  all  are  disproportionately 
smaller  than  those  of  F.  quadrangularis.  —  Near  Oban,  Scotland;  Win, 
Stimpson. 

Pteroides  Putnami  Verriix. 

Small  and  delicate  ;  the  pinnate  portion  broad  oval  in  outline.  Peduncle 
a  little  more  than  half  the  whole  length,  smooth,  slender-pointed.  Pinnae 
rather  broad,  with  a  wide  base,  supported  by  five  or  six  clusters  of  strong 
spines,  radiating  from  the  base,  eight  or  ten  spines  in  each  group.  These 
give  a  strongly-lobed  appearance  to  the  edges  of  the  pinnae.  —  Hong  Kong, 
China;  ('apt.  \V.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Ptcrogorgia  setosa  Eiirexberq,  Coral],  roth.  Meer.     1S34. 

Svx.     Gorgonia  setosa  (pars)  Linn.     Pterogorgia  setosa  Dana,  Zooph. 
This   species   and   the   following  have  been   more  or  less  confounded  by 
nearly  all  authors,  but  when   large  series  are  examined   they  appear  quite 
distinct.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies;   L.  Azassiz. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  31 

Pterogorgia  acerosa  Ehr.    1834. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  acerosa  (pars)  Pallas,  Elench.  Zooph.  p.  172,  1766.; 
Gorgonia  setosa  Espkr,  Gorg.  Tab.  1 7,  fig.  1  -3 ;  Pterogorgia  acerosa  Dana, 
Zooph.  p.  649;  Pterogorgia  pinnata  M.  Kow.  Coral  1.  I.  p.  1(>8. 

The  Gorgonia  pinnata  of  Linnaeus  seems  to  apply  more  particularly  to 
a  European  species,  entirely  distinct  from  this.  —  Florida,  West  Indies,  and 
Bermuda;  L.  Agassiz,  I).  F.  WVmland. 

Pterogorgia  americana  Ehr.     1834. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  americana  Gmklin  ;  Pterogorgia  turgida  (?)  Em:.  Corall. 
roth.  Meer.  p.  l  10,  1S3J  ;  Pterogorgia  pinnata  Dana,  Zooph.;  Pterogorgia 
Ellisiana  M.  Edw.  Corall.  p.  169. 

The  Gorgonia  americana  of  Gmelin  was  based  upon  tlie  figure  of  Ellis 
and  Solander  (l'l.  14,  fig.  3),  which  is  a  good  representation  of  the  species 
when  preserved  in  alcohol  with  the  polyps  expanded.  The  polyps  are 
much  larger  than  in  the  two  preceding  species,  and  are  arranged  somewhat 
irregularly,  in  two  or  three  rows  on  each  side  of  the  large  and  nearly  cy- 
lindrical branchlets  — Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 

Pterogorgia  bipinnata  Verrill. 

Coral  broad,  flabelliform,  branching  in  a  plane.  The  primary  branches 
arising  nearly  opposite  on  the  sides  of  the  principal  stalk,  and  about  one 
fourth  of  an  inch  apart,  spread  at  a  large  angle;  the  principal  ones  are 
again  pinnate,  with  their  branchlets  similarly  arranged,  and  about  one  and 
a  half  inches  long.  Branchlets  slender,  strongly  compressed,  a  few  of  them 
sometimes  coalescing,  forming  rectangular  openings.  Cells  very  small,  in 
two  alternating  series  on  the  edges  of  the  branches.  Color  violet  or  bright 
yellow. —  Cumana,  Ven.,  South  America;  J.  P.  Couthouy. 

Leptogorgia  virgulata  M.  Edw.  Coralliaires.     1857. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  virgulata  Lamk.  1816;  Gorgonia  Olivierii  Lamx.  Polyp. 
Fiex.  1817;  Plexaura  virgulata  Val.  ;  Plexaura  viminea  Val.  1855. — 
Charleston,  (South  Carolina  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  ; 
A.  S.  Bickmore. 

Leptogorgia  purpurea  M.  Edw.    1857. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  purpurea  Pal.,  17G6;  Lrpfooorgia  purpurea  M.  Edw., 
Corall.  p.  1G4  ;    Leptogorgia  purpuracea  M.  Edw.  1.  c.  p.  164. 

This  species  is  very  distinct  from  the  preceding  in  its  longer,  slender, 
rounded  branches,  arising  in  a  fasciculate  manner,  nearly  in  a  plane.  Color 
purple,  red.  or  orange.  —  Florida  ;   G.  Wurdemann. 

Leptogorgia  sauguinolenta  Verrill. 

Syx.     Gorgonia  sanguinolenta  Pal.,  Elench.  Zooph.  17C0. 
Low,  densely  branching,  somewhat  in  a  plane.   Several  principal  branches, 
arising  near  the  base,  give  off  from  each  side  in  a  pinnate  manner,  numer- 


32  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

ous,  crowded,  obtuse  branehlets,  many  of  which  again  divide  in  a  similar 
way,  and  oven  their  subdivisions  arc  sometimes  pinnate.  Color  variable, 
often  yellow  or  whitish  with  purple  cells;  axis  yellowish,  subtransparent, 
compressed.  —  Ilavti,  W.  I.  ;  P.  F.  Weinland. 

Leptogorgia  rigida  Verrill. 

Arborescent,  rather  tall,  branching  numerously  and  irregularly,  some- 
what in  a  plane.  Principal  branches  long,  irregular,  often  crooked,  sub- 
pinnate,  giving  off  lateral  branches  at  irregular  intervals  of  similar 
character.  Very  variable  in  form  and  color;  often  deep  bluish  purple, 
less  frequently  orange,  ferruginous,  or  while;  axis  black,  amber  colored 
near  the  ends.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico;  A.  Agassiz,  P.  B.  Vanbrunt.  —  Cape 
St.  Lucas,  California;  J.  Xantus.  —  Panama;  J.  II.  Sternberg. 

L-eptogorgia  ampla  Verrill. 

Very  large  flabelliform.     Several  large,  nearly  equal  branches,  springing 

close  to  the  base,  curve  outward  at  first  and  then  ascend  nearly  parallel, 
giving  off,  usually  at  intervals  of  two  or  three  inches,  long  and  rather  thick 
branches  ami  branehlets  of  nearly  uniform  size,  which  at  first  spread 
nearly  at  right  angles  and  then  rise  abruptly,  parallel  to  the  main 
branches.  The  largest  specimen  is  '20  inches  high;  1G  broad.  Color 
bright  lemon-yellow.  —  Margarita  Pay,  Lower  California  (?)  ;  A.  Garret. 
Possibly  from  the  Bonin  Islands. 

Rhipidogorgia  flabellum  Valenciennes,  Ooniptes-renrhis,  XLI.  p.  13. 1855. 
Svx.     Gorgonia  flabellum  Lixx. —  Florida,  West  Indies,  and  Bermuda; 
L.  Agassiz,  A.  S.  Bickmore. 

Rhipidogorgia  stenobrachis  Val.    1855. 

Svx.  Gorgonia  stenobrachis  Val.  Voyage  de  la  Venus,  PI.  12,  fig.  1; 
Rhipidogorgia  Eugelmanni  IIoi:x,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  18G0, 
j).   233. 

I  have  satisfied  myself,  by  an  examination  of  the  original  specimen  of 
Horn,  that  the  species  last  quoted  was  founded  on  a  small  and  bad  specimen 
of  /,'.  stenobrachis.  \n  the  Museum  there  are  large  numbers  of  specimens, 
both  dry  and  in  alcohol,  from  different  localities  on  the  Pacific  coast 
showing  a  complete  series  between  the  extreme  forms,  which,  indeed, 
seem  to  depend  more  on  age  than  any  other  cause.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico; 
1).  1'..  Vanbrunt,   A.  Agassiz. —  Panama;    A.  Agassiz,  J.  II.  Sternberg. 

Rhipidogorgia  Agassizii  Verrill. 

Fronds  broader  than  high,  very  finely  and  evenly  reticulated,  the  open- 
ings nearly  square  or  pentagonal,  about  .12  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  The 
very  short  thick  base  divides  at  once  into  numerous  small  ami  nearly 
equal  branches,  which  subdivide  so  evenly  and  rapidly  that  the  principal 
branches  cannol  usu  ill)  be  traced  more  than  half  across  the  frond.  Terminal 
branehlets   free    for  about   one   fourth  of  an   inch.     Cells   small,  crowded, 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  66 

a    little    raised.       Color    purple,    light    red,    or    yellowish.  —  Acapulco  ; 
A-  Agassiz,  D.  B.  Vanbrunt.  —  Panama;  J.  II.  Sternberg. 

I  have  named  this  fine  species  in  honor  of  its  discoverer,  Mr.  A.  Agassiz, 
who  has  greatly  contributed  to  our  knowledge  of  the  Marine  Fauna}  of  the 
Pacific  eoast  of  North  America. 

Khipidogorgia  media  Verrill. 

Fronds  Low,  broader  than  high,  intermediate  between  the  two  preceding 
speeies  in  the  size  of  its  reticulations;  these  are  usually  square  or  pen- 
tagonal, quite  irregular,  generally  about  one  quarter  of  an  inch  wide  and 
nearly  the  same  in  height.  Several  large  branches  usually  radiate  from  the 
base  across  the  frond.  Cells  numerous  on  the  sides,  a  little  prominent. 
Color  red  with  yellow  cells,  or  uniform  red  or  purple.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico  ; 
A.  Agassiz,  D.  B.  Vanbrunt. 

Xiphigorgia  anceps  M.  Edw.  Coralliahcs.    1857. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  anceps  Pal.  Pterogorgia  anceps  Eiir.,  1834  ;  Ptero- 
gorgia Guadalupensis  Ducn.  et  Mich.,  1850.  —  Florida  and  West  Indie?: 
L.  Agassiz,  G.  Wurdemann. 

Xiphigorgia  citrina  Verrill. 

Syx.  ?  Gorgonia  cilrtna  Esp.  17P0;  Gorgonia  anceps  (pars)  Esp. 
Planz.  t.  II.  p.  38,  tab.  VII.  1788;  Gorgonia  (Pterogorgia)  citrina  Dana, 
Zooph.  1840  ;  Pterogorgia  fasciolaris  Eiir.,  Corall.  roth.Meer.  p.  145,  183-4  ; 
f  Pterogorgia  Sancti-Thonue  Eiir.  1.  c.  p.  145. 

This  speeies  is  unquestionably  P.  citrina  Dana,  but  if,  as  is  possible,  the 
Gorgonia  citrina  of  Esper  should  prove  to  be  a  distinct  species,  the  name 
X.  fasciolaris  (Eur.)  will  be  next  in  order. 

It  is  a  smaller  and  more  branching  species  than  X.  anceps,  forming  low, 
broad  corals,  branching  somewhat  in  a  plane,  with  much  compressed  slen- 
der branehlets,  three  or  four  inches  long ;  these  are  rarely  triangular,  — 
a  form  very  frequent  in  X.  anceps.  Color  violet,  or  bright  yellow  with 
purple  cells.  —  Florida  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  St.  Thomas ;  Dr.  Otis. 

Gorgonia  verrucosa  Pallas. —Nice;  J.  Burkhardt. 

Gorgonia  rarnulus  Val.—  Panama;  A.  Agassiz,  J.  H.  Sternberg.  —  Acapulco ; 
D.  Pj.  Vanbrunt. 

Gorgonia  aurantiaca  Verrill. 

Syn\  Lophogorgia  aurantiaca  IIorx,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
18G0,  p.  2:13. 

This  is  a  very  branching  speeies,  with  short  irregular  branehlets,  ver- 
ruciform, bilobed  cells,  and  a  distinct  median  groove.     Color  brick-red,  or 
yellowish.     Axis  somewhat  compressed.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico  ;   A.  Agassiz. 
Lophogorgia  palma  M.  Edw. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  palma  Pal.  1766  ;  Gorgonia  flammea  Ellis  and  Sol. 
1786.  —  Cape  of  Good  Hope. 


34  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Plexaura  homomalla  Lamouroux,  Polyp.  Flex.    1816. 

Svn.  Goryonia  homomalla  Esper.  —  Florida  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Bermuda; 
A.  S.  Biekmore. 

The  cells  of  this  species  sometimes  liave  the  borders  prominent. 

Plexaura  flexuosa  Lamx.  Polyp.  Flex.    181G. 

Svn.     Eutiicea  furcaia   Ehr.  1834;   Gorgonia  anguicidus  Daxa,  1846  ■ 
?  Plexaura  rjiipiilalis  Val.  1855  ;   Plexaura  salicornoides  M.  Edw.  1857. 
This  species  varies  greatly  in  form  and  color,  as  well  as  in  the  degree  ol 

prominence  of  the  cells,  which  depends  upon  the  state  of  contraction  of 
the  polyps  when  dried.  The  color  is  most  commonly  either  dull  wine-red, 
or  grayish  yellow.  ■ —  Florida  and  West  Indies  ;  L.  Agassiz. 

Plexaura  crassa  Lamx.  Polyp.  Flex.    1816. 

Svn.  Gorgonia  crassa  Ellis  and  Sol.  p.  01,  pi.  IS,  fig.  3,  1780  (non 
JZunicea  crassa  M.  Edw.,  nee  Gorgonia  crassa  Dana);  Gorgonia  porosa 
Esp.  l'lanz.  tab.  X.  (form  with  large  cells)  ;  Gorgonia  antipathes  (pars') 
Esp.  tab.  XXIII.  (1789)  ;  Gorgonia  vermiculata  Lamk.  1816;  Plexaura 
macroegthara  Lamx.',  1.  c.  p.  429,  1816;  Plexaura  friabilis  (pars)  Lamx., 
1.  c.  p.  430;  do.  Exp.  Methodique,  p.  35,  pi.  18,  fig.  3,  1821;  Plexaura 
antipathes  Eiik.,  1834  (non  Gorgonia  antipathes  Lixx.)  ;  Gorgonia  vermicu- 
lata Dana,  1840  ;  Plexaura  arbusculum  Duch.,  An.  rad.  des  Antilles  (1850). 

There  is  no  American  species  known  to  us.  except,  the  present,  to  which 
the  description  of  Ellis  can  apply,  while  it  agrees  perfectly  with  this.  The 
character  of  having  a  very  black  axis,  wry  small  at  the  extremities, 
is  especially  characteristic,  and,  also,  of  having  "long  fleshy  branches  that 
bend  a  little  out,  and  then  grow  upright,"  and,  in  addition,  tin-  "  violet 
flesh,"  and  "  scattered  arrangement,  of  the  cells"  can  leave  no  question  of 
its  identity.  The  figure  quoted  above,  of  which  Ellis  gave  no  explanation, 
agrees  perfectly  with  his  description  and  with  alcoholic  specimens  in  the  Mu- 
seum.—  Florida;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Bermuda;  A.  S.  Liekniore. 

Plexaura  diehotoma  Dana,  Zob'ph.    1846. 

Svn.  Gorgonia  diehotoma  Esp.,  l'lanz.  Gorg.  tab.  XIV.  (1788);  Gor- 
gonia  mullicauda  (pars)  Lamk.  Hist.  An.  s.  Vert.  L81G  :  Gorgonia  heteropora 
Lamk.,  1.  c.  1816;  Plexaura  heteropora  Lamx.  Polyp.  Flex.  (1810); 
"litt  (Plexaura)  diehotoma  (pars)  Dana,  Zooph.  1846  :  Gorgonia  crassa 
Dana.  Zooph.  1846  :  Gorgonia  brevis  (young)  DuCHASSAlNG,  An.  rad.  des 
Ant.  p.  20  (1850);   Eunicea  mullicauda  M.  Low.  Corall.  1857;  f  PI 

lis  M.  Low.  I.e.  I.  p.  150,  1857.  —  Florida;    L.  Agassiz. —  St.  Thomas; 
Dr.  Otis. 

This  species  varies  greatly  in  appearance  according  to  the  mode  of  pres- 
ervation and  the  state  of  contraction  of  the  cells,  and  for  this  reason  much 
confusion  has  arisen  in  regard  to  its  synonymy.  In  the  Museum  there  is  a 
specimen  labelled  Gorgonia  diehotoma  by  Dana,  with  the  exterior  in  great 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  35 

part  removed,  which  is  almost  a  fac-simile  of  the  specimen  figured  by  Esper. 
Other  specimens  agree  with  the  descriptions  by  Lamarck  and  Milne  Edwards. 
The  axis  in  the  present  species  is  always  gray  or  fuscous,  looking  more  like 
wood  than  horn,  differing  greatly,  in  this  respect  and  several  others,  from 
G.  crassa  Ellis. 

The  character  of  having  cells  fiat  or  slightly  prominent  is  entirely  in- 
sufficient to  separate  Plcxaura  and  Eunicea,  since  all  the  species  of  Plex- 
aura have,  in  certain  states  of  preservation,  cells  with  raised  borders,  and 
there  are  often  to  be  seen  on  the  same  specimen  flat  cells  and  others 
which  are  quite  prominent.  For  this  reason  the  genera  RJiinogorgia  and 
Gonidora,  proposed  by  Gray,  are  not  admissible  (Ann.  and  Mag.  1859,p.  442). 

Plexaura  turgida  Verriix. 

Syn.  Eunicea  turgida  Eiir.  1834  ;  ?  Eunicea  crassa  M.  Emv.  Coral- 
liaires  I.  p.  148,  1857  (non  Gorgonia  crassa  Ellis  and  Sol.). 

This  is  one  of  the  largest  known  species,  growing  to  the  height  of  two  or 
three  feet,  with  the  branches  one  half  an  inch  or  more  in  diameter. 

In  the  structure  of  the  polyps  I  have  been  unable  to  detect  any  difference 
between  this  species  and  P.  dichotoma,  the  type  of  Plexaura  Lamx.,  or  P. 
homomalla  and  P.  Jlexuosa,  uniformly  referred  to  this  genus  by  authors.  — 
Florida  Reefs  ;  L.  Agassiz. 

Plexaura  flavida  Val.    1855. 

Syn.     Gorgonia  flavida  Lamk.     1816. 

The  color  of  this  species  is  often  dark  violet,  with  the  surface  merely 
tinged  with  yellow.  —  Ilayti ;   D.  F.  Weinland. 

Plexaura  fucosa  Val.    1855. 

Syn.  Gorgonia  fucosa  Val.  Voyage  de  la  Venus.  —  San  Francisco, 
California  ;  T.  G.  Cary. 

Plexaura  sufirutieosa  M.  Edw.    1857. 

Syn.  Gorgonia  suffruticosa  Dana,  Zooph.  1846.  —  Feejee  Islands  ; 
J.  D.  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Eunicea  limiformis  Lamx.  Polyp.  Flex.    1816. 

Syn.  Eunicea  quincuncialis  Eiir.  1834  ;  Gorgonia  quincuncialis  Dana, 
1846.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies  ;  L.  Agassiz. 

Eunicea  calyculata  Lamx.    1816. 

Syn.     Gorgonia  calicidata  Ellis  and  Sol.,  p.  95,  pi.  18,  fig.  2,  1786; 
Eunicea  clavaria  Lamx.  1821.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 
Eunicea  laxispica  M.  Edw.    1857. 

Syn.     Gorgonia  laxispica  Lamk.  ;  Eunicea  rnammosa  Laaix.  ;    Gorgonia 
papulosa  Dana.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 
Eunicea  plantaginea  Val.    1855. 

Syn.     Gorgonia  plantaginea  Lamk.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 


36  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Eunicca  ramulosa  Ehr.    1834. 

Sv\.     Gorgonia  spicifera  Dana,  184G. —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 

Eunicea  Tourneforti  M.  Edw.   1857.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies;  G.  Wurde- 

niami. 

r 
Eunicca  Rousseaui  M.  Edw.     1857.  —  Turk's  Island,  W.  I. ;  J.  E.  Webber. 

Muricea  spicifera  Lamx.    1821. 

Syn.  Gorgonia  muricala  (pars)  Pallas.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies; 
L.  Agassiz. 

Muricea  lima  M.  Edw.    1857. 

Syn.     Gorgonia  lima  Lamk.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 

Muricea  elongata  Lamx.     1 821.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies;  L.  Agassiz. 

Muricea  laxa  Veuuill. 

Very  slender,  with  long  flexuous  branches.  .  This  is  closely  allied  to  M 
elongata,  but  has  longer  and  very  acute  verruca?,  which  are  much  more 
loosely  arranged  and  armed  with  very  long,  sharp  spicula.  Axis  nearly 
terete,  somewhat  compressed  at  the  axils.  Color  light  yellow.  —  Florida; 
L.  Agassiz. 

Muricea  elegans  Ag.  MS. 

A  large  erect  species,  irregularly  pinnate  and  bipinnate,  branching 
marly  in  a  plane.  Trunk  stout  and  nearly  erect,  transversely  com- 
pressed ;  branches  very  numerous,  curved,  often  pendulous.  Verrucas 
broad,  conical,  spreading,  armed  with  large  spicula.  Color  orange.  — 
Oft'  Charleston,  South  Carolina;  L.  Agassiz. 

Muricea  echinata  Val.  Comptes-rendus.     1855.     (No  description.) 

Syn.  Muricea  echinata  M.  Edw.  Coralliaircs,  185  7. —  Panama;  C.  F. 
Da.vis,  J.  II.  Sternberg. 

Muricea  robusta  Verrill. 

This  is  a  low ,  stout  species,  branching  very  irregularly  in  a  subdichoto 
mous  manner,  with  thick,  clavate,  crooked  branches.  Cells  crowded,  large, 
open,  little  prominent,  especially  towards  the  base,  where  they  open  out- 
wan!.  Spicula  numerous,  short  and  thick.  Color  brownish  yellow  or 
purple.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico  ;  A.  Agassiz. 

Muricea  hebes  Verrill. 

The  specimens  of  this  species,  which  are  probably  young,  have  erect, 
simple,  or  sparingly  diehotomous  stalks,  three  or  four  inches  high,  slender  at 
the  base,  but  thick  and  clavate  above.  The,  verruca1  are  crowded,  broad, 
and  prominent,  armed  with  numerous  rather  sharp  spicula.  Color  deep 
reddish  purple,  or  dark  brown.  It  resembles  Gonigoria  clavata  Gray, 
which  should  be  referred  to  the  genus  Muricea,  but  the  latter  is  stouter, 
with  shorter  and  more  crowded  cells.  The  axis  is  also  described  as  black, 
while  in  the  present  species  it  is  i'uscous.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico;  A.  Agassiz. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  6t 

Murieea  appi'essa  Verrill. 

Corallum  broad,  flabelliform,  very  brandling,  even  to  the  base.  The 
trunk  divides  at  about  half  an  inch  from  the  base  into  two,  three,  or  more 
principal  branches,  which  rapidly  diverge  and  subdivide  in  an  irregular- 
ly dichotonious  or  subpinnate  manner.  Branchlets  .-lender,  cylindrical  or 
slightly  clavate,  with  obtuse  tips,  one  or  two  inches  long  and  one  eighth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter.  Cells  small,  thickly  crowded  on  all  sides  of  the  branches, 
rounded,  closely  appressed,  the  summits  curved  inward;  exterior  densely 
covered  by  small  oblong  spicula.  Color,  in  alcohol,  dark  umber-brown.  — 
Panama;  J.  II.  Sternberg. 

Prirnnoa  reseda  Verrill. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  reseda  Pallas,  Elench.  Zooph.  17GG  ;  Gorgonia  lepadi- 
fera  Lixx.  Syst.  Nat.  ed.  XII.  17G7;  Ellis  and  Sol.  1786;  Prirnnoa  lepa- 
difera  Lamx.  Polyp.  Flex.-  1816.  — St.  George's  Bank;  C.  II.  Fifield. 

Callogorgia  verticillaris  Gray. 

Syn.     Prirnnoa  verticillaris  Eiir.  1834.  —  Fayal,  Azores;  Chas.  Dabney. 

Gorgonella  umbraculum  Verrill,  MS.     1862. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  umbraculum  Ellis  and  Sol.  178G;  RJiipidogorgia  um- 
braculum Val.  1855;   Umbracella  umbraculum  Gray.  —  East  Indies. 

Gorgonella  stricta  Verrill,  MS.     1862.  . 

Syx.  ?  Gorgonia  stricta  Lajik.  1816;  ? RJiipidogorgia  stricta  M.  Er>w. 
1857. 

This  species  agrees  in  all  its  external  characters  with  the  species  quoted, 
but  has  a  calcareous  axis.  —  Cape  of  Good  Hope. 

Juncella  juneea  Val.    1855. 

Svx.     Ellisella  juneea  Gray.  —  Indian  Ocean. 

Juncella  extans  Verrill. 

Tall  and  simple,  with  the  very  prominent  verruca?  curved  inward  and  ar- 
ranged crowdedly  in  a  band  on  each  side  of  the  axis,  leaving  a  wide  naked 
space  on  each  side.     Color  white.     Axis  grayish  white,  stony  and  rigid.  — 
Fayal,  Azores  ;  C.  Dabney. 
Isis  hippuriS  Linn.  — East  Indies. 

Parisis  Verrill. 
Corallum  irregularly  branching,  nearly  in  a  plane.  The  axis  consists  alter- 
nately of  calcareous  and  suberbus  segments,  of  uniform  thickness,  traversed 
by  numerous  narrow  sulcations.  The  branches  originate  from  the  calcareous 
segments.  Coenenchyma  persistent,  rather  thin,  somewhat  membranous,  w  itb 
a  rough  surface.  Cells  prominent,  arranged  irregularly  on  all  sides  of  the 
branchlets,  but  often  absent  on  the  median  surfaces  of  the  larger  branches. 

Parisis  fruticosa  Verrill. 

Large,  flabelliform ;  the  principal  branches  arising  irregularly  along  the 


:;S  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

sides  of  the  trunk,  divide  and  subdivide  rapidly  into  other  smaller  branches 
and  branchlets,  producing  a  densely  ramulous  frond.  The  branches  ascend 
ami  diverge  usually  at  an  angle  of  about  50  ;  the  branchlets  often  spread 
at  ri'dii  angles,  and  do  not  coalesce.  Papilla?  numerous,  crowded  on  the 
branchlets,  elongated,  conical.  Color  grayish  yellow;  axis  white;  inter- 
nodes  yellowish  brown.  —  Sooloo  Sea;  J.  D.  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Melitodes  oehracea  Verrill. 

Syx.  his  oehracea  Linx.  ;  MelUcea oehracea  Lamx.  1812.  —  Singapore, 
Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

The  name  Melitaia  having  been  used  for  a  genus  of  Insects  by  Fabricius 
in  1808,  lour  years  before  it  was  employed  by  Lamouroux,  we  have  adopted 
Melitodes  for  this  genus,  as  restricted  by  Gray.  (See  Proc.  Zobl.  Soc. 
Lond.  1859,  p.  185.) 

Melitodes  virgata  Verrill. 

Syx.     Melitaia  oehracea  (pars)  Dana  (from  Feejee  Islands). 

A  comparison  of  the  specimens  collected  by  the  U.  S.  Exploring  Expe- 
dition at  the  Feejee  Islands  with  several  hundred  specimens  of  all  forms 
and  sizes  from  Singapore,  in  the  collection  of  the  Museum,  proves  that 
they  are  unquestionably  distinct,  though  closely  resembling  one  another  in 
general  appearance. 

The  principal  branches  in  M.  virgala  rise  nearly  parallel,  and  are  much 
more  elongated,  tapering  and  subdividing  far  less  rapidly  than  in  M.  ochra- 
cea.  The  calcareous  segments  are  also  longer,  and  the  general  appearance 
of  the  coral  is  more  open.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Mopsella  elongata  Verrill. 

Syx.  Melitella  elongata  Gray.  Proc.  Zodl.  Soc.  Lond.  1850,  p.  485. — 
Singapore;  Capt.  W.  H.  A.  Putnam. 

Mopsella  dicliotoma  Gray,  Proc.  Zodl.  Soc.  Lond.  1857,  p.  284. 

Syx.  his  dicliotoma  Linx.;  Mopsea  dicliotoma  Lamx.  181 G.  —  Cape 
Town;  J.  1).  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

I  am  unable  to  find  any  generic  differences  between  this  species,  which  is 
the  type  of  Mopsella  Gray,  and  those  subsequently  referred  by  him  to 
Melitella,  and  have,  therefore,  united  the  two  genera. 

Mopsella  aurantia  Verrill. 

Syx.  T sis  aurantia  Esper,  1707;  Melitaia  red/era  Lamk.  1816;  M.  Ed- 
wards, L857  ;  .1/.  /  Gray,  Proc.  Zobl.  Soc  Lond.  1859,  p. 
486.  —  Australia;  A.  Garret. 

Mopsella  textiformis  Verrill. 

Svx.     .1/  'iformis    Lamk.;   Melitella  red/era  (pars)  Gray,  1.  c. 

1859.  —  Australia  ;  A.  Garret. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  39 

Mopseila  tenella  Verrill. 

Syx.  Mel'dcea  tenella  Daxa;  Melilella?  tenella  Gray.  —  Sandwich 
Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana,  IT.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Briareum  asbestinum  Agassiz,  MS. 

Syx.  Alcyonium  asbeslinum  Pallas,  17CG;  Gorgonia  briareus  Ellis 
and  Sol.  1786  ;  Briareum  gorgonideum  Blainville,  1830;  Lobulariq  ash  s- 
tina  Km:.  1834;  Lobularia  capilata  Duciiassaixg,  1850.  —  Florida;  L. 
Agassiz. —  Havti;  1).  F.  Weinland. 

Briareum  plexaureum  Blainv.    1S30. 

Syx.  Alcyonium  plexaureum  Lamx.  Expos.  Meth.  p.  C8,  pi.  76.  figs.  2, 
3,  4,  1821.  —  Florida  ;   L.  Agassiz. 

Titanideum  Agassiz,  MS. 
This  genus  is  closely  allied  to  Briareum,  but  has  a  more  distinct  axis, 
which  is  spongy  and  very  spiculose,  but  firm  and   less  porous  than  that  of 
the  latter.     The  cells  are  scattered  on  all  sides,  and  not  prominent. 

Titanideum  suberosum  Agassiz,  MS. 

Syx.  Gorgonia  suberosa  Ellis  and  Sol.  p.  93, 1786  ;  Ellis,  Corallines, 
Tab.  26,  figs.  P,  Q,  R;  Briareum  suberosum  Daxa,  Zooph.  p.  463,  1846. — 
Charleston,  South  Carolina  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  ; 
Wm.  Stimpson.—  Stono  Inlet;  Dr.  J.  W.  Page,  U.  S.  A. 

Alcyonium  digitatum  Linn. 

Coast  of  England ;  Free  Public  Museum  of  Liverpool. 

Alcyonium  carneum  Agassiz,  Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  1850. 
Coast  of  New  England  ;  L.  Agassiz. 

Sarcophytum  glaucum  Verrill. 

Syx.  Alcyonium  glaucum  Quoy' et  Gaimard  ;  Dana,  Zooph.  p.  623, 
pi.  58,  figs.  4  and  5.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Sarcophytum  latum  Verrill. 

Syx.  Alcyonium  latum  Daxa.  Zooph.  p.  623,  pi.  58,  figs.  6  and  7. — 
Tonga-Tabu ;  J.  D.  Dana,  U.  S.  Expl.  Exp. 

Ammothea  nitida  Verrill. 

Tins  species  grows  in  groups  consisting  of  several  smooth,  subeylindrical 
stalks  connected  together  at  the  base,  undivided  for  about  three  inches, 
when  they  suddenly  divide  and  subdivide  into  a  cluster  of  numerous 
slender  branchlets.  Cells  small,  prominent,  rather  loosely  scattered  along 
the  branchlets.  —  Zanzibar  ;  C.  Cooke. 

Spongodes  arborescens  Daxa. 

Syx.  Spoggodia  celosia,  cur.  arborescens  Daxa,  Zooph.  p.  G26,  pi.  59, 
fig.  4  (non  S.  celosia  Lesson).  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana.  U.  S. 
Expl.  Exp. 


40  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Spougodes  capitata  Verkill. 

Large  and  very  ramulous;  the  thick  naked  trunk  subdividing  in  a  dicho- 
i-  manner  from  near  the  base  into  short,  capitate,  terminal  branches, 
having  a  dense  cluster  of  Aery  short  branchlets  at  the  ends  on  which  the 
cells  are  closely  crowded.  Spicula  while,  not  very  conspicuous,  the  large 
ones  not  very  numerous.  Color  in  alcohol  yellowish  gray.  —  Hong  Kong, 
China;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Spougodes  gigantea  Verriix. 

Crows  in  a  manner  similar  to  the  preceding,  but  stouter  and  more  ar- 
borescent, with  larger  and  less  crowded  polyps  and  very  large,  conspicuous, 
white  spicula.  Color  in  alcohol  dark  brownish  red.  —  Hong  Kong,  China; 
Wm.  Stimpson,  N.  Pacif.  Expl.  Exp. 

Telesto  fruticulosa  Dana. 

Charleston,  South  Carolina;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Stono  Inlet;  Dr.  J.  W.  Page. 

Ccelogorgia  palmosa  M.  Edw.     1857. 

Syx.     Lobularia palmosa  Val.  MS. —  Zanzibar;  C.  Cooke. 

Tubipora  purpurea  Pallas.  —  Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Tubipora  musica  Linn.  —  East  Indies;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 


ZOANTHARIA. 
Madrepora  cervicornis  Lamarck.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies ;  L.  Agassiz. 
Madrepora  robusta  Dana.  —  Fcejee  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 
Madrepora  gravida  Dana.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  uobilis  Dana. 

Syx.     Madrepora  secunda  Dana.  —  Singapore  :  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
A  careful  comparison  of  the  types  of  Dana  with  the  extensive  series  of 
specimens  in  the  Museum  shows  conclusively  that  Madrepora  nobilis  and 
M.  secunda  are  but  variable  forms  of  one  species. 
Madrepora  arbuscula  Dana.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
Madrepora  prolifera  Lamarck.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies;  L.  Agassiz. 

Madrepora  acuminata  "Verriix. 

A  large  species  allied  to  ^f.  nobilis,  but  having  much  longer,  regularly 
tapering,  often  curved  branches,  which  are  an  inch  in  diameter,  evenly 
rounded  and  thickly  covered  by  spreading,  nearly  uniform,  cylindrical, 
dimidiate  corallites.*  Surface  of  corallum  between  the  cells  and  exterior 
of  the  corallites  covered  with  minute  spines,  the  latter  subcostate.     Septa 

*  We  use  the  word  corallite  as  the  English  equivalent  of  po1ypi€rite  employed  by 
Milne-Edwards,  as  his  ]>or;j/iicr  corresponds  to  corallum  of  Dana. 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  41 

rudimentary,  only  the  two  largest  usually  distinct.  A  few  rudimentary 
corallites,  often  opening  downward,  are  scattered  among  the  others. — 
Kingsmills  Islands;   A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  diffusa  Vekkill. 

Corallum  low  arborescent,  much  branched;  branchlets  widely  spreading 
or  divaricate,  curved,  gradually  tapering  to  the  acute  extremities,  about  a 
third  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  two  or  three  long.  Corallites  broad  tubo- 
nariform,  short,  scarcely  compressed,  widely  open,  the  exterior  closely 
striate,  the  costre  consisting  of  numerous,  distinct  points;  intercellular  tissue 
firm,  reticulated,  the  surface  spinose.  Septa  narrow,  the  six  primary  ones 
distinct,  the  inner  one  broadest.  Terminal  corallite  exsert,  scarcely  larger 
than  the  lateral.  This  species  resembles  M.  arbuscula  and  M .  formosa  in 
its  mode  of  branching,  but  the  cells  are  entirely  different.  —  Kingsmills 
Islands ;  A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  parvistella  Verrill. 

Arborescent,  numerously  branched;  branchlets  spreading,  curved,  neatly 
rounded  and  tapering,  about  half  an  inch  in  diameter  and  three  or  four 
long.  Corallites  evenly  crowded,  very  small,  short,  tubular,  opening 
obliquely  upward  ;  exterior  costate,  scabrous  ;  cells  small,  broad  oval, 
stellate  ;  twelve  septa  distinct,  the  two  largest  nearly  meeting  in  the  centre.. 
—  Singapore ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  hoi'rida  Dana.  —  Feejce  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  abrotanoides  Lamarck.  —  Fcejee  Islands;  J.D.Dana. 

Madrepora  vil'gata  Dana.  —  Fcejee  Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  hebes  Dana.  —  Fecjee  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  austera  Dana.  —  Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  implicata  Dana.  —  Feejee  Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  tortUOSa  Dana.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  formosa  Dana.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  brachiata  Dana.  —  Sooloo  Sea  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  echiuata  Dana.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Madrepora  longicyathus  M.  Emv. —  Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  tubigera  Horn,  Proe.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  1860,  p.  435. 

Syn.  ?  Madrepora  conjmhosa  Lamk.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Put- 
nam. 

Madrepora  Danse  Verrill. 

Sy.v.  Madrepora  deformis  Dana  (non  Miciilin).  —  Tahiti :  J.  D.  Dana, 
A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  CUSpidata  Dana.  —  Tahiti ;  A.  Garret. 
6 


42  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Madrepora  plantaginea  Lamarck  (non  Dana). 

Syx.     M.  acervala  Dana.  —  Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  cerealis  Dana.  —  Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  nasuta  Dana. — Tahiti;  J.  I).  Dana,  A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  globiccps  Dana.  —  Tahiti;  J.  D.  Dana,  A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  rnillepora  Dana/ —  Singapore ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  eonvexa  Dana.  W 

Syx.  Madrepora  corymbosa  Daxa  (non  Lamk.),  the  young.  —  Singa- 
pore; Capt.  \V.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  surculosa  Dana.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  turbinata  Dana. 

Syx.     Madrepora  surculosa,  var.  turbinata  Daxa. 

Tliis  species  is  perfectly  distinct  from  M.  surculosa.  Unbleached  speci- 
mens an'  delicate  rose-colored.  —  Tahiti ;  J.  D.  Dana,  A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  appressa  Dana. 

Syx.  Hcteropora  appressa  Fair.  1834;  f  IF.  imbricafa  Euu.  ;  Madre- 
pora plantaginea  Daxa  (non  Lamarck);  f  M.  echidncea  Daxa.  • — Singa- 
pore; Capt.  \Y.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  paxilligera  Dana.  —  Tahiti;  A.  Garret 

Madrepora  cytherea  Dana.  —  Tahiti ;  J.  D.  Dana,  A.  Garret. 

Madrepora  spicifera  Daxa.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Madrepora  palmata  Lamarck. 

Syx.  Madrepora  perampla  Horn,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  1860, 
p.  435. —  Florida  and  West  Indies;   L.  Agassiz,  D.  P.  Woodbury. 

Porites  furcata  Lamarck.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies;  L.  Agassiz. 

Poritos  clavaria  Lamarck.  —  Florida  and  West  Indies;  L.  Agassiz.. 

Pcritss  compressa  Dana.  —  Sandwich  Islands;  A.  Garret. 

Porites  mordax  Dana.  —  Sandwich  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Porites  lobata   Dana. —  Sandwich  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Porites  astroeoides  Lamarck.—  Florida  and  West  Indies;  L.  Agassiz. 

Synartea  Verrill. 
Corallnm  irregularlj  branched  or  glomerate.     Cells  without  distinct  walls, 
septa  rudimentary;  six  prominent  paliform  lobes  surround  the  central 
cavity,  which  lias  a  rudimentary  or  very  small,  tubercular  columella  ;  out- 
side of  the  pali  are  other  similar  points,  or  granulations,  scattered  between 
ceils,  which  are  nol    distinctly  circumscribed,  but    often   separated   for 
wfine  distance  by  a  porous  ecenenchyma. 

Tljis   genus   includes   Porites  erosa,   P.  informis,  and    P.  monticulosa  of 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  43 

Dana,  together  with  the  following.  The  existence  of  generic  characters 
distinct  from  Poi-ites  in  these  species  was  suggested  by  Milne-Edwards, 
although  he  had  not  been  able  to  examine  specimens  of  them. 

Synarosa  Dana?  Verrill. 

Syx.     Ponies  contigua  Dana  ;  Pontes  Dance  M.  Enw.  and  IIaimr. 
Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Synarsea  irregularis  Verrill. 

This  species  forms  large  irregular  masses,  consisting  of  numerous  angular. 
clavate,  uneven  and  crowded  branches,  often  nodose  at  the  ends,  and  much 
coalesced,  giving  a  rough,  eroded  appearance  to  the  mass.  Cells,  huge-, 
than  in  the  following  species;  pali  prominent,  slender;  columella  rudimen- 
tary, often  wanting.  Surface  covered  with  slender,  prominent,  otter. 
toothed  granulations,  which  are  rather  loosely  arranged.  Color,  deep  um- 
ber brown.  —  Sandwich  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Synara?a  convexa  Verrill. 

Corallum  forming  rounded  hemispherical  clumps,  composed  of  numerous 
closely  crowded,  slender  branches,  very  much  divided,  angular,  and  often 
flabelliform  at  the  summits,  much  coalesced  near  the  ends,  leaving  the  tips 
free  for  about  one  third  of  an  inch.  Cells  closely  arranged  even  on  the  sides 
of  the  branches,  small  and  shallow;  pali  short,  thick,  obtuse,  surrounded  by 
short,  obtuse  granulations,  which  are  crowded  over  the  whole  surface  be- 
tween the  cells.     Color,  dark  ash.  —  Society  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Synaraea  solida  Verrill. 

Corallum  convex  and  glomerate,  arising  from  a  narrow  base,  formed 
by  numerous  very  irregular  stout  branches,  coalesced  nearly  throughout 
into  a  solid  mass,  leaving  only  the  ends  free  for  about  half  an  inch  ;  these 
are  often  one  half  an  inch  thick,  angular  and  proliferous.  Cells  rathe: 
open  and  distinct,  numerous;  pali  distinct,  not  very  prominent;  septa 
apparent,  but  imperfect;  columella  generally  wanting;  granulations  of  the 
surface  rough,  irregular,  not  crowded.  Color,  grayish  brown.  —  Society 
Islands ;  A.  Garret. 

Alveopora  excelsa  Verrill. 

Coral  incrusting  at  base,  massive,  gibbous,  rising  into  long  subcylindrical 
lobes,  rounded  at  the  summits.  Cells  deep,  neatly  polygonal,  nearly  uni- 
form in  size,  averaging  about  .08  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  with,  occasionally, 
much  larger  ones  intermingled;  septa  in  two  cycles,  represented  by  twelv< 
vertical  series  of  slender  spines,  uniting  at  the  middle  into  a  loose  rudimen- 
tary columella;  walls  thin,  pierced  by  numerous  rounded  pores. —  Singa- 
pore ;   Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Alveopora  retusa  Verrill. 

Corallum  irregularly  lobed  or  gibbous;  the  lobes  thick,  clavate,  often 


4-1  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

compressed  or  subfurcate  at  the  ends.  Cells  deep,  unequal  in  size,  the 
largest  about  one  tenth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  with  others  not  half  as  large 
intermingled  ;  septa  represented  in  the  large  cells  by  three  cycles  of  spines, 
uniting  into  an  imperfect  columella;  walls  rather  stout,  with  large  oval 
pores  in  vertical  series.  —  Singapore;   ('apt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Montipora  capitata  M.  Edw.  and  Hume. 

Svx.     Manopora  capitata  Daxa. —  Sandwich  Islands;    A.  Garret 

Montipora  effusa  M.  Edw.  and  Haime. 

Svx.     Manopora  effusa  Dan  a.  —  Society  Islands ;   A.  Garret. 

Montipora  nodosa  M.  Edw.  and  Haime. 

Svx.     Manopora  nodosa  Daxa.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Montipora  erosa  M.  Edw.  and  Haime. 

Svx.     Manopora  erosa  Daxa.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Montipora  hispida  M.  Edw.  ami  Hume. 

Svx.  Manopora  /iisj>i<!a  and  M.  spumosa  Dana  (non  Lamic). —  Singa- 
pore  ;   Capt.  \V.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Endopachys  Maelurii  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.     1848. 

Sy.x.     Turbinolia  Maelurii  Lea.     1833.  —  Tertiary,  Alabama. 

Balanophyllia  elegans  Verrill,   Report  on  the  Polyps  of  the  Northwest 
Boundary  Survey,  1861  (not  yet  published). 

Corallum  attached  by  a  broad  base,  low,  subturbinate.  Calyx  broad, 
oval,  deep.  Epitheca  well  developed,  covering  more  than  half  the  height 
of  the  wall,  which  is  thin  and  very  porous.  Septa  thin,  forming  five  com- 
plete cycles,  the  principal  ones  a  little  e.xsert,  strongly  toothed  at  the  sum- 
mit, finely  dentate  below:  those  of  the  last  order  unite  together  near  the 
columella,  and  are  joined  near  their  middle  by  those  of  the  preceding 
order;  columella  porous,  little  developed.  Height  .1  of  an  inch;  greatest 
diameter  of  the  calyx  .48,  shortest  .4.  Color  of  the  living  polyp,  bright 
orange.  —  Crescent  City  and  Mendocino,  California;  A.  Agassiz. 

Balanophyllia  scabrosa  Verrill. 

Syn.  Dendrophyllia  scabrosa  Daxa,  184C;  Balanophyllia  Cumingii  M. 
Edw.  and  Haime,  1S48;  Dendrophyllia^  scabrosa  M.  Edw.  Coralliares. — 
Singapore  ;   J.  D.  Dana. 

Ccenopsammia  equiserialis  M.  Edw.  Coralliaircs.     1857. 
Sin"  i pore  ;   ( 'apt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Ccenopsammia  tenuilamcllosa  M.  Edw.  and  Haime. 

Monographic   des    Eupsammides,    1848.  —  Panama  and   Acapulco;   A. 
Agassiz. 
Ccenopsammia  radiata  Verrill. 

S  "ml  I!-  to  the  preceding  species,  but  having  a  much  smaller,  spongy  col- 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  45 

umella,  more  conical  and  less  open  cells,  and  the  six  primary  septa  much 
broader  and  thicker  than  the  others,  with  rounded  nearly  entire  edges. — 
Society  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Stylopkora  digitata  M.  Eow.  and  IIaime.    1850. 

Svx.  Madrepora  di/jitala  Pallas,  Elench.  Zooph.  p.  326,  17(36  ;  Pon- 
tes scabra  and  elongata  Lamk.  181G;  Sideropora  dirjitata  and  elonoa'a 
Blaixvillk,  1830;  Dana.  184G;  Pontes  die/data  Km:.  1834. —  Singa- 
pore;  Capt.  YV.  II.  A.  Putman. 

Stylophora  Danae  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime,     1850. 

Syx.  Sideropora  palmala  Dana,  1846  (non  Lamk.).  —  Singapore; 
Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

This  approaches  the  preceding  very  closely  in  some  of  its  forms,  and  may 
not  lie  distinct. 

Stylophora  stellata  Verrill. 

Corallum  forming  even  rounded  clumps,  a  foot  or  more  in  diameter,  con- 
sisting of  numerous,  evenly  crowded  branches,  which  are  rounded,  about 
one  half  an  inch  in  diameter,  furcate,  often  flattened  at  the  ends.  Cells 
evenly  crowded  over  the  surface,  arranged  somewhat  in  spiral  lines,  the 
upper  edges  prominent,  rather  stout.  Septa  forming  three  cycles,  the  last 
two  often  rudimentary  or  wanting  ;  primary  septa  a  little  exsert,  rather 
narrow,  the  inner  edges  vertical,  scarcely  traceable  to  the  columella,  which 
is  small,  papilliform.  This  species  resembles  S.  dirjitata  in  form,  but  the  cells 
are  entirely  different.  —  Kingsmills  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Madracis  decactis  Verrill. 

Svx.  Astrea  decactis  Lymax,  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  YI.  p.  260, 
1857.  —  Florida  ;    L.  Agassiz. 

Stylaster  roseus  Grav,  Zoiil.  Misc.    1936. 

Svx.  Madrepora  rosea  Pallas,  1766  ;  Ocidina  rosea  Lamk.  1816  ;  Allo- 
pora  rosea  Daxa,  1846;  St  faster  roseus  Agassiz,  Florida  Reefs,  with  fig. 
(unpublished). —  Florida;   L.  Agassiz. 

Stylaster  elegans  Verrill. 

Corallum  flabelliform,  the  principal  branches  large,  compressed,  rapidly 
dividing  into  smaller  branches  and  branchlets,  the  ultimate  division-;  very 
slender  and  delicate,  rarely  coalescent.  Cells  very  small,  a  little  promi- 
nent, mostly  arranged  on  the  ed^es  of  the  branchlets,  but  a  few  are  scat- 
tered over  the  sides;  septa  narrow,  about  sixteen  distinct;  columella 
minute,  styliform.  Color,  bright  rose,  lighter  on  the  large  branches.  — 
Ebon  Island  ;  A.  Garret. 

Stylaster  tenuis  Verrill. 

Corallum  similar  to  the  preceding  in  its  mode  of  branching,  but  the 
branches  are  not  compressed.    Cells  one  third  larger,  about  .02  of  an  inch  in 


46  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

diameter,  arranged  in  simple  longitudinal  series  on  the  edges  of  the  branch' 
lets,  deep  at  the.  eentre,  with  a  minute  slender  columella,  which  is  often 
wanting;  septa  twelve  or  fourteen,  a  little  exsert,  about  one  third  as  broad 
as  the  cells.  Color,  light  red,  with  small  irregular  spots  of  white  ;  >ides  of 
the  branchlets  thickly  covered  with  small  Yerrucie. —  U]K)!u,  Navigator 
Islands  ;   J.  D.  Hague. 

Distichopora  nitida  Vekkill. 

Corallum  (labelliform,  branehing  diehotomotisly  in  a  plane.  Branches 
round  or  flattened  transversely  ;  the  branchlets  obtuse,  often  compressed  at 
the  tips ;  surface  very  minutely  granular,  appearing  almost  smooth,  with 
scattered  patches  of  rounded  verruca?,  having  rudimentary  septa  and  pits 
surrounding  them,  and  therefore  probably  corresponding  to  the  enlarged 
columella?  of  cells  without  solid  walls.  Three  rows  of  minute  pits  are 
arranged  closely  in  regular  scries  along  the  edges  of  the  branches;  those 
of  the  central,  larger  row  are  circular  and  often  have  a  slender  columella 
in  the  centre.  The  lateral  ones  are  much  smaller,  and  generally  irregular 
in  form  ;  a  transverse  section  shows  that  the  central  pits  correspond  to  the 
central  open  space  in  the  cells  of  Stylasto;  while  the  lateral  ones  are  inter- 
septal  chambers,  the  greater  part  of  which  have  been  obliterated  by  the 
thickening  of  the  septa;  in  some  of  the  cells,  twelve  septa  may  be  traced. 
Color  bright  red,  with  the  tips  of  the  branches  yellowish  white  ;  other 
specimens  are  light  orange.  —  Ebon  Island  ;   A.  Garret. 

Distichopora  COCCinea  Gray.     18G0. —  Australia?;  A.  Garret. 

Errina  aspera  Gray,  Trans.  Zool.  Soe.    1835. 

Syx.     Millepora  aspera,  Linx.  Ed.  XII.  17G7.  —  Fayal ;  Chas.  Dabney. 
An  examination  of  the  structure  of  this  coral  has  convinced  me  that  it  is 
closely  allied  to  Distichopora,  and  consequently  to  Sfylaster,  the  process  of 
filling  up  the  cells  being  here  carried  to  the  last  degree. 

Oculina  varicosa  LeSueur.     1817.  — St.  Thomas,  W.  I.  ;  Dr.  G.  II.  Otis. 
This  species  is  unquestionably  distinct  from  the  next,  with  which  it  has 
been  united  by  Milne-Edwards  and  Ilaime.     It  resembles  more  0.  Peti- 
vt  ri  M.  Edw.  and  II. 

Oculina  diffusa  Lamarck.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz,  G.  Wurdemnnn. 

Oculina  arbuscula  Agassiz,  MS., "Rep.  on  the  Florida  Reefs,  with  fig.  (un- 
published). 

Corallum  arborescent ;  the  trunk,  arising  from  a  flat,  incrusting  base, 
divides  rapidly  into  spreading,  round,  tapering  branches  and  branchlets. 
Corallites  prominent,  arranged  somewhat  in  spiral  lines;  cells  large  (.06 
inch),  open,  deep  ;  septa  in  three  cycles  well  developed,  the  principal  ones 
exsert,  rounded  at  the  summits,  vertical  within  ;  columella  little  developed. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  47 

Costa:  scarcely  apparent  between  the  cells.  —  Off  Charleston,  South  Caro- 
lina ;  L.  Agassiz. 

Oculina  implicata  Agassiz,  MS,  1  c.fig.  (nnpublished). 

Coralluin  forming  dense  clumps  of  irregular,  crowded,  much  coalesced 
branches.  Corallites  irregularly  arranged,  numerous,  very  slightly  promi- 
nent, with  nearly  level  interstices,  marked  by  the  scarcely  prominent  radi- 
ating costae.  Cells  smaller  than  in  the  two  preceding  species  and  less 
open;  columella  rudimentary;  septa  very  little  exsert.  —  Oil'  Cape  Hat- 
teras,  North  Carolina ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  ;  A.  S. 
Bickmore. 

Astrangia  Danae  Agassiz,  Smith.  Contr.,  with  6  plates  (unpublished)  ;  Proc. 
Aincr.  Assoc.  Vol.  II.  p.  G8,  1849  (non  M.  Edw.  and  Haime,  1830). 

Syx.     Astrangia   astreifonnis   Lk.idy  (non  M.  Edw.  and   Haime). — 

Long  Island  Sound;  L.  Agassiz. 

Astrangia  astreiformis  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.     1850. 
Charleston,  South  Carolina  ;  L.  Agassiz. 

Astrangia  solitaria  Verrill. 

Syx.  Caryophyllia  solitaria  Lk.Si'eur,  Journal  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sei.  I. 
p.  ISO,  pi.  VIII.  fig.  11,  1817.  — Ilayti;  D.  F.  YVeinland.—  St.  Thomas; 
Dr.  G.  II.  Otis. 

The  corallites  in  this  species  are  distantly  scattered,  but  connected  by 
a  thin  basal  expansion  ;  septa  crowded,  strongly  denticulate. 

Syndepas  Gouldii  Lyman,  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Ilist.  VI.  p.  274.     1857.— 
Cumana,  Venezuela,  South  America ;  J.  P.  Couthouy. 

Phyllangia  dispersa  Vkrrill. 

Corallites  connected  by  a  basal  expansion,  which  is  generally  thin,  but 
sometimes  thickened,  irregularly  scattered,  often  one  half  an  inch  distant, 
about  one  fourth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  somewhat  less  in  height. 
Primary  and  secondary  septa  much  exsert,  with  narrow,  subentire  sum- 
mits. Columella  well  developed,  trabicular,  and  rudely  papillose.  —  Pa- 
nama ;  A.  Agassiz. 

Cladocora  arbuscula  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.     1849. 

Sy.v  Caryophyllia  arbuscula  LeSueck,  1820  ;  Dana,  1846.  Cladocora 
arbuscula  Agassiz,  Florida  Reefs,  with  fig.  (unpublished). —  Florida;  L. 
Agassiz,  C  Wurdemann. 

Orbicella  cavernosa  Agassiz,  MS.  1.  c,  fig.  (unpublished). 

Syx.  Madrepora  cavernosa  Esp.  1797;  Facia  cavernosa  Okkn,  1815; 
Aslrea  aryus  Lamarck,  181G;  Orhieetla  aryus  Dana,  1846;  Heiiastrea 
cavernosa  M.  Ed\v.  1857.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Ilayti;  D.  F.  Wein- 
land. 

The  subgenus   Orbicella  of  Dana  is  almost  identical  with  HeUastrea  of 


48  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Milne-Edwards,  the  first  three  species,  at  least, belonging  to  the  latter  genus; 

therefore  there  appears  to  be  no  sufficient  reason  for  changing  the  earlier 

name. 
Orbicella  annularis  Dana.    1346. 

Svx.     Madrepora   annularis  Ellis  and  Sol.   178G;   Aslrea  annularis 

Lamarck  ;  Heliaslrea  annularis  M.  Edw.;  Orbicella  annularis  Agassiz,  1.  c., 

with  fig.  (unpublished).  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Hayti;  D.  F.  Weinland. 
Goniastrea  varia  Verrill. 

Svx.     Astrea  varia  Dana;  Prionastrea  ?  raria  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime. — 

St.  Thomas;  Dr.  G.  II.  Otis. 
Favia  ananas  Okkx,  Lehrl).  derNat.  I.  p.  07.    1815. 

Syn.     Madrepora  ananas  (pars)  Lixx.  Ed.  X.  1758;  Pallas,  Eleneh. 

Zooph.  17CG;  Astrea  ananas  Lamahck,  181C  ;   Purastrea  ananas  M.  Edw. 

and   IIaimk,   1850;   Favia  ananas  M.  Edw.  Coralliaires,  1857.  —  Florida; 

L.  Agassiz,  D.  F.  Woodbury. 

Coeloria  dsedalea  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime      1851. 

Syx,  Madrepora  daidalea  Ellis  and  Sol.  178G;  Mazandrina  dcedalea 
Lamahck,  1816;  Dana,  1S4G;  Astrona  dccdalea  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime, 
184  9.  —  Singapore  ;  P.  Ellis. 

Hydnophora  exesa  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime.     1849. 

Syx.  Madrepora  exesa  Pallas,  17GG  (young);  Ibjdnnpliora  Pallasii 
and  II.  Demidoffi.  Fischer,  1810;  Monticularia  meandrina.  M.  folium,  and 
?  M.  polygonata  Lamarck,  1816;  Hydnophora  Demidoffi  and  til.  polygo- 
nata  M.  Edw.  and  Haime,  1849.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

The  extensive  series  of  specimens  in  the  Museum  shows  that  the 
synonymes  quoted  refer  to  the  various  stages  of  growth  of  one  species,  as 
suggested  by  Milne-Edwards. 

Diploria  cerebriformis  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime.    1849. 

Syx.  Mccandrina  cerebriformis  Lamarck.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. — 
Bermuda ;  II.  Hammond. 

Manicina  areolata  (pars)  Ehr.    1834. 

Svx.  Madrepora  areolata  Linn.  Ed.  X.  1758;  Mozandrina  areolata  La- 
marck; ?  Manicina  meandrites,  M.  hispida,  M.  prarupta,  and  M.  manica 
Ehr.  1834  ;  M.  dilatata  Dana,  1846  ;  Manicina  areolata  Agassiz,  I.e.,  with 
fig.  (unpublished).  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz,  G.  Wurdemann. —  St.  Thomas; 
Dr.  G.  II.  Otis. 

Trachyphyllia  amarantum  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime.     1849. 

Syn.  Manicina  amarantum  Dana,  1846.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A. 
Putnam. 

Ma^andrina  clivosa  Verrill. 

Syx.     Madrepora    clivoaa    Ki.i.is   and    Sol.   p.   1C3,    1786;    Madrepora 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  49 

Jilograna  Esp.  Tab.  XXII.  1  789  (non  Mceandrina  Jilograna  Lamarck)  ; 
Mceandrina  mammosa  Dana  ;  ?  M.  inlerrupta  Dana  ;  ? Mceandrina grand'do- 
baia  M.  Edw.  and  Haime. —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz,  D.  P.  Woodbury. — 
llayti;    D.  F.  Weinland. 

Mseandrma  strigosa  Dana.    1846. 

Sv\.     Caeloria  strigosa  M.  Edw.  Coralliaires.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz. 

Masandrina  labyrinthiformis  Dana.    1846. 

Syx.  Madrepora  labyrinthiformis  Linn.  Ed.  X.  1758;  Madrepora  laby- 
rintliica  Ellis  and  Sol.  178G,  pi.  4G,  figs.  3  and  4  (non  Mceandrina  laby- 
rintldca  Lamarck,  Ehr.,  nee  Cadoria  labyrinthiformis  M.  Edw.  and 
IIaimk)  ;  Mceandrina  labyrintldca  Dana  ;  Mozandrina  sinuosissima  M. 
Edw.  and  IIaime.  —  Florida  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  St.  Thomas  ;  Dr.  G.  II.  Otis. 

Mseandrina  sinuosa  LeSueur,  Mem.  du  Mas.  VI.  p.  278,  pi.  15,  figs.  4-7, 

1820    (non   Madrepora  sinuosa  Ellis  and   Solander,  nee  Mceandrina  sinuosa 

Quoy  and  Gaul). 

Syx.     Madrepora  labyrinthiformis   (pars)   Linn.   Ed.   X. ;   Mceandrina 

labyrintldca   (pars)  Lamarck  ;   Lamouroux  ;  Mceandrina  crassa  (?)  M. 

Edw.  and  IIaime.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz,  G.  Wurdemann. 
Colpophyllia  gyrosa  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.     1849. 

Syx.      Madrepora  gyrosa   Ellis   and   Sol.    1 78G  ;    Mceandrina  gyrosa 

Lamarck  ;  Mussa  gyrosa  Dana;   Colpophyllia  gyrosa,  Agassiz,  1.  c.,  with 

fig.  (unpublished).  —  Florida;    L.  Agassiz. 

Tridacophyllia  lactuca  Blajnville.     1830. 

Syx.  Madrepora  lactuca  Pallas,  17GG;  Pavonia  lactuca  Lamarck, 
1816.  — Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Tridacophyllia  Manicina  Dana.    1846. 

Syx.  Madrepora  lactuca  Ellis  and  Sol.  pi.  44  (non  Pallas). — 
Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Caulastrea  furcata  Dana.  —  Feejee  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 
Symphyllia  radians  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.     1849. 

Syx.  Mussa  crispa  Dana  (non  Lamarck).  —  Singapore;  Capt.  "W. 
H.  A.  Putnam. 

Mussa  tenuidentata  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.    1849. 

Syx.     Mussa  sinuosa  Dana.  —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
Mussa  cytherea  Dana.  —  Society  Islands ;  A.  Garret. 

Mussa  regalis  Dana,  Zoophytes.     1846. 

Syx.  ?  Symphyllia  Valenciennesi  M.  Edw.  and  Haime,  1849. —  Singa- 
pore ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Isophyllia  dipsacea  Agassiz,  MS. 

Syx.      Mussa  dipsacea  Dana  ;    Symphyllia   ?  dipsacea  M.   Edw.   and 

7 


50  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

IIaimk  ;  ? Symphyllia  guadulpensis  M.  Ei>\v.  and  IIaime,  1849.  —  Florida 
Roofs ;   L.  Agassiz.  —  Bermuda ;  Frederic  Rees,  M.  D. 

Isophyllia  sinuosa  Verrill. 

Syn.     Madrepora  sinuom  Ellis  and  Sol.     178G. 

'1'his  species  forms  spreading  rounded  masses,  often  six  inches  in  diameter 
and  about  two  thick.     Walls  echino-costate  exteriorly.    The  father  shallow, 

open  colls  are  generally  confluent  in  series  of  from  two  to  five,  but  often 
simple.  Septa  very  numerous,  the  edges  divided  into  long,  slender,  sub- 
equal  teeth.  Columella  well  developed,  papillose.  It  differs  from  the  pre- 
ceding in  its  broader  growth,  more  numerous  and  thinner  septa,  much  more 
shallow  and  narrow  cells,  which  are  about  .7  of  an  inch,  instead  of  an  inch 
or  more,  in  diameter.  The  ridges  are  narrow  and  sinuous,  often  with  a 
groove  at  the  top.  —  St.  Thomas,  West  Indies ;  Dr.  G.  H.  Otis. 

Isophyllia  rigida  Verrill. 

Syx.  Ashen  rigida  Daxa,  Zooph.  184G.  —  Florida  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Ber- 
muda ;  T.  C.  Hill. 

Euphyllia  fimbriata  M.  Edw.  Coralliahes.    1857. 

Syx.  Euphyllia  mazandrina  Daxa,  Zooph.  184G. —  Singapore;  Capt. 
W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Galaxea  faseicularis  Oken.    1815. 

Syn.  Madrepora  faseicularis  Lixx.  Ed.  X.  1758;  Anthophyllum  fascicu- 
laris  Dana,  1846;  Galaxea  fa.iciciduris  M.  Edw.  and  IIaimk,  1851. — 
Singapore;   Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Galaxea  caespitosa  Verrill. 

Syx.  Madrepora  caespitosa  Esper.  1789;  Antltophyllum  cevspitosum 
Dana,  184G;  Galaxea  Ellisii  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime,  1851. —  Singapore; 
Capt.  W.  II.   A.  Putnam,  J.  1).  Dana. 

Fungia  patella  M.  Edw.  and  IIaimk.     1851. 

Syn.     Madrepora  patella  Ellis  and  Sol.  178G;  Fungia  agaricifomiis 

and  patellaris  Lamarck,  1801;  Fungia  agariciformis  Dana.  —  Singapore; 

Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
Fungia  repailda  Dana.     1846.  —  Singapore;   Cap!.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
Fungia  dentata  Dana.     1846.  —  Singapore  ;   Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Fungia  Danse  M.  Edw.  and  IIaimk.     1851. 

Syn.     Fungia  echinata  Dana,    Zooph.   (non  Pallas  nee  Esper.). — 
Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
Fungia  confertifolia  Dana.     1846  —  Feojce  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 
Fungia  concinna  Verrill. 

Corallum  strongly  convex,  with  a  deep,  narrow  central  fiwse.  Septa 
very  unequal,  the  principal  ours  nearly  evenly  exsert,  broad,  rather  thick, 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  51 

the  edges  evenly  dentate,  with  large,  regular,  acute  teeth  ;  latest  ones 
narrow  and  thin,  deep  between  the  larger,  the  edges  scarcely  divided. 
Lower  surface  crowdedly  costate,  the  costae  unequal,  covered  with  obtuse 
papilliform  spines.  This  species  is  allied  to  F.  repanda,  but  is  very  distinct 
in  the  character  of  the  septa.  —  Zanzibar;  C.  Cooke,  E.  D.  Ropes. 

Fungia  serrulata  Verrill. 

Corallum  somewhat  convex  in  the  centre;  fosse  very  narrow.  Princi- 
pal septa  subequal,  much  narrower  than  in  the  preceding,  the  edges 
irregularly  dentate,  with  small,  very  acute,  unequal  teeth  ;  latest  septa 
thin,  much  more  narrow,  the  edges  finely  and  regularly  denticulate.  Lower 
surface  with  the  principal  costaj  about  .5  of  an  inch  distant,  and  many  other 
finer  ones  between  ;  all  of  them  covered  with  prominent,  obtuse,  papilliform 
spines.  —  Kingsmills  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Fungia  Haimei  Verkill. 

Syx.     Fungia  discus  M.  Enw.  and  IIaime,  1851  (non  Daxa). 

This  species  differs  from  F.  discus  Daxa,  of  which  the  original  specimen 
is  before  me,  in  having  stronger  and  nearly  equal  costae,  furnished  with 
numerous  sharp,  curved  spines,  instead  of  scattered,  irregular,  obtuse  ones, 
nearly  obsolete  on  the  central  portion,  and  in  having  more  equally  devel- 
oped septa,  which  are  more  finely  and  regularly  serrated  with  small,  acute, 
angular  teeth.  —  Zanzibar  ;  C.  Cooke. 

Fungia  valida  Verrill. 

Nearly  circular,  elevated  at  the  centre.  Septa  very  unequal,  the 
principal  ones  very  broad  and  thick,  the  last  narrow  and  thin,  all  except 
those  of  the  latest  cycle  strongly  serrate  with  very  large,  broad,  acute 
teeth.  Costte  very  unequal,  the  principal  ones  thick  and  prominent,  with 
numerous  strong,  acute,  often  curved  spines ;  between  these  are  from  three 
to  five,  scarcely  distinct,  except  near  the  edge,  and  not  spinose.  Columella 
fine  spongy.  —  Zanzibar ;  C.  Cooke. 

Ctenactis  Agassiz,  MS.     18G0.  —  Type,  Fungia  echinata  Pallas. 

This  genus  includes  besides  Fungia  Elirenbergii  Leuckart,  and  F. 
crassa  Daxa,  the  following  :  — 

Ctenactis  gigantea  Agassiz,  MS. 

Syx.  Fungia  gigantea  (var.)  Daxa,  Zoophytes,  p.  303,  pi.  19,  tig.  12. — 
Feejee  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Ctenactis  echinata  Agassiz,  MS.    i860. 

Syx.  Fungia  echinata  Pallas,  17GG  ;  Fungia  pectinata  Eur.  ;  Dana  ; 
Fungia  Elirenbergii  (pars)  Daxa;  Fungia  echinata  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime. 
—  Singapore ;   Capt.  \V.  II.  A.  Putnam. 


52  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Lobactis  Agassiz,  MS.     I860.  —  Type,  Fungia  dentigera  Leuckart. 

Lobactis  Danae  Agassiz,  MS.    i860. 

Syx.  Fungia  dentigera  Dana,  Zoophytes,  p.  301,  pi.  18,  fig.  4,  1846 
(non  Leuckart). —  Sandwich  Islands;  A.  Garret. 

Lobactis  eonferta  Agassiz,  MS. 

Oblong  oval,  thick,  massive,  with  even,  closely  crowded,  rather  thick, 
flexuous  septa,  evenly  and  finely  serrate,  with  very  small,  acute,  angular 
teeth,  their  sides  strongly  granulated.  Tentacular  lobes,  much  thickened, 
strongly  exsert,  angular, -subacute.  Lower  surface  thickly  covered  with 
rounded,  slightly  prominent  papillae.  Length  of  a  large  specimen,  6.5 
inches  ;  breadth,  4  ;  central  fosse,  2.5  long.  —  Kingsmills  Islands  ;  A. 
Garret. 

Pleuractis  Agassiz,  MS.     1860.  —  Type,  Fungia  scutaria  Lamarck. 

Pleuractis  scutaria  Agassiz,  MS.    1860. 

Syx.  Fungia  scutaria  Lamarck,  1801  ;  Dana;  M.  Edw.  and  Haime. 
■ —  Singapore  ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Herpetolitha  Limax  Eschscholtz.    1825. 

Syx.  Madrepora  Limax  Esper  ;  Fungia  limacina  Lamarck,  181G  ;  Hali- 
glossa  Umacina  Eur.,  1834;  Herpelolilhus  limacinus  Dana,  1846.  —  Singa- 
pore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Herpetolitha  ampla  Agassiz,  MS. 

A  large,  spreading  species,  broad  oblong  in  form,  obtusely  rounded  at 
the  ends;  rather  thin,  about  one  inch  in  the  middle,  half  as  much  near  the 
edges.  Septa  thin,  rounded,  exsert,  the  median  ones  about  an  inch  in  length, 
the  lateral  half  an  inch;  the  edges  evenly  serrate  with  fine,  acute,  angular 
teeth.  Lowei-  surface  crowdedly  echinate,  with  short,  conical,  acute  spines. 
A  specimen  13  inches  in  length  is  G  broad. —  Zanzibar;  C.  Cooke. 

Podabacia  Crustacea  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.     1851. 

Syx.  Madrepora  Crustacea  Pallas,  Elench.  Zooph.,  p.  291,  17G6;  Pa- 
vonia  explanulatu  Dana  ;  Podabacia  cyalhoides  M.  Edw.  and  Haime,  1850. 
—  Singapore  ;  J.  M.  Barnard. 

Cryptabacia  talpina  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.    1851. 

Syx.  Fungia  talpina  Lamarck,  1801  ;  Polyphyllia  talpa  Blaixyille; 
Dana.  —  Singapore;   Capt.  W.  11.  A.  Putnam. 

Halomitra  clypeus  Verrill. 

Syx.  Halomitra  pUt  us  (  pars)  Dana,  Zoophytes,  p.  31 1,  pi.  21,  f.  2,  2  a, 
1846  (non  Madrepora  pileus  Linn.  Ed.  X.,  Fungia  pileus  Lamarck,  1801, 
nee  Halomitra  pilt  us  M.  Edw.  and  Haime).  ■ —  Feejee  Islands ;  J.  I).  Dana. 

This  is  a  very  thick,  massive  species,  quite  distinct  from  that,  described 
by  Milne-Edwards  and  Haime,  which  appears  to  be  the  true  Madrepora 
pileus  Linn. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  53 

Halomitra  tiara  Agassiz,  MS. 

Corallum  solid,  very  convex  above,  much  thinner  than  the  preceding, 
about  half  an  inch  thick.  Septo-costal  plates  thin,  short,  strongly  incise- 
dentate,  the  teeth  elongated,  acute,  granulated.  Cells  very  distinct,  irreg- 
ularly scattered,  but  less  remote  than  in  the  preceding,  owing  to  the 
much  shorter  plates,  which  are  .3  of  an  inch  long  near  the  centre,  and  about 
.6  near  the  margin.  Lower  surface  very  concave,  with  the  costa;  distinct  to 
the  centre,  close,  slightly  thickened,  covered  with  nearly  equal,  sharp,  conical 
spines.  —  Kingsmills  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Zoopilus  echinatus  Dana,  Zoophytes,  p.  319',  pi.  21,  fig.  6.     1846. 
Feejee  Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

This  genus  is  perfectly  well  founded,  being  closely  allied  to  Lithactinia  ; 
not,  as  Milne-Edwards  has  supposed,  a  Fungia. 

Trachypora  Verrill. 

Corallum  explanate,  thin  ;  below  echinate  and  coarsely  costate ;  above 
with  scattered  polyp  centres  destitute  of  walls,  with  one  or  two  cycles  of 
septa,  radiating  at  the  centres,  but  becoming  subparallel  between  them,  as 
in  Halomitra,  strongly  dentate  or  lacerately  lobed,  the  strongest  lobes  sur- 
rounding the  polyp  centres;  columella  loose,  trabicular. 

This  genus  is  in  several  respects  intermediate  between  Halomitra  and 
Eclrinopora ;  in  its  mode  of  growth  it  resembles  the  latter,  but  not  in  its 
cells.  It  appears  to  include,  besides  the  following,  Eclrinopora  aspera  Dana 
(Madrepora  aspera  Ellis  and  Sol.). 

Trachypora  lacera  Verrill. 

Broadly  explanate  and  gibbous,  thin,  with  many  irregular  openings  near 
the  margin.  Below  coarsely  and  irregularly  ribbed  or  costate,  the  principal 
costa?  very  thick,  prominent,  strongly  echinate,  the  spines  irregular,  lacer- 
ately lobed,  smaller  intermediate  costae  scarcely  spinose.  Upper  surface 
covered  by  rather  loose,  very  unequal  septo-costal  plates,  which  are  deeply 
and  irregularly  divided  into  strong  lacerate  spines;  the  plates  are  nearly 
parallel,  except  close  to  the  polyp  centres,  where  they  bend  abruptly  and 
unite  with  the  columella.  The  spines  around  the  centres  are  large  and 
stout,  often  broad  at  the  ends ;  centres  irregularly  scattered,  from  half  an 
inch  to  an  inch  distant.  —  Singapore  ;  J.  M.  Barnard. 

Phyllastrea  tubifex  Dana.    1846. 

Syx.  Mi/cedium  tubifex  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime,  1851.  —  Feejee  Islands; 
J.  D.  Dana. 

This  genus  is  quite  distinct  from  Mycedium  in  its  coarse,  spinose  septa, 
and  strong  costa?  beneath. 

Phyllastrea  explanata  Agassiz.  MS. 

Differs  from  the  preceding  in  its  broadly  explanate,  thin,  semicircular  or 


54  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

subturbinate  fronds,  smooth  below,  with  distant,  strong  costae,  and  many 
smaller  intermediate  ones.  The  cells  are  smaller,  less  remote,  with  much 
thickened,  lacerately  toothed  septa,  which  become  very  thin  between  the 
cells.     Columella  rudimentary.  —  Tahiti ;    A.  Garret. 

Echinopora  flexuosa  Verrill. 

Corallum  forming  broad,  thin,  foliaceous,  flexuous,  and  contorted  plates, 
often  growing  upright,  cohered  on  both  surfaces  with  circular,  slightly 
prominent  corallites  about  .12  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  separated  ordinarily 
about  a  quarter  of  an  inch.  Between  the  cells  the  septo-costal  stria;  are  nu- 
merous, thin,  divided  into  slender,  sharp  spines.  There  are  two  complete 
cycles  of  septa,  with  rudiments  of  a  third  ;  those  of  the  first  cycle  arc 
thickened  exteriorly  and  divided  into  prominent  teeth,  which  are  them- 
selves lacerate.  Columella  loose,  trabicular,  little  developed.  —  Singapore  ; 
Capt.  W.  H.  A.  Putnam. 

Echinopora  reflexa  Dana. 

This  differs  from  E.  rosularia  Lamk.  in  having  three  complete  cycles  of 
septa.  —  Feejee  Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Acanthopora  Verkill.  — Type,  Echinopora  horrida  Dana. 
Corallum  ramose,  solid,  the  cells  being  filled  below  as  in  Oculina.     Costne 
between  the  cells  represented  by  series  of  spines.    It  differs  also  from  Echi- 
nopora in  its  polyps. 

Acanthopora  horrida  Verrill. 

Syn.  Echinopora  horrida  Dana,  Zoophytes,  p.  282,  pi.  17,  f.  4,  4  a,  4  b, 
4  c,  184G.  —  Feejee  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Pavonia  formosa  Dana. — Tahiti;  A.  Garret. 

The  genus  Pavonia  was  first  established  by  Lamarck  in  1801,  in  Sysleme 
des  Anhnaux  sans  Vertebres,  p.  372  ;  therefore  this  name  must  be  retained, 
instead  of  Lophoseris  proposed  by  Milne-Edwards  and  Ilaime,  since  it  was 

not  employed  among  insects  until  181G. 

Pavonia  prsetorta  Dana.  — Tahiti;  A.  Garret. 

Pavonia  frondifera  Lamarck. 

Syx.  Pavonia  frond ifera  (pars)  Dana;  Lophoseris  yhmtfj/era  M.  Edw. 
and  HAIME. —  Singapore;   Capt.  W.  H.  A.  Putnam. 

This  species  is,  possibly,  Madrepora  ficoides  Ellis  and  Solander. 

Pavonia  loculata  Dana. 

Syn.     Paronia  crassa  var.  loculata  Dana;    Lophoseris?  crassa   (pars) 
M.  Edw.  and  Haimr. —  Singapore:   Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 
This  is,  perhaps,  Madrepora  acerosa  Ellis  and  Solander. 

Pavonia  venusta  Dana. 

Syn.  Lophoseris?  venusta  M.  Edw.  and  IIaime.  —  Singapore;  Capt. 
W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  55 

Pavonia  Danse  Vekrill. 

Syn.  Pavonia  bold  if  or  mis  Dana  (non  Lamk.)  ;  Lophoseris  Danai  M. 
Edw.  and  IIaimk.  —  Sooloo  Sea;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Pavonia  varians  Vekrill 

Corallum  incrusting,  varying  in  form  according  to  the  object  upon  which 
it  grow?,  at  times  glomerate,  massive,  and  gibbous,  with  short  angular  or 
convoluted  crests  rising  from  the  surface.  These  sometimes  become  more 
elevated,  with  an  acute  edge,  or,  by  incrusting  the  tubes  of  Serpulaj,  rise 
into  irregular  ramose  forms.  Septa  from  twelve  to  sixteen,  the  primary 
ones  thickened,  strongly  granulated.  Cells  rather  small,  open  ;  columella 
small,  papilliform,  often  wanting.  —  Sandwich  Islands  ;    A.  Garret. 

Leptoseris  papyraoea  Veruill. 

Syn.     Paconia  papyracea  Dana. —  Sooloo  Sea;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Mycedium  fragile  Dana;  Agassiz  MS.,  Florida  Reefs,  fig.  —  Florida;  L. 
Agassiz. 

Agaricia  agaricites  M.  Edw.  and  Haime.    1S51. 

Syn.  Madrepora  agaricites  Pallas,  17CG;  Pavonia  agaricites  Lamk.; 
Agaricia  (Mgcedia)  agaricites  Dana.  —  Florida  ;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Ilayti ; 
D.  F.  Weinland. 

Agaricia  purpurea  LeSceur.  —  Ilayti ;  D.  F.  "Weinland. 

Siderastrea  radians  Agassiz,  MS.  1.  c.,  fig.  (unpublished). 

Syn.  Madrepora  radians  Pallas,  176G  ;  Madrepora  galaxea  Ellis  and 
Sol.  178G  ;  Astrea  galaxea  Lamk.  1801  ;  Siderastrea  galaxea  Bainv.  1830; 
M.  Edw.  and  II.  1850  ;  Siderina  galaxea  Dana,  1846  ;  Astrea  radians  M. 
Edw.  18 37.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Ilayti;  D.  F.  Weinland. 

Professor  Agassiz  ascertained  by  an  examination  of  the  living  polyps  of 
this  species,  in  1850,  that  it  is  a  Fungian  closely  allied  to  Pavonia,  with 
which  it  also  agrees  in  the  structure  of  the  coral ;  the  name  Astrea,  there- 
fore, cannot  with  propriety  be  retained  for  the  genus,  although  it  was  one 
of  the  species  originally  included  in  that  genus  by  Lamarck. 

Siderastrea  siderea  Blainville.    1830. 

Syn.  Madrepora  siderea  Ellis  and  Sol.  1786;  Astrea  siderea  Lamk. 
181G;  Pavonia  siderea  Dana,  1846.  —  Florida;  L.  Agassiz.  —  Ilayti  : 
D.  F.  Weinland. 

Siderastrea  elavus  Verrill. 

Syx.  Pavonia  elavus  Dana,  1846;  Lophoseris?  elavus  M.  Edw. — 
Feejee  Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Pachyseris  fluctuosa  Verrill. 

Corallum  forming  large  explanate  plates,  which  are  rather  thin,  some- 
what semicircular  in  outline,  attached   by  the  central  part  of  the  lower 


56  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

edge.  The  upper  surface  concave,  sometimes  undulate  near  the  margin ; 
lower  surface  strongly  striated,  the  costae  close  and  thickened,  somewhat 
granulated.  The  transverse  ridges  of  the  upper  surface  are  regular  and 
often  extend  across  the  whole  breadth  of  the  surface,  occasionally  inter- 
rupted, mostly  undulated  or  flexuous,  about  as  high  as  broad.  Centres  of 
the  polyp  cells  very  minute,  but  distinct,  not  radiated  ;  septo-costal  striae 
close  and  even;  bent  in  a  zigzag  manner  on  the  ridges.  Breadth  of  a  large 
specimen,  28  inches;  height.  15;  average  thickness,  .25;  width  of  the  val- 
leys, .20 Kingsmills  Islands  ;    A.  Garret. 

Merulina  ampliata  Ehrenberg.    1834. 

Svx.  Madrepora  ampliata  Ellis  and  Sol.  1786;  Agaricia  ampliata 
Lamk.  1801;  Merulina  speciosa  Horn  (non  Dana)  is  the  mature  form 
with  rising  branches,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Xat.  Sci.  18G0,  p.  435.  —  Singa- 
pore ;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Merulina  regalis  Dana.     184G.  —  Fccjee  Islands  ;  J.  D.  Dana. 
Merulina  speciosa  Dana.     1846.  —  Feejee  Islands ;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Clavarina  Verrill. 
Corallum  compact,  branching.     Cells  imperfectly  circumscribed,  but  not 
confounded  in  series.     Septa   and   walls   thickened,   the    former  lacerate- 
toothed,  with  paliform  teeth  at  the  bases.     Columella  rudimentary. 

Clavarina  seabricula  Veurill. 

Svx.  Merulina  seabricula  Dana,  Zoophytes,  p.  275,  pi.  16,  f.  2,  2  a,  2b, 
18 1G.  — Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Zoanthus  SOeiatUS  Lamarck.     1801. 

Svx.  Actinia  sociata  Ellis,  Phil.  Trans.  17G7;  Ellis  and  Sol.  1786; 
Zoantha  social  a  Lamk.  Syst.  An.  sans  Vert.  1801  ;  Zoantha  Ellisii  Lamk. 
Hist.  An.  sans  Vert.  1816;  ZoanOius  sociatus  Eur.  1834.  —  Florida;  L. 
Agassiz. 

Cerianthvis  americanus  Agassiz.  MS. 

Body  very  long,  often  two  feet  when  expanded,  and  upwards  of  an  inch 
in  diameter,  tapering  gradually  to  the  base.  Outer  tentacles  very  nu- 
merous, one  hundred  and  twenty  or  more,  slender,  about  1.5  inches  loner, 
very  flexible;  inner  ones  close  to  the  mouth,  about  .75  of  an  inch  long, 
often  twisted  together  spirally.  Color  of  column  dark  cinnamon  brown. 
with  vlarker  lines  of  the  same  ;  marginal  tentacles  cinnamon  color,  lighter 
at  the  base;  inner  ones  darker,  marked  with  longitudinal  white  lines:  outer 
portion  of  the  disk  yellow,  with  dark  spots  at  the  base  of  the  tentacles. — 
Charleston,  South  Carolina,  buried  in  mud;  L.  Agassiz. 

The  descriptions  of  the  colors  of  this  and  other  species  of  Actinidce  have- 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  57 

been  taken  from  a  series  of  drawings  which  Professor  Agassiz  caused  to  be 
made  from  living  specimens,  in  1852. 

Halcampa  albida  Agassiz,  MS. 

Syx.     Corynaclis  albida  Agassiz,   Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  VII.  p. 

24,  1850. 

Column,  in  full  expansion,  long  and  slender,  but  very  changeable  in 
form  ;  upper  half  covered  with  prominent  suckers,  arranged  rather  closely 
in  longitudinal  rows.  Tentacles  twenty,  slender,  with  a  round*  d  knob 
at  the  end.  Length  in  expansion,  about  3  inches;  thickness..!.  Color 
light  brownish  yellow;  tentacles  lighter,  with  the  ends  dark  brown. — 
Nantucket,  Massachusetts,  buried  in  sand;  B.  T.  Morrison. 

Dysactis  pallida  Verrill. 

Syx.  Actinia  pallida  Agassiz,  MS.  1849  ;  1  Anthea  flavidula  McCrady, 
Proc.  Elliott   Soc.  of  Charleston,  S.  C,  I.  p.  280  (without  description). 

Column  short,  subcylindrical,  expanding  above  the  middle  to  the  margin 
of  the  broad  disk,  but  varying  somewhat  in  form  according  to  the  state  of 
contraction.  Inner  tentacles  an  inch  or  more  long,  slender,  those  near  the 
margin  short,  conical,  with  some  of  intermediate  length  between.  Column 
sometimes  1.25  inches  high  ;  disk  .75  broad.  Color  light  yellowish  brown; 
longest  tentacles  lighter,  spotted  with  white.  —  Charleston,  South  Carolina; 
L.  Agassiz. 

Bunodes  cavernata  Verrill. 

Syx.  Actinia  cavernata  Bosc,  Hist.  nat.  des  Vers,  1802  (the  young). 
—  Charleston,  South  Carolina  :   L.  Agassiz. 

Tthodactinia  Davisii  Agassiz,  Comptcs-Renuus,  XXV.  p.  677.  1847  ;  Revue 
zoologiqiie  Soc.  Cuv.  p.  .'594.  1847. 

Syx.  Actinia  obtruncata  Stimpsox,  Marine Tnvertebrata  of  Grand  Mr- 
nan,  p.  7,  1853  (littoral  variety).  —  Massachusetts  Bay;  L.  Agassiz. — 
Eastport,  Maine;  A.  E.  Verrill. 

The  genus  Tthodactinia,  established  by  Professor  Agassiz  in  1847,  is  per- 
fectly equivalent  to  Tealia  recently  proposed  by  Gosse,  the  type  of  the 
former,  II.  Davisii,  being  the  American  representative  of  li.  crassicornis  of 
Europe,  to  which  it  is  very  closely  allied. 

Aulactinia  Agassiz,  MS. 

Column  elongated,  upper  portion  capable  of  involution.  "Walls  with 
prominent  verruca?  in  longitudinal  rows  on  the  upper  portion  ;  the  marginal 
ones  larger,  trilobed,  the  lobes  again  subdivided  on  the  lower  side.  Tenta- 
cles short,  subequal. 

Aulactinia  capitata  Ao.,  MS.    1849. 

Column    much    elongated ;    basal   disk    somewhat    expanded.      Suckers 
8 


58  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

extending  down  about  an  inch  from  the  summit,  becoming  obsolete  below. 
Marginal  tubercles  well  developed,  lower  surface  lobed  and  papillose. 
Tentacles  numerous,  short,  and  thick.  Color  of  the  column  greenish  or 
purplish  brown,  with  lighter  lines;  tentacles  light  yellowish  green,  with  a 
dark  longitudinal  line  on  the  inside,  interrupted  by  white  spots.  —  Charles- 
ton, South  Carolina,  buried  in  sand  to  the  tentacles;   L.  Agassiz. 

Metridium  marginatum  M.  Edwards,  Coralliaircs.     1857. 

Syx.  Actinia  marginata  LkSukuk,  Journal  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  I. 
p.  172,  1S17;  Actinia  dianthus  D.wvsox,  Canadian  Nat.  and  Geologist, 
Vol.  HI.  p.  412,  figs.  1  and  2,  1858.  —  Massachusetts  Bay;  L.  Agassiz. 
—  I5ay  of  Fundy  ;  A.  E.  Yen-ill. 

This  i-  the  American  representative  of  M.  diantJius  of  Europe,  which  it 
closelv  resembles  in  colors  and  Conn.  Living  specimens  of  the  two  species, 
compared  side  by  side  in  the  Museum,  however,  have  shown  constant 
diflercn  ;es  in  the  arrangement  of  the  tentacles.  The  specimens  of  M. 
dianthus  were  forwarded  from  the  Free  Public  Museum  of  Liverpool, 
through  Capt.  J.   Anderson. 

Cereus  sol  Agassiz,  MS. 

Syx.     Actinia  sol  Agassiz,  MS.  184  9 . 

Very  contractile  and  variable  in  form;  when  fully  expanded  usually 
elongated,  narrowest,  in  the  middle,  expanding  both  above  and  below. 
Tentacles  very  numerous,  often  four  or  five  hundred,  those  of  the  primary 
cycles  about  half  an  inch  long,  scattered,  placed  about  midway  between  the 
mouth  and  the  margin  of  the  disk,  the  outer  ones  becoming  very  crowded 
and  small.  Actinostome  with  seven  t'olds  on  each  side.  Walls  for  a  short  dis- 
tance below  the  tentacles  covered  with  small  sinkers  and  pierced  with  loop- 
holes. Column  with  about  eight  broad  stripes  of  cinnamon  brown,  alternating 
with  narrower  gray  ones,  the  whole  surface  irregularly  spotted  with  dark 
brown,  darkest  near  the  tentacles;  mouth  bright  yellow,  surrounded  by  a 
ring  of  deep  crimson  or  purple;  outside  of  this  the  disk  is  greenish  blue, 
with  darker  radiating  lines;  inner  tentacles  with  a  white  longitudinal  line 
on  each  side  and  darker  brown  spots  on  the  inside  and  at  the  base  :  others 
nearer  the  margin  are  tipped  with  red,  then  farther  outward  they  become 
orange-yellow  with  red  tips,  while  the  outermost  ones  are  nearly  white. — 
Charleston,  South  Carolina,  on  shells  inhabited  by  hermit  crabs ;  L.  Agassiz. 

This  species  is  closely  allied  to  C.  Dellis  of  Europe,  the  type  of  the 
genus  Certus  of  Oken;  therefore  I  have  restricted  that  name  to  this 
section  of  the  genus  Sagartia  of  Gosse. 

Edwardsia  sipunculoides  Stimpson,  MS. 

Syx.  Actinia  sipunculoides  SriMPSON,  Marine  Inv.  of  G.  Menan,  p.  7, 
pi.  1,  f.  2,  18J3.  —  Eastport,  Me. ;   A.  E.  Yen-ill. 


MUSEUM   OF.  COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  59 


HYDROIDEA. 

Tabulata. 

Millepora  alcieomis  Linn.  Ed.  X.  175S;  Agassiz,  Florida  Reefs,  fig.  (un- 
published). 

Florida;  L.  Agassiz,  D.  P.  Woodbury.  —  Hayti;  D.  F.  Weinland. 
M.  moniliformis  Dana  is  a  form  of  this  species. 

Millepora  pumila  Dana,  Zooph.     1846. —  Porto  Cabcllo,  South  America; 

Coll.   Harvard  University. 

Millepora  intrieata  M.  Edwards.     1857.  —  Manilla;  J.  Russell. 

Millepora  insignis  Verrill. 

Corallum  forming  large,  meandering  plates,  giving  off  smaller  plate9 
at  riglit  angles  to  their  surface  ;  the  edges  are  thick,  obtuse,  often  lobed, 
and  sometimes  divided  into  short,  irregular  branches,  obtuse  at  the  ends ; 
surface  irregular,  covered  with  small  verrucae.  Cells  large  for  the  genus, 
the  principal  ones  situated  at  the  summit  of  slight  prominences,  surround- 
ed by  a  circle  of  about  six  small  ones.  —  Kingsmills  Islands;  A.  Garret. 

Heliopora  coerulea  Blainville.    1830. 

Sy.v.  Mtllepora  ccerulea  Pallas,  17GG;  Madrepora  ccerulea  Esper ; 
Pocillopora  ccerulea  Lamarck,  181 G.  —  Singapore;  Capt.  W.  II.  A.  Put- 
nam. 

Heliopora  compressa  Aterrill. 

Corallum  forming  a  thick,  massive  or  incrusting  base,  from  which  it 
rises  into  broad  winding  plates,  thin  at  their  edges,  which  give  off  from 
their  sides  smaller  plates  and  compressed,  lobe-like  branches.  Cells  some- 
what larger  than  in  the  preceding  species  and  more  distant ;  the  minute 
secondary  cells  are  also  less  numerous  and  smaller.  Surface  of  the  ccen- 
enchyma  covered  with  crowded  papillae,  terminating  in  two  or  three 
points.  —  Kingsmills  Islands;  A.  Garret. 

Pocillopora  caespitosa  Dana.  — Sandwich  Islands;  A.  Garret. 

Pocillopora  ligulata  Dana.  —  Sandwich  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Pocillopora  nobilis  Verrill 

Sy.v.  Pocillopora  verrucosa  Dana,  Zoophytes,  p.  5 2D,  pi.  50,  fig.  3  (non 
Lamarck).  —  Sandwich  Islands  ;  A.  Garret. 

Pocillopora  Danse  Verrill. 

Sy.v.  Pocillopora  favosa  Dana,  1.  c.,  pi.  50,  fig.  1  (non  Eur.).  —  Feejee 
Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Pocillopora  squarrosa  Dana.     1847.  — Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 

Pocillopora  acuta  Lamk.     1S16.  —  Feejee  Islands;  J.  D.  Dana. 


CO  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Pocillopora  sufYVuticosa  Verrill. 

This  species  forms  neat,  densely-branclied,  rounded  clumps,  often  eight 
inches  in  diameter,  resembling  those  of  P.  bulbosa,  with  small,  irregular, 
and  very  proliferous   branches.     The  surface  is  more  strongly  echinate 

than  that  of  the  latter,  with  much   deeper  and  less  open  cells.  —  Tahiti  ; 
A.  Garret. 

Pocillopora  ramiculosa  Verrill. 

Branches  very  slender  anil  elongated,  much  divided,  forming  rounded 
clumps  less  dense  than  the  preceding,  or  P.  ca>spifosa,  to  which  it  is  allied. 
Branchlets  very  small,  often  .1  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  subacute,  not 
crowded.  Cells  small  and  deep,  nearly  circular.  Surface  evenly  and 
crowdedly  echinulate.  This  species  resembles  P.  acuta  in  its  mode  of 
branching,  but  is  more  slender  and  has  much  smaller  cells  than  either  that 
species  or  P.  caspitosa. —  Kingsmills  Islands;  A.  Garret. 

Pocillopora  Stellata  Verrill. 

Corallum  forming  close  clumps  of  long,  moderately  thick,  subparallel 
branches,  which  are  covered  with  rising,  elongated,  subacute,  rather  distant 
verruca: :  surface  crowdedly  echinulate.  Cells  distant,  small,  and  deep  with 
twelve  prominent  radiating  plates,  which  give  them  a  stellate  appearance. 
This  species  resembles  P.  damicornis  somewhat  in  the  size  of  its  branches 
and  mode  of  growth,  but  is  entirely  distinct  in  the  structure  and  small  size 
of  the  cells. —  Zanzibar;   C.  Cooke,  Capt.  Ashby. 

Pocillopora  damicornis  Lamk.    1816. 

Syx.  Mailrepora  damicornis  Espkr. —  Singapore;  Capt.  "W.  H.  A. 
Putnam. 

Pocillopora  bulbosa  Ehr.     1834.  —  Singapore;  Capt.  "W.  II.  A.  Putnam. 

Pocillopora  capitata  Verrill. 

The  corallum  consists  of  a  cluster  of  large  irregular  branches,  often  an  inch 
or  more  in  diameter,  covered  with  elongated,  squarrose,  subacute  verrucae, 
.3  of  an  inch  long  and  .1  in  diameter,  about  .2  of  an  inch  distant.  Branch- 
lets  spreading,  often  rounded  and  clavate  at  the  end,  where  the  verrucae 
become  obsolete  ;  surface  echinulate,  the  grains  unequally  scattered,  most 
prominent  immediately  around  the  edges  of  the  cells,  which  are  small,  cir- 
cular, and  very  deep.  This  species,  although  very  variable  in  the  form 
and  size  of  the  branches,  is  very  distinct  from  all  the  other  species  known, 
in  the  character  of  the  surface  and  cells.  —  Acapulco,  Mexico;  A.  Agassiz. 


Published  January,  1864. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOuLOGY.  Gl 


No.  4.  —  List  of  the  Brachiopoda  from  the  Island  of  Anticosti, 
sent  by  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  to  different  Insti- 
tutions in  Exchange  for  other  Specimens,  with  Annotations. 
By  N.  S.  Shalek. 

Lingula  Bruqiere. 
Lingula  elegantula  Shaleh. 

Shell  large,  oblong,  transverse  diameter  a  little  over  one  half  the  distance 
from  beak  to  border;  margin  opposite  the  beak  evenly  rounded;  sides 
straight  for  over  two  thirds  the  height  of  shell,  suddenly  converging  to  the 
beaks;  apical  angle,  110°;  cardinal  edges  straight;  diameter  at  right  angles 
to  valves  one  fifth  the  height.  Valves  moderately,  nearly  equally,  convex. 
Homologue  of  toothed  valve  most  convex,  depressed  mar  the  bonier;  sur- 
face with  fine  concentric  lines  of  growth  accumulated  in  low  plications  on 
the  sides,  no  radial  striae.  The  surface  of  all  the  specimens  is  of  a  beautiful 
iridescent  blue  color,  apparently  the  original  hue  of  the  shell. 

Height,  1.7  inches;  width,  1  inch.  —  Upper  twenty  feet  of  Junction  Cliff, 
west  end  of  Anticosti. 

Lingula  Forbesi  Billixgs.     New  species  of  Lower- Silurian  Fossils;   Geol. 
Sur.  Canada.     June,  1862.  —  West  end  of  Anticosti. 

Strophomena  (Rafinesque)  Blainville. 

Strophomena  semiovalis  Shalek. 

Shell  semi-oval,  transverse  diameter  from  one  fifth  to  one  seventh  great- 
er than  from  the  beak  to  the  border ;  hinge-line  straight,  slightly  alate ; 
sides  slightly  converging  until  a  little  below  the  middle,  thence  rapidly  con- 
verging, sometimes  slightly  produced  opposite  the  hinge-line.  Socket-valve 
flat  or  slightly  concave,  over  the  surface  of  the  visceral  disk,  which  occupies 
from  one  half  to  two  thirds  the  distance  from  beak  to  border,  then  rather 
sharply  deflected ;  depth  of  valve  equal  to  one  third  the  length  from  beak 
to  border.  Surface  covered  with  close-set,  irregular  radial  stride  of  several 
sizes,  in  irregular  alternation,  crossed  by  very  fine  concentric  lines.  Near 
the  hinge-line  are  several  irregular  undulations,  which  do  not  extend  to  the 
middle  of  the  visceral  disk.  Area  of  socket-valve  narrow,  almost  linear, 
interrupted  by  a  small  cardinal  process.  Area  of  toothed  valve  rather 
broad,  half  a  line  wide  in  specimens  measuring  one  inch  from  beak  to  bor- 
der. Fissure  narrow,  with  a  V-shaped  deltidium. — Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti. 
Division  D,  Canada  Geological  Survey. 


C2  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Strophomena  reticulata  Shalbb. 

Sub-triangular,  one  third  wider  tban  liigh,  greatest  width  at  hinge-line. 
Toothed  valve  very  convex,  ventricose,  flattened  towards  the  extremities 
of  the  hinge-line,  slightly  alate,  most  convex  point  a  little  more  than  half 
the  distance  from  beak  to  border,  depth  equal  to  one  third  the  length  of 
hinge-line,  nearly  evenly  rounded  from  beak  to  border,  beak  minute, 
projecting  a  little  beyond  the  hinge-ledge,  area  one  and  a  half  lines  wide 
in  a  specimen  twenty  lines  broad,  fissure  broad,  without  deltidium.  Area 
of  socket-valve  about  one  fourth  that  of  toothed  valve  ;  surface  deflected 
to  correspond  with  opposite  valve.  Surface  covered  with  very  numerous, 
minute,  close-set  radial  striae,  crossed  by  numerous  concentric  undulations, 
which  near  the  umbo  are  small  and  even  ;  away  from  that  point  they  are 
irregular  and  larger.  —  Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti.  Division  D,  Canada  Geologi- 
cal Survey. 

Strophomena  arcuata  Shai.ek. 

Shell  obscurely  trigonal;  distance  from  beak  to  border  two  fifths  less  than 
length  of  hinge-line ;  greatest  width  at  hinge-line ;  toothed  valve  slightly 
convex,  or  nearly  flat  near  the  beak,  suddenly  evenly  deflected  at  two 
thirds  the  distance  from  the  beak  to  border ;  surface  covered  with  rather 
fine,  irregular,  radial  striai,  branching  several  times  from  beak  to  border, 
five  to  seven  in  the  space  of  one  line  on  the  border. 

This  species  is  a  member  of  the  same  group  with  Strophomena  eugh/pha 
of  the  Wcnlock  Lime.  —  Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti.  Division  D,  Canada  Geo- 
logical Survey. 

Strophomena  anticostiensis  Shaler. 
Syn.     Strophomena  alternata  Billings. 

Outline  rather  variable,  usually  evenly  semi-oval ;  length  of  hinge-line 
usually  a  little  greater  than  from  beak  to  border;  sides  nearly  straight  for 
half  the  distance  from  the  beak  to  border  ;  rest  of  border  gradually  curved. 
Toothed  valve  slightly  evenly  convex  ;  hinge-line  narrow  ;  teeth  very  slight. 
Socket-valve  flat  or  nearly  so;  hinge-line  narrow;  cardinal  process  very 
slight;  sockets  bordered  on  the  inside  by  a  pointed  tooth-like  ridge.  Mus- 
cular impressions  at  all  ages  indistinct  and  scarcely  impressed.  Surface 
covered  with  fine  punctate  markings.  Surface  of  shell  with  fine  strise  of 
two  or  three  sizes,  alternately  disposed. 

Very  closely  related  to  S.  alternata  Cox.,  from  which  it  differs  in  being 
far  more  regular ;  by  the  presence  of  ridges  below  the  sockets  ;  in  wanting 
the  tendency  to  a  sudden  deflection,  and  interior  thickening  of  the  bord"rs 
of  the  valves. —  Heath  Point,  Anticosti. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  63 

Strophomena  alterniradiata  Shalek. 

JShell  semi-oval ;  width  at  hinge-line  about  three  eighths  greater  than  from 
beak  to  border.  Toothed  valve  distinctly  convex  near  the  umbo  ;  remainder 
of  valve  flattened  or  slightly  concave.  Socket-valve  slightly  concave  just 
below  the  umbo,  slightly  convex  over  the  remainder  of  the  surface.  Sur- 
face of  both  valves  with  distinct  rounded  radii,  one  half  of  which  originate 
at  the  beak,  the  others  coming  in  by  implantation  at  the  border  of  the  um- 
bonal  third  of  the  valves;  intervals  very  wide.  Hinge  area  of  toothed 
valve  wide,  —  one  line  in  specimens  ten  lines  broad  ;  that  of  socket-valve 
narrow,  nearly  linear.  Fissure  wider  than  high;  teeth  small  ami  pointed. 
Brachial  supports  oblique,  meeting  at  an  angle  of  90°.  Cardinal  process 
very  small,  slightly  projecting.  —  Southwest  Point,  Anticosti. 

Brachyprion  Shaler. 

Dental  plates  transversely  much  elongated ;  scarcely  distinct  from  the 
remainder  of  the  hinge-line;  vertically  serrated. 
Type.  —  Strophomena  leda  Billings. 

Brachyprion  leda  Shaler. 

Syn.     Strophomena  leda  Billings.  —  Near  Becscie  Biver  Bay. 

Brachyprion  ventricosum  Shaler. 

Syx.     Strophomena  Philomela  Billings  ? 

Sub-trigonal  margin  opposite  the  hinge-line  rounded,  strongly  alate,  one 
side  being  unusually  more  prolonged  than  the  other;  hinge-line  two  fifths 
longer  than  distance  from  beak  to  border ;  width  on  hinge-line,  2.30  inches ;  at 
one  third  the  distance  from  beak  to  border,  1.33  inches;  convexity  of  toothed 
valve  equal  to  one  third  the  distance  from  beak  to  border.  Toothed  valve 
strongly  evenly  convex,  much  compressed  near  the  alations ;  highest  point 
two  thirds  the  distance  from  beak  to  border ;  hinge  area  narrow ;  fissure  very 
small,  triangular,  not  extending  to  the  beak.  Area  of  socket-valve  narrow, 
cardinal  process  small.  Surface  covered  with  very  fine  linear  radial  strise 
of  two  sizes,  four  or  five  of  the  smaller  between  each  pair  of  larger ; 
smaller  striae  nearly  microscopic ;  several  indistinct  concentric  undulations 
near  the  hinge-line.  —  Near  Southwest  Point,  Anticosti.  Division  E,  Can- 
ada Geological  Survey. 

Brachyprion  geniculatnm  Shaler. 

Shell  semi-elliptical  or  sub-trigonal ;  greatest  width  at  hinge-line  :  hinge- 
line  straight ;  about  one  third  greater  than  from  beak  to  border.  Socket- 
valve  plane  or  slightly  concave  over  the  visceral  disk,  suddenly  deflected  at 
two  thirds  the  distance  from  beak  to  border.  Surface  of  shell  with  a  number 
of  rounded  radial  strife  (twenty  to  fifty).  Those  on  the  centre  much  larger 
than  those  on  the  sides  ;  between   each  pair  from  five  to  nine  very  fine 


64  BULLETIN    OF    TIIE 

striae,  two  or  three  of  which  become  larger  than  the  others  as  they  approach 
the  border.  The  finest  striae  are  scarcely  visible  to  the  naked  eye.  —  Jump- 
er's Cliffs,  near  Southwest  Point,  Anticosti. 

Plectambonites  Pander. 

Pleetambonites  glabra  Shaler. 

Syn.     Leptcena  sericea  Billings,  Can.  Geol.  Survey,  1853 -5G,  p.  252. 

Shell  elongate  semi-oval ;  distance  from  beak  to  border  about  one  half  as 
long  as  hinge-line;  hinge-line  usually  equal  to  the  greatest  width  of  shell; 
outline  evenly  rounded.  Toothed  valve  strongly  convex;  depth  about  two 
fifths  (sometimes  one  half)  the  length  from  beak  to  border;  most  convex 
point  one  third  the  distance  from  beak  to  border;  a  little  flattened  near 
the  lateral  border;  strongly  ventricose  in  the  middle;  umbo  vising  above 
the  hinge-line;  slightly  incurved;  beak  not  distinct;  area  narrow ;  in  the 
same  plane  with  the  lateral  margin  ;  teeth  small,  slightly  projecting.  Socket- 
valve  curved  to  fit  the  toothed  valve  ;  area  a  little  less  in  width. 

Surface  of  valves,  with  very  numerous  nearly  microscopic  radial  stria?, 
closely  set,  of  nearly  equal  size,  scarcely  distinguishable  upon  the  centre, 
but  distinct  upon  the  borders  of  the  shell.  The  socket-valve  has  distinct 
radial  striae  of  a  larger  size  interspersed  among  these,  like  the  radii  on  the 
toothed  valve. 

This  form  differs  from  its  representatives  of  the  Lower  Silurian  by  its 
great  convexity,  as  well  as  by  many  other  characters.  —  Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti. 

Plectambonites  area  Shaler. 

Syn.     Leptcena  transversalis  Billings. 

Shell  semi-elliptical ;  greatest  width  at  hinge-line ;  hinge-line  one  third 
longer  than  from  beak  to  border.  Toothed  valve  in  adult  specimens  very 
ventricose;  depth  equal  to  one  third  the  length  of  hinge-line;  area  narrow, 
almost  linear;  fissure  very  small,  equilaterally  triangular;  muscular  im- 
pressions indistinct.  Socket-valve  concave,  flattened  towards  the  ex- 
tremities of  the  hinge-line;  area  narrow,  linear;  cardinal  process  very 
small ;  muscular  impressions  very  slight.  Surface  of  shell  with  twelve  to 
twenty  distinct  radii,  with  very  fine  radii  between.  —  Near  Southwest 
Point,  Anticosti. 

Plectambonites  tenera  Shaler. 

Very  closely  allied  to  the  form  called  by  Hall  Leptcena  iransversalis, 
from  the  Niagara  Lime  of  New  York;  it  is,  however,  less  convex,  and  more 
flattened  towards  the  extremities  of  the  hinge-line.  The  area  of  the  toothed 
valve  is  in  the  same  plane  as  the  margin.  The  umbo  scarcely  extends  above 
the  hinge-line  in  many  of  the  specimens.  Interior  has  not  been  compared. 
—  Near  Southwest  Point,  Anticosti. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  65 

Leptoena  Dalman. 
Leptacna  Julia  Shaleb. 

Syn.     Slrophomena  Julia  Billings. 

This  species  possesses  all  the  important  characters  of  the  group,  —  sudden 
deflection  of  the  valves,  corrugated  surface,  together  with  the  ridge  around 
the  visceral  disk  on  the  internal  surface  of  the  socket-valve.  —  Near  South- 
west Point,  Anticosti. 

Leptaena  quadrilatera  Shaler. 

Syn.     Slrophomena  depressa  Billings. 

Shell  margin  broadly  semi-oval ;  greatest  width  at  hinge-line,  which  is 
one  half  longer  than  from  beak  to  border.  Tooth-valve  with  the  visceral 
disk  nearly  rectangular;  laterally  about  two  sevenths  wider  than  from  beak 
to  point  of  deflection;  disk  convex  near  the  umbo,  concave  near  the  deflected 
margin;  umbo  rather  prominent,  broadly  rounded,  scarcely  rising  above  the 
hinge-line  ;  radii  fine,  with  even  interspaces,  somewhat  irregular  on  the  de- 
flected margin  ;  concentric  undulations  about  six  in  number,  wanting  on  a 
space  about  one  fifth  of  an  inch  wide  near  the  umbo  ;  hinge  area  very  nar- 
row, almost  linear  near  the  extremities;  socket-valve  nearly  flat  or  slightly 
convex  over  the  visceral  disk,  usually  with  a  distinct  mesial  sinus;  hinge 
area  narrow,  not  over  one  twenty-eighth  of  an  inch  in  width;  cardinal 
process  minute. 

This  species  may  prove  identical  with  the  form  from  the  Niagara  group 
of  New  York,  but  there  are  several  constant  exterior  differences.  The 
interiors  have  not  been  examined.  —  Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti. 

Orthis  Dalman. 

Orthis  laurentina  Billings,  Report  Can.  G.  S.  for  1857,  p.  297.  —  Junction 
Cliff,  Anticosti. 

Orthis  media  Shaler. 

Syn.     Orthis  elegantula  Bixlings. 

Shell  orbicular ;  hinge-line  one  half  less  than  width  of  shell.  Toothed 
valve  evenly  convex  ;  depth  in  adult  specimens  about  one  fourth  the  height, 
in  young  specimens  proportionately  a  little  greater;  umbo  slightly  elevated, 
rising  above  the  hinge-line  one  eighth  the  distance  from  beak  to  border, 
slightly  compressed,  occupying  at  the  hinge-line  about  one  fourth  the 
diameter  of  the  valve  ;  beak  small,  distinct,  slightly  recurved,  a  little 
overhanging  the  area ;  area  small,  rather  broad.  Fissure  triangular,  one 
third  as  wide  as  length  of  hinge-line.  Socket-valve  transversely  flattened, 
a  slight  mesial  depression  dividing  the  surface  into  two  lobations. 

Differs  from  its  European  representatives,  being  more  orbicular,  having 
a  less  projecting  umbo,  less  incurvation  of  beak,  much  finer  radial  strife, 
9 


GO  BULLETIN   OF    THE 

closer  approximation  of  the  brachial  supports  of  the  socket-valve,  and  k-ss 
length  of  the  adductor  impressions  in  the  same  valve. —  Southwest  Point, 
Anticosti. 

Orthis  anticostiensis  Siialer. 

Syn.  Orthis  porcaia  Billings  (non  McCoy),  Can.  Geol.  Sur.,  18C2, 
p.  135.  —  Ellis  Bay. 

Orthis  cequivalva  Shaleb. 

Syn.     Orthis  hybrida  Billings. 

Shell  somewhat  lenticular;  one  fifth  wider  than  from  beak  io  bo. Jc; 
valves  nearly  equal  in  convexity;  toothed  valve  a  little  the  most  prom- 
inent; hinge-line  rather  more  than  half  the  width  of  shell.  Toot  he  J  valve 
strongly  evenl}' convex,  a  little  depressed  opposite  the  umbo;  umbo  rising 
above  the  hinge-line  about  one  sixth  the  distance  from  Leak  to  border,  a 
little  laterally  compressed;  beak  minute,  scarcely  projecting  b>_\o-id  the 
hinge-line,  a  little  recurved  ;  area  about  twice  as  wide  as  that  of  socket- 
valve ;  width  one  sixth  of  length;  steeply  sloping;  most  convex  point  of 
valve  a  little  nearer  the  beak  than  border.  Socket-valve  nci'v  evenly 
convex;  very  slight  mesial  depression,  extending  from  the  i.rabo  to  the 
centre  of  valve,  where  it  fades  out,  and  is  succeeded  by  a  slight  ridge,  which 
extends  to  the  border,  beak  distinct  ;  not  rising  as  far  above  the  hinge-line 
as  that  of  opposite  valve  by  the  width  of  socket-valve  area.  Surface  with 
fine  dichotomous  stria?,  with  interspaces  as  wide  as  the  ridgtfl.  —  Junction 
Cliff,  west  end  of  Anticosti. 

Orthis  rhynconelliformis  Siialeu. 

Form  varying  from  sub-circular  to  pentagonal  ;  usually  with  the  transverse 
one  fill li  greater  than  the  diameter  from  beak  to  border;  hinge-line  very 
short,  scarcely  one  half  the  width  of  shell.  Toothed  valve  n.oderately  con- 
vex, with  a  very  broad,  shallow  mesial  sinus  beginning  near  the  centre,  and 
rapidly  widening  to  the  border;  umbo  somewhat  laterally  compressed; 
rising  above  the  hinge-line;  acutely  pointed  ;  not  recurved;  beak  minute, 
very  distinct.  Socket-valve  evenly  convex  ;  highest  point  near  the  middle 
of  valve;  usually  a  faint  mesial  sinus  near  the  beak,  fading  out  in  the  centre 
of  the  shell.  Fissure  of  toothed  valve  wider  than  lomr,  sides  curved  ;  teeth 
small,  laterally  compressed  ;  muscular  impressions  extending  to  or  beyond 
the  middle  of  valve,  very  lobatc  ;  lobes  pointed. 

Surface  with  numerous  angular  radii;  bifurcating  twice  from  beak  to 
border;  about  four  in  the  space  of  one  line  on  the  centre  of  border:  inter- 
spaces about  as  wide  as  ridges.—  Gull  Cove,  eastern  end  of  Anticosti. 

Orthis  alata  Sum. Kit. 

Shell    nearly  semi-oval,  sometimes  slightly  quadrate;    hinge-line  a  little 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  67 

less  than  diameter  of  shell ;  both  valves  slightly,  nearly  equally  convex. 
Toothed  valve  a  little  the  deepest.  Transverse  diameter  a  little  greater 
than  from  beak  to  border.  Area  of  both  valves  narrow.  Muscular  im- 
pressions of  toothed  valve  broader  than  long,  extending  about  one  fifth  the. 
distance  from  beak  to  border.  Surface  with  from  eighteen  to  twenty-two 
heavy,  rounded  ribs;  the  interspaces  on  the  border  double  as  wide  as  the 
ridges. 

This  species  may  be  identical  with  0.  Jlubellulum  var.  Hall  from  New 
York,  but  is  certainly  distinct  from  the  0.  Jlubellulum  Sow.  —  Salt  Lake 
Bay,  upper  part  of  Division  E,  Canada  Geological  Survey. 

Orthisina  D'Orb. 

Orthisina  diversa  Soalkr. 

Svx.     Orthisina  Verneuilli  Billings. 

Toothed  valve  usually  pentagonal;  socket-valve  quadrate;  hinge-line 
usually  equal  to  the  greatest  width  of  shell.  Toothed  valve  very  strongly 
projecting;  depth  about  one  half  the  width;  deepest  point  about  the  height 
of  hinge-line ;  umbo  somewhat  laterally  compressed,  usually  rising  high 
above  the  plane  of  the  hinge-line,  but  very  variable  in  this  respect;  umbo 
always  laterally  inclined,  indifferently  towards  either  extremity  of  the  hinge- 
line.  Surface  near  the  extremities  of  the  hinge-line  a  little  depressed  and 
slightly  recurved ;  area  very  large,  nearly  half  as  wide  as  long.  Fissure 
from  one  fourth  to  one  third  the  width  of  hinge-line  ;  deltidium  large, 
massive,  rarely  central,  with  distinct  circular  or  oval  foramen.  Socket- 
valve  with  a  broad  and  shallow  mesial  fold. 

This  form  is  closely  related  to  0.  Verneuilli  EiCil.,  but  differs  from  it  in 
the  size  of  the  radial  stria?,  and  in  many  important  internal  features. —  Ellis 
Bay,  Anticosti. 

Platystrophia  King. 
Platystrophia  regularis  Shaler. 

Outline  much  the  same  as  that  of  the  other  members  of  the  group. 
Socket-valve  one  fourth  more  projecting  than  the  toothed  valve:  hinge-line 
a  little  less  than  diameter  of  shell,  three  fifths  greater  than  distance  from 
beak  to  border.  That  portion  of  the  margin  occupied  by  the  fold  and  sinus 
is  re-entering,  the  depth  of  the  incurvation  being  about  equal  to  the  eleva- 
tion of  the  umbo  above  the  hinge-line.  The  depression  of  the  sinus  is 
occupied  by  only  two  plications,  and  the  ridge  by  three  similar  folds. 
On  either  side  are  from  eight  to  nine  plications.  These  numbers  seem 
invariable. 

The  muscular  impression  of  the  toothed  valve  is  long  and  narrow,  length 
being  three  or  four  times  its  width,  extending  nearly  to  the  centre  of  the 


G8  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

valve,  —  a  feature  in  which  this  species  differs  from  its  representatives.  — 
Junction  Cliff,  Anticosti. 

Atrypa  Dalman. 
Atrypa  impressa  Shaler. 

Sy.v.     Atrypa  reticularis  Billings. 

Outline  of  shell  obscurely  quadrate,  sometimes  rather  sub-orbicular ; 
about  as  broad  as  high ;  diameter  from  valve  to  valve  about  one  half  the 
distance  from  beak  to  border;  valves  nearly  equally  convex,  toothed  valve 
usually  a  little  the  greater;  hinge-line  straight,  nearly  as  great  as  width  of 
shell.  Tooth-valve  rather  convex,  side  slopes  more  abrupt  than  central, 
slightly  flattened  or  depressed  opposite  the  hinge-line.  Point  of  greatest 
convexity  at  one  third  the  distance  from  beak  to  border.  Umbo  projecting 
above  the  hinge-line  about  one  ninth  the  distance  from  beak  to  border; 
laterally  compressed  ;  recurved  ;  projecting  beyond  the  hinge-line  ;  beak 
minute,  pointed,  distinct.  Socket-valve  evenly  convex  ;  most  projecting 
point  a  little  nearer  the  hinge-line  than  border.  Originating  at  the  beak 
there  is  a  distinct,  rather  abruptly  depressed  mesial  furrow,  which  grows 
more  shallow  towards  the  centre  of  valve.  Radii  branching  twice  from 
beak  to  border,  a  little  larger  in  the  centre  of  valve  than  on  the  border. 

The  adult  condition  of  this  species  differs  strikingly  from  any  other  form 
included  under  the  name  of  Atrypa  reticularis.  —  Near  Southwest  Point, 
Anticosti. 

Atrypa  flabella  Shaler. 

Outline  sub-orbicular ;  transverse  diameter  about  one  fifth  greater  than 
from  beak  to  border;  the  slopes  on  either  side  of  the  beak  form  an  angle 
of  about  1 50°  at  the  valve.  Toothed  valve  convex  ;  rather  ridge-like  in  the 
centre;  depressed  on  the  border  opposite  the  beak;  slightly  compressed 
near  the  umbo;  most,  convex  point  one  third  the  distance  from  beak  to 
border;  beak  not  distinct  from  hinge-line.  Socket-valve  slightly  convex ; 
a  distinct  mesial  impression  divides  the  surface  into  two  lobes.  Surface  with 
from  twelve  to  eighteen  rounded,  club-shaped,  radial  ridges.  Near  the 
border  of  some  large  specimens  there  are  a  few  concentric,  imbricating 
lines  of  growth. 

It  is  not  unlikely  that  this  form  Ls  specifically  identical  with  the  A.  hemi- 
apJierica  IIai.l,  from  the  Clinton  of  New  York.  There  are  several  points 
of  difference  between  this  form  and  the  A.  hemispherka  Murch.  —  Near 
Sunt  Invest  Point,  Anticosti,  upper  part  of  Division  E,  Canada  Geological 
Survey. 

Rhyneonella  Fischer. 
Rhynconella  fringilla  Billings.     New  Species  of  Low.  Sil.  Fossils;  Can. 
Geol.  Sur.,  1862,  p.  141,  Fig.  118.  — Near  Gull  Cape,  Anticosti. 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  69 

Rhynconella  anticostiensis  Billings.     New  Species  of  Low.  Sil.  Fossils; 
Can.  Geoi.  Sur.,  1862,  p.  142,  Fig.  119.  —  English  Head,  Anticosti. 

Rhynconella  glacialis  Billings.     New  Species  of  Low.  Sil.  Fossils;  Can. 
Geol.  Sur.,  1862,  p.  143,  Fig.  120.  —  Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti. 

Brachymerus  Sualer. 

Anterior  (dorsal)  valve  the  more  convex.  Dental  lamellae  serrate  or 
lobed  on  the  outside.  Septa  of  anterior  valve  with  two  broad,  thin  brachial 
plates  projecting  from  them  near  their  junction  with  the  hinge-line;  ex- 
terior surface  plicated. 

A  member  of  the  same  family  as  Pentamerus,  to  which  it  is  very  closely 
allied. 

Type.  —  Pentamerus  VcrneuiUi  Hall. 

Brachymerus  reversus  Sualer. 

Syn\  Pentamerus  reversus  Billings  ;  Canada  Geol.  Survey,  1857,  p. 
295.  —  Junction  Cliff,  Anticosti. 

Pentamerus  Sowerbt. 
Pentamerus  Barrandii  Billings;   Canada  Geol.  Survey,  1857,  p.  296.— 
Bocscie  River  Bay. 

Athyris  McCoy. 
Athyris  turgida  Sualer. 

Shell  sub-circular ;  transverse  diameter  equal  to  distance  from  beak  to 
border ;  from  valve  to  valve  about  four  fifths  the  transverse  diameter. 
Toothed  valve  very  convex ;  most  elevated  at  one  third  the  distance  from 
beak  to  border ;  umbo  rising  above  the  hinge-line  for  a  distance  equal  to 
one  fifth  the  transverse  diameter;  closely  incurved;  beak  indistinct;  socket- 
valve  very  convex ;  most  elevated  point  one  third  the  distance  from  beak 
to  border;  depth  equal  to  one  third  of  the  diameter,  about  two  thirds  a? 
great  as  that  of  opposite  valve ;  umbo  rising  above  the  hinge-line  a  distance 
equal  to  one  fifth  the  diameter  of  valve.  Surface  with  numerous  distinct 
concentric  lines  of  growth.  Toothed  valve  with  a  narrow,  shallow  mesial 
sinus,  which  produces  a  flattening  for  some  distance  from  the  border. 

From  beak  to  border,  seven  lines;  transverse  diameter,  seven  lines; 
valve  to  valve,  five  lines.  —  Ellis  Bay,  Anticosti. 

Athyris  umbonata  Billings.     New  Species  of  Low.   Sil.  Fossils;    Canada 
Geol.  Survey,  1862,  p.  144.  —  Junction  Cliff,  Anticosti. 

Athyris   prinstana   Billings.     New  Species  of  Low.  Sil.  Fossils  ;    Canada 
Geol.  Survey,  1862,  p.  145.  — Prinsta  Bay. 

Athyris  Julia  Billings.      New  Species  of  Low.  Sil.  Fossils  ;    Canada  Geo! 
Survey,  1862,  p.  146. — Jumper's  Cliff,  Anticosti. 


70  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Camerella. 
Camerella  ops  Billings.    New  Species  of  Low.  Sil.  Fossils ;  Can.  Geol.  Sur- 
vey, 18C2,  p.  148. 

Spirifer  Sowerby. 

Spirifer  tenuistriatus  Shaler. 

Form  about  the  same  as  Spirifer  radiatus  Sow.;  hinge-line  straight  for  four 
fifths  of  the  diameter  of  shell,  then  gently  rounding;  transverse  diameter  a 
little  greater  than  from  umbo  to  border  ;  soeketxvalve  very  convex,  most 
prominent  point  about  middle  of  valve ;  umbo  rising  above  the  hinge-line 
for  a  distance  equal  to  one  fifth  the  transverse  diajneter  ;  strongly  recurved ; 
area  indistinctly  bounded.  Socket-valve  about  two  fifths  as  projecting  as 
toothed  valve ;  umbo  rising  a  little  above  the  hinge-line;  evenly  rounded; 
mesial  sinus  rather  shallow;  somewhat  angular.  Surface  covered  with  very 
fine,  almost  microscopic  radii ;  eight  or  nine  in  the  space  of  one  line  on  the 
border. 

This  species  differs  from  S.  radiatus  in  the  minuteness  of  the  radial  striee. 
It  is  possible  that  this  form  is  identical  with  the  S.  radiatus  of  Hall,  from 
the  Niagara  and  Clinton  of  New  York.  No  comparison  of  specimens  has 
been  made.  —  Near  Southwest  Point,  upper  part  of  Division  F,  Canada 
Geological  Survey. 

Fublished  June,  1865. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  71 


No.  5.  —  The  Fossil  Oephalopods  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative 
Zoology.     By  Alpheus  Hyatt. 

This  number  of  the  Bulletin  begins  a  series  of  notices  upon  the 
Cephalopoda,  which'  besides  fulfilling  the  common  object  of  similar 
numbers  already  published,  has  some  peculiar  features  of  its  own  re- 
quiring a  few  explanatory  remarks. 

The  Ammonoids,  including  all  the  Cephalopoda  with  serrate  1  or 
foliated  septa,  the  Clymeniae,  Goniatites,  Ceratites,  and  Ammonites 
proper,  are  separated  by  Professor  L.  Agassiz  from  the  Nautiloids 
and   Dibranchiate  Cephalopoda  as  a  distinct  order.  . 

The  typical  group  of  this  order  is  the  so-called  genus  Ammonites. 

De  Montfort  and  De  Ilaan  both  recognized  a  few  new  genera  within 
the  limits  of  this  incongruous  genus  before  Von  Buch  described  the 
natural  groups  which  continue  to  bear  his  names.  Von  Buch  called 
these  groups  '"families,"  but  classified  them  under  the  "  generic"  name 
of  Ammonites  ;  thus  plainly,  although  indirectly,  announcing  his  opinion 
of  their  sub-generic  value. 

Professor  L.  Agassiz,  for  many  years  past,  considered  some  of  these 
groups  as  natural  families,  and  deemed  them  capable  of  division  into 
subordinate  groups  of  generic  importance. 

lie  imparted  this  fundamental  idea  to  me  at  the  beginning  of  my 
studies  upon  these  interesting  fossils,  and  selected  the  five  genera  which 
are  referred  to  his  authority  as  examples  of  the  manner  in  which  I 
should  treat  this  subject,  at  the  time  he  recommended  the  investigation 
to  me.      Further  than  this,  the  work  is  my  own. 

I  have  pursued  no  special  method  in  the  classification,  but  have 
directed  my  whole  attention  to  the  verification  of  the  groups  defined 
by  Von  Buch  and  others,  and  the  subsequent  testing  of  the  limits  of 
the  included  genera  by  a  careful  comparison  of  all  the  minor  divisions 
in  each  natural  group. 

The  shells  or  mineral  casts  of  every  group  have  been  first  arranged 
in  series  of  species,  and  the  limits  of  these  series  determined  the  genera. 
The  generic  characteristics  were  selected  from  those  peculiar  to  all  the 
species  of  each  series  which  were  not  common  to  the  family  or  any 
more  comprehensive  division. 


72  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

The  materials  in  the  possession  of  the  Museum  afford  ample  means 
for  the  successful  completion  of  such  a  plan,  which,  more  than  any 
other,  demands  large  numbers  of  specimens.  They  consist  of  collec- 
tions purchased  from  Professors  Bronn  and  L.  de  Koninck,  MM.  Bou- 
cault  and  Duval,  Dr.  A.  Krantz,  and  others,  besides  those  obtained  by 
exchange,  among  which  is  a  valuable  collection,  numbering  many 
species,  from  the  Museum  of  Stuttgart. 

I  am  indebted  to  Professor  L.  Agassiz  for  the  free  use  of  all  the 
specimens  in  these  collections,  and  desire  to  express  here  my  acknowl- 
edgment of  the  facilities  for  study  given  me  both  by  himself  and  the 
Institution. 

The  position  of  the  female  Argonauta  in  its  shelly  ease,  and  of  the 
Nautilus  in  its  shell,  show  conclusively  that  the  periphery  of  the  whorls 
of  an  Ammonite  is  the  abdominal  side,  as  stated  by  Richard  Owen  and 
Pictet.  This  view,  therefore,  has  been  adopted,  and  the  outer  side  of 
the  whorl  is  called  "  the  abdominal,"  and  the  inner  "  the  dorsal  side.*' 
in  accordance  with  their  opinion. 

No  further  changes  have  been  made  in  the  nomenclature  generally 
employetl,  with  the  exception  of  the  use  of  the  words  "  pike  "  for  ribs, 
and  "genicular"  for  the  knees  of  the  ribs,  these  being  found  somewhat 
more  convenient  in  the  description  of  the  species  than  the  ordinary 
terms. 

Loivcr  Lias. 

PSILOCERATID^3. 

Shell  smooth.  Umbilicus  open,  exposing  the  sides  of  the  whorls;  sides 
depressed. 

Psiloceras  Hyatt. 

Abdomen  smooth;  shell  often  folded ;  sides  depressed  ;  septa  foliated. 
"Win  iris  enveloped  to  the  line  of  the  superior  lateral  lobes. 

Psiloceras  psilonotum  Hyatt. 

Ammonites  psilonotus  Quens'dt,  Die  Cepli.,  p.  '3,  pi.  3,  fig.  18. 

Loc.  Nellingen,  Balingen,  Rudern,  and  Semur;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck, 
Prof.  Fraas,  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  L.  Agassiz,  and  Boucault. 

It  is  quite  probable  that  Annii.  erugatus  Bean  (Phil.  Geol.  York,  p.  1C8, 
pi.  13,  figs.  1-3)  is  identical  with  this  species,  and  if  so,  it  will  become 
necessary  to  changt  the  name  to  Psil.  erugatus,  and  consider  Pail,  pailono- 
tus  as  a  synonyme. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  73 

Psiloceras  planorbis  Hyatt. 

A  mm.  planorbis  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  5,  p.  C9,  pi.  448. 
Loc.  Semur  ;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Psiloceras  planilaterale   Hyatt. 
Loc  Semur;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Sides  flattened,  but  more  convex  than  other  species,  and  marked  with 
transverse  striae  ;  occasionally  plicated  at  intervals,  resembling  in  this 
respect  plicated  variety  of  P.  psilonolus.  Abdomen  depressed,  convex, 
smooth  ;  the  siphon  merely  indie  ited  by  a  raised  line  in  the  adult. 
Umbilicus  shallow,  showing  great  breadth  in  the  young. 

Psiloceras  acutidorsale   Hyatt. 
Loc.  Semur ;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Closely  allied  to  P.  psilonotus,  but  with  smaller  whorls  and  a  more 
acute  abdomen.  It  is,  also,  not  so  gibbous,  and  has  a  greater  number  of 
whorls  than  either  P.  planllateralls  or  P.  planorbis.  The  shell  may  be 
marked  with  very  numerous  plications,  or  smooth  on  the  sides.  Abdomen 
prominent,  acute.     Umbilicus  shallow. 

Note.  It  i>  probable  that  Amm.  lalesulcatus  Hauer,  Ueber  d.  Ceph.  aus  d.  Lias  d. 
Nordustlichen  Alpen,  p.  44,  pi.  9,  figs.  1  -  3,  is  the  type  of  another  genus  of  this  family, 
having  a  keeled  and  sulcated  abdomen. 

DISCOCEEATID M* 
Arniocerast  Agassiz. 

Abdomen  keeled  and  channelled,  but  both  parts  are  variable,  being 
sharply  defined  in  some  species  and  very  shallow  in  others.  Abdominal 
lobe  shallow  and  broad  ;  not  so  deep  as  the  superior  lateral  lobe  ;  deeper 
than  the  inferior  lateral ;  both  divided  equally.  Superior  lateral  cell 
equally  divided.  Inferior  lateral  cell  unequally  divided.  The  young 
retain  the  smooth  character  for  some  time  during  their  growth,  thus  giving 
to  the  umbilicus  a  decidedly  embryonic  aspect.  Envelopment  extends 
laterally  to  the  genicular. 

Arnioceras  cuneiforme   Hyatt. 
Loc.  Semur;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Sides  regularly  convex.  Pila;  depressed,  most  prominent  in  the  centre, 
and  sloping  gradually  to  either  side  ;  striae  of  growth  very  fine  and  sharply 
bent.  Abdomen  obtusely  angular;  keel  indicated  by  a  ridge;  channels 
obsolete  or  only  indicated  by  shallow  depressions.  The  auxiliary  lobes 
near  the  umbilicus  are  hardly  more  than  mere  serrations. 

*  Equals  Arietes.  f    Apvews,  a  ram. 

10 


74  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Amioceras  incipiens  Htatt. 

Loc.  Semur;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Sides  convex.  Pila-  with  prominent  geniculae.  Abdomen  obtusely  an- 
gular ;  keel  prominent,  narrow;  channels  either  absent  or  well  defined  by 
shallow,  narrow  depressions.  Young,  smooth  as  in  Amioceras  cuneiformist 
but  the  pilae  begin  with  a  line  of  abdominal  tubercles,  which  quickly 
spread  into  true  pilas. 

Amioceras  semicostatum  Hyatt. 
Loc.  Semur  ;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Sides  convex.  Pilse  have  square  prominent  geniculae.  Abdomen  flat- 
tened.  Keel  may  be  a  depressed  ridge  without  channels,  prominent 
without  channels,  or  prominent  with  well-defined  narrow  channels ;  in 
the  fust  variety  the  young  retain  the  smooth  character  until  a  later  period 
than  in  the  second  and  third. 

Amioceras  kridiforme    Hyatt. 

Amm.  hridion  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  I.,  p.  205,  pi.  51. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Adnet,  Semur  ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  M. 
Boucault. 

This  species  differs  from  A.  semicostatus  in  the  larger  number  and  nar- 
rowness of  the  whorls,  and  the  prevalence  of  the  deeply  channelled  variety. 
The  rihs  of  the  young  are  not  as  smooth  as  in  Am.  semicostatus,  and 
they  are  developed  at  an  earlier  period. 

It  differs  also  from  Amm.  hridion  Ziet.,  in  the  absence  of  tubercles,  and 
its  contracted  abdomen. 

Amioceras  tardecrescens  Hyatt. 

Amm.  tardecrescens  Hauer,  Die  Ceph.  d.  Lias  d.  Nordbstlichen  Alpen, 
p.  20,  pi.  3. 

Loc  Durrenberg,  Ravensberg,  Hildesheim,  Thionville,  and  Whitby, 
Coll.    Dr.    Krantz,   L.    de   Koninck,   and    Damon. 

Amioceras  ceratitoides  L.  Agassis, 

Aram,  ceratitoides  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  239,  pi.  19,  fig.  3. 
Amm.  cent*  Giebel,  Fauna  der  Vorwelt,  Ceph.,  p.  757. 
Amm.  ceras  Hauer,  Die  Ceph.  d.  Lias  d.  Nordbstlichen  Alpen. 
Loc.  Whitby  and  Adnet;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Amioceras  falcaries  Hyatt. 

Amm.  falcaries  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  70,  pi.  7,  figs.  6,  7. 
Loc.  Bonnert,  Semur,  Raidwangcn,  and  Basel;    Coll.  L.  de  Koninck, 
Boucault,  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  and  Prof.   Bronn. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  10 

Ophioceras  *  Hyatt. 
Keel  constant,  sometimes  obscure.  The  shell  has  a  greater  number  of 
whorls  than  in  the  preceding  genus,  because  the  young  increase  more 
slowly  in  size.  Pilae  straight,  depressed  ;  appear  at  an  early  stage  in  the 
young,  and  are  well  defined  upon  the  second  whorl.  Umbilicus  open  ; 
sides  exposed.  Abdominal  lobe  deeper  and  narrower  than  the  lateral 
lobes.  Superior  lateral  lobes  broad,  shallow,  and  but  very  little  longer- 
than  the  inferior  lateral.  The  auxiliary  lateral  lobes  are  cuneiform,  and 
incline  toward  the  umbilicus. 

Ophioceras  torus  Hyatt. 

Amm.  torus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurassique,  I.,  p.  212,  pi.  53. 
Loc.  Semur,  Quedlinburg,  ltinteln,  and  Schauniburg ;    Coll.  Boucault, 
Dr.  Krantz,  and  De  Koninck. 

Ophioceras  raricostatum  Hvatt. 

Amm.  raricostatus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  18,  pi.  13,  fig.  4. 
Amm.  raricostatus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  105,  pi.  13,  figs.  16-18. 
Loc.    Semur,   Boll,   and    Balingen,   Wiirtemberg ;    Coll.   Boucault,   Dr. 
Krantz,   Mus.   of  Stuttgart,  and   De   Koninck. 

Ophioceras  Johnstoni  Hvatt. 

Amm.  Johnstoni  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  5,  p.  70,  pi.  449. 
Amm.  arietis  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt,  p.  3,  pi.  2,  fig.  4,  but  not  figs.  2  and  3.f 
Amm.  raricostatus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurassique,  I.,  p.  212,  pi.  54. 
Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Semur,  and  Balingen  ;  Coll.  Wright,  Damon,  Bou- 
cault,  and  De   Koninck. 

Ophioceras  kridioides  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Basle ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn. 

Abdomen  like  that  of  0.  Johnstoni,  but  rounder  than  in  0.  raricostatus, 
and  the  young  increase  more  rapidly  than  in  either  of  these  species.  The 
pike  are  most  prominent  near  the  abdomen,  and  in  the  young  they  are 
more  numerous  than  in  the  adult,  numbering  about  twenty-four  on  the 
third  whorl,  and  about  twenty  on  the  fifth  whorl. 

Abdominal  and  superior  lateral  lobes  broad  and  shallow,  the  latter 
equally  divided.  There  are  two  pointed  auxiliary  lobes  on  each  side.',  and 
the  superior  lateral  cells  are  equally  divided. 

Ophioceras  commiscens  Hyatt. 

Loc  Lyme  Regis ;  Coll.  B.  M.  Wright. 

*  *O0u,  a  serpent. 

|  Figs.  2  and  3  nre  identical  with  Discoceras  spiratissimus  IJi/att  (Amm.  spiratia- 
simus   Quens'dt). 


76  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Sides  convex  ;  pilae  depressed.  The  pilae  and  tbe  form  of  the  whorl  in 
the  young,  greatly  resemble  those  of  adult  raricoslalus,  but  in  the  adult 
they  closely  resemble  those  of  the  adult  shell  of  0.  Johnstoni. 

Septa  unknown. 

Ophioceras  tortile   Hyatt. 

Amm.  tordlis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurassique,  I.,  p.  201,  pi.  49. 
Loc.  Seinur  ;   Coll.  Boucault. 

Ophioceras  deciduum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Nodotianus  Ilauer,  Cepli.  d.  Lias  d.  Nordostlichen  Alpen,  p.  24, 
pi.  G,  figs.  1  -3. 

Loc.  Whitby;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

Amm.  Nodotianus  D'Orb.  is  probably  generically  different,  since  it  has 
a  more  acute  abdomen. 

Discoceras  *  Agassiz. 

Abdomen  keeled  and  channelled.  Loth  characters  are  constant,  al- 
though the  channels  are  sometimes  nearly  obsolete.  Pilae  smooth.  Geni- 
cuhe  curved  forwards.  Umbilicus  open.  Sides  flattened,  exposed.  Ab- 
domen depressed.  Abdominal  lobe  deep  and  narrow.  Superior  lateral, 
and  inferior  lateral,  narrow  and  irregularly  pointed  with  minor  lobes. 

Superior  lateral  cell  equally  divided.  Inferior  lateral,  unequally  di- 
vided. First  auxiliary  cell  well  developed,  and  nearly  as  long  as  the 
inferior  lateral. 

Discoceras?  laqueus  Hvatt. 

Amm.  laqueus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  43,  pi.  3,  fig.  5. 

Loc.  Nellingen,  Wiirtemberg;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

The  abdomen  of  the  specimen  examined  is  so  obscured  by  its  matrix  of 
limestone,  that  the  reference  of  the  species  to  this  genus  must  be  considered 
doubtful. 

Discoceras  ophioides  Hyatt. 

Ammonites  ophioides  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurassique,  p.  241,  pi.  CI. 
Loc.  Semur  ;  Coll.  Boucault. 

Discoceras  carusense  Hyatt. 

A  ikiii.  carusensis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurassique,  I.,  p.  284,  pi.  8,  figs.  3-6. 
A  mm.  spiratissimus  Ilauer,  Ceph.  d.  Lias  d.  Nordostlichen   Alpen,  p.  IS, 
pi.  3,  li^'s.  1  -3. 

Loc.  Semur,  Balingcn;  Coll.  Boucault,  L.  de  Koninck,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

*  AiWoj,  a  quoit. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  77 

Diseoceras  spiratissimum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  arietis  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  3,  pi.  2,  fig.  3,  not  figs.  2  and  4* 
Amm.  spiratissimus  Quens'dt,  Hand.  Pet.,  p.  355,  pi.  27,  fig.  9. 
Loc.  Filder,  Vaihingen,  Metzingen,  Hohcnheim,  and  Stuttgart ;    ColL 
De  Koninck,  Dr.  Krantz,  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  and  Boucault. 

Diseoceras  Conybeari  L.  Agassiz. 

Amm.  Conybeari  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  70,  pi.  131. 
Amm.  obliquecostatus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  20,  pi.  15,  fig.  1. 
Amm.  Conybeari  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  35,  pi.  2G,  fig.  2. 
Amm.  Conybeari  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  I.,  p.  202,  pi.  50. 
Amm.  Conybeari  Ilauer,  Ceph.  d.  Lias  d.  Nordiistlichen  Alpen,  p.  16, 
pi.  2,  figs.  1-6. 

Loc.  Semur,  Waltzing,  and  Balingen  ;  Coll.  Boucault  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Coronicerast  Hyatt. 

Keels  prominent,  constant ;  channels  well-defined.  Pihe  tuberculated 
and  bent.     Umbilicus  open.     Sides  of  the  whorls  exposed. 

Pila;  preceded  by  a  line  of  tubercles  in  the  young,  which  gradually  elon- 
gate to  form  the  tuberculated  pilae  of  the  adult.  Ventral  lobe  deep  and 
narrow.  Lateral  lobes  unequally  divided.  Superior  lateral  cell  irregu- 
larly divided  ;  abrupt  on  the  siphonal  side  ;  sloping  rapidly  on  the  opposite 
side.  Inferior  lateral  cell  exceedingly  variable  in  form,  but  unequally 
divided. 
Coroniceras  latum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Semur  and  Tubingen  ;  Coll.  Boucault  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Abdomen  very  broad,  overhanging.  Tubercles  prominent.  Keel  varies 
from  thick  to  attenuated ;  and  channels,  from  well-defined  to  almost 
obsolete.  Septal  lobes  broad  and  shallow,  irregularly  divided.  Superior 
lateral  cell  upon  the  abdomen.     Inferior  lateral  cell  broad  and  short. 

Coroniceras  kridion  Hyatt. 

Amm.  kridion  Held.  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  4,  pi.  3,  fig.  2. 

Amm.  kridion  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  70,  pi.  7,  fig.  8. 

Loc.  Semur  and  Stuttgart ;  Coll.  Boucault  and  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

Coroniceras  bisulcatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  bisulcatus  Brug.,  Ency.  Meth.,  v.  1,  p.  39,  pi.  13. 

Amm.  bisulcatus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  187,  pi.  43. 

Loc.  Semur  and  Balingen  ;  Coll.  Boucault  and  De  Koninck. 

*  Figs.  2  and  4  have  already  been  referred  to  OpMoceras  Johnstoni. 
t  Kopavls,  a  crown. 


78  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Coroniceras  multicostatum  Hyatt. 

Aium.  multicostatus  Sow..  Min.  Couch.,  v.  5,  p.  76,  pi.  454. 
A  mm.  multicostatus  Ziet.,  Verst  Wiirt.,  p.  35,  pi.  26,  fig.  3. 
A  mm.  multicostatus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  6  7,  pi.  7,  fig.  2. 
Loc.  Leicestershire  and  Seinur ;  Coll.  Sir  C.  Lyell  and  M.  Boucault. 

Coroniceras  coronaries  Hyatt. 

A  mm.  coronaries  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  68,  pi.  7,  fig.  5. 
Loc.  Semur,  Boll,  Balingen,  and  Stuttgart ;  Coll.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz, 
L.  de  Koninck,  and  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

Coroniceras  lyra  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Balingen,  Aalen,  and  Tubingen  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck  and  Dr. 
Krantz. 

Abdomen  prominent,  rounded.  Keel  and  channels  -well  defined.  Tu- 
bercles well  defined.  Pilas  depressed  laterally  near  the  tubercles  and 
swelling  out  below.  Radial  diameter  of  the  whorl  increases  faster  in  pro- 
portion to  the  transverse  than  in  C.  coronaries.  Superior  lateral  lobe  un- 
equally divided  by  deep,  narrow  minor  lobes  into  three  branches.  Superior 
lateral  cell  on  the  abdomen.  Inferior  lateral  cell  long  and  deeply  indented 
by  minor  lobes. 

Coroniceras  rotiforme    Hyatt. 

A  mm.  rotiformis  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  5,  p.  76,  pi.  453. 
A  mm.  ro'i/nrmis  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  35,  pi.  26,  fig.  1. 
Amm.  rotiformis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  1,  p.  293,  pi.  89,  figs.  1-3. 
Amm.  caprolinus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  1,  p.  240,  pi.  64,  figs.  1,  2. 
Loc.  Semur,  Vaihingen,  and  Stuttgart ;  Coll.  Boucault,  Mus.  of  Stuttgart, 
and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Coroniceras  sinemuriense   Hyatt. 

Amm.  sinemuriensis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  303,  pi.  95,  fig.  1. 
Loc.  Semur  ami  Schaiehof;  Coll.  Boucault  and  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 
The  old  of  this  species  is  frequently  described  as  .1//;/;;.  Bucklandi. 

Coroniceras  orbiculatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Bucklandi  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  35,  pi.  27,  fig.  1. 
A  mm.  Bucklandi  Quens'dt,  Der  dura,  p.  6  7,  pi.  7,  fig.  3. 
Loc.  Basel,  Schippenstadt,  and  Balingen  ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn,  Dr.  Krantz, 
and  L.  de  lvoninck. 

Coroniceras  Bucklandi  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Bucklandi  Sow.,  .Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  69,  pi.  130. 
Amm.  Bucklandi  Phil.  Gftol.  York.,  p.  1,  pi.  1  t.  fig.  13. 
Loc.  Lyme  Regis  and  Semur  ;  Coll.  B.  M.  Wright  and  M.  Boucault 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  79 

Coroniceras  Brookei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Brookei  Sow.,  Min.  Concli.,  v.  2,  p.  203,  pi.  190. 
Loc.  Lyme  Regis  ;  Coll.  B.  M.  Wright. 

Asterocera3*  Hyatt. 
Keel  well  defined,  but  varies  from  prominent  and  narrow  to  depressed 
and  broad.  Channels  obscure  to  deep  and  well  defined.  Pilae  smooth,  de- 
pressed;  often  bent  on  the  sides,  and  appear  in  the  young  as  lateral  folds 
or  large  tubercles.  Sides  in  some  species  not  enveloped;  in  others,  cov- 
ered to  fully  one  half  of  their  breadth.  Ventral  lobes  very  deep.  Lat- 
eral lobes  very  shallow.  Superior  and  first  auxiliary  cells  short  and  broad 
Inferior  lateral  cell  very  prominent. 

Asteroceras  tenue  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Semur,  Aargau,  Aalen,  and  Goppingen  ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn  and 
Dr.  Krantz. 

Abdomen  narrow.  Dorsal  region  broad,  angular  at  its  junction  with 
the  sides.  Keel  narrow  and  prominent ;  channels  large.  Superior  lateral 
cell  almost  obsolete.     Inferior  lateral  unequally  divided. 

Asteroceras  trigonatum  Hyatt. 
Amm.  Brookei  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  3G,  pi.  27,  fig.  2. 
Loc.  Aalen  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

Transverse  section  of  the  whorl  obtusely  triangular.  Pilaa  prominent  in- 
ternally, decreasing  gradually  externally.  Tubercles  are  not  constantly 
found  in  the  adult  as  in  Amm.  Brookei,  and  it  differs,  also,  from  the  latter  in 
the  narrowness  of  the  abdomen,  the  greater  proportional  breadth  of  the 
dorsal  region,  and  the  decided  inclination  of  the  sides  of  the  adult  whorls. 

Asteroceras  obtusum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  obtusus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  151,  pi.  167. 

Amm.  redcarensis  Young  and  Bird,  Geol.  York.,  pi.  14,  fig.  15. 

Amm.  obtusus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  191,  pi.  44. 

A?)im.  slellaris  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  191,  pi.  45. 

Amm.  Turneri  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  15,  pi.  11,  fig.  5. 

Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Whitby,  Robin  Hood's  Bay,  Semur,  Boll,  Balingen, 
Bempfiingen,  Stuttgart,  and  Adnet;  Coll.  L.  Agassiz,  Robert  Damon, 
Marder,  B.  M.  Wright,  L.  de  Koninck,  Dr.  Krantz,  M.  Boucault,  and  Mus. 
of  Stuttgart. 

The  identification  of  Zieten's  Turneri  with  Amm.  obtusus  Sow.,  was 
made  with  authentic  specimens  from  Zieten's  former  collection  sent  to  this 
Museum  by  the  Museum  of  Stuttgart,  and  although  the  characteristics  are 

*   Aottjp,  a  star. 


80  BULLETIN   OF    THE 

widely  divergent,  the  series  between  the  two  forms  showed  them  to  be  ono 
species  with  only  local  differences. 

Asteroceras  stellare  Hyatt. 

Amm.  stellaris  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  211,  pi.  93. 

A  mm.  Turneri  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  5,  p.  75,  pi.  452. 

Amm.  stellaris  Haucr,  Ceph.  d.  Lias  d.  Nordo.itlichen  Alpen,  p.  22,  pi.  5, 
figs.  1,  2. 

Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Gloucester,  and  Scmur  ;  Coll.  B.  M.  Wright,  Har- 
der, Dr.  Krantz,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Asteroceras  Collenotii  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Collenotii  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  1,  p.  305,  pi.  95. 
Loc.  England  and  Semur ;  Coll.  Marder  and  M.  Boucault. 

LIPAROCERATIDJE  Hyatt. 

Microceras*  Hyatt. 

Abdomen  flattened  ;  sides  rounded  or  flattened.  The  pilae  in  the  adult 
are  undivided  upon  the  abdomen,  and  are  continuous  with  the  large,  single 
lateral  pila?,  which  last  may  be  ornamented  with  either  one  or  two  rows  of 
small  tubercles,  or  be  bare. 

The  envelopment  only  covers  the  abdomen  of  each  internal  whorl,  reach- 
ing no  farther  than  the  first  row  of  tubercles,  umbilicus  is  consecpuently  ex- 
posed in  all  the  species.  The  increase  of  the  radii  is  slow,  the  species  have 
a  greater  number  of  whorls  than  in  succeeding  genera,  and  are  also  of 
smaller  size.  The  septa  are  remarkable  for  their  unequally  divided  lobes 
and  cells,  the  large  size  of  the  abdominal  lobe,  the  insignificant  size  of  the 
two  lateral  lobes,  especially  the  inf.  lateral,  and  the  great  breadth  of  the 
cells. 

Microceras  biferum  Hyatt. 

Anon,  bifer  bispinosus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  101,  pi.  13,  figs.  10,  11, 
and  13. 

Amm.  bifer  nudicosta  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  104,  pi.  13,  fig.  14. 

Loc.  Gloucester,  Pleinsbach,  Balingen,  Boll ;  Coll.  L.  de.  Koninck,  Dr. 
Krantz,  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

Microceras  confusum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  confusus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  12/,  pi.  75,  figs.  8,  9. 
Loc.  Lansdown  Station,  near  Cheltenham,  and  Gloucester ;   Coll.  L.  de 
Koninck. 

*  blinpos,  small. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  81 

Microceras  mixtum  Hvatt. 

Amm.  polymorphus  mizlus  QuensMt,  Der  Jura,  p.  128,  pi.  15,  fig.  12. 

Loc.  Gloucester ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck. 

Is  not  the  same  as  polymorphus  mixtus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  87,  pi.  4, 
fig.  10.  This  has  a  keel  and  must  be  of  a  different  genus  from  the  speci- 
mens here  described,  which  appear  to  be  identical  with  the  figure  in  "  Der 
Jura,"  as  quoted  above. 

DEEOCEEATIDiE.* 
Derocerast  Hyatt. 
"Whorl  circular  ;  pilte  depressed  ;  linear  between  and  bifurcated  on  the 
tubercles.  Tubercles  large,  prominent,  pointed,  and  in  a  single  row. 
Septal  lobes  with  numerous  pointed,  deeply  cut,  irregularly  shaped  minor 
lobes.  Abdominal  lobe  very  deep,  and  level  with  superior  lateral  lobe. 
Siphonal  cell  long  and  narrow. 

Deroceras  ziphius  Hvatt. 

Amm.  ziphius  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wurt.,  p.  6,  pi.  5,  fig.  2. 

A  mm.  arnatus  sparsinodus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  82,  pi.  4,  fig.  5. 

Amm.  ziphius  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  5)7,  pi.  12,  fig.  2. 

Loc.  Loppingen  ;  Cull.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

Note.  The  foregoing  descriptions  of  the  Discoceratidse,  Liparoceratid.-e,  and  Dero- 
ceratidse  comprehend  all  the  species  in  the  Museum  collections  from  the  Lower  Lias, 
except  Amm.  Birchii  Sow.,  which  I  was  unable  to  assign  to  its  proper  place. 

Middle  Lias. 
LIPAROCERATID^I. 

There  is  throughout  the  three  genera  of  this  family  a  positive  agreement 
in  the  septa  and  the  mode  of  development. 

The  young  of  Liparoceras  indecisus  resemble  the  adult  of  ^4  ndrogynoce- 
ras,  and  the  young  of  Androgynoceras  Tn  turn  closely  resemble  the  adults 
of  Microceras. 

Abdominal  lobe  is  large  and  not  generally  so  deep,  but  of  less  width  than 
the  superior  lateral.  Inferior  lateral  lobe  very  narrow,  and  of  insignificant 
size  ;  one  auxiliary  lobe  is  usually  visible  on  the  side.  The  minor  lobes 
are  particularly  sharp  or  pointed  ;  penetrate  deeply  into  the  cells.  Both 
cells  and  lobes  unequally  divided  by  three  minor  lobes. 

Microceras. 

Microceras  planicosta  Hyatt. 

Amm.  planicosta  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  1C7,  pi.  73. 

*  Includes  the  Dorsati.  f  Ae'pas,  skin. 

11 


8-  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Amm.  planicosla  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  242,  pi.  Go. 
Loc.  Whitby,  Yeovil,   Semur,  Besancon,   Gundersliofen ;    Coll.   Sir  C. 
Lye!!    L.  de  Koninck,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Microceras  crescens  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Whitby  and  llautenberg  bei  Schbppenstadt ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck, 
Dr.  Krantz,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

This  species  is  closely  allied  to  Microceras  arcigerens ;  it  differs,  how- 
over,  in  being  mure  robust,  the  young  are  larger,  the  radii  of  the  spiral  in- 
crease faster,  and  the  sopta  differ  in  having  a  very  deep  ventral,  and  very 
shallow,  superior  lateral  and  inferior  lateral  lobes.  The  minor  lateral  lobes 
are  also  of  the  simplest  kind,  the  superior  and  inferior  lateral  cells  being 
but  slightly  indented  by  them. 

Microceras  arcigerens  Hyatt. 

Amm.  arcigerens  Phil.  Geol.  York,  p.  1G3,  pi.  13,  fig.  9. 
Loc.  Whitby,   Semur,   St.  Cyr  bei   Lyon  and  Aargau  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Ko- 
ninck, Prof.  Bronn,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Microceras  maculatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  capricornus  nudus  Schlot.  Petrefactenkunde. 

Amm.  maculatus  Young  and  Bird,  Geol.  York,  pi.  14,  fig.  12. 

Amm.  maculatus  Phil.  Geol.  York,  p.  135,  pi.  13,  fig.  11. 

Amm.  capricornus  nudus  Ziet.,  Yerst.  Wiirt.,  p.  6,  pi.  4,  fig.  8. 

Amm.  capricornus  nudus  Bronn,  Leth,  Geog.,  Sh.  4,  p.  340,  pi.  22,  fig.  1. 

Amm.  capricornus  nudus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  9G,  pi.  12,  fig.  3. 

Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Whitby,  Semur,  Pouilly,  Besancon,  Milhaud  Dep. 
L'Aveyron,  Gundershofen,  Rautenberg  bei  Schbppenstadt,  and  Ce^enberg; 
Coll.  Sir  C.  Lyell,  Damon,  L.  Agassiz,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Microceras  sinuosum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Pouilly  en  Auxois,  Venarey  pres  Semur,  Gundershofen,  Pveutlingen, 
and  Brunswick  ;  Coll.  M.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

This  species  differs  from  Planicosla  in  its  development,  acquiring  the 
pihe  at  an  earlier  age  of  growth,  and  from  M.  arcigerens  and  .1/.  maculatus 
in  the  forward  bend  of  the,  abdominal  pihr,  the  double  row  of  tubercles 
ornamenting  the  lateral  pih-e  of  the  adult,  and  the  more  complicated  char- 
acter of  the  septa. 

Abdominal  lobe  with  abrupt  sides.  Minor  lobes  long  and  narrow.  Su- 
perior lateral  lobe  broad  and  shallow ;  inferior  lateral,  proportionately  very 
narrow.  Superior  lateral  cell  very  broad  ;  inferior  lateral,  much  longer 
and  narrower,  and  very  irregularly  and  deeply  cut  by  minor  lobes,  resem- 
bling in  this  respect  the  upper  portion  of  the  superior  lateral  cell. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  83 

Androgynoceras  *  Hyatt. 
The  sides  of  the  adult  whorl  slope  outward  and  are  ornamented  with 
pilte,  usually  single  and  set  with  two  rows  of  tubercles.  Abdomen  narrow. 
The  large  pila>  of  the  young  are  split  into  smaller  pilae  on  the  abdomen  of 
the  adult,  but  usually  retain  the  characteristics  of  Microceras  until  a  late 
period  of  growth.  The  septa  are  more  complicated  than  in  Microceras, 
and  the  increase  by  growth  in  the  radii  of  the  spiral  is  much  greater,  the 
species  consequently  have  fewer  whorls- and  are  of  larger  size.  The  en- 
velopment may  cover  up  only  the  abdomen  of  each  internal  whorl,  or  ex- 
tend over  the  whole  side  to  the  internal  line  of  tubercles. 

Androgynoceras  hybridum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  andror/i/noccras  D'Orb..  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  285,  pi.  85. 
Loc.  Semur  ;  Coll.  M.  Boucault. 

Androgynoceras  appressuni  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Rautenberg ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

This  species  is  very  much  tlatter  than  Liparoceras  Bechei,  and  differs  also 
in  the  development  of  the  shell.  The  pilae^for  a  long  time  resemble  those 
of  Microceras,  the  peculiar  pilae  of  this  genus  are  not  brought  out  distinctly 
until  the  fifth  whorl  is  attained. 

Envelopment  extends  laterally  to  the  internal  line  of  tubercles.  The 
external  tubercles  are  larger  and  more  prominent  than  the  internal  row. 
Abdominal  lobe  is  deeper  than  the  superior  lateral,  which  last  is  deeper  but 
hardly  broader  than  the  inferior  lateral.  Lateral  lobes  and  literal  cells 
unequally  divided. 

Liparoceras t  Hyatt. 

This  genus  differs  from  both  of  those  previously  described  in  the  greater 
breadth  of  the  abdomen,  the  greater  increase  of  the  radii  of  the  spiral,  the 
consequently  smaller  number  of  whorls,  and  the  larger  size  of  the  species. 

The  envelopment  may  cover  only  the  abdomen  of  each  internal  whorl, 
or  extend  to  the  inner  row  of  tubercles. 

The  pila?  of  the  adult  are  split  into  numerous  smaller  pila?,  and  are  orna- 
mented on  the  sides  with  two  rows  of  tubercles.  The  young  are  smooth  on 
the  first  two  or  three  whorls,  the  pilffl  never  appear  to  assume,  except  to  a 
very  slight  degree,  the  characteristics  of  Microceras,  but  at  once  take  on 
the  less  prominent  and  diffuse  character  of  L.  Bechei. 

The  septa  also  at  an  early  period  are  more  complicated  than  those  of  the 
adult  Microceras.  The  superior  lateral  cell  is  narrower  proportionately 
to  the  inferior  lateral,  than  in  the  preceding  genera. 

*    AvSpuyvvos,  hermaphrodite.  f  Anrapos,  shining. 


8-4  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Liparoceras  indecisum  Hyatt. 

Loo.  Lyme  Regis,  Balingen,  and  Rautenberg  bei  Schoppenstadt ;  Coll. 
B.  M.  Wright,  L.  de  Koninck,  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

This  species  is  closely  allied  to  Liparoceras  Henleyi,  but  differs  in  the 
form  of  the  whorls  which  are  much  flatter  on  the  sides,  do  not  spread  lat- 
erally so  rapidly,  and  arc  more  numerous. 

The  tubercles  and  lateral  pike  are  hardly  so  prominent,  but  more  nu- 
merous than  in  Henleyi.  The  specimen  from  Rautenberg,  which  apparently 
belongs  to  this  species,  has  the  tubercles  and  displays  the  characteristics  of 
ilicroceras  in  the  abdominal  pilaa  on  the  fourth  whorl.  The  envelopment 
Lardy  covers  the  external  line  of  tubercles,  which  are  larger  and  more 
prominent  than  the  internal  line  of  tubercles.      Septa  were  not  observed. 

Liparoceras  Henleyi  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Henleyi  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  161,  pi.  172. 
NauL  striatum  Rein,  Naut.  et  Argo,  p.  85,  ph. 8,  figs.  Go,  GG. 
A  nun.  striatum  Ziet.,  Vcrst.  Wiirt.,  pi.  5,  fig.  G. 
A  mm.  Henleyi  Bronn,  Lcth.  Geog.,  p.  4  4  0.  pi.  23,  fig.  7. 
Loc.  Hcwlitt's  Hill,  Stonehouse,  Lyme  Regis,  Bourgngne,  Milhand,  St. 
Thibault,  Vcnarey,  Evrecy  in  Normandy,  and  Reschnau  in  Lippe ;    Coll. 
L.  de  Koninck,  B.  M.  Wright,  M.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

Liparoceras  Bechei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Dechei  Sou-..  Min.  Conch.,  v.  3,  p.  143,  pi.  280. 
A  mm.  Bechei  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  .n>",  pi.  28,  fig.  4. 
Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Seinur,  Milhaud,  St.  Amand,   Balingen,  and  Rauten- 
berg :  Coll.  B.  M.  Wright,  M.  Boucault,  L.  de  Koninck,  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

DEROCERATIDH. 
Deroceras  Hyatt. 
Deroceras  Davoei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Davoei  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  4,  p.  71,  pi.  350. 
Amm.  Davoei  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  1!*,  pi.  14,  Li-r.  -• 
Amm.  Davoei  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  1,  p.  276,  pi.  81. 
Amm.  Davoei  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  91,  pi.  5,  fig.  G. 
Loc.  Seinur,  Ardeche,  Vassy,  Ginund,  Elsass,  and  Durrenberg;    CoIL 
M.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

Deroceras  densinodum  IIvatt. 

Amm.  armatus  densinodum  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura.  p.  105,  pi.  13,  figs.  9,  10. 
Loe.  Zurmicthen  bei  Iloltzmiinden ;  Coll.  Mas.  of  Stuttgart. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  85 

Deroeeras  armatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  armatus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  215,  pi.  95. 
Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Dorsetshire;  Coll.  Damon. 

Pei'onoceras  *  Hyatt. 
Abdomen  depressed;  pihe  depressed;  linear  between  the  tubercles;  usu- 
ally, but  not  invariably,  bifurcated  by  the  tubercles  on  the  sides,  though  in- 
variably bifurcated  on  the  abdomen.  Tubercles  depressed,  often  obtuse 
upon  the  easts,  but  pointed  and  prominent  upon  the  shell.  Septa  not 
closely  crowded  as  in  Deroeeras,  or  so  profusely  branching. 

Peronoceras  fibulatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Jibulalus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  4,  p.  147,  pi.  407,  figs.  3,  4. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Boll,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Robin  Hood's  Bay,  St.  Qucntin 
pres  de  la  Verpillier;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  L.  Agassiz,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  L.  de 
Koninck. 

Peronoceras  subarmatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  subarmatus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  4,  p.  146,  pi.  407. 

Amm.  subarmatus  Young  and  Bird,  Geol.  York.,  p.  250,  pi.  13,  fig.  3. 

Loc.  "Whitby  ;   Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

Peronoceras  muticum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  muticus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  1,  p.  274,  pi.  80. 

Loc.  Semur  and  St.  Ainand  ;  Coll.  Boucault  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Peronoceras  nodogigas  Hyatt. 

Amm.  nodogigas  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  125,  pi.  15,  fig.  8. 
Loc.  Goppingen  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart. 

Peronoceras  fraudulentum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Lyme  Regis ;  Coll.  Damon. 

Abdomen  rounded,  and  much  broader  than  the  back  ;  tubercles  promi- 
nent, salient ;  pilas  single,  thick,  depressed.  Young  resemble  Planicosta, 
having  the  flattened  abdomen  and  pilre  of  the  latter  until  a  late  period. 
Abdominal  lobe  narrow  and  deep.  Superior  lateral  cell  narrow  and 
deeply  cut  by  pointed  minor  lobes.     Si  phonal  cell  long,  narrow,  serrated. 

Peronoceras  alternum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Milhaud,  De'p.  de  l'Aveyron  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck. 
Whorls  much  flattened  ;  sides  gibbous  ;  tubercles  depressed,  widely  sep- 
arated by  numerous  intervening  smooth  pihe.     Tubcrculated  pilae,  large 

*  Ilfpovr),  a  clasp. 


86  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

and  mo«t  prominent,  divided  on  the  abdomen.  The  young  are  smooth  for 
the  first  two  of  three  whorls  ;  tubercles  occupy  the  whole  next  whorl,  ex- 
tending gradually  into  tuberculated  pilse  between  which  the  smooth  pilaj 
finally  appear.  Abdominal  lobe  larger  and  deeper  than  superior  lateral 
lobe.  Inferior  lateral  lobe  small,  shallow  ;  both  unequally  divided.  Su- 
perior lateral  cell  entirely  on  the  abdomen.  Inferior  lateral  cell  on  the 
side. 

THYSANOID^J. 
This  family   includes   the   Fimbriati,    Ligati,    and    Heterophylli,    which 
agree  in  the  foliaceous  character  of  the  septa. 

Thysanoceras.* 

Abdomen  rounded  ;  whorls  exposed  ;  the  envelopment  does  not  extend 
laterally  over  mure  than  one  third  of  each  interior  whorl. 

Abdominal  lobe  about  the  same  depth,  but  narrower  than  the  superior 
lateral  lobe:  the  latter  is  equally  divided  by  a  peculiar  minor  cell  of  a  lobi- 
form  aspect.  The  siphonal  cell  is  cuneiform,  and  the  superior  and  inferior 
lateral  cells  equally  divided. 

Thysanoceras  flmbriatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  fimbrialus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  145,  pi.  164. 

Amm.  fimbriates  D'Orb.,  Ten-.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  313,  pi.  98. 

Amm.  fimbriates  Bronn,  Lcth.  Geog.,  p.  441,  pi.  '2:3,  fig.  2. 

Loc.  Lyme  Regis,  Semur,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Milhaud,  Dep.  de  l'Avey- 
ron,  Balingen,  Gundershofen,  Schombcrg,  Falkenhagen,  Lippe,  and  Sondel- 
fingen  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  B.  M.  Wright,  M.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz, 
L.  de  Koninck,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

Rhacocerast  Aoassiz. 

Abdomen  rounded  ;  sides  of  the  whorls  flattened  :  envelopment  extends 
about  two  thirds  over  each  of  the  interior  whorls,  or  entirely  encloses  them, 
covering  up  the  umbilicus. 

The  lobes  and  cells  gradually  decrease  in  size  inwardly,  and  are  remark- 
able tin-  the  profusion  and  peculiar  foliaceous  aspect  of  the  minor  cells. 

Rhacoeeras  Loscombi  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Loscombi  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  183,  pi.  183. 
Amm.  heterophyllus  numismalU  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  100,  pi.  6,  fig.  5. 
Amm.  Loscombi  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  262,  pi.  75. 
Loc.  Lyme  Regis  and   Semur;  Coll.  Damon,  Wright,  Boucault,  and  L 
de  Koninck. 

*  Qvvavos,  fringe.  t    I'ukos-,  r-     <  I. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  87 

In  some  individuals  the  abdomen  is  crenulated,  resembling  in  this  respect 
7t.  Boblayei. 

Rhacoeeras  Boblayei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Boblayei  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Cepli.,  p.  25,  pi.  69. 

Loe.  St.  Thibault  pres  de  Semur;  Coll.  Boucault. 

The  character  of  the  septa  allies  this  species  closely  with  Loscombi,  and 
the  abdominal  crenulations  are  of  the  same  character  as  those  of  some  in- 
dividuals in  that  species. 

DACTYLOID^. 

This  family  includes  the  Planulati  and  part  of  the  Macrocephali. 

Coeloceras*  Hyatt. 

Pilas  on  the  abdomen  bifurcated  ;  lateral  pila?  single  or  bifurcated  with 
one  external  row  of  tubercles,  occurring  regularly  on  each  pilae,  or  at 
intervals  on  widely  separated  pihe.  The  young  are  very  much  flatter  than 
the  adult,  and  the  sides  consequently  very  narrow.  They  are  smooth  for 
the  first  one  or  two  whorls,  subsequently  becoming  tuberculated. 

The  tubercles  almost  immediately  spread,  forming  the  pilas ;  they  may 
enlarge  and  remain  distinct,  or  become  absorbed  and  disappear  upon  alter- 
nate pilre.  The  abdomen  remains  perfectly  smooth  for  some  time  after  the 
lateral  pilas  are  developed,  not  acquiring  the  abdominal  pilas  until  the  third 
whorl  is  reached.  Septa  close  together  and  very  intricate  in  the  adult 
Abdominal  lobe  broader  and  deeper  than  the  superior  lateral.  The  in- 
ferior lateral  is  nearly  the  same  in  size,  and  both  are  unequally  divided  into 
three  shallow,  minor  lobes.  Superior  lateral  cell  lobiform  and  together 
with  the  inferior  lateral,  unequally  divided  by  two  minor  lobes. 

Coeloceras  centaurus  Hyatt. 

Amm.  centaurus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  266,  pi.  76,  fig.  3-6. 
Loc.   St.  Amand,  Semur,  and  Balingen  ;    Coll.  L.  de  Koninck  and  M. 
Boucault. 

Coeloceras  pettos  Hyatt. 

Amm.  }>e(tos  Quens'dt,  Flotzge.,  p.  178. 
Amm.  pcltos  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  135,  pi.  16,  fig.  14. 
Amm.  crcnatrtfi  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  pi.  1,  fig.  4. 

Loc.  Venarey,  Milhaud,  Balingen,  Metzingen,  Hinterweiler ;  Coll.  Bou- 
cault, L.  de  Koninck,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

*  KoiXor,  hollow. 


88  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

PHYMATOID^.* 

Phymatoceras  Hyatt-I 

Abdomen  may  be  flattened  or  rounded,  but  never  acute  ;  has  no  chan- 
nels in  the  adult.  Envelopment  covers  the  abdomen  of  each  internal  whorl. 
Radii  of  the  spiral  increase  more  slowly  than  in  the  succeeding  genera. 
The  young  are  smooth  on  the  first  or  second  whorl,  the  tubercles  begin 
either  on  the  second  or  third  whorl,  and,  gradually  dividing,  spread  them- 
selves out  upon  the  abdomen  as  bifurcated  pilse,  which  disappear  on  the 
borders  of  the  channels.  The  keel  makes  its  appearance  at  an  early  stage, 
probably  on  the  second  whorl,  but  the  channels  are  not  visible  until  a  much 
later  period,  and  disappear  in  the  adult. 

Abdominal  lobe  broad  and  deep.  Superior  lateral  broader,  but  of  about 
the  same  depth  ;  inferior  lateral,  very  shallow.  Superior  and  inferior  lat- 
eral cells  equally  divided  ;  both  are  short,  broad,  and  but  slightly  indented 
by  the  minor  lobes. 

Phymatoceras  robustum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Plateau  de  Larzac  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

The  abdomen  of  this  species  is  flattened,  the  sides  of  the  whorls  gibbous 
and  narrow,  and  the  keel  very  prominent.  The  channels  in  the  young  are 
shallow,  and  the  whorls  unusually  broad.  Superior  lateral  cell  is  deeper 
than  the  inferior  lateral,  and  the  latter  is  straight ;  the  auxiliary  cell  is 
divided  by  one  small   auxiliary   lobe. 

Hammatoceras  J  Hyatt. 

Abdomen  may  be  either  rounded  or  acute,  always  keeled,  but  never 
sulcated.  Pilae  are  prominent  and  straight.  Envelopment  may  extend 
over  one  half  the  sides,  or  only  cover  the  abdomen  of  each  internal  whorl. 
The  young  develop  as  in  Phymatoceras,  but  are  generally  much  broader; 
the  pilrc,  also,  do  not  become  prominent  so  soon.  Nor  do  they  invariably 
begin  by  the  development  of  tubercles  on  the  sides,  but  may  make  their 
appearance  as  fine,  raised  lines,  and  afterwards  become  tuberculated. 

During  the  earlier  stage  of  growth  the  different  species  have  a  very  close 
resemblance  to  the  adult  Macrocephali.  The  lobes  are  more  complicated 
than  in  Phymatoceras.  Abdominal  lobe  broad  and  deep,  and  continued 
into  two  long,  narrow,  minor  lobes.  Superior  lateral  narrower  than  the 
abdominal.  Inferior  lateral  hardly  wider  than  the  minor  lobes  of  the 
superior  lateral,  and  of  about  the  same  depth.  Abdominal  cell  blunt. 
Superior  lateral  and  inferior  lateral  very  narrow  and  deeply  indented  by 
the  minor  lobes. 

*  Includes  part  of  the  I'alciferi.  t  *C/xa,  a  swelling.         J    Afi/xa,  n  knot. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  89 

Hammatoceras  insigne  Hyatt. 

A  mm.  insignis  Schlo*.  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  20,  pi.  15,  fig.  2. 

Aram,  insignis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Cepli.,  p.  34  7,  pi.  112. 

Amm.  insignis  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  280,  pi.  40,  figs.  4,  5. 

Loc.  Uhrwciler  and  Oundcrshofen ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Hammatoceras  variabile  Hyatt. 

Amm.  variabilis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Cepli.,  p.  350,  pi.  113. 
Loc.  Bantz  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

AMALTHEOIDiE. 
Pleuroceras  *  Hyatt. 

Abdomen  flat,  with  keel  and  channels  well  defined ;  keel  crenulated ; 
channels  vary  from  obsolete  to  deep  and  well  defined.  Pilas  swelling  be- 
low, tubcrculated;  genicular  bend  prominent.  Tubercles  lateral,  arranged 
along  the  line  of  envelopment.     Umbilicus  open. 

Ventral  lobe  narrow  and  but  slightly  deeper  than  lateral  lobes;  the 
latter  unequally  divided.  Inferior  lateral  lobe  small,  shallow,  equally 
divided.  Superior  lateral  cell  only  partly  exposed  on  the  side,  and  to- 
gether with  the  inferior  lateral  unequally  divided.f 

Sub-Gknus  No.  1. 
Sides  of  whorls  exposed. 
Pleuroceras  hawskerense  Hyatt. 

Amm.  hawskerensis  Y.  and  B.,  Phil.  Geol.  York.,  p.  164,  pi.  13,  fig.  8. 
Loc.  Yeovil ;  Coll.  II.  W.  Marder. 

Pleuroceras  spinatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  spinatus  Brug.,  Ency.  Meth.,  t.  1,  p.  40,  pi.  14. 
Amm.  spinatus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  I.,  p.  209,  pi.  52. 
Loc.  Whitby,  Yeovil,  Avallon,  Quedlinburg,  Coburg,  Franconia,  Banz, 
Cundershofen,  and  Canal  du  Danube :  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  Dr.  Krantz, 
L.  de  Koninck,  Bronn,  Marder,  and  Boucault. 

Pleuroceras  costatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  costa'us  Schlot.,  Pet.,  p.  GG,  pi.  12. 
Naut.  cotta'us  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Argo.,  p.  87,  figs.  G8,  69. 
Amm.  costatus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  5,  pi.  4,  fig.  7. 
Amm.  costatus  Bronn,  Leth.  Geog.,  pi.  22,  fig.  12. 

*  TVKtvpov,  a  rib. 

t  Septa  are  described  from  one  species  only,  —  Pleuroceras  spinatum. 
12 


90  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Loc.  England,  Tours,  Weimar,  Bantz,  Uhrweiler,  and  Bas-I!liin  ;  Coll. 
Sir  C.  Lyell,  M.  Boucault,  Bronn,  Ur.  Krantz,  and  L.  Agassiz. 

Sub-Genus  No.  2. 
Sides  of  whorls  partially  covered  and  flatter,  especially  in  the  young. 

Pleuroceras  pseudo-costatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  costatus  nudus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  95. 

Amm.  costatus  nudus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  171,  pi.  21,  fig.  3. 

Loc.  Yeovil,  Duinbleton  near  Cheltenham,  Itogueport,  Canal  du  Danube, 
Plateau  de  Larzac,  Goslar,  Gundershofen,  Baiern  ;  Coll.  Bronn,  L.  de  Ko- 
ninck,  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Pleuroceras  pseudo-spinatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  costatus  spinatus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  1  71,  pi.  21,  fig.  1-3. 
Amm.  costalus  spinatus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  95,  pi.  5,  fig.  10. 
Loc.  Yassy  (De'p.  Yonne),  Milhaud   (Dep.  de  l'Aveyron),  and  Courcy ; 
Coll.  Boucault  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Pleuroceras  vittatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  viltatus  Phil.  Geol.  York., .p.  101,  pi.  13,  fig.  1. 
Loc.  Whitby;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

Amaltheus  De  Montfort. 
Ablomen  acute,  keeled,  and  channelled  ;  whorls  compressed  laterally. 
Keel  crenulated,  well  defined.     Tubercles,  when  present,  are  in  a  single 
row  along  the  line  of  envelopment.     Umbilicus  open,  with  the  sides  of  the 
whorls  exposed  or  only  partially  covered. 

Amaltheus  gloriosus  Hyatt. 

Amm.  amaltheus  coronatus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  169,  pi.  20,  figs.  9-12. 
Loc.  Milhaud,  Balingen,  Pliensbach,  Boll,  and  Ofterdingen ;  Coll.  L.  de 
Koninck,  Bronn,  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Amaltheus  salebrosus  Hyatt. 

Amm.  amaltheus  spinosus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  95,  pi.  5,  fig.  4. 

Amm.  amaltheus  spinosus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  108,  pi.  20,  fig.  8. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Semur,  Strasburg,  Miihlhausen  (Bas-Rhin),  Pliensbach, 
Boll,  Geyslingen,  Balingen,  and  Gundershofen  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  Boucault, 
Bronn,  L.  Agassiz,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Amaltheus  turgidus  Hyatt. 

.1//;??).  Amaltheus  gibbosus  Schlot.,  Pet.  p.  10. 

Amm.  Amaltheus  gibbosus  Ziet.,  Yerst.  Wiirt.,  p.  4,  pi.  4,  fig.  2. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  91 

Amm.  paradoxus  Stahl,  Zlet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  15,  pi.  11,  fig.  6. 

Loc.  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Ileiningcn,  Boll,  Lutzude  bei  Hanover,  Semur, 
Gbppingen,  Ofterfeld  bei  Goslar,  and  Pliensbach  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart, 
Dr.  Krantz,  L.  de  Koninck,  Prof.  Bronn,  L.  Agassiz,  and  Boucault. 

Amaltheus  margaritatus  De  Mont. 

Amaltheus  margaritatus  De  Montfort,  Conch.  Sys.,  p.  91. 

Amm.  acutus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  51,  pi.  17,  fig.  1. 

Naut.  rotula  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Argo.,  p.  59,  pi.  1.  fig.  5. 

Amm.  Stokesi  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  205,  pi.  191,  figs.  9,  10. 

Amm.  clevelandicus  Phil.  Geol.  York.,  pi.  14,  fig.  6. 

Amm.  amaltheus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  4,  pi.  4,  fig.  1. 

Amm.  margaritatus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  I.,  p.  240,  pi.  6  7. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Avallon,  Semur,  Milhaud  (Dep.  de  l'Aveyron),  Bas-Rhin, 
Lutzude  bei  Hanover,  Eislingen,  Rezingen,  Wasseralfingen,  Gundershofen, 
Miihlhausen,  Boll,  Ubstadt  bei  Bruchsal,  Falkenhagen  in  Lippe,  Balingen, 
and  Gbppingen  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  L.  de  Koninck,  Prof.  Bronn, 
L.  Agassiz,  and  Boucault. 

Amaltheus  praestabilis  Htatt. 

Amm.  amaltheus  nudus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  16  7,  pi.  20,  fig.  4. 

Amm.  amaltheus  nudus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  94. 

Loc.  Robin  Hood's  Bay,  Scarborough,  Y\  hitby,  Mende  in  Lozere,  Venarey 
pres  Semur,  Milhaud,  St.  Cyr  pies  de  Lyon,  Metzingen,  Lutzude  bei  Hano- 
ver, Balingen,  Geislingen,  and  Gbppingen  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  Dr. 
Krantz,  L.  de  Koninck,  M.  Boucault,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  L.  Agassiz. 

CYCLOCERATID-E. 

This  family  is  remarkable  for  containing  species  which  on  the  one  side 
ally  it  with  the  Liparoceratidce,  and  on  the  other  with  the  higher  Hildocera- 
tidcE.  There  is,  however,  a  general  agreement  in  the  development  and  in 
the  septal  characteristics,  which  unite  them  in  one  family.  The  form  is 
much  more  compressed  laterally  than  in  the  Liparoceratidce  and  the  tuber- 
culations  of  the  pilas  separate  them  from  the  Hildoceratida;.  The  young 
of  Tropidoceras  Actceon  resemble  the  adults  of  Cycloceras  Vahlani.  and  the 
young  of  the  last  in  their  turn  are  like  the  adults  of  Platypleuroceras  latce- 
costa  ;  thus  all  three  genera  are  closely  connected  by  development.  The 
abdominal  lobe  is  of  about  the  same  depth  as  the  superior  lateral ;  the  latter 
is  unequally  divided  into  three  minor  lobes  of  variable  length,  and  there  is 
only  one  auxiliary  lobe  exposed  to  view  on  the  side.  Superior  lateral  cell  is 
generally  equally  divided,  and  of  great  breadth.  Inferior  lateral,  narrower 
and  more  prominent. 


92  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Platypleuroceras  *  Hyatt. 
Abdomen  nearly  as  broad,  or  broader,  than  the  dorsal  side  of  the  whorl. 
Pila;  single,  tuberculated,  and  extending  across  the  rounded  abdomen,  as  in 
Planiceras.  The  septa  are  minutely  divided  by  minor  lobes,  very  closely 
set.  The  abdominal  lobe  is  deep  ;  sides  abrupt.  Superior  lateral  very 
narrow,  deeper  than  the  abdominal,  and  profusely  brandling.  Inferior 
lateral  not  as  deep  as  superior  lateral,  and  of  about  the  same  breadth  and 
general  aspect.  Abdominal  cell  large  and  serrated.  Superior  lateral  very 
broad,  about  the  same  height  as  the  inferior  lateral. 

Platypleuroceras  latsecosta  Hyatt. 

Amm.  latcecosla  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  G,  p.  10G,  pi.  556. 
Amm.  lakecosta  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  3G,  pi.  27,  fig.  3. 
Amm.  natrix-rolundus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  85,  pi.  4,  fig.  17. 
Loc.  Gegenberg,  Hinterweiler,  Welflingcn,  Kentlingen,  and  Balingen ; 
Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  L.  Agassiz,  Ur.  Krantz,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Cyclocerast  Hyatt. 
Abdomen  rounded  or  keeled,  not  so  broad  as  the  dorsal  side  of  the  whorl. 
Pilse  single,  tuberculated,  and  not  extending  across  the  abdomen  in  the 
keeled  species.  Young  smooth  for  the  first  two  or  three  whorls,  then  be- 
come ribbed.  Keel  appears  at  an  earlier  stage  of  growth  than  the  pila?. 
Septa  not  so  minutely  divided  by  minor  lobes,  and  the  large  lobes  less 
dendritic  than  in  Platypleuroceras.  The  abdominal  lobe  of  medium  depth, 
and  quite  broad.  Superior  lateral  of  medium  breadth  and  considerable 
depth.  Inferior  lateral  about  two  thirds  as  broad  and  deep  as  superior 
lateral.  One  small  auxiliary  lobe  exposed  laterally.  Superior  lateral  cell 
broad  and  depressed.  Inferior  lateral  more  prominent  and  narrower ; 
small  auxiliary  cell  exposed  on  the  side. 

Cycloceras  molare  Hyatt. 

Amm.  natrix  oblongus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  85,  pi.  4,  fig.  16. 
Loc.  Balingen  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck. 

Cycloceras  natrix  Hyatt. 

Amm.  natrix  Schlot.,  Petrefaktenkunde. 

Amm.  natrix  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  5,  pi.  4,  fig.  5. 

Loc.  Balingen  and  Rentlingen  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Cycloceras  Valdani  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Valdani  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  255,  pi.  71. 
Amm.  compressus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  90,  pi.  5.  fig.  3. 

*  ItXarvs,  flat,  and  H\tvpoi>,  rib.  |  Kv*Aor,  circle. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  93 

Amm.  Vahlani  QuensMt,  Der  Jura,  p.  131,  pi.  16,  fig.  2  -  3. 
Loc.  St.  Araand,  Semur,  Balingen,  Rentlingen,  and  Gagenbcrg ;  Coll. 
Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  L.  de  Koninck,  M.  Boucault,  and  L.  Agassiz. 

Tropidoceras  *  Hyatt. 

Abdomen  invariably  keeled,  much  narrower  than  the  dorsal  side  of  the 
whorl.  Pilas  single,  smooth  or  tuberculated  in  the  same  species,  do  not  ex- 
tend across  the  abdomen  in  any  species. 

Young  are  smooth  for  one  or  two  whorls.  Keel  and  pila>  appear  simul- 
taneously. Septa  have  a  more  complicated  aspect  than  in  the  preceding 
genus,  the  minor  lobes  being  deeper  and  more  numerous.  The  abdominal 
very  broad  at  the  bottom,  narrower  above.  Superior  lateral  lobe  narrow, 
and  about  the  same  depth  as  the  abdominal.  Inferior  nearly  the  same, 
but  less  branching  than  the  superior  lateral.  One  auxiliary  lobe  exposed 
on  the  side.  Abdominal  cell  very  broad.  Superior  lateral  and  inferior 
lateral  cells  very  irregularly  divided  by  minor  lobes.  One  small  auxiliary 
lobe  exposed  on  the  6ide. 

Tropidoceras  Actseon  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Actceon  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  232,  pi.  61,  fig.  1-3. 
Loc.  Semur  and  Schbppenstadt ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Tropidoceras  JEgseon  Hyatt. 

Amm.  JEgceon  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  234,  pi.  61,  fig.  4-6. 
Loc.  Pies  de  Semur ;  Coll.  M.  Boucault. 

Tropidoceras  Masseanum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Masseanus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  225,  pi.  58. 
Amm.  Masseanus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  90,  pi.  5,  fig.  2. 
Loc.  Scarborough  in  Yorkshire,  Pres  de  Semur,  and  Balingen  ;  Coll.  Dr. 
Krantz,   L.  de  Koninck,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Upper  Lias. 

DISCOCERATIDiE. 

Ophioceras. 
Ophioceras  Levesquei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Levesquei  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  I.,  p.  230,  pi.  60. 
Amm.  Solaris  Ziet,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  19,  pi.  14,  fig.  7. 
Amm.  radians  quadralus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  113. 
Loc.  Niort,  Salins,  Heiningen,  and  Metzingen  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart, 
Dr.  Krantz,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

*  Tponls,  a  keel. 


94  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

DEROCERATIDiE. 

Deroceras. 
Deroceras  minatum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Plateau  de  Larzac  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

Abdomen  depressed.  Sides  flattened  or  inclining  toward  umbilicus. 
Septal  lobes  and  cells  very  simple,  with  but  few  minor  lobes.  Abdominal 
lobe  broad  and  shallow.  Superior  lateral  the  same,  and  of  nearly  the 
same  size.  Inferior  lateral  pointed  and  very  small.  Superior  lateral  and 
interior  lateral  cells  equally  divided  by  minor  lobes.  Young  are  smooth  for 
the  first  two  or  three  whorls.  Tubercles  usually  make  their  appearance  on 
the  third  whorl  and  on  the  fourth  ;  these  spread  out  into  pilae,  and  other 
untuberculated  pilae  arise  between  them.  The  pilaj  are  often  slightly  de- 
pressed or  concave  along  the  siphonal  line. 

Deroceras  subarmatum  Hyatt. 

Aram,  subarmatus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  4,  p.  146,  pi.  407. 

Amm.  subarmatus  Young  and  Bird,  Geol.  York.,  p.  250,  pi.  13,  fig.  3. 

Loc.  Milhaud  (Dep.  de  l'Aveyron)  ;  Coll.  M.  Boucault. 

Deroceras  acanthopsis  Hyatt. 

A  mm.  acanthopsis  D'Orb.,  Prod.  Pal.  Stratigraph.,  p.  247. 
Loc.  Villebois  (Dep.  Ain)  ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn. 

DACTYLOID^3. 
Coeloceras. 
Coeloceras  Grenouillouxii  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Grenouillouxii  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  pi.  96. 
Loc.  Fontaine  Etoupe  and  Fours  in  Calvados,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Che- 
ville  in  Sarthe,  and  Semur  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  L.  de  Koninck,  and  M.  Bou- 
cault. 

Coeloceras  Desplacei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Desplacei  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  334,  pi.  107. 
Loc.  Avallon  (Dep.  Yonne)  ;  Coll.  M.  Boucault. 

Coeloceras  crassum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  crassw  Phil.,  Cool.  York.,  p.  12,  fig.  15. 

Amm.  crassus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  251,  pi.  36,  fig.  1. 

Amm.  raquinianus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  332,  pi.  106. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Milhaud,  Laumiere,  Cheville  in  Sarthe,  St.  Cyr  bei  Lyon. 
Plateau  de  Larzac,  Villebois  (Dep.  de  l'Ain),  Salins  (Dep.  Jura),  Semur, 
Montpellier,  St.  Quentin,  and  Pres  de  Verpillier  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck,  Dr. 
Krantz,  L.  Aga^iz,  Prof.  Broiu:,  and  M.  Boucault. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  95 

Coeloceras  mucronatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  mucronalus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  328,  pi.  I'M.  fig.  -1-8. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Milhaud,  Laumiere,  Mende  in  Lozere,  Donau-Main  Canal, 
Salins  in  Jura,  Pres  d'Avallon,  Montpellier ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  L.  de  Ko- 
ninck,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Dactylioceras*  Hyatt. 

The  abdomen  is  either  equal  in  breadth,  or  less  than  the  back,  instead 
of  being  broader  than,  or  equal  in  breadth  to,  the  baek,  as  in  the  preceding 
genera.  The  lateral  pilae  in  the  adult  are  smooth  and  invariably  single  ; 
the  abdominal  pila?  may  be  either  bifurcated  or  single.  The  young  have 
the  same  development  as  the  young  of  Coeloceras  crassum,  but  the  tubercles 
are  dispensed  with  before  the  adult  state  is  attained.  (The  tubercles  are 
hardly  distinguishable  in  the  young  of  some  species,  such  as  Holandrei  and 
Braunianum,  especially  on  the  fossil  easts,  but  are,  nevertheless,  present  in 
all  the  shells.)  Septa  do  not  differ  materially  from  those  of  the  preceding 
genus,  except  perhaps  in  the  greater  simplicity  of  the  lobes  and  cells,  which 
are  hardly  so  close  together  or  so  complicated. 

Dactylioceras  commune  Hyatt. 

Amm.  communis  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  9,  pi.  107,  fig.  23. 
Naut.  annularis  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Arg.,  p.  79,  pi.  G,  figs.  5G,  57. 
Amm.  annularis  Ziet.  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  14,  pi.  10,  fig.  10. 
Loc.  Whitby,  Boll,  Amberg,  and  Langenbriicken  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  L. 
de  Koninck,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

Dactylioceras  Holandrei  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Holandrei  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  330,  pi.  105. 
Loc.  Whitby,  Cheville  in   Sarthe,  Fontaine  Etoupe  Fours  in   Calvados  ; 
Coll.  L.  de  Koninck  and  M.  Boucault. 

Dactylioceras  annulatum  Hyatt. 

A?nm.  annulalus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  3,  p.  41,  pi.  222. 
Amm.  annulalus  D'Orb..  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  2G5,  pi.  7G,  figs.  1,  2. 
Argo.  anguinus  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Arg..  p.  89,  No.  1,  pi.  12,  fig.  73. 
Amm.  cequistriatus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  pi.  12,  fig.  5. 
Loc.  Whitby,  Illminster,  St.  Amand,  Fontaine  Etoupe  Fours  ;  Coll.  L  de 
Koninck  and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Dactylioceras  Braunianum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Braunianus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  327,  pi.  104. 
Loc.  Milhaud  and  Plateau  de  Larzae  ;    Coll.  L.  de  Koninck  and  Dr. 
Krantz. 

*  AaKTvXios,  a  ring. 


96  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

THYSANOIDJE. 

Thysanoceras  Hyatt. 

Thysanoceras  fimbriatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  fimbriates  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  145,  pi.  164. 
Loc.  Pouilly  in  Cote  d'Or  ami  Plateau  de  Larzac  ;   Coll.  L.  de  Koninck 
and  Dr.  Krantz. 

Thysanoceras  Germainii  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Germainii  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  320,  pi.  101. 
A  mm.  interruptus  Zict.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  pi.  15,  fig.  3. 
Amm.  oblique-costatus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  pi.  15,  fig.  4. 
Loc.  Milhaud  (Dep.  de  1'Aveyron),   Semur,  Pouilly  in  Cote  d'Or,  and 
Gundershofen  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  M.  Boucault,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Thysanoceras  articulatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  articulatus  Sow.,  De  la  Beche,  Geol.  Manual,  p.  27G,  fig.  G3. 
Loc.  Spezzia ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn. 

Thysanoceras  Phillipsii  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Phillipsii  Sow.,  De  la  Beche,  Geol.  Manual,  p.  275,  fig.  57. 
Loc.  Spezzia  ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn. 

Thysanoceras  cornucopia  Hyatt. 

Amm.  cornucopia  Young  ami  Bird.  Geol.  York.,  pi.  12,  fig.  G. 

Amm.  cornucopia  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  31G,  pi.  99. 

Loc.  Semur,  St.  Quentin,  pres  de  Verpillier,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  and 
Milhaud  (Dep.  de  l'Avcyron)  ;  Coll.  L.  Agassiz,  M.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz, 
and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Thysanoceras  tornlosum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  torulosus  Schub.  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  19,  pi.  14,  fig.  1. 
Amm.  scutatus  Von  Buch,  Pet.  remarq.,  pi.  8,  fig.  1. 
Amm.  torulosus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  322,  pi.  102. 
Loc.  Plateau  de   Larzac,  Zillhausen,  Metzingen,   Schomberg,  and  Dur- 
wangen ;   Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Thysanoceras  jurense  Hyatt. 

Amm.  furensis  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  pi.  G8.  fig.  1. 

Amm.  jurensit  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  218,  pi.  100. 

.1////;;.  phyllocinctus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura. 

Loc.  Semur,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Milhaud  (Hep.  de  1'Aveyron),  Hechin- 
gen  in  Wiirtemberg,  Uhrweiler  in  Elsass,  Adnet  bei  Salzburg,  Sondelfingen, 
Balingen,  Reutlingen,  Metzingen,  and  Gundershofen;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stutt- 
gart, M.  Boucault,  Dr.  Krantz,  Prof.  Bronn,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  97 

Thysanoceras  hircinum  Hyatt. 
Amm.  liircinus  Schlot.,  Pet.,  p.  72. 
Amm.  hircinus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  280,  pi.  40. 

Loe.  Seinur,  Donau-Main  Canal,  and  Mistlegau  bei  Bayreuth  ;  Coll.  M. 
Boucault  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

Rhacoceras  L.  Agassiz. 

Rhacoceras  calypso  Hyatt. 

Amm.  calypso  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  I.,  p.  167,  pi.  52,  figs.  7-9. 

Loc.  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Monte  dc  Aquasparta  bei  Cesi  in  Unibria,  Mil- 
liaud,  Laumiere,  Digue  in  Basses  Alpes,  and  Erba  bei  Couio  ;  Coll.  Dr. 
Krantz,  L.  de  Koninck,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

The  abdomen  is  broader  than  in  11.  heterophyllus,  and  the  septa  differ- 
ent, but,  nevertheless,  the  varieties  of  this  species  which  are  devoid  of  the 
annular  depressions  caused  by  the  permanent  mouths,  are  frequently  iden- 
tified with  that  species. 

Ehacoceras  heterophyllum  L.  Agassiz. 

Amm.  heterophyllus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  3,  p.  119,  pi.  2G6. 
Amm.  heterophyllus  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  I.,  p.  339,  pi.  109. 
Loc.  Whitby,  Boll,  Vassy  pres  d'Avallon,  Erzingen  (Dcp.  du  Doubs), 
Balingen  and  Bruchsal;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  M.  Boucault,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

Rhacoceras  cylindricum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  cylindricus  De  la  Beche,  Man.  Geol.,  p.  275,  fif.  55. 
Loc.  Schoppenstadt ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 

Rhacoceras  mimatense  Hyatt. 

Amm.  mimatensis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  344,  pi.  110,  figs.  4-6. 
Loc.  Plateau  de  Larzac  (Dep.  de  l'Aveyron)  and  Boll ;  Coll.  L.  de  Ko- 
ninck and  Dr.  Krantz. 

PHYMATOIDyE. 

Phymatoceras  Hyatt. 

Phymatoceras  enervatum  Hyatt. 

Loc.  Plateau  de  Larzac  and  Villenotte  pres  de  Semur ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz 
and  M.  Boucault. 

The  abdomen  is  much  flatter  in  this  species  than  in  the  suceeedingP.ro- 
bustum,  and  in  the  young  the  channels  are  deeper  and  more  distinct.     The 
increase  of  the  radii  of  the  spiral  is  also  less,  and  there  are  therefore  a 
13 


98  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

greater  number  of  whorls  in  specimens  of  the  same  size.  The  sides  of  the 
whorls  are  also  less  gibbous  than  in  P.  robustum,  and  auxiliary  cells  differ- 
ently formed,  being  comparatively  but  slightly  indented  by  the  minor  lobes, 
and  the  inferior  lateral  cell  inclined  toward  the  umbilicus,  instead  of  being 
straight. 

Phymatoceras  robustum  Hyatt. 

Loe.  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Milhaud,  and  Semur;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  L.  de 
Koninck,  and  M.  Boueault. 

Ammatoceras. 

Amraatoceras  insigne  Hyatt. 

Amm.  insignia  Schub.,  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  20,  pi.  15,  fig.  2. 
Amm.  insignis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  347,  pi.  112. 
Amm.  insignis  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  280,  pi.  40,  figs.  4,  5. 
Loc.  Gundershoien  (Bas-llhin)  ;   Coll.  M.  Boueault. 

Ammatoceras  variabile  Hyatt. 

Amm.  variabilis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  350,  pi.  113. 
Loc.  Laumiere,  Salins,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  St.  Julien  de  Croix  in  Saone 
et  Loire,  Besancon,  Evrecy  bei  Caen,  Boll,  and  Balingen;  Coll.  Mus.  of 
Stuttgart,  L.  de  Koninck,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  M.  Boueault. 

Pelecoceras*  Hyatt. 
Having  but  one  species  of  this  genus,  it  would  be  exceedingly  hazardous 
to  give  the  generic  characters.  They  will,  however,  probably  be  found  to 
be  distinguished  by  the  peculiarly  pointed  aspect,  shallowness  and  breadth 
of  the  lobes  and  cells;  the  limits  of  the  envelopment,  which  last  is  greater 
than  in  other  genera  of  this  family  ;  the  acute  form  of  the  back,  and  the 
breadth  of  the  whorls. 

Pelecoceras  attenuatum  Hyatt. 

Loe.  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Milhaud,  and  Besancon  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz  and 
L.  de  Koninck. 

Abdomen  acute.  Sides  very  broad  and  flat.  Envelopment  covers  over 
one  half  the  side  of  each  internal  whorl.  Pilas  are  curved  forward  on  the 
abdomen.  The  young  have  no  channels,  and  the  development  does  not 
differ  from  Amm.  variabilis  or  Amm.  insignis,  except  in  the  size  of  the 
young,  the  whorls  of  these  not  being  proportionately  so  large  or  broad. 
All  the  lobes  and  cells  are  broad  and  shallow,  especially  the  pointed  ab- 
dominal and  the  serrated  auxiliary  cells. 

*  IltXfKuj,  an  axe. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  99 

HILDOCEKATIDU* 
Hildocerast  Hyatt. 
Abdomen  keeled  and  channelled.  Ribs  large  and  broad.  The  young 
continue  smooth  throughout,  first  whorl.  Ribs,  keel,  and  channels  appear 
on  the  second  whorl.  The  ribs  are  not  preceded  by  a  line  of  tubercles,  but 
begin  as  folds,  bent  much  in  the  same  way  as  in  the  adult,  but  with  the  ab- 
dominal bend  inclined  more  toward  the  apex.  The  abdominal  lobe  is 
shallow  and  broad.  Superior  lateral  much  deeper  than  either  the  aodorm- 
nal  or  inferior  lateral  lobes,  the  last  named  very  narrow  and  shallow,  minor 
lobes  small  and  pointed. 

Hildoceras  bifrons  Hyatt. 

Amm.  bifrons  Brug.,  Ency.  Meth.,  Aram,  No.  15. 

A  mm.  bifrons  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  219,  pi.  5G. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Dumbleton,  Dorsetshire,  Fontaine  Etoupe  Fours,  Poille  in 
Sarthe,  Laumiere,  Mende  in  Lozere,  Verpillier,  Milhaud,  Plateau  de  Lar- 
zac,  Cesi  in  Umbria,  Mussy  pres  de  Semur,  Chary  pres  de  Privas,  Amayer 
sur  Orne,  Boll,  and  Metzingen ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck,  Da*.  Krantz,  M.  Bou- 
cault,  and  Prof.  Bronn. 

Hildoceras  Walcotii  Hyatt. 

Amm.  Walcotii  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  2,  p.  7,  pi.  106. 

Amm.  Hildensis  Young  and  Bird,  Gcol.  York.,  pi.  12,  fig.  1. 

Loc.  Illminster,  Niort,  Fontaine  Etoupe  Fours,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Cesi 
in  Umbria,  Milhaud,  Vieux  Ponts,  and  Guadalaviar  in  Aragon  ;  Coll.  B. 
M.  Wright,  Dr.  Krantz,  and  L.  de  Koninck. 

Grammoceras  J  Hyatt. 
Abdomen  keeled,  but  not  channelled.  Whorls  flattened,  laterally  giving 
a  discoidal  aspect  to  the  shells.  Ribs  finer  and  less  prominent  than  those 
of  Hildoceras.  The  young  also  continue  smooth  much  longer,  and  chan- 
nels never  appear  ;  they  take,  however,  the  same  rounded  form  of  the 
whorl.  Septa  differ  but  slightly  from  Hildoceras  in  the  higher  species, 
such  as  Grammoceras  serpentinum ;  and  not  all  generically  in  the  lower, 
such   as    Grammoceras  striatulum. 

Grammoceras  striatulum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  striatulus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  5,  p.  23,  pi.  421,  fig.  1. 
Amm.  Thouarsensis  D'Orb,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  222,  pi.  57. 
Amm.  radians  depressus  Quens'dt,  Der  Jura,  p.  281,  pi.  40. 

*  Includes  all  the  Falciferi  proper  with  smootV  pilae. 

|  Aftef  St.  Hilda.  \  Tpa^ftrj,  a  line. 


100  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Loc.  Whitby,  Robin  Hood's  Bay,  Milhaud,  St.  Julien  du  Cray  in  Saone 
et  Loire,  Niort,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  Pies  de  Lyon,  Boll,  Keulwagen,  Re- 
daDgen,  Ileiningen,  Aalen,  Falkenhagen  in  Lippe,  Metzingen,  and  Uhr- 
weilcr ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart,  L.  de  Koninck,  Dr.  Krantz,  Prof.  Bronn, 
and  M.  Boucault. 

Grammoceras  radians  Hyatt. 

Amm.  radians  Schlot.,  Pet.  p.  78,  No.  31. 

Nan!,  radians  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Arg.,  p.  71,  No.  17,  figs.  39,  40. 

A  mm.  radians  Ziet,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  5,  pi.  4,  fig.  3. 

A  mm.  lineafus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  12,  pi.  9,  fig.  7. 

Amm.  radians  compressus  Qucns'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  112,  pi.  7,  fig.  9. 

Loc.  Niort,  Plateau  de  Larzac  and  Carnus  in  Cevenen,  St.  Cyr  bei  Lyon, 
Villebois  in  Am,  Salins  in  Jura,  Milhaud,  Mende,  Besancon,  Vaches  Noires 
in  Calvados,  Uhrweiler,  Falkenhagen,  Boll ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz,  l*-o\\  Bronn, 
L.  de  Koninck,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Grammoceras  aalense  Hyatt. 

Amm.  aalensis  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  3  7,  pi.  28,  fig.  3. 

Amm.  aalensis  Qucns'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  11  1,  pi.  7,  fig.  7. 

Amm.  aalensis  D'Orb,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  238,  pi.  C3. 

Loc.  Trocester  Hill,  Milhaud,  St.  Vigor,  St.  Julien  du  Cray,  La  Verpil- 
Siere  in  Am,  St.  Quentin,  Aalen,  Heiningen,  Neumarkt,  Balingen,  Mistle- 
gau,  Amberg,  Wiesenthal,  and  Gundershofen ;  Coll.  Mus.  of  Stuttgart, 
L.  de  Koninck,  Sir  C  Lyell,  L.  Agassiz,  Prof.  Bronn,  M.  Boucault,  and 
Dr.  Krantz. 

Grammoceras  costulatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  costulalus  Schlot.,  Pet.,  p.  78,  No.  33. 
Amm.  costula  Kriig.,  Uhrwelt.  Naturgesch.,  p.  27. 
Nant.  cosiula  Rein,  Naut.  et  Argo.,  p.  G8,  pi.  3,  fig.  33. 
Amm.  radiai, s  costula  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  113,  pi.  7,  fig.  11. 
Loc.  Aalen,   Amberg,  and  Metzingen;    Coll.  Mus.   of  Stuttgart,  L.  de 
Koninck  and   Prof.   Bronn. 

Grammoceras  serpentinum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  serpenlinus  Schlot.,  Pet.,  p.  G4,  No.  6. 

Argo  serpenlinus  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Argo.,  p.  89,  pi.  13,  fig.  74. 

Amm.  serpenlinus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  16,  pi.  12,  fig.  4. 

Amm.  serpenlinus  D'Orb,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  215,  pi.  55. 

Amm.  Strangewaysii  Sow.,  Min.  Conc»\.,  v.  3,  p.  99,  pi.  25,  fig.  ]  -3. 

Loc   Whitby,   Somerset,   Dorsetshire,   Bannington,  Milhaud,   Fontaine 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  101 

Etoupe  Fours,  Thouars,  Pres  de  Semur,  Vassy  in  Yonne,  Amayer  sur  Orne, 
Boll,  and  Metzingen  ;  Coll.  L.  de  Koninck,  Dr.  Krantz,  M.  Boucault,  Prof. 
Bronn,  Duval,  and  Damon. 

Leioceras*  Hyatt. 

Abdomen  keeled,  acute.  Sides  of  the  whorls  flattened.  Envelopment 
uniformly  greater  than  in  Grammoceras.  The  young  differ,  however,  in 
being  much  flatter  at  the  corresponding  periods  of  growth.  The  lobes  and 
cells,  also,  are  less  obtuse,  shallower,  and  much  more  numerous. 

Leioceras  lythense  Hyatt. 

Amm.  lythensis  Young  and  Bird,  Phil.  Geol.  York.,  p.  164,  pi.  13,  fig.  6. 
Loc.  Whitby ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn. 

Leioceras  opalinum  Hyatt. 

Naut.  opalinus  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Argo.,  p.  55,  pi.  1,  fig.  1. 

Naul.  comptus  Rein.,  Naut.  et  Argo.,  p.  57,  pi.  1,  figs.  5,  6. 

Amm.  primordial!*  Schlot.,  Pet.,  No.  7,  p.  G7. 

Amm.  erralus  Young  and  Bird,  Phil.  Geol.  York.,  pi.  13,  fig.  7. 

Amm.  primoriliulis  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  5,  pi.  4,  fig.  4. 

Amm.  primord talis  D'Orb.,  Terr.  Jurass.,  Ceph.,  p.  235,  pi.  G2. 

Amm.  opalinus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  115,  pi.  7,  fig.  10. 

Loc.  Robin  Hood's  Bay,  Whitby,  Trocester  Hill,  La  Verpilliere  in  Am, 
St.  Quentin  pies  Verpillier,  Szaflary,  Amberg  pres  de  Goslar,  NeufTen, 
Quedlinburg,  Teufelsloch,  Gundershofen,  and  Metzingen  ;  Coll.  Mus.  of 
Stuttgart,  Dr.  Krantz,  Prof.  Bronn,  L.  Agassiz,  and  M.  Boucault. 

Leioceras  elegans  Hyatt. 

Amm.  elegans  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  213,  pi.  94,  fig.  1. 
Loc.  Whitby;  Coll.  Dr.  Kiantz. 

Leioceras  complanatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  complanalus  Brug.,  Encycl.,  p.  38,  No.  11. 

Amm.  mulgracius  Young  and  Bird,  Phil.  Geol.  York.,  p.  251,  pi.  13,  fig.  8- 

Amm.  elegans  Phil.  Geol.  York.,  pi.  13,  fig.  2. 

Amm.  c/r</a>i*  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wiirt.,  p.  22,  pi.  16,  fig.  5. 

Amm.  cum  plana!  us  D'Orb,  Terr.  Jurass.,  p.  353,  pi.  114. 

Loc.  Whitby,  Lyme  Regis,  Villebois  in  Ain,  Mussy  pres  de  Semur,  Aval- 
Ion,  Privas,  Boll,  and  Ubstadt  bei  Bruchsal ;  Coll.  Prof.  Bronn,  Dr.  Krantz, 
M.  Boucault,  and  Damon. 

*  Afior,  smooth. 


102  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Leioceras  discoides  Hyatt. 

Amm.  depressus  Schlot.,  Pet,  p.  80,  No.  80. 

Avvn.  discoides  Ziet  .  Verst.  Wurt.,  p.  21,  pi.  16,  fig.  6. 

Amm.  depressus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wurt.,  p.  7,  pi.  5,  fig.  15. 

Loc.  Milhaml,  Mende,  Plateau  de  Larzac,  and  Balingen;  Coll.  L.  de 
Koninck  ami  Dr.  Krantz. 

Bruguiere  (Eneyclop.,  1789),  having  described  a  different  species  by  the 
name  "depressus,"  Zieten's  name  "discoides"  is  necessarily  the  correct 
name  of  this  species. 

Leioceras  eumulatum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  bicarinatus  Ziet.,  Verst.  Wurt.,  p.  21,  pi.  15,  fig.  9. 

Loc.  Milhaud,  Laumiere,  Mende,  Plateau  de  Larzac  (Dep.  de  l'Aveyron), 
Montpellier,  and  Zillhausen  ;  Coll.  L.  Agassiz,  L.  de  Koninck,  Dr.  Krantz, 
and  M.  Boucault. 

Zieten's  "bicarinatus"  differs  specifically  from  Miinster's  figure,  Beit, 
zur  Pet.,  v.  4,  p.  138,  pi.  15,  fig.  30,  and  therefore  it  becomes  necessary  to 
adopt  a  new  name  for  this  species. 

Leioceras  concavum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  concavus  Sow.,  Min.  Conch.,  v.  1,  p.  215,  pi.  94,  fig.  2. 

Loc.  Semur,  Salins,  and  Heiningen  ;    Coll.  Dr.  Krantz  and  M.  Boucault. 

Leioceras  capellinum  Hyatt. 

Amm.  capellinus  Schlot.,  Pet.,  p.  65. 
Amm.  capellinus  Quens'dt,  Die.  Ceph.,  p.  206,  pi.  7,  fig.  2. 
Amm.  lythensis  lineatus  Quens'dt,  Die  Ceph.,  p.  107,  pi.  7,  fig.  1. 
Loc.  Metzingen  and  Ilolzinunden  ;  Coll.  Dr.  Krantz. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  103 


No.  6.  —  Contributions  to  the  Fauna  of  the  Gulf  Stream  at  great 
depths.     By  L.  F.  de  Pourtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey. 

(Communicated  bt  tiie  Superintendent  of  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.) 

The  study  of  the  constitution  and  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  bottom  of 
the  sea  is  a  field  of  research  which  has  attracted  the  attention  of  natural- 
ists in  comparatively  recent  times.  What  Humboldt  did  with  regard 
to  the  distribution  of  life  at  different  heights  in  the  atmosphere,  was 
done  by  Edward  Forbes  for  the  different  depths  of  the  ocean.  The 
former's  diagrams  of  the  zones  of  vegetation  on  the  slopes  of  the  Andes 
are  considered  indispensable  in  every  atlas  of  physical  geography. 
But  what  one  man  could  do  where  his  glance  embraced  miles  of  coun- 
try in  height  and  breadth  and  where  the  types  of  vegetation  could 
frequently  be  recognized  as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach,  an  investigator 
even  as  zealous  as  Forbes  could  but  sketch  in  broad  though  happily 
drawn  lines  for  the  marine  animals. 

Much  has  been  done  in  this  direction  since  Forbes's  death,  particu- 
larly in  England,  where  dredging  has  become  a  favorite  occupation  of 
many  naturalists ;  the  Scandinavian  seas  have  also  been  explored  with 
much  success,  chiefly  by  the  Norwegian  naturalists  ;  but  much  more 
remains  to  be  done  in  a  field  in  which  the  areas  to  be  explored  can, 
as  Jeffreys  remarks,  be  reckoned  in  square  degrees,  whilst  the  research 
extends  only  over  square  yards. 

It  is  particularly  in  the  greater  depths,  in  the  so-called  abyssal 
region,  that  our  knowledge  is  deficient.  This  is  easily  understood,  since 
on  many  coasts  the  sea  is  comparatively  shoal  for  a  considerable  dis- 
tance from  land,  and  the  outfit  for  deep-sea  dredging  is  beyond  the 
means  of  but  few  private  individuals.  Government  expeditions  are 
generally  fitted  out  for  other  duties,  and  can  rarely  devote  their  time  to 
operations  occasioning  a  delay  of  many  hours.  Furthermore,  owing 
to  the  scantiness  of  the  material,  the  impression  generally  prevailed, 
until  recently,  that  animal  life  was  soon  reduced  to  a  minimum  with 
an  increase  of  depth,  or  at  least  reduced  to  the  lowest  forms,  so  that 
the  incentive  of  a  rich  harvest  seemed  denied  to  those  who  would  have 
undertaken  such  researches. 


101  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Excepting  the  investigations  of  Dr.  Stimpson  on  the  coast  of  New 
England,  the  dredge  has  been  as  yet  very  little  used  along  our  shores. 
The  character  and  constituents  of  the  bottom  are  however  pretty  well 
known,  thanks  to  the  care,  of  the  late  Superintendent  of  the  Coast  Sur- 
vey, Professor  A.  D.  Bache,  who,  during  his  whole  administration  of 
that  work,  required  the  hydrographical  parties  to  preserve  the  speci- 
men- brought  up  l)j  the  lead.  From  eight  to  nine  thousand  specimens 
have  thus  been  accumulated  at  the  Coast  Survey  Cilice,  from  a  region 
comprised  between  the  shore  and  the  outer  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream, 
and  reaching  nearly  to  1500  fathoms.  But,  of  course,  aside  from  the 
Foraminifera  and  Diatomaceae,  for  the  study  of  which  this  material  has 
proved  of  high  interest,  not  much  was  contributed  to  our  knowledge  of 
the  animals  of  the  higher  classes,  the  instrument  used  being  only 
adapted  to  procure  a  small  quantity  of  sand  or  mud. 

The  present  Superintendent  of  the  Coast  Survey,  Professor  B.  Peirce, 
has  lately  directed  the  resumption  of  the  investigations  of  the  Gulf 
Stream,  so  successfully  inaugurated  by  his  predecessor,  but  interrupted 
fin-  several  years  by  the  war.  Besides  observations  of  the  depth,  veloci- 
ty, and  direction  of  that  current,  and  the  temperature  and  density  of 
the  water  at  different  depths,  the  researches  will  be  extended  to  the 
Fauna  of  the  bottom,  of  the  surface,  and  of  the  intervening  depths. 
Not  only  will  an  insight  be  thus  obtained  into  a  world  scarcely  known 
heretofore,  but  that  knowledge  a\  ill  have  a  direct  bearing  on  many  of 
the  phenomena  of  that  great  current.  Thus  a  new  light  may  be  thrown 
on  its  powers  of  transportation  from  shallow  to  deeper  water,  or  along 
its  bed,  on  its  action  in  forming  deposits  in  particular  localities,  or  on 
its  possible  influence  on  the  growth  of  coral  reel's  on  its  shores. 

The  first  campaign  on  this  plan  was  organized  in  1807,  the  field  of 
research  being  in  a  section  between  Key  West  and  Havana,  incident- 
ally with  the  purpose  of  sounding  out  the  line  for  the  telegraph  cable, 
shortly  afterwards  laid  between  these  two  points.  The  Coast  Survey 
Steamer  Corwin  was  assigned  t<>  the  work;  and  here  1  wish  to  express 
my  thank-  to  my  colleague.  Assistant  II.  Mitchell,  charged  with  the 
physical  pari  of  the  campaign,  and  to  Captain  Piatt  and  his  officers  for 
the  interest  they  -bowed  to  my  work,  and  for  their  valuable  prac- 
tical  a'd. 

The  expedition  was  unfortunately  interrupted  by  the  breaking  out 
of  yellow   fever  on  hoard,  so  that   the   dredgings   were   few   in   number. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  105 

However,  short  as  the  season's  work  was,  and  few  a-  wore  the  casts  of 
the  dredge,  the  highly  interesting  fact  was  disclosed,  that  animal  life 
exists  at  great  depths,  in  as  great  a  diversity  and  as  great  an  abundance 
as  in  shallow  water. 

The  identifications  of  the  species  have  been  made  by  me  at  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Cambridge,  in  the  rich  collections 
of  which  I  have  found  abundant  material  for  comparison  ;  facilities  of 
every  sort  were  afforded  me  by  Professor  Agassiz,  for  which  I  wish  to 
express  my  heartfelt  thanks,  as  also  for  this  opportunity  of  prompt 
publication. 

The  first  dredgings  were  made  on  May  17th,  on  the  Florida  side  of 
the  Gulf  Stream,  about  5  miles  S.S.W.  of  Sand  Key,  in  depths  varying 
from  90  to  100  fathoms,  on  a  bottom  of  calcareous  mud.  The  following 
list  comprises  the  animals  obtained  :  — 

Articulates.  A  number  of  small  Crustacea  were  brought  up,  which 
have  not  yet  been  determined.  They  belong  to  the  following  or  allied  genera : 
Dromia,  Ilia,  Mithrax?  (a  mutilated  specimen),  Pagurus,  Euphausia,  and 
Orcliestia. 

The  tubes  of  several  species  of  Annelids  were  obtained,  but  the  animals 
were  in  most  cases  too  defective  for  identification.  The  largest  and  best  pre- 
served is  Marpliysa  floridana,  nov.  sp.  (see  description).  There  are  also  tubes 
of  one  or  more  species  of  Serpula. 

The  Gephyreans  are  represented  by  Sipunculus  coraUieola,  Pourt.  (Troc. 
Am.  Assoc,  1851). 

Molluscs  not  determined  specifically.  They  are  mostly  immature  speci- 
mens or  fragments  of  dead  shells,  and  belong  to  the  following  genera  :  Murex 
(dead),  Turbo?  (operculum),  Leda  (living),  Astarte  (living),  TelUna  (dead). 
Of  Pteropods  dead  shells  of  the  following  species  :  Hyalea  tridt  ntata,  Hyalt  <i 
trispinosa,  Cuvieria  columella,  Cleodora  lanceolata.  The  shells  of  this  order 
are  very  common  in  deep-sea  soundings.  The  Bryozoa  are  represented  by 
Vincula7-ia  margaritacea,  nov.  sp.  (see  description). 

Radiata.  Of  Echinoderms  were  obtained  an  OpJiiurian  (an  arm,  un- 
determined) and  a  number  of  specimens  of  Comalula  Hagenii,  nov.  sp.  (see 
description). 

A  Zoanthus,  rather  small,  was  obtained  also,  but  not  having  been  noticed 
when  alive,  it  would  be  somewhat  uncertain  to  determine. 

Hydroids  :  Antennularia  triseriata,  nov.  sp.  ;  Thoa  pulclicUa,  nov.  sp. ;  Th. 
capillaris,  nov.  sp.  (see  descriptions). 

The  Foraminifera  had  nearly  all  been  washed  out  of  the  dredge;  onlv  the 
following  were  noticed:  Text'daria  conica  DO.  (very  large);  Opcrculina 
14 


106  BULLETIN    OF   TOE 

(Spirillina)   incerta  D'O.  ;   Itotalina  cultrata  D'O.  ;    and   Gldbigerina  rubra 
D'O. 

The  total  for  this  locality  is  therefore  twenty-nine  species,  to  which  a  fe\r 
ought  to  be  added  for  the  undetermined  fragments  of  Annelids. 

No  dredgings  were  had  in  mid-channel  ;  this  part  had  been  reserved 
for  the  return  trip,  but  the  unfortunate  interruption  of  the  cruise  pre- 
vented the  execution  of  the  project,  at  least  for  this  season. 

The  next  casts  were  obtained  off  Havana  in  270  fathoms  on  May 
24th  and  29th,  on  both  days  as  nearly  as  possible  on  the  same 
spot,  as  the  little  that  was  obtained  at  the  first  date  had  given  much 
promise. 

The  results  of  the  two  casts  are  combined  below  :  — 

Articulates.  The  Crustacea  are  not  determined,  but  of  or  near  the 
following  genera:  Stetwpus,  Axia,  Callianassa,  Orchestia,  and  Idotea,  all 
living.  Anneliils  :  Marphysa  tibiana,  n.  sp.,  and  M.  anlipathum,  n.  sp.  (see 
description).     Tubes  and  fragments  of  four  or  five  other  species. 

Of  the  Molluscs  the  Gasteropods  and  Acephala  have  not  yet  been  deter- 
mined, with  one  exception. 

The  following  genera  are  represented  :  Mitra  ?,  Fusus,  Turbo,  Emarr/inu- 
lina,  Dentalium,  Nucula,  and  Spondylus,  all  dead  ;  1  '<  dicularia  dt  cussata,  Gould 
(see  remarks),  and  a  very  small  Anomia,  both  living.  The  Pteropods  and 
Heteropods  were  all  dead  ;  they  are  :  Hyalea  trispinosa,  affinis  D'Orb.,  gib- 
bosa  Rang,  and  unclnata  Rang  ;  Crcsds  spinifera  Rang  ;  ( 'h  <»/nr<i  pyramidata 
Per.  and  Les. ;  Spinalis  rostrata  Eyd.  and  Soul.;  and  Atlanta  Peronii  Les. 
Of  Brachiopods  we  obtained  Terebratula  cubensis,  n.  sp.,  and  Terebratulina 
Cailleti  Crosse;  both  living  and  apparently  abundant.  The  Bryozoa  are : 
Farcimia  cereus,  n.  sp. ;  Vincularia  margarilacea,  n.  sp. ;  Cellepora  reticulata, 
n.  sp. ;  C.  sigillala,  n.  sp. ;  Cauda  retiformis,  n.  sp.  ;  Cauda  cornigera,  n.  sp., 
Idmonea  Jlexuosa,  n.  sp.  (see  descriptions). 

PvADiATA.  Echinoderms  are  represented  by  the  following  species  :  Spa- 
iangus  (dead,  fragments)  ;  Fibularia  (dead)  ;  Cidaris  annulosa  Gray  (prob- 
ably, young,  living);  Tripneusles  ventricosus  (living,  very  young)  5  Asterias, 
sp.  (very  young,  living);  Ophiurians,  at  least  three  species,  immature  and 
difficult  to  determine;  Comatula  brevipinna,  n.  sp.,  living;  Pentacrinus,  sp. 
(fragments  of  stem,  among  which  some  appear  quite  fresh). 

Of  Zoantharia  the  following  were  brought  up:  Antipathes  Jiumilis,  n.  sp. ; 

Aniipalhes  filix,  n.  sp.;  AcanlJiogorgia  aspera,  n.  sp. ;  Gorgonia  exserla  Kllis; 

Swiftia  exserla  Duch.  and  Mich. ;    Hyalonema  (spicules)  ;    Caryophyllia  for- 

\  n.  sp.  ;    Dellocyathus  Agassizii,  n.  sp. ;    Slylaster  complanalus,  n.  sp. ; 

Errina  glabra,  n.  sp. ;    Errina  cochleata,  n.  sp. ;    Crypthelia  Peircei,  n.  sp. ; 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  107 

Distichopora  sulcata,  n.  sp. ;  Heliopora  ?  tubulata,  n.  sp. ;  Heliopora  ?  carinata, 
n.  sp. ;  Isis?  (base  of  stem)  ;  Sarcodyction  rugosinn,  n.  sp. 

Hydroids  :  Thoa  pulchella,  n.  sp. ;  Tubularia  crinis,  n.  sp.  Foraminifera  • 
Lagena  striata  Mont.,  rare;  Nodosaria  pyrula  D'O.,  rare;  Dentalina  com- 
munis D'O.,  rare;  D.  (agglulinans  ?)  ;  Lingulina  carinata  D'O.;  Texlularia 
trocJius  D'O.,  common,  very  large,  also  abundant  in  shoaler  water;  7'.  agglu- 
linans D'O.,  rare;  Nonionina  scapha,  rare ;  Nonionina  umbilicatula  Montg., 
rare  ;  Cristellaria  crepidula  F.  and  M.,  rather  common  ;  Orbiculina  adunca 
D'O.,  rare  and  only  in  a  worn  state,  its  proper  habitat  is  in  the  littoral  zone  ; 
Amphistegina  gibbosa  D'O.,  rare  and  only  young  specimens  ;  it  is  very  common 
throughout  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  in  deep  water;  Globigerina  rubra  D'O.,  very 
abundant,  also  in  the  Orbulina  form;  Gl.  Dutertrei  D'O.,  common  ;  P 
obliquiloculata  P.  and  J.,  rather  common;  Pullenia  coarctata,  n.  sp.,  rather 
common;  Sphozroidina  dehisce?is  P.  and  J.,  not  common;  Rotalina  cidtrata 
D'O.,  very  common;  Rot.  truncatulinoides  D'O.,  common;  Rot.  Poeyi  !)'(>., 
rather  common;  Rotalina,  2  other  species  in  single  and  imperfect  specimens ; 
Biloculina,  sp. ;  Triloculina  Brongniardana  D'O.,  rare;  Quinqueloculina  bicos- 
tata  D'O.,  rare. 

Many  of  the  specimens  of  Foraminifera  are  filled  with  a  yellow  mass, 
like  the  first  stage  of  transformation  into  greensand,  but  the  process 
seems  to  stop  here. 

Of  Sponges  quite  a  number  were  obtained,  at  least  a  dozen  species, 
which  have  not  yet  been  determined.  Some  of  the  detached  spicules 
are  remarkable  for  their  size  ;  one,  for  instance,  of  the  slender  rectan- 
gulated  sexradiate  type  of  Bowerbank  measuring  more  than  half  an 
inch. 

The  vegetable  kingdom  was  represented  in  this  dredging  by  a  -ingle 
specimen  of  a  minute  alga,  Centroceras  clavulatum  Agardh.,  which 
Harvey  says  is  found  abundantly  at  low  water  mark  at  Key  West. 
In  its  branchlets  was  entangled  a  chain  of  a  species  of  Biddidpkia. 
Other  Diatomes  are  rather  scarce  and  have  not  yet  been  determined. 
We  therefore  find  here  also  a  confirmation  of  the  remark  made  in 
European  seas,  that  vegetable  life  does  not  extend  to  depths  as  great 
as  are  reached  by  animals,  and  that  therefore  the  greater  number  of 
deep-sea  animals  must  be  carnivorous. 

The  dredge  contained  also  a  number  of  nodules  of  a  verv  porous 
limestone,  similar  in  color  and  texture  to  the  limestone  forming  the 
range  of  low  hills  along  the  shore  of  Cuba,  but  composed  apparently 
of  the  remains  of  the  same  animals  which  were  found  living.     Thus 


108  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

our  Delfocyathus,  Caryophyllia,  the  various  Pteropods  were  recognized 
in  the  stone,  and  found  al-o  in  various  stages  of  fossilization.  The 
interstices  between  the  larger  forms  are  generally  filled  up  with  Fora- 
minifera. 

On  May  25th  the  dredge  was  sent  down  in  350  fathoms,  outside  of 
the  locality  occupied  on  the  24th  and  29th.  It  brought  up  only  a  few 
dead  corals  :  Caryophyllia  formosa,  Deltocyathus  Agassizii,  Diplohelia 
profunda,  the  latter  in  numerous  specimens  (see  description).  Also  a 
fragment  of  the  siliceous  skeleton  of  a  sponge,  forming  a  regular  net- 
work somewhat  like  that  of  Euplectella  as  figured  by  Bowerbank, 
but  lacking  the  spines. 

The  soundings  made  during  this  cruise  seem  to  indicate  a  kind  of 
submarine  terrace,  on  which  the  dredgings  of  the  24th  and  29th  were 
made.  The  cast  of  the  25th  was  probably  made  on  the  edge  of  it,  and 
the  dredge  no  doubt  touched  bottom  only  for  a  short  time,  after  which 
the  ship  drifted  off  into  water  too  deep  for  the  line  attached. 

Remarks  and  Descriptions  of  New  Species. 

Marphysa  floridana  Pouet. 

Head  small,  with  ~>  antennae  ;  no  tentacles  on  the  buccal  ring.  Branchiae 
pectinated,  with  5  to  7  loins,  small,  beginning  about  the  7th  or  9th  ring. 
Tin'  composite  bristles  with  a  small  lancet-shaped  appendage.  Two  eyes, 
rather  large.  Superior  cirrhi  longest,  interior  short  and  conical.  Teeth  of 
the  labrnm  large,  broad,  enamelled,  white.  Caudal  cirrhi  two,  short.  The 
first  ring  of  the  body  has  only  the  two  superior  cirrhi,  which  are  nearly 
dorsal. 

Body  rings  about  115.  Color  reddish,  iridescent.  Length  •'!  or  •!  inches 
(contracted).  Inhabits  large  deformed  paper-like  tubes,  with  lateral  open- 
in--  irregularly  placed,  though  in  general  alternate,  bordered  by  laciniate 
ami    fimbriate   Haps. 

Oil'  Sand  Key  in   I  no  fathoms. 

Marphysa  tibiana  Pouet. 

All  the  characters  as  in  the  preceding,  but  the  whole  animal  is  more 
slender,  and  in  some  parts  of  the  body  the  rings  are  considerably  elongated, 
which  may  possibly  be  due  to  its  position  in  the  tube  at  the  time  of  death. 
The  branchial  are  almost  rudimentary,  in  tin1  shape  of  small  club-like 
appendages  to  the  upper  cirrhi.  It  differs  particularly  from  the  former  by 
it-  tubes,  which  are  horny,  dark  In-own.  regularly  serpentine;    at  every 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  109 

bend  there  is  a  tubulated  aperture  directed  backwards,  with  an  expanded 
fimbriated  border.  Similar  tubes  have  been  figured  by  Ellis,  and  on  them 
Lamarck  founded  the  genus  Tibiana,  which  he  placed  among  the  polyps. 
(See  figure  in  Ellis,  also  copied  by  De  Blainville.)  In  this  species  the 
tubes  are  tree  and  appear  to  have  been  buried  in  the  mud  by  their  smaller 
end.     Abundant  in  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Marphysa  antipathum.  Pourt. 

Animal  not  observed  ;  tubes  differing  from  those  of  the  preceding  spe- 
cies in  being  attached  by  their  whole  length  to  the  stems  of  a  small 
species  of  Antipatb.es.  They  are  also  somewhat  smaller,  and  the  tubular 
apertures  are  entire,  without  fimbriae,  and  only  slightly  widened. 

Found,  with  the  preceding,  off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Tubes  of  various  forms  wore  also  found,  but  not  containing  the  animal, 
or  only  insufficient  fragments  of  it,  so  that  they  cannot  be  determined. 
One  tube  deserves  mention',  it  is  white,  parchment-like,  straight  and 
flattened  ;  it  is  armed  densely  with  spicules  of  sponges  placed  transversely, 
and  stiffened  by  the  long  threads  of  a  Ilyalonema  attached  longitudi- 
nally ;  it  contained  only  a  very  small  fragment  of  the  inhabitant.  Ob- 
tained in  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Pedicularia  decussata  Gould.    (Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  IIi~t.,  Vol.V.  p.  127.) 
As  I  have  not  Dr.  Gould's  specimens  at  hand  for  comparison,  I  refer  with 
some  hesitation  to  this  species,  a  small  living  shell  dredged  on  May  29th. 
As  it  is  immature  it  is  difficult  to  determine  by  the  description  alone. 

Terebratula  cubensis  Pourt. 

Shell  globose,  thin,  light  horn-colored,  translucent,  obscurely  pentagonal, 
smooth,  or  showing  faintly  the  lines  of  growth;  the  inferior  margin  of  the 
transverse  portion  of  the  loop  with  three  indentations,  differing  in  this  re- 
spect from  T.  vitrea,  in  which  this  part  is  entire ;  otherwise  these  two  spe- 
cie-; resemble  each  other  xory  closely.  The  largest  specimen  is  lJy  inch 
long,  T9ff  of  an  inch  broad,  and  T7^  high. 

It  may  prove  to  be  identical  with  an  undescribed  Terehratala,  from  a 
recent  formation  of  Guadaloupe,  mentioned  in  Bull.  Soc.  Geol.  de  France, 
Tom.  xx.  1863. 

Several  specimens,  mostly  large,  were  obtained  off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Terebratulina  Cailleti  Crosse. 

A  number  of  specimens  of  this  species,  of  all  ages,  were  obtained  with  the 
former.  They  are  all  smaller  than  the  Guadaloupe  specimen,  figured  by 
Crosse,  and  perhaps  on  that  account  show  the  depression  in  the  middle  of 
the  dorsal  valve  less  distinctly  than  the  figure. 


110  BULLETIN   OP   THE 

Vineularia  margaritacea  Pourt. 

Irregularly  branching,  generally  at  a  large  angle.  White,  pearly.  Cells 
set  round  the  axis  in  six  rows  alternating  by  threes,  oval,  smooth.  Aper- 
ture rounded,  with  a  small  notch  on  inferior  border  for  the  attachment  of 
the  horny  operculum,  which  is  thin  and  round.  Some  of  the  cells  have  an 
accessory  upper  chamber  (ovarian  vesicle)  inflated  and  cribriform.  About 
1  inch  high  ;  rather  abundant  off  Sand  Key  in  100  fathoms,  and  off  Ha- 
vana in  270. 

Fai'cimia  cereus  Pourt. 

Frustules  long,  cylindrical,  branching  laterally  from  the  middle  of  the 
older  ones.  Cells  in  six  rows,  alternating  three  and  three,  concave,  oval 
Aperture  small,  horseshoe-shaped,  with  a  pore  on  each  side.  In  old  and 
worn  specimens  the  operculum  giving  the  shape  to  the  aperture  is  lost  and 
the  latter  becomes  oval.  The  space  between  the  cells  is  then  also  deprived 
of  a  kind  of  epidermis,  and  shows  rows  of  pores  forming  lozenges  around 
the  cells.  Articulating  peduncles  horny ;  sometimes  strengthened  by  rad- 
icles.    Rather  abundant  in  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Cellepoi'a  reticulata  Fourt. 

Flabellate,  much  anastomosing,  pearly ;  apertures  alternate,  directed  ob- 
liquely  upward,  all  on  the  same  side  of  flabellum,  rounded,  with  small  knob 
on  lower  part,  on  which  is  a  small  pit  for  the  articulation  of  the  operculum. 
(The  latter  all  lost  from  specimen  on  hand.)  About  three  quarters  of  an 
inch  high.     Off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Cellepora  sigillata  Pourt. 

Flabellate,  anastomosing,  all  the  cells  opening  on  the  same  side  of  the 
flabellum.      Aperture  oval,  somewhat  truncated  towards    the   tup,   above 
which  rise  four  short  bristles.     Cells  irregularly  alternate,  crowded,  con- 
case.      Operculum  large,  pearly,  convex  with  a.  somewhat  turned-up  lip. 
Only  a  small  fragment  was  obtained  off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Canda*  retiformis  Pourt. 

Flabellate,  irregularly  dichotomous.  Membranous  tubular  radicles  con- 
necting the  branches  with  each  other  at  about  every  fourth  cell,  giving  the 
whole  the  appearance  of  network.  Cells  elongated,  thin,  half-membranons, 
alternate,  opening  on  the  same  side  of  flabellum,  punctated,  two  short  blunt 
spines  at  the  top.  Aperture  huge,  occupying  about  two  thirds  of  the  cell, 
protected  by  a  broad  T-shaped  shield  rising  from  the  side  of  the  aperture. 
About  one  inch  high.      OH' Havana  in   2 7 U  fathoms. 

*  Cellarina,  Van  Beueden. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  Ill 

Canda  cornigera  Pourt. 

Flabellate  and  resembling  the  former,  but  the  branches  are  not  so  dense, 
and  not  connected  by  radicles,  which  are  only  numerous  near  the  foot  and 
attached  to  foreign  bodies.  Cells  as  in  the  other  species,  but  the  shield  is 
ramified  like  a  pair  of  elk  horns.     Off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Idmonea  flexuosa  Pourt. 

Branching  irregularly,  calcareous,  white.  Branches  variously  curved  or 
flexuous.  Cells  long,  cylindrical,  striated ;  aperture  rounded  at  the  end  of 
a  curved  tubular  projection,  almost  opposite,  with  a  slight  tendency  to  be- 
come alternate.     Resembles  closely  the  fossil  species  Idmonea  coronopus. 

02' Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Comatula  (Alecto)  Hagenii  Pourt. 

Ten  arms.  Mouth  central,  with  the  five  brachial  grooves  radiating  from 
it.  Centre  of  disc  convex,  surrounded  by  about  30  cirrhi,  each  of  which  is 
composed  of  18  to  20  articulations,  much  longer  than  broad,  smooth,  of 
nearly  equal  size  throughout  the  whole  length  of  the  cirrhus.  Cirrhi  in 
several  circles.  A  small  part  of  the  second  radial  only  visible,  so  that  the 
axial  radial  appears  almost  sessile.  The  radials  of  two  contiguous  arms,  and 
the  first  brachials  of  the  same  pair  well  separated  down  to  the  angle.  Arms 
convex  on  dorsal  side.  Syzygia  composed  of  three  or  seldom  four  articula- 
tions, with  very  obliquo  joints,  and  very  finely  denticulated  edges,  better 
recognized  by  the  touch  than  by  the  eye.  The  first  three  or  four  pinnules 
of  the  arms  long  and  nearly  equal,  the  pinnules  of  the  middle  of  the  arm 
shorter  than  those  of  the  base  or  extremity.  Arms  about  three  inches  long. 
Color  pale  greenish,  turning  white  in  alcohol.  All  the  specimens  had  the 
pinnules  filled  with  eggs.     Quite  abundant  in  100  fathoms  off  Sand  Key. 

Comatula  brevipinna  Pourt. 

Ten  arms.  Mouth  and  anus  not  seen  in  the  only  specimen  obtained. 
About  1 5  cirrhi,  with  the  same  number  of  long  articulations.  Seven  or 
eight  articulations  to  every  syzygium.  The  two  radials  are  visible,  and 
have,  as  well  as  the  axial  radials  and  the  two  first  brachials,  a  smooth  tu- 
bercle in  the  middle.  The  same  pieces  are  denticulated  on  the  sides,  the 
denticulations  meeting  those  of  the  collateral  radials  and  brachials,  so  as 
to  close  up  the  angle  between  them.  A  row  of  very  small  tubercles  on 
the  proximal  border  of  the  radials  and  radial  axials.  The  articulations  of 
the  arms  somewhat  imbricate.  First  pinnule  longest,  with  about  twelve 
joints.  The  other  pinnules  very  short,  having  only  five  or  six  joints  in  the 
middle  of  the  arm,  but  lengthening  out  again  near  the  end  of  the  arm,  the 
last  ones  being  tipped  with  a  hook  like  the  cirrhi. 


112  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

In  the  only  specimen  obtained  one  of  the  arms  is  abortive  and  divided 
into  three  very  short  branches;  to  compensate,  one  of  the  arms  of  the  next 
pair  is  divided  into  two  from  its  origin. 

In  270  fathoms  oil' Havana. 

Antipathcs  filix  Pourt. 

Main  stem  erect  and  straight,  pinnate,  the  pinnules  set  off  nearly  at 
right  angles,  rather  short,  alternate,  covered  with  spines  or  short  stiff  hairs, 
and  showing  a  succession  of  slight  swellings  and  contractions.  Axis  tough 
and  corneous,  nearly  black,  dark  amber  color  by  transmitted  light.  About 
3  inches  high.      Soft,  parts  not  observed. 

In  2  70  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Every  specimen  obtained  served  as  support  to  the  tubes  of  an  Annelid 
{Marphysa  antipatlmrn). 

Antipathes  humilis  Pocrt. 

Differs  from  the  former  by  its  mode  of  branching,  which  is  dense  and  irreg- 
ularly subflabellate,  like  a  spray  of  heather;  more  expanded  laterally  than 
in  height,  which  is  3  or  4  inches,  whilst  the  spread  is  1  or  5.  Every  swell- 
ing corresponds  to  a  polyp.  Polyps  all  on  the  same  side  of  the  llabellum, 
six-armed,  with  very  elongated  calicle  in  the  younger  branches,  so  that  the 
tentacles  appear  almost  like  two  parallel  rows  of  three  tentacles  each.  It 
differs  from  A.  Boscii  in  having  rather  thicker  and  more  hispid  branches, 
curved  somewhat  downwards,  as  the  branches  of  an  elm. 

Abundant  in  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Gorgonia  exserta  Ellis. 

Two  specimens  of  this  species,  3  or  4  inches  high,  were  obtained  off  Ha- 
vana in  27o  fathoms.  They  agree  very  well  with  the  figures  in  the  differ- 
ent authors.  One  of  them  has  all  the  polyps  retracted  and  the  ealicles 
clo  ed,  the  other  has  them  all  expanded  as  usually  represented.  The  whole 
cortical  subslanee  is  filled  with  spindle-shaped  spicules,  by  which  character 
it  is  distinguished  from  Thesea  guadalupensis  Duch.  and  Mich.,  in  which 
the  spicules  are  covered  by  a  squamosa  layer. 

In  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Swiftia  exserta  Duch.  and  Mien. 

I  refer  to  this  spe.cies  a  few  specimens  of  a  very  small  Gorgonian,  not 
more  than  one  inch  high,  which  at  first  sight  does  not  appear  different  from 
the  preceding  species.  Under  the  microscope  the  cortical  substance  ap- 
pears studded  with  rough  irregular  calcareous  pieces,  without  spindle- 
shaped  spicules.  The  polyps  are  perhaps  a  little  more  verrucose  than 
those  of  the  Gorjronia  exserta.     Off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  113 

Acantliogoi'gia  aspera  Pour.T.     (The  generic  name  given  by  Gray  has  pri- 
ority over  the  name  Blcpharorjorgia  Duch.  and  Mich.) 
Slender,    flabelliform,   few-branched,   sparsely  beset  with    short   spines. 
Polyps  rather  scattered,  long  verruciform  (length  equal  to  four  or  five  times 
the  diameter),  with  eight  rows  of  spines  longest   at  the  ba<e  and  at  the 
summit  of  the  polyp.     Tentacles  black,  the  rest  of  the  polyps  translucent. 
Stem  dark  brown.     The  whole  polypidom  not  more  than  two  inches  high. 
By  its  spiny  stum,  and  spines  at  the  base  of  the  polyp-,  and  by  the  greater 
length  of  the  latter,  it  differs  decidedly  from  A.  liirsuta  Gray,  A.  Grayi  and 
lica  Johnson,  and  from  A.  (Blepharogorgia)  Schrammi  Duch.  and  Mich. 
In  270  fathoms,  oil' Havana. 

Sorcoclyction  rugosum  Pour.T. 

Small  polypidoms  rising  from  creeping  stolons,  on  pebbles.  Like  little 
knobs,  fragile,  rough,  closed  by  the  contraction  of  the  polyp  by  means  of 
about  six  irregular  rough  pieces  meeting  together.  When  opened,  the 
cavity  ^iows  six  or  eight  membranous  septa,  nearly  meeting  in  the  cen- 
tre. Stolons  covered  with  irregular  calcareous  pieces.  Color  dirty  white. 
Diameter  of  polyps  one  tenth  of  an  inch.     In  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

Caryophyllia  forrnosa  Pourt. 

More  or  less  turbinate,  on  a  rather  thin  curved,  or  straight  stem.  Costae 
equal,  distinct  only  near  the  calicle.  Calicle  circular  or  subovate,  moder- 
ately deep.  Columella  formed  of  four  to  six  very  flexuous  or  twisted 
laminae.  Six  complete  systems  of  septa.  Four  cycles.  Septa  thin,  prom- 
inent, sharp  and  rounded  on  the  edge  ;  sparsely  granulated.  Those  of  the 
third  order  sometimes  flexuous  near  the  inner  end  in  some  specimens. 
Twelve  pali,  opposed  to  the  third  order,  equal,  large,  flexuous,  ornamented 
with  tubercles  disposed  in  horizontal  lines  on  the  eonvexitv  of  the  flex- 
ures. The  young  are  rather  variable,  sometimes  long  and  cylindrical,  with 
the  septa  little  developed  and  showing  neither  pali  nor  columella,  and 
sometimes  very  small  and  cup-shaped  and  showing  pali  and  columella. 

The.  largest  are  1^  inches  high:  calicle  1  inch  in  diameter. 

Abundant  in  270  fathoms,  off  Havana.  Specimens  mostly  alive  and 
growing  singly  or  attached  to  each  other. 

It  differs  from  C.  Berleriana  which  has  the  costa?  more  prominent  and 
a  different  number  of  septa.  I  have  not  seen  specimens  or  figures  of  C. 
Guadulpensis,  which  is  fossil  in  volcanic  formations  of  Guadaloupe,  and  may 
not  be  extinct. 

Deltocyathus  Agassizii  Porr.T. 

Corailum  discoidal,  free  at  all  ages.     Wall  nearly  horizontal,  sometimes 
with  a  nipple-shaped  projection  in  the  centre.    Costas  well  marked,  covered 
15 


114  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

■with  spinv  or  smooth  granules  ;  tbc  six  primary  costs  in  one  specimen 
much  broader  than  the  others  and  forming  a  star.  Septa  in  six  complete 
systems,  with  four  cycles  ;  covered  with  small  spinous  tubercles.  Pali  of  the 
first,  second,  and  third  cycles  projecting  generally  higher  than  the  septa,  to 
which  they  are  soldered  at  the  base.  The  pali  of  the  fust  cycle  short, 
those  of  the  third  joined  to  those  of  the  second,  as  in  the  ibssil  species,  but 
the  point  of  junction  not  being  exsert  the  V  or  delta  is  not  as  apparent. 
Columella  papillose  and  small,  rising  from  the  primary  and  secondary 
pali  which  meet  in  the  centre. 

Dredged  from  270  fathoms  off  Havana,  in  numerous  specimens  of  all 
ages,  but  none  apparently  alive. 

Platytrochus  coronatus  Pourt. 

This  species,  not  belonging  properly  to  the  region  under  discussion,  is 
based  on  a  specimen  brought  up  by  the  sounding  lead  from  a  depth  of  460 
fathoms  in  lat.  30°  41'  N.,  and  long.  77°  3'  W.,  by  one  of  the  hydrograph- 
ical  parties  of  the  Coast  Survey.  It  is  in  a  bad  state  of  preservation,  the 
outer  wall  and  base  being  so  corroded  as  to  make  the  characters  drawn 
from  the  epitheca  and  costae  very  doubtful ;  the  septa  and  columella  are 
also  rather  imperfect. 

Corallum  free,  base  horizontal,  with  a  tubercle  in  the  centre.  The  costae 
of  the  primary  and  secondary  order  alone  distinct,  forming  a  crown  of 
twelve  large  tubercles  around  the  base,  but  vanishing  towards  the  edge  of 
the  calicle.  Wall  vertical,  almost  at  a  right  angle  with  the  base  and  the 
circular  calicle.  Six  complete  systems  of  septa,  in  four  cycles.  Septa 
meeting  in  the  centre  Those  of  the  tertiary  cycle  frequently  but  not  reg- 
ularly coalescing  with  the  primary  or  secondary  ones.  Columella  proba- 
bly papillose  (nearly  destroyed).  Diameter  -{'5  of  an  inch,  height  (without 
the  central  tubercle)  ^  of  an  inch. 

Diplohelia  profunda  Pourt. 

Corallum  branching,  cylindrical,  finely  granulated  or  striated,  particu- 
larly on  younger  branches  and  around  the  calicles,  which  are  projecting, 
very  deep  and  pocket-shaped.  Septa  21,  nearly  equal,  not  exsert,  finely 
serrated  and  tuberculated,  nearly  meeting  at  the  bottom  of  the  fossa. 
Columella  formed  of  six  or  seven  club-shaped  styles,  not  very  distinct 
from  the  septa.  The  specimens  obtained  were  all  in  fragments  2  or  3 
inches  long.     Diameter  ^  inch. 

This  species  resembles  the  fossil  Dipt,  raristclla,  but  has  deeper  calicles 
and  somewhat  rougher  surface. 

Dredged  from  350  fathoms  off  Havana;  all  the  specimens  dead;  also 
brought  up  by  the  lead  in  same  condition  in  10.30  fathoms,  lat.  28°  24'  N., 
loner.  79°  13'  W. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  115 

Crypthelia  Peircei  Pocrt. 

Corallum  arborescent  and  subflabellate,  irregularly  dichotomous,  slen- 
der, finely  striated.  Calicles  subpedicellate,  always  of  a  larger  diameter 
than  the  stem,  facing  to  one  side  only  of  the  corallum.  Septa  12  to  16, 
thick,  not  extending  far  into  the  calicle.  Columella  not  seen.  The  lower 
border  of  the  calicle  prolonged  into  a  rounded  lip  folded  over  so  as  to  hide 
the  fossa.  Some  of  the  calicles  are  inflated  and  globular,  perhaps  from  the 
presence  of  parasites.  Size:  \  an  inch  long  (broken),  diameter  of  stem 
from  J^  to  5L  of  an  inch,  of  the  calicles  ^  to  -fa. 

This  very  pretty  coral  was  dredged  off  Havana  in  2  70  fathoms,  but  ap- 
pears to  be  rather  rare,  only  a  few  small  fragments  being  obtained.  It 
differs  from  the  species  described  by  Milne-Edwards  in  having  a  smaller 
lip.  hiding  only  the  fossa  of  the  calicle.  whilst  in  the  species  from  the  Pa- 
cific the  lip  is  as  large  as  the  whole  calicle.  I  have  also  found  worn  frag- 
ments in  a  specimen  of  bottom  from  600  fathoms  in  lat.  31°  32'  N.,  and 
long.  78°  20'  W. 

Stylaster  eomplanatus  Potjrt. 

Corallum  branching,  flabellate,  not  coalescing,  slender.  Calicles  termi- 
nal, pedicellate  :  gemmating  from  the  edge  of  the  preceding  calicle.  gen- 
erally on  alternate  sides,  so  as  to  give  a  zigzag  form  to  the  branch,  but 
sometimes  two  or  even  three  new  corallites  rise  from  the  border  of  one. 
They  arc  directed  slightly  more  towards  one  side  of  the  plane  of  the  coral- 
lum than  the  other.  Calicles  compressed  in  the  same  plane,  moderately 
deep,  the  styliform  columella  appearing  at  the  bottom  rising  out  of  a  small 
round  t'ossa,  and  surrounded  by  rudimentary  pali.  Septa  12.  appearing 
like  folds  of  the  wall,  not  extending  far  into  the  calicle,  and  punctured 
with  small  pores  on  the  edge.  When  the  branch  rising  out  of  a  calicle 
increases  in  size,  the  calicle  becomes  hidden  by  the  plicated  lip  raised 
again-t  the  -tern,  and  at  length  becomes  obsolete.  Spiny  ampulla?  scattered 
along  the  stems,  more  abundantly  on  the  rear  side.  It  is  white,  about  l£ 
inches  high;  the  diameter  of  the  calicles  about  -fa  of  an  inch. 

Obtained  in  270  fathoms  off  Havana. 

It  approaches  nearly  to  Stylaster  elegans  Ditch,  and  Mich.,  which  has 
however  nearly  circular  calicles  with  shorter  pedicles  and  thicker  branches. 
(The  name  St.  elegans  has  been  anticipated  by  Verrill  for  a  species  from 
the  Ivingsmill  Islands,  in  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zodl.,  Cambridge,  18G  I  ;  I  would 
-jropose  therefore  the  name  of  St.  Duchassaingii  for  the  species  from  Gua- 
daloupe.)  From  Allopora  maderemis  Johnson,  to  which  it  is  very  closely 
allied,  it  differs  also  by  the  compressed  form  of  the  calicles. 

By  its  scale-like  lip  hiding  the  fossa  in  -the  older  calicles,  and  by  its 
transversely  elongated  terminal  calicles,  this  species  forms  a  passage  to  the 


11G  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

genus  Errina  as  defined  bolow.  It  is  here  retained  among  the  Stylastcrs 
on  account  of  its  distinct  septa  and  the  absence  of  tubular  pores  having  a 
longitudinal  fissure  below.  On  the  other  hand  the  passage  through  St. 
flaheliiformis  to  the  Stylasters  with  round  scattered  calicles  appears  natural. 
When  I  have  had  more  opportunity  of  examining  the  allied  forms,  it  may 
be  necessary  to  separate  S.  complanatus  generically  from  the  true  Stylasters. 
The  whole  group  of  corals  comprising  the  genera  Stylaster,  Errina,  Allo- 
pora,  and  Distichopora,  all  closely  allied,  requires  careful  revision. 

Genus  Errina. 

A  comparison  of  specimens  of  Errata  aspera  Gray,  in  the  Museum  of  Com- 
parative Zoology  in  Cambridge,  with  the  two  species  described  below, 
showed  very  plainly  that  Gray  has  overlooked  the  true  calicles  and  mis- 
taken for  them  the  tubular  pores  scattered  over  the  younger  branches. 
In  his  species  these  pores  are  very  large  and  numerous,  and  the  calicles 
small  and  concealed  ;  in  the  new  species,  here  described  under  the  name 
of  St.  cocJdeatus,  the  reverse  is  the  case.  The  structure  of  the  latter  spe- 
cies being  once  well  understood,  it  is  very  easy  to  recognize  the  same  parts 
in  the  other  ;  of  both  1  have  furthermore  made  careful  sections  for  the 
microscope.  Whilst  retaining  the  name  adopted  by  Gray,  I  propose  the 
following  generical  definition. 

Corallum  branching,  subfiabellate,  finely  granulated  or  obscurely  stri- 
ated, the  younger  branchlets  more  or  less  studded  with  tubular  pores,  split 
downwards  >'nto  a  furrow.  Calicles  at  first  terminal,  in  shape  of  a  trans- 
verse slit,  of  which  one  lip  continues  to  grow  in  a  conical  shape  to  repeat 
the  process,  whilst  the  other  expands  in  the  shape  of  a  bract  or  spoon,  hid- 
ing the  calicle  alter  it  has  become  lateral.  Fossa  circular  and  very  deep; 
septa  obscure  or  none;  pali  rudimentary  in  the  shape  of  sin  ill  beads;  colu- 
mella pistilliform.     Ampulla?  as  in  Stylaster. 

Errina  cocnlcata  Potjrt. 

Corallum  branching,  very  slender,  subfiabellate,  finely  granulated  and 
striated,  studded  with  echinulated  ampullar.  Branchlets  almost  filiform; 
the  pores  on  them  are  sometimes  tubular  with  a  longitudinal  fissure  below. 
Fossa  round  and  deep,  the  spoon-shaped  lip  hiding  it  entirely.  Columella 
pistilliform  and  somewhat  hirsute,  very  deep  seated.  Septa  few  and  indis- 
tinct, formed  by  folds  of  the  wall. 

Compared  with  T£mna  aspcra  from  Fayal,  it  is  found  to  differ  from  it  in 
having  slenderer  branches,  with  fewer  and  smaller  furrowed  tubercles  and 
fewer  echinulated  ampullffl,  whilst  the  calicles  are  larger  and  more  con- 
spicuous. The  whole  corallum  is  about  one  inch  high.  Found  in  "270 
fathoms  oil'  Havana. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  117 

Fragments  of  an  Errina,  closely  resembling  E.  aspera,  have  been  also 
found  by  me  in  a  specimen  of  bottom  from  GOO  fathoms,  in  lat.  31°  32'  N. 
and  long.  78°  20'  W. 

Errina  glabra  Poukt. 

Corallnm  flabellate,  not  coalescing,  with  the  older  parts  of  the  stem  mas- 
sive, faintly  granulated  and  striated  ;  a  row  of  very  small  perforated  tuber- 
cles <>n  each  side  of  the  branches.  Calicles  very  small,  terminal  on  branch- 
lets,  obsolete  on  larger  branches,  and  their  place  indicated  by  a  small  scale. 
Septa  indistinct.  Columella  styliform  in  a  deep  fossa.  Ampulla?  scarce 
and  small,  smooth.     Color  white.     Two  or  three  inches  high. 

It  differs  from  Errina  coclileata  in  having  much  thicker  branches,  even 
when  young,  forming  smaller  angles  with  the  stems.  The  ampullae  are  not 
spinous.  The  tuberculated  pores  are  confined  to  the  sides  of  the  branches 
and  have  seldom  a  distinct  furrow.  From  Errina  aspera,  although  resem- 
bling it  in  general  habitus,  it  differs  in  having  slenderer  branches,  less  nu- 
merous ampullae,  and  lacking  the  large  furrowed  pores  on  the  younger 
branches. 

Distichopora  sulcata  Pourt. 

Corallum  dendroid,  much  compressed,  somewhat  rugose.  The  calicles  on 
the  edge,  mostly  confluent;  fossa  a  deep  round  hole.  Septa  about  12.  very 
rudimentary ;  the  border  of  the  calicle  pierced  by  about  eight  or  ten  pores 
which  form  lateral  rows  when  the  calicles  are  joined.  Columella  deep 
seated,  seldom  visible,  styliform,  hirsute,  similar  to  the  columella  of  the 
Stylasters.     The  interior  of  the  calicle  is  studded  with  bead-like  tubercles. 

This  species  differs  from  other  known  species  of  the  genus  in  being 
more  compressed,  having  the  pores  larger,  more  distant,  and  when  conflu- 
ent forming  a  much  deeper  furrow.  When  the  calicles  are  isolated,  they 
present  all  the  characters  of  Allopora,  as  shown  in  A.  oculina,  Ehr. 

Found  in  270  fathoms  off  Havana  ;  rather  scarce.  Also  in  the  shape  of 
worn  fragments  in  a  specimen  brought  up  by  the  lead  from  600  fathoms  in 
lat.  31°  32'  X.  and  long.  7S°  20'  W.,  which  is  near  the  outer  edge  of  the 
Gulf  Stream  off  the  coast  of  Georgia. 

Of  the  close  relationship  of  Distichopora  with  the  Stylasters,  and  still 
more  with  the  Alloporas,  I  entertain  no  doubt,  after  a  careful  examination. 
Indeed.,  I  can  see  no  reason  for  separating  generically  Allopora  and  Distich- 
opora, which  appears  to  differ  only  by  the  confluence  or  non-confluence  of 
the  calicles,  both  of  which  characters  are  found  in  the  same  individual  in 
the  species  described  above. 

Heliopora  tubulata  Toukt. 

I  refer  with  great  doubt  to  that  genus,  a  form  of  small  corals  of  which  I 
have  obtained  but  a  few  fragments,  representing  two  species.     Corallum 


118  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

small,  branching,  cylindrical,  with  pores  of  three  kinds  :  small  microscopi- 
cal, somewhat  larger  and  tubulated,  and  large  round  holes.  The  latter 
are  rather  distant,  in  irregular  longitudinal  rows.  No  trace  of  septa  or 
columella.  The  internal  structure  shows  a  net-work  of  round  canals  com- 
municating with  the  pores  and  with  each  other.  The  larger  holes  com- 
municate with  a  cavity  in  the  centre,  not  communicating  with  the  next  ex- 
cept through  the  small  canals  ;  the  walls  of  these  cavities  are  closely  per- 
forated. No  floors  or  tabulae  were  to  be  seen  in  the  only  section  I  was  able 
to  make.  The  largest  specimen  is  one  inch  high. 
Off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Heliopora  carinata  Pocrt. 

This  species  differs  from  the  preceding  by  its  much  slenderer  branches, 
on  which  every  tubulated  pore  is  at  the  extremity  of  a  keel  or  ridge.  The 
larger  round  pores  are  proportionally  scarcer  and  smaller. 

Off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Antennularia  triseriata  Pourt. 

Tubular  stems  rising  from  a  clustered  root,  straight,  erect,  not  branch- 
ing, corneous,  translucent.  Hair-like  branchlets  in  three  rows.  Polyp 
cells  very  small,  scattered  sparsely  on  the  stem,  more  plentiful  but  not 
dense  on  the  branchlets,  campanulate,  very  short  on  a  longer,  conical  cali- 
ciform  stem.  Aperture  entire.  Ovarian  cells  in  the  axilla;  of  the  branch- 
lets,  compressed,  semi-lunar  or  long  kidney-shaped,  with  the  aperture  on 
the  inside  of  the  upper  horn,  looking  towards  the  peduncle. 

Eight  inches  high,  dark  amber  color.     Off  Sand  Key  in  100  fathoms. 

Thoa  pulchella  Poubt. 

Erect,  rooted;  stem  composed  of  irregularly  twisted  tubes,  regularly 
pinnate  ;  branchlets  alternate.  Cells  regularly  alternate  on  the  stem  and 
brandies,  moderately  distant,  more  or  less  corrugated,  slightly  contracted 
towards  the  four-sided  aperture,  the  four  angles  of  which  form  obtuse  teeth. 
Ovarian  cells  long  campanulate,  regularly  scolloped  on  the  border  with 
square  teeth.     Peduncles  as  long  as  the  cells. 

Off  Sand  Key  in  100  fathoms  and  oil"  Havana  in  270. 

Thoa  capillaris  Pouet. 

Erect,  irregularly  branching.  Branches  almost  capillary.  Cells  alter- 
nate, distant,  small,  tubular,  bi-  or  tri-articnlate  ;  aperture  terminal  and  en- 
tile. Ovarian  cells  large,  elongated  campanulate,  denticulate  margin, 
teeth  rounded;  peduncles  as  long  or  longer  than  the  cell,  connected  with 
the  latter  by  a  small  knob-like  joint.  One  inch  high.  Off  Sand  Key  in 
100  fathom-. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  119 

Thoa  siphonata  Pourt. 

Stem  composed  of  irregularly  twisted  tubes;  branches  irregularly  pin- 
nate. Polyp-cells  very  small  and  scarce,  tubular,  at  the  base  of  the  pedun- 
cle of  the  very  long,  tubular  ovarian  cells.  The  latter  are  bent  at  right 
angle  near  the  top  and  terminate  in  a  round  aperture.  Half  an  iuch  high, 
on  Terebratula?. 

Off  Havana  in  270  fathoms. 

Tubularia  crinis  Pourt. 

Irregularly  branching ;  branches  rather  smaller  than  horsehair,  of  dark 
horn-color,  wrinkled  at  intervals;  polyps  terminal,  large,  not  retractile. 
About  two  inches  high,  attached  to  tubes  of  Annelids.  Off  Sand  Key  in 
100  fathoms. 

In  determining  the  Hydroid  polyps,  I  have  made  use  of  the  older  generic 
names.  The  newer  subdivision  of  these  genera  being  based  chiefly  on 
characters  derived  from  the  softer  parts,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  assign  a 
polyp  to  its  proper  place  in  them,  unless  observed  alive. 


It  would  be  premature  to  compare  this  deep-sea  Fauna  with  the 
animals  inhabiting  the  regions  of  lesser  depth  on  the  coast  of  Cuba 
or  Florida.  In  the  first  place,  many  of  the  smaller  forms  of  animals, 
such  for  instance  as  the  Bryozoa  or  the  Hydroid  polyps  of  those  shores, 
are  not  yet  sufficiently  known  to  enable  us  to  say  if  any  of  the  species 
dredged  exist  in  any  other  than  the  abyssal  region.  Then,  a  very  dif- 
ferent value  must  be  assigned  to  the  different  classes  of  animals  under 
examination.  Thus,  the  dead  shells  must  be  left  out  of  the  question,  at 
least  the  smaller  ones,  for  they  may  have  been  dropped  with  the  excre- 
ments of  fishes,  or,  in  the  case  of  Pteropods,  have  sunk  from  the  surface 
after  the  death  of  the  animal.  The  Crustacea  and  Annelids  being 
abundant  and  generally  sedentary  will,  when  better  known,  afford  good 
characteristics  of  the  regions  of  inequal  depth,  The  same  remark 
applies  to  the  Sponges  and  the  Foraminifera  ;  the  great  abundance  of 
the  latter  and  the  ease  with  which  they  may  be  procured  with  the 
sounding-lead  renders  them  particularly  useful. 

The  Echinoderms  appear  to  have  a  wide  range  in  depth  ;  at  least  we 
have  two  species  (Cidaris  annidosa  and  Tripncn.stes  ventricosus)  which 
are  common  to  the  shore  and  to  the  depth  of  27<»  fathoms.  The  upper 
and  lower  limits  of  Pentacrinus  are  not  yet  known. 

Of  the  corals,  none  of  the  species  found  in  our  dredgings  are  known 


120  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

to  exist  in  lesser  depths  ;  nor  have  any  of  the  common  species  of  the 
reefs  been  brought  up  from  a  considerable  depth.  The  Gorgonians 
however  are  represented  in  270  fathoms  by  at  least  two  species  known 
to  belong  to  the  West  Indian  Fauna  in  moderate  depths. 

Farther  researches  in  all  the  zones  of  depth  are  much  needed  ;  and 
we  hope  to  have  an  early  opportunity  of  continuing  our  researches  in 
the  Gulf  of  Florida,  so  as  to  throw  more  light  upon  this  interesting 
subject. 

Cambridge,  December  26,  1867. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  121 


No.  7.  —  Contributions  to  the  Fauna  of  the  Gulf  Stream  at  great 
depths  (2d  series').  By  L.  F.  de  Pourtales,  Assist.  U.  S. 
Coast  Survey. 

(Communicated  by  the  Superintendent  op  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.) 

The  researches  of  which  an  account  was  given  in  the  preceding  num- 
ber of  the  Bulletin  were  continued  in  the  spring  of  the  present  year 
(18GS)  in  connection  with  the  regular  explorations  of  the  Gulf  Stream  by 
the  Coast  Survey.  The  few  dredgings  obtained  in  18G7  had  given  results 
of  so  rich  and  promising  a  character,  that  Professor  Peircc,  the  Super- 
intendent of  the  U.  S.  Coast  Survey,  directed  me  to  accompany  the 
party  again,  and  to  dredge  on  all  the  lines  of  deep-sea  soundings  off  the 
Florida  reef. 

The  U.  S.  Steamer  Bibb,  Acting  Master  R.  Piatt,  U.  S.  N.,  was 
assigned  to  the  work.  The  means  of  working  were  much  more  com- 
plete, a  small  engine  having  been  set  up  on  deck,  by  which  not 
only  a  great  economy  of  time  and  labor  was  obtained  in  hauling  up 
the  lead  or  dredge,  but  it  was  found  perfectly  practicable  to  work  both 
at  the  same  time  ;  so  that  our  estimate  of  time,  based  on  the  plan  of 
sounding  out  a  line  one  day  and  dredging  over  the  same  ground  the 
next,  was  reduced  one  half,  —  an  advantage  which  will  be  under- 
stood by  those  who  know  the  value  of  a  cairn  day  for  such  work.  For 
the  perfection  of  the  mechanical  arrangements,  and  the  difficult  task  of 
keening  the  reckoning  in  the  current  with  very  scanty  landmarks,  I 
am  again  deeply  indebted  to  Captain  Piatt  and  his  officers. 

The  region  to  be  explored  this  season  comprised  a  section  of  the 
Gulf  Stream  from  Sombrero,  or  Dry  Rocks  Light-house,  on  the 
Florida  reef,  to  Elbow  Light-house  on  the  Double-headed  Shot  Key-  ; 
a  section  of  the  St.  Nicholas  Channel  from  Salt  Key  to  the  opposite 
coast  of  Cuba  ;  a  section  of  Santaren  Channel  from  Anguilla  Keys  to 
the  edge  of  the  Great  Bahama  Bank  ;  and  a  more  detailed  examination 
of  the  slope  extending  from  the  Florida  reef  to  the  trough  of  the  chan- 
nel from  Sand  Key  to  Sombrero  Light.  The  sections  across  St. 
16 


122  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Nicholas  and  Santaren  channels  were  quite  successful,  as  far  as  the 
soundings  and  current  observations  were  concerned;  but  the  few  dredg- 
ings  with  which  we  had  to  be  contented,  for  want  of  time  and  good 
weather,  did  not  produce  much  of  interest.  We  were  more  successful 
on  the  slope  or  so-called  apron  of  the  reef.  Here  the  great  advantage 
of  having  a  safe  anchorage  every  night  inside  the  reef,  and  within  half 
a  mile  of  the  field  of  work,  allowed  the  soundings  and  dredgings  to  be 
carried  on  with  great  rapidity  and  success. 

Tlie  six  lines  run  (as  far  as  possible  normally  to  the  reef)  were  the 
following  :  Off  Coffin's  Patches  with  only  two  dredgings  ;  off  Sombrero 
Light  with  seven  dredgings,  between  111  and  517  fathoms;  off  Bahia 
Honda  thirteen  dredgings,  from  19  to  418  fathoms;  off  the  American 
Shoal  fourteen  dredgings,  from  16  to  2GG  fathoms;  off  the  Samboes 
nineteen  dredgings,  from  13  to  298  fathoms;  and  off  Sand  Key  twenty 
dredgings,  from  23  to  306  fathoms.  Besides  these,  numerous  casts  were 
made  in  100  and  120  fathoms  off  Sand  Key,  whilst  current  observations 
were  in  progress. 

The  figures  and  the  character  of  the  bottom  developed  by  the  dif- 
ferent lines  were  found  quite  concordant.  At  an  average  the  slope,  after 
leaving  the  reef,  is  uniform  for  four  or  five  miles,  and  the  bottom  is  com- 
posed of  more  or  less  comminuted  shells  and  corals,  with  a  rather 
scanty  living  Fauna.  This  we  may  call  the  first  region.  The  next  ex- 
tends in  the  form  of  a  band  parallel  to  the  reef,  ten  to  twenty  miles 
broad,  beginning  at  a  depth  of  about  90  fathoms,  and  extending  to  about 
300  ;  the  slope  being  much  less  inclined  than  in  the  first  region,  and  in 
fact  deserving  in  a  great  part  of  its  extent  the  name  of  a  submarine 
plateau.  The  bottom  is  rocky,  rather  rough,  and  consists  of  a  recent 
limestone,  continually  though  slowly  increasing  from  the  accumulation 
of  the  calcareous  debris  of  the  numerous  small  ("orals.  Echinoderms,  and 
Mollusks  living  on  its  surface.  These  debris  are  consolidated  by  the 
tubes  of  Serpulaj,  the  interstices  filled  up  by  Foraminifera,  and  further 
smoothed  over  by  Nullipores.  It  is  not  unreasonable  to  suppose  that  we 
have  here  the  foundation  of  a  future  reef,  which,  when  in  the  course  of 
ages  it  shall  have  approached  the  surface,  will  be  covered  with  a  growth 
of  Madrepores  and  Astreans,  such  as  we  find  on  the  present  barrier 
reef,  and  as  have  lived  on  the  Conner  reel's  constituting  the  chain  of  the 
Florida  Key-,  the  border  of  the  main-land  of  the  peninsula3  and  prob- 
ably some  older  as  yet  unexplored  one.-  in  the  Everglades. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  123 

This  region  ceases  at  a  depth  varying  from  250  to  350  fathoms  ;  the 
third  region  begins  with  a  more  rapid  slope,  and  extends  over  the  whole 
trough  of  the  channel,  the  depth  of  which  in  this  part  does  not  much 
exceed  500  fathoms.  This  is  the  great  bed  of  Foraminifera,  and  more 
specially  of  Globigerinre,  which  covers  so  great  an  extent  of  the  bottom 
of  the  ocean,  and  which,  as  we  shall  see,  is  not  destitute  of  living  rep- 
resentatives of  the  higher  branches  of  the  animal  kingdom. 

The  Fauna  of  the  three  regions  is  very  distinctly  marked.  The  first 
region  is  singularly  barren,  and  shows  that  the  rich  Fauna  of  the 
Florida  reef  extends  but  very  little  to  seaward  or  into  depth.  The 
greater  number  of  the  shells  brought  up  are  dead  and  broken,  and  can 
scarcely  be  regarded  as  characteristic,  as  large  numbers  of  them  have 
evidently  served  as  food  for  turtles  and  fishes,  and  may  have  been  thus 
transported  some  distance.  Crustaceans  and  Annelids  are  more  com- 
mon. The  Echinoderms  are  represented  by  a  fnw  Ophiurians,  and  the 
Corals  chiefly  by  Balanophyllia  floridana,  nov.  sp.,  very  abundant  in 
some  places,  particularly  near   Sand   Key. 

The  second  region,  on  the  contrary,  is  remarkably  rich  in  animal 
forms,  which  may  be  in  part  attributed  to  the  hard  aud  rough  bottom 
offering  points  of  attachment  and  shelter.  If  this  formation  were 
emerged,  the  geologist  would  find  it  to  consist  of  beds  of  limestone 
full  of  fossils,  of  which  we  shall  point  out  the  most  characteristic  ones ; 
remarking,  however  that  though  the  great  majority  of  the  animals  fur- 
nishing those  remains  now  live  on  the  bottom,  a  i'tw  contribute  by 
sinking  after  death  from  the  higher  regions  of  the  superincumbent 
water  (teeth  of  fishes  and  shells  of  Pteropods),  and  others  are  brought 
by  currents  from  littoral  regions  (bones  of  Manatee,  fragments  of 
littoral  plant-). 

The  Vertebrates  are  represented  by  the  bones  of  the  Manatee,  chiefly 
fragments  of  the  ribs.  These  are  quite  abundant,  no  less  than  ten  or 
twelve  casts  of  the  dredge  having  brought  them  up,  generally  several 
pieces  at  a  cast.  Until  we  are  better  acquainted  with  the  set  of  the 
currents  on  the  west  coast  of  Florida  and  the  coast  of  Cuba,  the  former 
habitat  of  these  animals  cannot  be  guessed  at  with  much  certainty, 
as  their  carcasses,  either  floated  out  of  the  estuaries  of  those  coasts,  or 
when  very  numerous,  as  they  evidently  were,  the  animals  may  have 
been  in  the  habit  of  migrating  across  the  straits,  and  may  have  been  fre- 
quently destroyed  by  sharks  on  the  passage.     As  no  fresh  addition  of 


124  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

these  bones  is  now  made  to  the  bottom,  nor  has  been  since  these  coasts 
have  been  settled  upon  by  white  men,  we  have  a  proof  that  the  deposit 
due  to  other  causes  is  very  blow,  since  the  dredge  finds  the  bones  still 
lying  loose  on  the  bottom. 

The  other  vertebrate  remains  are  teeth  of  sharks  and  eggshells  of 
skates.  Living  fishes  were  obtained  in  only  two  instances  at  about  100 
fathoms  :  one  was  a  Phycis  ;  another,  a  small  fish  of  the  Lophioid 
family,  not  yet  determined. 

The  Crustacea  are  rather  abundant,  but,  the  specimens  not  having 
been  fully  examined,  we  can  only  give  now  an  imperfect  list  of  the 
genera  represented:  Stenorhynchus,  Inachus,  Amathia,  Pisa,  Mithrax, 
Lupa,  Ethusa,  Pilumnus,  Dromidia,  Eupagurus,  Paguristes,  G'a/ut/tea, 
Thysanopoda,  Alima,  Garidine,  &c. 

Of  the  Mollusks,  the  most  abundant  in  individuals  are  the  Brachio- 
po<K  particularly  Terebratida  cubensis,  Pourt.  (Bulletin  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.  No.  6),  of  which  over  1,200  specimens  were  collected,  and  Wald- 
heimia  floridana,  now  sp.,  a  little  less  common.  The  Terebratulina 
Gailleti,  common  on  the  coast  of  Cuba,  was  found  very  rarely  on  the 
coast  of  Florida,  and  always  dead.  The  Gasteropods  are  more  numer- 
ous than  the  Acephala,  but,  as  well  as  the  latter,  are  represented  by 
small  species.  The  largest  ones  are  the  Voluta  junonia,  and  a  Trochus 
of  about  the  same  size.  As  the  Mollusks  of  the  collection  have  not 
yet  been  determined,  a  list  of  the  genera  must  suffice  for  the  present : 
Murex  (2  species),  Fusus,  Nassa,  Pedicularia,  Cassis,  Dolium,  Pleu- 
rotoma,  Voluta,  Marginella,  Natica,  Vermetus,  Trochus,  Monodonta, 
Delphinida,  Scissurella,  Fissurella,  Rimula,  Emarginulina,  Pileopsis, 
Dentalium,  Chiton,  Marsenia,  Eolis ; — Cucullea,  Pectunculus,  Nu- 
cula,  Leila.  Lucina,  Mactra,  Necera. 

The  only  ones  among  these  abundant  in  individuals  are  a  Pleuro- 
toma,  a  Marginella,  a  Vermetus,  a  Monodonta,  and  a  Cucullea. 

Bryozoa  are  also  frequent  in  individuals  ;  but  there  are  less  species 
apparently  than  on  the  coast  of  Cuba  in  similar  depths. 

The  Radiates  Conn  perhaps  the  most  interesting  part  of  the  collec- 
tion, being  represented  in  many  cases  by  now  or  little  known  genera. 
The  Echinoderms  have  not  vet  been  determined,  with  the  exception  of 
the  Ilolothurians,  of  which  only  three  species  are  found  ;  one  of  them, 
Cuvieria  opercidata,  nov.  sp.,  is  tolerably  common;  the  others  are  a 
Thyonidium]  and  another  which   the  imperfection  of  the  specimen  has 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  125 

not  allowed  us  to  recognize  with  confidence.  Of  Echinida  there  are 
five  or  six  species,  of  which  a  Oidaris  is  very  abundant,  and  an  Echinus 
rather  common.  Both  are  new  species,  and  the  immature  specimens 
found  on  the  coast  of  Cuba,  and  referred  to  Gldaris  annulosa  and  Trip- 
neustcs  ventricosus,  in  the  Bull.  Mas.  Comp.  Zool.  No.  G,  belong  in 
reality  to  them.  The  genera  Echinocyamus,  Amphidetus,  and  a  new 
genus  near  Parasalenia,  are  also  represented.  The  Asleridce  arc  also 
represented  by  several  new  forms  of  Opkidiaster,  Pterasler,  Asterias, 
and  Luidia,  and  among  the  Ophiurians  of  genera  near  Asteroschema, 
Asteroporpa,  and  Astrophyton.  The  Comatula  JIagenii,  Pourt.,  is  found 
in  great  abundance.  The  Gorgonians  and  Corals  will  be  described  at  the 
end  of  this  paper.  They  belong  to  the  following  genera:  Nephthya, 
Primnoa,  2  sp. ;  Gorgonia,  2  pp. ;  Acis,  Antipathes,  3  pp.  Gcenocya- 
t/ius,  Paracyathus,  ThecocyatJins,  Rliizotrochus,  Lophohdia,  Allopora, 
Distichopora,  Errina,  Thecopsammia,  n.  gen.  2  sp. ;  Diaseris,  Ifaplo- 
phyllia,  n.  g.  Pliobothrus,  n.  g. 

It  will  be  remarked  that  among  the  Corals  the  families  of  Madrepo- 
ridas  and  Astrseidae  are  entirely  unrepresented,  whilst  the  greater  num- 
ber belong  to  the  families  of  Caryophyllidffi  and  Oculinidae,  as  defined 
by  Milne-Edwards,  or,  as  we  believe,  to  a  new  family  to  be  separated 
from  the  Oculinida^,  and  called  Stylasteridee. 

The  Sponges  are  found  in  this  region  in  numerous  forms  ;  they  are 
in  general  very  abundantly  provided  with  siliceous  spicula,  so  much  so 
as  to  be  unpleasant  to  handle. 

The  third  and  last  region  is  characterized  by  the  great  Globigerina 
deposit.  No  trace  of  Vertebrates  is  found  here,  the  accidental  remains 
being  probably  soon  buried  in  the  soft  bottom.  But  other  branches  of 
the  animal  kingdom  are  still  represented  as  deep  as  517  fathoms,  be- 
yond which  limit  we  had  no  occasion  to  dredge.  The  Crustaceans  are 
confined  to  a  few  small  and  peculiar  forms  of  Pagurians  inhabiting  shells 
of  Dentalium  and  Pteropods.  Annelids  appear  to  be  comparatively 
abundant  and  varied.  Of  living  Mollusks  only  three  species  were  ob- 
tained, —  a  Phorus,  a  Dentalium,  and  a  Limopsis,  the  two  latter  more 
numerously ;  and  of  dead  shells,  Pleurotoma,  Rimula,  and  Neosra, 
besides  several  kinds  of  Pteropods,  not  inhabitants  of  the  bottom.  The 
Radiates  comprise  a  few  small  Ophiurians  ;  Bourgucticrinus  Hotessieri, 
D'Orb.  (which  will  be  described  further  on)  ;  Primnoa,  Gorgonia, 
Chrysogorgia,  Acanthogorgia,  Ms,    Mopsea,    GaryophyUia,    Stephano- 


126  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

pftylUa,  and  dead  fragments  of  some  of  the  Corals  of  the  preceding  re- 
gion.    Sertularians  and  Sponges  are  also  found  sparingly. 

A  few  general  remarks  on  the  deep-sea  Fauna  may  not  be  inappro- 
priate. First,  with  regard  to  dimensions:  almost  all  the  species  are  of 
small  size,  compared  with  the  allied  forms  of  the  littoral  and  shoal- 
water  regions  in  general  ;  the  Voluta  junonia,  the  largest  shell  found, 
is  small  for  that  genus.  The  only  exception  is  an  Echinus,  which  is 
nearly  of  the  average  size,  and  an  Actinia.  The  prevailing  colors  are 
white,  pink, —  sometimes  playing  into  orange,  —  and  a  pale  green. 
Blue  was  only  seen  in  a  small  incrusting  Sponge.  What  proportion  of 
light  reaches  a  certain  depth  we  shall  try  to  determine  during  our  next 
exploration.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  the  deep-sea  animals  have 
generally  well-developed  eyes,  larger  if  anything  than  those  of  their 
congeners  of  shallow  water. 

It  is  rather  a  matter  of  surprise  to  find  so  great  a  difference  between 
the  Fauna  of  similar  depths  on  the  coasts  of  Cuba  and  of  Florida,  sepa- 
rated as  they  are  by  a  strait  of  no  great  width,  and  bathed  by  the  same 
current.  The  few  dredgings  obtained  on  the  former  coast  do  not  al- 
low us  to  draw  conclusions  from  the  absence  of  Florida  species,  but 
they  give  still  more  weight  to  the  inverse.  Thus,  to  restrict  our  re- 
marks to  the  Corals,  —  more  carefully  studied  than  the  other  classes,  — 
of  ten  species  of  true  Corals  from  Cuba  described  in  the  preceding  num- 
ber of  this  Bulletin,  only  two  have  been  found  on  the  Florida  coast, 
and  they  only  in  very  rare  fragments.  Something  may  be  due  to  the 
gregariousness  of  Corals  in  certain  spots  and  their  rarity  in  others.  The 
dredge  may  come  up  full  of  a  certain  species  at  one  time,  and  it  may 
never  be  found  again,  even  in  close  proximity.  This  happened  to  us 
with  regard  to  Lophohelia  affinis,  n.  sp.  The  botanist  is  familiar  with 
such  instances  among  land  plants. 

We  hoped  to  give  in  this  paper  a  full  catalogue  of  the  species 
collected;  but  as  time  is  insufficient,  it  is  thought  best  to  publish  the 
following  descriptions  as  far  as  completed,  and,  as  the  dredgings  are 
to  be  continued  throughout  the  straits  of  Florida,  the  descriptions  of  the 
other  species  will  he  reserved  for  a  more  extended  final  work. 

I  take  this  opportunity  again  to  acknowledge  the  help  I  have  received 
from  Professor  Agassiz  in  the  way  of  advice  and  of  facilities  afforded 
to  me  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  127 

Description  of  Sjjecies. 

Waldheirnia  floridana  Pourt. 

Shell  ventricose,  triangular,  smooth,  wider  than  long,  the  widest  part 
being  across  the  front;  horn-color.  Both  valves  very  convex,  the  larger  one 
with  a  shallow  longitudinal  sinus  near  the  front.  Lateral  margin  of  1  irger 
valve  convex,  frontal  margin  angularly  sinuous,  and  deeply  indenting  the 
smaller  valve  in  the  middle.  Front  straight  and  flattened.  Beak  prom- 
inent and  compressed  laterally,  with  a  round  and  rather  largo  for 
Deltidium  small,  in  two  pieces.  Loop  very  long,  reaching  nearly  to  the 
frontal  margin  of  the  shell,  formed  of  very  thin  crura,  and  a  very  broad 
ribbon-shaped  reflexed  portion.  Septum  well  developed.  Lines  of  growth 
distinct.     Length  of  shell  |  of  an  inch,  breadth  1  inch. 

V.  rv  young  specimens  are  flatter,  rounder,  and  have  a  straight  margin  ; 
they  could  scarcely  be  distinguished  from  the  young  of  Terebratula  cubensis, 
if  it  was  not  for  the  loop  and  septum  seen  by  transparency.  There  is  also 
some  variety  of  form  in  the  old;  in  some  specimens  the  length  is  greater 
than  the  breadth,  and  there  is  considerable  diversity  in  the  sinuosity  of  the 
frontal  margin. 

This  species  is  quite  common  off  the  Florida  reef,  between  110  and  200 
fathoms,  on  rocky  bottom  :  it  is  always  associated  with  Terebratula  cubensis, 
the  latter  being  still  more  common  (in  the  proportion  of  about  three  to 
one),  and  making  its  first  appearance  in  100  fathoms. 

Cuvieria  operculata  Pourt. 

Body  oval,  flattened,  covered  with  finely  and  sparsely  granulated  scales, 
very  compactly  imbricated,  but  overlapping  very  little  except  near  the 
mouth  and  anus.  A  double  row  of  suckers  surrounds  the  soil  abdominal 
disc,  those  of  the  outer  row  perforating  the  marginal  plates;  sometimes 
two  or  three'  suckers  indicate  a  tendency  towards  a  median  row  near  the 
anterior  end.  Ten  tentacles,  of  winch  two  are  much  smaller  than  the  rest. 
(Esophagial  ring  often  pieces  shaped  like  the  letter  T.  The  aperture 
through  which  the  head  and  tentacles  are  retracted  is  closed  by  five  large 
triangular  plates-,  alternating  with  and  covering  live  narrow,  tooth-shaped 
ones.  In  the  young  the  five  plates  form  a  very  regular  pentagonal  shield. 
In  the  old  they  close  less  accurately,  and  their  outside  edges  are  covered  by 
some  overlapping  body  plates.  The  anus  is  closed  in  the  same  way,  but 
the  plates  are  much  less  regular  or  const  int. 

Length  1*  inches;  breadth  jj  of  an  inch.     Color  light  gray. 

Not  uncommon;  in  120  to  150  fathoms  off  Sund  Key. 


128  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Thyonidium  conchilcgum  Poubt. 

Body  very  flaccid.  Eighteen  to  twenty  tentacles  of  unequal  size,  very 
little  ramified,  short,  with  conical  papillae  ;  they  are  quite  difficult  to  count, 
as  some  of  them  are  so  small  that  they  may  be  mistaken  for  lobes  of  the 
larger  ones.  Suckers  in  five  double  rows,  with  others  scattered  between. 
The  outer  layer  of  the  very  thin  skin  contains  a  large  number  of  calcareous 
bodies  of  the  usual  type;  the  base  being  a  square  plate  with  more  or  less 
rounded  corners,  perforated  by  a  round  central  hole  surrounded  by  eight 
smaller  ones,  those  at  the  corners  being  smaller  than  those  corresponding 
to  the  sides  of  the  square.  From  this  plate  rise  four  cylindrical  processes, 
converging  towards  and  supporting  a  small  spiny  plate,  which  projects  on 
the  surface  of  the  skin  like  small  warts.  These  bodies  are  also  plentiful 
in  the  suckers  up  to  the  terminal  disc.  In  the  muscular  subcutaneous 
layer  there  are  patches  of  smaller  bodies  formed  of  agglomerations  of 
round  granules.  (Esophagial  ring  provided  with  retractor  muscles,  and 
composed  of  ten  pieces  alternately  in  the  shape  of  a  broad  letter  X  and  a 
thin  letter  T  loosely  connected.  Anus  unarmed.  Color  white,  hyaline. 
Length  2  or  .".  inches. 

This  animal  covers  itself  with  shells  of  Pteropods,  particularly  those  pro- 
vided with  {joints,  one  of  which  seems  to  be  held  by  every  sucker  of  the 
body. 

It  is  probably  closely  allied  to  T.  pellucidum  of  the  northern  seas. 
Not  being  able  to  compare  specimens,  I  base  this  species  chiefly  on  the 
difference  of  the  number  of  perforations  in  the  calcareous  plates  of  the 
skin,  the  T.  pellucidum  having  four  large  holes  surrounded  by  twelve 
smaller  ones. 

Eourgueticrinus  Hotessieri  D'Orb. 

Several  specimens  of  a  living  Crinoid  were  obtained  by  dredging  in  237, 
248,  and  30G  fathoms  off  the  Samboes  and  off  Sand  Key,  in  a  bottom  of 
Globigerinae  and  other  deep-sea  Foraminifera.  They  undoubtedly  belong 
1<>  the  genu-;  Bourgueticrinus,  as  defined  by  D'Orbigny.  I  refer  them  pro- 
visorily  to  the  species  named  above,  founded  on  some  small  fragments  of  the 
stem  discovered  in  the  recent  breccia  of  Guadaloupe,  which  contained  the 
well-known  human  skeleton  now  in  the  British  Museum.  D'Orbigny  gives 
it  as  his  opinion  that  his  species  is  probably  still  living  in  the  West  Indian 
seas;  hut  bis  figures  are.  insufficient  either  to  prove  or  disprove  the  identity 
of  cur  species  with  his.  A  comparison  with  his  specimens  even  would  leave 
the  matter  in  doubt.  It  is  to  he  hoped  that  further  researches  in  the 
Guadaloupe  formation  will  bring  to  light  specimens  perfect  enough  to  set- 
tle the  quesl ion. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  129 

The  following  description  is  not  as  full  as  could  be  wished,  as  the  speci- 
mens are  not  numerous  or  perfect  enough  to  warrant  a  complete  di-section. 

The  calicle  is  in  the  shape  of  a  regular  elongated  inverted  cone.  It  is 
composed  of  a  cycle  of  elongated  basal  (pelvic)  pieces,  followed  by  the 
much  shorter  first  radials  (costals)  alternating  with  them.  These  pieces 
are  all  so  intimately  connected  with  each  other  that  the  sutures  are  seen 
with  difficulty.  The  surface  is  perfectly  smooth.  The  lirst  brachials 
are  flat  and  square,  and  connected  laterally  by  a  membrane.  The  arms 
generally  break  oil'  between  these  and  the  second  brachials,  and  the  first 
might  therefore  be  called  second  radials,  as  they  in  a  measure  contribute 
to  the  formation  of  the  calicle  ;  still,  as  they  are  movable  on  the  lirst  radials, 
and  similar  in  shape  to  the  next  two  joints,  it  is  more  natural  to  name 
them  as  we  have  done.  The  next  two  joints,  or  second  and  third  brachials, 
are  similar,  and  but  little  smaller  than  the  first.  The  arms  contract  suddenly 
at  the  fourth  brachial  ;  they  are  five  in  number,  simple,  and  composed  of 
forty  joints,  every  pair  of  which  forms  a  syzygium.  The  pinnules  arise 
from  the  side  of  the  upper  joint  of  each  syzygium,  alternately  on  one  side 
and  on  the  other.  There  are  none,  however,  on  the  four  or  five  first 
syzygia.  The  inner  side  of  the  arm  is  channelled,  and  the  middle  of  the 
channel  is  protected  by  a  row  of  very  thin  alternate  scales. 

The  pinnules  are  composed  of  from  ten  to  fourteen  somewhat  imbricated 
plates,  of  which  the  first  two  are  narrower  than  the  subsequent  ones.  The 
inner  side  is  provided  with  a  row  of  rounded  alternate  scales  similar  to 
those  on  the  inside  of  the  arms. 

The  stem  is  composed  of  a  variable  number  of  joints  ;  our  largest  speci- 
men having  fifty-nine  and  the  smallest  but  thirty.  The  generic  character  of 
having  the  joints  flattened  at  their  two  ends  in  planes  alternately  at  right 
angles  to  each  other  is  well  marked,  particularly  near  the  root ;  it  is  less 
apparent  near  the  calicle,  though  this  conformation  may  still  be  recognized 
to  within  half  a  dozen  articulations  of  it;  the  last  joints  are  sensibly  round. 
The  length  of  a  joint  is  on  the  average  about  three  times  its  diameter,  except 
the  four  or  five  joints  preceding  the  calicle,  which  are  much  shorter.  The 
joints  are  connected  by  a  ligament  passing  through  the  central  canal,  also 
by  two  strong  ligaments  lodged  in  parallel  oval  cavities  in  the  articulating 
surfaces,  and  finally  by  a  membrane  along  the  edge.  This  threefold  con- 
nection is  so  strong  that  by  applying  force  it  is  more  easy  to  break  through 
the  body  of  the  joint  than  to  disconnect  the  articulation. 

The  root  is  variable ;  sometimes  all  its  ramifications  start  from  a  single 
joint,  whilst  in  other  specimens  some  five  or  six  joints  send  out  roots 
from  their  upper  compressed  edges.  Each  root  promptly  subdivides  into  a 
large  number  of  rootlets  ;  the  whole  is  formed  of  articulated  joints,  which 
become  much  elongated  as  they  become  thinner. 
17 


130  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

The  stem  and  the  outside  of  the  calicle  arc  covered  with  a  rough  brown 
skin,  which,  under  the  microscope,  presents  the  appearance  of  a  rough,  corru- 
gated reticulation.  It  contains  thin  calcareous  plates  without  definite  shape, 
and  is  very  liable  to  fall  off.  No  muscular  fibres  could  be  detected  under  it. 
J.  Midler  denies  the  power  of  voluntary  motion  to  the  stem  of  Pentacrinus, 
on  account  of  the  total  absence  <>t'  muscles.  In  Bourgueticrinus  the  stem 
has  indeed  no  great  flexibility,  but  tin-  complication  of  the  ligaments  of  the 
articulations,  ami  the  hinge-like  arrangement  of  the  latter  in  two  alternate 
directions  would  seem  unnecessary  if  the  motion  is  to  consist  merely  in  a 
passive  swaying  to  and  fro  with  the  oscillations  of  the  water. 

Two  specimens  have,  in  place  of  a  calicle,  a  small  conical  button,  com- 
pose! of  two  or  three  joints.  I  am  not  prepared  to  say  whether  this  is  an 
undeveloped  form,  or  the  result  of  an  effort  to  reproduce  a  lost  head. 

The  length  of  the  largest  stem  obtained  is  ~>\  inches,  exclusive  of  root 
and  calicle.  The  smallest  and  most  complete  specimen  has  a  stem  measur- 
ing only  1},  inches.  This  specimen  has  three  small  sh  lifers  adhering  to 
the  outside  of  its  calicle.  Small  round  holes,  bored  probably  by  these 
parasitic  mollusks,  can  be  seen  also  on  the  calicles  of  some  of  the  other 
specimens. 

Nephthya  nigra  room. 

Corallum  rising  from  a  membraneous  expansion,  and  forming  several 
small  tufts  of  elongated,  costate  cells,  densely  grouped.  Every  pari  filled 
with  spicules:  those  of  the  polyp-cells  being  long,  fusiform,  and  particu- 
larly numerous  in  thecostae  of  the  cells.  Every  corallum  bears  from  150  to 
'_"")  polyps.  Height  1  inch;  color  black.  Rather  common  oil'  Sand  Key, 
Florida,  from  120  to  152  fathoms. 

Primnoa  verticillaris  Ehrbg. 

I  refer  to  this  species  several  branches  eight  or  ten  inches  long,  obtained 
in  120  fathoms,  oil' Sand  Key,  Florida.  Compared  with  specimens  from  tin; 
Azores  in  the  Rlus.  Comp.  Zoo!.,  some  slight  differences  in  the  length  of 

the   calicles  and   size  of  the   scales   were   noticed,  but  they  are  not  deemed 
sufficient  to  warrant  a  specific  separation. 

Primnoa  trilopis  Poi  rt. 

Branches  irregularly  and  sparsely  dichotomous,  subflabellate.  Branchlets 
very  thin  and  flexible.  Calicles  in  verticils  of  four,  or  more  generally  five, 
formed  of  three  large  cylindrical  scales,  joined  angularly  to  each  other,  like 
the  elbows  of  a  stove-pipe.  Aperture  closed  by  eight  triangular  scabs. 
The  distance  between  tic  verticils  is  equal  to  or  a  little  less  than  the 
length  of  the  single  polyps.      The  cccnenchyma  is  very  thin,  and  covered 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  131 

with  irregular  imbricated  scales.  Axis  hard  and  brittle,  brown  in  the 
thicker  branches  and  yellow  in  the  younger.  By  its  simplified  scales,  this 
species  makes  an  approach  to  the  genus  Calyptrophora,  Gray. 

A  few  small  branches,  five  or  six  inches  long,  were  obtained  in  324 
fathoms  off  the  Florida  reef. 

Gorgonia  miniata  Val. 

A  small  dark  crimson  Gorgonian,  obtained  between  100  and  200  fathoms, 
may  perhaps  belong  to  this  species.  A  comparison  of  the  specimens  could 
alone,  decide,  as  the  description  is  rather  scanty. 

My  specimens  are  3  or  4  inches  high,  subflabellate ;  branchlets  somewhat 
flattened  at  the  end.  Polyps  in  two  rows,  on  moderately  prominent  ver- 
ruca?, more  closely  set  than  in  G.  exserta.  Coenenchyma  rather  thick,  with 
fusiform  spicules. 

Gorgonia  exserta  Ellis  and  Solander. 

The  same  Gorgonia  which  was  obtained  in  the  preceding  year  on  the 
coast  of  Cuba,  and  referred  to  this  species,  was  also  brought  up  from  324 
fathoms  on  the  coast  of  Florida.  Having  no  specimens  for  comparison,  I  do 
not  feel  quite  sure  of  the  determination. 

Acanthogorgia  hirta  Pourt. 

Corallum  branching  irregularly,  subflabellate.  Stem  and  branches  of 
about  equal  thickness.  Branchlets  flattened  and  expanded  at  the  end. 
Coenenchyma  covered  with  rough  fusiform  spicules,  the  upper  cud  of  which 
is  free,  and  raised  in  the  shape  of  small  spires.  Vcrruere  rather  distant  on 
the  stems,  more  numerous  towards  the  ends  of  the  branchlets,  irregularly 
alternate,  prominent,  lobed,  somewhat  spinous.  Polyps  large,  filled  with 
long  spicules,  arranged  in  a  regular  pattern,  being  horizontal  near  the 
base,  and  at  length  in  eight  vertical  rows,  not  as  long  as  in  must  other 
species.  Height  about  4  inches;  color  gray.  Dredged  in  324  fathoms 
oil"  the  Florida  reef. 

This  species  differs  from  A.  aspera  Pourt.  by  its  thicker  stem  and 
branches,  less  prominent,  though  thicker,  verrucse,  and  larger  polyps  with 
shorter  spines. 

Chrysogorgia  Desbonni  Drcn.  and  Mich. 

The  specimens  obtained  by  me  in  324  fathoms  appear  to  be  more 
loosely  branched,  and  to  bear  more  numerous  polyps,  than  the  species  to 
which  I  provisorily  refer  them.  The  figure  given  by  the  above  authors  is 
too  deficient  in  details  for  a  conclusive  comparison. 


132  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

The  coenenchyma  is  very  delicate,  filled  with  irregular  scales,  not  imbri- 
cated. The  sclerenchyma  is  rather  brittle,  smooth,  yellow,  of  metallic  ap- 
pearance, resembling  brass  wire.  The  polyps  are  alternate,  subpeduncu- 
late,  numerous,  though  not  contiguous,  covered  with  scales  like  those  of  the 
stem,  and  closed  by  eight  blunt  lancet-shaped  scales. 

Acis  solitaria  Pourt. 

Corallum  never  branching,  five  or  six  inches  long.  Coenenchyma  thick, 
covered  with  large,  elongated,  flit-  spicules,  which  become  smaller  and  con- 
verging on  the  not  very  prominent  verruca-.  Polyps  in  two  rows,  rather 
closely  set;  a  few  scattering  ones  out  of  line.  No  longitudinal  furrow. 
Length  5  or  6  inches  ;  color  whitish. 

In  200  fathoms. 

Isis  flexibilis  Pourt. 

Irregularly  branching,  subflabellate ;  branches  very  long  and  slender ; 
calcareous  joints  cylindrical,  nearly  smooth,  or  with  a  few  faint  striae,  about 
four  times  as  long  as  the  corneous  ones  in  the  thicker  branches,  but  pro- 
portionally much  longer  in  the  branchlets.  Polyps  rather  thickly  set, 
generally  alternate,  short,  campanulate,  armed  with  short  spines.  The 
thickest  stems  about  X  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  the  branchlets  not  much 
thicker  than  horsehair ;  the  main  stems  were  not  obtained.  Color  dark 
brown,  from  a  thin  coenenchyma  covering  the  younger  branches. 

In  a  few  instances  the  branches  appear  to  arise  from  the  corneous  joints. 

In  324  fathoms  oil'  the  Florida  reef. 

Mopsea  eburnea  Pourt. 

Arborescent,  slender,  dichotomous.  Calcareous  joints  long,  cylindrical, 
faintly  striated,  seldom  quite  straight,  not  swollen  at  the  ends.  Corneous 
joints  very  short.  (In  one  case  a  long  straggling  branch  entirely  corneous 
has  grown  from  a  calcareous  joint,  and  bears  four  polyps.)  Polyps  scat- 
tered, bright  orange,  g<  nerally  arising  from  the  calcareous  joints,  but  also, 
occasionally,  from  the  corneous  ones,  surrounded  by  a  spirally  twisted  bundle 
of  strong  spicules,  of  which  eight  longer  ones  project  around  the  tent  icles. 
The  latter  are  pinnate,  and  strengthened  in  their  whole  length  by  a  chain  of 
blunt  cylindrical  spicules.  The  color  of  the  whole  corallum,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  corneous  joints  and  the  polyps,  is  pure  white 

A  fine  specimen,  4  inches  high,  was  obtained  in  ."» 1  7  fathoms  off  Som- 
brero Light,  Florida!  —  The  diameter  of  the  thickest  part  is  fa  of  an  ini  h  ; 
the  root,  was  not  brought  up. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  133 

Antipathes  tetrastieha  Pourt. 

Corallum  a  simple  stein,  pinnate  ;  the  branchlets  alternate  and  double, 
i.  e.  two  branchlets  starting  from  the  same  spot  at  an  acute  angle,  thus 
forming  four  rows,  two  on  each  side  of  the  main  stem.  Towards  the  base 
one  of  the  branchlets  of  a  pair  is  frequently  abortive.  Sclerenekyma  black, 
nearly  smooth,  showing  short  spines  only  under  the  magnifier.  No  succes- 
sive swellings  on  the  branchlets  as  in  A.filix  Pourt.  Polyps  small.  Height 
of  the  corallum  3  or  4  inches. 

In  110  and  120  fathoms  off  Sand  Key  and  the  Samboes,  Florida. 

Antipathes  sp. 

Fragments  of  a  very  slender  species  were  obtained  off  Sand  Key  in  26 
fathoms,  but  not  sufficient  for  identification.  They  are  as  thin  as  horsehair, 
and  less,  with  short  blunt  spines,  and  small  distant  polyps. 

Antipathes  sp. 

Irregularly  branching,  loosely  subflabellate  ;  sclepenchyma  black,  with 
very  short  and  scarce  spines.     Polyps  large,  as  in  A.  arborea,  Dana. 

Of  this  species,  fragments  were  dredged  up  in  195  and  324  fathoms,  pre- 
senting no  verv  characteristic  features  in  its  mode  of  branching.  I  shall 
postpone  its  identification  until  an  opportunity  offers  of  comparing  it  with 
specimens  of  some  of  the  other  described  species  from  the  West  Indies. 

Caryophyllia  cornuformis  Pourt. 

Corallum  simple,  conical,  always  regularly  curved,  distinctly  but 
faintly  costate.  Calicle  circular,  rather  shallow.  Septa  very  little  exsert, 
thin,  and  somewhat  wavy;  in  six  systems  of  four  cycles.  Pali  opposite  the 
secondary  septa  only,  sometimes  twisted.  Columella  of  one  or  two  twisted 
processes.  Height  \  of  an  inch  ;  diameter  of  calicle  -J  of  an  inch. 
Dredged  in  23  7  and  248  fathoms  off  Sand  Key  and  the  Samboes,  Florida, 
on  a  bottom  consisting  of  Foraminifera. 

This  species  resembles  a  Ceratotrochus  more  than  a  Caryophyllia,  but  the 
single  row  of  pali  separates  it  from  the  latter  genus. 

All  the  specimens  obtained  have  the  base  broken  and  apparently  decayed, 
even  when  living,  so  that  they  are  probably  free  when  adult.  One  of  them, 
still  alive,  was  attached  to  the  shell  of  a  Xenophorus  by  the  convex  part  of 
its  wall. 

Coenocyathus  vermiformis  Pourt. 

Corallum  very  elongated,  cylindrical.  Cost;e  indicated  only  by  lines  of 
very  fiat  tubercle1;.  Calicle  circular,  shallow.  Septa  rather  thick,  flexuose, 
not  exsert  in  six  systems  of  three  cycles.  Pali  thick,  flexuose,  in  front  of 
the  secondary  septa,.     Frequently  one  of  the  systems  remains  incomplete,  and 


13-1  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

there  are  then  only  five  pali.  Columella  of  a  single  twisted  lamellar  process. 
The  older  parts  of  the  corallum  are  nearly  filled  up  by  the  thickening  of  the 
septa,  but  the  process  is  never  carried  out  to  a  total  obliteration  of  the 
chambers,  which  can  lie  traced  in  the  shape  of  slender  canals  to  the  very 
base.     Height  1  to  14-  inches;  diameter  rt  to  ^  of  an  inch. 

This  small  coral  is  easily  mistaken  for  a  tube  of  an  annelid  ;  it  is  placed 
in  the  genus  Cccnocya  thus,  although  I  have  no  decided  proof  of  its  prop- 
agation by  budding ;  in  only  one  case  have  I  found  two  eorallites  rising 
from  a  common  base. 

Dredged  in  1.30  to  180  fathoms  off  Sombrero  and  Bahia  Honda,  Florida. 

Paracyathus  confertus  Pottrt. 

Corallum  turbinate,  pedicellate.  Costas  distinct  to  the  base,  not  promi- 
nent, granulated.  Calicle  oblong,  concave.  Septa  crowded,  thin,  entire, 
slightly  exsert,  in  five  cycles,  hut  with  considerable  irregularity  in  some  of 
the  systems.  Pali  numerous,  difficult  to  distinguish  from  the  papillae  of  the 
columella. 

]t  resembles  P.  De  F'dippii,  Duch.  and  Mich.,  but  has  a  more  contracted 
base  and  a  more  elongated  calicle. 

Rather  rare  in  50  to  100  fathoms  off  the  Florida  reef. 

Thecocyatlius  cylindraceus  Pourt. 

Corallum  attached  by  a  broad  base,  short,  cylindrical.  Costa?  generally 
visible  through  the  epitheca  which  reaches  to  the  border  of  the  circular 
calicle.  Fossa  shallow.  Septa  entire,  slightly  sinuous,  granulated,  not 
exsert,  forming  six  systems  of  four  cycles;  one  of  the  systems  often  incom- 
plete. Pali  thick,  with  sinuous  surfaces,  fronting  all  the  septa  but  those  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  order;  those  of  the  second  order  largest.  Columella 
thick;  formed  of  seven  or  eight  papillose  processes.  Height  ^  to  f  of  an 
inch,  diameter  about  j?  of  an  inch. 

Not  rare  between  LOO  and  200  fathoms  oil' the  Florida  reef. 

Ehizotrochus  fragilis  Poitrt. 

( lorallum  simple,  pedicellate,  straight  or  slightly  curved,  regularly  conical. 
Calicle  subelliptical,  deep.  Six  complete  systems  of  septa,  four  cycles.  Septa 
very  thin,  not  <  xsert,  finely  granulated  ;  those  of  the  first  and  second  order 
meeting  in  the  centre,  and  united  for  about  half  their  height.  Costaj  not 
prominent.  From  the  costa:  of  the  second  order  rudimentary  hollow  roots 
arise  in  pairs  at  about  one  third  or  one  half  the  height  of  the  corallum,  and 
descend  along  the  pedicle  to  its  fool  ;  they  are  never  detached.  The  wall 
and  the  >ept;i  are  very  thin  and  fragile.  Height  1  inch;  greater  diameter 
|,  smaller  ,1  of  an  inch. 


MUSLIM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  135 

The  color  of  the  polyps  is  generally  greenish,  sometimes  pale  brick  red. 

Dredged  in  considerable  number  from  9-1  to  324  fathoms  off  the  Florida 
reef;  most  abundant  about  \-2»  fathoms.  It  is  frequently  found  growing  on 
a  living  Cueulhea,  much  smaller  than  its  parasite. 

Oculina  disticha  Podrt. 

Mode  of  brandling  unknown.  Branchlets  slender,  with  alternate  calicles, 
distant  about  one  diameter  from  each  other.  Cos.tae  giving  a  plicated  ap- 
pearance to  the  border  of  the  slightly  prominent  and  moderately  deep 
calicles.  General  surface  faintly  striated.  Septa  of  the  first  and  second 
ord(  r  well  developed,  those  of  the  third  rudimentary,  all  finely  granulated 
and  dentate.  Pali  fronting  the  septa  of  the  first  and  second  order.  Colu- 
mella formed  by  one  or  two  papillae. 

A  few  dead  branchlets  only  were  obtained  in  4  3  fathoms  off  the  Ameri- 
can shoal,  Florida.  They  bear  a  general  resemblance  to  the  fossil  Diplo- 
lielid  raristella,  but  the  presence  of  pali  prevents  the  generic  association 
of  these  corals. 

Diplohelia  profunda  Pourt.     (Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  No.  G.) 

A  1'l>\v  small  pieces  of  this  coral  were  obtained  in  324  fathoms  off  Bahia 
Honda,  Florida.  They  are  in  rather  a  decayed  condition,  like  nearly  all 
the  specimens  of  this  species  that  1  have  ever  seen. 

Lophohelia  affinis  Pourt. 

Corallum  branching  irregularly,  sometimes  coalescing  ;  the  polyps  bud- 
ding in  alternate  series  from  the  border  of  the  calicle.  Surface  smooth,  or 
very  finely  granulated.  Calicles  very  deep.  Septa  smooth,  entire,  exsert. 
Systems  unequal.  No  columella.  Color  white:  polyps  flesh-colored,  with 
about  twelve  club-shaped  tentacles,  hiding  the  mouth  wdien  contracted. 
Dredged  in  seme  quantity  in  195  fathoms  oil'  Coffin's  Patches,  Florida,  but 
no  trace  of  it  was  found  in  the  numerous  other  dredgings  in  the  vicinity. 

1  am  unable  at  present  to  distinguish  this  coral  from  Lophohelia  prolifera 
Edw.  \  Haime  (Madrepora  prolifera  Pallas),  except  that  the  latter  has 
the  calicles  a  little  less  expanded,  as  figured  by  Ellis.  It  is  rather  singular 
that  the  largest  coral  of  northern  Europe  has  never  been  figured  since 
Esper,  whose  representation  is  much  inferior  to  Ellis's. 

Stylaster  erubeseens  Pourt. 

Branching  densely,  flabellate,  not  coalescing;  younger  branchlets  slen- 
der, with  rather  dense  alternate  calicles;  older  branches  much  thickened 
with  calicles  in  irregular  rows  on  one  surface,  interspersed  with  ampulla?. 
Coenenchyma  smooth.  Calicles  slightly  prominent,  about  fa  of  an  inch  in 
diameter, deep.     Septa  nine  to  twelve,  most  commonly  eleven,  equal,  shaped 


130  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

like  (olds  of  tlie  wall,  joined  with  each  other  at  a  little  distance  below  the 
edge  of  the  calicle,  and  thus  forming  pitlike  interseptal  chambers.  Each  one 
of  these  chambers  encloses  a  small  secondary  septum  in  the  shape  of  a  dense 
vertical  fringe  of  small  points  resembling  hairs,  which,  when  seen  foreshort- 
ened fi'oni  above,  appears  like  a  small  columella.*  Columella  deep  sunk, 
rounded,  and  hirsute.  Color  white,  with  a  delicate  pink  blush  when  fresh. 
Dimensions,  4  to  G  inches  in  length  and  breadth  of  flabellum.  Rather 
common  between  120  and  324  fathoms  oil'  the  Florida  reef. 

Some  of  the  branches  are  thickened  ami  hollow,  with  openings  near  the 
end;  and  the  cavities  are  inhabited  by  annelids,  as  has  also  been  noticed  by 
Professor  Verrill,  in  Allojpora  californica.  In  our  specimens  the  tube  seems 
to  be  entirely  formed  by  the  coral,  the  annelid  contributing  nothing  himself. 

Allopora  miiriata  Pourt. 

Corallum  branching,  flabellate,  the  main  trunk  rather  massive  and  flat- 
tened. Surface  finely  and  sharply  granular.  Branchlets  thick  ami  obtuse. 
Calicles  irregularly  but  densely  distributed  on  one  surface  of  the  branches, 
becoming  obsolete  on  the  main  trunk.  Small  ampulla-  abundant  between 
the  calicles  on  the  younger  branches.  Calicles  slightly  prominent  about 
half  a.  line  in  diameter,  fossa,  deep,  columella  spherical,  deeply  immersed, 
hirsute.  Septa,  from  seven  to  ten,  generally  eight,  formed  as  in  Slylaster 
erulescens,  but  the  enclosed  secondary  septa  are  much  larger  and  distinct, 
giving  the  appearance  of  a  calicle  surrounded  by  a  number  of  smaller  ones, 
all  provided  with  columella;.  The  edge  of  the  calicle  and  of  the  folds  is 
Crowded  with  small  sharp  points. 

The  branches  seem  to  have  grown  in  a  horizontal  trailing  manner,  as  the 
lower  surface  often  shows  signs  of  contact  with  foreign  bodies. 

Color  brick  red  ;  length,  5  or  G  inches;  breadth,  :3  or  4  inches.  Dredged 
in  depths  from  100  to  324  fathoms  oil'  the  Florida  reef,  not  as  frequently  as 
Stylasft  r  t  rubt  set  ns. 

This  species  is  the  most  massive  of  our  deep-sea  corals;  it  undoubtedly 
belongs  to  the  genus  Allopora  as  defined  by  Milne-Edwards  &  Haiine,  if 

#  This  nrrai menl  is  particularly  apparent  in  Allopora  miniata  wxt  described,  where 

firs!  noticed.     It  is  very  distinct  also  in  Sti '  ■  '<  r  co  <iplanalus  Pourt.    I  have  seen 

i  in  St.  roseus,  Edw.  &  Haimc,  elegans,  Verrill,  tenuis,  Verrill,  and  Allopora  caU- 

'.  Verrill  (very  distinct);  but  1  failed  to  see  the  small  septum  in  Allopora  bella, 

Dana,  where  it  i    probably  more  deeply  seated,  as  is  the  small  columella.   The  character 

,     i  interseptal  chambers,  containin  nail  secondary  (or  tertiary?)  septa, 

ncral,  I  see  no  ncce  -i'\  for  separating  tin nus  Cyclopora,  Verrill,  from  the 

;  ftrs.   This  character,  furthermore, unites  still  morecloselj  the  genera  Slylaster 

and  D  ;  in  Errina,  also,  the  pores  mistaken  by  Gray  for  calicles  are  probably 

only  interseptal  chambers,  soon  separated  from  the  calicle  by  the  irregular  growth  of 
hyma. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  137 

we  leave  out  from  their  generic  characters  the  absence  of  ampullar.  The 
two  genera  Stylaster  and  Allopora  are,  however,  very  closely  allied,  and  in 
very  young  specimens  the  difference  in  the  mode  of  germination  is  hardly  to 
be  distinguished. 

Distiehopora  foliacea  Tourt. 

Corallum  branching,  flabellate,  much  compressed,  finely  striated  and 
granulated.  The  calicles  in  a  somewhat  irregular  row  a  little  on  one  side 
of  the  edge,  which  is  sharp  and  finely  serrated.  One  of  the  rows  of  lateral 
pores  on  the  summits  of  the  denticulations,  the  other  not  well  defined,  rep- 
resented by  scattered  tuberculated  pores.  The  plane  towards  which  the 
calicles  are  situated  is  thickly  studded  with  ampulla?,  each  of  which  has  a 
small  lateral  opening.  They  are  less  numerous  on  the  other  surface.  Co- 
lumella deep-seated,  but  long,  hirsute,  in  the  shape  of  a  pointed  club.  Color 
orange  pink.  Height  about  2  inches  ;  breadth  of  the  branches  about  ^ 
of  an  inch  ;  thickness  ^V  °f  an  inch. 

This  species  differs  from  D.  sulcata  Pourt.,  from  the  coast  of  Cuba,  by 
its  smaller  calicles  not  placed  in  a  furrow,  irregular  lateral  pores,  and 
serrated  edge. 

Dredged  rather  frequently  between  100  and  200  fathoms  off  the  Florida 
reef. 

Errina  cochleata  Pourt. 

Of  the  two  species  of  Errina  found  quite  abundantly  on  the  coast  of 
Cuba,  only  this  one  is  found  on  the  Florida  side,  and  that  is  exceedingly 
rare,  only  one  small  specimen  having  been  obtained  in  183  fathoms  off 
Sombrero  Light-house. 

Balanophyllia  floridana  Pourt. 

Corallum  elongated,  conical,  straight,  pedicellate.  No  epitheca;  wall 
porous,  costate  to  the  foot.  Calicle  rather  deep,  elliptical.  Septa  entire, 
slightly  exsert,  finely  granulated,  in  six  unequal  systems  of  four  cycles,  with 
rudiments  of  the  fifth  in  some  of  the  systems.  The  septa  of  the  fourth 
cycle,  bent  and  united  in  front  of  the  tertiaries,  and  protracted  as  one  sep- 
tum to  the  columella,  which  is  flattened  and  papillose. 

The  polyps  are  red ;  the  mouth  very  Qblong ;  height  about  1  inch  ;  longer 
diameter  J,  shorter  -|  of  an  inch. 

Dredged  in  abundance  off  Sand  Key,  Florida,  in  26  fathoms.  I  i-efer 
also  to  this  species  some  dead  and  worn  specimens  obtained  off  the  coast  of 
Cuba  in  270  fathoms* 

*  A  Dendroi^hyUia  was  also  obtained  in  the  same  dredging  off  the  coast  of  Cuba,  but 
too  much  worn  to  be  identified  or  described. 
18 


138  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Genus  Thecopsammia  Pocrt 

Corallum  simple,  attached,  without  costre,  covered  with  a  complete  epi- 
theca.     This  genus  is  intermediate  between    Balanophyllia  and  Heterop- 

sammia  :  like  the  latter,  it  is  destitute  of  costaj,  but   it  lias  an  epitheca  like 
some  of  the  Balanophyllia,  but  still  more  developed. 

Thecopsammia  tintinnabulum  Poubt. 

Corallum  subcylindrieal,  or  almost  hemispherical,  with  turbinate  base  and 
small,  abruptly  constricted  peduncle.  Wall  thick,  very  porous  and  vermicu- 
lated.  Epitheca  well  developed,  seldom  rising  quite  to  the  bonier  of  the 
calicle,its  tissue  penetrating  the  mural  pores  and  solidifying  the  wall.  Cali- 
cle  slightly  elliptical,  moderately  deep.  Septa  in  six  unequal  systems  and 
four  cycles,  entire,  thin,  not  exsert,  covered  with  fine  granulations;  those 
of  the  fourth  and  filth  order  scarcely  bent  towards  those  of  the  third,  and 
not  connected  with  the  latter  or  with  each  other.  The  septa  of  the  first 
and  second  order  connected  with  the  columella.  The  two  opposite  systems 
on  the  longer  sides  of  the  calicle  always  incomplete  in  one  of  their  halves; 
and  one  or  two  of  the  other  systems  also  sometimes  incomplete  in  the  same 
manner.  The  columella  is  papillose  and  porous,  sometimes  sublamellose,  and 
form-  three  indistinct  masses  in  the  adult,  of  which  the'  middle  one  is  largest. 

Height  ;j  of  an  inch  to  an  inch;  longer  diameter  of  calicle  about  ^  an 
inch,  shorter  about  0.1-1.  Common  between  100  and  300  fathoms  off  the 
Florida  reef. 

The  mouth  of  the  polyps  is  elongated,  and  surrounded  by  not  very 
numerous  conical  tentacles;  the  color,  when  living,  is  a  handsome  pinkish 
orange. 

Thecopsammia  socialis  Pourt. 

Corallum  turbinate,  rather  long  conical,  with  a  thick,  not  constricted, 
peduncle  frequently  attached  to  each  other.  "Wall  and  epitheca  as  in  the 
preceding  species.  Calicle  elliptical,  fossa  moderately  deep.  Septa  entire, 
smooth,  crowded,  not  exsert;  thick,  near  the  wall.  Five  cycles  of  septa 
in  six  unequal  systems.  The  septa  of  the  fourth  cycle  benl  towards  each 
other,  and  meeting  in  front  of  those  of  the  third,  in  the  deeper  pari  of  the 
calicle  (only  visible  in  a  horizontal  section).  The  septa  of  the  sixth  and 
seventh  order  appear  only  in  a  few  of  the  systems  in  old  specimens ;  they 
become  larger  than  those  of  the  preceding  cycle ;  the  tertiaries  generally 
remain  the  smallest  of  all.  The  columella  is  papillose  and  porous,  though 
more  compacl  than  in  the  preceding  species,  and  nearly  always  tonus  three 
distinct  masses,  of  which  the  middle  one  is  lar  <    t. 

bound  in  the  same  depths  as  tiie  other,  but  more  common  towards  Som- 
brero than  near  Sand  bey. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  139 

Stephanophyllia  folliculus  Potjkt. 

Corallum.  free,  without  mark  of  adherence,  purse-shaped,  or  broader  at 
the  base  than  at  the  calicle.  Costaa  broad,  granulated,  nearly  meeting  at 
the  apex,  the  primary  ones  continuous,  the  tertiaries  uniting  with  the 
secondaries.  Intercostal  furrows  narrow.  Calicle  circular  or  subhexagonal, 
slightly  concave.  Septa  in  six  complete  systems  of  three  cycles,  covered 
with  large  papillaj,  not  exsert.  The  primaries  and  secondaries  meet  in  the 
centre  with  each  other,  and  with  an  indistinct  columella;  the  tertiaries  con- 
nect with  the  secondaries  at  about  half  the  length  of  the  radius. 

Height  0.12,  diameter  of  calicle  0  10,  diameter  of  base  0.11  of  an  inch. 
Dredged  in  2.3  7  fathoms  oil' the  Florida  reef. 

I  refer  this  coral,  of  wh'ch  I  have  but  one  specimen,  to  the  genus  Ste- 
phanophyllia with  some  doubt.  It  has  most  of  the  characters  of  the  genus, 
except  the  discoid  shape.     It  is,  most  likely,  a  very  young  specimen. 

Diaseris  pusilla  Podrt. 

Corallum  subelliptical,  very  fragile.  Wall  flat  or  slightly  concave,  imper- 
forate, very  thin,  finely  costate.  Costa?  thin,  alternatively  large  and  small, 
finely  dentate.  The  base  shows  the  traces  of  lobes  joined  together,  often 
very  imperfectly.  Septa  strongly  dentate,  1  iciniate,  and  perforate,  marked 
with  strong  ridges  and  furrows,  connected  with  each  other  by  synapticula 
near  the  base.  Six  unequal  systems  and  five  cycles  of  septa,  one  or  two  of  the 
systems  generally  incomplete.  The  primary  septa  more  lobed  and  much 
higher  than  the  others;  those  of  the  lower  cycles  tending  to  unite  with 
those  of  cycles  preceding  them.  Fossa  well  marked,  oblong.  Columella 
rudimentary,  in  the  shape  of  a  narrow  ridge.  Mouth  of  the  polyp  in  the 
shape  of  a  long  slit.      Color  dark  brown.      Diameter  \  an  inch. 

Numerous  fragments  of  the  living  coral  were  obtained,  but  it  is  so  fragile 
that  only  one  was  brought  up  entire.  Found  in  11!)  to  143  fathoms  off 
Sand  Key. 

I  suspect  from  some  of  the  fragments  the  existence  of  a  second  species, 
with  more  equal,  not  lobed  septa,  ami  less  distinctly  costate  base,  but  there 
is  not  enough  of  it  for  a  good  description. 

The  singular  Coral  next  to  be  described  strikes  one  at  first  sight  by  its 
resemblance  to  some  of  the  members  of  the  group  of  the  Rugosa  of  Milne- 
Edwards  &  Ilaime.  A  closer  examination  tends  to  confirm  that  view, 
much  as  it  seems  improbable  to  find  a  living  representative  of  a  group  so 
long  extinct.  In  no  other  division  of  the  corals  is  the  septal  apparatus 
subdivided  into  systems  that  are  multiples  of  four;  but  such  is  the  case  in 
our  specimen,  though  a  little  obscured  by  accidental  causes.  An 
though  perhaps  less  important,  character  is  the  smoothness  of  the  septa, 
which    present    neither    perforations,    nor    synapticula,    nor   granulations 


140  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Tabulse,  however,  there  are  none,  the  interseptal  chambers  being  open  from 
top  to  bottom.  Among  the  Rugosa  this  character  is  only  found  in  the 
family  of  Cyathaxonidae,  to  or  near  which,  therefore,  our  coral  must  find 
its  place.  From  the  genus  Cyathaxonia  it  differs  in  being  attached  by  a 
broad  base,  and  also  by  the  absence  of  a  septal  fossula.  The  following 
genus  is  proposed  for  its  reception  :  — 

Genus  Haplopnyllia  Fourt. 

Corallum  simple,  fixed  by  a  broad  base,  covered  with  a  thick  epitheca; 
columella  st.yliform,  strong,  (sometimes  double?)  very  thick  at  the  base. 
Interseptal  chambers  deep,  uninterrupted  by  tabulae  or  dissepiments. 

Haplophyllia  paradoxa  Pourt. 

Corallum  subcylindrical,  short,  fixed  by  a  broad  base;  epitheca  thick, 
wrinkled,  reaching  higher  than  the  calicle,  and  forming  around  the  latter 
sevei'a!  concentric  circles,  as  it'  represen!  ing  the  separated  borders  of  several 
superposed  layers.  Calicle  circular,  fossa  deep.  Septa  smooth,  without 
granulations  or  perforations,  not  reaching  the  border  of  the  calicle;  like  all 
the  internal  parts  of  the  calicle,  their  surface  is  like  enamel.  Columella 
formed  of  two  smooth  conical  processes,  very  thick  at  the  base  and  tending 
to  fill  up  the  chambers.  Eight  septa  larger,  and  connected  with  the  colu- 
mella, alternating  with  smaller  ones,  which  touch  the  columella  at  a  much 
lower  level.  A  further  cycle  is  indicated  by  small  ridges  of  the  wall  sur- 
face, in  some  of  the  chambers.  No  distinction  can  lie  mule  between  pri- 
mary and  secondary  septa  among  the  eight  larger  ones,  as  they  all  appear 
equal.  This  arrangement  seems  to  be  the  norm.  In  the  specimen  before 
us,  the  only  one  unfortunately,  there  are  disturbances  in  two  of  the  sys- 
tems or  half-systems  (systems  if  we  call  the  eight  larger  septa  primaries, 
half-systems  if  we  suppose  them  equivalent  to  primaries  and  secondaries). 
In  one  case  two  of  the  larger  septa  are  joined  by  a  horizontal  plate  at 
the  top,  thus  excluding  the  intervening  chamber  from  the  calicle.  This 
structure  is  probably  abnormal,  and  the  result  of  an  efForf  to  exclude  a  par- 
asite or  other  foreign  matter.  A  small  supernumerary  septum  has  grown 
out  in  the  next  chamber.  Nearly  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  calicle,  one  of 
the  secondary  septa  (counting  eight  as  primaries)  has  crown  to  the  size 
of  a  primary  one,  and  the  adjacent  tertiary  to  the  size  of  a  secondary,  thus 
distui bin-  the  symmetry. 

Height  about  .',  an  inch;   diameter  of  calicle  the  same. 

Tiiis  coral  was  living  when  obtained;  the  polyp  was  of  a  greenish 
color,  but  was  not  otherwise  examined  when  fresh.  After  having  been  in 
alcohol,  it  could   be  lilted  out  entire  from   the  calicle.  presenting  an  exact 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  141 

cast  of  the  chambers.  The  mouth  is  surrounded  by  a  circle  of  about  16 
rather  long  tentacles,  bluntly  tuberculated  at  the  tip.  Outside  the  circle 
of  tentacles  extends  a  membranous  disc  with  radiating  and  concentric 
folds. 

This  unique  specimen  was  dredged  in  324  fathoms  off'  the  Florida  reef. 

Genus  Pliobothrus  Pourt. 

Tissue  more  compact  than  in  Millepora  ;  larger  pores  scarcer,  smooth, 
without  any  rudiments  of  septa ;  smaller  pores  tubulated ;  coenenchyma 
with  still  finer  linear  pores.  Form  generally  branching  regularly.  Differs 
from  Heliopora  by  its  tissue  not  being  prismatic.  I  refer  to  this  genus  two 
species  described  by  me  as  Heliopora  tubulata  and  carinata  (Bulletin  Mas. 
Comp.  Zool.  No.  6),  and  a  third  species. 

Pliobothrus  symmetricus  Pourt. 

Corallum  ramose,  rising  from  an  incrusting  base  and  a  short  trunk, 
branching  into  a  regular  semicircular  flabellum.  Branches  not  much 
divided,  cylindrical,  and  a  little  flattened  and  expanded  at  the  tip,  which 
is  blunt  and  rounded.  The  tendency  in  branching  is  towards  considerable 
symmetry  between  the  two  halves  of  the  flabellum.  Three  kinds  of  pores  ; 
very  small,  linear,  over  the  whole  coenenchyma;  larger  tubulated,  with  very 
minute  aperture  when  unbroken,  and  larger  round  or  oval  ones  scattered 
irregularly.  Internal  structure  somewhat  like  Millepora,  but  much  coarser. 
Larger  pores  interrupted  by  few  but  massive  tabula?,  but  communicating 
laterally  with  other  canals. 

This  species  is  much  larger  and  more  branched  than  Heliopora  lubulata, 
and  has  shorter  tubes  to  the  pores. 

Color  gray  ;  height  1^  inches;  spread  about  three  inches;  diameter  of 
branches  0.G3  of  an  inch.  Not  rare  between  100  and  200  fathoms  off'  the 
Florida  reef. 

Cambridge,  Mass.,  December  8,  18G8. 


T  deeply  regret  the  absence  of  Count  Pourtales  from  Cambridge  at 
this  moment,  even  though  his  return  to  the  field  of  observations  which 
has  already  yielded  him  such  a  rich  harvest  cannot  fail  to  benefit 
science  in  the  highest  degree.  My  regret  arises  chiefly  from  the  fact 
that  he  is  thus  prevented  from  reaching  some  conclusions  which  belong 
to  him  by  right.     But  the  very  day  he  started  on  his  third  journey  of 


142  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

exploration  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  leaving  with  mc  the  manuscript  of  this 
paper  for  publication,  the  memoir  of  Sars  on  the  Iihizocrinus  of  the 
Lofoten  reached  me  also,  and  I  at  once  recognized  the  identity  of  the 
Bourgueticrinus  Hotessieri,  described  above,  with  Sars's  Iihizocrinus 
lofotensis,  —  as  far  as  such  relations  can  be  predicated  without  a  direct 
comparison  of  the  specimens.  The  identity  of  animals  found  at  great 
depths  in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  on  the  coast  of  Norway  would  show 
how  extensive  the  influence  of  the  great  Atlantic  current  is  in  modifying 
the  geographical  distribution  of  organized  beings.  The  close  resem- 
blance of  these  Crinoids  will  no  doubt  lead  to  a  renewed  comparison 
of  the  Lophohelia  affinis  Pourt.  and  Lophohelia  prolifera  Milne-Ed w. 
&  llaime  {Madrepora  prolifera  Pallas).  It  is  now  highly  prob- 
able that  Pourtales's  species  is  identical  with  that  long  known  from 
the  northernmost  coasts  of  Europe,  and  to  which  it  has  very  likely 
been  transported  by  the  Gulf  Stream  ;  and  I  doubt  not  that  the  iden- 
tity of  other  species  from  Florida,  in  which  a  close  resemblance  to 
northern  species  has  already  been  noticed,  will  also  prove  identical,  as 
soon  as  an  opportunity  is  afforded  for  direct  comparisons.  Thus  hap- 
pily blended  with  the  investigation  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  the  study  of 
the  geographical  distribution  of  animals  at  great  depths  cannot  fail  to 
make;  rapid  progress,  now  thai — thanks  to  the  comprehensive  views  of 
th''  Superintendent  of  the  Coast  Survey  —  it  will  no  longer  be  left  to 
chance  discoveries,  but  form  a  part  of  the  systematic  work  of  the  Sur- 
vey. In  this  connection  it  become-  highly  important  to  explore  the 
ocean  floor  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Bermudas,  as  those  islands  form,  as  it 
were,  a  half-way  station  between  Florida  and  Norway.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  discovery  of  a  coral,  Haplophyllia,  allied  to  the  extinct  type  of 
the  Cyathaxonidae,  foreshadows  unexpected  revelations,  as  soon  as  the 
animal  population  of  the  abysses  of  the  ocean  shall  be  extensively  ex- 
plored, instead  of  being  obtained  from  a  few  localities  only. 

I  may  add  that  the  Museum  will  supply  other  institutions  with  speci- 
mens of  all  the  species  described   above  of  which  duplicates  were  col- 

lected. 

LOUIS   AGASSIZ. 

Camukidgi:,  December  10,  1868. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  143 


No.  8.  —  Catalogue  of  the  Mammals  of  Massachusetts  :  with  a 
Critical  Revision  of  the  Species.     By  J.  A.  Allen. 

The  original  design  of  the  present  catalogue  was  simply  to  contribute 
a  few  data  concerning  the  distribution  of  the  Mammals  of  New  England  ; 
but  in  order  to  explain  certain  views  entertained  by  the  writer  in  respect 
to  the  character  of  a  number  of  currently  received  species,  many  critical 
notes  were  gradually  incorporated,  until  finally  it  was  thought  best  to  ex- 
tend the  paper  so  as  also  to  embrace  a  systematic  revision  of  the  species. 
The  catalogue  is  based  mainly  on  observations  made  by  myself  at 
Springfield.  In  its  faunal  characteristics  this  locality  does  not  differ 
much  from  those  parts  of  the  State  lying  east  of  the  Connecticut  River 
generally.  A  few  species  which  occur  only  in  the  western  mountainous 
portions  have  been  included  on  data  afforded  chiefly  by  the  official  re- 
port on  the  Mammals  of  the  State  by  the  late  Dr.  Ebenezer  Emmons, 
but  in  part  as  the  result  of  observations  and  inquiries  of  my  own  re- 
cently made  in  that  section.  Respecting  the  marine  species,  I  have 
consulted  Captain  N.  E.  Atwood,  of  Provincetown,  a  gentleman  well 
known  as  a  reliable  observer,  and  whose  forty  years'  experience  along 
our  coast  has  rendered  him  very  familiar  with  our  larger  marine  Ver- 
tebrata.  I  have  thus  been  able  to  add  not  a  little  to  our  knowledge  of 
some  of  those  species  least  known,  and  the  most  difficult  to  observe,  of 
all  our  Mammalia.  The  great  obligation  I  am  under  for  his  kind  co- 
operation is  fully  evident  from  the  valuable  notes  he  has  furnished  on 
the  Cetaceans.  I  am  also  greatly  indebted  to  Professor  E.  D.  Cope,  of 
Philadelphia,  to  whom  I  transmitted  the  notes  of  Captain  Atwood,  for 
kindly  identifying  the  species. 

Less  attention  seems  to  have  been  paid  by  our  naturalists  to  the 
Mammals  of  the  State  than  to  the  Birds,  or  several  of  the  other  classes 
of  our  animals.  This  may  be  owing  to  the  greater  difficulty  of  observ- 
ing and  procuring  the  former,  arising  from  either  their  scarcity  or 
reclusive  habits. 

The  first  general  scientific  notice  of  Massachusetts  Mammalia  seems 
to  have  been  a  simply  nominal  catalogue  by  Dr.  Edward  Hitchcock, 
published  in  his   Report  on   the   Geology,   Mineralogy,   Botany,  and 


144  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Zoology  of  the  State  (pp.  520,  527),  in  1833.  Forty-five  species  are 
there  given,  including  the  two  Seals  and  three  Cetaceans.  To  a  few  only 
are  notes  added  respecting  their  relative  abundance.  Dr.  Emmons's 
first  Report,  under  the  Act  of  the  Legislature  of  1837  for  a  Natural 
History  Survey  of  the  State,  was  published  in  1838.  In  1840  a  second 
and  final  Report*  was  presented,  containing  the  substance  of  the  first, 
and  considerably  increased  by  additions.  These  Reports  contain  de- 
scriptions of  all  the  land  Mammalia  then  known  to  inhabit  the  State, 
with  interesting  notes  on  their  habits  and  distribution,  but  nothing  on 
the  marine.  The  whole  number  of  species  given  is  forty-four,  two  of 
which  (Ari'icola  hirsu(a  =  A.  riparia,  and  A.  albo-rufescens  =  A. 
riparia,  albino)  were  erroneously  described  as  new.  Eliminating  three 
that  have  since  been  reduced  to  synonymes  (Gondylwa  macroura, 
Sciurus  niger,  Arvicola  albo-rufescens)  leaves  forty-one  as  the  number 
of  valid  species  embraced  in  this  report.  The  animal  now  known  as 
Hespcromys  leucopus  Baird  was  described  as  Arvicola  Emmonsii  De 
Kay.  On  the  whole,  however,  the  work  is  remarkable  for  its  accu- 
racy, and,  compared  with  those  of  most  recent  writers,  for  the  small 
number  of  merely  nominal  species  it  contains. 

The  only  other  special  treatise  on  our  Mammals  is  an  article  by  Mr. 
E.  A.  Samuels,  in  the  Ninth  Annual  Report  of  the  State  Board  of 
Agriculture,!  in  which  thirty-nine  species  are  described,  excluding  two 
merely  nominal  (a  Marina  and  Arvicola  rufidorsum),  mainly  from 
Massachusetts  specimens  in  the  State  Cabinet  of  Natural  History  ; 
it  also  contains  notes  on  their  habits,  and  several  woodcuts  of  the 
animals.  Though  not  assuming  to  give  all  the  species  of  the  State, 
Mr.  Samuels  includes  five  or  six  described  since  the  publication  of 
Dr.  Emmons's  Report,  but  omits  several  of  that  author  that  are 
not  uncommon  in  certain  sections  of  the  State,  as  well  as  all  the 
marine  species.  In  Audubon  and  Bachman's  "Viviparous  Quadru- 
peds of  North  America"  (three  volumes,  8vo,  1846-1853)  are 
numerous  references  to  Massachusetts  Mammals  specimens  of  which 
were  frequently  furnished  these  authors  by  our  well-known  ornithol- 
ogist, Dr.  T.  M.  Brewer,  of  Boston.  But  since  the  publication  of 
Dr.  Emmons's    Report,  no  one,  excepting    perhaps    Dr.    Brewer  and 

*  Report  on    the    Quadrupeds    of  Massachusetts.     By   Ebenezer  Emmons,  M-D. 
1840.     8vo.     pp.  86.    This  is  the  edition  cited  in  the  following  pages, 
t  Agr.  of  Mass.,  1861,  pp.  137  -  191. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  145 

Mr.  Samuels,  has  done  more  to  increase  our  knowledge  of  their 
history  than  Mr.  J.  W.  P.  Jenks,  of  Middleboro'.  From  this  local- 
ity Mr.  Jenks  has  sent  large  collections  of  the  smaller  species  to 
the  Smithsonian  Institution,  which  have  been  carefully  worked  up  hy 
Professor  S.  F.  Baird  in  his  invaluable  Report  on  the  Mammals  of 
North  America,*  and  by  Dr.  H.  Allen  in  his  recent  excellent  Mono- 
graph of  the  North  American  Bats.f  In  the  Journal  and  Proceedings 
of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History,  among  the  very  few  notices 
of  our  Mammals,  is  an  important  paper  by  the  Rev.  John  Bachman  on 
the  Mole  Shrews  (genus  Scalops),\  in  which  a  new  species  (S.  Breweri) 
is  described  from  specimens  from  this  State  contributed  by  Dr.  Brewer. 
In  Professor  Baird's  Report  on  North  American  Mammals  two  species 
of  Arvicola  (A.  Breweri  and  A.  rujidorsum)  are  also  described  as  new, 
solely  from  specimens  from  Massachusetts  ;  the  first  was  collected  by 
Dr.  Brewer  on  Muskeget  Island.  (On  these  see  remarks  beyond.) 
In  February,  1863,  Professor  A.  E.  Verrill  mentions,  in  a  valuable 
contribution  on  the  Shrews  of  New  England, §  the  first  known  occur- 
rence of  a  Neosorex  (N.  palustris)  in  this  State. 

The  more  important  publications  on  the  Mammals  of  adjoining  States, 
which  in  this  connection  demand  a  passing  notice,  are  the.  Rev.  J.  H. 
Linsley's  "Catalogue  of  the  Mammalia  of  Connecticut,"||  Dr.  J.  E.  De 
Kay's  well-known  Report  on  the  Mammals  of  New  York,  and  Profes- 
sor Zadoc  Thompson's  notes  on  those  of  Vermont.  %  Mr.  Linsley's  list 
numbers  seventy-one  species,  embracing  the  marine  and  domesticated,  and 
nine  that  are  merely  nominal.  Removing  the  latter,  the  eight  domes- 
tic, and  two  ("  Arvicola  Jloridanus  Ord  "  and  "  Phoca  grcenlandica  ? 
Mull.")  of  doubtful  reference,  leaves  fifty-two  as  the  number  of  valid 
indigenous  and  naturalized  species  (the  latter  being  the  three  species  of 
Mus),  ten  of  which  are  marine  and  the  remaining  forty  terrestrial. 
Two  bats  {Vespertilio  subulatus  Say  and  Scotophilus  noctivagans  =  V. 
noctivagans  Cooper)  and  one  shrew  (Soi-ex  platyrhinus)  are  given  in 

*  Pacific  Railroad  Reports  of  Expl.  and  Surv.,  VIII,  1857. 

t  Monograph   of  the    Bats  of  North   America.     By  H.  Allen,  M.  D.     Smithsonian 
Miscellaneous  Collections,  June,  1864. 

\   Proc,  Vol.  I,  p.  40,  1841;  Journ.,  Vol.  IV,  p.  4G,  1842. 

§  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  N.  H.,  Vol.  IX,  164. 

||  Am.  Journ.  of  Science  and  Arts,  XLIII  (Oct.  1842),  pp.  345-354. 

Tf  History  of  Vermont,  Natural,  Civil,  and   Statistical,  etc.     By  Zadoc  Thompson. 
Svo.     Burlington,  1842,  and  Appendix,  1853. 
19 


146  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

addition  fo  the  land  animals  described  in  Professor  Emmons's  Massa- 
chusetts report,  while  two  of  Emmons's  Cervida:  and  the  Wolverine  are 
very  properly  omitted. 

Dr.  De  Kay's  Report,  which  appeared  but  a  few  months  later  than 
Linsley's  Catalogue,  gives  seventy-eight  species  as  either  actual  or 
former  inhabitants  of  the  State  of  New  York,  including,  in  addition  to 
the  domestic  and  marine  species  of  Linsley's  list,  five  fossil  species. 
No  new  ones  are  added,  though  several  arc  described  as  such,  and 
several  previously  well  known  are  separated  from  their  supposed  dis- 
tinct European  allies  and  receive  new  names.  Two  species  given  by 
Linsley  for  Connecticut  (u  Arvicola  floridanus  Ord "  and  "  Phoca 
grcenlandica  ?  Mull.")  are  rightly  omitted,  and  others,  including  the 
Opossum  (Didelphys  virginiana),  added.  This  is  a  southern  species 
which  has  not  yet,  so  far  as  I  can  learn,  been  detected  east  of  the  Hud- 
son. Deducting  the  nominal  species  and  those  of  doubtful  reference, 
nine  in  number,  and  the  eight  domestic  and  five  fossil,  leaves  fifty-six 
as  the  number  of  living  valid  ones,  forty-six  being  land  and  ten  marine. 
This  is  an  excess  of  four  only,  —  two  bats  and  two  very  small 
species  of  shrew, — excluding  the  marine  and  the  extra-limital  Didel- 
phys virginiana,  over  the  number  given  by  Dr.  Emmons  for  Massa- 
chusetts. 

Professor  Thompson's  Natural  History  of  Vermont,  published  at 
about  the  same  time,  contains  forty-three  valid  species,  with  descrip- 
tions of  them  drawn  up  mainly  from  Vermont  specimens,  and  short 
general  accounts  of  their  habits.  It  embraces  but  one  or  two  species 
not  given  in  Dr.  Emmons's  report,  one  of  which  is  the  common  Seal 
(Phoca  vitulina).  A  single  specimen  of  this  is  reported  to  have  been 
captured  on  the  ice  in  Lake  Champlain,  and  in  the  Appendix,  pub- 
lished in  1853,  another  similar  instance  is  recorded. 

The  present  catalogue  embraces  sixty-five  species,  giving  for  the  first 
time  a  probably  nearly  complete  list  of  the  marine,  the  Seals  and 
Cetaceans.  The  latter  are  now  supposed  to  number  eighteen  species. 
Four  land  species  (Scotophilia  georgianus,  Scahps  Breweri,  Neosorex 
palustris,  and  Arvicola  pinetorum)  are  also  added,  that  are  not  men- 
tioned by  either  Dr.  Emmons  or  Mr.  Samuels,  or  by  either  of  the  extra- 
limital  authors  mentioned  above. 

In  Massachusetts,  as  far  as  Mammals  and  Birds  are  concerned,  por- 
tions of  two  Fauna?  are  represented, —  the  Canadian  and  the  Alleghanian  ; 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  147 

the  former  occupying  a  large  part  of  Berkshire  and  most  of  the  western 
half  of  Franklin,  Hampshire,  and  Hampden  Counties,  or  those  portions 
of  the  State  having  an  elevation  of  and  above  fifteen  hundred  feet 
above  the  sea  ;  the  latter  the  remaining  and  by  far  the  larger  portion.* 

The  recent  or  historic  changes  that  have  occurred  in  the  Mammalian 
Fauna  of  the  State  consist  mainly  in  the  decrease  in  numbers  of  the 
larger  species,  amounting  to  a  complete  extirpation  of  a  few  of  the 
large  Carnivora  and  Cervidae  (Felt's  concolor,  Mustela  Pennantii, 
Cervus  canadensis,  Alee  malchis,  Tara?idus  rangifer),  and  the  great 
reduction,  almost  to  extinction,  of  several  others  (Lynx  canadensis, 
Lynx  rnfus,  Cam's  lupus,  Ursus  arctos,  Cervus  virginianus).  None  of 
these  species  are  now  anywhere  common,  though  there  is  good  reason 
to  believe  that  several  of  them  were  once  so,  while  a  few  are  known 
to  have  been  of  very  frequent  occurrence.  The  smaller  species,  in- 
cluding most  of  the  rodents,  the  bats,  moles,  and  shrews,  seem  to  be 
fully  as  numerous  as  they  ever  were,  while  it  is  not  improbable  that 
a  few,  especially  the  Arvicolce  and  other  field  mice,  and  perhaps  the 
woodchuek  (Arctomys  monax),  are  even  increasing  in  numbers.  The 
three  species  of  exotic  or  eastern  origin  are  the  now  almost  cosmo- 
politan Mas  decumanus,  JL  raltus,  and  M.  miisculus,  Avhich  long  since 
became  annoying  pests,  and  constitute  the  only  additions  to  our  feral 
Mammalia  that  have  become  fully  naturalized. 

Several  of  the  species  of  this  list  are  considered  to  be  identical  with 
species  of  the  Old  World,  although  mo^t  late  writers  have  separated  as 
specifically  distinct  all  but  one  of  our  New  England  Mammals  —  the 
Gido  luscus  —  from  their  Old  World  relatives.  Only  two  or  three 
species  of  land  Mammalia  are  now  generally  considered  as  common  to 
any  portions  of  both  the  Eastern  and  Western  hemispheres.!      Several 

*  The  Canadian  fauna,  as  represented  in  Massachusetts,  may  be  characterized  by  the 
present  or  former  occurrence  among  Mammalia  of  the  following  species:  Mustela  Pen- 
nantii, M.  martes,  Gulo  luscus.  Alee  malchis,  Tamndus  rangifer,' Cervus  canadensis,  Arvi- 
cola  Gapperi,  and  Eretkizon  dorsata.  The  Alleghanian  may  be  distinguished  by  the 
absence  of  the  preceding  and  the  presence  of  Vulpes  virginianus,  Scalops  aquaticus,  S. 
Breweri,  Sciurus  cinereus,  Arvicola  pinetorum,  and  Lepus  sylvaticus,  which  do  not  occur 
in  the  Canadian  fauna. 

t  The  same  is  also  true  of  the  land  birds,  while  a  large  proportion  of  those  marine 
species  that  are  probably  really  common  to  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic  are  regarded  as  dis- 
tinct. It  should  be  observed,  however,  that  the  separations  in  both  classes  have  been 
made  mainly  by  the  same  persons.  On  the  other  hand,  the  highest  authorities  in  ento- 
mology admit  many  species  to  be  common  throughout  the  northern  hemisphere,  par- 


148  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

other?,  particularly  of  the  genera  Arvicola  and  Blarina,  currently  re- 
ceived as  valid,  are  here  treated  as  merely  nominal.  While  our  reasons 
therefor  are  given  somewhat  fully  in  their  proper  connection,  a  few 
general  remarks  in  further  explanation  seem  called  for  here. 

In  the  present  greatly  increased  state  of  our  knowledge  of  American 
mammals,  not  a  few  characters  once  very  naturally  considered  of  great 
importance  in  a  specific  diagnosis  are  to  he  regarded  as  far  from  de- 
cisive, they  now  being  known  to  he  dependent  either  upon  age,  season, 
or  locality,  or  to  be  mere  individual  variations.  A  difference  in  size, 
for  instance,  is  at  present  well  known  in  mammals,  as  well  as  in  birds, 
to  almost  universally  accompany  differences  in  the  latitude  and  elevation 
of  their  respective  habitats,  the  southern  representatives  of  species  widely 
diffused  being  very  appreciably  smaller  than  the  northern.  The  differ- 
ence between  the  extremes  amounts  not  unfrequently  to  nearly  one 
fourth,  and  occasionally  even  to  one  third,  of  the  average  size,  so  that, 
considered  apart  from  the  connecting  stages  afforded  by  representatives 
from  the  intervening  districts,  they  might  well  be  regarded  as  belonging 
to  distinct  species.  It  is  also  now  well  known  that  mammals  vary 
geographically  in  respect  to  color,  though  not  yet  fully  to  what  extent, 
and  also  in  the  character  of  the  pelage.  These  latter  facts  have  been 
long  recognized  practically  in  respect  to  the  fur-bearing  species,  but  it 
appears  equally  true  of  most  of  the  others.  Experienced  trappers  and 
fur-dealers  readily  distinguish  the  Mink  and  Sable  skins  of  the  north 
from  those  of  the  south,  by  the  comparatively  greater  fineness,  density, 
and  length  of  the  fur  of  the  northern  animal  ;*  similar  differences  are 
equally  evident  in  the  pelage  of  the  Wolves,  Foxes,  Lynxes,  and  Hares. 
This  difference  is  similar  to  that  observable  between  winter  and  summer 
specimens  from  the  same  locality,  the  northern  corresponding  in  the 
character  Of  the  pelage  to  the  winter  and  the  southern  to  the  summer 
ones.     The  resemblance  is  perhaps  still  more  striking  in  regard  to  the 

ticularly  among  the  Hymenoptera,  Neuroptera,  ami  Coleoptera,  and  not  :\  few  are 
regarded  as  primitively  almost  cosmopolitan.  The  same  is  true  in  regard  to  plants, 
quite  a  large  proportion  of  the  species  of  the  northern  North  American  flora  being  con- 
sidered identical  with  European  and  Asiatic.  Hence  we  naturally  inquire,  Is  there 
really  this  discrepancy  in  the  distribution  of  species  in  the  different  classes  of  organized 
beings  only  apparent  through  the  biased  opinions  of  one  or  the  other  of  these 

schoi  '  i  ■  its? 

*  In  the  case  of  the  Minks,  those  of  the  prairies  are  distinguished  as  readily  from  those 
inhabiting  the  adjoining  wooded  districts,  the  former  having  coarser  and  browner  fur, 
the  difference  being  sufficient  to  materially  affect  their  price  in  the  market. 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  149 

clothing  of  the  feet,  species  with  the  soles  thickly  furred  in  winter  often 
having  them  sparsely  so  in  summer,  northern  individuals  differing  in 
like  manner  from  southern.  The  variation  in  this  respect  increases 
with  the  distance  in  latitude  between  the  localities  whence  the  speci- 
mens compared  are  taken. 

Besides  these  geographical  or  climatic  variations,  we  have  found  by 
a  careful  comparison  of  scores  of  specimens  of  the  same  species,  collected 
at  the  same  locality,  that  there  is  a  much  greater  range  of  variation 
between  individuals  of  the  same  species  —  the  variation  extending  to 
every  part  —  than  is  commonly  conceded  ;  and  also  that  differences  de- 
pending upon  season,*  as  in  the  color,  thickness,  length,  and  general  tex- 
ture of  the  pelage,  and  others  depending  upon  age  *  and  sex,  instead  of 
being  always  recognized  by  authors  as  such,  have  not  unfrequently  been 
taken  to  indicate  a  constant  specific  diversity.  From  this  cause  there 
has  arisen,  in  numerous  instances,  an  undue  increase  of  so-called  species. 
Specimens  have  too  often  been  described  instead  of  species.  It  is  not 
surprising  that  these  mistakes  should  have  happened  in  the  earlier  days 
of  our  science,  when  the  material  for  study  was  scanty  and  diagnoses 
were  commonly  drawn  up  from  stuffed  .-kins,  the  authors  being  in  total 
ignorance  of  the  appearance  of  the  animal  in  life  ;  when  the  extent  of 
individual  variation  had  not  been  especially  investigated,  and  it  was  un- 
known that  in  animals  possessing  a  wide  distribution  there  were  marked 
variations  accompanying  wide  differences  in  locality.     But  even  now 

*  In  spring,  as  is  generally  well  known,  mammals  shed  the  long,  thick  coat  worn  in 
winter;  this  is  replaced  by  a  much  shorter,  thinner,  less  soft,  and  generally  differently 
colored  pelage.  In  this  there  is  a  gradual  change  throughout  the  summer,  and  late  in 
fall  it  becomes  either  entirely  replaced  or  effectually  concealed  by  the  growth  of  the 
long  winter  coat.  The  winter  differs  from  the  summer  pelage  not  only  in  being  longer 
and  thicker,  but  generally  in  the  different  character  of  the  hair  composing  it,  and  in  the 
fulness  of  the  soft  under  fur,  as  well  as  more  or  less  in  color.  The  shortness  of  the  sum- 
mer coat  renders  the  ears  of  such  animals  as  have  these  members  very  short,  as  the 
different  species  of  Arvicola,  Sorex,  Sciums,  &c,  much  more  conspicuous  at  that  season 
than  in  winter,  when  in  some  of  them  they  are  nearly  concealed.  In  young  animals, 
too,  the  first  pelage  differs  much  from  the  succeeding,  being  shorter,  darker,  and  gen- 
erally more  or  less  crisp.  The  general  health  of  the  animal,  as  no  one  need  be  told  who 
has  attentively  observed  domestic  animals,  has  a  marked  effect  upon  the  character  of 
the  coat,  and  on  the  time  it  is  changed,  as  does  also  scantiness  or  abundance  of  food. 

As  previously  stated  in  the  text,  species  with  the  soles  of  the  feet  furred  have  them 
less  densely  so  in  summer  than  in  winter.  It  is  perhaps  needless  to  advert  to  the  fact  of 
the  existence  of  a  temporary  set  of  teeth  in  young  animals,  which  gradually  give  place 
to  a  permanent  one  differing  from  the  first  in  number  and  character. 


loO  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

but  few  mammalogists  have  come  to  recognize  these  variations  as  man- 
ifestations of  general  laws,  and  we  are  consequently  scarcely  surprised 
at  the  glaring  inconsistencies  into  which  even  our  best  authorities  are 
frequently  betrayed,  they  at  times  assigning  to  these  several  variations 
their  true  character,  and  again,  in  apparently  equally  clear  cases,  con- 
sidering them  as  indications  of  specific  diversity.  It  thus  happens  that 
species  are  still  not  unfrequently  based  solely  on  differences  that  are  but 
individual  peculiarities,  from  these  differences  being  first  detected  in  com- 
paring specimens  from  widely  separated  districts,  whereas  they  are  not 
different  from  variations  presented  by  occasional  specimens  of  the  same 
species  at  any  given  locality.  Oftener  still,  perhaps,  species  are  founded 
on  slight  geographical  variations,  either  solely  or  in  connection  with  ex- 
ceptional individual  peculiarities,  or  on  differences  depending  upon  age. 
A  remarkable  instance  of  this  latter  kind  seems  to  have  occurred  in 
our  SoreciJce,  and  especially  in  Blarina,  where  no  less  than  eight  at 
present  currently  received  species  are  apparently  based  on  one.  Imper- 
fectly understood  sexual  variations,  associated  with  other  differences,  in 
some  cases  render  the  complication  still  greater.  This  occurs  in  the 
Mustelidee,  where  the  female  is  found  to  be  very  much  smaller  than  the 
male  in  almost  or  quite  all  species  when  the  sexual  differences  are  well 
known.  In  the  weasels  the  large  amount  of  this  difference  seems  to 
have  thus  far  generally  escaped  notice,  especially  by  American  writers. 
As  wide  a  range  of  variation,  aside  from  the  sexual,  obtains  in  these  as 
in  their  near  allies,  the  mink  and  the  marten.  In  this  group,  differ- 
ences in  size  and  in  the  relative  length  of  the  tail  as  compared  with  the 
body  —  the  latter  an  extremely  variable  elemeut  —  have  been  taken 
as  important  specific  distinctions,  and  on  these  grounds  alone  some  five 
species  (so  called)  appear  to  have  been  based  on  two. 

In  respect  to  the  differences  that  have  been  claimed  to  separate  spe- 
cifically the  Old  and  the  New  World  representatives  of  those  species 
we  in  this  paper  consider  identical,  only  those  of  very  slight  importance 
have  as  yet  been  adduced  ;  they  are  only  such  as  might  be  anticipated 
to  occur  when,  as  has  repeatedly  happened,  the  comparisons  have  been 
made  between  only  a  few  specimens  known  to  have  been  collected  at 
localities  widely  differing  in  latitude,  and  hence  in  climatic  conditions, 
and  at  different  seasons  of  the  year.  More  frequently,  however,  the 
exact  origin  and  history  of  the  specimens  compared  appears  to  have 
been  wholly  unknown.     In   no  case  are  the   differences  greater,  but 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  131 

generally  less,  than  those  presented  by  specimens  from  different  local- 
ities on  the  same  continent,  where  the  species  is  admitted  to  be  the 
same  ;  sometimes  not  greater  than  is  seen  at  the  same  locality.  From 
similar  unsatisfactory  comparisons,  and  undoubtedly  in  part  from  theories 
of  distribution,  representatives  from  distant  points  in  the  United  States 
of  species  ranging  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific  have  been  described 
as  distinct  species.  Not  till  large  series  of  specimens  from  hundreds  of 
localities  have  been  carefully  compared  can  all  these  disputed  points  be 
properly  settled,  through  the  tolerably  exact  determination  of  the  in- 
fluence of  "  locality  on  the  individual " ;  and  we  believe  that  no  work 
more  important  than  this  can  at  present  be  done. 

In  this  connection  I  can  hardly  avoid  a  word  or  two  in  reference  to 
the  spirit  which  evidently  incites  many  zoologies  in  their  researcln--. 
I  refer,  of  course,  to  that  eagerness  for  describing  "  new  species "  so 
patent  in  all  their  publications,' — an  influence  highly  derogatory  to  the 
advancement  of  scientific  knowledge.  It  tends  to  divert  attention  from 
such  a  critical  study  of  those  species  living  in  the  naturalist's  immediate 
vicinity  as  will  alone  acquaint  him  with  the  amount  of  variation  a 
species  may  be  expected  to  present.*  Only  by  such  a  preparation  can 
one  be  prepared  to  estimate  properly  the  character  and  value  of  differ- 
ences presented  by  specimens  from  remote  districts,  of  which  onlv  a 
limited  number  of  prepared  examples  can  be  examined.  Almost  all 
writers  on  the  different  classes  of  Vertebrata  have  fallen  in  a  greater  or 
less  degree  into  the  fault  of  describing  species  as  new  from  either  im- 
proper or  insufficient  material,  or  of  founding  them  on  characters  that  a 
critical  study  of  numerous  fresh  specimens  of  a  i'nw  well-known  species 
wrould  have  shown  were  of  very  slight,  and  often  of  even  no  value  as 
specific  distinctions.  The  inquiry  with  many  naturalists  respecting 
doubtful  specimens  seems  rarely  to  be  whether  they  may  not  be  re- 
ferred to  some  already  known  specie-,  and  the  points  of  resemblance  to 
their  nearest  known  ally  accordingly  carefully  weighed  against  the  differ- 
ences, but  rather  are  not  they  sufficiently  different  to  warrant  a  descrip- 
tion of  them  as  new  species?    This  greediness  for  species  nova  renders  it 

*  In  respect  to  Birds,  I  have  already  called  attention  (Memoirs  Bos.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist  , 
Vol.  I,  p.  512)  to  the  importance  of  collecting  and  comparing  a  very  large  nural  e 
specimens  from  the  same  locality,  to  learn  the  extent  of  the  variation  a  species  may 
present  at  the  same  point;  it  is  no  less  essential  in  Mammals,  where  seasonal  varial 
and  those  depending  upon  age  are  not  always  so  evident. 


152  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

difficult  to  eradicate  from  our  systems  those  even  but  doubtfully  admitted 
when  once  they  have  been  proposed  by  authors  high  in  authority, 
such  species  being  ultimately  accepted  without  having  ever  been  scien- 
tifically established.  Authors  afflicted  with  this  mania  rarely  reject  any 
species  of  their  contemporaries,  but  they  virtually  indorse  the  doubt- 
ful ones  by  adding  others  of  their  own  based  on  similar  characters.  The 
great  proportion  of  merely  nominal  species  hence  annually  added  to 
our  lists  is  a  detriment  to  science  deeply  to  be  regretted. 

Perhaps  the  strictures  contained  in  this  article  will  by  some  be 
deemed  too  severe ;  they  are  nevertheless  made,  not  only  reluctantly 
and  in  all  cases  without  the  slightest  personal  feelings,  but  from  a  con- 
viction of  their  necessity,  aud  with  the  sole  object  of  advancing  the 
truth.     Gladly  would  I  have  left  to  others  the  unpleasant  task. 

While  much  of  the  material  forming  the  basis  of  this  list  has  been, 
as  previously  stated,  that  of  my  own  collecting  at  Springfield,  I  am 
deeply  indebted  to  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  for  additional 
data,  and  especially  for  a  large  amount  of  invaluable  material  for  the 
revision  of  the  species.*  It  has  also  afforded  me  the  opportunity  of  com- 
paring American  with  European  specimens  of  the  species  of  Mustelidce 
and  Canidce,  and  of  examining  specimens  of  most  of  the  Mammals  of 
North  America.  The  very  complete  collection  of  Massachusetts  mam- 
mals in  the  Springfield  Museum  of  Natural  History,  mainly  collected 
and  prepared  by  Mr.  C.  W.  Bennett,  embracing  as  it  does  several 
unique  specimens,  has  likewise  been  freely  consulted,  and  with  much 
profit.  I  have  already  referred  to  my  indebtedness  to  Captain  N.  E. 
Atwood,  of  Provincetown,  for  notes  on  the  Cetacea,  and  to  Professor  E. 
D.  Cope  for  the  identification  of  the  species. 

The  names  used  in  Dr.  Emmons's  Iteport  are  generally  added  as 
synonymes:whcn  different  from  those  now  adopted.  A  tabular  compar- 
ison of  the  species  given  by  Dr.  Emmons  from  this  State,  by  Dr.  De 
Kay  from  New  York,  and  by  Mr.  J.  P.  Linsley  from  Connecticut  is 
made  with  those  of  the  present  list,  in  order  to  indicate  their  synonymy. 
In  general  only  such  synonymcs  are  given,  always  from  original  exami- 
nation, as  are  necessary  to  render  clear  the  views  of  the  writer  on  the 

*  Brobably  no  other  Natural  History  Museum  in  the  world  affords  facilities  for  the 
investigation  of  the  individual  variation  of  species  equal  to  those  presented  by  the  im- 
mense collections  of  New  England,  and  especially  Massachusetts,  Vertebratu  contained  in 
this  Institution,  brought  together  by  the  Director  in  great  part  for  this  e<pecial  purpose. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  153 

points  in  question.  The  thorough  and  exhaustive  manner  in  which 
this  part  of  the  subject  has  already  been  treated  by  Professor  Baird 
and  Dr.  Allen  has  rendered  anything  further  than  this  unnecessary. 

FELID-S3. 

1 .  Lynx  canadensis  Raf.  Canada  Lynx.  Rare,  and  generally 
occurring  only  in  the  more  thinly  settled  and  mountainous  parts  of  the 
State.  A  very  large  one  was  killed  in  November,  18GG,  in  the  town 
of  Ware.  Reports  of  their  capture  in  the  towns  of  western  Hampden, 
Hampshire,  and  Franklin  Counties,  as  well  as  in  Berkshire,  are  not 
very  infrequent. 

2.  Lynx  rufus  Raf.  Bay  Lyxx.  Apparently  rather  more  com- 
mon than  the  preceding  species,  but,  like  this,  it  is  generally  confined 
to  the  more  wooded  and  mountainous  districts.  One  was  taken  at 
Ipswich  a  short  time  since,  and  they  seem  to  occur  at  intervals  in  all 
sections  of  the  State. 

The  Fells  concolor  Linn.  (Panther)  has  probably  been  for  some  time 
extinct  in  Massachusetts,  though  undoubtedly  once  occurring  here. 
There  is  a  stuffed  specimen  in  Springfield  said  to  have  been  killed  a 
year  or  two  since  in  the  Adirondack  Mountains  of  New  York.  A  few 
months  since  the  writer  saw  another  that  was  captured  on  Pine  Hill,  in 
\Vcathersfield,  Vermont,  January  81,  1867.  This  specimen  is  said  to 
have  measured  seven  feet  from  the  tip  of  the  nose  to  the  tip  of  the  tail, 
to  have  stood  two  feet  nine  inches  high,  and  to  have  weighed  one  hun- 
dred twenty-two  and  a  half  pounds.  It  had  lived  for  some  time  pre- 
viously on  Ascutney  Mountain,  a  few  miles  from  where  it  was  captured. 
Very  good  photographs  of  this  rare  animal,  taken  from  this  specimen 
before  it  was  skinned,  can  be  obtained  of  Mr.  J.  D.  Powers,  of  Spring- 
field,  Vermont. 

Professor  Thompson  states,  in  his  Natural  History  of  Vermont  (p. 
37),  that  for  some  time  after  the  settlement  of  that  State  had  com- 
menced the  Panther  was  so  common  there  as  to  be  considered  danger- 
ous to  travellers  unless  they  were  well  armed.  In  his  Appendix  (p. 
12)  he  states  that  the  last  one  he  had  known  to  be  killed  in  that  State, 
and  also  the  only  one  for  many  years,  was  captured  in  Bennington,  in 
February,  1850. 

20 


154:  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

CANID^I. 

3.  Canis  lupus  Linn.  (C.  occidentalis  var.  griseo-albus  Baird.) 
Gray  "Wolf.  Occasional  in  the  sparsely  populated  districts  of  the  west- 
ern counties.     Like  the  species  of  FeUdce,  it  has  been  nearly  extirpated. 

Authorities  have  differed  greatly  in  their  views  respecting  the  identity  of 
the  American  and  European  wolves  ;  some,  forming  the  majority,  and 
among  them  apparently  those  whose  opportunities  for  judging  have  been 
most  favorable,  have  considered  them  the  same,  while  others,  and  among 
them  many  who  seem  to  have  but  casually  examined  the  subject,  have  re- 
garded them  as  distinct.  Not  only  so,  but  —  omitting  certain  varieties  based 
on  color  and  commonly  received  as  merely  nominal,  though  repeatedly 
raised  to  the  rank  of  species  —  specimens  from  the  middle  and  western  por- 
tions of  the  continent  have  been  described  as  specifically  distinct,  both 
from  the  Old  World  wolves  and  those  of  the  eastern  side  of  the  continent.* 
Dr.  Richardson,  than  whom  probably  no  one  has  had  Letter  opportunities 
for  studying  American  wolves,  after  pointing  out  some  trivial  differences  in 
physiognomy  and  in  the  character  of  the  pelage  between  the  wolves  of 
Arctic  America  and  the  Pyrenees,  observes  :  "  Notwithstanding  the  above 
enumeration  of  the  peculiarities  of  the  American  wolf,  I  do  not  mean  to 
assert  that  the  differences  existing  between  it  and  its  European  congener 
are  sufficiently  permanent  to  constitute  them,  in  the  eye  of  the  naturalist, 
distinct  species.  The  same  kind  of  differences  may  be  traced  between  the 
foxes  and  native  races  of  the  domestic  dog  of  the  New  World  and  those  of 
the  Old ;  the  former  possessing  finer,  denser,  and  longer  fur,  and  broader 
feet,  well  calculated  tor  running  on  the  snow,  f  These  remarks  have  been 
elicited  by  a  comparison  of  live  specimens  of  American  and  Pyrenean 
wolves  ;  but  I  have  not  had  an  opportunity  of  ascertaining  whether  the 
Lapland  and  Siberian  wolves,  inhabiting  a  similar  climate  with  the  Ameri- 
can ones,  have  similar  peculiarities  of  form,  or  whether  they  differ  in  physi- 
ognomy from  the  wolf  of  the  south  of  Europe."  For  this  reason  he  con. 
sidered  it "  unadvisable  to  designate  the  northern  wolf  of  America  by  a 
distinct  specific  appellation";  '•  the  word  occidentalis"  {Canis  lupus  occi- 
dentalism, he  further  observe-,  "  which  I  have  affixed  to  the  Linnscan  name 
of  Canis  lupus,  is  to  be  considered  as  merely  marking  the  geographical  po- 
sition of  the  peculiar  race  of  wolf  which  forms  the  subject  of  this  article." 

Audubon  and  Bachman,  the  former  having  been  long  familiar  with  the 
American  wolf  in  all  its  different  varieties,  unhesitatingly  pronounced,  after 

'    As  C.  nubilus  Say,  C-  vwidbilis  Maximilian,  C.  gigas  Townsend,  &c. 
t  The  comparisons  in  this  case,  it  should  be  remembered,  are  between  specimens  from 
lely  differing 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  155 

careful  and  extended  comparisons  of  specimens  from  tbe  two  continents, 
the  common  wolves  of  the  Old  World  and  the  New  to  be,  in  their  opinion, 
identical.  But  Dr.  De  Kay,  giving  but  two  lines  to  a  consideration  of  the 
subject,  very  summarily  separates  the  American  wolf  from  its  Old  World 
congener  under  the  name  of  Lupus  occidentalis.  Professor  Baird,  after 
admitting  the  weight  of  authority  to  be  in  favor  of  the  supposition  of  their 
specific  identity,  considers  them  distinct,  and  adopts  the  name  of  "  Canis 
occidentalis "  for  the  American  species.  In  referring  to  the  different 
varieties  of  the  North  American  wolf  this  author  says  :  "  For  the  present  I 
prefer  to  consider  all  as  one  species,  and  to  assume  this  with  good  reason 
as  distinct  from  some  at  least  of  the  European  wolves,  if  that  continent  pos- 
sesses more  than  one."  Although  previously  admitting  the  unsatisfactory 
character  of  his  materials,*  such  a  conclusion  is  but  in  accordance  with  his 
usual  apparent  predilection  for  considering  American  animals  as  distinct 
from  their  intimate  affines  of  the  Eastern  continent,  sometimes  even  where 
the  weight  of  authority  is  by  far  in  favor  of  their  identity,  and  his  own  ma- 
terials for  an  original  examination  of  the  subject  are  either  entirely  wanting 
or  too  scanty  to  be  of  much  account.f 

In  his  article  on  the  "Wolf  (p.  10S)  Baird  gives  us,  however,  a  most  interest- 
ing and  very  valuable  table  of  measurements  of  twenty-six  skulls,  chiefly 
from  the  Platte  River,  but  which  includes  others  from  Sweden  and  Russia, 
as  well  as  such  remote  points  in  North  America  as  New  York,  Oregon, 
Texas,  and  Mexico.  Aside  from  the  markedly  smaller  size  of  those  from  the 
southern  localities,  the  specimens  do  not  appear  to  differ  more  than  the 
same  number  might  from  either  of  the  localities  mentioned.  The  table 
shows  variations  in  the  proportion  of  breadth  to  length  in  the  muzzle  and 
in  the  whole  skull,  and  in  its  relative  breadth  at  similar  points  ;  but  a  care- 
ful examination  of  all  the  measurements  given  shows  that  these  differences 
are  inconstant,  specimens  from  near  the  same  locality  differing  as  much  or 
more  than  those  from  distant  points.  Neither  are  the  differences  greater 
nor  different  in  kind  from  those  New  England  specimens  of  the  common 
fox  (Vtdpus  fulvus),  the  woodchuck  (Arctomys  monax),  the  northern  hare 
Lupus  Americanus),  or  the  gray  rabbit  (L.  sylvaticus),  present,  and  which 
in  some  of  these  species  are  sometimes  exceeded. 

*  "  In  the  lack  of  perfect  specimens  of  the  North  American  wolf,  1  find  it  very  difficult 
to  throw  any  light  upon  the  long-vexed  questions  of  our  species,  all  before  me  being  mu- 
tilated in  some  way,  and  not  allowing  a  satisfactory  comparison  with  each  other  and 
with  descriptions."  —  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  105.  After  stating  his  conclusions  in  regard  to 
the  matter,  however,  he  in  a  later  paragraph  mentions  the  receipt  of  additional  speci- 
mens from  the  Yellowstone  River. 

|  But  one  species,  the  Guloluseus,  is  admitted  in  the  Report  on  North  American  Mam- 
mals, as  specifically  identical  with  any  species  of  the  Old  World.  In  this  case  a  strong 
probability,  in  his  estimation,  of  distinctness  is  hinted  at. 


156  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

The  variations,  particularly  in  point  of  color,  presented  by  the  species  un- 
der consideration  do  not  appear  restricted  to  its  American  representatives, 
in  the  north  of  the  Old  World,  the  wolves,  according  to  authors,  varying  from 
the  white  ones  of  Lapland  and  Siberia  to  the  gray,  pied,  dusky,  and  even 
black  ones  of  the  more  southern  States;  and  here  also  the  differences  in 
color  have  been  considered  as  indicating  different  species.    In  North  America, 
■where  the  wolf  is  quite  fully  known,  the  differences  between  the  large  white, 
or  nearly  white,  races  of  the  extreme  north  of  the  continent  and  the  smaller 
dusky  and  rufous  races  of  the  south,  in  size,  color,  in  the  character  of  the 
pelage,  and  perhaps  in  other  points,  are  so  great  that,  without  the  inter- 
mediate links  through  which  these  widely  differing  extremes  almost  insen- 
sibly pass  into  each  other,  through  individuals  inhabiting  the  intervening 
districts,  these  extremes  might  be  considered  as  well-marked  species.     At 
the  far  north,  and  "  particularly  in  districts  nearly  destitute  of  wood,"  says 
Dr.  Richardson,  "  wolves  totally  white  are  not  uncommon,"  while  grayish 
white  is  the  prevailing  color.     The  gray  occupy,  in  general,  the  northern 
and  elevated  parts  of  the  continent,  including  the  elevated  and  more  north- 
ern sections  of  the  United  States,  and  pass  into  the  white  and  lighter  gray 
wolves  occupying  the  region  farther  north,  and  into  the  darker  colored 
ones  existing  at  the  south.     Southwards  the  color  increases,  tending  more 
and  more  towards  black  and  red,  till  in   Florida  *  and  the  Gulf  States 
dusky  and  black  wolves  predominate,  and  in  Texas  red  or  rufous.     Yet  in 
no  portion  of  the  continent  is  the  color  of  the  wolves  at  all  uniform,  the 
same  packs  generally  presenting  a  great  variety  in  this  respect,  even  those 
of  the  same  litter  often  widely  differing.     Dr.  Richardson  mentions,  under 
his  "  variety  slide"  that  of  five  young  wolves,  "  leaping  and  tumbling  over 
each  other,  with  all  the  playfulness  of  puppies  of  the  domestic  dog,"  which 
he  thought  were  probably  of  one  litter,  one  was  "  pied,  another  entirely 
black,  and  the  rest  showed  the  common  gray  colors."     In  speaking  of  the 
black  American  wolf,  which  forms  his  "variety  aler"  he  says  the  Indians 
do  not  consider  them  to  be  even  a  distinct  race,  but  report  that  one  or 
more  black  whelps  are  occasionally  found  in  a  litter  of  a  gray  wolf.     Audu- 
bon and  Bachman,  in  referring  to  the  red  wolf  of  Texas  ("  Canis  lupus 
Linn.  var.  rufus  "  of  these  authors),  state  that  this  variety  is  by  no  means 
the  only  one  found  there,  "  where  wolves  black,  white,  and  gray  are  to  be 
met  with  from  time  to  time.     We  do  not  think,  however,"  say  they,  "  that 
this  red  wolf  is  an  inhabitant  of  the  more  northerly  prairies,  or  even  of  the 
lower  Mississippi  bottoms,  and  have  therefore  called  him  the  Red  Texan 

*  "  The  varieties,  with  more  or  less  of  black,  continue  to  increase  as  we  proce*'  1  far- 
ther to  the  south,  and  in  Florida  the  prevailing  color  of  the  wolves  is  b'ack."  —  Aun.  & 
Bach.,  Quad,  of  N.  Am.,  Vol.  II,  p.  130.  These  observations  of  Audubon  my  own 
inquiries  made  during  a  recent  journey  in  this  State  tend  to  confirm. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  1-j7 

Wolf."  On  the  Missouri  we  find,  according  to  Lewis  and  Clark,  that  the 
wolves  arc  chiefly  yellow,  as  also,  according  to  Professor  Baird,  on  the  Platte 
and  Yellowstone  (X.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  110),  where  they  appear  to  gradually 
merge  into  the  gray  and  white  ones  of  the  north.  These  latter  evidently 
form  the  so-called  varying  wolf  (('.  variabilis)  of  Prince  Maximilian,* 
some  of  which,  he  says,  are  entirely  white,  others  yellowish  white,  some 
more  mixed  with  gray,  and  others  still  entirely  gray,  in  the  same  pack. 
The  black  wolf  noted  by  Say  on  the  Missouri,  and  which  he  de& 
as  C.  nubilus,  like  the  gray  and  white  ones,  seems  to  occur  every- 
where, but  apparently  much  more  abundantly  at  the  south,  thus  cor- 
responding in  its  distribution,  as  in  general  character,  with  the  black 
variety  of  Southern  Europe,  described  by  Linnams,  and  afterwards  by 
Cuvier,  as  Canis  lycaon.  This  name  was  also  applied  by  Ur.  Harlan  to 
the  American  black  wolf.  The  red,  or  rufous,  seems  likewise  southern,  oc- 
curring in  great  abundance  in  Texas,  and  thence  northward  through  the 
middle  region  of  the  continent,  passing  gradually  through  paler  rufous  and 
yellowish  to  the  prevalent  gray  and  grayish-white  wolves  of  the  north. 
Though  perhaps  our  data  are  at  present  too  few  to  warrant  positive  con- 
clusions on  the  subject,  the  facts  appear  to  point  rather  strongly  to  a  local- 
ization of  these  different  colors  ;  it  is  nevertheless  true  that,  as  already 
stated,  the  wolves  present  at  every  locality  a  wide  range  of  variation,  and 
that  neither  variety  of  color  is  entirely  restricted  to  any  particular  region. 
The  gray  is  apparently  the  most  widely  diffused,  occurring  in  greater  or 
less  numbers  almost  everywhere,  f  We  find,  however,  that  authors  have 
considered  these  color  differences  as  indicating  not  only  permanent  va- 
rieties, worthy  of  distinctive  names,  but  even  species,  as  is  shown  by 
a  glance  at  the  subjoined  table  of  synonymes  of  the  American  animal. 
Not  a  few,  including  Audubon,  Bachman,  Dr.  Richardson,  and  others,  have 
been  so  inconsistent  as  to  name  and  characterize  as  "varieties"  what  they 
at  the  same  time  admit  to  be  either  positively  or  probably  only  individual 
variations,  occurring  sometimes  in  the  same  litter  with  the  common  form,  i 

*  Keise  in  das  innere  Nord-Amerika,  Vol.  II,  1841,  p.  95.  lb.,  Arcliiv  fur  Natur- 
geschichte,  Vol.  XXVII,  1561,  p.  247. 

t  Dr.  Cones  observes,  in  a  series  of  interesting  papers  on  the  "  Quadrupeds  of  Ari- 
zona," in  the  American  Naturalist  (Vol.  I,  p.  2SS),  that  all  the  wolves  seen  by  him 
in  Arizona  were  of  the  grizzly  or  grayish-white  variety,  which  in  winter,  at  a  distance, 
appear  almost  white. 

t  Dr.  Richardson,  after  saying  "  these  variations  of  color,  however,  not  being  attended 
witli  any  differences  of  form,  nor  peculiarities  of  habit,  I  deem  them  to  be  no  more  char- 
acteristics of  proper  species,  or  even  jiermanent  varieties,  than  color  would  be  in  the  do- 
mestic dog,"  proceeds  at  once  to  formally  name  and  describe  five  "varieties,"  as  though 
the}-  were  tangible,  permanent  forms,  —  so  great  apparently  is  the  fascination  to  some 
minds  of  bestowing  nam3S,  to  be  followed  by  their  own  as  authority,  in  Natural  History. 


158  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

In  some  previous  citations  of  the  synonymes  of  this  species,  I  find  that 
Dr.  Richardson  has  on  several  occasions  been  incorrectly  quoted,  first  by 
I)e  Kay  and  afterwards  by  Baird  ;  his  name,  Can  is  luj>us,  occidental  in, 
having  been  rendered  by  them  "  Can  is  (Lupus)  occidentalism  thu9  incor- 
rectly conveying  the  impression  that  he  regarded  the  wolf  of  North 
America  as  distinct  from  the  European,  and  as  also  having  placed  it  in 
a  sub-genus  (Lupus)  of  Canis.  Dr.  Richardson,  however,  expressly  states 
that  he  did  not  regard  them  as  distinct,  and  did  not  wish  to  further  bur- 
den the  science  by  imposing  a  new  name  to  indicate  what  at  most  he 
thought  might  be  but  a  geographical  race. 

Canis  lupus. 

Canis  lupus  Linn/EUS,  Syst.  Nat.,  I,  17G7,  58. 
"      mexicanus   Ib.,  60. 

"  "  Shaw,  Gen.  Zoo].,  I,  1800,  296. 

"  "  Desmorest.  Mam.,  I,  1S20,  199. 

"  Fischer,  Syn.,  1829,  183. 

"  "  Berlandier,  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc.  Phil.,  V,  1851,  157. 

"      lupus,  albus  Sabine.  Franklin's  Journ,  652. 
"      lupus,  griseus  Ib.,  654. 

"      lujms,  occidentalis  Richardson,  Faun.  Bor.  Amer.,  I,  1829,  60. 
"         "  "  var.  A,  griseus,  lb.,  66. 

"  "  "     B,  albus,  lb.,  68. 

"         "  "  "     C,  sticte,  lb.,  68. 

"  "  "     D.  nubilus,  lb.,  69. 

"  "  "  "    E,  aler,  lb.,  70. 

"      lupus  Harlan,  Faun.  Amer.,  1825,  84. 

"      lupus,  var.  aler  Audubon  and  Baciiman,  Quad.  N.  Am.,  II,  1851, 126,  pi.  67. 
"         "  "    albus  In.,  156,  pi.  72. 

"  "    rufus  Ib.,  240,  pi.  82. 

"        "       Emmons,  Quad.  Mass.,  1838,  26;  lb.,  1840,  28. 
"      nubilus  Say,  Long's  Exped.  R.  Mts.,  I,  1823,  168. 
"  "       Harlan,  Faun.  Amer.,  84. 

"      lycaon  In.,  126. 
"      variabilis  Maximilian.  Reise  in  das  innere  Nord  Amer.,  II,  1841,  95. 

"         In.,  Arch.  Naturgesch.,  XXVII,  1861,  247. 
"      (ji'jas  Townsend,  Journ.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc.  Phil.  (2d  series),  II,  1850,  75. 
"      uccidentalis,  var.  griseo-albus  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  1857,  104,  pi.  31. 
"  "  "     nubilus  Ib.,  111. 

"  "  "     mexicanus  Ib.,  113. 

"  "     ater  Ib.,  113. 

"  "    rufus  Ib.,  113. 

J.upus  occidenlalis  De  Kay,  Nat.  Hist.  N.  Y.  I,  i,  1842,  42,  pi.  26,  fig.  2. 

4.  Vulpes   vulgaris.    ( V.  fulvus   Rich.,   and   of  mo9t   modern 
authors.)     Red   Fox.     More  or  less  common  throughout  the  State. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  159 

The  varieties  called  "  Silver   Fox,"  "  Black  Fox,"  and  "  Cross  Fox," 
are  taken  at  long  intervals. 

These  so-called  varieties,  to  which  have  been  given  such  distinctive 
names  as  Canis  deewsatus,  C.  argentatus,  C.  /ulcus  var.  decussatus,  etc., 
etc.,  and  which  some  authors  have  regarded  as  species  and  the  majority 
as  permanent  "  varieties,"  are  but  different  degrees  of  melanism  of 
the  common  red  fox,  as  they  sometimes  all  occur  in  the  same  litter  of 
young.*  They  appear  exactly  parallel  to  the  dusky  and  black  varieties 
of  marmots,  which  are  usually  considered  as  only  variations  of  this  char- 
acter. The  dusky  of  the  preceding  species  (C.  lupus  Linn.)  and  the 
black  form  of  several  species  of  Sciurus  are  probably  but  the  result  of  the 
same  tendency  more  highly  developed.  Foxes  in  other  countries,  and 
particularly  the  European,  are  well  known  to  present  corresponding  dusky 
and  black  variations,  which  have  likewise  been  described  as  permanent 
varieties,  and  even  as  species. 

Respecting  the  identity  of  the  red  fox  of  Xorth  America  with  that  of 
Europe  there  is  a  diversity  of  opinion.  Most  of  the  old  authors  consid- 
ered them  specifically  the  same,  while  later  they  were  almost  as  generally 
regarded  as  distinct.  Recently  their  identity  has  been  maintained  by 
several  high  authorities  in  Europe,  among  whom  are  Giebel,  Wagner, 
and  Maximilian,  and  not  without  a  fair  show  of  reason.  Professor 
Baird  observes,  that  careful  comparisons  of  the  two  show  "  appre- 
ciable differences,  although  the  resemblance  is  very  close  in  external  ap- 
pearances, and  scarcely  to  be  expressed  except  comparatively."!     The 

*  Audubon  and  Bachman,  in  their  account  of  the  Cross  Fox  ("  Vulpes  f ulcus  Desm., 
var.  decussatus  Pennant"),  in  Quadrupeds  of  North  America  (Vol.  I,  pp.  52,53),  inci- 
dentally relate  the  following:  "  In  the  spring  we  induced  one  of  our  servants  to  dig  for 
the  young  foxes  that  had  been  seen  at  the  burrow  which  was  known  to  be  frequented  by 
the  Cross  Fox.  With  an  immense  deal  of  labor  and  fatigue  the  young  were  dug  out 
from  the  side  of  a  hill;  there  were  seven.  Unfortunately,  we  were  obliged  to  leave 
home,  and  did  not  return  until  after  they  had  been  given  away  and  were  distributed  about 
the  neighborhood.  Three  were  said  to  have  been  black,  the  rest  were  red.  The  blackest  of 
the  young  whelps  was  retained  for  us,  and  we  frequently  saw,  at  the  house  of  a  neighbor, 
another  of  the  litter  that  was  red,  and  differed  in  no  respect  from  the  common  Red  Fox. 
The  older  our  little  pet  became  the  less  it  grew  like  the  Black,  and  more  like  the  Cross 
Fox.  It  was,  very  much  to  our  regret,  killed  by  a  dog  when  about  six  months  old,  and, 
as  far  as  we  can  now  recollect,  was  nearly  of  the  same  color  as  the  specimen  figured  in 
our  work." 

In  the  following  autumn  the  female  was  killed:  "It  was  nearly  jet  black,  with  the  tip  of 
the  tail  white.  This  was  the  female  that  produced  the  young  we  have  just  spoken  of; 
and  as  some  of  them,  as  we  have  already  said,  were  Cross  Foxes  and  others  Red  Foxes, 
this  has  settled  the  question  in  our  minds  that  both  the  Cross  Fox  and  Black  Fox  are 
mere  varieties  of  the  Red." 

t  Mamm.  of  N.Am.,  p.  126. 


1G0  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

differences  in  the  color  and  texture  of  the  fur,  to  which  he  and  others 
have  called  attention,  seems  the  most  tangible  difference,  though  not  one 
of  high  value.  Several  specimens  from  different  parts  of  Europe,  in  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  show  that  some  of  the  other  differences 
specified  by  Professor  Baird,  particularly  that  of  the  form  of  the  tail  and 
the  greater  length  of  its  hairs  in  the  American  animal,  are  far  from  con- 
stant, there  being  no  such  differences  in  this  respect  between  them  and 
others  from  the  United  States,  as  has  been  claimed.  One  of  the  European 
has  the  tail  remarkably  full,  the  longer  hairs  being  fully  an  inch  longer, 
instead  of  an  inch  shorter,  as  according  to  authors  they  should  be,  than 
average  American  specimens.  Prince  Maximilian  has  also  observed  that 
this  distinction  in  regard  to  the  form  of  the  tail  is  inconstant  and  invalid.* 
While,  as  Professor  Baird  remarks,  Iuiropean  specimens  can  be  readily  sep- 
arated from  American,  as  in  the  case  of  most  species  commonly  admitted  as 
identical  on  the  two  continents,  it  does  not  follow  necessarily  that  they  are 
specifically  distinct,  since  in  very  many  species  of  animals  specimens  from  not 
very  remote  localities  can  be  similarly  distinguished,  where  naturalists  never 
question  their  identity.  The  very  exact  agreement  in  the  southward  dis- 
tribution of  the  red  fox  in  the  Old  World  and  in  the  New,  —  their  south- 
ern limitation  on  both  continents,  as  nearly  as  can  be  judged,  coinciding 
with  the  same  isotherm,  —  and  the  occurrence  of  the  same  varieties,  as 
"  cross,"  "  black,"  and  "  silver,"  and  in  about  the  same  relative  proportion 
of  individuals,  if  indicating  anything,  seems  to  point  to  their  identity.  In 
considering  this  subject  it  is  necessary  to  take  into  account  the  remark- 
able tendency  to  variation  presented  by  other  members  of  this  family 
in  a  state  of  nature,  and  the  readiness  with  which  widely  distinct  breeds  are 
developed  under  domestication  in  the  common  dog.  The  European  speci- 
mens to  which  we  have  referred  differ  considerably  among  themselves,  these 
differences  being  in  some  cases  greater  than  between  some  of  them  and  the 
average  type  of  the  American  animal.  I  hence  do  not  hesitate  to  consider 
the  North  American  red  fox  as  identical  with  the  common  red  fox  of 
Europe,  the  average  amount  of  difference  being  not  greater  than  might 
be  anticipated  in  specimens  from  so  distant  localities. 

5.  Vulpes  virginianus  De  Kay.  Gray  Fox.  Though  es- 
sentially southern,  this  species  is  said  by  De  Kay  to  be  rather  com- 
mon in  the  southern  counties  of  New  York,  and  particularly  on  Long 
Island  ;t  Audubon  and  Bachman  give  it,  as  not  uncommon  in  the 
vicinity  of  Albany,  N.  Y.,  but   :i^  scarce  in   New  England,  and  state 

'    Arch,  fiir  Naturgesoh.,  XXVII,  Theil  1,  p.  259. 
I    /.  iJil.  of  New  York,  Vol.  I,  p.  46. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  161 

that  tliey  had  not  heard  of  it  to  the  north  of  the  State  of  Maine.*  Dr. 
Emmons  gives  it  as  "  rare  in  Massachusetts."  t  Mr.  C.  W.  Bennett  in- 
forms me  that  he  knew  of  the  capture  of  two  specimens  in  Leominster 
a  few  winters  since.  The  skins  of  this  species  frequently  seen  in  our 
fur  stores  come,  so  far  as  I  have  learned,  altogether  from  Eastern 
Virginia  and  the  Southern  Atlantic  States. 

MUSTELINE. 

6.  Mustela  Pennantii  Erxl.  (M.  canadensis,  Emmons  Rep. ; 
Martcs\  Pennantii  Gray.)  Fisher.  Probably  still  of  rare  occur- 
rence in  the  Hoosac  ranges.  In  1840  Dr.  Emmons  wrote:  "It  is 
occasionally  found  in  the  vicinity  of  Williamstown,  particularly  in  that 
range  of  mountains  which  extends  northeast  through  Stamford,  Ver- 
mont." § 

This  species  seems  to  be  the  only  one  of  the  old  Linnrean  genus  Muslela 
(Marline?  of  recent  authors)  peculiar  to  the  northern  parts  of  North  Ameri- 
ca, with  no  very  near  ally  in  the  corresponding  portion  of  the  Old  World. 

7.  Mustela  martes  Linn.  {Martes  americana  Gray  ;  "  Mustela 
americana  Turton  "  of  recent  American  authors  ;  M.  zibellina  Brandt.) 
Pine  Marten.  Sable.  Occasional  in  the  mountains  of  Berkshire 
County.  Thirty  years  since  Dr.  Emmons  mentioned  it  as  not  infre- 
quent there,  but  as  most  common  "  where  pine  forests  abound.  It  is, 
however,"  he  says,  "  often  found  in  beech  woods,  where  it  is  sure  of  a  more 
ready  supply  of  food.  Its  nocturnal  habits,  and  native  shyness,  effec- 
tually screen  it  from  observation,  even  in  districts  where  it  abounds."  || 

The  variations  presented  by  the  sables  and  martens,  at  single  localities  as 

*  Quad.,  Vol.  I,  p.  172.  |  Rep.,  p.  31. 

%  Each  of  the  three  generally  recognized  genera  of  the  sub-family  Martina  ("  tribe 
Mustelina"  of  Gray)  —  Mustela  embracing  the  sables  and  martens;  Putorius,  the 
minks,  weasels,  and  ermines,  and  Gulo,  the  wolverine — has  been  recently  subdivided, 
the  sections  being  ranked  by  some  as  sub-genera,  and  by  Dr.  J.  E.  Gray  as  genera.  In 
his  Revision  of  the  Genera  and  Species  of  Mustelidm  (Proc.  London  Zool.  Soc, 
1S65,  pp.  100-  154),  lie  restricts  Mustela  to  the  weasels  and  ermines,  and  Putorius  to  the 
polecat,  while  the  sables  and  martens  he  places  under  Martes,  and  the  minks  under 
llson;  the  distinctions,  based  on  differences  either  in  the  dentition,  form  of  the  skull 
or  color,  are,  however,  very  slight. 

§  Rep.,  p.  30.  ||  Rep.,  p.  41. 

21 


162  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

well  as  in  different  districts,  have  been  very  perplexing,  and  have  given 
rise  to  a  considerable  number  of  supposed  species  and  a  very  great 
number  of  "varieties,"  the  alleged  distinctions  between  which  are  quite 
uncertain  and  inconstant.  Some  of  these  variations  are  doubtless  refer- 
able to  seasonal  changes,*  and  not  a  few  others  to  individual  peculiarities. 
Dr.  Gray  admits  six  species  as  inhabitants  of  the  North  Old  World,f 
several  of  which  he  divides  into  three  to  five  varieties  each.  To  a 
few  of  them  only,  however,  does  he  assign  separate  geographical  districts  ; 
in  general  they  vary  in  such  a  way  as  to  render  the  forms  recognized  bv 
him  as  species  quite  intangible,  the  varieties  forming  gradations  between 
them.  Two  of  the  three  attributed  to  Japan  (Martes  japonica  and  M. 
brachywa)  rest  on  exceedingly  unsatisfactory  data,  while  the  third  (Af. 
melanopus)  has  a  striking  resemblance  to  the  common  form  of  the  Ameri- 
can species,  and  to  varieties  of  both  the  so-called  M.  abietum  and  M. 
zibellina  of  Europe  and  Asia.  Aside  from  these  divisions  of  Dr.  Gray. 
three  principal  races  or  forms  (species  of  many  writers)  have  for  a  long 
time  been  recognized  as  occurring  on  the  Eastern  continent,  —  the  sable 
(Mustela  zibellina  Linn.),  the  pine  marten  (M.  martes  Linn.),  and  the 
beech  marten  (M.  foina  Brisson  ;  .1/.  martes,  var.  fagorum  Linn.).  The 
principal  distinctions  between  them  consist  in  the  relative  length  of 
the  tail,  which  varies  in  being  sometimes  longer,  equal  to,  or  shorter  than 
the  body,  and  in  the  color,  which  varies  in  general  tint,  and  differently 
in  the  different  regions  of  the  animal,  and  especially  on  the  throat, 
which  is  sometimes  white,  or  nearly  so.  but  more  commonly  yellowish  or 
yellowish-brown  ;  occasionally  the  "  throat  patch  "  is  nearly  obsolete.  The 
color  of  the  head  is  sometimes  like  that  of  the  body,  and  again  much 
lighter;  the  general  color  varies  from  blackish  through  different  shades  of 
brown  to  light  yellowish  brown  and  whitish.  But  instead  of  either  of 
these  differences  being  limited,  or  peculiar,  to  either  '-species,"  "variety." 
or  race,  or  to  special  localities,*  they  are  all  given  by  Dr.  Gray  under 
the  five  divisions  of  his  fifth  species,  —  "  Mustela  zibellina  Linn." ; 
while  he  says  of  his  M.  abietum,  var.  altaira,  that  it  is  "  intermediate  be- 
tween M.  abietum  and  M.  zibellina:  but  the  feet  are  not  so  hairy"!* 
Brandt,  in  his  Beitriige  Siiugtheire  Russlandt,  recognizes  three  species. 
The  American  animal  (M.  americana  auct.)  he  considers  as  a  yellowish 
or  more  yellowish-brown  and  less  densely  furred  variety  of  the  Asiatic 
sable  than  as  a  pure  marten  (AT.  martes),  and  calls  it  Mustela  zibellina, 
var.  americana. 

Dr.  Gray  of  course  regards  the  American  as  distinct,  and  divides  it 
into  three,  varieties,  —  abietinoides,  huro,  and  leucojni<.  -which  seem  to 
vary  only  in   intensity  of  color,  the  first  being' "  black-brown,"  the  s< 

*  See  postea,  pp.  165-167.  f  Proc.  Lond.  Zoijl.  Soc,  1865,  p.  104. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  163 

"yellowish-brown,"  and  the  third  much  lighter  than  the  second.  The 
habitat  of  the  first  is  given  as  the  "  Rocky  Mountains  "  ;  of  the  second, 
"  Fort  Franklin  " ;  that  of  the  third  is  not  stated,  and  may  be  supposed 
to  be  general,  or  at  least  those  districts  not  occupied  by  the  others.  It 
is  evident,  however,  that  these  ditferent  varieties  are  not  local,  as  they 
occur  more  or  less  frequently  at  the  same  localities,  and  likewise  at  as 
distant  points  as  the  two  sides  of  the  continent.  Dr.  Gray  refers  to  a 
series  of  specimens  of  the  American  pine  marten  in  the  British  Museum, 
collected  by  Dr.  Lord  during  his  excursion  with  the  Boundary  Commis- 
sioners, that  "  vary  greatly  in  color,  from  pale  brown  to  nearly  black,"  and 
have  "  the  throat  variously  mottled  with  yellow."  *  Mr.  Bernard  R.  Ross 
says  that  the  farther  north  the  skins  are  obtained  the  darker  the  pelage, 
and  that  on  the  Youkon  River  they  strongly  resemble  the  Siberian  sable.f 
While  in  general  the  specimens  from  North  America  are  of  the  white- 
headed  or  sable,  rather  than  of  the  marten,  type,  dark -headed  ones  also 
occur,  not  exclusively  on  the  western  side  of  the  continent,  as  some  have 
supposed,  but  more  or  less  frequently  at  all  points. 

Professor  Baird  has  described  J  specimens  from  the  West  Coast  that  do 
not  differ  essentially  from  others  from  the  Adirondacks,  though  having 
the  head  much  less  white.  Dr.  Brandt's  series  of  American  skins  from  the 
Northwest  Coast,  as  far  south  as  Columbia,  on  the  contrary,  had  the  head 
very  light  colored,  and  hence  resembled  in  this  respect  the  generality  of 
specimens  from  New  York,  Maine,  and  Nova  Scotia.  In  other  general 
characters  he  also  found  a  close  agreement  with  the  Asiatic  sable,  and,  as 
already  stated,  he  believed  them  specifically  identical.  Dr.  Gray  also 
mentions  a  close  resemblance  in  the  color  of  the  head  between  speci- 
mens from  Russia  and  the  Northwest  Coast  of  America.  Professor 
Baird,  after  comparing  American  with  Swedish  specimens,  states  that  "  in 
some  respects,  as  in  certain  features  of  the  skull  and  teeth,  the  American 
marten  approximates  to  the  beech  marten,  M.  foina,  more  than  to  the 
European  true  marten  " ;  and  that  it  differs  from  the  latter  (M.  viartea) 
in  certain  proportions  of  the  skull,  in  the  texture  and  paler  colors  of  the 
pelage,  in  the  relatively  longer  tails  of  the  latter,  and  in  the  extent  of  the 
naked  pads  of  the  feet.  He  also  finds  resemblances  in  color  to  the  Russian 
M.  zibcllina,  but  finally  concludes,  after  quoting  Dr.  Brandt's  reasons  for 
considering  them  identical,  by  saying  that  he  is  "far  from  admitting  the 
identity  of  the  American  marten  with  the  Russian  sable,  although  it  oc- 
cupies a  position  intermediate  between  the  latter  and  the  M.  martes  in  size, 

*  L.  c,  p.  107. 

t  List  of  Mammals,  Birds,  and  Eggs  observed  in  the  McKenzie's  River  District.     Nat. 
Hist.  Rev.,  July,  1862,  p.  272. 
J  Mam.  N.  Am.,  p.  153. 


164  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

length  of  tail  and  coloration,  as  well  as  in  intrinsic  value  of  the  fur.  The 
white-headed  varieties  of  New  York  are  most  like  the  sable  ;  the  darker- 
headed  ones  of  the  Western  country  like  the  pine  marten."  He  is  "in- 
clined to  the  belief,"  he  says  still  later,  in  an  interpolated  note,  '-that  we 
have  two  species,  one  representing  the  pine  martin,  with  dark  head,  the 
other  similar  to  the  sable,  with  whitish  head,  —  both  probably  distinct 
from    the  corresponding   Old   World  species,   the  martens  at  least." 

In  Dr.  Brandt's  diagnosis  of  the  martens,  the  relative  length  of  the  tail  is 
dwelt  upon  as  an  important  character.  Ln  M.  zibellina  the  tail  without 
the  hairs  is  given  as  one  third  the  length  of  the  body  ;  in  .1/.  martes,  one 
half  or  more  than  one  half.  Professor  Baird  says  the  tail  vertebras  in  M. 
americana  are  about  one  half  the  head  and  body  ;  hence  not  differing  much 
from  the  same  proportion  in  M.  mart's,  while  quite  different  from  the  same 
in  Af.  zibellina,  which  Dr.  Brandt  considers  the  .1/.  americana  to  most  re- 
semble; while  Dr.  Gray  observes  that  the  tail  of  some  of  Dr.  Lord's  speci- 
mens from  Western  America  is  almost  as  short  as  it  is  in  the  Russian  sable.  A 
marked  discrepancy  is  evident  in  these  statements,  explainable  on  the  ground 
of  the  inconstancy  of  the  distinction  based  on  the  relative  length  of  the  tail. 
Brandt  also  states  that  the  M.  foina  differs  from  M.  martes  somewhat  in 
general  color  (but  apparently  not  essentially,  considering  the  much  wider 
differences  in  this  respect  his  varieties  of  M.  zibellina  present  among  them- 
selves), and  in  having  the  tail  generally  longer,  with  more  vertebrae. 
Since,  however,  the  number  of  tail  vertebras  is  far  from  constant  in  most  mam- 
mals with  this  member  considerably  developed  (as  I  have  myself  observed  in 
the  mice,  squirrels,  ermines,  and  foxes),  this  latter  character  must  lose 
much  of  its  weight  till  repeatedly  verified.  Dr.  Gray  says,  in  urging  the 
non-identity  of  the  American  and  Old  World  martens,  that  "It  is  curious 
that  both  Brandt  and  Baird  seem  to  have  overlooked  the  small  size  of  the 
last  tubercular  grinder,  which  separates  the  American  from  the  Old  World 
pine  martens  " ;  a  fact  he  claims  to  have  discovered.  From  variations  I 
have  observed  in  this  respect  in  our  common  Mephitis,  it  would  be  inter- 
esting to  know  whether  Dr.  Gray  has  found  this  difference  constant  in  a 
considerable  series,  or  whether  the  observation  rests  on  a  single  specimen, 
as,  in  the  same  connection.  In;  refers  to  "the  skull  of  the  American  speci- 
men we  have  in  the  Museum,"  in  speaking  on  another  point. 

I  have  shown  in  the  foregoing  remarks  that  the  martens  and  sables  of  the 
Old  World  and  the  New  are  not  without  close  points  of  affinity  in  all  essen- 
tial particulars  ;  that  on  both  continents  they  present  almost  innumerable 
differences,  principally  in  respect  to  color,  but  few  of  which,  if  any,  appear 
to  be  geographical,  or  even  constanl  ;  that  on  both  continents  the  variations 
are  similar:  that  the  points  of  distinction  between  the  supposed  species  an' 
slight,  and  rest  mainly  on  characters  which  in  mammals  are  the  most  likely 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  165 

of  all  others  to  be  variable  ;  that  authors,  in  their  statements  and  opinions, 
are  widely  discrepant  and  often  contradictory  ;  finally,  that  the  American 
animal  is  most  closely  allied  to  the  Asiatic,  grading  through  it  into  the 
European.  At  present  there  seems  to  be  no  middle  ground  between  con- 
sidering all  as  forming  one  circumpolar  species  and  admitting  a  considerable 
and  indefinite  number,  since  some  of  the  so-called  "  varieties "  seem  as 
strongly  marked  forms  as  some  of  the  "species."  If  we  must  consider  the 
American  as  distinct  from  those  of  the  Old  World,  we  can  hardly  do  less, 
on  parallel  grounds,  than  to  recognize  two  or  more  in  America.  It  seems 
probable  that  in  time  the  greater  part  will  be  found  to  be  not  permanent 
or  uniformly  transmissible  varieties,  but  merely  irregular  individual  va- 
riations ;  —  in  other  words,  that  more  than  one  so-called  variety  may  be 
represented  in  the  same  family,  as  has  been  shown  is  the  case  in  the 
foxes  and  wolves,  and  as  is  well  known  to  occur  in  Mephitis*  The  com- 
parison of  a  great  number  of  specimens  from  many  localities  will  be 
necessary  before  we  can  consider  the  matter  as  satisfactorily  settled. 

Since  writing  the  foregoing,  I  have  met  with  a  very  valuable  paper  on 
the  Fur-Bearing  Animals  of  the  Mackenzie's  River  District,!  and  another 
on  the  Martens  and  Weasels  of  Nova  Scotia  ;  \  I  have  also  had  an  oppor- 
tunity of  comparing  a  large  number  of  skins  of  the  Siberian  sable  with 
an  extensive  series  of  others  from  Hudson's  Bay.  Much  additional  infor- 
mation has  been  derived  from  these  sources,  which  tends  to  confirm  the 
opinion  above  expressed ;  namely,  that  most  of  the  so-called  varieties 
and  species  would  prove  to  be  based  on  seasonal  and  individual  variations 
of  a  single  circumpolar  species.  The  writer  of  the  first  of  these  papers,  Mr. 
Bernard  R.  Ross,  is  well  known  from  his  extensive  Natural  History  explo- 
rations in  the  boreal  regions  of  this  continent,  and  his  experience  of  thirteen 
years  in  this  district  as  a  successful  trapper  entitles  his  statements  and 
opinions  to  more  than  ordinary  weight.  He  seems  to  have  been  a  critical 
observer,  and  in  this  paper  adds  much  to  our  knowledge  of  the  fur-bearing 
animals  of  North  America.  His  remarks  on  the  seasonal  changes  in  the 
color  and  character  of  the  fur  in  several  species  are  particularly  valu- 
able. The  following  extracts  from  them  explain  to  a  great  extent  the 
nature  of  the  wide  variations  which,  in  many  characters,  the  martens  and 
sables  everywhere  exhibit. 

*  Seejioslen,  p.  173  et  seq. 

t  A  Popular  Treatise  on  the  Fur-bearing  Animals  of  the  Mackenzie's  River  District. 
By  Bernard  Roc; an  Ross,  C.  T.  —  Canadian  Naturalist  and  Geologic,  Vol.  VI,  January, 
1861,  pp.  5-36. 

{  On  the  Mammals  of  Nova  Scotia,  No.  III.  By  Dr.  J.  Bernard  Gilpin.  —  Transact. 
Nova  Scotia  Inst,  of  Nat.  Science,  Vol.  II,  Part  I,  pp.  8-  10. 


106  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

"  It  is  difficult  to  describe,"  he  says,  "  the  color  of  the  marten  fur  ac- 
curately. In  a  large  heap  of  skins  (upwards  of  fifty)  which  I  have  just 
examined  minutely,  there  exists  a  great  variety  of  shades,  darkening  from 
the  rarer  yellowish-white  and  bright  orange  into  various  shades  of  orange- 
brown,  some  of  which  are  very  dark.  However,  the  general  tint  may 
with  propriety  be  termed  an  orange-brown,  considerably  clouded  with 
black  on  the  back  and  belly,  and  exhibiting  on  the  Hanks  and  throat  more 
of  the  orange  tint The  ears  are  invariably  edged  with  a  yellowish- 
white,  and  the  cheeks  are  generally  of  the  same  hue.  The  forehead  is  of  a 
light  brownish-gray,  darkening  towards  the  nose,  but  in  some  specimens  it  is 
nearly  as  dark  as  the  body.*  The  yellowish  marking  under  the  throat  (con- 
sidered as  a  specific  distinction  of  the  pine  marten)  is  in  some  well  defined, 
and  of  an  orange  tint,  while  in  others  it  is  almost  perfectly  while.  It  also 
varies  much  in  extent,  reaching  to  the  forelegs  on  some  occasions.  At 
other  times  it  consists  merely  of  a.  few  spots,  while  in  a  third  of  the  specimens 
under  consideration  it  is  entirely  wanting."  In  respect  toother  charac- 
ters he  observes:  '-The  tail  is  considerably  less  than  half  the  length  of 
the  body  generally,  though  it  is  sometimes  longer ;  it  is  well  covered  and 
tolerably  busby.  The  feet  are  comparatively  large,  densely  covered  with 
short  woolly  fur,  mingled  with  stiller  hairs,  which  prevent  the  naked  balls 
from  being  visible  in  winter,  though  they  are  distinctly  so  when  the  animal  is 
in  summer  pelage."  f  Respecting  the  seasonal  changes  he  says:  "When 
casting  its  hair  the  animal  has  far  from  a  pleasing  appearance,  as  the  under 
fur  falls  off,  leaving  a  shabby  covering  of  the  long,  coarser  hairs,  which 

have  then  assumed  a  rusty  tint After  the  fall  of  these  long  hairs, 

and  towards  the  end  of  summer,  a  fine,  short  fur  pushes  up.  When  in 
this  state  the  pelage  is  very  pretty,  and  bears  a  strong  resemblance  to  a 
dark  mink  in  its  winter  coat."  He  further  observes  :  "  In  summer,  when 
the  long  hairs  have  fallen  off',  the  pelage  of  this  animal  is  darker  than  in 
winter.  The  forehead  changes  greatly,  becoming  as  deeply  colored  as  any 
other  part  of  the  body,  which  is  of  an  exceedingly  dark  brown  tint  on  the. 
back,  belly,  and  legs.  The  yellow  throat  markings  are  much  more,  distinct 
at  this  season,  but  vary  much  both  in  color  and  extent,  though  in  only  our 
summer  skins  are  they  entirely  wanting."  Mr.  Ross  also  adds,  that  the 
martens  of  the  Mackenzie's  River  district  " bear  a  greater  resemblance  to 
the  sable  of  Eastern  Siberia  than  to  the  martens  of  Europe,  holding,  as  it 
may  be  with  propriety  said,  an  intermediate  position." 

Dr.  Gilpin,  in  bis  paper  on  the  Nova  Scotian  Mammals  already  cited, 
has  the   following  remarks  on   the  variations   presented  by  different   indi- 

*    Tin'  italicizing  in  these  quotations  is  my  own. 

f   This  may  explain  the  differences  in  the  hairiness  of  the  soles  pointed  out  by  differ- 
ent authors,  ami  claimed  as  a  distinctive  character  of  considerable  importance. 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  1G7 

viduals  at  the  same  locality  :  "  When  we  begin  to  study  this  species,  we 
soon  find  a  very  great  variety  in  color,  not  only  between  the  summer  and 
winter  specimens,  but  between  winter  skins  themselves,  that  are  all  in  the 
highest  condition.  Whilst  they  all  coincide  in  what  may  be  called  typical 
marks,  such  as  color  of  legs,  tail,  and  especially  ears,  all  of  which  have  a 
very  pale  but  conspicuous  rim  or  border,  they  vary  much  in  color  of  J 
some  having  black,  others  faces  so  pale  as  to  be  nearly  white,  and  the  pale 
faces  have  a  lighter  brown  color,  and  the  orange  throat  much  less  vivid." 
Of  seven  skins  described  by  this  gentleman  in  detail,  two  "  are  nearly  uni- 
form mahogany  brown  "  from  the  nose  to  the  tail ;  the  other  five,  though 
varying  somewhat  among  themselves,  are  generally  lighter,  with  much 
lighter  faces,  and  the  orange  spot  on  the  throat  very  bright,  "  almost  ful- 
vous." He  adds  that  the  skins  from  "Newfoundland  and  Labrador  are 
much  finer,  darker  in  color,  and  more  lustrous  in  pelage"  than  those  from 
Nova  Scotia. 

Through  the  kindness  of  several  of  the  fur-dealers  of  Boston  I  have  had 
an  opportunity  to  make  a  careful  comparison  of  scores  of  skins  of  the  Siberian 
sable  from  Ruisia  with  as  large  a  series  from  the  Territory  of  Hudson's 
Bay.  The  differences  between  them,  although  through  the  whims  of 
fashion  producing  considerable  difference  in  the  mercantile  value  of  the 
skins,  are  really  quite  slight.  The  fur  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  skins  is  a 
little  coarser,  and  the  color  slightly  more  rufous,  with  much  fewer  of 
the  white-tipped  hairs  that  in  the  Siberian  skins  are  sometimes  suf- 
ficiently numerous  to  give  them  a  slight  grayish  cast,  and  which  is  con- 
sidered to  greatly  increase  their  value.  As  one  of  the.  dealers  practically 
remarked,  they  differ  no  more  than  the  horses  raised  in  Pennsylvania  do 
from  those  bred  in  Massachusetts.  Some  of  the  skins  of  both  varieties 
had  tails  much  shorter  than  the  average,  showing  the  unreliability  of  this 
character.  In  a  few  instances  this  member  was  distinctly  tipped  with 
white,  in  both  the  Hudson's  Bay  and  Siberian  skins. 

In  the  light  of  the  now  well-substantiated  facts  of  a  wide  range  of 
seasonal  and  intergrading,  inconstant  individual  variation,  it  seems  to  me 
to  be  beyond  reasonable  doubt  that,  as  I  have  already  stated,  the  mar- 
tens and  sables,  at  least  all  thus  far  described,  belong  to  a  single  circum- 
polar  species,  with  possibly  two  or  more  well-marked  and  tolerably  constant 
continental  races. 

8.  Putorius  vulgaris  Crv.  (Mustela  vulgaris  Linn. ;  Putorius 
pusillus  And.  and  Bach.)  Least  Weasel.  Rather  rare.  Far  less 
numerous  than  the  next. 

9.  Putorius  ermineus  Civ.  (Mustela  erminea  Linn. ;  Putorius 
noveboraceusis   Ue    Kay;    Mustela    Richardsonii   and    M.    Cicogn 


1G8  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Don.  ;  PutorhlS  fuscus,  P.  agilis,  and  P.  ermineus  Aud.  and  Bach.) 
Common  Weasel.  Ermine.  Comparatively  common.  It  varies 
considerably  in  size,  like  other  members  of  tins  family,  according  to 
sex   and   age. 

I  have  obtained  specimens  at  Springfield,  identified  some  years  since 
as  belonging  to  the  three  species  currently  admitted  by  American 
authors  as  inhabiting  Eastern  North  America,  —  "P.  Richardsonii  Bon."; 
11  P.  Cicognanii  Bon.,"  and  "P.  noveboracensis  De  Kay."  I  have  not 
access  to  the  specimens  for  re-examination,  but  that  these,  forms,  or 
so-called  species,  occur  in  Massachusetts  there  can  be  little  doubt,  since 
Professor  Baird,  in  his  Report  on  the  Mammals  of  North  America, 
cites  eleven  examples  from  Middleboro',  collected  by  Mr.  J.  W.  P.  Jenks, 
of  his  P.  Cicognanii,  two  of  P.  Richardsonii  and  one  of  P.  noveboracen- 
sis. As  indicated  by  the  synonymy  already  given,  I  consider  all  these 
as  tunning  but  a  single  species,  which,  after  careful  comparison  of  Ameri- 
can with  European  specimens,  I  fully  believe  to  be  identical  with  the 
ermine  (/'.  ermineus)  of  the  Old  World.  I  also  feel  obliged  to  consider 
the  common  American  weasel,  after  similar  comparisons,  as  identical  with 
the  common  weasel  fP.  vulgaris)  of  the  Eastern  continent. 

Although  three  species  of  ermines,  or  stoats,  have  been  supposed  to  in- 
habit New  England,  in  common  with  Eastern  North  America  generally, 
no  constant  character  has  yet  been  indicated  by  which  more  than  a  single 
one  can  be  positively  distinguished.  In  size  there  is  an  almost  impercep- 
tible gradation  from  the  smallest  specimens  to  the  largest,  and  similar  gra- 
dations in  all  other  characters,  not  excepting  the  relative  length  of  the  tail 
to  the  body.  This  latter  character  and  that  of  size  have  formed  the  two 
distinctions  most  strongly  urged  as  specifically  separating  them. 

Previous  to  1838,  all  the  known  weasels  of  North  America  were  con- 
sidered as  belonging  to  two  species,  identical  with  the  Mustela  vulgaris  and 
M.erminea  of  the  Old  World.  At  this  time  Bonaparte,  in  his  Fauna 
rtalica,  added  a  third,  which  he  called  Mas!,  la  Cicognanii  He  gave  of  it 
the  following  short  and  very  unsatisfactory  diagnosis:  "  M.  rufo-cinna- 
momea,  subtus  Jiavo-albida  :  cam/a  corjioris  dimidio  sub-breviori,  apice  nigri- 
cans "  ;  which  contains  the  single  tangible  character  of  "  tail  rather  less 
than  half  the  body."  In  the  same  year,  in  Charlesworth's  Magazine  of 
Natural  History,*  he  added  a  fourth,  which  he  called  Mush  hi  longi- 
cauda.  This  species  was  based  on  a  variety  mentioned  in  the  Fauna 
Boreali-Americana,t  by  Dr.  Richardson,  as  differing  from  the;  common 
ermine  in  being  larger  and  in  having  a  longer  tail.  Bonaparte,  in  the 
same  communication,  changed   the   name  of  the   ermine  weasel   of  Rich- 

*  Vol.  II,  p.  38.  t  Vol.  I,  p.  47. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  109 

ardson's  work  from  .1/.  erminea  to  M,  Richardsonii,  he  believing  them  to  be 
distinct  species,  and  thus  separated  all  the  larger  American  weasels  from 
those  of  the  Old  World.  At  this  point  begins  the  uncertainty  and  confusion 
that  has  long  existed  in  regard  to  the  number  of  species  of  American 
weasels  and  their  distinctive  characters.  But  no  changes  were  currently 
adopted  by  American  authors  tdl  ten  or  twelve  years  later,  when,  in 
1311,  Audubon  and  Bachman,  in  the  Proceedings  and  Journal  of  the  Phila- 
edlphia  Academy  ot  Natural  Sciences,  described  a  specimen  taken  on  Long 
Island,  NewYork,  as  a  i,c,\  species,  under  the  name  of  Mustela  fusca.*  In 
the  following  year  Dr.  De  Kay,  in  his  Report  on  the  Mammals  ot'  New 
York,  redescribed  this  specimen  under  the  name  applied  to  it  by  Audubon 
and  Bachman,  and  at  the  same  time  separated  the  larger  representatives 
of  the  ermine  as  a  species  distinct  from  the  Old  World  ermine  and  from  the 
supposed  northern  .1/-  Richardsonii  of  Bonaparte.  But  this  author  very 
frankly  adds  :  "  I  have  never  seen  tin;  true  ermine  in  its  summer  dress,  and 
only  know  it  from  Pennant's  description  (Arct.  ZooL  Vol  I,  p.  7.3y"  He 
calls  the  American  ermine  weasel  Putorius  noveboract  nsis.  and  regards  it  as 
differing  generieally  from  two  other  species  of  weasel  {M.  pusilla  =  M. 
vulgaris  Linn,  and  M.  fusca  And.  and  Bach.)  described  by  him  as  also  in- 
habiting NewYork.  In  1S53,  the  authors  of  Viviparous  Quadrupeds  of 
North  America,  in  the  third  volume  of  that  work  (p.  184),  characterized 
another  species  as  new,  also  from  New  York  specimens,  which  they  called 
Putorius  agiiis.  In  the  same  volume,  under  P.  fuscus.  they  observe  that 
whereas  the  number  of  North  American  weasels  was  believed  by  the  older 
authors  to  be  at  most  two,  while  some  admitted  but  one,  "  there  are  now 
five,  four  of  which  are  found  in  New  York.-'  If  we  add  to  the  new  names 
of  Audubon  and  Bachman  and  De  Kay  the  three  bestowed  on  American 
weasels  by  Bonaparte,  we  have  seven  specific  designations  for  those  of 
Eastern  North  America  alone;  to  these  may  be  added  P.  erminea  and  I'. 
vulgaris,  Audubon  and  Bachman  fully  believing  these  species  to  be  common 
to  both  continents,  thus  making  nine. 

This  was  the  condition  of  the  subject  when  Professor  Baird  revised  the 
group  in  his  Report  on  the  Mammals  of  North  America,  in  1857.  In  this 
work  eight  species  are  admitted  as  inhabitants  of  North  America.  Two 
(P.  fremitus  and  P.  xanthogenys)  are  considered  as  exclusively  southern 
and  western  in  their  distribution;  one  (P.  Kaneii)  as  northwestern  ("  Behr- 
ing's  Straits  and  Siberia"),  and  three  P.  Pusilla,  P.  Cicognanii,  and  P. 
Richardsonii)  as  distributed  throughout  the  northern  parts  of  the  conti- 
nent and  extending  southwards  into  the  United  States.  Another  (P.  novc- 
boracensis')  is  regarded  as  ranging  from  Massachusetts  and  Northern  New 

*  Proc,  Vol.  I,  p.  92 ;  Journ.  Vol.  VIII,  1842,  p.  280. 
22 


170  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

York,  west  and  south,  to  Southern  Pennsylvania,  Illinois,  and  Arkansas. 
The  locality  of  still  another  is  given  as  Carlcton  House,  II.  B.  T.,  this 
being  the  variety  described  by  Richardson  as  occurring  at  that  locality, 
and  named  Muslela  longicauda  by  Bonaparte.  But  Baird  doubtfully 
refers  to  it  also  some  long-tailed  ermines  from  the  Upper  Missouri. 

Concerning  the  Least  Weasel  (P.  pus'dlus  And.  and  Bach,  of  Baird's 
Rep.),  the  only  queries  relating  to  it  have  been  principally  in  reference  to 
its  relationship  to  P.  vulgaris,  P.  pus'dlus  forming  its  principal  synonyme. 
Bonaparte,  however,  doubted  its  occurrence  in  America,  supposing  his 
P.  Cicognanii  had  been  generally  mistaken  for  it,  as  he  claims  he  found  it 
had  been  in  some  of  the  Middle  States,  and  on  his  authority  Dr.  Godman 
excluded  it  from  his  American  Natural  History  Afterwards,  however. 
Dr.  Richardson,  in  the  Zoology  of  Beechey's  Voyage,  applied  to  it  the 
name  of  /'.  ( 'icognanii. 

For  the  smaller  weasels  with  a  distinct  black  tip  to  the  tail,  Professor 
Baird  retains  the  name  of  P.  Cicognanii,  referring  to  it  the  Muslela  (after- 
wards Pulorius)  fusca  of  Audubon  and  Bachman.  lie  gives  as  its  distinc- 
tive character,  "Length  to  tail,  eight  inches  or  less.  Tail  vertebra?,  one 
third  this  length.  Black  of  tail,  two  fifths  its  length."  etc.  He  adds,  this 
"  species  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  other  American  weasels  by  the 
small  size,  and  the  tail,  which,  with  the  hairs,  is  rather  less  than  half  the. 
body.'  In  a  note  he  mentions  the  later  reception  of  some  hunter's  skins 
from  Nova  Scotia  and  Labrador,  among  which  were  some  that  agreed  very 
well  with  typical  specimens  from  Massachusetts,  while  others  were  consid- 
erably larger,  though  in  general  preserving  the  same  proportions.  The 
average  length  of  the  body  in  the  measurements  of  twelve  specimens 
given  by  him  is  8.25  inches,  the  largest  being  10,  and  of  tail  .">.G2  ;  but 
between  the  extremes  of  the  series  there  is  a  variation  in  total  length  of 
thirty-six  per  cent,  of  the  average,  and  in  the  relative  length  of  tail  to  the 
body  of  twelve  per  cent. 

Pulorius  Richardsonii  is  characterized  by  the  same  author  thus:  '•  Length 
to  tail,  nine  inches  or  less.  Tail  vertebra',  about  half  this  length.  Black  of 
tail,  nearly  one  half  to  one  third  its  length,"  etc.  "  Is  readily  distinguished 
from  Pulorius  Cicognanii  by  the  longer  tail,  the  vertebra'  alone  of  which 
are  fully  half  the  length  of  the  body,  instead  of  requiring  the  entire  t.iil  to 
effect  this  proportion."*    Of  this  "species,"  the  measurements  of  two  speci- 

*  In  the  account  of  /'.  Richardsonii  in  the  Mammals  of  North  America  there  occurs 
the  following  singular  but  important  discrepancy,  probably  the  result  of  a  typographical 
error.  In  the  third  paragraph  of  page  L65  it  is  stated,  "  This  species,  a  true  Puturius 
differs  materially  from  the  larger  North  American  Weasels  in  the  absence  of  a  black  lip  to 

II;   in  this  n  P    ■  ..."      but  in   the   specific   dingi 

iif/'    I  says:  "  Black  of tail  nearly  one  half  to  one  third  Us  lenylh" ; 

and  in  that  ol  /'.  Ci>   <j:i<tuii,  "  Black  of  tail  two  ffths  its  length." 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  171 

mens  from  Eastern  Massachusetts  are  given,  both  of  which,  in  general  size, 
fall  within  the  average  of  the  twelve  of  P.  Cicognanii;  thus  showing  that 
"small  size  "  fails  to  sufficiently  distinguish  the  latter,  and  also  that  short 
tails  and  small  size  do  not  always  go  together  in  specimens  from  the  same 
locality ;  the  tails  in  these  two  exceed  the  average  in  the  P.  Cicognanii  by 
about  thirty  per  cent,  of  the  average  of  the  whole  series.  The  distinction 
based  on  the  relative  length  of  the  black  tip  seems  also  intangible,  "  two 
fifths"  coming  just  between  "  nearly  one  half"  and  "  one  third."  To  this 
species  he  refers  the  P.  agilis  of  Audubon  and  Bachman,  and  of  course  the 
Muslela  (Pulorius)  erminea  of  Richardson,  for  which  the  name  Richardsonii 
was  substituted  by  Bonaparte  for  erminea.  Yet  the  dimensions  given  by 
Richardson  accord  in  the  proportions  of  the  tail  to  the  body,  not  with 
Baird's  diagnosis  of  P.  Richardsonii,  but  with  that  of  P.  Cicognanii,  the 
tail  vertebra?  being  but  little  more  than  one  third  the  body,  and  the  hairs 
and  vertebra?  together  being  less  than  one  half.* 

Pulorius  noveboracensis  of  Baird's  Report  is  characterized  as  "  Length  to 
tail  about  ten  inches.  Tail  vertebrae  about  half  this  length.  Black  of  tail 
about  half  its  length,"  etc.  It  thus  diifers  from  the  last  only  in  being 
larger.  Yet  one  of  the  three  specimens  of  which  measurements  are 
given  scarcely  exceeds  the  size  of  the  larger  of  the  two  specimens  of  P. 
Richardsonii,  and  falls  considerably  below  several  of  the  P.  Cicognanii  in 
length  of  body.  One  of  the  P.  Cicognanii  specimens  even  equals  the  aver- 
age of  those  of  P.  Richardsonii,  although  P.  Cicognanii,  as  previously  ob- 
served, is  supposed  to  be  distinctively  characterized  by  its  small  size. 
Some  differences  in  the  proportional  length  of  the  feet,  and  in  the  color, 
are  mentioned  as  existing  between  this  and  P.  Richardsonii,  but  they  are 
evidently  merely  individual,  and  would  disappear  in  a  comparison  of  a 
large  series.  To  this  species  he  refers  the  P.  ermineus  of  Audubon  and 
Bachman  and  the  P.  noveboracensis  of  De  Kay. 

In  comparing  some  of  the  "  noveboracensis "  specimens  with  a  short- 
tailed  one  of  the  European  P.  ermineus,  I  am  not  surprised  that  Profes- 
sor Baird  found  "very  decided  points  of  distinction,"  "  notwithstanding  the 
assurance  of  authors  "  to  the  contrary.  The  principal  one  mentioned,  how- 
ever, is  the  greater  brevity  of  the  tail  in  the  European,  in  which  the  pro- 
portion of  the  tail  to  the  body  is  about  as  it  is  in  P.  Cicognanii. 

In  Pulorius  hngicaudus  the  dimensions  are  given  as,  "  Length  to  tail 
about  eleven  inches.  Tail  vertebra?  about  half  this  length.  Black  of  tail 
about  one  fourth  its  length,"  etc.  The  measurements  given  of  three  speci- 
mens average  10.78  inches  in  the  length  of  the  body,  one  only  reaching 
eleven,  while  the  tail  vertebra?  alone  equal  fully  half  of  this  length.     It 

*  "Length  of  head  and  body,  It  inches;  of  tail  (vertebrse),  4  inches;  of  tail,  including 
fur,  5  inches."  —  Faun.  Bor.  Am.,  Vol.  I.  p.  4". 


172  BULLETIN   OF  THE 

differs,  then,  from  P.  Richardsonii  only  in  its  slightly  larger  size,  the  pro- 
portion of  length  of  tail  to  length  of  body  being  essentially  the  same  in  both. 
Some  smaller  specimens  are  referred  to  this  from  the  Upper  Missouri, 
of  which  measurements  are  not  given.  Two  of  the  large  specimens  are 
marked  males ;  the  sex  of  the  other  is  not  indicated.  To  this  species 
is  of  course  referred  the  long-tailed  Carleton  House  variety  mentioned 
by  Richardson,  to  which,  as  already  observed,  Bonaparte  gave  the  name 
longicauda. 

From  the  preceding  comparisons  and  remarks  the  inconstancy  and  the 
arbitrary  character  of  the  distinctions  claimed  as  specific  are  fully  evi- 
dent. It  appears  that  short  tails  by  no  means  always  accompany  small 
size,  nor  long  tails  large  size  ;  that  both  occur  at  the  same  localities,  as  well 
as  at  points  as  remote  from  each  other  as  the  most  distant  localities  at 
which  the  species  has  been  found,  as  Hudson's  Bay  Territory  and  the 
Arctic  Regions  on  the  one  hand  and  Massachusetts,  Pennsylvania,  and 
Illinois  on  the  other  ;  that  between  the  "  species,"  as  characterized  by 
Professor  Baird,  there  is  an  almost  insensible  intergradation  in  all  the 
essential  characters,  some  of  the  so-called  species  resting  on  distinctions 
that  are  by  no  means  differences  (as  P.  Richardsonii  and  P.  longicauda ; 
P.  Cicognanii  and  P.  noveboracensis,  very  nearly)  ;  finally,  that,  contrary 
to  the  belief  of  this  author,  the  short-tailed  species  (P.  Cicognanii  and  P. 
noveboracensis)  have  a  range  to  the  northwards  equal  to  that  of  the  others, 
the  P.  erminea  of  Richardson  being  distinctly  referable  in  its  proportions  to 
P.  Cicognanii. 

Although  differing  radically  with  the  eminent  author  of  the  Report  on 
the  Mammals  of  North  America  in  respect  to  the  number  of  valid  species 
of  this  group  in  America,—  the  only  American  zoologist  who  has  given  it 
special  attention,  — I  can  but  commend  the  candor  he  has  exhibited  in  his 
attempt  to  clear  up  the  discrepancies  of  former  authors,  and  to  sift  the  sub- 
ject of  its  obscurities,  as  well  as  the  manner  in  which  he  has  presented 

his  material. 

An  examination  of  numerous  specimens  from  the  New  England  and 
other  Northern  States  has  shown  me  that  the  variations  in  the  relative 
length  of  the  tail  to  the  body  are  merely  analogous  to  similar  individual 
variations  in  the  squirrels  and  other  small  mammals  that  have  this  part 
considerably  developed,— a  variation  not  always  due  merely  to  the  length- 
ening or  shortening  of  the  vertebral  segments,  but  occasionally  to  an  in- 
creased or  diminished  number  of  the  vertebra?  themselves.  Also,  that  the 
variation  in  size  so  noticeable  in  specimens  from  the  same  locality  is  in 
great  part  sexual,  —  the  males  in  nearly  all  species  of  MusteKdce  being 
considerably  larger  than  the  females,  — but  in  many  cases  to  immatu- 
rity, and  somewhat  also  to  the  natural  individual  range  in  this  respect, 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  llo 

which,  as  in  their  allies,  the  mink  and  marten,  and  in  the  Carnivora  gen- 
erally, is  much  greater  than  in  some  other  groups.  The  differences  in 
color  claimed  now  and  then  as  distinctive  of  different  species  are  generally 
either  such  as  are  evidently  seasonal,  or  such  as,  like  those  of  the  form  and 
proportions  of  the  feet,  etc.,  would  disappear  in  a  large  series.  I  hence  feel 
convinced  of  the  existence  of  but  two  species  of  weasels  in  Northeastern 
North  America,  and  that  these  are  circumpolar,  identical  with  the  P.  vulgaris 
and  P.  ermineus  of  the  Old  World.  These  two  are  always  distinguishable 
with  certainty,  while  their  representatives  do  not  present  a  wider  range  of 
variation  in  size  and  other  characters  than  is  currently  admitted  for  several 
of  their  congeners.  More  than  this  number  being  admitted,  the  whole 
question  as  to  how  many  should  be  recognized,  and  what  constitutes  their 
distinctive  characters,  becomes  involved  in  the  greatest  uncertainty. 

Two  interesting  facts  in  respect  to  color  in  the  weasels  should  not  in 
this  connection  pass  unnoticed.  One  is  that  both  species  generally  become 
white  in  winter ;  apparently  invariably  so  at  the  far  North,  and  usually  so 
as  far  south  as  Northern  New  England,  but  in  Massachusetts  only  the 
larger  one  (P.  ermineus)  thus  changes,  and  this  not  always.  Still  farther 
south  such  a  change  in  P.  ermineus  occurs  only  occasionally,  and  in  the  ex- 
treme southern  portion  of  its  habitat  not  at  all.*  This  whitening  of  the 
pelage  in  winter  corresponds  in  geographical  relation  to  the  white  or  light 
gray  color  seen  in  the  common  wolf  at  the  north,  and  the  gradual  darken- 
ing of  its  color  southward.  The  other  fact  is  the  usual  greater  intensity  of 
the  yellow  on  the  under  parts  in  specimens  from  the  central  portions  of  the 
continent,  —  a  variation  parallel  with  the  rufous  form  of  the  common  wolf  of 
the  same  region,  and  the  comparatively  more  rufous  tint  of  the  pelage 
seen  in  specimens  from  the  same  district  in  most  continentally  distributed 
species. 

Another  fact  in  respect  to  size  is  also  noteworthy,  as  corroborative  of  the 
general  law  of  the  larger  size  of  the  representatives  of  a  species  from  the 
northern  parts  of  its  habitat  than  those  from  the  southern.  The  measure- 
ments given  of  the  length  of  the  body  by  those  authors  who  have  had 
only  southern  specimens  for  examination  is  seven  inches  for  Putorius  vul- 
garis, and  eight  to  ten  inches  for  the  corresponding  measurement  of  Pu- 
torius ermineus,  but  Richardson,  whose  specimens  were  extremely  northern, 
gives  nine  inches  for  the  same  measurement  of  the  former,  and  eleven  and 
twelve  for  that  of  the  latter.f 

*  Respecting  this  seasonal  change  of  color,  compare  the  observations  of  Richardson 
(Fauna  Boreali- Americana),  Audubon  and  Bachman  (Quadrupeds  of  N.  Amer.),  and 
Baird  (Mam.  N.  Amer.). 

t  Professor  Baird,  in  order  to  reconcile  the  identiTication  of  Richardson's  specimens 
with  his  P.  Richardsonii,  supposes  the  body  to  have  been  overstretched,  as  he  says  he 
never  saw  any  American  ermines  that  would  measure  eleven  inches  before  skinning; 


174  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

In  concluding  this  brief  review  of  the  American  weasels  I  will  add  that, 
whether  P.  fremitus  and  P.  xanUtogenys  prove  ultimately  distinct  from 
each  other,  as  they  are  likely  to  from  the  northern  species  (P.  ermineus'),  I 
regret  to  feel  obliged  to  assign  the  P.  Kaneii  Baird  to  the  synonymes  of  P. 
ermineus,  not  less  from  my  regard  for  its  describer  than  for  the  memory 
of  that  admirable  man  its  name  is  so  appropriately  designed  to  com- 
memorate. To  the  same  category  I  think  must  also  be  referred  the  P. 
bocamelus  Bonaparte,  founded  on  the  southern  race  of  this  species  in 
Europe  (Sardinian  specimens),  as  his  P.  Cicognanii  was  on  a  similar 
American  race. 

Since  writing  the  above  I  have  found  that  Dr.  J.  E.  Gray,  of  the  British 
Museum,  has  recently  referred  Pulorius  Kaneii  Baird  to  Mustela  ermim  a 
Linn.,  it  forming  his  "  variety  2,  Kaneii "  of  this  species.*  To  the  same  species 
he  has  also  referred  the  Putorius  noveboracensis  De  Kay,  and  the  Mustela 
Cicognanii  and  M.  longicauda  Bonap.,  he  calling  them  altogether  "  va- 
riety 3,  americana,"  of  ermineus.  Dr.  Gray  adds:  "Dr.  Spencer  Baird,  in 
his  work  on  the  Mammals  of  North  America,  divides  the  stoats  into  six 
species  [P.  Richardsonii,  P.  novcl>oraccnsis,  P.  longicauda,  P.  Cicognanii, 
P.  ermineus,  and  P.  Kaneii],  by  the  length  of  the  tail  and  the  black  on  the 

tail When  the  bodies  of  several  English  stoats  have  been  compared 

they  show  how  deceptive  that  character  is.  I  do  not  say  that  they  may 
not  be  distinct  ;  but  if  they  are,  there  must  be  other  characters  to  separate 
them  besides  the  mere  length  of  the  tail."  He  accordingly  gives  as 
"species  2"  of  the  stoats,  Mustela  Richardsonii,  on  Professor  Baird's 
authority,  and  as  chiefly  distinguished  by  the  upper  lips  and  legs  being 
"  entirely  brown."  He  adds,  "  I  have  not  seen  this  species."  He  further 
observes:  "The  specimen  formerly  named  M.  Richardsonii  [by  Bona- 
parte ?],  in  the  British  Museum,  has  the  hinder  part  of  the  upper  lip 
white,  but  the  hair  is  bent  back  and  lost  off  the  front  part."  In  respect 
to  the  white  on  the  upper  lip,  he  states  that  English  specimens  sometimes 
have  it  reduced  to  a  very  narrow  margin. 

The  American  weasel  (P.  pusillus  auct.)  Dr.  Gray  likewise  considers 
identical  with  the  European  P.  vulgaris.  But  Bonaparte's  Mustela  bo- 
camela  of  Southern  Europe  he  admits  as  a  valid  species,  under  the  sec- 
tion of  weasels,  or  of  species  with  the  "  back  and  tail  uniformly  colored," 
and  extends  its  habitat  to  include  North  Africa  (Algiers  and  Cairo). 
The  correctness  of  this  view  seems  highly  questionable,  since  New  Eng- 
land specimens  of  P.  ermineus  sometimes  have  the  tip  of  the  tail  merely 

forgetting  apparently  for  the  time  being  this  law  of  variation  which  he  was  one  of  the 
first  to  recognize,  and  towards  establishing  which  no  one  else  has  done  so  much. 
*  Proc.  Lond.  Zool.  Soc,  1865. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  17") 

dnskv,  the  black  being  almost  obsolete,  in  which  condition  they  seem  not 
essentially  different  from  the  figure  and  original  description  of  P.  hocamela 
in  the  Fauna  Italica. 

10.  Putorius  lutreolus    Cuv.      (P.  vison  Gappcr  ;    Vison  lutreo- 
cephala  Gray ;  Mustela   lutreola  Linn.)      Mink.     Common. 

I  am  not  prepared  to  admit  Audubon  and  Bachman's  Little  Black  Mink 
(P.  nicjre<cens)  as  distinct  from  the  above.  Specimens  referable  to  this 
supposed  species  are  not  of  uncommon  occurrence.  Mr.  B.  R.  Ross  con- 
siders that  the  P.  nigre.icens  "is  nothing  more  than  the  young  of  the  P. 
vison"*  an  opinion  I  have  also  long  entertained. 

In  this  species  we  again  have  an  animal  of  questioned  identity,  some 
authors  considering  it  the  same  as  the  European  Mustela  lutreola  Linn., 
while  others  maintain  its  distinctness.  But  the  differences  seem  very 
slight,  and  have  generally  been  supposed  to  consist  in  the  front  of  the  upper 
lip  being  white  in  the  European,  while  there  is  no  white  on  that  of  the 
American  ;  in  size,  proportions,  and  general  color,  no  one  claims  that  they 
materially  differ.  This  single  character  is  one  of  great  variability  in  their 
near  allies,  the  ermines,  some  having  the  white  margin  of  the  upper  lip 
very  broad,  while  in  others  it  is  very  narrow  and  occasionally  entirely 
obsolete.  The  other  white  markings  on  the  mink  are  notoriously  variable, 
some  specimens  having  this  color  restricted  to  a  very  narrow  chin  patch,  or 
even  entirely  wanting,  while  in  others  there  are  spots  of  white  on  the  throat 
and  between  the  fore  legs  ;  in  still  others  white  spots  occur  also  along  the 
middle  of  the  abdomen  and  between  the  hind  legs,  forming  an  interrupted 
median  line  of  white  patches.  I  also  feel  confident  that  I  have  seen 
specimens  of  the  American  animal  with  a  white  margin  to  the  upper  lip. 
Experienced  trappers  positively  assure  me  that  such  examples  are  of 
occasional  occurrence.!     Dr.  Gray,  however,  gives  a  second  character  of 

*  Natural  History  Review,  July,  1862,  p.  273  In  a  later  paper  in  the  Canadian  Nat- 
urali>t  and  Geologist  (Vol.  VI,  p.  30),  Mr.  Ross  says  the  P.  nigrescens  of  Audubon  and 
Bach  man  are  "  merely  common  minks  under  three  years  of  age."  He  states  in  another 
place  (1.  c.  p.  29),  "  I  have  remarked  that  the  color  of  this  animal,  as  well  as  that  of  the 
otter  and  beaver,  grows  lighter  as  it  advances  in  years,  and  that  the  white  blotches 
or  spot-  are  of  greater  size  and  more  distinct  in  the  young  than  in  the  old.  The  color 
of  a  young  mink  (under  three  years),  when  killed  in  season,  is  very  handsome;  its  color 
is  often  an  almost  pure  black."  I  have  myself  observed  a  similar  variation  in  color 
with  age  in  the  common  black  rat,  and  in  other  mammals,  as  well  as  in  many  birds. 

I  Since  writing  the  above  I  find  Mr.  Ross  says,  in  referring  to  Professor  Baird's  re- 
mark that  the  American  mink  never  has  the  edge  of  the  upper  lip  white,  "  I  have  never 
seen  the  whole  of  that  part  so  colored,  but  iu  one  specimen  now  on  my  table  there  is  a 
white  spot  beneath  the  ncstril." 


176  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

distinction  between  the  American  and  European  animals,  —  a  difference 
in  the  size  of  the  upper  tubercular  tooth,  —  the  value  or  constancy  of  which 
T  have  at  present  no  means  of  determining. 

Of  the  American  animal  Dr.  Gray  makes  three  "  varieties."  The  first  is 
dark,  with  unspotted  throat  and  chest,  whose  habitat  lie  gives  as  "  Van- 
couver's Island  *';  but  it  also  occurs  in  Massachusetts,  Michigan,  and  Illi- 
nois, as  I  have  myself  observed,  and  probably  throughout  the  habitat  of  the 
species.  The  second  is  characterized  simply  as  having  the  "chin  entirely 
brown,"  while  the  third  is  Audubon  and  Bachman's  P.  nigrescens.  No 
special  habitat  is  given  for  the  last  two.  Neither  of  them,  however,  is  a 
permanent  variety.  In  the  general  color,  as  well  as  in  the  white  spots, 
there  is  a  wide  variation,  different  specimens  varying  from  pale  brown  to 
quite  intense  black.  There  is  also  an  extensive  variation  in  size,  but  as 
very  large  and  very  small  individuals  occur  in  each  stage  of  color  it  is  very 
difncult  to  consider  any  of  these  variations  as  other  than  individual,  or  such 
as  are  evidently  to  be  referred  to  season,  sex,  or  a^e. 

Numerous  supposed  species  of  the  Old  World  mink  have  also  been  char- 
acterized, chiefly  from  the  warmer  regions,  five  of  which  are  recognized  as 
valid  by  Dr.  Gray.  The  first  of  these  is  the  common  M.  lutreola  of  Linnseus, 
the  habitat  of  which  is  given  as  "  Europe."  The  second  is  the  M.  siberica  of 
Pallas,  which  Dr.  Gray  says  is  paler  and  smaller  than  M.  lutreola,  with  the 
tail  relatively  longer  and  the  end  paler  colored,  or  like  the  back,  instead  of 
darker  than  the  back.*  He  observes  that  it  "  varies  greatly  in  the  quantity 
of  white  on  the  chin  and  throat,"  and  adds  that  the  "  males  are  m 
The  last  statement,  if  true,  indicates  a  remarkable  exception  to  the  sexual 
law  of  variation  in  size  in  this  family.  The  habitat  is  given  as  Siberia, 
Himalaya,  Japan,  China,  and  Formosa.  Dr.  Gray's  third  species  is  the 
Mustela  canigula  of  Hodgson,  originally  described  from  specimens  from 
the  Nepaul  Hills  of  India.  Its  chief  distinction  seems  to  be  an  unusual 
amount  of  white  on  the  face,  chin,  throat,  neck,  and  chest,  although  Gray 
mentions  as  a  variety  a  specimen  with  darker  fur  and  much  less  white. 
His  fourth  species,  Mustela  (Visori)  Horajieldii  Gray,  seems  not  to  differ 
particularly  from  the  others,  or  from  frequent,  American  specimens,  as  its 
"  variety  two  "  is  characterized  as  "chin  brown,  edge  of  under  lip  only 
white."  This  is  likewise  from  India  (Bootan)  and  .Japan.  The  fifth,  from 
Nepaul,  the  Putorius  subhemachalna  of  Hodgson,  differs  from  the  preceding 
in  being  generally  lighter  or  redder,  —  in  other  words,  having  less  in- 
tensity of  color, —  with  minor  differences  in  the  amount  and  distribution 
of  the  white.  If  all  these  species  are  valid,  it  will  be  seen  that  Southern 
and    Eastern    Asa    and    Japan    are    peculiarly    rich    in    species    of   this 

*  The  relative  shade  of  color  of  the  tip  of  the  tail  a*  compared  with  the  back  is  a 
character  too  inconstant  in  this  group  to  merit  serious  mention. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  177 

group.*  But,  in  view  of  the  well-known  similar  variations  presented  by  our 
American  mink,  they  seem  to  rest  on  very  unsatisfactory  distinctions,  es- 
pecially as  the  '"  varieties"  admitted  under  some  of  them  cover  the  differences 
considered  as  distinctive  of  the  different  species.  The  general  paler  color 
and  somewhat  smaller  size  of  the  southern  forms  f  is  paralleled  by  similar 
differences  in  specimens  of  the  American  animal  from  the  southern  portion 
of  its  habitat.  In  view  of  all  these  facts,  I  strongly  incline  to  the  opinion 
that  we  have  here  again  but  one  circumpolar  and  widely  dispersed  species, 
with  possibly  two  continental  or  geographical  races  that  may  be  more  or 
less  easily  recognized.  Else,  as  in  similar  cases  previously  discussed,  we 
must  admit  an  indefinite  number,  subject  in  this  respect  and  in  their 
limitation  to  the  caprice  of  those  authors  whose  forte  is  in  the  description 
of  "  supposed  new  species."  J 

11.  Gulo   luscus    Sabine.     Wolverine.     Dr.  De  Kay,  in  his 

*  It  is  a  fact  especially  noteworthy  that  regions  whose  Natural  History  is  considered 
as  but  partially  explored  are  far  richer  in  species  (I  refer  more  especially  to  mammals 
and  bird?),  accepting  only  such  as  are  currently  allowed,  than  those  much  longer  and 
more  familiarly  known.  To  be  assured  of  this  one  needs  but  to  compare  Southern  and 
Mi  Idle  Europe  with  the  corresponding  parts  of  Asia,  or  Eastern  and  Northern  America 
with  Mexico  and  Central  America,  adopting  as  a  basis  for  the  comparison  only  those 
types  or  groups  widely  distributed.  This  fact  is  especially  illustrated  in  the  Carnivora, 
as  the  present  family  of  Mustelidas  exemplifies.  While  distinct  types  appear  in  different 
regions,  as  some  in  the  warmer  latitudes  that  are  not  found  in  the  colder,  and  vice  versa, 
the  martens  and  sables,  as  well  as  the  minks,  under  not  very  different  physical  con- 
ditions, far  outnumber  in  Eastern  Asia  alone,  in  reputed  species,  their  representatives  in 
Europe.  While  I  would  not  deny  the  possibility  of  this  being  a  fact,  the  intimate  rela- 
tionship which  these  several  supposed  species  bear  to  each  other,  as  well  as  to  the  Euro- 
pean, and  the  unsatisfactory  distinctions  on  which  they  are  founded,  seem  to  render  it 
extremely  improbable.  If  we  extend  the  comparison  to  other  groups,  and  to  other 
regions,  we  constantly  meet  with  cases  parallel  in  all  respects  to  this.  This  excess 
of  species  also  almost  always  happens,  in  mammals,  among  those  least  known,  either 
through  their  great  scarcity  or  their  nocturnal  or  recluse  habits  rendering  them  diffi- 
cult to  obtain.  The  explanation  of  this  seems  to  be  that  new  species  are  not  antici- 
pated to  occur  in  a  region  that  has  been  for  a  long  time  thoroughly  explored,  while 
specimens  from  imperfectly  known  districts,  or  of  species  in  groups  where  the  species 
are  supposed  to  be  difficult  to  distinguish,  are  most  critically  examined,  and  those 
differing  slightly  from  others  previously  described  —  though  not  more,  in  many  cases, 
than  specimens  unquestionably  of  the  same  species  and  obtained  at  the  same  locality 
frequently  do — are  presumed  to  represent  undescribed  species. 

f  See  Gray's  table  of  comparative  measurements  of  the  skulls  of  his  several  species 
Proc.  Lond.  Zool.  Soc,  1865,  p.  118. 

I  In  the  mink,  as  in  the  marten,  it  is  an  interesting  fact  that  the  Asiatic  specimens 
bear  a  stronger  resemblance  to  the   American   than   the  European  do.     According  to 
authors,  specimens  not  unfrequently  occur  in  Japan  and  portions  of  Eastern  Asia  that 
are  hardly  distinguishable  from  average  American  ones. 
23 


178  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Report  on  the  Mammalia  of  New  York,  published  in  18-12  (p.  28),  says  : 
"  Professor  Emmons  states  that  they  still  exist  in  the  Hoosac  Moun- 
tains, Massachusetts."  But  the  species  is  not  given  in  Emmons's  lie- 
port,  published  two  years  before;  it  occurs,  however,  in  Dr.  Hitch- 
cock's List,  with  the  following  note:  "On  Hoosac  Mts. ;  rare. — 
Emmons."  It  is  more  or  less  common  from  Northern  New  England 
to  the  Arctic  coast. 

This  species  is  remarkable  for  being  the  only  one  in  the  Mammalian 
Fauna  of  the  State  usually  regarded  as  common  to  both  the  Eastern  and 
Western  Hemispheres.  The  existence  in  all  together  of  but  two  or  three 
circumpolar  species  of  land  mammals  is  admitted  by  many  naturalists. 
It  must  also  present  an  unusual  constancy  of  character,  since  not  only 
has  it  escaped  subdivision  into  pseudo-species,  but  even  no  "varieties" 
have  been  generally  recognized. 

12.  Lutra  canadensis  Sabine.  (Latax  canadensis  Gray  ;  Lutra 
canadensis  and  L.  destructor  Barnston.*)  Otter.  Not  rare  ;  still  not 
often  captured.  At  Springfield  I  have  known  some  half-dozen  speci- 
mens taken  in  the  last  ten  years. 

13.  Mephitis  mephitica  Baird.  (M.  chinga  Tiedemann  ;  M. 
various  Gray ;  M.  mesomelas  and  M.  chinga  Maximilian.)  Skunk. 
Abundant.  Individuals  from  the  same  locality,  and  even  from  the 
same  litter,  are  very  variable  in  color,  some  being  almost  entirely  black, 
while  others  have  a  very  large  proportion  of  white.  The  amount  of 
baldness  on  the  soles  of  the  feet  is  also  very  variable,  independently 
of  season  or  age,  although  this  has  been  deemed  by  some  naturalists,  as 
Lichtenstein  and  others,  as  a  character  of  great  importance.  Attention 
has  been  previously  called  to  its  inconstancy  .f 

Probably  no  other  North  American  mammal  is  so  strikingly  variable  in 
color  as  the  common  skunk  ;  it  is  hence  not  surprising  that  foreign  natu- 
ralists, unacquainted  with  the  animal  in  life,  have  made  of  it  a  considerable 
number  of  supposed  species.  So  well  known  is  this  variability  to  most 
persons  at  all  familiar  with  the  animal  that  it  is  all  the  more  unexpected 
to  find  from  a  naturalist  so  justly  reputed  for  accuracy  as  the  author  of  the 
Report  on  the  Mammals  of  North  America  a  statement  like  the  following: 
"  This  species  varies  considerably  in  its  markings,  though  individuals  from 
the  same  locality  arc  usually  (juite  similar."  X     Especially  is  this  so  after  the 

*  Canadian  Naturalist  and  Geologist,  April,  1863,  p.  147. 

t  See  Dr.  J.  E.  Gray's  Review  of  the  Mustelida;,  Pvoc.  Loud.  Zool.  Soc,  1865,  p.  147. 

t  Mam.  N.  Amer.,  p.  195. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  179 

detailed  account  given  by  Audubon  and  Bachman  of  very  wide  differences 
in  color  between  individuals  of  the  same  litter.*  The  majority  of  the  Mas- 
sachusetts specimens  I  have  seen  accord  very  well  with  Professor  Baird's 
diagnosis,  the  general  color  being  black,  with  a  narrow  white  streak  down 
the  face,  a  large  white  nuchal  patch,  and  a  broad  white  streak  on  each 
side  of  the  back  reaching  commonly  nearly  to  the  tail,  which  is  tipped 
with  the  same  color.  Sometimes  the  face  streak  is  united  with  the  nuchal 
patch,  but  oftener  it  is  separated  by  a  narrow  space  of  black,  and  is  oc- 
casionally absent.  The  dorsal  streaks  vary  in  breadth  and  posterior  extent, 
generally  enclosing  a  narrow  band  of  black  ;  but  the  latter  is  sometimes 
wanting,  when  they,  uniting  along  the  median  line,  form  but  one  ;  they  run 
nearly  parallel  or  widely  diverge  posteriorly,  where  frequently  each  is  deeply 
bifid  ;  more  frequently  than  otherwise  they  entirely  cease  near  the  loins. 
The  nuchal  patch  also  varies  in  form  and  extent ;  generally  it  is  contin- 
uous with  the  dorsal  streaks,  but  is  often  entirely  separate  from  them,  and 
is  itself  sometimes  divided,  forming  two  small  lateral  patches ;  its  general 
outline  is  variable  almost  beyond  description.  The  white  on  the  tail  is 
sometimes  terminal  and  sometimes  basal ;  now  and  then  it  is  quite  absent, 
but  occasionally  it  preponderates  over  the  black.  The  distinct  terminal 
pencil  of  long  white  hairs  in  the  tail,  so  often  described,  seems  generally 
best  defined  in  young  specimens  ;  in  full-grown  ones  it  is  frequently  absent. 
Individuals  occasionally  occur  that  are  either  entirely,  or  almost  entirely, 
black  ;  much  more  rarely  others  with  nearly  the  whole  of  the  dorsal  sur- 
face white,  as  in  a  specimen  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology, 
collected  in  Newton,  Mass.,  by  Mr.  C.  J.  Maynard.  This  has  the  black 
restricted  to  a  narrow  dorsal  line,  a  few  scattering  hairs  in  the  tail  and 
to  the  lower  surface  of  the  body,  the  white  dorsal  band  being  nearly  two 
inches  broad  on  the  neck  and  seven  at  the  loins.  Mr.  Maynard  has 
another  specimen,  taken  at  the  same  locality,  which  has  still  more  white, 
there  being  no  black  median  line,  and  the  white  extends  still  lower  on  the 
sides  of  the  body.  In  short,  the  variations  in  color  in  the  skunks  are 
almost  endless,  scarcely  any  two  specimens  being  quite  alike.  It  therefore 
seems  preposterous  to  found  species  on  particular  styles  of  coloring,  or  on 
the  relative  proportion  and  distribution  of  white  and  black,  as  several 
authors  have  done. 

Eight  species  were  described  by  Lichtenstein  in  his  monograph  of 
the  genus  Mephitis);  from  Mexico  and  the  United  States  alone,  while  from 
North  and  South  America  together  he  gave  sixteen  !  Professor  Baird 
recognized  six   in   his   Report,    and  mentions  three  others  described  by 

*  Quad.  N.  Amer.,  Vol.  I.  p.  319. 

t  Ueber  die  Gattung  Mephitis,  Afhand.  Akad.  Wiss.,  Berlin,  for  1836,  1833,  pp.  249- 
315,  and  2  plates. 


180  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Lichtenstein  from  Mexico  as  probably  valid  and  also  likely  to  occur  in 
the  United  States.  Dr.  Gray*  has  very  judiciously  reduced  the  number 
to  five,  including  those  of  both  North  and  South  America,  but  lie  places 
them  in  what  he  considers  three  genera, —  Conepatus  (ls.">7,  nearly  equal 
to  Thiosmus  Lichtenstein,  of  subsequent  date).  Mephitis,  and  Spilogale. 
He  gives  all  as  occurring  in  North  America.  To  the  first,  Covepatus 
nasutus  Gray  (M.  nasuta  of  Bennett  f),  he  refers,  and  it  appears  to  me  very 
properly,  the  M.  leuconota  and  M.  mesoli  uca  of  Lichtenstein  and  Baird,  and 
numerous  other  species  of  other  authors,  thus  greatly  reducing  the  number 
previously  received.  He  separates  it,  however,  into  four  "  varieties,"  which 
are  based  on  the  distribution  of  the  colors,  although  they  seem  to  be  about  as 
uncertain  in  extent  and  relative  proportion  in  this  species  as  in  the  more 
northern  one.  Of  Mephitis  proper  Gray  gives  three  species,  two  of  which 
(.1/.  vittata  Licht.  and  M.  mexicana  Gray,  =  M.  macroura  Licht.)  are  from 
Mexico,  and  the  other  (M.  variuns  Gray,  =  .1/.  mephilica  Laird,  =  .1/.  chinga 
Tiedemann)  is  generally  distributed  over  North  America,  from  Great  Slave 
Lake  J  southwards  ;  of  Conepalus  and  Spilogale  one  each.  It  is  highly  prob- 
able, however,  that  Mexico  is  not  thus  pre-eminently  rich  in  cpecies  of 
these  animals,  and  that  Gray's  two  Mexican  species  may  be  referred  to 
the  common  North  American  one,  since  they  rest  almost  solely  on  distinc- 
tions of  color  that  are  far  from  peculiar  to  the  Mexican  examples.  This 
being  true,  we  have  three  supposed  genera  containing  a  single  species 
each,  or.  what  seems  to  me  more  probable,  the  alleged  differences  being 
slight,  a  single  genus  with  three  species,  which  agree  rather  closely  in  their 
general  style  of  coloring  and  in  possessing  a  remarkably  large  range  of 
indefinite  color  variation.  In  distribution,  one  (.1/.  mephilica)  is  northern, 
ranging  from  Mexico  almost  to  the  Arctic  regions,  and  the  others  (.If. 
mesoleuca,=  Conepatus  nasutus  Gray,  and  M.  bicolor)  southern,  inhabiting 
from  Mexico  and  the  Southern  States  to  Patagonia. 

Our  common  species  (M-  mephitica  Baird)  Dr.  Gray  divides  into  five 
'"varieties."  based  on  the  relative  extent  of  the  white  dorsal  streaks,  which 
form  among  themselves  a  graduated  series.  The  inconstant  nature  of  the 
characters  assigned  to  these  as  distinctive  it  seems  to  me  renders  tbem 
unworthy  of  recognition,  since  they  not  only  all  occur  at  single  local- 
ities, but,  as  Audubon  has  shown,  §  several  of  them  sometimes  appear  in  the 

*  Proc.  bond.  Zobl.  Soc,  1865,  pp.  145  el  seq. 

t  Ibid.,  is,33,  p.  29. 

}   I',.  B.  Ross,  1.  c,  p.  273. 

§  "In  the  winter  of  1844  we  caused  a  burrow  to  be  opened  in  Rensselaer  County, 
N.  Y., which  we  knew  contained  a  large  family  of  this  We  found  eleven;  they 

were  all  full  grown,  but  on  examining  their  teeth  and  claws  we  conclu  led  that  the  fam- 
ily was  composed  of  a  pair  of  old  ones,  with  their  large  brood  "I"  young  of  the  previous 
season.     The  male  had  a  white  stripe  on  the  forehead;  and  from  the  occiput  down  tho 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  181 

same  litter.  Most  of  these  pseudo-varieties  and  others  of  a  similar  charac- 
ter have  been  described  by  authors  as  distinct  species.  Prince  Maximilian 
in  his  latest  work  *  still  maintained  the  existence  of  two  species,  .1/. 
mesomelas  Licht  and  M.  chinga  Tiedem.,  in  the  United  States.  The  latter 
(M.  chinga)  he  seems  to  have  known  only  from  imperfect  skins  brought  by 
the  Indians  of  the  Upper  Missouri  from,  as  he  presumed,  the  Red  River 
of  the  North  and  the  Saskatchewan.  They  were  used  by  them  as  trap- 
pings for  the  legs,  and  were  all  very  white,  differing  only  in  this  respect 
from  the  common  skunk.  As  specimens  similarly  colored  occur  more 
or  less  frequently  throughout  the  United  States,  it  seems  more  probable 
that  the  Indians  may  have  selected  skins  of  this  color  for  the  special  use 
to  which  we  are  informed  they  applied  them  than  that  the  skunks  of  any 
given  region  are  generally  so  colored. 

"Without  going  into  the  synonymy  of  the  subject  in  detail,  I  may  add 
that  for  the  common  North  American  species  Dr.  Gray  strangely  adopts  the 
specific  name  of  varians  (M.  variant  Gray,  1837),  this  name  being  super- 
seded in  priority  by  both  chinga  of  Tiedemann  (1808)  and  americana  of 
Sabine  (1823),  as  well  by  mephitica  of  Shaw  (Vivera  mephitica,  1792). 
This  latter  being  the  one  first  given,  has  very  properly  been  adopted  by 
Professor  Baird. 

trasmas. 

14.   Procyon   lotor  Stork.!     Raccoon.     Formerly  numerous, 

whole  of  the  back  had  another  white  stripe  four  inches  in  breadth;  its  tail  was  also 
white.  The  female  had  no  white  stripe  on  the  forehead,  but  had  a  longitudinal  stripe 
on  each  side  of  the  back,  and  a  very  narrow  one  on  the  dorsal  line;  the  tail  was  wholly 
black.  The  young  differed  very  widely  in  color;  we  could  not  find  two  exactly  alike: 
some  were  in  part  of  the  color  of  the  male,  others  were  more  like  the  female,  whilst  the 
largest  proportion  were  intermediate  in  their  marking-,  and  some  seemed  to  resemble 
neither  parent.  We  recollect  one  that  had  not  a  white  hair  except  the  tip  of  the  tail 
and  a  minute  dorsal  line."  —  Audubon  and  Bachman,  Quadrupeds,  Vol.  I,  p.  319.  See 
also  the  two  young  figured  by  these  authors  (Plate  42).  one  of  which  has  wdiite  stripe* 
on  the  back  and  a  black  tail,  and  the  other  no  stripes  and  the  end  of  the  tail  white, 
though  both  were  of  the  same  litter.  I  have  myself  met  with  similar  variation  in  the 
same  litter  of  young. 

*  Verzeichniss  Xordamerikanischer  Sau<;ethiere,  Avchiv  fur  Xaturg.,  XVII,  2,  p.  218. 
t  Ursus  lotor  Lixx.kus,  Syst.  Nat.,  1,  175S,  48,  lb.,  I,  1766,  70. 
Procyon  lotor  Stork,  Bod.  Meth.  Anim.,  1780. 

"        Hemandezii  Wagler,  Isis,  XXIV,  1831,  514. 

"  "  Baird,  N.  Am.  Main.,  1857,  212. 

"  "  Is.,  U.  S.  &  Mex.  Bound.  Surv.,  II,  Mam.,  1859,  22. 

"  "  var.  mexicana  Baird,  lb.,  22. 

"         lotor,  var.  mcxirann  St.  HiL.viKE,Voyage  de  la  Venus,  Zobl.,  I,  1855,  25,  pi. VI. 

"        nivea  Ghay,  Charlesw.  Mag.  Xat.  Hist.,  I,  1837,  580. 

"       psora  Ib.,  Ann.  &  Mag.  Xat.  Hist.,  X,  1842,  261. 


182  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

and  still  more  or  less  common  in  the  mountainous  and  sparsely  settled 
parts  of  the  State. 

Quite  variable  in  color,  the  variations  on  the  one  hand  tending  strongly 
towards  melanism  and  on  the  other  towards  albinism.  On  specimens  pre- 
senting the  latter  kind  of  variation  seems  to  have  been  founded  the  Procyon 
nivea  of  Gray  from  Texas,*  as  probably  also  the  P.  psora  of  Gray  f  from 
California.  %  With  the  variations  in  the  general  tint  the  markings  usually 
become  more  or  less  indistinct.  In  even  what  may  be  considered  as  the 
normal  or  average  type  the  dark  rings  of  the  tail  vary  from  four  to  six 
in  number,  in  intensity  of  color,  and  in  relative  breadth  to  the  interspaces; 
sometimes  the  dark  rings  are  only  about  half  the  width  of  the  intervening 
lighter  ones,  but,  as  I  have  observed  to  be  the  case  in  numerous  specimens 
killed  in  Massachusetts,  Western  New  York,  and  Florida,  they  often  equal, 
and  not  unfrequently  exceed  them.  The  tail  varies  also  in  its  form  and  size, 
as  it  does  in  the  foxes  and  marmots,  sometimes  tapering  considerably  to- 
wards the  tip,  though  generally  but  slightly.  Yet  these  characters  have 
been  assumed  by  some  authors  to  be  indicative  of  specific  differences,  the 
Procyon  Hernandezii  of  Wagler§  having  been  founded  originally  on  such 
slight  variations.  Professor  Baird,  however,  has  gone  quite  fully  into  a  dis- 
cussion of  its  merits  as  a  species,  |]  but  the  distinctions  he  particularly  men- 
tions as  separating  it  from  P.  lolor  —  the  more  tapering  form  of  the  tail, 
the  rings  of  which  he  deems  "  narrower  and  better  defined,"  with  "  the  light 
intervals  wider,"  and  a  "  nearly  constant  difference  in  the  color  of  the 
upper  surface  of  the  hind  feet,"  which  he  says  is  darker  in  P.  Her- 
nandezii—  are  so  slight,  and  based  withal  on  characters  so  exceedingly 
liable  to  variation,  that  they  can  scarcely  be  considered  as  of  specific 
value.  Though  apparently  of  somewhat  larger  size  the  relatively  largei 
and  stouter  feet  claimed  by  him  to  distinguish  P.  Hernandezii  his  meas- 
urements seem  to  scarcely  sustain.  lie  admits  that  P.  Hernandezii 
bears  a  very  close  relationship  to  the  /'.  lolor,  and  says  that  "  without 
close  comparison  the  differences  are  perhaps  intangible,"  and  that  "  its 
characteristics  are  more  comparative  than  absolute."  Still  " an  examina- 
tion of  a  large  number  of  North  American  raccoons,"  he  affirms,  "  has 
resulted  in  the  appreciation  of  certain  differences  which  appear  quite 
constant."     They  arc  those  above   specified,   and,  as  I  have  already  ob- 

*  Charlesworth's  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  1,1837,  p.  580. 
t   Ann.  ami  Mag.  Nat.  Hist  ,  Vol.  X,  1842,  p.  207. 

I   In  his  recent  revision  of  tlie  "  Ursine  Animals,"  Dr.  Gray  has  referred  both  these  to 
the  P.  lolor.     See  Proc.  Lond.  Zool.  Soc,  1SG4,  p.  G84. 
$  Isis,  XXIV,  1881,  p.  514. 
H  See  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  213,  and  Mex.  Bound.  Survey,  Vol.  II,  Mammals,  p.  22. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  183 

served,  are  very  slight,  anil  pertain  to  the  most  variable  parts  of  the 
animal.  Some  of  them  I  feel  sure  are  but  individual  differences,  de- 
pending mainly,  especially  those  in  respect  to  the  form  of  the  tail,  on  age 
or  season.  In  respect  to  the  black  annuli,  hardly  two  specimens  can  be 
found  that  do  not  vary  more  or  less.  In  the  large  series  of  New  Eng- 
land specimens  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  the  variation  be- 
tween the  extremes  in  this  respect  covers  the  whole  range  of  the  differences 
assumed  to  distinguish  the  two  supposed  species.  The  single  authentic 
specimen  of  P.  Hernandezii,  labelled  apparently  by  Professor  Baird  himself, 
that  I  have  seen*  is  not  appreciably  different  in  general  color  from  many 
Massachusetts  specimens.  The  supposed  differences,  it  seems  to  me,  are 
hence  reduced  to  the  single  one  of  absolute  size,  which  a  large  number  of 
specimens  of  the  so-called  P.  Hernandezii,  from  different  localities,  might 
very  considerably  modify.  From  a  comparison  of  authorities,  as  will  be 
seen  from  the  remarks  that  follow,  this  seems  to  be  indeed  the  fact.  The 
example  of  P.  Hernandt  zii  above  referred  to  (No.  07,  Smithsonian  Cat.  I, 
from  Bodega,  California,  is  actually  smaller  than  the  average  of  New  Eng- 
land specimens. 

Professor  Baird  remarks  that  some  of  the  characters  of  P.  Hernandt  :ii 
given  by  Wagler  and  Wiegmann,  as  the  prevailing  color  of  the  back  and 
sides  differed  from  specimens  he  referred  to  it ;  in  other  words,  they  were, 
more  like  his  P.  lotor.  St.  Ililaire,  in  the  Zoology  of  the  Voyage  of 
the  Venus,  f  also  described  and  figured  a  specimen  from  Mazatlan  that 
varied  similaily  from  P.  Hernandezii  Baird,  it  being  smaller  and  colored 
more  like  P.  lotor.  Under  Proci/on  Hernandezii  var.  mexicana,  Baird 
describes  a  single  skin  brought  by  the  Boundary  Commissioners  from 
Espia,  Sonora,  that  he  says  agrees  with  St.  Hilaire's  Mazntlan  speci- 
men (already  referred  to),  which  St.  Ililaire  considered  to  differ  in  noth- 
ing but  in  intensity  of  color  from  the  common  P.  lotor.  Professor  Baird 
remarks  that  this  Espia  specimen  exhibits  a  close  relationship  to  P.  lotor, 
though  readily  distinguishable  from  it.  he  claim*,  by  its  "  larger  and  more 
naked  feet  and  hands."  These  specimens,  in  resembling  P.  lotor  more  than 
some  others  from  the  same  region  referred  to  P.  Hernandezii,  show  still 
more  fully  the  inconstancy  of  some  of  the  characters  on  which  the  latter  is 
founded.  In  habits  the  two  supposed  species  have  not  been  found  to 
differ.  J     Hence,  unless  the  more  southern  J',  cancrivorus  occurs  in  Cali- 

*  Contained  in  the  Museum  of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History,  and  received 
from  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 

t   Vol.  I,  1855,  p.  25,  pi.  VI. 

I   Professor  Baird  observes:  "  According  to  Dr.  Berlandicr,  the  habits  of  tin-  cp 
[/'.  Ilernamlezii]  are  precisely  similar  to  those  of  the  common   raccoon."     Dr.   C    !'. 
Fiennerly's  notes  are  al-o  of  the  same  purport. — Report  on  the    '.'  ftlie  Uniud 

s  and  Mexican  Boundary  Survey,  p.  22. 


184  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

fornia,  as  supposed  by  Audubon  and  Bachman,  T  sec  no  reason  why,  in 
view  of  the  known  variability  of  I',  lotor  in  the  Eastern  States  and  the 
relatively  small  differences  only  thus  far  pointed  out  between  them  and 
their  Western  relatives,  all  the  raccoons  of  the  United  States  thus  far 
known  should  not  be  referred  to  P.  lotor.* 

15.  Ursus  arctos  Linx.-eus.  (U.  americanus  Pallas.)  Black 
Beak.  Extinct  in  the  more  thickly  settled  parts  of  the  State  ;  oc- 
casional among  the  mountains  of  the  western  counties. 

In  respect  to  the  occurrence  of  this  species  in  this  State,  Dr.  Emmons 
remarked  in  18-10:  "It  is  not  many  years  since  great  numbers  appeared 
there  [on  the  Hoosac  Mountain  range]  at  once,  and  between  twenty 
and  thirty  were  taken  in  the  course  of  one  autumn,  on  the  mountains 
in  Adams  and  Williamstown.  They  are  still  to  be  found,  and  several 
have  been  taken  every  year  since."  (Rep.,  p.  24.)  The  local  news- 
papers yet  frequently  chronicle  their  capture  in  Berkshire  County. 

Contrary  to  what  was  formerly  supposed,  bears  everywhere  appear  to  be 
among  the  most  variable  of  mammiferous  animals,  not  only  in  coloration, 
but  in  size,  proportions,  and  in  the  conformatimi  of  the  skull  and  other 
parts  of  the  skeleton.  Those  familiar  with  them  in  life  say  it  is  rare  to 
find  two  alike.  A  writer  in  the  American  Naturalist  f  has  alluded  to  two 
females  of  the  same  litter,  captured  by  him  in  Maine  when  young  and  raised 
as  pets,  that  differed  so  essentially  in  their  general  build  as  to  correspond 
respecfivplv  with  what  has  been  termed  "  ranger  bear  "  and  "  hog  bear," 
they  differing  also  as  much  in  disposition  as  in  form.  1  am  also  informed 
by  mv  friend  Mr.  C.  W.  Bennett  that  he  has  known  two  cubs  of  the  same 
litter,  taken  in  one  of  the  Western  States,  that  as  they  grew  up  differed 
very  materially  from  each  other  in  color,  one  being  black  and  the  other 
brown.  They  differed  also  widely  in  form  and  disposition,  one  being  docile 
and  playful  while  the  other  was  ferocious  and  dangerous.  The  leading  va- 
rieties in  color  of  the  American  and   European  bears,  as  the  brown  and  the 

*  This  is  also  the  view  now  taken  by  Dr.  Gray,  who  remarks  respecting  /'.  /  (or  us 
follows:  "  This  species  varies  rather  in  the  tint  of  its  colors  in  the  different  parts  of  North 
America  It  is  very  apt  to  become  white,  and  is  thus  the  /'.  ocij  ■•■  nan  »  (Gray,  Mag. 
Nat.  Hist.,  ls:,7,  p,  580)  from  Texas;  I  described  n  specimen  from  California,  with  the 
tail  imperfect,  as  /'.  psora  (Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1S42);  and  Wiegmann  described 
two  other  varieties  under  the  names  of  P.  bi-achyurus  and  /'.  obscurus  (Arch.  Ill,  369). 
Dr  I'.aird,  in   the  Mammals  of  North  Ami  iders   P.   Hernandezii   as  a  species, 

.IN  it  the  Black-footed  Procyon,  including  P.  psora,  which  has  feet  as  pale  or  jialer 
than  P.  lotor."  —  Proc.  fond.  Zobl.  Sue,  1S64. 

t    Vol.  1,  p.  657. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  185 

black  bears  are  now  generally  deemed  to  be  but  varieties  and  not  species, 
though  so  regarded  by  Cuvier  and  the  earlier  naturalists  generally. 
Great  variations  in  the  form  of  the  skull  in  individuals  from  the  same 
locality  not  unfrequently  occur,  aside  from  the  differences  caused  by  ag^ 
and  sex.  Professor  Baird  mentions  a  skull  from  Saranao  Lake,  New- 
York,  -which  differs  very  appreciably  from  the  ordinary  type,  agreeing 
quite  nearly  in  some  respects  with  the  Ursus  arctos  of  Europe.  Concern- 
intr  this  specimen  he  remarks  :  "  A  large  number  of  specimens  from  this 
locality  may  perhaps  furnish  a  clew  to  this  remarkable  variation,  which, 
under  other  circumstances,  would  be  readily  allowed  as  indicating  a  dis- 
tinct speeus."*  I  some  time  since  began  to  consider  many  of  the  so-called 
specific  characters  drawn  from  the  skull  as  of  very  doubtful  value,  from  the 
wide  range  of  variation  any  considerable  series  of  specimens  from  the 
same  locality,  and  unquestionably  of  the  same  species,  usually  exhibit, 
aside  from  those  arising  from  differences  of  age  and  sex.  In  the  foxes  and 
wolves,  the  common  bear,  the  different  species  of  Mustclidce,  and  the  larger 
rodents,  such  differences  are  often  very  considerable.  On  this  point  I  find 
the  following  concurrent  testimony  from  an  author  little  liable  to  the  charge 
of  conservatism  in  respect  to  the  multiplication  of  specie3  or  other  groups. 
Dr.  J.  E.  Gray,  of  the  British  Museum,  in  his  recent  monograph  of  the 
bears,  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  London  Zoological  Society,  f  thus  calls 
attention  to  the  subject.  "  The  examination  of  the  series  of  skulls  of 
bears  in  the  [British]  Museum,  like  t'le  examination  of  the  series  of  bones 
of  the  Viverridce,  has  strongly  impressed  me  with  the  uncertainty  that 
must  always  attend  the  determination  of  fossil  bones,  or  indeed  of  bones  of 
all  animals,  when  we  have  only  the  skulls  or  other  bones  to  compare  with 
each  other.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  study  and  comparison  of  the 
bones  of  the  different  species  is  very  important,  —  that  the  skull  and  teeth 
afford  some  of  the  best  characters  for  the  distinction  of  genera  and  species; 
but  few  zoologists  and  palaeontologists  have  made  sufficient  allowance  for 
the  variations  that  the  bones  of  the  same  species  assume.  In  the  bears,  I 
have  observed  that  there  is  often  more  difference  in  skulls  of  bears  of  the 
same  species  from  the  same  locality  than  between  the  skulls  of  two  un- 
doubted species  from  very  different  habitats  and  with  very  different  habits. 
Thus  I  have  the  skulls  of  some  bears  the  habitat  of  which  is  not  certainly 
known,  which  I  have  doubts  whether  they  should  be  referred  to  the  Thibet 
Bear  (U.  torquatus),  or  to  the  North  American  species  (U.  americanns), 
but  I  have  referred  them  to  the  latter,  as  they  were  said  to  have  come  from 
that  country.  It  is  the  same  with  regard  to  the  skull  of  a  bear  that  lived 
in  the  Zoological  Gardens  for  years,  which  has  the  general  form  of  the 
skull  and  the  wide  palate  of  the  European  bear,  but  the  long  last  grinder 

*  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  227.  t  1S64,  p.  6S4. 

24 


186  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

and  some  other  characters  of  the  U.  ft  vox.  This  similarity  of  skulls,"  he 
says,  "  is  the  more  remarkable,  as  no  two  bears  can  be  more  distinct  from 
each  other  than  the  species  above  named,*  which  have  such  similar  skulls, 
showing  that  similar  skulls  do  not  always  imply  very  nearly  allied  or 
doubtfully  distinct   species." 

The   bears  have   ever  been  a  perplexing  group,  and  accordingly  the 
opinions  advanced  by  different  authors  respecting  the  number  of  species 
vary  widely.      Severai  high  authorities  consider  the  land  bears  of  Northern 
North    America,   Northern    Asia,  and  Europe  as   forming  but  one,  or  at 
most    two,   species,    among  which    are    Blainville    and    Middendorff,    the 
latter  of  whom,  with  access  to  a  large  amount  of  material,  has  especially 
and  most   minutely  investigated  the  subject.     Other  authors  are  disposed 
to  allow  a  much  greater  number.     But,  unfortunately,  their  statements  in 
reference   to  the  differences   that  should  distinguish  them  are  frequently 
contradictory.     Dr.  Gray  recognizes  eight  f  in  his  recent  monograph,  with 
numerous  "  varieties  "  and  "  subvarieties  "  of  each.     Of  the   Ursas  arctos, 
or  brown  bear  of  Europe,  he  describes  four  varieties,  and  of  the  first  of 
these  eight  subvarieties,  to  all  of  which  he  gives  distinctive  names.     All 
of  these  are  chiefly  based  on  variations  in  color,  the  teeth,  or  the  skull, 
although  he  states  in  the  same  paper  that  characters  based  on  the  latter 
are    to    a   considerable   extent  unreliable    for  even    the  determination  of 
species.  J     Nilsson,  in  his  Scandinavian  Fauna,  distinguishes  six  varieties 
that  differ  widely  in  color  from  Sweden  alone.     A  careful  study  of  Mid- 
dendorlF's  tables  of  measurements,  embracing  souk;  fifty  specimens  of  bears 
from  Europe  and  Asia,  show  how  very  extended  is  the  range  of  variation 
in   osteological   and    external   characters,    and   how  irregular  is  its   nature. 
Schrenck  has  also  called  attention  to  the.  great  variation  in  the  size  of  the 
tuberculated  grinders  in   the  bears  of  Northern  Asia.  — a  character  which 
is  unfortunately  made  the   principal  basis  of  Dr.  Cray's  specific  and  sub- 
specific  distinctions.     Dr.  Gray  himself  mentions  that  there  are  consider- 
able variations   in   the   series  of  skulls  of  American  bears  in  the  British 
Museum;  particularly  in  the  amount  of  depression  in  front,  of  the  orbits. 
His  several  tables  of  measurements  of  skulls   that  he  himself  refers  to  one 

*  In  respect  to  this  poi.it  I  shall  soon  show  tint  naturalists  high  in  authority  do  not 
agree  with  Dr.  Cray  in  regard  to  the  great  distinctness  claimed  by  him  for  those  specie-. 

t  It  seems  to  me  that  no  recent  writer  has  heen  guilty  of  greater  inconsistency  than 
i<  exhibited  by  the  author  of  the  monograph  on  the  Ursulas  above  cited;  for  after 
calling  attention  to  the  variability  of  craniological  characters,  and  their  consequent 
unreliability  as  spocinY,  distinctions,  he  adopts  some  of  those  that  can  he  readily  shown 
t,,  be  the  most  trivial— even  manifestly  so  from  his  own  paper  — as  the  basis  of 
his  classification  of  his  species  and  varieties.  So  difficult  is  it  apparently  to  overcome 
long-established  habits  of  thought  and  modes  of  reasoning. 

t    See  preceding  page. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  187 

species  indicate  very  considerable  differences  in  the  proportion  of  breadth 
to  length  in  the  entire  skull,  and  in  the  relative  length  and  slenderness  of 
the  muzzle.  In  consequence  of  such  variations  Dr.  Gray  and  Professor 
Baird  arrive  at  widely  different  conclusions  in  reference  to  the  relationship 
of  the  U.  cinereus  Gray  ( U.  horribilis  Baird)  to  the  U.  americanus. 

There  is  a  strong  tendency  among  naturalists  to  consider  the  Old  World 
bears  as  all  distinct  from  those  of  North  America,  and  to  recognize  at  least 
two  species  among  the  latter,  —  the  grizzly  bear  (Ursus  horribilis)  of  the 
West,  and  the  continentally  dispersed  black  and  brown  bears  (U.  ameri- 
canus). Professor  Baird,  in  his  Mammals  of  North  America,  gives  the 
probable  number  as  five,  four  of  which  he  seems  to  consider  well  founded, 
and  thinks  that  there  may  be  two  others.  But  each  of  the  recognized 
species  presents  so  many  varieties,  which  to  a  greater  or  less  extent  inter- 
grade,  that  well-marked  lines  of  distinction  cannot  at  present  be  drawn. 
This  has  led  a  recent  writer  to  observe,  and  it  seems  to  me  very  justly, 
"  If  the  same  consolidation  of  species  which  some  authors  practise  in  plants 
was  carried  out  in  animals,  we  should  have  but  one  species  [of  bear]  for 
the  whole  northern  hemisphere."  * 

The  present  indications  are  that  the  U.  horribilis  is  hardly  so  distinct 
from  the  common  U.  americanus  as  has  been  currently  supposed  ;  f  it  also 
presents  close  affinities  in  many  respects  with  the  U.  arctos  of  Europe. 
Towards  the  north  it  shades  into  what  is  called  the  Barren  Ground  bear, 
which  latter  has  been  repeatedly  referred,  with  more  or  less  positiveness, 
by  different  authors  to  the  U.  arctos  rather  than  to  U.  americanus  or  U. 
horribilis.  Middendorff  found  the  bears  of  Northeastern  Asia  equalling 
in  size  and  generally  resembling  in  other  characters  the  U.  horribilis  (ferox 
of  authors)  of  the  Western  Coast  of  America.  The  U.  americanus  also  pre- 
sents numerous  variations  in  color  and  in  other  points  quite  parallel  with 
similar  variations  in  the  European  U.  arclos.%  Specimens  often  occur  on 
the  one  continent  that  are  strikingly  like  others  from  the  other.  Midden- 
dorff expressly  states  that  the  differences  between  U.  arctos  and  U.  ferox 
(horribilis)  are  not  greater  than  occur  between  different  specimens  of  U. 
arctos.  Dr.  Gray  admits  that  it  is  only  a  knowledge  of  the  locality  that  in 
some  cases  enables  him  to  separate  them. 

*  Andrew  Murry,  Geog.  Distr.  of  Mammals,  p.  119. 

t  See  Professor  Baird's  N.  Am.  Mam.,  pp.  219-228. 

\  I  learn  from  Mr.  W.  H.  Dall,  who  has  recently  returned  from  a  three  years'  explo- 
ration of  Alaska,  bringing  with  him  important  information  relative  to  the  natural 
history,  geography,  etc.,  of  that  country,  that  three  kinds  of  bears  are  distinguished 
there;  the  larger  and  the  more  common  being  the  grizzly,  the  second  the  so-called  Bar- 
ren Ground  bear,  while  the  third  and  smallest  is  a  black  bear  ;  showing  that  there 
is  found  the  usual  variety,  in  point  of  size  and  color,  seen  on  the  Pacific  Coast  farther 
south. 


188  BULLETIN'    OF   THE 

In  the  Natural  History  Reports  of  the  United  States  and  Mexican 
Boundary  Survey,*  Professor  Baird  gives  much  valuable  information,  in 
addition  to  that  contained  in  his  Mammals  of  North  America,  respecting 
the  bears  of  the  Rocky  Mountain  and  West  Coast  regions  of  the  Con- 
tinent. On  the  whole  it  tends  to  render  the  subject  still  more  difficult 
and  complex,  if  we  recognize  more  than  a  single  species  in  North  America, 
as  many  of  the  different  specimens  described  represent  intermediate  stages 
between  the  two  commonly  recognized  American  species.  A  specimen 
collected  by  Dr.  Kennerly,  at  Los  Nogales,  Sonora,  and  others  at  the  cop- 
per mines  in  New  Mexico,  by  Mr.  H.  J.  Clark,  differ  so  much  from  the 
"  grizzlies  "  of  California,  that  Professor  Baird  described  them  as  a  distinct 
variety  of  the  latter,  —  D^sus  horribilis,  var.  horriccus.  Although  the  lead- 
ing characters  are  the  same,  this  "  variety  "  differs  in  being  smaller,  with 
relatively  shorter  ears  and  a  longer  tail,  these  parts  being  nearly  equal, 
instead  of  the  ears  twice  the  length  of  the  tail,  as  in  California  specimens ; 
it  also  differs  in  the  texture  of  the  fur,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  colors, 
in  the  greater  relative  breadth  of  the  skull,  its  narrower  and  slenderer  muz- 
zle and  more  vaulted  palate,  and  in  the  shape  of  the  teeth.  While  the 
"  horriccus  "  specimens  are  quite  distinct  from  either  of  the  so-called  varieties 
of  U.  americuuus,  the  variation  from  the  typical  U.  horribilis  of  California  is 
towards  U.  americanus ;  U.  americanus  of  the  Eastern  States  differing  from 
them  chiefly  in  being  smaller.  In  the  smaller  size,  compared  with  U.  hor- 
ribilis,  and  the  great  breadth  of  the  head,  "horriceus"  also  affiliates  with  the 
U.  arctos.  The  latter  is  usually  supposed  to  never  attain  the  size  exhibited 
by  many  specimens  of  the  U.  ferox  (Jwrribilis)  ;  but  Prince  Maximilian  says 
that  this  is  incorrect,  as  he  has  seen  Russian  bears  that  were  fully  as  large 
as  the  latter;  and  Middendorff,  as  already  stated,  remarks  that  the  bears 
of  Northeastern  Asia  are  as  large  as  those  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  America.f 

In  reference  to  the  peculiar  bears  of  the  Sonoran  region,  Dr.  Kennerly 
has  observed  as  follows  :  "  In  regard  to  the  bears  that  are  found  along  the 
northern  frontier  of  Mexico  and  the  southern  portion  of  New  Mexico, 
there  seems  to  be  some  confusion.     In  addition  to  the  common  black  bear, 

*  Vol.  II,  Mammals  pp.  24 -SI. 

t  The  facility  with  which  the  bear!;  can  cross  in  winter  from  one  continent  to  the 
other  by  way  of  Behring's  Strait,  and  the  known  fact  that  they  do  thus  cross  (I  am 
assured  of  this  fact  by  Mr.  Dall),  renders  the  close  mutual  resemblance  of  the  bears  of 
Northeastern  Asia  and  Northwestern  America  a  matter  of  no  great  surprise.  The  simi- 
lar resemblance  between  the  martens  and  the  representatives  of  the  other  circumpolar 
species  from  these  countries,  which  has  been  already  pointed  out,  though  some  of  them 
may  be  able  to  pass  k><s  readily  than  the  bears  from  one  continent  to  the  other,  would 
seem  to  be  fully  accounted  for  by  a  similar  occasional  migration,  if  any  hypothetical 
explanation  for  so  natural  a  phenomenon  as  the  great  similarity  of  the  animals  spe- 
cifically identical  in  these  slightly  separated  districts  is  required. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  189 

Vrsus  americanus,  and  the  large.  Grizzly,  U.ferox,  there  is  found  another, 
intermediate  in  size  to  these,  generally  of  a  brownish  eolor,  with  the  tips 
of  the  hairs  often  silvered,  especially  in  the  old  individuals,  and  in  appear- 
ance, except  in  size,  is  almost  identical  with  the  U.  ferox  found  in  such 
great  numbers  in  California.  Among  the  people  of  the  country  they  are 
known  as  brown  bears  ;  but  this  term  is  variously  modified  by  the  most  ex- 
perienced hunters,  as  we  have  heard  applied  by  them,  to  the  same  indi- 
vidual, the  name  grizzly  bear,  touch  of  the  grizzly,  cross  between  the  griz- 
zly and  brown  bear,  and  common  brown  bear;  but  on  no  occasion  have 
we  heard  them  assign  any  relationship  between  these  animals  and  the 
common  black  bear,  causing  us  to  believe  that  there  must  be  a  considerable 
difference  between  this  animal  and  the  brown  bear  of  Oregon,  which  is 
called  by  naturalists  only  a  variety  of  the  black;  in  fact,  its  size  generally, 
would  necessarily  preclude  such  comparison,  while  even  the  very  old  indi- 
vidual falls  far  short  of  the  weight  and  dimensions  of  the  U.ferox  of  Cali- 
fornia, of  which  we  could  much  more  easily  consider  it  a  variety  than  of 
the  U.  americanus."  *  One  of  the  three  of  Mr.  II.  J.  Clark's  specimens, 
however,  referred  by  Professor  Baird  to  the  U.  cinnamomeus  Baird,  was 
"  glossy  black,"  and  the  others  brown. 

Audubon  remarks  that  the  U.  horribilis  varies  in  color  from  nearly 
white  through  various  shades  of  pale  and  dark  brown  to  black,  it  bein"- 
difficult  to  find  two  specimens  alike.  The  young  are  generally  much  darker 
than  the  adult.  Yellowish  gray  and  grayish  brown  are  common  varieties, 
while  some  arc  of  a  rufous  tint.  This  account  is  confirmed  by  Prince 
Maximilian's  observations  on  the  bears  of  the  Upper  Missouri.* 

The  specimens  from  New  Mexico  and  the  adjoining  country  southwards, 
which  present  the  peculiar  characters  mentioned  above,  have  usually  been 
referred  to  the  U.  horribilis,  as  previously  stated;  but  others  that  are 
equally  perplexing,  but  commonly  referred  to  the  brown  variety  of  U. 
americanus,  also  occur  in  the  same  region.  Some  of  these  latter  differ  so 
much  from  other  brown  bears  from  Oregon,  also  referred  to  U.  americanus, 
that  Professor  Baird  has  considered  the  probability  of  their  proving  distinct 
species  very  great,  and  proposed  to  call  the  former,  in  that  event,  U.  am- 
blyceps.  These  Sonoran  specimens  differ  from  representatives  of  U.  ameri- 
canus from  the  Eastern  States  in  nearly  the  manner  that  the  Sonoran 
variety  horriccus  of  the  grizzly,  17.  horribilis,  does  from  the  true  U.  horribilis 
of  California  ;  namely,  in  the  greater  relative  breadth  of  the  head,  the  rela- 
tively smaller  size  of  the  molar  teeth,  and  the  irregular  character  of  the 

*  United  States  and  Mexican  Bound.  Surveys,  Vol.  II,  Mammal-,  p.  23. 

f  Verzeichniss  der  auf  seiner  Reise  in  Nordamerika  beobachteten  Saugetliicre,  Vom 
Prinzen  Maximilian  zu  Wied.  Archiv  fiir  Naturgeschichte,  XXVII,  1S61,  Theil  1, 
p.  203,  Taf.  VIII. 


100  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

coloration.  Professor  Baird  provisionally  refers  them  to  the  Ursus  ameri- 
canus,  var.  cinnamomeus,  ol'  Audubon  and  Bachman,  to  which,  he  says, 
they  bear  the  nearest  resemblance. 

Prince  Maximilian,  in  his  memoir  "Uber  die  Selbst'andigkeit  der  species 
des  Ursus  ft  rox  Desm.,"  *  urges  strongly  the  distinctness  of  I  '■  horribilis  {fcrox 
Maxm.)  from  both  U.  americanus  and  U.  arctos,  in  which  he  is  supported 
by  the  anatomical  observations  of  Dr.  C.  Mayer,  which  form  an  appendix 
to  his  paper.  Several  specimens  of  the  former,  of  different  ages,  from  the 
Upper  Missouri,  are  described  in  detail,  but  no  differences  other  than  those 
previously  pointed  out  by  other  authors,  arc  mentioned.  They  consider 
thnt  the  shorter  ears  and  longer  claws  of  U.  horribilis,  with  certain  minor 
osteological  peculiarities,  sufficiently  distinguish  it  from  U.  arctos.  These 
authors  admit  that  bears  from  northern  countries  present  great  individual 
differences;  yet,  in  reviewing  Middendorff's  arguments,  they  offset  their 
conclusions,  based  on  an  examination  of  a  very  limited  number  of  speci- 
mens, against  those  of  the  latter,  formed  from  probably  as  careful  an  elabo- 
ration of  many  times  their  amount  of  material.  The  differences  that  have 
been  described  by  authors  as  occurring  between  specimens  of  U.  arctos 
from  different  parts  of  Europe  and  Asiatic  Russia,  or  between  different 
specimens  of  either  U.  horribilis  or  U-  americanus  from  different  localities 
on  this  continent,  are  as  great  as  those  they  urge  as  peculiar  to  their 
so-called  species. 

I  have  not  space  to  notice  in  detail  each  point  urged  as  distinctive  by 
those  authors  who  divide  the  bears  into  a  large  number  of  species.  As  they 
mainly  rest  on  the  shape  and  size  of  the  molar  teeth,  the  relative  length  of 
the  claws  and  the  ears,  and  the  proportions  of  the  skull,  a  few  further 
remarks  on  these  characters  may  not  be  out  of  place.  In  Professor  Baird's 
table  of  measurements  of  skulls  of  American  bears,  the  average  proportion 
of  breadth  to  length  in  the  seven  specimens  cited  is  sixty  per  cent,  with  a 
minimum  of  fifty-five  per  cent,  and  a  maximum  of  seventy-one.  Only  one 
of  the  series,  however,  exceeds  sixty.  Adding  four  other  specimens  referred 
by  Baird  to  "  cinnamomeus  f  "  the  average  of  the  eleven  is  fifty-nine  and  a 
half  per  cent  ;  the  minimum  is  fifty-three,  and  two  specimens  range  above 
sixty.  The  proportional  breadth  of  the  skull  in  eight  specimens  of  U.  hor- 
ribilis is  fifty-six  per  cent.  Between  the  extremes  of  this  scries  (Nos.  1218 
and  2037)  the  variation  amounts  to  ten  per  cent.  In  his  comparison  of  U. 
horribilis  with  U.  arctos,  Baird  cites  two  of  Blainville's  specimens  in  which 
the  same  proportion  is  sixty-six  per  cent;  in  reference  to  which  he  adds: 
'•  This  width  of  head  far  exceeding  that  of  any  well-known  American 
species,  would  appear  to  be  quite  conclusive  as  to  identity,"  —  Professor 

*  Verhandlungen  der  Kaiserliclien  Leopoldinisch-Carolinischen  Akademie  der  Natur- 
forschung,  Band.  XXVI,  erste  Abtheil.,  1857,  pp.  33  -  So,  Taf.  Ill,  IV,  and  V. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  191 

Baird  not  having  then  received  the  Saranac  (New  York)  specimen,  with 
the  breadth  of  the  head  seventy-one  per  cent  of  the  length.  In  five  skulls 
of  the  U.  arctos,  of  which  measurements  are  given  by  Dr.  Gray,  the  aver- 
age proportion  of  breadth  to  length  is  sixty-seven  per  cent ;  in  five  of  the. 
U.  "torquatus,"  sixty-one;  in  two  of  U.  "syriacus,"  sixty;  in  four  of  U. 
" Isabellinus"  sixty.  The  average  of  these  sixteen  European  and  Asiatic 
skulls  is  thus  sixty-two  per  cent.  Gray  also  gives  measurements  of  five 
American  skulls  ;  viz.,  two  of  U.  cinereus  (=  U.  liorribilis  Ord)  and  three 
of  U.  "  americanus  ";  the  proportional  breadth  of  the  skull  in  the  latter  is 
sixty-one  per  cent,  and  in  the  former  fifty-eight.  This  would  seem  to 
indicate  a  tolerable  constancy  in  the  greater  narrowness  of  the  skull  in  the 
American  bears.  But  from  MiddendorfTs  table  of  measurements  of  fifty- 
five  skulls,  from  different  parts  of  Russia  (chiefly  from  Northeastern  Asia), 
the  percentage  of  breadth  to  length  falls  to  fifty-eight  and  a  quarter,  and 
is  hence  almost  precisely  that  of  the  American.  The  maximum  breadth 
of  skull  seems  to  be  reached  in  Western  Europe, ;  thence  eastward  to 
Kamschatka  there  is  a  nearer  and  nearer  approximation  in  this  character, 
as  in  general  appearance,  to  the  American  animal. 

In  respect  to  the  variability  of  the  skull  in  other  particulars,  Dr.  Gray, 
in  referring  to  two  skulls  of  U.  liorribilis,  remarks  that  they  differ  very  con- 
siderably ;  the  one  is  much  broader,  with  the  palate  wider,  the  nose  shorter, 
and  the  orbits  higher  and  rounder. 

In  comparing  the  teeth  of  the  American  bears  with  those  of  the  Euro- 
pean, when  but  a  single  example  of  each  is  taken,  the  differences  may  be 
considerable,  so  great,  indeed,  that  if  constant  they  might  be  regarded  as 
sufficient  to  decide  the  question  of  the  distinctness  of  the  species  ;  but  since 
specimens  frequently  occur  from  the  same  locality  that  differ  as  much,  and 
others  from  the  different  continents  that  are  almost  or  quite  indistinguish- 
able, the  unreliability  of  such  distinctions  becomes  sufficiently  apparent. 

Variation  in  the  size  and  shape  of  the  molar  teeth  are  found  in  other 
groups  than  the  bears,  though  rarely  perhaps  so  great.  According  to  Pro- 
fessor Peters  of  Berlin,  in  the  Otariai,  or  eared  Seals,  the  variation  in  this 
respect  seems  to  be  even  somewhat  greater.  Most  authors  have  heretofore 
looked  upon  the  teeth  of  the  Otariai  as  affording  good  generic  characters, 
but  Professor  Peters  has  found  them  to  be  so  exceedingly  variable  that  he 
does  not  consider  them  reliable  for  even  specific  distinctions  * 

The  ears,  in  length  and  form,  are  found  to  vary  greatly  in  specimens 
of  U.  liorribilis  from  different  localities,  especially  from  points  on  different 
sides  of  the  Piocky  Mountains  ;  whether  variations  of  this  sort  are  found  in 
U.  arctos,  it  is  difficult  from  the  few  sufficiently  detailed  measurements  given 
by  authors  to  determine.  That  such  do  occur  in  specimens  of  bears  referred 
*  Monatsber.  Ak.  Wiss.,  Berlin,  1866,  pp.  261-2S1  and  635-072. 


192  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

to  the  same  species  by  authors  who  separate  them  into  numerous  species, 
lessens  the  importance  of  distinctions  based  on  them  as  separating  the 
bears  of  America  from  those  of  the  Old  World. 

The  claws  arc  well  known  to  vary  in  length  at  localities  not  very  remote, 
in  the  Old  World  and  in  the  New.  Although  the  differences  between 
specimens  of  U.  horrib'dis,  which  seem  to  have  them  ordinarily  the  most 
developed,  and  others  of  U.  arclos  from  Western  Europe,  is  very  great, 
they  do  not  appear  to  have  the  importance  as  specific  characters  assigned 
them  by  Prince  Maximilian  and  Dr.  Mayer. 

Finally,  in  weighing  the  evidence  in  reference  to  the  number  of  species  of 
North  American  bears  and  their  relationship  to  those  of  the  Old  World,  it  is 
evident  that  the  comparatively  small  number  of  specimens  thus  far  examined, 
either  from  a  single  region  or  in  altogether,  and  the  vast  areas  from  which 
no  specimens  have  been  received,  should  be  carefully  considered  as  showing 
how  few  the  data  are  on  which  any  opinion  must  be  based.  The  incon- 
stancy of  character  presented  by  those  from  the  same  locality,  especially  in 
the  breadth  and  other  proportions  of  the  skull,  in  the  shape  and  relative 
size  of  the  molar  teeth,  in  color,  and  in  size,  should  also  be  duly  considered, 
as  well  as  the  fact  that  however  wide  the  differences  between  specimens 
from  distant  localities  are,  those  from  intermediate  ones  are  generally  of  an 
intermediate  character.  In  some  districts  bears  find  an  abundant  supply 
of  animal  food,  while  in  others  they  are  more  or  less  restricted  to  a  vegetable 
diet,  and  that  these  differences  must  give  rise  to  modifications  in  the  teeth 
and  bones  of  the  skull  is  to  be  expected.  From  the  wide  geographical 
range  of  even  the  different  restricted  so-called  species,  their  representa- 
tives are  subjected  to  widely  different  climatic  and  other  modifying  influ- 
ences. In  America,  the  coincidence  of  the  greatest  number  of  individuals 
with  the  maximum  development  in  size  seen  in  the  region  occupied  by  the 
typical  U.  horribilis,  as  in  California,  and  the  gradual  transition  in  the  east- 
erly portions  of  the  Rocky  Mountain  district  to  aberrant  forms  of  this  type, 
some  of  which  indisputably  approach  quite  near  the  common  style  of  U. 
"americanus"  of  the  eastern  portions  of  the  United  States,  and  at  the 
extreme  north  of  the  continent  to  the  U.  arctos  of  the  Old  World,  espe- 
cially to  the  Russian  type  of  that  animal,  are  facts  which  render  the 
separation  of  the  bears  of  these  several  regions  into  well-defined  species 
quite  improbable,  if  not  impossible.  I  hence  see  no  alternative  but  to 
consider  with  Blainville,  Middendorff,  and  Murry,  all  the  bears  of  the 
Northern  Hemisphere,  excepting  Ursus  maritimus,  as  forming  but  a 
single  species.  Here,  as  in  other  similar  cases  already  considered  in 
this  paper,  if  the  opposite  view  be  adopted,  it  appears  inevitable  that  still 
other  species  than  those  authors  have  already  recognized  must  be  allowed, 
with  numerous  "  sub-species,"  or  "  varieties"  and  "sub-varieties"  of  each, 
Vr  to  dispose  of  the  constantly  occurring  '  ms. 


MUSEUiJ    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  19o 


PHOCIDJE. 

1G.  Phoca  vitulina  Li\x.  (CaUocephalus  vitulinus  F.  Cuv.) 
Common  Harbor  Skal.  Abundant.  I  have  observed  it  to  be  par- 
ticularly numerous  about  Ipswich,  as  many  as  eight  or  ten  being  some- 
time- seen  at  once.  In  June  the  females  are.  accompanied  by  their 
young,  then  apparently  about  one  fourth  grown.  Though  so  com- 
mon, their  habits  seem  to  be  little  known.  They  are  rarely  cap- 
tured, as  when  killed  they  sink  to  the  bottom  and  are  thus  difficult 
to  obtain.  A  fine  nearly  adult  male,  now  in  the  Museum  of  Com- 
parative Zoology,  was  obtained  at  Wellfleet,  in  June,  1868,  by  Mr.  C. 
J.  Maynard  and  the  writer.  The  specimen  having  been  stranded, 
it  had  just  died  of  exhaustion  when  discovered,  from  its  frantic  efforts 
to  regain  the  water.  It  had  repeatedly  floundered  several  yards  up 
the  steep  sand  beach. 

In  reply  to  inquiries  of  mine  respecting  our  seals,  Captain  N.  E. 
Atwood,  of  Provincetown,  has  kindly  written  me  respecting  this  species 
as  follows:  "At  Provincetown  we  occasionally  see  a  straggling  speci- 
men of  what  we  call  the  Harbor  Seal ;  in  the  vicinity  of  Cape  Cod  it  is 
not  very  common  ;  but  there  are  localities  on  our  New  England  coast 
where,  in  summer,  they  are  found  in  great  numbers.  In  Boston  Har- 
bor, west  of  Kainsford  Island,  there  is  a  shoal-water  bay  of  considei-able 
extent,  in  which  is  a  small  ledge  of  rocks  that  at  low  water  rise 
several  feet  above  the  surface  ;  on  these  rocks  many  hundreds  of  these 
seals  may  be  seen  at  any  time  during  the  summer.  If  the  ledge  is 
approached,  they  all  dive  into  the  water  and  rapidly  disperse,  but  soon 
return  again  if  they  perceive  no  danger.  These  seals  are  small,  and 
of  little  value,  and  are  hence  unmolested." 

17.  Cystophora  cristata  Nilsson.  Hooded  Seal.  From 
accounts  I  have  received  from  residents  along  the  coast  of  a  seal  of 
very  large  size  observed  by  them,  and  occasionally  captured,  I  am  led 
to  think  this  species  is  not  of  very  unfrequent  occurrence  on  the  Massa- 
chusetts coast.  Mr.  C.  W.  Bennett  inform-  me  of  one  taken  some 
years  since  in  the  Providence  River,  a  few  miles  below  Providence, 
which  he  saw  shortly  after.  From  his  very  particular  account  of  it  I 
cannot  doubt  that  it  was  of  this  spe.cies.     Mr.  C.  J.  Maynard  also  in- 


104  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

forms  me  thai  a  number  of  specimens  have  been  taken  at  Ipswich 
within  the  past  few  years,  that  have  weighed  from  seven  hundred  to 
nine  hundred  pounds.  It  seems  to  be  most  frequent  in  winter,  when 
it  apparently  migrates  from  the  north. 

CERVID^I. 

18.  Cariacus  virginianus  Okay.  (Cervus virginiamis'Bod&XiTt.) 
Virginia  Deer.  A  few  still  exist  in  Plymouth,  Barnstable,  and  Berk- 
shire Counties,  where  they  have  been  for  some  time  stringently  protected 
by  law.  Mr.  Samuels,  in  the  report  of  the  State  Board  of  Agriculture 
of  Massachusetts  for  18(51  (p.  180),  observes :  "This  beautiful  animal 
is  now  rare  in  this  Slate,  and  will  soon,  probably,  be  extinct ;  it  is  found 
in  the  woods  in  Plymouth  and  Barnstable  Counties,  in  the  neighborhood 
of  the  Hoo-ac  Mountains,  and  on  several  of  the  islands  on  the  southeast 
coast."  It  has  for  a  long  time  been  extinct  in  most  parts  of  the  State. 
They  were  last  seen  in  the  vicinity  of  Springfield  about  fifty  years  ago. 

Respecting  individual  variation  in  species  of  the  Cerviihc,  and  especially  in 
Cervus  (Cariacus)  vb-yiiiianus,  I  find  the  following  important  observations  by 
Hon.  John  D.  Caton,  in  the  Transactions  of  the  Ottawa  Academy  of  Natural 
Sciences.*  Referring  to  our  standard  works  on  the  American  Ccrvidce, 
he  observes:  "  The  superficial  marks  which  assign  to  each  of  these  species 
its  appropriate  classification  are  properly  described.  Yet  this  description 
is  generally  from  a  single  specimen,  while  in  fact  individuals  differ  very 
widely,  both  in  color  and  form ;  so  much  so  that  even  among  the  few  I  have 
in  my  parks  we  might  almost  persuade  ourselves  we  have  distinct  varieties. 
Among  the  fifty  or  sixty  deer  which  I  have,  there  are  three  distinct  shades 
of  color,  which  also  seem  to  be  characterized  by  a  peculiarity  of  form. 
The  lightest  colored  have  long  legs  and  slim  bodies ;  they  have  the  largest 
horns,  do  not  fatten  readily,  and  are  more  wild  and  restless  than  the  others. 
The  next  are  of  a  considerably  darker  shade;  in  some  instances  quite 
black  along  the  top  of  the  neck  and  down  the  back,  and  a  black  tail,  as 
distinctly  so  as  the  California  deer;  they  have  frequently  other  black  marks. 
I  have  one  specimen  with  a  distinct  black  line  over  each  eve,  of  a  triangular 
form,  passing  towards  the  ear;  and  several  others  in  which  this  mark  is  quite 
visible,  though  not  so  conspicuous,  giving  them  rather  a  ferocious  appear- 
ance. This  variety  has  short  legs,  rather  short,  heavy  bodies,  are  very 
tame,  and  always  the   fattest  in  the  park.     The  smallest  variety,  both  in 

*  Part  I,  1868,  p.  43. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  195 

size  and  numbers,  is  of  a  distinct  russet  color,  and  has  less  white  under  the 
throat  and  belly  than  either  of  the  former.  In  one  specimen  the  white  is 
nearly  wanting  beneath  the  lower  jaw,  and  there  is  very  little  under  the 
neck.  They  are  not  so  wild  as  the  first  class  mentioned,  but  are  more 
timid  than  the  second,  and,  in  their  disposition  to  fatten,  seem  also  to  be 
intermediate  between  the  other  two." 

In  regard  to  the  Elk  he  also  observes :  "  There  seem  to  be  distinct 
classes  of  the  elk,  which  are  as  manifestly  hereditary  as  those  of  the  deer, 
especially  so  as  to  form  and  size.     Of  these  I  recognize  in  my  parks  two 

classes,   varying  in  form  and  size,  but  not  materially  in  color One 

variety  is  larger,  and  has  longer  legs,  and  is  much  more  graceful  in  form 
and  carriage  than  the  other.  The  largest  variety  seems  to  be  the  most 
hardy,  and  fattens  the  most  readily ;  it  is  also  less  vicious." 

The  Elk  or  Wapati  (Cervus  canadensis  Erxl.),  judging  from  what  is 
known  of  its  former  distribution,  undoubtedly  once  inhabited  Massachu- 
setts. According  to  Professor  Baird  and  others,  it  is  still  found  in  the 
Alleghanies  in  Pennsylvania.* 

The  Moose  (Alee  malchis  Ogilby ;  Cervus  alces  Linn.)  also  formerly 
undoubtedly  existed  in  Massachusetts,  though  it  has  now  been  long  ex- 
tinct here.  It  still  occurs  in  Maine,  as  far  south  as  the  Umbagog 
Lakes,  whence  specimens  have  been  received  at  the  Museum  of  Com- 
parative Zoology. 

As  to  whether  the  individuals  found  in  America  are  identical  with  those 
of  the  Old  World,  there  is  at  present  some  discrepancy  of  opinion,  though 
formerly  regarded  as  the  same.  The  distinctions  between  them  are  very 
slight,  and  to  what  extent  constant  is  hardly  known.  While  the  Moose  of 
Asia  and  Europe  are  considered  identical,  Sir  John  Richardson  has  pointed 
out  some  slight  differences  in  the  skeleton  of  those  of  the  New  and  the 
Old  World,  which  incline  him  to  the  opinion  that  they  may  be  distinct 
species,  and  as  such  he  bestowed  on  the  American  the  specific  name  of 
miiswa.  Whether  these  distinctions  are  more  than  individual,  or  such  as 
would  disappear  in  a  large  series  of  specimens,  it  is  perhaps  impossible  to 
say.  Their  distribution,  however,  is  remarkably  alike,  reaching  the  Arctic 
coast  on  both  continents,  and  extending  southwards  to  about  the  same 
isotherm ;  on  the  whole  I  consider  their  identity  as  extremely  probable,  if 
not  absolutely  certain. 

*  Audubon  states  that  fifty  years  ago  a  few  still  lived  in  Kentucky,  near  the  Ohio 
Uiver,  and  that  they  were  not  very  uncommon  at  that  time  in  Southern  Illinois, — 
localities  much  more  southern  than  Massachusetts.  —  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Vol.  II,  p.  88. 


190  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

The  "Woodland  Caribou,  or  Reindeer  (Tarandus  rangifer  Gray; 
Rangifer  caribou  Aud.  and  Bach.),  like  the  preceding,  probably  once 
inhabited  Western  Massachusetts,  judging  from  what  is  known  of  their 
earlier  distribution,  though  probably  rather  as  an  occasional  visitant 
from  the  north  than  as  a  numerous  or  permanent  resident.  It  is  still 
found  occasionally  in  Northern  Maine,  whence  specimens  have  been 
received  on  several  occasions  at  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology, 
from  Mr.  J.  G.  Rich.  In  March,  1863,  according  to  Professor  Ver- 
rill,*  this  gentleman  brought  seven  to  Boston,  killed  on  the  head  waters 
of  the  Kennebec,  out  of  a  herd  of  about  twenty,  supposed  by  Mr.  Rich 
to  have  come  from  regions  farther  north,  as  the  caribou  had  been 
noticed  there  by  him  but  once  before  during  the  previous  live  years. 
It  is  said  to  occur  also  in  the  Adirondacks  of  Xew  York.f 

In  this  species  we  are  again  met  by  the  old  question  of  identity  with  a 
closely  allied  Old  World  congener.  Several  high  authorities  still  maintain 
its  identity  with  the  European  and  Asiatic  reindeer,  while  others,  whose 
opinions  are  equally  entitled  to  consideration,  believe  them  distinct.  Un- 
like the  moose,  the  reindeer,  if  forming  but  a  single  species,  are  apparently 
easily  separated  into  several  very  distinct  races,  in  some  eases  differing  in 
size,  but  chiefly  in  the  character  of  the  horns.  In  America,  the  woodland 
caribou  constitutes  a  southern  form,  and  inhabits  the  northern  wooded 
districts  of  the  continent;  in  the  Arctic  Barren  Grounds  it  is  replaced 
by  a  much  smaller  race,  but  which,  it  is  said,  lias  larger  horns.  This 
smaller  race  seems  to  be  a  circumpolar  one,  inhabiting  the  similar  wood- 
less tracts  of  the  extreme  north  of  the  Old  World,  and  also  Greenland, 
but  differing  somewhat  in  different  districts,  it  is  claimed,  by  peculiar 
modes  of  branching  of  the  horns,  especially  in  respect  to  the  form  of 
the  brow  antlers.  Whether  these  differences  that  have  been  pointed  out 
are  to  be  considered  as  constantly  characterizing  the  reindeer  of  these  dif- 
ferent regions  is  still  questionable,  as  but  comparatively  few  specimens 
appear  to  have  been  yet  compared.  From  the  great  variability  in  the 
branching  of  the  hums  presented  by  all  the  different  species  of  the  Cer- 
vidce,  the  right  and  left  boms  in  the  same  individual,  as  well  as  the  SUCCes- 
sive  sets,  being  often  most  notably  unlike,  it  seems  to  be  a  distinction  of 
doubtful  value. 

In  reference  to  the  disputed  question  of  whether  there  are  one  or  several 

*  Pro  !.  B    '    S  c.  Xat.  Ili-t  ,  Vol.  IX,  p.  226. 

t  In  reference  to  the  much  farther  exten  ion  outhward  of  the  habitat  of  this  species 
in  earlier  times  than  even  two  centuries  ago,  see  the  general  remarks  on  the  geograph- 
ical distribution  of  the  Massachusetts  Mammals,  at  the  close  of  the  paper. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  197 

species  of  reindeer,  Mr.  Andrew  Murray,  in  his  valuable  work  on  the 
Geographical  Distribution  of  Mammals  (p.  151),  observes:  "But  there  are 
several  varieties ;  how  far  some  of  these  deserve  to  be  reckoned  species,  and 
if  so,  which  of  them,  is  a  more  difficult  question.  There  is,  first,  the  fossil 
variety;  next,  the  Lapland  reindeer,  which  is  nearest  to  the  fossil  type ; 
then  the  Siberian,  which,  although  very  close  to  the  Lapland,  differs  in 
the  character  of  the  horns  ;  moreover,  there  are  two  varieties  in  North 
America,  and  one  in  Greenland  and  Spitzbergen.  I  believe  all  these  to  be 
altered  forms  developed  out  of  one  stock,  modified  to  an  extent  corre- 
sponding with  the  degree  of  deviation  of  their  respective  climates  from  the 
original  condition  of  existence  of  that  stock."  Mr.  Murray  gives  figures, 
copied  from  various  authors,  of  the  antlers  of  these  different  varieties,  and 
mentions  in  detail  their  points  of  difference  and  resemblance;  concerning 
which  he  adds:  "The  resemblance  between  them  is  too  constant,  and,  as 
will  be  seen  by  the  figures,  is  too  considerable  to  be  a  matter  of  accident 
or  coincidence." 

Dr.  Richardson  seems  to  have  first  clearly  distinguished  the  two  varieties 
of  American  reindeer,  or  caribou,  now  so  generally  recognized,  but  of  the 
woodland  variety  ("  Cerous  tarandua,  var.  /3  tylm  stria  ")  lie  claims  to  "  know 
little,  having,"  he  says,  "seen  few  of  them  alive  or  in  an  entire  state.  It  is," 
he  adds,  "much  larger  than  the  Barren  Ground  caribou,  has  smaller  horns, 
and  when  in  good  condition  is  vastly  inferior  as  an  article  of  food."  The 
Barren  Ground  variety  he  seems  to  have  studied  with  great  care.  Respect- 
ing the  character  of  the  horns,  the  peculiar  form  of  which  seems  to  be  the 
chief  character  yet  discovered  by  which  to  distinguish  the  different  so- 
called  varieties,  he  observes:  "The  old  males  have,  in  general,  the  largest 
and  most  palmated  horns,  while  the  young  ones  have  them  less  branched, 
and  more  cylindrical  and  pointed  ;  but  this  is  not  uniformly  the  case,  and 
the  variety  of  forms  assumed  by  the  horns  of  the  caribou  is,  indeed,  so 
great,  that  it  is  difficult  to  comprehend  them  all  in  a  general  description. 
Same  have  the  branches  and  extremities  broadly  palmated  [the  italicizing 
is  my  own],  and  set  round  with  finger-like  points;  others  have  them  cy- 
lindrical,  and  even  tapering,  without  any  palmated  portion  whatever.  The 
majority  of  adult  males  have  a  brow  antler,  in  form  of  a  broad  vertical 
plate,  running  down  betwixt  the  eyes,  and  hanging  over  the  nose.  In 
some,  this  horn  springs  from  the  right  horn,  in  others  from  the  left;  in  many 
there  is  a  plate  from  each  side,  and  in  a  considerable  number  it  is  altogether 
wanting;  the  plate  is,  in  general,  widest  at  its  extremity,  and  is  set  with 
four  or  five  points,  which  are  sometimes  recurved.  The  main  stem  of  the 
horn  also  exhibits  an  endless  variety  in  its  thickm  ?.«,  altitude,  and  curvature." 
Major  Smith  observes,  that  a  "probable  distinction,  by  which  some,  if  not 
all,  of  the  varieties  of  caribou  may  be  distinguished  from  the  reindeer  of  the 


198  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Old  Continent,  is,  that  their  horns  are  always  shorter,  less  concave,  more 
robust,  the  palm  narrower,  and  with  fewer  processes  than  those  of  the 
former,"  —  a  view  that  has  been  adopted  by  other  writers.  Respecting 
this  assumption  Dr.  Richardson  thus  observes  :  "  1  can  with  confidence  say, 
after  having  teen  many  thousands  of  the  Barren  Ground  kind,  that  the 
horns  of  the  old  males  are  as  much,  if  not  more,  palmated  than  any  antlers 
of  the  European  reindeer  to  be  found  in  the  British  Museum."  If  atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  parts  of  the  above  quotation  from  Dr.  Richardson  that  I 
have  italicized,  it  will  be  seen  how  unreliable  must  be  any  distinctions 
based  on  the  horns,  unless  the  comparisons  are  more  extended  than  theyr 
thus  far  seem  to  have  been.  That  the  h<  rns  of  the  Barren  Ground  form 
may  differ  from  those  of  the  wooded  districts  in  other  points  than  size  is 
quite  possible,  but  in  the  several  pairs  of  horns  of  the  latter  in  the  Mu- 
seum of  Comparative  Zoology  there  is  a  very  close  resemblance  to  those  of 
the  Barren  Ground  and  Greenland  caribous  figured  by  Baird  and  Richard- 
son, the  Northern  Maine  specimens  much  more  nearly  agreeing  with  these 
than  with  Professor  Baird's  figures  of  the  Lake  Superior  one  (No.  900),  which 
is  evidently  an  extreme  form.  The  horns  of  the  northern  or  Barren  Ground 
race  of  the  American  reindeer,  according  to  the  best  authorities,  do  not 
differ  essentially  from  those  of  the  reindeer  of  the  corresponding  districts 
of  the  Old  World.  Mr.  Murray  quotes  Mr.  Alfred  Newton  as  saying,  in 
reference  to  the  reindeer  he  saw  in  Spitsbergen  :  "  The  average  type  of  a 
good  Spitzbergen  head  is  very  well  represented  by  the  first  figure  in  the 
Fauna-Boreali  Americana  (Vol.  I,  p.  240)  of  the  so-called  Barren  Ground 
caribou  (Cerous  tarandus,  var.  arcticus  Richardson)  ";  which  testimony 
of  Mr.  Newton,  he  states,  is  supported  by  that  of  Mr.  Lamont*  Mr.  New- 
ton, however,  says  the  Spitzbergen  reindeer  are  "  certainly  smaller  than 
the  Lapland  reindeer." 

Professor  Baird  observes,  respecting  the  American  woodland  race,  that 
its  relationship  to  the  European  reindeer  is  not  well  ascertained.  "The. 
opinion."  he  says,  " is  gaining  ground  that  the  Barren  Ground  reindeer  is 

distinct,  and  as  this  species  cuts  it  off  from  the  Arctic  Circle,  it  would  seem 
most  probable  that  it  cannot  be  the  same  with  the  animal  inhabiting  the 
circumpolar  region  of  the  Old  World."  But  the  recorded  observations 
seem  fully  to  prove,  as  is  now.  indeed,  currently  admitted,  the  existence 
of  two  similar  races  on  the  Old  Continent,  —  a  northern  and  a  southern, 
differing  from  each  other  nearly  as  do  the  Barren  Ground  and  woodland 
varieties  in  North  America.  Hence  if  we  allow  two  species  of  reindeer  for 
America,  why  not  two  for  the  Old  World?  But  there,  where  the  species 
has  been  longer  and  is  belter  known,  competent  authorities  seem  not  to 
doubt    their   identity,  and    from  which   some   even   regard  the  American  as 

'   i ;  iog.  Distr.  of  Mam.,  \>.  155. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  100 

inseparable.  I  have  already  shown  that  the  characters  used  for  their  sepa- 
ration are  by  no  means  reliable.  Concerning  the  Greenland  reindeer,  Mr. 
Robert  Brown,  in  a  recent  valuable  paper  on  the  Mammals  of  Greenland,* 
says,  "that  after  very  excellent  opportunities  of  comparison  and  study," 
he  considers  "  the  Greenland  reindeer  only  a  climatic  variety  of  the  Eu- 
ropean species.  I  have,  moreover,"  he  adds,  "  seen  specimens  of  reindeer 
horns  from  Greenland,  which  could  not  be  distinguished  from  European, 
and  vict  vi  rsa.     On  the  whole,  however,  there  is  a  slight  variation." 

As  I  have  previously  remarked,  I  see  no  good  reason  why  all  may  not  be 
considered  as  one  species,  within  which  may  be  distinguished  several  quite 
well-marked  geographical  races. 

In  relation  to  other  facts,  the  differences  in  size  presented  by  the  two 
races  of  American  reindeer,  the  woodland  and  the  Barren  Ground,  be- 
comes extremely  interesting  ;  for,  supposing  them  to  form  one  species,  as 
there  seems  to  be  little  reason  to  doubt,  the  variation  in  this  respect 
is  directly  the  reverse,  of  that  ordinarily  presented  by  individuals  of  the 
same  species  from  localities  differing  considerably  in  latitude  ;  the  general 
law  being  an  increase  in  size  at  the  northward.  But  here  there  is  a 
marked  decrease.  It  is  yet  not  quite  exceptional,  as  a  point  is  reached 
in  the  habitat  of  the  non-migratory  circumpolar  species,  where  the  rigor 
of  the  climate,  and  the  consequent  altered  conditions  of  life,  seem  un- 
favorable to  a  maximum  development  of  the  animal.  This  is  exempli- 
fied by  the  small  stature  att  lined  by  the  circumpolar  tribes  of  men,  as  the 
Esquim  mx  of  Greenland  and  of  the  north  of  America,  and  the  Laplanders 
of  the  Old  World.  The  common  wolf  (Cams  lupus)  has  its  smaller 
northern  form,  which,  in  America  at  least,  occupies  the  Barren  Grounds 
and  the  region  northwards  to  the  Arctic  coast,  and  which  differs  quite 
positively  from  its  more  southern  relatives.! 

A  smaller  circumpolar  Arctic  form  of  the  fox  has  long  been  recognized,  dif- 
fering in  color,  in  size,  and  in  the  texture  of  its  fur  from  the  common  species 
(Vulpes  vulgaris  and  V.  fulvus  a  net.).  And  there  is  a  well-known  corre- 
sponding race  of  bears,  commonly  referred  to  the  Ursus  arclos,  which  in 
America  pass  almost  insensibly  into  the  more  southern  and  larger  Ursus 
liorribilis.     Whether   this  decrease  in  size  in  the  extreme   boreal  regions 

*  Proc.  Lond.  Zobl.  Soc,  1868,  Part  II,  p.  352. 

t  "Ot  this  species  (  Canis  gi'isco-albus  Rich.)  I  consider  that  there  are  two  varieties, 
one  of  which  is  of  a  dark  color  and  large  size,  inhabiting  the  wooded  portions  of  the 
[Mackenzie's   River]    District  as  far  north  as  the  Youcon  River.     The  other  is  usually 

of  a  dirty  white  tint,  with,  in  general,  a  dawk  stripe  down  the  back,  and  frequents  the 
Barren  0 rounds  northwards  to  the  Arctic  coast.  I;  is  of  smaller  size  than  the  first- 
mentioned  variety,  and  lives  in  much  larger  hands ;  indeed,  it  may  possibly  be  a  distinct 
species."  —  B.  R.  Ross,  Nat.  Hist.  Rev.,  July,  lbG2,  p.  271. 


1200  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

extends  to  other  species  I  have  not  at  present  the  moans  of  determining, 
though  it  is  hardly  to  be  expected  that  it  will  to  all,  since  some  of  them  are 
to  a  considerable  degree  migratory,  going  southward  in  winter,  as  the 
lynxes,  martens,  and  some  others.  Hence  extremes  of  climate,  whether 
of  heat  or  cold,  seem  to  unfavorably  influence  the  development  of  animal 
life  generally,  a  mean  or  temperate  region  being  as  necessary  for  the 
highest  development  of  the  lower  orders  of  mammalia  as  for  that  of  man. 

Besides  the  marked  climatic  modifications  in  size  and  in  other  features 
in  the  species  cited  above,  certain  other  variations  in  them  may  be  here 
appropriately  referred  to.  These,  though  slight,  so  commonly  appear  in 
a  number  of  species  inhabiting  the  same  region  as  to  lead  one  at  once  to 
suspect  a  common  cause  for  such  differences.  Dr.  Richardson*  long  since 
pointed  out  slight  differences  in  the  color  and  texture  of  the  fur,  and  in 
the  breadth  of  the  foot,  in  species  which  he  considered  identical  in  North 
America  and  Europe,  between  their  representatives  from  Northern  North 
America  and  Central  Europe;  the  former  having  a  finer  and  thicker 
coat,  and  broader  feet,  to  better  adapt  them  to  a  colder  climate  and  a 
more  snow-covered  country,  as  well  as  brighter  and  livelier  colors.  These 
modifications  appear  also,  he  says,  in  the  native  domestic  dogs.* 

Naturalists  have  repeatedly  remarked  the  narrower  form  of  the  head 
in  the  moose,  bear,  fox,  and  wolf  in  Eastern  North  American  specimens 
as  compared  with  others  from  "Western  Europe.  In  the  former,  the  abso- 
lute breadth  of  the  skull  is  generally  less,  while  there  is  at  the  same 
time,  a  greater  development  of  the  facial  portion.  In  these  animals  a 
difference  in  size  has  also  been  claimed  to  distinguish  their  representatives 
from  the  two  continents ;  but,  owing  to  the  variation  in  size  on  either  con- 
tinent with  the  latitude  and  elevation  of  the  locality  at  which  they  were 
collected,  observations  on  this  point  are  somewhat  contradictory.  The 
general  indication,  however,  seems  to  be  that  the  American  somewhat 
exceed  the  European  when  both  are  from  near  the  same  isotherm. 

I  have  already  called  attention  to  the  fact  of  the  same  species  varying  in 
color  in  different  portions  of  its  habitat,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Cants  luj)tis. 
On  both  continents,  this  species  gradually  changes  from  nearly  white 
(yellowish  or  grayish  white)  in  the  Arctic  regions  to  very  dark  or  "black  " 
in  the  southern.  Individuals  of  the  black  and  cross  varieties  of  the  fox 
(I'll')  i   )    are    mosi    numerous   on    both    continents    towards    the 

north  ;t  at  the  south,  while  the  general  fulvous  color  prevails  on  the  dorsal 

*  I  li-Americana,  Vol.  I,  p.  91. 

t  Mr.  II.  R.  Ross  gives  the  proportion  of  the  different  colors  in  the  foxes  killed  in  the 
nsred  f^ths,cross  j^ths,  silvei-  ,'v11  :  or  sixty  per  cent  of  the 
dark  variety  t'>  forty  of  the  red  ;  while  as  tar  south  as  the  United  States  the  dark  vari- 
eties probably  scarcely  exceed  one  percent.  —  Nat.  Jlist.  Rev.,  1862,  p.  272. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  201 

surface,  there  is  apparently  a  greater  development  of  dusky  on  the  ven- 
tral;  this  type  forming  the  Vulpes  "  melanogastcr"  of  the  south  of  Europe. 
According  to  Professor  Baird,  the  black  varieties  in  some  of  the  American 
squirrels  reach  their  greatest  numerical  development  in  the  northern  por- 
tions of  their  habitat;  :f  where  also  melanic  specimens  of  the  marmot  and 
racoon  are  most  frequent.  On  the  Atlantic  slope  there  is  a  noticeable 
tendencv  to  a  predominance  of  gray  rather  than  rufous  tints,  while  in 
the  interior,  particularly  in  the  Mississippi  Valley,  ami  on  the  Plains,  the 
reverse  is  the  case,  in  at  least  a  number  of  species.  I  have  in  another  place  f 
called  attention  to  the  faded  appearance  of  the  plumage  of  many  species 
of  birds  on  the  Plains,  in  those  that  range  across  the  continent;  in  others 
there  is  a  tendency  to  an  increase  of  fulvous  and  rufous,  as  is  noticeable  in 
some  mammals.  In  the  Sonoran  region  there  is  a  marked  inclination  to 
pied  varieties,  such  occurring  in  the  weasels  (P.  frenatus  and  P.  xantho- 
genijs),  skunks  (Mephitis  bicolor  and  also  in  M.  mephitica),  the  bears  and 
squirrels.  The  changing  to  white  in  winter  of  many  species  at  the 
north  which  at  the  south  constantly  retain  their  summer  colors,  as  the 
weasels,  the  Arctic  fox.J  the  wolf,  and  some  of  the  hares,J  it  seems  to  me 
is  also  to  be'  properly  classed  in  the  category  of  climatic  and  geographi- 
cal peculiarities  of  coloration.  The  prevalence  of  neutral  mouse-gray 
tints  in  so  large  a  proportion  of  the  mammals  of  Australia,  and  of 
plumbeous  and  black  in  those  of  Africa,  in  contrast  with  the  brighter 
and  more  varied  colors  of  those »of  the  other  continents,  is  but  a  grander 
exhibition  of  the  same  kind.  The  hibernation  of  certain  species  in 
the  cold  regions  that  in  the  warmer  are  constantly  active,  as  in  the 
Ursidcc  and  Vespertilionidae,  for  example,  is  in  some  respects  a  similar 
phenomenon. 

There  are  differences  in  size  between  specimens  of  the  same  species 
from  different  localities  that  are  not  apparently  explainable  on  the  ground 
of  difference  in  the  latitude  and  altitudes  of  their  respective  places  of 
birth.     On  the  Mississippi  prairies,  for  example,  some  species  of  Muridce, 

*  North  Amer.  Mam.,  p.  241. 

t  Mem.  Bost.  Sou.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  I,  p.  513. 

X  Concerning  this  point  Mr.  Alfred  Newton  observes  :  "I  have  never  seen  it  re- 
marked, but  it  is  unquestionably  the  case,  that  nearly  all  the  Icelandic  examples  of 
Canis  lagopus  are  'blue'  foxes  ;  that  is  to  say,  their  winter  coat  is  nearly  the  same 
color  as  their  summer  coat.  This  fact,  I  think,  must  be  taken  in  connection  with  the 
comparatively  mild  climate  which  Iceland  enjoys  in  winter  ;  and  if  so,  is  analogous  to 
the  circumstance  that  of  the  Alpine  Hare  (Lepas  timidus  Linn.,  non  auct.)  always  be- 
coming white  in  Scandinavia,  generally  so  in  Scotland,  but  seldom  in  Ireland."  (Proc. 
Zool.  Society  of  London,  Dec.  1SG4,  p.  497.)  Dr.  Richardson  also  states  that  the  Arctic 
fox  is  of  a  purer  white  on  the  shores  of  Hudson's  Hay  than  at  Bhering's  Straits,  where, 
as  is  well  known,  the  climate  is  considerably  milder.     (Faun.  Bor.  Amer.,  I,  p.  S7.) 


202  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

ml  Sorkidte  attain  an  appreciably  larger  size  than  under  nearly 
the  same  latitude  anil  degree  of  elevation  at  the  eastward.  The  same 
fact  is  also  observed  in  the  mink  ;  while  the  bears  of  the  Pacific  slope  are 
larger  than  from  most  other  parts  of  the  Continent.  Whether  a  greater 
abundance  of  their  proper  loot!  may  be  the  cause  of  this,  it,  is  impossible 
now  to  determine.  They  are  facts,  however,  that,  are  worthy  of  careful 
consideration,  and  they  are  cited  here  simply  to  call  to  them  further 
attention. 

It  may  be  observed,  in  passing,  that  allied  species,  as  the  fox  and  wolf,  vary 
differently  under  the  same  conditions ;  melanism  being  most  developed  in 
the  one  at  the  south,  and  in  the  other  at  the  mirth.  It  is  also  noteworthy  that 
circumpolar  species  follow  the  same  law  in  their  climatal  variations  that 
obtains  in  the  differentiation  in  both  the  fauna  and  flora  of  the  northern 
hemisphere  in  passing  from  the  north  southwards.  As  is  well  known,  then; 
are  many  species  of  animals  and  plants  at  the  north,  where  their  habitats 
approximate,  that  are  common  to  the  two  continents.  Such  species  become 
less  and  less  numerous  to  the  southwards,  and  beyond  the  tropics  very 
few  occur  on  both  the  Eastern  ami  Western  continents.  In  like  manner, 
specimens  from  towards  the  north  of  the  two  continents  of  circumpolar 
species  that  range  over  the  north  temperate  regions  are  much  nearer  alike 
than  those  collected  from  near  their  southern  limits  of  distribution. 

For  t lie  following  notes  on  the  Cetaceans  of  the  Massachusetts  coast, 
and  their  local  names,  1  am  indebted,  as  previously  stated,  to  Captain 
N.  E.  Atwood,  of  Provincetown.  For  the  scientific  names  lam  under 
obligations  to  Professor  F.  D.  Cope,  of  Philadelphia,  to  whom  I  for- 
warded Captain  Atwood's  note-  for  the  determination  of  the  species. 
Professor  Cope's  identifications  and  remarks  are  distinguished  by  being 
enclosed  in  brackets. 

BALiENIDJE. 

19.   [Balaena  cisarctica  Con:.]     l-  Rigiit  Whale.   Occasional. 

"  This  well-known  species  is  at  times  taken  hen-  ;  in  former  years  they 
were;  much  more  frequent  in  their  visits  than  now.  Although  a  straggling 
specimen  may  be  seen  at  any  lime,  they  are  generally  more  common 
dining  the  latter  part  of  April  and  the  early  part  of  May.  They 
yield  a  larger  amount  of  oil  than  any  other  species  that  visits  our 
coast  :  besides  which  they  have  a  large  quantity  of  whalebone  that 
finds  a  ready  market,  known  as  the  '"black  whalebone"  of  commerce. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY".  203 

The  skeleton  of  the  right  whale  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Z  >- 
o'ogy  was  taken  here.  The  specimen  yielded  eighty  barrels  of  oil, 
and  the  hone  that  was  taken  from  its  mouth  was  sold  for  $  1,000." 

20.  [Agaphelus  gibbosus  (Erxl.)  Cope.]  "  Scragg  Whale. 
Rare.  A  species  of  whale  known  by  this  name,  nearly  allied  to 
it'  not  identical  with  the  right  whale,  is  sometimes  taken  here.  It 
is  the  opinion  of  many  of  our  whalemen  that  they  are  not  a  distinct 
species,  hut  the  young  right  whale  that  lost  its  mother  while  very 
young  and  grew  up  without  parental  care,  which,  has  caused  a  slight 
modification.  The  most  prominent  feature  is  that  in  its  dorsal  ridge, 
near  the  tail,  there  arc  a  number  of  small  projections  or  bunches, 
having  some  resemblance  to  the  teeth  of  a  saw.  It  has  no  dorsal  fin 
or  hump  on  its  back." 

21.  [Megaptera  osphyia  Cope,  or  another  Megaptera.*] 
"  Humpback  Whale.  This  species  is  common  on  our  coast,  and 
sometimes  comes  into  Provincetown  harbor,  where  it  is  attacked  and 
killed  by  our  whalemen.  They  yield  but  a  small  quantity  of  oil  com- 
pared with  the  yield  of  the  right  whale,  the  usual  quantity  being  from 
ten  to  fifteen  barrels.  The  bone  in  its  mouth,  unlike  that  of  the  right 
whale,  is  of  little  value  and  not  considered  worth  saving.  When 
harpooned  it  will  run  with  great  swiftness,  and  continues  to  do  so 
while  it  is  being  killed.  Its  affection  for  its  young  seems  stronger  than 
that  of  any  other  species,  as  the  mother  will  expose  her  own  life  in 
defence  of  her  offspring.  ' 

22.  Eschrichtius  robnstus  Lilj.  Professor  Cope  informs  me 
that  he  has  found  a  jaw  of  this  species  on  the  New  Jersey  coast;  it 
should  in  all  probability  be  enumerated  in  the  present  list. 

23.  [Sibbaldius  tectirostris  Cope,  and  probably  another  spe- 
cies.]    "  Finback  Whale.     Frequent. 

"  This  species  is  the  most  common  large  whale  found  along  our  coast, 
and  is  frequently  seen   at  all  times  in  the  year.     They  are  not  har- 

*  Professor  Cope  believes  that  under  the  name  of  "  Humpback,"  of  Captain  Atwood's 
list,  more  than  one  species  may  be  embraced  ;  and  also  more  than  one  under  the  species 
called  "Scragg  Whale." 


204  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

pooin  (1  by  the  whalemen,  as  they  run  so  swiftly  they  cannot  bo  killed. 
1  Lave  known  n  few  to  be  killed  by  shooting  them  with  a  bomb  lance. 
A\  hen  they  have  been  killed  in  this  way  in  our  bay  they  always  sink 
to  the  bottom  (they  being  not  a  fat  whale),  and  remain  there  some  few 
days,  during  which  time  much  of  the  blubber  is  eaten  off  by  sharks. 
I  have  known  two  of  this  species  to  run  on  shore  in  the  night,  in  our 
harbor,  and  be  left  by  the  receding  tide.  When  they  were  killed  there 
appeared  to  be  no  indications  of  disease,  and  the  cause  of  their  running 
on  the  beach  could  not  be  learned.  One  of  them  yielded  fourteen  and 
the  other  twenty  barrels  of  oil."  In  a  subsequent  communication 
Captain  Atwood  add-:  "The  finback  is  a  species  that  yields  only  a 
small  quantity  of  oil  compared  with  its  size  ;  the  blubber  is  thinner 
than  in  other  species.  The  right  whale  killed  here,  of  which  the  skele- 
ton  is  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  was  forty-seven  feet 
long,  and  yielded  eighty  barrels  and  fourteen  gallons  of  oil  ;  a  fin- 
back since  killed  here  was  fifty-four  feet  long,  and  made  only  twenty 
barrels  of  oil,  though  a  good  fat  whale  of  its  kind." 

21.  SibbaldillS  tubei'OStlS  Con:.  A  specimen  at  first  doubt- 
fully referred  to  tic  S.  laticeps  Gray,*  by  Professor  Cope,  but  since 
regarded  by  him  as  a  new  species. j  was  captured  in  Mobjack  Bay, 
Virginia,  in  May,  I860.  It  being  a  somewhat  northern  species,  it  should 
probably  be  included  in  the  present  list. 

25.  [Sibbaldius  borealis  Fisch.]  "  Sulphur-bottom  Whale. 
Rare.  "This  species  i-  said  to  occur  on  our  coast.  Like  the  fin- 
hark,  it  has  on  its  back  a  very  small  dorsal  fin.  Being  very  much 
elongated,  it  is  a  swift  runner,  and  passes  through  the  water  with  a 
velocity  SO  great  that  the  whalemen  cannot  kill  them  in  the  same  way 
that  they  take  the  other  species.  I  have  never  seen  it  dead,  and  know 
but  little-  about  it."' 

26.  [?  Ealcsnoptera  rostratra.     I   have  not  yet  identified  this 

one.]  "  GliAMPUS.  Occasional.  When  seen  here  alone,  we  know  it 
by  that  name.  It  is  the  opinion  of  some  of  our  whalemen,  with  whom 
I  have  conversed  respecting  this  whale,  that  it  is  not  a  distinct  species, 
bul  the  young  of  the  finback." 

*  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  1866,  p.  297.  f   fbi  !..  1869,  p.  1G. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  2(K 


PHYSETERID.5J. 

27.  Physeter  macrocephalus  Pander.  Sperm  Whale.  Oc- 
casional off  the  coast;  formerly  much  more  frequent. 

28.  [Mesoplodon  soweibiensis.]  To  this  species  Professor  Cope 
refers  a  specimen  found  stranded  a  short  time  since  on  Nantucket  Island. 
I  learn  from  Mr.  S.  C.  Martin  that  it  was  called  "  Grampus"  by  the 
whalemen,  and  that  its  length  was  sixteen  feet  and  three  inches,  and 
girth  seven  feet.  The  skull,  presented  by  Mr.  Martin  to  Professor 
Agossiz,  is  now  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  and  is  the 
specimen  referred  to  by  Professor  Agassiz  at  the  meeting  of  the  Bos- 
ton Society  of  Natural  History,  held  November  6,  18G7.  lie  remarked 
that  it  was  a  species  new  to  America,  and  that  it  belonged  to  the  genus 
M  soplodon,  as  characterized  by  Gervais,  and  ought  to  be  separated 
from  the  fossil  Xiphius,  described  by  Cuvier.* 

DELPHINID^. 

29.  [Orca  gladiator  Sundeval.]  '-Killer.  This  species  visits 
our  bay  occasionally  in  small  schools.  Their  dorsal  fin  is  several  feet 
high  when  fully  grown.  They  are  at  times,  in  summer  seen  coming 
into  our  harbor.  The  horse-mackerel  fears  them,  and  will  run  in 
shore  when  they  appear." 

30.  [Grlobiocephalns  melas  Traill.  (D.  intermedins  Harlan 
and  G.  intermedins  Gray.)]  "  Blackfish.  Common.  This  well- 
known  species  sometimes  come  into  our  bay  in  large  schools  in  sum- 
mer and  autumn.  They  are  then  attacked  by  a  number  of  boats  from 
the  shore,  and  often  driven  into  shoal  water  or  on  shore  and  hundreds 
killed." 

31.  Hyperaodon  bideilS  Owen.  A  specimen  referred  by  Pro- 
fessor Cope  to  this  species  came  ashore  at  North  Dennis  in  January, 
1869  ;  its  skeleton,  secured  by  Mr.  J.  II.  Blake,  is  now  in  the  Museum 

*  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  XI,  p.  318. 


208  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

of  Comparative  Zoology.  A  few  weeks  later  Professor  Cope  obtained 
another  that  was  stranded  near  Newport,  R.  I. 

32.  [Beluga  canadensis  Erxl.  White  Whale.]  At  the  close 
of  his  list  Captain  Atwood  thus  mentions  a  species  identified  by  Pro- 
fessor  Cope  as  above:  "  Besides  those  already  named,  some  few  years 
ago  a  species  was  killed  in  our  harbor  and  brought  on  shore  which 
no  one  knew.  I  examined  it,  and  found  it  to  differ  from  all  other  spe- 
cies. Not  long  after  it  was  announced  in  the  papers  that  there  was 
a  white  whale  on  exhibition  at  the  Aquaria!  Gardens  in  Boston,  that 
Mr.  Cutting  had  brought  alive  from  the  river  St.  Lawrence;  a  species 
that  had  never  been  seen  south  of  that  river.  Soon  after  I  visited 
Boston  ami  called  to  see  it.  I  pronounced  it  to  be  identical  with  the 
unknown  species  taken  at  Provincetown."  This  undoubted  occurrence 
of  the  white  whale  at  Provincetown  is  the  only  instance  of  its  having 
been  found  so  far  south  that  has  come  to  my  knowledge.  The  skeleton 
of  the  specimen  exhibited  at  the  Boston  Aquarial  (hardens,  and  referred 
to  above  by  Captain  Atwood,  is  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zo- 
ology.    Is  was  presented  by  Mr.  Cutting. 

33.  [?  Lagenorhynchus  sp.]     "  Coav  Fish.     Occasional. 
'•This  species    differs   from  the    blackfish    in    being    much    smaller, 

and  in  yielding  much  less  oil.  Its  blubber  is  thinner,  and  its  color  is  a 
light  marble.  It  is  sometimes  called  white  blackfish  by  our  whalers. 
It  is  occasionally  killed  here,  but  it  does  not  appear  in  huge  schools, 
like  the  blackfish.  It  is  a  distinct  species,  intermediate  in  size  be- 
tween the  blackfish  and  the  species  we  call  porpoise  (dolphin)." 

34.  [Delphinus  erebennus  Cope.  |- Porpoise.  This  is  not 
an  abundant  species  here.  They  are  at  times  in  summer  seen  passing 
alon^  the  -bote  in  large  schools,  going  northward  ;  in  autumn  they  may 
be  -icn  going  back  to  the  southward." 

35.  Delphinus  clymene  Guat.  Recording  to  Professor  Cope 
this  species  has  been  taken  on  the  coast  of  New  Jersey,*  and  it  is  not 
unlikely  to  occasionally  visit  our  shores. 

3G.  [Phocasna  americana  Agass.  (or  P.  brachycium  Cope ;  I 

*  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  1865,  p.  261. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  207 

do  not  know  which  name  will  stand  a-;  yet.)]  '•  Snuffer  or  Puffing 
Pig  (Phoccena  americand).  This  is  the  smallest  of  all  the  species. 
It  is  very  common  here  at  all  season-,  and  is  occasionally  caught  in 
nets  set  for  mackerel  or  blue-fish."  There  are  several  skeletons  in  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 


VESPERTILIONID.ffi. 

37.  Lasiurus  noveboracensis  Gray.  ( Vespertilio  novebora- 
censis  Erxl.)  Red  Bat.  New  York  Eat.  Common;  in  some 
sections  of  the  State  the  most  numerous  species  of  the  family. 

This  species  varies  greatly  in  color,  but  the  difference  seems  to  be 
chiefly  sexual.  The  adult  males  are  generally  much  lighter  than  the 
females.  In  the  young  the  sexual  variation  in  color  seems  to  be  often 
much  less  marked. 

The  only  well-marked  distinguishing  characteristics  between  this  species 
and  the  next,  except  in  more  highly  colored  specimens  of  the  latter,  is  gen- 
erally the  black  border  to  the  ear,  and  the  black  on  the  lips  in  L.  cinereus. 
In  each  there  are  the  same  bands  of  color  on  the  hairs,  distributed  in  the 
same  way,  —  dusky,  verging  to  black  at  the  base,  then  pale  yellowish 
brown,  succeeded  by  darker  or  brighter  bands  of  red,  and  tipped  with 
whitish.  In  some  specimens  the  terminal  band  of  whitish  is  quite  absent, 
particularly  on  the  anterior  part  of  the  body,  the  subterminal  bright  red 
zone  being  thus  continuous  to  the  tips  of  the  hairs.  In  other  specimens 
the  terminal  band  of  white  is  developed  to  a  great  degree,  so  as  to  very 
much  obscure  the  red  or  dark  chocolate  zone  beneath.  Such  specimens 
often  strongly  approximate  to  what  is  called  L.  cinereus  (V.  pruinosus 
Say),  where  the  terminal  white  zone  reaches  its  maximum  of  development, 
and  the  subterminal  russet  zone  its  greatest  intensity.  I  feel,  in  fact,  far 
from  sure  that  the  species  are  distinct.  In  a  series  of  about  twenty  Massa- 
chusetts skins,  nearly  all  marked  for  sex  by  the  collector  (Mr.  C.  J.  May- 
nard),  all  the  males  are  of  a  beautiful  light,  bright,  yellowish  red,  with 
scarcely  a  trace  of  the  apical  white ;  the  females,  though  somewhat  more 
variable,  are  universally  darker,  the  light  red  of  the  males  being  replaced 
in  these  by  dark  russet,  which  is  more  or  less  obscured  by  the  whitish  tips 
of  the  fur.  The  alcoholic  series,  so  far  as  carefully  examined  in  reference 
to  this  point,  indicates  this  sexual  difference  to  be  quite  constant ;  but 
there  are  occasional  exceptions. 

Very  little  seems  to  be  known  respecting  the  time  of  copulation  or  the 


208  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

period  of  gestation  of  the  bats.  From  Mr.  J.  G.  Shute,  of  Woburn,  I 
learn  a  fact  in  reference  to  this  point  observed  by  him  some  few  years 
since.  Soon  after  sunset  one  evening  in  October  he  observed  a  strange 
object  pass  hiin  in  the  air,  which  seemed  to  fall  to  the  ground  not  far 
from  where  he  was  standing.  Repairing  immediately  to  the  spot  he 
soon  found  it,  which  proved  to  be  a  pair  of  these  bats  in  coitu.  They 
were  captured  and  thrown  into  alcohol,  and  thus  forwarded  to  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology.  About  the  20th  of  June  I  once  found, 
in  Northern  Illinois,  a  number  of  the  Scotophilia*  georgianus  containing 
quite  advanced  foetuses,  usually  four  or  five  in  number.  Dr.  C.  C.  Ab- 
bott says  that  the  V.  subulatus  brings  forth  its  litter  of  three  to  five  young 
late  in  June.* 

38.  Lasiurus  cinereus  II.  Allen.  ( Vespertilio pruinosus  Say.) 
HOARY  Bat.  Not  common.  Probably  the  rarest  species  of  the  fam- 
ily found  in  the  State.  Though  commonly  given  in  New  England 
lists,  I  have  never  seen  it  from  Massachusetts.  I  have  been  able  to 
find  but  two  specimens  in  the  Museum  collection  referable  to  it,  and 
those  arc,  unfortunately,  without  localities.  I  have  often  seen  in  local 
collections  specimens  labelled  with  this  name,  but  they  were  only  the 
more  hoary  form  of  the  common  L.  noveboracensis.  From  Dr.  Allen's 
list  of  specimens  its  range  seems  to  be  nearly  that  of  the  preceding, — 
throughout  temperate  North  America  at  least, — as  some  of  them  are 
stated  to  have  been  received  from  Neva  Scotia,  Red  River  Settlement, 
Louisiana,  Matamoras,  New  Mexico,  California,  &c.  As  already  ob- 
served, I  question  the  validity  of  this  species. 

39.  Scotophilia  fuscus  II.  Allen.  {Vespertilio fuscus  Pal.  de 
Bouv.;    V.  carolinensis  Geoff.  St.  Hil.)     Carolina  Bat.     Common. 

I  not  only  consider  the  suspicion  of  Dr.  Allen  that  S.  carolinensis  and 
S. fuscus  "may  prove  to  be  the  same"  well  founded,  but  to  his  list  of 
synonymes  of  this  species  would  add  Eptisecus  melanops  of  Kafinesque. 
I  woidd  remove  from  it  the  V.  gryphus  of  F.  Cuvier,  which  I  consider 
refers  to  the  V.  subulatus  Say. 

40.  Scotophilia  georgianus  II.  Allen.  Less  common  than 
several  of  the  other  species,  but  apparently  not  excessively  rare. 
There  are  several  specimens  in  the   Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology 

*  Geology  of  New  Jersey,  Appendix,  p.  752. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  209 

from  Massachusetts,  and  others  from  Maine,  the  latter  being  at  present 
its  most  northern  known  locality.  This  species  is  believed  to  be  now 
for  the  first  time  reported  from  the  Eastern  States. 

It  appears  to  me  that  it  would  have  been  better  to  have  entirely  ignored 
the  synonymes  considered  by  Dr.  Allen  as  doubtfully  referring  to  this 
species  than  to  have  adopted  any  of  them  for  its  designation.  The  V.  geor- 
gianns  of  F.  Cuvier  seems  to  me  to  be  undoubtedly  referable  to  V.  subu- 
lalus.  If  any  of  F.  Cuvier's  names  are  to  be  considered  as  referring  to 
it,  it  seems  to  me  it  is  the  V.  Saleri  of  the  same  data,  though  it  appears 
highly  questionable  whether  this  also,  as  well  as  the  V.  monlicola  of  Bach- 
man  may  not  be  more  appropriately  referred  to  V.  subulatus,  judg- 
ing from  the  very  imperfect  descriptions  alone.  Dr.  Allen,  however,  has 
had  the  types  of  some  of  these  for  examination,  and  finds  them  to  corre- 
spond with  what  he  calls  S.  georgianus,  and  it  is  this  that  appears  to  have 
guided  him  in  determining  these  references. 

41.  Scotophilia  noctivagans  II.  Allen.  (Vespertilio  noctiva- 
gans  Le  Conte.)     Silvery-haired  Bat.     Rather  common. 

12.  Vespertilio  subulatus  Say.  Little  Brown  Bat.  Com- 
mon, especially  in  the  Connecticut  Valley.  At  Springfield  it  is  one  of 
the  most  common,  if  not  the  most  common  species. 

Prior  to  the  publication  of  Dr.  Allen's  monograph,  but  one  species  of  the 
genus  Vespertilio,  as  now  restricted,  had  been  recognized  from  Massachusetts, 
though  others,  based  however  on  very  doubtful  characters,  had  been  given  by 
different  authors  from  the  Middle  States.  All  who  have  critically  studied 
the  bats  are  well  aware  that  they  are  quite  variable  in  color  and  in  many 
other  characters.  Thus  Dr.  Allen,  under  Scotophilia*  fuscus*  in  alluding 
to  certain  variations  in  the  form  of  the  ear  pointed  out  by  Major  Le  Conte 
as  distinguishing  certain  species  of  European  authors,  which  Dr.  Allen 
very  properly  deems  to  be  merely  nominal,  observes  :  "  While  acknowledg- 
ing that  these  differences  may  exist,  I  do  not  consider  them  constant.  In 
a  species  so  extensively  distributed,  and  in  a  family  so  well  known  for  its 
Protean  tendencies  as  that  to  which  »S.  fuscas  belongs,  slight  and  variable 
changes,  confined  entirely  to  the  parts  of  the  ear,  are  hardly  sufficient  data 
for  these  separations."  Under  Vespertilio \  he  remarks:  "Owing  to  the 
fact  that  species  of  this  genus  have  a  widely  spread  distribution,  minute 
differences  in  form  and  color  in  specimens  brought  from  distant  localities 

*  Monograph,  p.  33.  f  mid.,  p.  46. 


210  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Lave  been  made  of  more  importance  than  they  deserve.  Species  have  thus 
sprung  up,  many  of  which  have  never  been  identified,  and  seem  only  to 
retard  progress  by  a  useless  synonomy."  We  fear,  however,  that  Dr. 
Allen,  with  all  his  care,  and  the  almost  unexceptionable  character  of  his 
admirable  Monograph,  has  fallen  in  this  group  into  an  error  which  he 
found  it  necessary  to  criticise  in  others.  With  original  specimens  of  most 
of  his  species  for  examination,  I  am  unable  to  convince  myself,  either  from 
these  or  from  his  descriptions,  that  several  of  the  species  recognized  or 
described  as  new  by  him  —  especially  V.  lucifugus  and  V.  ecotis,  and  also 
V.  ajjinis  —  are  not  really  referable  to  V.  subulalus.  Among  the  large  lot 
of  bats  furnished  by  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  for  use  in  the 
preparation  of  his  Monograph,  including  some  two  hundred  specimens  from 
different  parts  of  North  America  (besides  many  from  foreign  countries), 
specimens  of  Vespertilio  from  various  localities  in  Maine  and  Massachusetts 
were  labelled  by  him,  when  returned,  respectively  V.  <  votis,  J*,  subulatus,  and 
V.  lucifugus.  Individuals  of  the  same  colony,  and  that  I  scarcely  doubt  in 
some  cases  belonged  to  the  same  litter,  of  what  I  call  V.  subulalus,  vary 
considerably  in  color,  and  not  a  little  in  the  form  of  the  ear.  Dr.  Allen 
sajs  :  '•  The  specimens  of  V.  subulatus  arrange  themselves  into  two  groups, 
one  of  which  may  be  considered  typical,  the  other  tending  in  the  shape  of 
the  ear  to  the  preceding  species  [  V.  evotis].  Indeed,  the  changes  from 
one  species  to  the  other  is  so  gradual  that  it  is  difficult  to  assign  a 
boundary  to  each.  I  have  included  under  V.  subulalus  a  number  of  speci- 
mens which  have  the  ear  higher  than  those  from  which  the  description  has 
been  taken,  but  agreeing  with  V.  subulalus  in  other  particulars."* 

From  a  critical  analysis  and  comparison  of  the  tables  of  measurements 
given  by  him  of  the  different  species  of  this  genus,  they  appear  most 
decidedly  to  intergrade,  no  less  in  the  size  and  form  of  the  ear  —  the  char- 
acter on  which  their  separation  is  mainly  based  —  than  in  other  points. 
The  V.  lucifugus  has,  perhaps,  the  best  claims  to  be  regarded  as  a  species, 
but  these  seem  to  be  highly  equivocal.  V.  evotis  is  the  form  with  the 
highest,  and  relatively  the  largest  ear,  grading  in  this  particular  into  V. 
subulalus,  the  more  common  form,  and  this  again  into  V.  affinis  (of  which 
but  one  specimen  had  been  received)  and  V.  lucifugus,  in  which  the  ear 
exhibits  the  minimum  of  size.  In  the  latter  the  snout  is  blunter,  and  in 
the  first  more  produced,  this  character  correlating  with  the  narrowed 
and  elongated  or  shortened  and  blunted  ear.  In  other  words,  the  V.  evo- 
tis is  the  slender  form,  the  V.  lucifugus  the  robust  form,  V.  subulatus 
coming  in  between  the  two.f    They  all  appear  to  have  the  same  geograph- 

*  Monograph,  p.  51. 

t  Naturalists  seem  to  overlook  the  fact  that  feral  animals  may  vary  in  size,  in  general 
ferm,  in  physiognomy,  in  temperament  and  disposition,  in  the  same  way  as  different 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  211 

ical  distribution,  and  specimens  of  each  generally  occur  in  collections  from 
the  same  localities,  whenever  the  number  of  specimens  received  is  at  all 
large.  They  are  sometimes  found  in  cool  weather  clinging  together  in  the 
same  "  festoons." 

Each  species  ranges,  according  to  Dr.  Allen,  from  ocean  to  ocean,  and 
from  very  far  north  nearly  or  quite  to  the  tropics. 

Prior  to  18G4  only  five  species  of  bats  were  currently  reported  from 
New  England  ;  Dr.  Allen's  Monograph  nearly  doub'ud  the  number,  increas- 
ing it  to  nine.  Only  six,  however,  are  recognized  in  the  present  catalogue, 
one  only  (Scolophilus  gcorgianus)  having  been  added  to  those  previously 
well  known. 

In  respect  to  the  many  species  of  bats  imperfectly  described  by  some 
of  the  earlier  authors,  I  have  little  hesitancy  in  referring  to  V.  subulalus 
of  Say  the  following  :  — 

Tr.  lucifugus  Le  Conte,  Cuv.  An.  King.  (McMurtrie's  ed.),  1831,  p.  431. 

V.  Caroli  Zimm.,  Man.  de  Mam.,  II,  1835,  p.  236. 

V.  grtjphus  F.  Cuv.,  Nouv.  Ann.  du  Mus.  d'Hist.  Nat,  I,  1832,  p.  15. 

V.  Salari  Ibid.,  p.  16. 

V.  crassus  Ibid.,  p.  18. 

V.  georgianus  Ibid.,  p.  1G. 

V.  subflavus  Ibid.,  p.  1 7. 

V.  brevirostris  Pr.  Maximilian,  Verzeich.  Beobach.  Saugethiere  in  Nord 
Amer.,  p.  10. 

V.  monticola  Aud.  and  Bach.,  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc,  Vol.  VIIL 
1842,  p.  280. 

V.  virginianus  Ibid.,  p.  282. 

V.  californicus  Ibid.,  p.  285. 

V.  Leibli  Ibid.,  p.  284. 

SORICID.S5. 

43.   Neosorex   palustris   Verrill.*     (Sorex  palustris  Rich. ; 

individuals  of  any  given  nationality  of  men  or  breed  of  domesticated  animals,  in  which 
such  variations  are  patent  to  the  most  casual  observer.  In  wild  animals  it  needs  only 
a  critical  comparison  of  many  individuals  of  any  species,  concerning  the  identity  of 
which  there  is  no  question,  to  satisfy  careful  investigators  that  it  is  equally  thecase 
here.  It  fails  to  be  as  well  recognized  only  because  it  is  impossible  for  us  to  be  in  suf- 
ficiently intimate  relation  with  animals  in  a  state  of  nature.  In  many  Instances  where  they 
are  brought  under  the  same  conditions  relatively  for  observation,  as  hi  the  case  of  dif- 
ferent  species  of  0  rvidce,  when  kept  in  parks,  it  is  soon  detected.  In  this  connection 
compare  the  observations  of  Judge  Caton  on  "  American  Cervidre  "  (seaanlea,  p.  194). 

*  Notice  of  a  Neosorex  from  Massachusetts,  and  of  Sorex  Thompsoni  from  Maine.    By 
A.  E.  Verrill,  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  IX  (Oct.  1862),  p.  164. 


212  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Neosorex  albibarbis  Cope.)  Marsh  Shrew.  But  three  specimens 
of  this  species  are  as  yet  known  from  New  England,  two  of  which 
were  captured  by  Professor  E.  D.  Cope,  at  Franconia,  N.  II.,  and  the 
other  by  Mr.  F.  W.  Putnam,  at  Warwick,  Mass.  Professor  Cope's 
.specimens  were  swimming  in  a  lake  when  first  seen,  about  forty  feet 
from  the  bank.  As  observed  by  Professor  Verrill,  the  species  of  this 
genus  are  eminently  adapted  to  an  aquatic  mode  of  life,  they  having 
large  fringed  feet  and  valvular  ears. 

41.  Sorex  platyrhinus  Linsley.  Broad  -nosed  Shrew. 
Comparatively  common.  I  have  taken  a  considerable  number  at 
Springfield,  and  Professor  S.  F.  Baird,  in  his  Blammals  of  North 
America  (p.  '2d),  cites  nineteen  examples  in  his  list  of  specimens  of  this 
species  from  Massachusetts,  eighteen  of  which  were  from  Middleboro', 
and  collected  by  Mr.  J.  W.  P.  Jenks. 

45.  Sorex  Cooperi  Baciimax.  Cooper's  Shrew.  This  rare 
species  I  have  never  seen  myself  from  this  State  ;  Professor  Baird 
mentions  two  specimens  from  Middleboro',  received  from  Mr.  Jenks. 
Professor  Verrill,  in  his  paper  already  cited,  refers  to  a  specimen  from 
Danvers,  in  the  collection  of  the.  Essex  Institute,  as  being  the  only  one 
he  had  seen  from  New  England.  Last  winter  I  received  it  from 
Wayne  Co..  N.  Y.,  from  my  friend,  Mr.  Charles  Potwine.  The  speci- 
men was  captured  in  the  daytime,  while  running  on  the  snow  in  the 
woods. 

46.  Sorex  Forsteri  Rich.  Forster's  Shrew.  From  its  known 
range*  this  species  is  most  likely  to  occur  in  Massachusetts.  It  has, 
in  fact,  been  reported  as  often  met  with   here,  both  in  summer  and  in 

winter,  f 

Thompson's  shrew  [Sorex  Thompsoni  Baird)  is  also  to  be  expected 
to  occur  in  this  State,  it  having  been  received  by  Professor  Baird  from 
Halifax,  N.  S.,  and  Zanesville,  Ohio,  and  by  Professor  Verrill  from 
Maine. 

•  "  Hudson's  Bay  to  CnrlUIc,  Pa."  —  Baird. 

f  "In  the  latter  eason  they  are  found  beneath  :i  pile  of  wood  or  tocr*.  and  their  tracks 
In  the  snow  show  their  wanderings  in  search  of  food."  — E.  A.  Samuels,  Agriculture 
of  Mass.,  1861,  p.  142. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  213 

■17.  Blarina  brevicaucla.  (Sorex  brevicandus  Say,  Emmons's 
Rep.,  p.  13  ;  Blarinatalpoid.es  Gray).  Mole  Shrew.  Common.  By 
far  ilic  most  numerous  species  of  the  family. 

A  second  species  of  Blarina,  the  J  J.  brevicauda  of  Gray  (Sorex  brevicaudtts 
Say)  was  formerly  reported  to  exist  in  this  State.  Connecticut,  New  York, 
and  throughout  Eastern  North  America  generally.  But  Professor  Baird 
supposes  it,  if  distinct  from  B.  talpoides,  to  be  exclusively  Western;  he 
has,  however,  tailed  to  point  out  any  differences  of  much  weight  between 
specimens  he  refers  respectively  to  S.  brevicaudus  Say  and  S.  talpoides 
Gapper  (B.  talpoides  Gray).  In  his  diagnosis  of  B.  brevicauda  he  says: 
''  Largest  of  all  Aim  ric  in  shrews  hitherto  discovered  (?),"  and  gives  its  di- 
mensions as  "  Length,  unstretched,  over  four  inches  to  the  root  of  the  tail  "; 
while  he  gives  the  "average  length  of  head  and  body "  of  B.  talpoides  as 
"  three  and  a  half  inches."  Say  gives  the  length  of  the  head  and  body  of 
S.  bfevicaudus  as  three  inches  and  five  eighths,  or  3.G2,  which  but  slightly 
exceeds  Professor  B.iird's  average  for  B.  talpoides ;  the  two  largest  speci- 
mens of  which  he  gives  measurements  (No.  2.078,  from  Massachusetts,  and 
No.  2,1  1G,  from  Illinois)  slightly  exceed  this  size.  A  Massachusetts  speci- 
men before  me  measures  fully  four  inches,  and  two  others  exceed  3.75. 
Under  B.  talpoides  he  says,  "  Willi  a  large  number  of  specimens  before 
me,  I  have  been  more  than  usually  perplexed  in  the  attempt  to  determine 
the  species  of  short-tailed  shrews,  as  given  by  authors,  and  especially  to 
distinguish  between  S.  brevicaudus  and  S.  Dehayi,  of  Bachman,  De  Kay, 
and  oihers.  I  am  satisfied  that  the  latter  species  is  identical  with  S.  tal- 
poides  of  Gapper  (which  indeed  has  priority  of  date),  having  found  no 
essential  differences  between  Canadian  specimens  and  those  from  Mas- 
sachusetts, Vermont,  New  York,  Michigan,  Wisconsin,  and  elsewhere. 
Capper's  specimen,  it  will  be  remembered,  was  taken  in  the  district  be- 
tween York  and  Lake   Simcoe,  in   Upper  Canada. 

"  Thus  far,"  he  continues,  "  I  have  not  been  able  to  find  any  shrews  from 
Massachusetts,  New  York,  or  adjoining  States,  possessing  all  the  characters 
assigned  by  Bachman  and  De  Kay.  The  hair  of  the  same  species  varies 
with  the  season,  being  longer,  softer,  and  fuller  in  winter;  the  precise  shade 
of  color  is  likewise  not  constant.  The  proportions  of  the  shrews,  unless 
taken  from  alcoholic  or  fresh  specimen*,  vary  exceedingly  in  the  same  spe- 
cies, according  as  the  skin  is  under  or  over  stuffed. 

"For  the  present,  therefore,  I  shall  refer  all  the  large  shrews  with  short 
tails  from  the  Atlantic  States  to  the  >'.  talpoides.  I  have,  however,  before 
me  some  specimens  from  the  Upper  Mi-souri  and  Iowa,  which,  as  they 
differ  in  size  from  any  in  the  East,  and  agree  rather  more  closely  with 
the  S.  brevicaudus  of  Say,  I  shall  refer  to  this  species."* 

*  North  American  Mammals,  p.  41. 


214  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Under  B.  brevieaudus  Professor  Baird  further  observes:  "I  have  found 
very  great  dillieulty  in  identifying  with  any  certainty  the  »S.  brevieaudus  of 
Say,  at  least  in  the  references  to  this  species,  as  supposed  to  be  found  in 
the  eastern  portion  of  the  continent.  I  have,  however,  I  think,  discovered 
it  in  some  specimens  of  very  large  size  from  Nebraska  and  Iowa,  localities 
nearer  to  that  of  the  original  specimen  (Council  Bluffs)  than  of  any  speci- 
men yet  discovered."  In  his  list  of  the  specimens  referred  to  this'species 
Professor  Baird  gives  two  from  Nebraska,  two  from  Iowa,  and  one  each 
from  Illinois  and  Wisconsin.  The  latter  four  are,  however,  referred  with 
a  mark  of  doubt.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  full  measurements  of  all  these 
specimens  are  not  given  for  comparison  with  the  excellent  series  of  B.  "  tal- 
poides " ;  *  as  the  size  of  two  out  of  the  three  given  is  equalled  by  several  of 
the  B.  talpoides,  they  being  respectively  but  0.50  and  3.G5  inches  in  length. 
In  view  of  the  generally  admitted  variability  of  this  species  in  size,  color, 
length  of  tail,  &c,  at  single  localities,  and  which  some  seventy  specimens 
now  before  me  from  Massachusetts  fully  demonstrate,  and  the  but  slightly 
larger  size  of  Mr.  Say's  single  example  from  Council  Bluffs  (which  forms 
the  original  of  £.  brevieaudus)  than  the  average  of  our  short-tailed  shrews, 
I  refer  to  one  species,  and  to  this  of  Say,  all  the  short-tailed  shrews  of  the 
Northern  and  the  Eastern  States,  Canada  and  the  adjoining  Provinces,  of 
which  the  more  recent  name  (S.  talpoides)  of  Capper  becomes  a  synonyme. 
Also,  in  view  of  the  already  known  wide  distribution  of  this  species,  and 
the  law  of  variation  in  size  witli  respect  to  latitude  and  elevation,  I  must 
also  consider  the.  5.  carolinensis  of  Bachman,  which  only  differs  from  the 
northern  specimens  of  S.  brevieaudus  (B.  talpoides  Gray,  Baird's  Report)  in 
its  slightly  smaller  size,  as  merely  the  more  southern  and  hence  the  smaller 
race.  Indeed,  in  consequence  of  the  large  size  allowed  it  by  Dr.  Bach- 
man, Professor  Baird  is  inclined  to  consider  this  name  as  a  synonyme  of  /,'. 
talpoides,  as  under  this  species  he  states:  "  Nor  do  I  feel  quite  sure  that 
the  Sorcx  carolinensis  of  Bachman  is  really  anything  else  than  a  small 
S.  lalpoides.     The  measurements  given  by  him  (length  three  inches)  agree 

*  There  has  never  been  a  more  valuable  contribution  to  the  Natural  History  of  the 
Mammals  and  Birds  of  North  America,  or  of  any  country,  than  the  lists  of  specimens 
and  tables  of  measurements  published  by  Professor  Baird  in  his  great  and  invaluable 
works  on  these  two  classes  of  the  North  American  Vertebrata,  contained  in  Volumes 
VIII  and  IX  of  the  Beports  of  the  Pacific  Railroad  Explorations  and  Surveys.  They 
show  not  only,  to  a  considerable  extent,  the  geographical  range  of  the  different  spe- 
cies, but  their  variation  in  size  and  proportion  at  different  localities,  and,  when  the 
number  is  large  from  one  locality,  the  variation  at  single  localities.  The  possession  of 
these  tables  and  his  accompanying  minute  descriptions  is  next  to  having  in  hand  the 
specimens  themselves.  It  is  very  much  to  be  regretted  that  so  small  a  proportion  of 
our  natural  history  descriptions  have  been  written  with  this  great  care  and  minuteucs3 
of  detail. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  2L5 

precisely  with  many  from  Massachusetts  and  elsewhere,  and  are  essentially 
the  same  in  proportion  with  those  of  the  largest-sized  speeimens  of  S.  tal- 
poides." But  he  adds:  "  There  is,  however,  a  distinct  speeies  in  the  South- 
ern States,  considerably  smaller  than  5.  talpoides,  to  which  Bachman's  name 
may  be  applied."  Further  on  he  gives  a  diagnosis  of  a  " B.  carolinensis," 
under  which  he  cites  Bachman's  "  .S'.  carolinensis"  us  a  synonyme.  He  de- 
scribes  it  as  "size  considerably  less  than  adults  of  B.  talpoides"  and  gives 
the  length  of  head  and  body  as  "  about  2.50  inches."  Comparing  it 
with  B.  brevicauda,  he  says  it  differs  from  that  speeies  in  its  considerably 
smaller  s'ze,  proportionally  smaller  feet,  and  in  having  the  "  third  and  fourth 
lateral  teeth  larger  in  proportion  to  the  first  and  second,"  &c.  Under  this 
In  a  1  he  cites  four  specimens,  three  of  which  are  from  Missouri,  and  the 
other  from  South  Carolina.  These,  he  says,  "agree  in  the  main  very  well 
together,  and  as  indicating  a  southern  speeies  smaller  than  B.  talpoides  or 
in  oiaauda."  After  finally  referring  .S\  carolbu  nsis  of  Baehinan  to  this 
species,  he  says:  '•  I  am  by  no  means  clear,  however,  that  the  particular 
measurements  cited  by  him  do  not  belong  really  to  a  specimen  of  B.  tal- 
poides;  but,"  he  strangely  adds,  Dr.  Baehman  having  given  us  no  such  inti- 
mation, "he  [Dr.  Baehman]  undoubtedly  was  acquainted  with  a  species 
smaller  than  the  latter"  (>'.  carolinensis  Baehman).  That  there  is  a  some- 
what smaller  race  in  the  South  is  unquestionable,  but  its  specific  rank  is 
not  to  me  so  clear.  This  smaller  form  seems  to  occur  generallv  throughout 
the  Southern  States,  and  along  the  low  coast  border  as  far  north  as  New 
Jersey,  and  even  perhaps  to  New  York,  corresponding  in  the  limits  of  its 
distribution  northward  with  the  northern  boundary  of  the  Carolinian 
Fauna;  the  larger  form  occupying  the  Northern  States  generally,  and  the 
highlands  of  the  Allegbanics  south  to  Georgia;  it  thus  occurring  throughout 
the  whole  extent  of  the  Alleghanian  Fauna,  and  pos;-ibly  throughout  the 
Canadian.  The  range  of  B  brevicauda  is  now  carried  southwards  to  Florida 
and  Texas,  with  only  such  differences  in  size  between  northern  and  south- 
ern specimens  as  are  admitted  to  occur  in  other  unquestioned  species  of 
mammals  that  have  the  same  geographical  range ;  the  difference  in  size 
being  the  only  constant  or  tangible  distinction  yet  pointed  out.  The  dif- 
ficulty experienced  by  Professor  Baird  in  determining  the  species  of  the 
older  authors,  it  seems  to  me  results  chiefly  from  two  causes:  first,  the 
imperfect  character  of  the  descriptions,  which  are  generally  of  single  speci- 
mens only,  and  of  skins  anil  stuffed  examples;  second,  the  by  far  too  great 
number  indicated. 

In  this  connection  it  is  proper  to  notice  a  species  of  Blarina  described  as 
new  in  the  Lleporl  on  North  American  Mammals  (p.  4  7)  from  a  single  speci- 
men from  Burlington,  Vermont.  This  specimen,  its  describer  savs,  '•  in  ex- 
ternal appearance  perfectly  resembles  specimens  of  B.  talpoides"  but  "has 


216  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

some  remarkable  peculiarities  of  the  skull.  While  it  has  no  satisfactory 
external  characters  by  which  to  designate  it,"  "  the  skull  is  so  entirely  differ- 
ent from  all  others  "  he  had  seen,  he  says,  as  "  almost  to  make  a  distinct  sub- 
genus." This  difference  consists  in  its  being  much  narrower  than  in  other 
short-tailed  shrews,  ami  in  the  greatest  interorbital  constriction  being 
placed  a  little  in  front  of  the  middle,  instead  of  behind  it,  as  in  the  others, 
and  in  its  being  greater  in  amount.  In  regard  to  this  specimen,  I  need 
only  add  that,  in  respect  to  its  skull,  and  in  this  character  alone,*  whether 
really  a  distinct  species  or  an  abnormal  individual  variation,  it  still  remains 
unique,  no  other  like  it  having  yet  become  known  to  naturalists. 

In  continuing  this  preliminary  revision  of  the  Blarincc,  we  find  that  ten 
species  of  this  strictly  American  genus f  of  the  short-tailed  shrews  have  been 
described,  all  from  the  United  States,  three  of  which  were  first  character- 
ized by  Professor  Baird  in  his  North  American  Mammals.  Seven  are 
l-ecognized  in  this  work  as  valid  ;  two  are  given  as  doubtful  or  unidenti- 
fied, and  one  is  doubtfully  referred  to  one  of  the  others.  These  are  ar- 
ranged in  two  sections,  according  to  the  number  of  premolars;  section 
"A"  having  five,  and  section  "B"  four.  Their  dental  formula?  are  as 
follows  :  — 

2       5  —  5       4  —  4  _     2       4  —  4,4  —  4 

Section  A,  -  +  ---,  +  3  _-^  =  32  ;  section  B,  -  -f  ^-—^  -\-  ^—^  =  30. 

A  lengthy  diagnosis  is  given  of  each  section,  but  no  other  essential  differ- 
ences are  pointed  out,  the  distinctions  in  respect  to  color,  &c.,  being,  as  is 
evident  from  the  descriptions  of  the  species  that  follow,  inconstant  and 
invalid.  In  section  B  the  first  premolar  is  said  to  be  slightly  larger  than  the 
second,  and  in  section  A  to  be  smaller  than  the  second.     But  in  the  de- 

*  That  is,  judging  from  Professor  Baird's  description;  but  from  the  figures  of  its 
skull  (PI.  XXX,  Fig.  7),  it  seems  to  have  had  an  imperfect  or  abnormal  dentition,  the 
number  of  visible  premolars  being  three  instead  of  four,  in  the  upper  jaw,  and  one 
instead  of  two  in  the  lower,  with  a  nuked  space  between  them  and  the  incisors.  It  is 
possible,  however,  that  the  first  premolar  in  each  jaw  had  become  accidentally  lost 
before  the  skull  passed  into  the  hands  of  the  artist, 
t  Sorex  brevicaudus  Say,  Long's  Exped.,  I.  Is:::;.  164. 
"      ji'imis  S  \  v,  [bid.,  163. 

"      talpoides  Gappkk,  Zool.  Journ.,  V,  1830,  208,  PI.  VIII. 
"      carolinensis   Bachmajt,  Journ.    Phil.    Acad.   Nat.   So.,  VN,   1837,  366,   PI. 

XXIII,  Fig.  1. 
"      cinerevs  Ibid.,  373,  PI.  XXIII,  1 

Dekayi  Ibid.,  377,  PI.  XXIII,  1'    •  I. 
'•  ex    II  a'  ani,  Di  vi  k.nov,  Mag.  de  Zool., 1842,  40,  PI.  Ill,  Fig.  6. 

Blarina  angitsticeps  Baird,  X.  Am.  Mam.,  LS57,  47. 
"       exilipes  Ibid.,  61. 
"       DcrUmdieri  Ibid.,  53. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  217 

scriptions  of  B.  cinerea,  B.  Berlandieri,  and  B.  exilipes,  which  constitute 
section  B,  it  is  distinctly  stated  that  the  first  premolar  is  smaller  than  the 
second.  Figures  of  the  skulls  of  all  the  species  of  both  sections  are  given 
in  Pis.  XXVIII  and  XXX,  but  in  no  case  does  the  first  premolar  appear 
to  be  quite  equal  to  the  second.  In  regard  to  section  B,  there  are  several 
circumstances  suggestive  of  its  being  founded  on  immature  example's  of 
section  A,  in  which  the  dentition  is  incomplete.*  All  the  species  are  di- 
minutive, and  vary  but  little  in  size  ;  the  teeth  are  generally  proportion- 
ally large  compared  with  the  size  of  the  skull,  as  is  always  the  case  in 
young  animals,  and  other  characters  seem  to  indicate  immaturity.  The 
missin"-  premolar  is  the  one  we  should  expect  the  animal  to  acquire  latest.f 
All  the  species  of  section  B  come  from  within  the  admitted  geographical 
range  of  the  species  of  section  A,  one  only  (B.  Berlandieri)  possibly  ex- 
cepted. Unfortunately,  very  young  specimens  of  shrews  are  extremely 
rare  in  collections,  and  in  the  large  series  of  Blarinai  in  the  Museum  of 
Comparative  Zoology  there  are  none  so  small  as  those  embraced  under 
Baird's  section  15.  In  several  of  the  smallest  of  them  the  fifth  premolar 
is  scarcely  visible,  forming  a  minute  uncolored  point  on  the  inside  of  the 
jaw.  In  a  single  specimen  from  Middleboro',  the  smallest  of  the  lot,  it  is 
wholly  wanting.  I  regret  that  I  have  been  unable  to  examine  any  of  the 
original  types  of  the  species  of  section  B.  Between  the  three  supposed 
species  of  this  section  (B.  cinerea,  B.  exilipes,  B.  Berlandieri)  the  differ- 
ences (which  seem  to  consist  chiefly  in  color,  especially  between  the  first  two) 
are  not  greater  nor  different  from  those  seen  in  a  large  series  of  specimens 
from  Massachusetts  or  other  localities.  The  differences  between  the  dif- 
ferent specimens  referred  to  either  of  the  species  are  also  very  appreciable, 
and  in  some  cases  (see  under  cinerea  and  exilipes  in  North  American  Mam- 
mals) so  great  that  their  assignment  was  very  doubtfully  made.  While 
the  evidence  of  the  existence  of  so  many  species  of  Blarina  in  the  Eastern 
United  States,  if  really  of  more  than  one,  is  evidently  very  slight,  I  do 
not  claim  to  have  fully  shown  that  but  the  one  exists;  my  design  has  been 
mainly  to  call  attention  to  the  great  need  of  a  thorough  revision  of  this 

*  It  is  well  known  that  in  Scalops  aquaiicus  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  young  is  less 
than  in  the  adult,  and  this  difference  has  resulted  in  discrepant  statements  in  respect 
to  its  dentition.  (See  Bachman  on  the  Mole  Shrews  of  North  America,  in  Proc.  Bost. 
Soc.  Nat.  Hist.  I,  40.     Aim,,  Quad.  X.  Amer.,  Vol.  I,  p.  92.) 

t  The  species  of  Sorex  are  divided  into  two  sections  on  similar  characters,  where 
small  size  again  accompanies  the  lesser  number  of  teeth.  There  are  o'her  circum- 
stances that  render  it  not  improbable  that  we  have  here  again  a  section  "  B,"  based  on 
immature  representatives  of  a  section  "  A."  The  number  of  species  of  Sorex  admitted 
for  the  United  States,  twelve  or  more,  is  probably  quite  too  large,  though  undoubtedly 
there  may  be  half  that  number. 


218 


BULLETIN   OF   THE 


group.  What  I  do  claim  is,  that  there  is  as  yet  no  good  evidence  of  the 
existence  of  more  than  the  common  and  widely  dispersed  B.  brevicauda; 
that  the  numerous  other  supposed  species  that  have  been  described  are 
mainly  based,  in  the  first  section,  on  variations  in  size  dependent  upon 
locality,  and  that  there  are  strong  indications  that  those  of  the  second 
section  rest  on  variations,  dependent  upon  immaturity,  of  the  representa- 
tives of  the  first;  that  if  other  species  do  exist,  as  is  not  of  course  improba- 
ble, naturalists  have  thus  far  failed  to  satisfactorily  establish  the  fact.  In 
number  of  species,  Blarina  thus  corresponds  with  Condi/lura,  and  in  dis- 
tribution with  Scalops  aquaticus. 

In  the  following  comparative  analysis  of  the  diagnoses  of  sections  A  and 
B  of  Blarina,  given  in  the  Report  on  North  American  Mammals,  some 
points  but  casually  alluded  to  above  arc  more  fully  discussed.  A  table 
of  synonymes  is  also  added. 

Genus  Blarina  Gray. 


List  of  the  Species. 


Section  A. 
B.  talpoides. 
B.  brevicauda. 
B.  carolinensis. 
B.  angusticeps. 


Section  B. 
B.  cincrea. 
B.  exilipes. 
B.  Berlandieri. 


Diagnoses. 


Color. 

"  Nearly   uniform   plumbeous   on    the  "  Lower   parts    of  the    body  usually 

body  and  tail ;  scarcely  lighter  beneath."  lighter  than  the  upper,  with  the  Una  of 

d>  marc.alion  distinctly  visible." 

Exceptions.  —  Specimens    of    V>.    ted-  Exceptions.  —  B.  cinerea :  Hoary  above, 

poides  are  mentioned  as  "  slightly  paler  "somewhat  resembling  pepper  and  salt"; 

beneath,"  "fading  to  the  belly  into  a  still  below,  "a  lighter  tint  of  brownish  gray 

paler  tint,"  &c. ;  of  B.  carolinensis  as  be-  or  light  ash;   the  line  of  demarcation  in 

ing  "  a  little  paler  beneath."    Massachu-  one  specimen  indistinct,  in  another  more 

setts  specimens  of  Blarina  arc  generally  evident."    B.  Berlandieri :  "  In  one  [spe- 

nearl;i  uniform,  but  many  specimens  occur  cimen]  the  prevailing  tint  is  a  chestnut 

that  arc    considerably    lighter    beneath,  brown  at  the  tips  of  the  hairs,  with  paler 

The  general  color  also  varies  from  ashy  next  to  the  tips,  producing  a  slight  hoari- 

and  brownish  through  grayish  plumbe-  ness.     The  under  parts  arc  a  yellowish- 

ous   to  exceedingly  dark,  almost   black,  brownish   white;   the  line,  of  demarcation 

11     isionally  the  hairs  arc  so  varied  with  on  the  sidts  quite  indistinct." 
light  and  dark  as  to  present  a  hoary  ap- 
pear.. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


219 


5 _  5    ,    4—4 


Dental  Formula 
32 


2    '    2  —  2 


2        2—2        3—3 


Incisors. 


(1)*  "Anterior  upper  incisor  with 
the  basal  lobe  more  conical  and  further 
forward  than  in  the  other  section." 


(1)*  "The  upper  anterior  incisor 
with  the  basal  portion  of  the  cutting 
edge  formed  by  a  nearly  rectangular 
lobe,  (2)  the  entire  tooth  forming  only 
a  single  hook." 

"Lower  anterior  incisor  (1)  stout,  (2)  "Lower  anterior  incisor  (3)  with  two 
much  curved,  (3)  with  two  or  three  lobed  or  three  lobed  serrations,  (1)  stout,  (2) 
dentations."  (4)  "It  extends  back  as  muck  curved,  (4)  not  reaching  posteriorly 
for  as  the  middle  of  the  first  molar."  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  first  molar ; 
(5)  "  The  first  and  second  premolars  are  (5)  the  two  first  lateral,  tctth  entirely  above 
placed  above  this  incisor."  it." 

The  variation  presented  by  different  On  page  9,  the  teeth  in  section  A  are 
specimens  renders  null  distinctions  1  described  as  "nearly  uncolorcd," — 
and  2,  the  lobe  being  sometimes  much  that  is,  brown  to  the  base,  and  in  section 
produced  posteriorly.  B  as  "  bicolorcd,"  —  white    at  the  base 

and  tipped  with  brown.  But  in  B.  brevi- 
cauda,  the  second  type  of  coloration  is 
also  quite  frequent. 

Upper  Premolars. 
(1)  "The  first  two  premolars  are  (1)  "  The  first  premolar  tooth  slightly 
nearly  equal,  (2)  the  second  usually  a  larger  than  the  second.  (2)  The  third 
little  larger;  (3)  the  next  two  much  decidedly  smaller  than  cither,  though  larger 
smaller;  (4)  the  fifth  very  small  and  than  in  the  other  group.  (5)  The  small 
usually  not  visible  externally.  (5)  The  cusps  on  the  inner  side  of  the  base  of  the 
first  four  with  a  basal-colored  point  on  first  three  lateral  teeth,  either  wanting  or 
the  inner  side."  very  small." 

Exceptions.  —  B.  cinerea :  "  The  first 
premolar  tooth  is  a  little  smaller  than  the 
second." 

B.  exilipes  :  "  The  first  lateral  tooth  is 
rather  smaller  than  the  second,"  &c. 

B.  Berlandieri:  The  first  lateral  tooth 
is  "  rather  shorter  than  the  second."  See 
also  the  figures,  which  so  represent 
them.  Hence  this  main  distinction  of 
"  first  premolar  tooth  slightly  larger  than 
the  second  "  by  no  means  holds. 

*  The  numbers  prefixed  to  the  characters  in  the  diagnoses  refer  to  the  same  char- 
acter in  each  section.  Those  that  seem  to  be  nearly  or  quite  synonymous  in  the  two 
sections  are  italicized. 


220  BULLETIN  OF  THE 

Hands. 

"  Hand  contained  about  two  and  a  third         "  Feet  smaller  than  in  section  A  ;  the 
times  in  the  hind  feet."  anterior  contained  about  one  and  a  half 

times  in  the  posterior." 

In  forty-seven  specimens  of  B.  talpoides        In   four   specimens  of  B.   cinerea   the 
the  proportion  is  74  to  100;  in  three  spe-     proportion  is  7")  to  100;  in  six  specimens 
aniens  of  B.  brevicuudu  the  proportion  is     of  B.  exilipes  G8  to  100;  in  four  of  B. 
72  to  100;  in  three  of  B.  carolinensis  it     Berlandieri  GG  to  100. 
is  also  72  to  1U0.     The  range  of  varia- 
tion, however,  in  B.  talpoides  (see  Baird's 
table)  is  from  .55   (specimens  No.  2,()7G, 
2,080,  &c.)  to  .80  (specimen  No.  2,083). 

Before  closing  my  remarks  on  this  subject  I  should  call  attention  to  the 
fact  of  the  repetition  of  the  same  character,  described  in  slightly  different 
language,  that  so  constantly  occurs  in  diagnoses  of  the  different  species  of 
the  same  genus,  of  different  genera  of  the  same  sub-family,  &c.,  and  even 
of  characters  of  ordinal  value  in  specific  descriptions,  in  the  writings  of 
even  some  of  the  best  naturalists;  —  to  the  mixing  up  of  non-essential  or 
irrelevant  characters  with,  and  thus  obscuring,  those  peculiar  to  the  group 
in  question.  Sometimes,  in  fact,  the  really  essential  points  are  omitted, 
the  diagnosis  being  almost  as  equally  applicable  to  several  species,  or  to 
any  of  quite  a  large  group,  as  to  one.  All  naturalists  are  not,  of  course, 
equally  culpable  in  this  respect.  But  in  general,  by  silting  descriptions 
of  their  generalities,  they  could  be  greatly  reduced  and  their  definiteness 
and  accuracy  proportionally  increased.  The  labor  of  preparing  diagnoses 
would  of  course  be  thus  increased,  but  the  advantages  arising  therefrom 
would  be  immense.  I  am  not  the  first,  I  am  happy  to  find,  to  make  stric- 
tures of  this  character,  and  hope  that  the  matter  will  soon  receive  at  the 
hands  of  descriptive'  naturalists  the  consideration  it  merits.  Neither,  I 
should  say,  are  these  strictures  introduced  at  this  time  as  a  special  criti- 
cism upon  any  particular  author. 

Blarina  brevicauda. 

Sorex  brevicaudus  Say,  Long's  Exped.,  I,  1823,  164. 
"  "  Harlan,  Faun.  Arner.,  1825,  20. 

"  "  Godman,  Am.  Nat.  Hist.,  I,  1831,  79.     (From  Say.) 

"  "  Baciiman,  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Science,  VII,  1837, 

381. 
"  "  Emmons,  Quad.  Mass.,  1840, 13. 

"  "  l)t;  Kay,  N.  York  Fauna,  I,  1842,  18. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  221 

Sorcx  brcvicaudus  Lixsley,  Am.  Journ.  Sc,  XLIII,  1842,  346. 
"  "  Thompson,  Hist.  Vermont,  1842,  27. 

"  "  Plumber,  Am.  Journ.  Sc.,  XL VI,  2  7  7. 

Blarina  brecicauda  Baird,  Mam.  N.  Am.,  1837,  42,  PI.  XXX,  Fig.  5. 

«  "  Samuels,  Agr.  Mass.,  1861,  144. 

Sorex  talpoides  Gapper,  Zobl.  Journ.,  V,  1830,  208,  PI.  VIII. 
Corsira  {Blarina)  talpoides  Gray,  Proc.  Lond.  Zool.  Sc,  V,  1S37,  124. 
Blarina  talpoides  Baird,  Mam.  N.  Am.,  3  7,  PI.  XXX,  Fig.  G. 
"  "         Samuels,  Agr.  Mass.,  1861,  145. 

"  "         Verrill,  Proc.  Post.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  IX,  18G3,  172. 

Sorex  parvus  Say,  Long's  Exped.,  I,  1G4. 
"         Harlan,  Faun.  Am.,  29. 

"         Bachman,  Journ.  Phil.  Ac.  N.  Sc,  VII,  394.     (From  Say.) 
"        "         De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  I,  19. 
"         "         LiNSLEY,  Am.  Journ.  Sc,  XLIII,  34G. 

"  Aud.  &  Bach.,  Quad.  N.  Am.,  II,  1851,  145,  PI.  LXX. 

"      Dekayi  Baciimax,  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc,  VII,  377,  PI.  XXIII, 
Fig.  4. 
De  Kay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  I,  17,  PI.  V,  Fig.  2. 
"  "         Lixsley,  Am.  Journ.  Sc,  XXXIX,  388,  lb.  XLIII,  346. 

"         Aud.  &  Bach.,  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Ill,  1853,  24G,  PI.  CL,  Fig.  2. 
"     cinereus*  Bachman,   Journ.   Phil.   Acad.   Nat.    Sc,   VII,   373,    PI. 
XXIII,  Fig.  3. 
Blarina  carolinensis  Baihd,  Mam.  N.  Amer.,  45,  PI.  XXX,  Fig.  8,  skull. 
"         anguxticeps  lb.,  4  7,  PL  XXX,  Fig.   7,  skull. 
"         cinerca  lb.,  48,  PI.  XXX,  Figs.  9  &  10,  skulls.     (Young.) 
"        exilipes  lb.,  51,  Pi.  XXVIII.     (Young.) 
"         Bcrlandieri  lb.,  53,  PI.  XXVIII.     (Young.) 


TALPID^I. 

48.  Scaiops  aqnaticus  Fischer.  (Scalops  canadensis  Emmons, 
Rep.,  p.  15.)      Common  Mole.     Common. 

49.  Scaiops  Breweri  Bach.  Hairy-tailed  Mole.  Appar- 
ently rare  in  Massachusetts,  and  not  numerous  anywhere.  The  original 
specimen  described  by  Dr.  Bachman  came  from  Martha's  Vineyard,  and 
was  collected  by  Dr.  L.  M.  Yale,  and  presented  by  Dr.  T.  M.  Brewer 

*  Afterwards  considered  by  Dr.  Bachman  to  be  the  young  of  S.  carolinensis.     See 
Quad.  N.  Am.,  Ill,  p.  344.     Same  as  B.  cinerea  Baird. 


"2.-J.-J,  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

to  Dr.  Bachman.  There  is  a.  specimen  in  the  Museum  of  Compara- 
tive Zoology  from  Warwick,  and  others  from  Upton,  Maine,  and  llali- 
daysburg,  Pennsylvania. 

50.  Condylura  cristata  Desmorest.  (C.  longicauda  Desm. 
and  ('.  macroura  Harlan  of  Emmons's  Rep.,  pp.  17,  18.)  Star-nosld 
Mole.  Common,  hut  apparently  more  so  in  some  parts  of  the  State 
than  in  others.  At  Springfield  this  and  Scalops  aquaticus  are  ahout 
equally  numerous,  hut  in  the  eastern  part  of  the  State  the  present  spe- 
cies seems  to  many  times  outnumber  the  other.  From  considerable 
variations  in  the  length  and  size  of  the  tail  presented  by  different  in- 
dividual-;, it  was  formerly  incorrectly  supposed  that  two  species  of  Con- 
dylura  existed  in  Massachusetts,  and  the  eastern  parts  of  the  United 
Slates  generally.  The  thickening  of  the  tail  appears  to  be  connected 
with  the  rutting  season. 

SCIURID^. 

51.  Sciurus  cinereus  Linn.  (?"S.  rulpinus  Gmo\."  Emmons's 
Rep.,  p.  GG.)     Fox  Squirrel.     Rare  in  most  parts  of  the  State. 

•r>2.  Sciurus  carolinensis  Gmelin.  ("S.leucotis  Gapper"and 
u  S.  niger  Linn.,"  Emmons's  Rep.,  pp.  GG,  G7.  Macroxus*  carolinen- 
sis Gray.)  Gray  Squirrel.  Generally  distributed,  but  much  more 
common  in  some  sections  than  in  others,  being  most  numerous  where 
the  forests  have  been  least  disturbed.  Generally  they  are  of  the  gray 
type,  but  the  black  variety  is  quite  prevalent  at  some  localities.  In 
Wayne  County,  New  York  (on  the  south  shore  of  Lake  Ontario),  I 
have  found  the  black  variety  to  be  the  most  common,  with  every  gra- 
dation between  the  two.  All  those  observed  that  were  pure  glossy 
black  seemed  to  be  very  old  individuals,  while  the  young  generally  pre- 
sented a  mixture  of  tawny,  gray,  and  black,  the  hairs  being  annulated 

*  Dr.  J.  E.  Cray,  in  his  several  Synopses  of  the  Asiatic,  African,  and  American  Squir- 
rels (Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  3d  Ser.  Vol.  XX,  1867),  has  recently  divided  the  old  ge- 
rms Sdurns  into  several  genera.  Sciurus,  as  restricted  by  him,  and  Macroxus  contain  all 
the  American  species,  by  far  the  larger  part  of  which  are  placed  in  Macroxus.  Only 
the  group  to  which  S.  hitdsonins  belongs,  the  »S.  cinereus  or  Northern  fox  squirrel,  and 
Abert's  squirrel  from  New  Mexico  (called  by  Gray  S.  "  Albertii "  =  S.  Abertii  Wood- 
liouse),  remain  in  the  genus  Sciurus  as  restricted  by  Dr.  Gray. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  223 

with  these  colors,  varying  in  the  proportion  of  each  in  almost  every  in- 
dividual.    The  intensity  of  the  black  appears  to  increase  with  age. 

Dr.  Emmons's  *S.  vulpinus  seems  to  refer  to  large  examples  of  this 
species  rather  than  to  the  true  fox  squirrel  (S.  cinereus  Linn.). 

53.  Sciurus  hudsonius  Pallas.      Red  Squirrel.      Chicka- 
ree.    Abundant. 

The  variations  in  color,  in  the  hairiness  of  the  soles,  the  presence  or  ab- 
sence of  ear-tufts,  according  to  the  season  of  the  year,  in  this  and  other 
species,  have  already  been  pointed  out  by  Professor  Baird.*  The  lateral 
dusky  stripe  is  perhaps  the  most  variable  feature  in  the  present  animal,  in 
many  specimens  it  being  quite  absent,  and  in  the  greater  portion  but 
faintly  indicated,  but  it  is  not  unfrequently  one  of  the  most  conspicuous 
features  of  coloration.  In  fall  specimens,  particularly  around  Springfield, 
the  black  lateral  line  is  generally  conspicuous,  being  a  well-defined,  quite 
broad  black  band.  Specimens  from  Northern  Maine  f  differ  from  the  ma- 
jority of  Massachusetts  specimens  in  possessing  a  relatively  very  much 
shorter  tail,  somewhat  in  general  color,  the  back  being  "rusty-yellow" 
rather  than  ferruginous,  and  in  the  greater  fulness  and  softness  of  the  fur. 
The  black  at  the  end  of  the  tail  is  much  broader  and  more  conspicuous. 
In  several  points  these  specimens  thus  approach  .S.  Richardsonii.  Speci- 
mens entirely  black  have  been  received  from  Mr.  G.  A.  Boardman  from 
near  Calais,  Maine.  In  view  of  the  wide  range  of  variation  presented  by 
S.  hudsonius,  the  descriptions  of  some  of  its  near  allies,  especially  of  S.  Fre- 
mont'd  and  S.  Richardsunii  of  Townsend  and  Bachman,  seem  scarcely  to 
indicate  more  than  slight  local  variations  of  one  species.  The  specimens 
of  the  latter  thus  far  examined  have  been  too  few  to  establish  any  very 
important  differences  between  them  and  S.  hudsonius,  if  such  exist. 

Professor  Baird  in  his  admirable  article  on  the  Sciurincc,  or  typical 
squirrels  of  the  United  States,  was  able,  through  the'  very  abundant  ma- 
terial at  his  disposal,  to  eliminate  a  very  large  proportion  of  the  invalid 
species  that  had  from  time  to  time  crept  into  the  works  of  preceding  au- 
thors, including  many  described  by  Bachman  and  other  Americans  as  well 
as  by  foreign  naturalists.  The  variations  pointed  out  by  him  as  being  de- 
pendent upon  season  and  locality  are  important  discoveries,  since  such  va- 
riations are  also  of  common  occurrence  among  other  groups.  Two  or  three 
species  only,  besides  those  above  specified,  of  the  twelve  species  of  Sciu- 
rus admitted  in  the  work  of  this  author  seem  at  all  questionable.     These 

*  N.  Amer.  Mam.,  pp.  244  and  270. 

t  In  the  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  and  C.  J.  Maynard's  collection. 


■2-24l  bulletin  of  the 

are  the  5.  castanonolus  and  S.  limitis  from  the  little  known  region  of  North- 
ern Mexico  and  the  adjoining  Territories  northward,  whose  somewhat 
doubtful  character  is  particularly  mentioned. 

Dr.  Gray,  in  his  "Synopsis  of  American  Squirrels,"  *  quotes  Professor 
Baird's  remarks  respecting  the  wide  variation  in  color  presented  by  indi- 
viduals of  the  same  litter,  the  geographical  variation  in  size,  the  variations 
in  the  hairiness  of  the  soles  of  the  feet  at  different  seasons  and  between 
northern  and  southern  representatives  of  the  same  species  at  the  same  sea- 
son, and  also  in  respect  to  the  absence  or  presence  of  the  ear-tufts  in  dif- 
ferent individuals  of  the  same  species  from  the  same  locality ;  and  so  far 
as  he  has-  followed  Baird's  memoir  his  paper  is  to  be  commended.  As  soon, 
however,  as  extralimital  species  are  encountered  he  seems  to  have  lost  sight 
of  all  these  important  facts  quoted  by  him,  and  takes  every  considerable 
variation  in  color  as  the  basis  of  a  species.  Hence  the  greater  part  of  those 
described  by  previous  authors  receive  his  approval,  and  some  ten  or  twelve, 
apparently,  are  added  as  new  !  The  whole  number  of  American  Sciuri 
is  thus  increased  to  thirty-nine  species.  That  some  of  the  Mexican  species 
are  as  variable  as  those  of  the  United  States  is  beyond  question,  while  it  is 
probable  that  some  of  the  still  more  southern  ones  also  are.  According  to 
Dr.  Gray,  the  number  of  species  of  Asiatic  Sciuri  is  forty-nine,  an  improb- 
ably large  number,  from  which  the  excess  can  only  be  properly  eliminated 
by  a  careful  observer  residing  where  these  animals  live,  and  the  elabora- 
tion of  a  mass  of  material  far  greater  than  has  thus  far  been  brought  to- 
gether. 

54.  Pteromys  volucella  Desm.    Flying  Squirrel.    Common, 
but,  from  its  nocturnal  habits,  not  often  seen. 

Apparently  equally  mature  individuals  from  the  same  locality  are  quite 
variable  in  size,  and  somewhat  in  other  characters.  One,  remarkably 
large,  collected  by  Mr.  S.  Jillson  at  Hudson  (Mass.),  corresponds  very  well 
with  the  P.  hudsonius  Fischer  (P.  sabrinus  Rich.),  which  supposed  species 
is  almost  unquestionably  but  the  large  northern  race  of  P.  volucella. 

Richardson  described,  in  the  "Fauna  Boreali-Americana,"f  a  variety  of 
his  /'.  sabrinus  from  the  Rocky  Mountains,  to  which  he  gave  the  name 
alpinns  (/'.  snl>.,  var.  alpinus).  Wagner,  in  his  Supplement  to  Schroeber's 
Saugethiere,  J  and  Audubon  and  Bachman  in  their  North  American  Quad- 
rupeds, §  afterwards  raised  it  to  the  rank  of  a  species,  but  apparently  with 
insufficient  reason.     Professor  Baird  also  admits  P.  alpinus  as  a  species  in 

*  Ann.  and  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  1867,  p.  415.  J  Vol.  III.  p.  230. 

t  Vol.  I,  p.  195,  pi.  18.  §  Vol.  III.  p.  206. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  225 

his  Mammals  of  North  America  (p.  289),  but  remarks  that,  from  insufficient 
data,  he  was  unable  to  arrive  at  a  definite  conclusion  as  to  whether 
it  was  really  distinct  from  P.  hudsonius.  The  P.  oregonensis  of  Bachman 
seems  also  very  doubtfully  distinct  from  P.  rolucdla,  as  it  does  not  differ 
very  appreciably  from  the  Eastern  animal.  The  following  remarks  from 
Audubon  and  Bachman's  North  American  Quadrupeds*  in  respect  to 
the  number  of  species  of  North  American  Pteromys  are  very  suggestive. 
"  As  long,"  they  observe,  "  as  only  two  species  of  flying  squirrel  were 
known  in  North  America,  —  the  present  species  (P.  scibrinus)  and  the  little 
P.  volucella,  —  there  was  no  difficulty  in  deciding  on  the  species,  but  since 
others  have  been  described  in  the  far  West,  the  task  of  separating  and 
defining  them  has  become  very  perplexing." 

Specimens  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  from  Lake  Superior, 
Northern  Maine,  New  Hampshire,  Massachusetts,  and  the  Middle  States, 
form  a  graduated  series  in  size,  the  first-mentioned,  or  northern,  corre- 
ponding  with  the  P.  "  sabririus" ;  the  southern,  of  course,  with  the  true  P. 
volucella  of  authors.  Difference  in  size  has  been  the  only  appreciable  char- 
acter that  has  been  advanced  as  distinguishing  them. 

55.  Tamias  striatus  Baird.  (T.  americanus  Kuhl.  Sciurus 
striatus  Klein,  Emmons's  Rep.,  p.  68.)  Striped  Squirrel.  Chip- 
munk. Abundant.  Usually  first  seen  abroad  in  spring  towards  the  close 
of  March,  when  they  are  readily  detected  by  their  loud  clucking  note. 

A  series  of  nearly  fifty  specimens  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zo- 
ology, from  various  localities  in  Eastern  Massachusetts,  are  extremely  uni- 
form in  color,  the  variations  being  so  slight  as  to  be  scarcely  appreciable. 
A  considerable  number  of  others,  from  different  localities  in  Maine,  are 
generally  very  much  lighter  or  paler  colored.  These,  also,  vary  a  good 
deal  among  themselves,  chiefly,  however,  in  the  character  of  the  stripes, 
which  in  several  specimens  are  much  less  distinct  than  usual.  In  one  they 
are  quite  faint  and  irregular,  the  light  central  one  on  the  sides  being  alone 
well  defined,  and  this  is  at  one  point  interrupted.  The  difference  in  gen- 
eral tint  between  these  Massachusetts  and  Maine  specimens  is  quite  marked 
in  the  rufous-colored  regions  of  the  animal,  and  especially  on  the  posterior 
part  of  the  back. 

56.  Arctomys  monax  Gmelin.  Woodchuck.  Abundant.  At 
Springfield  a  number  of  specimens  of  the  black  variety  have  been  taken 
within  the  last  few  years,  and  also  three  albinos.  One  of  these  is  nearly 
white  (pale  grayish-white),  and  the  other  two  are  pale  yellowish-brown 

*  Vol.  Ill,  p.  205. 
29 


226  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

or  cream-colored.     The  latter  are  preserved  in  the  Springfield  Natural 
History  Museum. 

I  have  known  of  a  few  instances  of  the  capture  of  this  species  in 
nearly  midwinter.  Once  a  specimen  was  taken  running  in  the  highway 
early  in  February,  when  the  snow  was  a  foot  and  a  half  deep.  They 
generally  leave  their  burrows  very  early  in  spring,  often  before  the 
ground  is  fully  thawed,  but  for  some  time  after  are  irregular  in  going 
abroad,  and  are  able  to  remain  six  or  eight  days  inside  their  burrows 
without  food,  as  they  will  often  do  when  a  trap  is  set  for  them.  Till 
the  season  and  vegetation  are  somewhat  advanced  they  seem  to  take 
or  require  but  little  nourishment.  Later,  and  especially  after  the 
birth  of  the  young  in  June,  they  are  forced  in  a  much  shorter  time  to 
leave  their  holes  to  obtain  food.  In  fall  they  become  very  fat,  and 
early  in  October  generally  permanently  retire  to  their  burrows,  or  at 
least  go  abroad  then  much  less  frequently  than  earlier,  and  apparently 
take  very  little  food. 

The  Beaver  {Castor fiber  Linn.;  G.  canadensis  Kuhl)  is  to  be  reck- 
oned among  those  i'ew  animals  that,  in  this  State,  have  become  fully 
exterminated. 

The  few  differences  pointed  out  by  authors  between  the  European  and 
American  beavers,  including  the  distinction  based  on  a  comparison  of  the 
skulls,  are  too  trivial,  in  the  light  of  the  extensive  individual  variations 
now  so  well  known  to  be  almost  invariably  presented  by  a  large  series  of 
specimens  of  the  same  species  from  any  given  locality,  to  be  taken  as  satis- 
factory evidence  of  their  diversity.  The  weight  of  authority  is  also  by  far 
in  favor  of  their  identity. 

57.  Jaculus  hudsonius  Baird.  {Meriones  *  hudsonius  Aud.  and 
Bach.)     Jumping  Mouse.     Rather  common,  but  far  from  numerous. 

This  species  has  distinct  cheek-pouches,  —  a  fact  I  have  not  before  seen 
stated. 

58.  Mus  decumanus  Pallas.  Broavx  Rat.  Wharf  Rat. 
Norway  Rat.  Abundant  in  the.  cities  and  larger  villages  generally  ; 
rare  or  quite  unknown  in  the  remote  farming  districts. 

*  Meriones,  F.  Cuvier,  Dents  des  Mam.,  1S25,  1S7;  type,  Dipus  americanus  Barton. 
Not  Meriones  Illiger,  Prod.,  1811. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  227 

59.  Mus  rattUS  Linn.  Black  Rat.  Abundant  in  the  farming 
districts,  but  rare  wherever  the  brown  rat  is  numerous.  In  the  vicinity 
of  Boston  and  of  the  larger  cities  generally  it  seems  to  be  quite  un- 
known. Twenty  or  thirty  miles  from  the  coast,  and  at  a  little  distance 
from  the  large  towns  along  the  railways,  it  becomes  numerous,  and  the 
only  species  there  found.  The  brown  rat  is  its  mortal  enemy.  With 
age  this  species  changes  from  black  to  gray,  very  old  individuals  becom- 
ing very  light  colored. 

60.  Mus  musculus  Linn.  House  Mouse.  Everywhere  a 
numerous  pest.  Is  frequent  in  the  fields  under  stacks  of  grain  as  well 
as  in  houses  and  outbuildings. 

61.  Hesperomys  leucopus  LeConte.  {H.  leucopus  and  H. 
myoides  Baird.)  White-footed  Mouse.  Deer  Mouse.  A  com- 
mon species  of  the  fields  and  woods.  In  winter  it  (sometimes  at  least) 
retires  to  a  warm  nest  in  a  hollow  stump  or  log,  in  which  in  severe 
weather  I  have  found  five  or  six  together  in  a  torpid  state. 

No  species  of  our  Muridce,  excepting  possibly  the  Jaculus  hudsonius, 
presents  so  great  variations  in  color  with  season  and  age  as  the  present. 
The  young  for  the  first  two  or  three  months,  or  till  nearly  full-grown,  are 
dark  slate  or  plumbeous  above,  somewhat  lighter  below.  From  the  casting 
of  the  winter  coat  in  spring  till  late  in  autumn  the  adult  differs  more  or 
less  in  color  with  almost  every  individual,  none  presenting  the  bright  yel- 
lowish or  ferruginous  brown  seen  in  winter  and  early  spring,  but  every 
stage  between  it  and  the  plumbeous  hue  of  the  young ;  the  adult  being 
also  more  or  less  dusky  for  some  time  after  moulting.  Generally  there  is 
a  darker  band  along  the  back,  varying  in  width  in  different  specimens, 
and  in  distinctness  of  outline  ;  sometimes,  however,  the  back  is  uniform  in 
color  with  the  sides.  The  variation  in  size  is  also  considerable  between 
specimens  apparently  fully  adult.  The  tubercles  on  the  soles  of  the  hind 
feet,  on  which  specific  distinctions  are  sometimes  based,  vary  both  in  rela- 
tive size  and  position.  The  posterior  one  is  usually  situated  midway  be- 
tween the  toes  and  the  heel,  but  sometimes  more  posteriorly  or  more  an- 
teriorly. The  next  one  is  placed  between  this  and  the  third,  and  is  usually 
nearer  to  this  than  to  the  first,  it  being  sometimes  opposite  to  the  third. 
The  third  anterior  tubercle  occasionally  has  a  minute  supplemental  one  at 
its  outer  base.  But  the  most  variable  character  consists  in  the  relative 
lencth  and  number  of  the  caudal  vertebrae.     About  one  fifth  of  the  Massa- 


228  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

chusetts  specimens  have  the  tail  vertebra?  equal  to  or  longer  than  the 
head  and  body  together ;  occasionally  a  specimen  is  found  in  which 
the  tail  vertebrae  alone  exceed  this  length  by  one  fourth  to  one  half  an 
inch.  At  least  four  fifths,  however,  have  the  tail  shorter  than  the  head 
and  body,  and  occasionally  one  occurs  with  the  tail  only  equal  to  the 
body  alone.  In  these  latter  the  proportional  length  of  the  tail  vertebra?  to 
the  length  of  the  head  and  body  is  as  68  to  100  ;  in  the  other  extreme,  or 
in  those  with  long  tails,  as  118  to  100.  The  variation  between  these  ex- 
tremes is  hence  about  fifty  per  cent  of  the  mean,  —  a  striking  example  of 
the  unreliability  of  this  character  as  a  specific  distinction  already  claimed 
in  discussing  the  species  of  Mustelidce.  The  number  of  the  vertebrae  varies 
from  twenty-four  or  twenty-five  to  above  thirty.  In  regard  to  absolute 
size,  the  length  of  the  head  and  body  together,  in  Massachusetts  specimens, 
rarely  exceeds  four  inches  ;  the  average  is  between  three  and  a  quarter  and 
three  and  a  half;  perhaps  nearer  the  latter.  The  variation  in  this  respect 
is  well  illustrated  in  Professor  Baird's  table  of  measurements  of  a  large 
number  of  Middleboro'  and  other  specimens  of  this  species,  given  in  the 
Mammals  of  North  America  (p.  462). 

Through  the  seasonal  and  other  variations  in  color,  as  well  as  in  size  and 
proportions,  it  becomes  extremely  difficult  to  distinguish  the  different  North 
American  species  of  the  restricted  genus  Hespernmys,  if  so  many  species  are 
to  be  recognized  as  have  been  described,  similar  variations  apparently  oc- 
curring in  all  the  species.  That  several  exist  in  the  eastern  part  of  the 
United  States  seems  unquestionable,  but  the  validity  of  many  that  have 
been  described  from  this  region  is  at  the  same  time  highly  doubtful.  The 
H.  gossypinus,  as  defined  by  Professor  Baird,  would  at  first  seem  readily 
distinguishable  by  its  comparatively  large  size,  coupled  with  a  southern  hab- 
itat and  its  short  tail;  in  color  and  proportions  it  closely  resembles  H.  leu- 
copus.  But  since  in  II.  cofjnatm  we  have  a  form  intermediate  between 
the  two  and  intimately  allied  to  both,  the  true  standing  and  affinities  of 
each  of  the  three  become  questionable.  Some  specimens  of  Ilesperomys 
before  me  from  Florida*  differ  in  no  essential  particular  from  examples 
of  II.  leucopm  in  summer  pelage  from  Massachusetts  and  Maine.  Well- 
marked  examples  of  either  of  the  two  first  mentioned  of  these  so-called  spe- 
cies seem  sufficiently  distinct,  but  a  large  series  of  specimens  is  constantly 
presenting  intermediate  stages,  and  a  large  amount  of  variation  in  each  of 
the  would-be  distinctive  characters.  A  single  Florida  specimen  of  //. 
Nullallii  (Mus  aureolus  Aud.  and  Bach.)  differs  much  in  color  from  the 
other  Florida  specimens  of  Hesperomys,  and  from  //.  leucopm. 

*  In  addition  to  the  specimens  collected  by  myself  in  Florida  the  past  winter,  I  am 
indebted  to  Mr.  C.  J.  Maynard  for  the  opportunity  of  examining  others  obtained  there 
by  himself  the  same  season. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  229 

H.  michiganensis,  of  which  I  have  also  had  fresh  specimens  for  examina- 
tion, seems  as  well  marked  as  any  of  the  group,  through  its  small  size,  very- 
short  tail,  and  dark  plumbeous  color  at  all  seasons.  Other  specimens  col- 
lected by  myself  in  Western  Iowa,  supposed  from  their  locality  to  be  refer- 
able to  H.  sonoriensis,  differ  in  no  way  appreciably,  except  in  being  a  little 
lighter  colored,  from  average  specimens  of  Massachusetts  H.  leucopus. 

H.  myoides,  described  by  Baird  from  Canada  and  Vermont  specimens,  is 
positively  identical  with  II.  leucopus,  the  cheek-pouches  —  the  only  charac- 
ter supposed  to  distinctively  characterize  it  —  being  probably  common  to 
all  the  species  of  the  genus,  as  well  as  to  Jaculus*  I  first  became  aware 
of  the  existence  of  cheek-pouches  in  H.  leucopus  by  capturing  the  animal 
with  the  pouches  distended  with  seeds  and  grain ;  a  subsequent  examina- 
tion of  many  specimens  in  alcohol  from  Berlin,  Middleboro',f  Springfield, 
and  other  localities  in  Massachusetts,  and  from  Waterville,  Norway,  Bethel, 
Upton,  and  other  places  in  Maine,  has  fully  confirmed  this  discovery,  as  I 
have  yet  to  find  the  first  specimen  without  the  pouches.  They  almost 
uniformly  exist  as  described  by  Gapper,  —  that  is,  extending  upwards  to 
the  eye  and  posteriorly  to  the  ear.  They  are  equally  well  marked  in 
specimens  of//,  gossypinus  and  H.  "  cognatus,"  from  Florida.  J 

In  the  large  proportion  of  equivocal  species  included  among  the  thirteen 
recognized  in  the  General  Report,  to  which  one  since  described  from  In- 

*  See  antea,  p.  226. 

t  The  Middleboro'  specimens  were  collected  by  Mr.  J.  W.  P.  Jenks,  and  presented  by 
the  Smithsonian  Institution  to  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  labelled  "  Hes- 
peromys  leucopus.'1 

{  In  the  Report  on  North  American  Mammals  (p.  460)  it  is  stated,  "No  traces  of 
cheek-pouches  can  be  detected  "  in  II.  leucopus.  Under  H.  myoides  the  same  author  re- 
marks (lb.,  p.  472)  that  he  found,  much  to  his  astonishment,  decided  indications  of 
cheek-pouches  in  all  the  alcoholic  specimens  of  that  "  species  "  he  examined.  "  I  then,'' 
he  says,  "investigated  a  considerable  number  of  Middleboro'  specimens,  and  in  none 
could  I  detect  the  slightest  indication  of  anything  of  the  kind."  "  In  another  specimen," 
he  says  later  (No.  2776),  "from  Watervile,  New  York,  referable  probably  to  the  same 
species  [//.  myoides],  I  found  the  cheeks  crammed  with  large  seeds,  and  on  cutting  them 
open  could  see  that  the  latter  occupied  a  pouch  of  considerable  size.  It  is  possible  that 
this  specimen  (immature)  may  not  belong  to  H.  myoides,  if  so,  we  must  conclude  that 
in  the  ability  to  distend  the  cheeks  very  much,  even  temporarily,  the  II.  leucopus  ap- 
proaches very  closely  to  the  H.  myoides,  and  this  diminishes  still  more  the  propriety  of 
placing  the  latter  in  a  distinct  genus.  It  is  quite  possible  that  others  of  our  species  may 
have  the  cheek-pouches  more  or  less  developed."  It  hence  appears  that  the  existence 
of  cheek-pouches  in  the  other  species  of  Ilesperomys  was  finally  strongly  suspected  by 
the  author  in  question.  The  oversight  of  their  presence  in  II.  leucopus,  however,  is 
somewhat  surprising,  since  they  are  not  difficult  to  discover  in  specimens  preserved 
in  alcohol,  when  search  for  them  is  properly  made,  though  in  specimens  badly  con- 
tracted by  the  alcohol  they  might  quite  readily  escape  observation. 


230  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

diana  by  Prince  Maximilian  is  added  *  there  are  besides  the  several  doubt- 
ful ones  already  mentioned,  others  equally  questionable.  Of  those  assigned 
to  that  part  of  the  United  States  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  the  7/. 
michiganensis,  II.  leucopus,  and  H.  NuttaUii  (aureolas  Aud.  and  Bach.), 
seem  to  be  those  best  entitled  to  recognition,  while  possibly  II.  gossypinus 
may  be  also  valid  ;  but  with  my  present  knowledge  of  the  subject,  I  fail  to 
see  why  II.  texanus,  H.  indianus  (of  Prince  Maximilian),  H.  sonoriensis, 
H.  myoides,  and  II.  cognatus,  should  be  thus  regarded,  all  but  the  latter, 
and  perhaps  also  both  this  and  //.  gossypinus,  being  apparently  referable 
to  II.  leucopus.  I  do  not  hesitate  to  thus  refer  II.  sonoriensis,  and  II.  myoi- 
des, both  of  which  I  have  examined  in  the  fresh  state,  and  numbers  of 
the  latter  th.it  were  preserved  in  alcohol. 

Of  the  Pacific  Coast  species,  of  which  at  least  five  have  been  described, 
several  are  intimately  allied  to  the  H.  leucopus  of  the  East,  as  well  as  to 
each  other.  Whether  any  of  them  are  identical  with  II.  leucopus  is  not  at 
present,  from  want  of  sufficient  material,  easy  to  decide.  Should  they  prove 
to  be  so,  it  would  substantiate  a  more  extended  geographical  range  for  H. 

*  1.  Hesperomys  leucopus  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  1857,459:  =  Musculus  leucopus  Raff., 
Amer.  Monthly  Mag.,  Ill,  1823,  307. 

2.  Hesperomys  myoides  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  472;  =  Cricelus  myoides  Gappek,  Zobl. 
Journ.,  1830,  204. 

3.  Hesperomys  indianus  Maximilian,  Archiv  fur  Naturgesch.,  XVIII,  1,  1862,  111. 

4.  Hesperomys  sonoriensis  LeConte,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VI,  1853,  413;  =  H. 
sonoriensis  Baird,  N.  Am.  Main.,  474. 

5.  Hesperomys  texanus  Woodhouse,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VI,  1853,  242;  =  H. 
texanus  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  464. 

6.  HesperorAys  NuttaUii  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  467;  =  ?  Arvicola  NuttaUii  Harlan, 
Month.  Amer.  Journ.,  1832,  446;  =  Mus  (  Calomys)  aureolus  Aud.  and  Bach.,  Jour.  Phil. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VIII,  1842,  302. 

7.  Hesperomys  cognatus  LeConte,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VII,  1855,  442;  =  H. 
cognatus  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  469. 

8.  Hesperomys  gossypi?ius  LeConte,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VI,  1853,411;  =  H. 
gossypinus  I5aii:d,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  469. 

9.  Hesperomys  Boyhi  Baird,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.,  VII,  1855,  335;  =  Ibid.,  N.  Am. 
Mam.,  471. 

10.  Hesperomys  californicus  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  478;  =  Mus  californicus  Gambel, 
Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  IV,  1848,  78. 

11.  Hesperomys  eremicus  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  479. 

12.  Hesperomys  austu-us  Baird,  Proc.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VII,  1855,  336;  =  Ibid., 
N.  Am.  Mam.,  466. 

13.  Hesperomys  Gambelii  Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  464. 

14.  Hesperomys  michiganensis  Wagner,  Archiv  fur  Naturgesch.,  1848,  2,  51;  =  Mus 
michiganensis  Aud.  and  Bach.,  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VIII,  304;  =  //.  michigan- 
ensis Baird,  X.  Am.  Mam.,  470;  =  Mus  Baird'u  IIov  &  Kbmwcott,  Patent-Office 
Rep.,  Agr.,  1850  (1857),  92. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  231 

leitcopus  than  many  of  the  rodents  possess,  particularly  the  smaller  species, 
but  no  greater  than  seems  to  be  admitted  for  Jaculus  hudsonius,  its  some- 
what near  ally.  The  habitat  of  Jaculus  hudsonius,  as  now  commonly  de- 
fined, extends  from  ocean  to  ocean,  and  from  the  Arctic  regions  southward 
through  at  least  the  Middle  States  and  to  Missouri.  This,  also,  is  a  species 
remarkable  for  its  variability  in  color,  size,  proportional  length  of  the  tail 
to  the  body,  etc. ;  but  in  the  General  Report  on  the  Mammals  of  North 
America  these  differences  were  allowed  only  their  proper  value,  and  sev- 
eral species  of  authors  were  reduced  to  synonymes  in  consequence.  Had 
the  same  course  been  taken  in  respect  to  the  genus  Hesperomys,  undoubt- 
edly a  large  proportion  of  the  nominal  species  now  admitted  would  have 
been  referred  to  their  proper  rank.  There  seems  to  be  no  reason  why 
Hesperomys  leucopus  may  not  range  as  widely  as  Jaculus  hudsonius,  and 
but  little  to  show  that  such  is  not  the  case. 

62.  Arvicola  Gapperi  Vigors.  Red-backed  Mouse.  Ap- 
parently not  very  rare  in  some  localities  in  the  eastern  part  of  the 
State.  Professor  Baird  mentions  seven  specimens  sent  him  by  Mr.  J. 
"W.  P.  Jenks  from  Middleboro'.*  There  are  also  several  specimens  in 
the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  from  localities  near  Cambridge. 
It  has  not  yet  been  met  with,  however,  in  the  vicinity  of  Springfield. 
It  is  apparently  less  southern  in  its  distribution  than  the  next  following 
species. 

63.  Arvicola  riparius  Ord.  Common  Meadow  Mouse.  Abun- 
dant ;  periodically  excessively  so.  At  such  times  they  often  do  great 
harm  by  destroying  fruit  and  other  trees.  Apple-trees  a  foot  in  diam- 
eter are  sometimes  killed  by  being  girdled  by  these  destructive  animals. 
They  also  occasionally  destroy  large  numbers  of  those  of  smaller  size, 
as  well  as  of  young  pitch-pines  (Pinus  rigida  Linn.)  and  other  native 
trees.  Their  excessive  increase  is  generally  coincident  with  a  series 
of  winters  during  which  the  ground  is  covered  with  a  heavy  deposit 
of  snow,  which  protects  them  from  cold,  and  beneath  which  they 
burrow  and  commit  their  ravages.  Their  decrease  generally  occurs 
during  a  series  of  "open"  winters,  when  in  searching  for  their  food 
they  are  wholly  unprotected  from  severe  cold,  and  the  deep  freezing 
of  the  ground  obstructs  their  shallow  burrows,  within  which  they 
are  doubtless  often   frozen.     They   frequent   every  variety  of  situa- 

*  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  521. 


232  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

tion,  from  half-submerged  meadows  to  the  driest  sandy  plains.  Dr. 
Godman,  in  his  American  Natural  History,*  under  Arvicola  xan- 
thognathus,  has  very  minutely  described  the  habits  of  this  species. 
While  in  meadows  it  forms  roadways  among  the  roots  of  the  grass  on 
the  surface,  in  grain-fields  it  burrows  beneath  the  surface,  its  habits 
varying  with  circumstances.  In  the  latter  situation  the  vegetation 
is  not  generally  sufficiently  dense  to  screen  it,  hence  its  more  sub- 
terranean mode  of  life.  Their  nests  are  found  containing  newly 
born  young  from  early  in  May  till  November.  The  number  of  litters 
produced  by  a  single  female  in-  a  year  is  probably  generally  not  less 
than  three,  and  may  be  more  ;  the  young  of  the  early  litters  also  them- 
selves appear  to  have  young  the  same  season ;  hence  the  great  rapidity 
of  increase  that  obtains  in  this  species. 

Specimens,  even  from  the  same  locality,  vary  considerably  in  size,  color, 
the  texture  of  the  fur,  and  even  in  the  shape  of  the  skull,  independently  of 
considerable  variations  that  result  from  age  and  season.  On  these  variations 
have  heen  erected  numerous  nominal  species,  some  of  which  are  already 
currently  considered  as  synonymes  of  A.  riparius  Ord,  and  several  more, 
doubtless,  should  be  added  to  the  list.  Among  those  described  from  or 
attributed  to  Massachusetts  which  I  refer  to  A.  riparius  are  .1.  hirsuius 
and  A.  albo-rufescens  Emmons,f  .4.  nasuta  Audubon  and  Bachman,  J  and 
A.  Breweri  and  A.  riifidorsum  Baird  ;§  also,  A.  rufescens  De  Kay,  ||  from 
New  York. 

On  Muskeget  Island  (a  small,  uninhabited,  low  sandy  island  between 
Nantucket  and  Martha's  Vineyard)  I  recently  found  the  so-called  A.  Brew- 
eri excessively  abundant.  This  is  the  only  locality  from  which  this  sup- 
posed species  has  been  reported.  They  are  generally  much  paler  in  color 
than  the  A.  riparius  of  the  interior,  and  though  not  ditfering  from  them  ap- 
preciably in  any  other  respects,  they  form  an  interesting  insular  race.  From 
the  peculiar  character  of  the  locality,  the  scattered  beach-grass  growing 
upon  it  affording  but  slight  protection  to  these  animals  from  the  sunlight, 
the  intensity  of  which  is  greatly  heightened  by  the  almost  bare,  light-colored 
sands,  the  generally  bleached  appearance  of  the  Muskeget  Arvicola  might 
have  been  anticipated.  Specimens  occasionally  occur  of  nearly  the  ordi- 
nary color,  or  which  are  undistiuguishable  from  the  lighter-colored  speci- 

*  Vol.  H,  p.  66.  t   Report  on  Quad,  of  Mass.,  p.  60. 

|  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Vol.  VIII,  p.  2U6;  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  211,  PI. 
144,  Fig.  2. 
§  N.  Am.  Mam.,  pp.  525,  526. 
||  N.  Y.  Fauua,  Vol.  I,  p.  85,  pi.  XXII,  Fig.  1. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  233 

mens  from  the  interior ;  but  most  of  them  seem  to  be  quite  like  the  ones 
described  by  Professor  Baird.  The  mice  living  on  the  extensive  sand- 
dunes  at  Ipswich,  under  circumstances  similar  to  those  of  the  Muskeget 
mice,  often  present,  as  I  have  recently  ascertained,  the  half-white  appear- 
ance of  the  A.  "  Breiceri." 

The  A.  albo-rufescens,  described  by  Dr.  Emmons  from  two  nearly  white 
or  cream-colored  specimens  procured  at  Williamstown,  is,  as  first  suggested 
by  Audubon,  undoubtedly  but  an  albinic  variety  of  A.  riparlus.  Having 
obtained  two  specimens  at  Springfield  that  almost  exactly  accorded  with 
Emmons's  description  of  A.  albo-rufescens,  I  was  led  at  first  to  consider  it  a 
valid  species.  Subsequent  experience  convinced  me  that  this  is  not  its 
character.  Two  similarly  colored  specimens  of  the  woodchuck  (Arclomys 
monax),  unquestionably  albinic,  have  been  since  obtained  at  Springfield, 
which  differ  from  the  ordinary  condition  of  that  animal  in  the  same 
way  that  these  specimens  of  Arvicola  do  from  the  ordinary  state  of  A. 
riparius.  Aububon  and  Bachman  mention  similar  examples  that  came 
under  their  notice  ;  in  one  case  different  stages  of  albinism  were  observed 
in  the  different  individuals  of  the  same  litter.  A  short  time  since  I  myself 
received  an  interesting  albinic  example  of  this  species  from  Weathersfield, 
Vermont,  from  my  friend  Mr.  J.  P.  Stoughton,  of  which  the  following 
is  a  description  :  Beneath,  except  the  extreme  posterior  part  of  the  body, 
pure  white ;  mainly  white  above,  with  a  wide,  rather  irregular  band  of 
dusky  along  the  back;  the  anterior  part  of  the  head  and  the  cheeks  dusky; 
posterior  part  of  the  head  white,  with  several  dusky  spots  ;  ears,  thighs, 
and  a  large  spot  on  the  left  shoulder,  dusky,  with  small  axillary  spots  of 
the  same  color ;  all  the  feet  and  the  terminal  third  of  the  tail,  white. 
Irides  a  little  lighter  than  the  natural  color,  but  not  red.  Ears  conspicuous ; 
much  longer  than  the  short,  soft  fur.  A  little  smaller,  and  rather  slenderer 
than  ordinary  specimens.  Apparently  a  mature  female,  taken  August  18, 
1868.  Albinos  of  this  species  appear  to  be  not  infrequent,  the  capture  of 
a  litter  in  which  all  the  individuals  greatly  resembled  the  parti-colored  one 
above  described  having  come  to  my  knowledge  since  the  above  was  written. 

The  single  specimen  from  Holmes's  Hole,  described  as  A.  rujidorsum* 
which  is  thus  far  the  only  recognized  specimen  of  this  supposed  species  ex- 
tant, seems  to  be  but  an  unusually  highly  colored  example  of  .1  riparius. 
At  Springfield,  where  I  have  examined  hundreds  of  specimens  at  different 
seasons  of  the  year,  the  variation  in  color  is  very  considerable,  ranging  from 
decidedly  gray  on  the  one  extreme  to  as  decidedly  rufous  chestnut-brown 
on  the  other.  They  are  usually  much  grayer  in  March  and  April  than 
they  are  late  in  the  fall. 

*  See  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  526,  as  previously  cited. 
30 


234  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

The  following  is  a  partial  list  of  the  synonymes  of 

Arvicola  riparius. 

Arvicola  riparius  Ord,  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  IV,  1825,  305. 

DeKay,   Ni    Y.   Fauna,   Ft.   I,    1842,   84,   PI.   XXII,    Fig.  2. 
(Young.) 
"  "        Aud.  and  Bach.,  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Ill,  1854,  302. 

Kennicott,  Pat.  Off.  Rep.,  1856,  Agr.,  1857,  304. 
"  "        Baird,  N.  Am.  Mam.,  1857,  522. 

"        jyalustris  Harlan,  Faun.  Am.,  1825,  126. 
"        albo-rufescens  Emmons,  Quad.  Mass.,  1840. 

"  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  1842,  I,  89. 

"        hirsutus  Emmons,  Quad.  Mass.,  1840,  60. 
DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  I,  88. 
oneicla  Ibid.,  88,  PL  XXIV,  Fig.  1. 
rufescens  Ibid.,  85,  PI.  XXII,  Fig.  1. 
"        nasuta  Aud.  and  Bach.,  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sc.,  VIII  (2),  1842,  296. 

"      Ibid.,  North  Am.  Quad.,  Ill,  1853,  211,  PI.  CLXIV,  Fig.  2. 
"        pennsylvanica  Aud.  and  Bach.,  Quad.  N.  Am.,  I,  1S49,  PI.  XLV,  341. 
"        rufidorsum  Baird,  Mam.  N.  Am.,  1857,  526. 
"         Breweri  Ibid.,  525. 
"        xanthognathus  *  Codman,  Am.  Nat.  Hist.,  II,  1826,  65. 

"  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  I,  1842,  90. 

"  "  Linsley,  Am.  Jour.  Sc,  XLIII,  1842,  350. 

64.  Arvicola  pinetorum  Aud.  &  Bach.  (A.  \_Pitymys]  pine- 
torum  Baird.)  The  only  specimens  of  this  species  I  have  seen  from 
this  State  are  one  captured  at  Springfield  in  May,  1868,  by  my  brother, 
Mr.  E.  Allen,  and  one  taken  by  myself  a  few  weeks  later.  Both  were 
taken  in  the  same  field  on  the  "  pine  plains  "  east  of  the  city.  Audu- 
bon and  Bachman,  I  find,  speak  of  having  received  it  from  near  Bos- 
ton, from  Dr.  Brewer.  These  authors  also  speak  of  it  as  occurring  in 
Connecticut,  and  as  abundant  in  certain  portions  of  Rhode  Island. f 
Professor  Baird  cites  it  from  Long  Island,!  whence  Audubon  and  Bach- 
man derived  their  first  specimens  of  A.  " scalopsoides" §  which  they  af- 
terwards very  properly  considered  as  a  synonyme  of  A.  pinetorum.     It 

*  Whatever  the  u  A.  xanthognathus"  of  Leach  and  Richardson  (Faun.  Bor.  Am.,  I, 
122)  may  have  been,  the  A.  xanthognathus  of  Godman,  DeKay,  and  Linsley  unquestion- 
ably refers  to  the  A.  riparius  of  Ord. 

t   Quad.  N.  Am.,  II,  p.  216. 

}    Main.  N.  Am.,  p.  544. 

§  Journ.  Phil.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  VIII,  p.  299. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  235 

being  a  southern  species,  Massachusetts  is  probably  its  northern  limit 
Its  occurrence  here  is  comparatively  rare. 

65.  Fiber  zibethicus   Crv.      Muskrat.     Abundant.      Individ 
uals  nearly  black  are  taken  occasionally. 

HYSTRICID-ffi. 

66.  Erethizon  dorsatus  F.  Cuv.  (E.  dorsatus  and  E.  epixan- 
thus Auct.)  Porcupine.  "Hedgehog."  Occasional  on  the  Hoosac 
ranges. 

Professor  Baird,  in  his  description  of  this  species,*  thus  observes  :  "  Fur, 
dark  brown  ;  the  long  projecting  bristly  hairs  dusky,  with  white  tips  ;  spines 
white,  the  points  dusky.  Xasal  bones  not  more  than  one  third  the  length 
of  the  upper  surface  of  the  skull."  He  adds  :  "  I  regret  not  to  have  a  suffi- 
ciently perfect  specimen  of  the  common  Eastern  porcupine  before  me  to 
furnish  a  satisfactory  description.  The  differences,  however,  from  E.  epi- 
xanthus^ are  not  very  great,  consisting  cltiejly  in  the  color  of  the  tips  of  the 
long  hairs,  and  one  description  will  answer  very  well  for  both,  except  where 
the  peculiarities  of  each  are  specially  indicated.  The  range  of  this  spe- 
cies is  much  more  limited  than  previously  supposed,  as  it  is  replaced  west 
of  the  Missouri  by  the  E.  epixanthus" 

He  thus  describes  E.  epixanthus,  from  several  good  specimens:  "Gen- 
eral color  dark  brown,  nearly  black;  the  long  hairs  of  the  body  tipped  with 
greenish-yellow.  Xasal  bones  nearly  one  half  or  two  fifths  the  length  of 
the  upper  surface  of  the  skull";  which  he  says  are  not  more  than  one  third 
in  E.  dorsatus.  Nine  very  fine  specimens  of  E.  dorsatus  in  the  Museum 
of  Comparative  Zoology,  from  Central  Maine,  show  that  the  color  of  the 
projecting  bristly  hairs  is  variable.  In  one  they  are  enlirebj  black,  except 
a  very  few  about  the  head,  which  are  tipped  with  lighter ;  in  another 
those  of  the  back  are  black,  while  on  the  head,  sides  of  the  shoulders,  etc., 
they  are  tipped  with  dull  yellowish-white.  Several  have  them  of  the 
greenish-yellow  supposed  to  characterize  exclusively  E.  epixanthus;  in 
one  or  two  only  can  they  be  called  white,  while  in  one  these  bristly  hairs 
are  almost  entirely  absent,  being  quite  so  on  the  back.  The  quills  usu- 
ally project  considerably  beyond  the  fur,  but  are  sometimes  quite  con- 
cealed within  it.     Their  color  varies  from  white  to  dull  yellow.     Professor 

*  Mam.  X.  Am.,  p.  569. 

t  "  E.  epixanthus  Brandt,  M&n.  Acad,  de  St.  Petersbourg,  1835.  388,  416;  Plate  I 
(animal)  and  Plate  IX.  Fig;.  1-4,  skull." 


236  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Baird's  detailed  description  of  the  exterior  characters  of  E.  epixanthus  is 
in  every  respect  applicable  to  fully  one  half  the  specimens  from  Maine  re- 
ferred to  above,  while  none  differ  essentially  from  it.  The  differences 
referred  to  by  him  in  the  relative  length  of  the  nasals  in  the  two  sup- 
posed species  are  relatively  very  slight,  especially  as  compared  with  the 
large  amount  of  variability  presented  in  a  large  series  of  the  skulls  of 
Arctomys  monax,  or  of  our  common  squirrels  or  rabbits;  the  difference 
in  the  proportional  length  of  the  nasals  to  the  whole  length  of  the  skull, 
in  five  specimens  of  E.  epixanthus  and  three  of  E.  dorsatus,  as  given  by 
Professor  Baird,  being  but  1  per  cent;  the  nasals  in  E.  dorsatus  being  37 
per  cent  of  the  whole  length  of  the  skull,  and  in  E.  epixanthus  41.  In 
No.  G76  (E.  "dorsatus")  of  Baird's  table,  the  proportional  length  of  the 
nasals  to  the  entire  skull  is  39  per  cent;  in  No.  3066,  32  per  cent.  In 
No.  822  (E.  "  epixanthus  "  ),  39  per  cent.  In  other  words,  the  specimen  in 
the  series  of  E.  dorsatus  in  which  the  nasals  are  longest  differs  less  than 
one-third  of  one  per  cent  in  the  proportional  length  of  the  nasals  to  the 
whole  skull  from  the  specimen  with  relatively  the  shortest  nasals  in  the 
seies  of  the  E.  epixanthus  specimens. 

I  am  not  able  at  this  time  to  refer  to  M.  Brandt's  paper,  but  Water- 
house,  in  his  Natural  History  of  the  Mammalia,*  refers  to  it  as  follows  : 
"  Five  specimens  of  an  Erethizon  from  the  West  Coast  of  North  America, 
in  the  Museum  of  St.  Petersburg,  having  the  exposed  ends  of  the  longest 
hairs  of  the  fur  of  a  brownish-yellow  color  instead  of  white,  as  the  same 
hairs  are  stated  to  be  in  the  E.  dorsatus,  M.  Brandt  is  inclined  to  sup- 
pose there  are  two  species  of  Erethizon,  but  not  having  specimens  of  the 
Canada  animal  for  comparison,  he  is  not  able  to  satisfy  himself  upon 
this  point.  The  specimens  examined  by  M.  Brandt  are  from  California 
and  Unalaska,  and  I  may  add  that  a  similar  specimen  is  found  at  Sitka,  as 
I  remember  to  have  seen  a  specimen  in  the  Leyden  Museum  from  there 
agreeing  with  M.  Brandt's  description  ;  its  spines  [not  hairs]  were  most  of 
them  of  a  delicate  yellow  below  the  dark  point."  The  following  is  Mr. 
Waterhouse's  description  of  E.  epixanthus,  compiled  from  M.  Brandt's  me- 
moir :  "  The  longer  and  coarser  hairs  brownish-yellow  at  the  point ;  spines 
white  or  yellowish  at  the  base,  and  most  of  them  brownish-black  or  dusky 
at  the  apex." 

It  hence  appears  that  the  three  principal  writers  on  the  subject  —  Brandt, 
Waterhouse,  and  Baird  —  have  neither  of  them  had  specimens  of  the  two 
species  for  comparison  at  the  time  of  writing;  Brandt  having  only  his 
five  West  Coast  specimens,  Waterhouse  compiling  from  Brandt,  and 
Baird's  specimens  coming,  two  from  the  Republican  Fork,  one  from  New 
Mexico,  and  one  from  California,  with  three  or  four  skulls  from  the  East. 

*  Vol.  II,  p.  442. 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  237 

Dr.  Brandt  must  have  been  much  influenced  by  the  difference  in  locality 
■whence  his  specimens  came,  in  supposing  there  might  be  two  species  of  Ere- 
thizon, since  the  only  difference  he  points  out  —  that  of  the  color  of  the  tips 
of  the  long  hairs  —  is  one  of  a  trivial,  and,  as  all  mammalogists  must  be 
aware,  most  inconstant  character.  The  differences  in  the  skulls  discovered 
by  Professor  Baird,  though  so  appreciable,  have  less  weight  since  we  know 
that  skulls  of  individuals  of  the  same  species  from  the  same  locality  not  un- 
frequently  vary  as  much,  and  in  the  same  way.  Again,  according  to  the 
measurements  he  has  given,  and  which  are  discussed  above,  one  specimen 
of  the  one  series  of  three  is  not  appreciably  different  from  a  specimen  of 
the  other  series  of  five.  Hence,  though  having  only  Eastern  specimens  for 
examination,  I  quite  confidently  refer,  for  the  reasons  given  above,  the  E. 
epixanthus  Brandt  to  the  E.  dorsatus  F.  Cuvier.  I  am  quite  sure,  also,  that, 
had  either  Professor  Baird  or  Dr.  Brandt  possessed  a  good  series  of  E.  dor- 
satus from  Eastern  North  America,  they  could  hardly  have  admitted  the 
latter's  doubtfully  proposed  species,  even  provisionally. 

Prince  Maximilian,  in  speaking  of  the  porcupines  of  the  Upper  Missouri,* 
mentions  them  simply  under  the  generic  name  Erethizon,  stating  that  he 
was  unable  to  decide  whether  the  animal  he  observed  should  be  referred 
to  E.  dorsatus  or  to  E.  epixanthus. 

Dr.  J.  E.  Gray,  in  the  proceedings  of  the  London  Zoological  Society ,f 
has  described  a  small  specimen  of  Erethizon  from  Columbia  as  a  new  spe- 
cies, under  the  name  of  E.  (Echinoprocta)  rufescens,  although  there  is  noth- 
ing to  indicate  that  it  is  in  any  way  different  from  the  young  of  the  common 
E.  dorsatus.  The  differences  on  which  he  has  raised  it  to  a  distinct  section 
or  subgenus  are  only  such  as  characterize  the  young  or  half-grown  animal 
in  E.  dorsatus,  with  which  also  his  corresponds  in  size. 

LEPOMDiE. 

G7.  Lepus  americanus  Erxl.  (Emmons's  Rep.,  p.  5(j.)  White 
Rabbit.  Common,  but  generally  less  so  than  the  next.  Rare  in  the 
immediate  vicinity  of  Springfield,  though  numerous  at  localities  less 
than  ten  miles  distant,  in  several  directions. 

68.  Sylvilagus  nanus  Gray.J     (Lepus  sylvaticus  Bach.    Lepus 

*  Wiegmann's  Archiv,  XVIII,  Theil  I,  p.  150. 

t  1865,  121,  PI.  XI;  also  in  the  Annals  and  Magazine  of  Natural  History  of  the  same 
year. 

f  In  a  recent  paper  entitled  "Notes  on  the  Skulls  of  Hares  (Lepoi-idce)  and  Picas  (La- 
gomyidce)  in  the  British  Museum,"  Dr.  J.  E.  Gray  has  given  names  to  the  sections  of  the 
old  genus  Lepus,  first  indicated  by  Professor  Baird  in  his  well-studied  essay  on  this 
group  (N.  Am.  Mam.,  pp.  572-620),  and  raised  them  to  the  rank  of  genera,  thereby,  of 


238 


BULLETIN    OF   THE 


virginianus  Harlan,  Emm.  Rep.,  p.  58.)  Gray  Rabbit.  Abundant  in 
most  parts  of  the  State.  Less  common  in  the  more  elevated  portions, 
and  quite  unknown  in  the  higher  ranges  of  the  western  counties. 

General  Synopsis  and  Remarks  on  the  Geographical  Distri- 
bution of  the  Species. 

I.    Indigenous  Species  still  existing  in  the  State. 

1.  Lynx  canadensis  Raf.* 

2.  "      rufus  Raf* 

3.  Canis  lupus  Linn* 

4.  Vulpes  vulgaris  Cuv. 

5.  "        virginianus  DeKay.* 

6.  Mustela  Pennantii  ErxL* 

7.  "  martes  Linn.* 

8.  Putorius  vulgaris  Linn. 

9.  "  ermineus  Linn. 

10.  "  lutreolus  Cuv. 

11.  Gulo  luscus  Sabine.* 

12.  Lutra  canadensis  Sab. 

13.  Mephitis  mephitica  Baird. 

14.  Procyon  lotor  Storr. 

15.  Ursus  arctos  Linn.* 
1G.  Phoca  vitulina  Linn. 

1 7.  Cystophora  cristata  Nihson. 

18.  Cariacus  virginianus  Gray.* 

19.  Balana  cisarctica  Cope. 
20  Agaphalus  gibbosus  Cope. 

21.  Megaptera  osphyia  Cope. 

22.  Eschricbtus  robustus  Lilj* 

23.  Sibbaldius  tectirostris  Cope. 

24.  "     :      tuberosus  Cope.* 

25.  "  borealis  Fisck.* 


26.  ?  Balamoptera  rostrata. 

27.  Physeter  macrocepbalus  Pander.* 

28.  Mesoplodon  sowerbiensis.* 

29.  Orca  gladiator  Sund. 

30.  Globiocephalus  melas  Traill. 

31.  Hyperaodon  bidens  Owen.* 

32.  Beluga  canadensis  ErxL* 

33.  Largenorbynchus  sp.? 

34.  Delphinus  erebennus  Cope. 

35.  "  clymenc  Gray.* 

36.  Phocsena  americana  Agass. 

37.  Lasiurus  noveboracensis  Tomes. 

38.  "         cinereus  H.  Allen* 

39.  Scotophilia  fuscus  H.  Allen. 

40.  "  noctivagans  H.  Allen. 

41.  "  georgianus  H.  Allen. 

42.  Vespertilio  subulatus  Say. 

43.  Neosorex  palustris  Verrill* 

44.  Sorex  platyrhinus  Linsley. 

45.  Sorex  Cooperi  Bach.* 

46.  "      Forsteri  Rich.* 

47.  Blarina  brevicauda  Baird. 

48.  Scalops  aquaticus  Fisch. 

49.  "       Breweri  Bach.* 

50.  Condylura  cristata  III. 


course,  introducing  numerous  changes  in  nomenclature.  Lepus  is  restricted  to  the 
larger  species,  typically  represented  by  L.  americanus  Erxl.  and  the  European  L.  timidus 
Linn.  Thirty  species  of  the  old  genus  Lepus  are  enumerated,  hut  a  considerahle  pro- 
portion appear  to  rest  on  highly  questionable  grounds.  Dr.  Gray  enumerates  in  this 
paper  thirty-nine  species  of  Leporidce  alone,  of  which  sixteen  arc  North  American  and 
nth  American.  The  characters  of  these  groups,  so  far  at  least  as  they  relate  to 
the  North  American  species,  are  those  developed  by  Professor  Baird  in  his  excellent 
elaboration  of  this  family. 

*  Species  marked  with  the  asterisk  are  very  sparsely  represented;  among  the  Car- 
nivora  most  of  those  thus  distinguished  have  become  nearly  exterminated. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  239 

51.  Sciurus  cinereus  Linn.*  59.  Hesperomys  leucopus  LeConte. 

52.  "        carolinensis  Gmelin.  60.  Arvicola  Gapperi  Vigors. 

53.  "        hudsonius  Pall.  61.         "         riparius  Ord. 

54.  Pteromys  volucella  Linn.  62.         "         pinetorum  LeConte.* 

55.  Tamias  striatus  Baird.  63.  Erethizon  dorsatus  F.  Cuo* 

56.  Arctomys  monax  Gmelin.  64.  Lepus  araericanus  Erxl. 

57.  Fiber  zi be thicus  F.  Cuv.  65.  Sylvilagus  sylvaticus  Gray. 

58.  Jaculus  hudsonius  Baird. 

II.    Extirpated  Species. 

1.  Felis  concolor  Linn.  4.  Cervus  canadensis  Linn. 

2.  Alee  malchis  Ogl.  5.  Castor  fiber  Linn. 

3.  Tarandus  rangifer  Gray. 

III.  Adventitious  Species. 
1 .  Mus  decumanus  Zi'nn. 
3.     "     rattus  Linn. 
3.     "     inusculus  Linn. 

IV.  Northern  Species. 

[Not  occurring  in  this  State  south  of  the  Canadian  fauna  (excepting 
Lepus  americanus,  which  ranges  through  the  Alleghanian),  and  hence 
represented  only  in  portions  of  the  western  counties.]! 

1.  Mustela  Pennantii.  5.  Tarandus  rangifer. 

2.  "        martes.  6.  Arvicola  Gapperi. 

3.  Gulo  luscus.  7.  Erethizon  dorsatus. 

4.  Alee  malchis.  8.  Lepus  americanus. 

V.  Southern   Species. 

[Not  occurring  north  of  the  Alleghanian  Fauna,  and  hence  unrep- 
resented in  the  more  elevated  parts  of  the  State,  though  more  or  less 
common  in  the  other  portions.] 

f  Antea,  in  a  foot-note  to  page  147,  Cervus  canadensis  is  included  among  the  species 
there  mentioned  as  characteristic  of  the  Canadian  fauna,  as  formerly  represented  in 
Massachusetts.  I  have  since  found,  from  what  is  known  of  its  earlier  range,  that  it 
probably  once  extended  over  the  greater  part  of  the  States  lying  east  of  the  Mississippi, 
and  undoubtedly  extended  along  the  Atlantic  coast  farther  south  even  than  Southern 
New  England.  There  is  unquestionable  evidences  of  its  existence  within  the  last  fifty 
years  on  both  sides  of  the  Ohio  River  near  its  mouth;  a  locality  much  more  southern, 
faunally  as  well  as  geographically,  than  any  part  of  New  England.  Hence  it  cannot 
be  taken  as  a  species  the  southern  boundary  of  whose  habitat  marks  the  lower  limit  of 
the  Canadian  fauna,  as  there  stated. 


240  BULLETIN   OF  THE 

1.  Vulpes  virginianus.  5.  Sciurus  carolinensis. 

2.  Scalops  aquaticus.  6.  Arvicola  pinetorum. 

3.  "        Breweri.  7.  Sylvilagus  sylvaticus. 

4.  Sciurus  cinereus. 

VI.   Restricted  to  the  Eastern  Province. 

1.  Cervus  canadensis.  12.  Sciurus  cinereus. 

2.  Cariacus  virginianus.  13.        "        carolinensis. 

3.  ?  Scotophilus  georgianus.  14.        "        hudsonius. 

4.  Neosorex  palustris.  15.  Tamias  striatus. 

5.  Sorex  Cooperi.  16.  ?  Arctomys  monax. 

6.  "      Forsteri.  17.?  Hesperomys  leucopus. 

7.  "       platyrhinus.  18.  Arvicola  Gapperi. 

8.  Blarina  brevicauda.  19.         "         riparius. 

9.  Scalops  aquaticus.  20.         "  pinetorum. 

10.  "       Breweri.  21.  Lepus  americanus. 

11.  Condylura  cristata.  22.  Sylvilagus  sylvaticus. 

VII.  Species  restricted  to  America,  but  which  range  over  the  greater 

portion  of  the  Northern  Continent.* 

1.  Felis  concolor.  9.  Scotophilus  fuscus. 

2.  Lynx  canadensis.  10.  "  noctivagans. 

3.  "      rufus.  11.  Lasiurus  noveboracensis. 

4.  Vulpes  virginianus.  12.         "         cinereus. 

5.  Mustela  Pennantii.  13.  Pteromys  volucella. 

6.  Mephitis  mephitica.  14.  Fiber  zibethicus. 

7.  Procyon  lotor.  15.  Jaculus  hudsonius. 

8.  Vespertilio  subulatus.  16.  Erethizon  dorsatus. 

VIII.  Species  that  occur  throughout  the  colder  portion  of  the  Northern 

Hemisphere. 
(Cetacea  not  included.) 

1.  Canis  lupus.  8.  Ursus  arctos. 

2.  Vulpes  vulgaris.  9.  Phoca  vitulina. 

3.  Mustela  martes.  10.  Cystophora  cristata. 

4.  Putorius  erminea.  11.  Alee  malchis. 

5.  «  vulgaris.  12.  Tarandus  rangifer. 

6.  "  lutreolus.  13.  Castor  fiber. 

7.  Gulo  luscus. 

•  Probably  Sciurus  hudsonius  and  Hesperomys  leucopus  should  be  transferred  from  the 
preceding  list  to  this. 


£ 


£    - 


C3  CS 

kti  a 

CO  ** 

o  . 


tf 


w 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  241 


a. 


S  .5     •    > 


£  3  g    S    8  S        2        S  I  '§  s    J   S  ;1    g   3 


q  J  I  fc  ^       ^       >            §            ~       e  ^  S  £  t> 

.  o  **                  ....               .               

ii  j)  co  -1   «   n    «          o          co   r~    oo   o>       o       ~    n   ri    *   ui   o 

Q  C  .2  — '             r-       ,-.      ^       _       ^      „ 

1—1  a  o 

~  o  &> 

^  >— '  CO 


«2 

j?s 

•73 
C 

"a 

B 

bn 

t3 
Is 

<o 

■— 

-z 

- 

o 

c 

p 
3 

co    22 

DQ 

3 

C 
t0 

0 

fi 

3 
CJ 

~ 

o 

-fi 

J5  '3 

*r: 

b 

si 

-CSS 


08  .3    es    5 
"So03 

.       03    ,13      *►>    5° 
3  I      *"      S,    o     3 


•|    |   °         Q  *  ^      o  ■ — , — -  S           ^~  ^  s  £  & 

—  co 

Sf4  .5                  to  ^        .  .S  rt     <u  r/     ft        g  .  "33  «  2 

i-5           -2  -2     S  "3  j             9  =  1  2  ||  S        S  g  *•  I 


'5  3 


co  .3 
CD  o 
&    *5 


2   ^  I    ^     £    §        .2 

o^  a,  fe.-50>t>gpH 

~  o 


cs  _o 


5 

2 

Lutra  ca 
Mephitis 
Procyon 
Ursus  ai 

e 

-' 

a   co    -^   in   o 

s   »h    ■"        co 
o     ,_      "-         cp 


cj    *s 
*    IS 


=      -      -  I  g     o     E    ^h  a,  «  s  s     o    -3     « 

^^3  •— '      C^     CO      ^>  iO  CD     b-     00     C!  O  m     C*i     CO     i<     ifi     ^ 


242 


BULLETIN    OF   THE 


<a   2   2   =     "3 

8     rt     83   'Sb       u 


Q     2 


?   'si  -5    P 


a    n  — 


QSSo 


O       =     — 


a      s      «?   3 


X 

;■ 

o 

; 

t- 

c 

° 

tti 

o 

I — 1 

CO 

« 

a      7"-. 


S.  Q 


O     cc 


S  Ph 


a     o     > 

8   |« 

-     E    §3 

£    — 


;3         .i  — 


-a    £  ;s 


£     -^     «3 


b5 


.2    E    S 


^2    2    2  .6      — 


a-   -3  S 


H  O 


2      e    =    '-  B. 


9r  C 


8  §  5  1  .5  .j  .j 


—    v   .£: 


sr   ^    a> 


Ph      O  kJ 


>•  ^  cc 


§  tt 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  243 


c    5 

o    ~ 

o      — 


s  e  s  a  -s 


:    S         o  3    2 

,i— '  ^      -         -         ..         v.  -  I  X        <3        C 

in    <    O    *    ^    <5     -~v~  |     ' v '         K    r^ 


©~-ClC0**»ntDt^000}O  *— '  O*     CO     •*     O 


cc  <5  U  Pm  O  «»i    — . —  &  — . —  I   K  i-5 


©       ~-    d    eo    **    i.o    to       ^       oo    cj>    O  —  m    n    <f    a 


o    ^'    g       3       s    «  2  -5    § 

3     il!    i       -5       ^     o  .  s     c     5 

—    ~  ~       **       h-   **    <u   +?   o    a 


UJ 

>. 

■— 

— 

X 

f^ 

S 

Q 

o 

;_ 

— 

■d 

fci 

C3 

_ 

s 

3 

X 

<5 

J 

_U 

o 

O         f-     51     O     "f     LI     to 


5  5      »       •    2          ■    5   ™                   we 

c  S      °      2   2         2,  °2   a                  =    ° 

!  I  |  .2|,-ll§    .lis* 

v.  g«         x       -'    -     =      -,_.       V          «           =      g     -5 


P4     H<JOfe^S  "    K  <1 


£    a    e 


O     O     cJ3 


I    o    I  f  s  I    .g    *  "? 


—     ■»    co     ■*    in    o 


- 
k-3 

<N     CO 

m   1a 

•* 
o 

244 


BULLETIN   OF   THE 


X.    General  Summary. 

Number  of  indigenous  species  still  living  in  the  State  .        .         .  *65 

"  species  already  extirpated 5 

"         adventitious  species 3 — 

Whole  number 73 

Number  of  land  species  (including  the  seals) 52 

"  marine  species  (the  cetaceans)        .....             18 

"  northern  species  | 7 

"  southern  species  f   ........               8 

"  species  restricted  to  the  region  east  of  the  great  sterile  plains    22 

"  "      that  range  over  the  greater  part  of  the  continent            15 

"  "      common  to  North  America  and  the  North  Old  World   13 

"  "      that  are  numerously  represented 

"  "      that  are  sparsely  represented 

"  "•      of  Felidae  (including  1  extirpated) 

"  "  Canida? 

"  "  Mustelidae 

lt  "  Ursida: 

"  «  Phocidae 

"  "           Cervidse  (including  3  extirpated) 

«  "  Balamidae 

"  "           Physeteridae     .... 

"  "           Delphinidaj  ..... 

»  "           Vespertilionid* 

"  "  Soricidse 

«  "  Talpidffi 

"  »           Sciuridae  (including  1  extirpated) 

»  <■<■          Muridae  (including  3  adventitious) 

«  "  Hystricida; 

"  "          Leporida;           .... 

"  "          Carnivora  (5  families)  . 

"  "          Ruminantia  (1  family)      . 

"  "          Cetacea  (3  families)      . 

"  "           Insectivora  (3  families)     . 

«  "          Rodentia  (4  families)    . 

Number  of  families  represented  .... 


Less  than  one  half  of  the  indigenous  species  existing  in  the 


28 

45 

3 


6 

5 

3 

7 

9 

1 

2 

18 

4 

8 

14 

19 

16 


State,  as 


indicated  above  in  Table  I,  are  common,  and  more  than  a  third  are 

•  Emmons  pave  41 ;  Linslev,  for  Connecticut,  52;  DeKay,  for  New  York,  60. 
t  See  notes  to  Tables  IV  and  V,  antea,  p.  239. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  245 

rare.  The  common  ones,  with  a  few  exceptions  (Putorius  lutreolus,  P. 
ermineus,  and  Mephitis  mephitica  among  the  carnivores,  Vespertilio  sub- 
ulatus  and  Lasiurus  noveboraeensis  among  the  bats),  belong  to  the  three 
families  of  rodents,  —  the  squirrels  (Sciuridce),  the  mice  (Muridce),  and 
the  hares  (Leporidce),  —  and  to  the  Balcenidce  and  Delpkinidce,  which 
latter  are,  of  course,  marine.  In  species  and  families,  the  carnivores 
and  rodents  are  about  equally  represented,  but  in  individuals  any  one 
of  the  more  common  rodents  outnumbers  all  the  carnivores  together. 
Probably  a  single  species  of  Arvicola  (A.  riparius)  alone  outnumbers, 
when  it  is  most  abundant,  all  the  other  mammals. 

The  list  of  Extirpated  Species,  forming  Table  II,  five  in  number,  is 
composed  entirely  of  such  animals  as,  from  their  large  size  and  being 
special  objects  of  the  chase,  would  be  expected  to  earliest  disappear. 
Two  of  the  four  species  of  Cervidce  (Alee  malchis,  Tarandus  rangifer) 
have  not  existed  in  the  southern  half  of  New  England  since  the  discov- 
ery of  the  continent  by  Europeans,  except  in  the  mountains  of  "Western 
Massachusetts,  and  there  probably  only  as  occasional  migrants  from  the 
contiguous  region  north.  They  may  have  existed  in  comparatively 
recent  times  in  portions  of  the  Alleghanies,  but  respecting  such  existence 
we  have  no  certain  record.  At  a  remote  period  they  must  have  lived 
much  farther  south  than  they  do  now,  or  than  they  have  within  the  last 
three  centuries,  since  bones  of  the  Caribou  have  been  found  by  Profes- 
sor Wyman  in  the  Kjoekkenmoeddings  of  Southern  Maine,  and  teeth  that 
he  believes,  but  does  not  positively  assert,  belong  to  this  species  in  those 
of  Cape  Cod.  A  positive  evidence  of  the  former  much  greater  south- 
ward extension  of  the  habitat  of  this  animal  is  indeed  already  at  hand,  a 
small  antler  and  fragments  of  others  of  the  Caribou  being  included  in 
the  very  large  collection  of  the  remains  of  living  and  extinct  species  of 
mammalia  recently  brought  by  Professor  N.  S.  Shaler  to  the  Museum 
of  Comparative  Zoology  from  Big  Bone  Lick,  Kentucky.*  Remains 
of  the  elk  and  the  moose  having  been  found  in  the  shell-mounds  of  the 
Atlantic  coast  as  far  south  as  New  Jersey,  we  have  evidence  that  these 
species  existed  thus  far  south  in  comparatively  recent  times. 

To  the  list  of  the  "  extirpated  species,"  nine  t  that  are  now  ex- 

*  See  Professor  Shaler's  remarks  concerning  these  specimens  in  Proc.  Bost.  Soc. 
Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  XIII,  1869. 

t  Lynx  canadensis,  L.  rufus,  Canis  lupus,  Mustela  Pennantii,  M.  marles,  Gulo  luscus, 
Ursus  arctos,  Cariacus  virginianus,  Erethizon  dorsaius. 


246  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

tretnely  rare,  some  of  them  probably  being  but  casual  visitors  from 
Vermont  or  New  York,  must  soon  be  added.  The  fisher  and  the  wol- 
verine may  be  even  now  extinct,  and  the  common  deer  exists  in  the 
wild  state  only  by  legal  protection. 

The  three  adventitious  species  (see  Table  III),  which  are  the  most 
noxious  of  our  mammalia,  are  intruders  that,  like  many  of  the  common 
weeds,  have  accompanied  civilized  man  in  his  voyages  till  they  are 
almost  cosmopolitan  in  their  distribution. 

Table  IV,  composed  of  northern  species,  consists,  with  one  exception 
(Arvicola  Gapperi),  also  of  species  of  large  size,  and  such  as  are  special 
objects  of  the  chase,  either  for  their  fur  or  for  food.  They  hence  early 
disappear  before  the  advance  of  civilization,  and  it  is  now  almost  im- 
possible to  determine  in  respect  to  some  of  them  where  was  formerly 
their  natural  southern  limit  of  distribution.  At  present  none  of  them 
(Lepus  americanus  excepted)  range  below  the  southern  boundary  of 
the  Canadian  fauna,  though  some  may  have  formerly  extended  across 
the  next  fauna  south.  The  occurrence  of  Mustela  martes  and  M.  Pen- 
nantii  in  the  Alleghanies,  the  latter  as  far  south  as  Buncomb  County, 
North  Carolina,  is  well  established,*  but  they  seem  to  be,' or  to  have 
been,  —  they  being  now  apparently  nearly  exterminated  there,  —  con- 
fined to  the  mountains,  and  hence  also  to  the  Canadian  fauna.  Yet 
one  or  both  of  them  have  occurred  in  a  few  known  instances  at  points 
rather  more  southern,  faunally,  than  their  usual  range,  but  apparently 
only  during  casual  migrations  in  winter. 

The  Erethizon  dorsatus,  however,  seems  to  have  formerly  occnrred 
at  points  clearly  within  the  Alleghanian  fauna,  as  in  Western  New 
York,f  Northern  Ohio,  |  Northern  Indiana,  Southern  Michigan,  and 
Southern  Wisconsin ;  §  but  it  has  disappeared  in  all  the  more  thickly 
settled  parts  of  the  United  States  ;  east  of  the  Mississippi  it  does 
not  now  occur  south  of  the  Canadian  fauna. 

The  Lepus  americanus,  also  chiefly  northern  in  its  distribution, 
ranges,  as  before  stated,  a  little  farther  south  than  the  others,  and  finds 
its  southern  limit  near  the  south'ern  boundary  of  the  Alleghanian  fauna. 

*  Audubon  and  Bachman,  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Vol.  I,  p.  314. 
t  Dr.  J.  E.  DeKay,  N.  Y.  Fauna,  Vol.  I,  p.  79. 

X  Wm.  Case,  Esq.,  in  Audubon  and  Bachman's  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Vol.  I,  p.  285. 
§  R.  Kennicott,  Pat.  Off.  Rep.,  Agr.,  1857,  p.  91;  I.  A.  Lapham,  Transact.  Wise.  State 
Agr.  Soc,  1852,  p.  340. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  247 

Table  V,  comprising  those  species  that  do  not  occur  north  of  the 
Alleghanian  fauna,  embraces  but  one  of  relatively  large  size,  —  Vul- 
pes  virginianus,  —  which  is  also  the  only  carnivore  ;  the  others  are 
two  moles  and  four  rodents.  The  presence  of  the  species  of  this  list, 
and  the  absence  of  those  of  the  preceding,  form  the  faunal  differences 
that,  among  mammals,  distinguish  the  Alleghanian  from  the  Canadian 
fauna.  The  other  thirty-three  species  of  land  mammals  represented 
in  the  fauna  of  Massachusetts,  and  which  are  common  to  the  other  New 
England  States,  New  York,  the  northern  tier  of  the  States  westward  to 
the  Mississippi,  and  the  greater  portion  of  the  Canadas,  range  widely  both 
to  the  north  and  to  the  south,  and  some  of  them  also  to  the  westward, 
extending  throughout  the  colder  parts  of  the  northern  hemisphere,  as  is 
indicated  by  Tables  VII  and  VIII  * 

*  In  this  connection  a  word  in  reference  to  the  nature  of  faunae  may  not  be  out  of 
place,  since  naturalists  of  some  eminence,  but  who  cannot  have  thoroughly  investigated 
the  subject,  appear  to  think  that  no  faunal  districts  are  recognizable  unless  there  is  an 
entire  or  almost  an  entire  change  in  the  species  represented,  while  some  altogether  dis- 
card such  distinctions.  Such  an  extensive  change  more  properly  characterizes  the 
larger  divisions  in  geographical  zoology,  as  the  provinces  and  realms.,  rather  than  faunae. 
It  rarely  happens  that  any  species  is  restricted  within  the  limits  of  a  single  fauna,  and 
also  rarely  within  those  of  two.  There  is  not  a  single  well-known  species  of  mammal  or 
bird  but  inhabits  (taking  the  breeding  range  only  of  the  latter)  an  area  embracing  two 
or  more  faunae,  and  but  few  that  do  not  range  over  more  than  two.  The  greater  part 
extend  over  three,  and  a  large  proportion  have  a  still  wider  distribution,  as  shown  by 
Tables  VII  and  VIII  (see  remarks  respecting  these  beyond).  But  in  going  north  or 
south  from  any  point  within  the  temperate  zones,  one  observes  at  certain  intervals  (gen- 
erally of  about  six  or  seven  degrees  of  mean  annual  temperature)  a  marked  change  in 
the  species,  through  the  disappearance  of  some  and  the  appearance  of  others;  this  change 
giving  rise  to  well-marked  differences  in  the  general  facies  of  the  fauna  at  points  not 
far  distant.  The  habitats  of  species  being  in  the  main  nearly  coincident  in  their  northern 
and  southern  boundaries  with  isothermal  lines,  and  not  with  paralells  of  latitude;  and 
since  a  number  of  species  usually  disappear  at  nearly  the  point  at  which  a  number  of 
others  first  make  their  appearance,  the  limits  of  faunae  are  thus  readily  defined,  at  least 
approximately.  As  isotherms  necessarily  vary  with  every  inequality  in  the  surface  of 
the  country,  they  rarely  correspond,  as  is  well  known,  with  the  parallels  of  latitude  ; 
and  plants  and  animals  sharing  the  same  apparent  irregularity  in  their  distribution, 
some  naturalists  have  been  led  to  discredit  the  existence  of  recognizable  zoological  and 
botanical  districts,  or  of  any  definite  system  in  the  distribution  of  animals  and  plants. 

Faunre,  then  (the  term  fauna  in  its  restricted  sense  being  usually  and  properly  em- 
ployed to  designate  the  smallest  zoologieo-geographical  district),  it  may  be  added,  are 
characterized  by  the  peculiar  association  of  species.  Generally  about  twenty-five  per 
cent  of  those  embraced  in  either  of  two  adjacent  faunae  are  absent  from  the  other. 
Rarely  do  adjoining  faunae  differ  essentially  in  genera,  though  necessarily  more  or  less  occa- 
sionally. The  absence  or  presence  of  genera,  sub-families,  families,  and  even  sometimes 
orders,  more  properly  characterizes  the  higher  sub-divisions,  as  provinces  and  realms. 


248  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Each  of  the  twenty-one  species  mentioned  in  the  next  table  (Table 
VI)  has  a  comparatively  restricted  range,  the  western  limit  of  their 
habitats  being  in  most  cases  the  eastern  border  of  the  sterile  plains  of 
the  middle  province.  This  list  is  composed  principally  of  shrews, 
moles,  and  rodents  ;  none  of  the  first  two  groups  and  but  a  few  of  the 
latter  ranging  across  the  continent.  The  absence  of  carnivores  from 
this  list  is  its  most  striking  feature. 

Table  VII  embraces  fifteen  species  that,  while  restricted  to  America, 
range  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific,  and  possess  a  correspondingly 
wide  distribution  in  latitude,  most  of  them  occurring  nearly  throughout 
the  northern  continent.  This  list  is  composed  almost  exclusively  of 
carnivores  and  bats,  all  but  one  of  the  Massachusetts  species  of  the 
latter  having  been  found  in  California,  and  at  various  intermediate 
points. 

Table  VIII  contains  thirteen  species  that  are  regarded  in  this  paper  as 
common  to  the  Old  Word  and  the  New ;  ten  of  these  are  carnivores, 
and  include  all  the  New  England  species  of  that  group,  except  those 
embraced  in  the  preceding  list.  The  geographical  distribution  of  these 
species,  and  of  the  groups  to  which  they  belong,  affords  further  evi- 
dence in  favor  of  the  supposition  of  the  specific  identity  of  their  repre- 
sentatives on  the  two  continents  above  assumed ;  each  species  rang- 
ing as  far  north  on  both  as  it  seems  possible  for  mammalian  life 
to  exist.  Each  has  also  an  extended  distribution  southward,  on  each 
continent,  some  of  them  ranging  nearly  or  quite  to  the  tropics  ;  which 
shows  them  to  be  fitted  to  exist  under  widely  varying  physical  condi- 
tions. These  conditions  in  the  northern  portions  of  their  respective 
habitats  differ  much  more  from  those  of  the  southern  portions  than  those 
of  localities  on  the  two  continents  ordinarily  do  when  situated  under 
the  same  isotherm.  The  representatives  of  the  species  in  question 
from  the  eastern  and  western  continents  differ  less,  as  has  been  previ- 
ously stated,  when  the  specimens  compared  are  taken  from  those  por- 
tions nearly  contiguous,  as  Northwestern  America  and  Northeastern 
Asia,  than  when  they  come  from  such  widely  distant  points  as  East- 
ern North  America  and  Western  Europe,  the  nearest  affinity  being 
between  those  from  the  localities  first  mentioned,  and  the  widest  differ- 
ences between  those  from  the  latter.  The  easternand  western  continents, 
moreover,  approach  each  other  so  nearly  at  Behring's  Straits,  that  sev- 
eral of  the  species  in  question  are  able  to  pass  occasionally  from  one  to 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  249 

the  other.  It  hence  seems  unnecessary  to  suppose  the  former  existence 
of  an  Atlantic  continent  to  explain  their  present  distribution.  It  is  also 
a  noteworthy  fact  that  no  cases  of  close  affinity  among  the  mammals 
inhabiting  these  two  continents  occur  in  species  that  do  not  range  very 
far  to  the  northward,  as  in  the  Felidce  rfor  example,  where  the  only  case 
at  all  suggestive  of  identity,  or  even  of  close  relationship,  occurs  be- 
tween the  Lynx  canadensis  of  Northern  North  America  and  the  Lynx 
lynx  of  Northern  Europe  ;  both  of  which  species  range  the  farthest 
north  of  any  of  their  family,  and  reach  the  Arctic  regions. 

All  the  circumpolar  species,  the  beaver  alone  excepted,  pertain  to 
the  most  highly  organized  groups  found  in  the  colder  portion  of  the 
northern  hemisphere,  and  to  which  belong  not  only  all  the  widely  rang- 
ing species  of  the  north  temperate  and  boreal  regions,  but  those  of 
this  character  everywhere.  With  three  exceptions,  all  are  carnivores. 
Two  of  the  others  are  ruminants,  and  one  is  a  rodent. 

The  species  most  highly  organized  in  their  respective  families,  orders, 
or  classes  are  almost  universally  those  that  possess  the  widest  geo- 
graphical distribution  ;  partial  exceptions  occur  only  in  groups  where 
the  means  of  locomotion  is  specialized,  or  unusually  developed,  as  in  the 
bats  among  mammals.  The  shrews,  moles,  and  rodents,  which  comprise 
about  three  fifths  of  the  species  of  the  North  American  mammals,  are 
groups  of  low  structural  rank,  and  abound  in  species  of  comparatively 
local  distribution.  In  this  great  number  there  are  but  five  dt  six, 
allowing  the  broadest  latitude  in  respect  to  the  limitation  of  the  species, 
that  at  all  approach  to  a  continental  distribution,  and  only  three  as  the 
species  are  usually  restricted.*  This  is  about  two  one-hundredths  of 
one  per  cent.  Only  one  can  be  regarded  as  identical  with  any 
Old  World  species.  In  the  canivores,  on  the  other  hand,  excluding 
sub-tropical  and  nominal  species,  the  number  of  those  that  range 
over  most  of  the  continent  reaches  nearly  seventy-five  per  cent,  while 
fifty  per  cent,  or  one  half,  are  identical  with  Old  World  species.  In 
the  ruminants,  which  rank  below  the  carnivores,  but  far  above  the 
rodents  and  insectivores,  the  species  having  a  similarly  wide  range  on 
this  continent,  number  not  far  from  thirty  per  cent.  Several  of  them  are 
identical  with  Old  World  species.     The  bats,  though  a  low  group,  are, 

*  Castor  fiber,  Fiber  zibethicus,  and  Jaculus  hudsonins.  Probably  the  following  may  be 
added  to  the  list  of  those  that  range  across  the  continent:  Erethizon  dorsatus,  Scvdrus 
hudsonius,  Pleromys  volucella,  Hesperomys  leucopus. 


250  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

from  their  special  means  of  locomotion,  able  to  range  widely  ;  but  to 
their  allies,  the  moles  and  shrews,  mountain  chains  and  arid  plains  prove 
impassable  barriers. 

The  same  laws  in  respect  to  the  character  of  the  species  that  among 
mammals  have  a  wide  distribution  are  equally  exemplified  in  birds, 
all  the  wide-ranging  species  being  of  high  rank,  or  such  members  of 
lower  groups  as  have  the  power  of  flight  unusually  developed.  The 
modification  of  the  anterior  limbs  into  organs  of  flight  specially  charac- 
terizing the  class  of  birds  among  vertebrates,  it  is  evident  that  well-de- 
veloped wings  are  one  of  the  elements  essential  to  a  high  grade  of 
structure  ;  and  this  renders  necessary  the  coincidence  in  this  class  of 
high  rank  with  a  wide  geographical  range.  The  few  land-birds  that  em- 
brace a  large  portion  of  the  two  northern  continents  within  their  respec- 
tive habitats  belong  principally  to  three  families,  —  the  finches,  and  the 
hawks  and  owls.  The  first  is  one  of  the  highest,  if  not  the  highest, 
family  of  the  class,  and  the  others  are  by  no  means  low.  The  other 
species  which  have  a  circumpolar  distribution  are  among  the  highest 
members  of  their  respective  families,  and  are  rarely  of  a  low  grade. 
The  finches  thus  distributed  all  belong  to  the  highest  genera  of  their 
family.  Among  the  birds  having  a  wide  distribution,  but  which  are  re- 
stricted to  a  single  continent,  are  the  typical  thrushes,  another  of  the 
higher  groups.  The  species  of  the  short-winged  genera  of  the  Fringil- 
lidae  and  Turdidae,  on  the  other  hand,  are  almost  invariably  the  most  cir- 
cumscribed in  their  habitats.*  This  coincidence  in  respect  to  structure 
and  distribution  is  also  exemplified  in  every  sub-family,  as  well  as  family, 
among  the  water-birds  ;  but  it  is  not  necessary  to  trace  it  further  here. 

Hence  the  view  above  taken  in  reference  to  the  species  claimed  to  be 
common  to  the  Old  World  and  the  New  is  supported,  not  only  by  the 

*  Compare*  the  species  of  Tardus  with  those  of  Tlarporlujnchus  and  Mimus;  of  Poocce- 
tes  and  Passt  rculus  ( see  observations  on  some  of  the  supposed  species  of  Passerculus  in 
Mem.  Bost,  Soc.  Nat.  I  list.,  Vol.  I,  p.  r,l5)  with  those  of  Melospiza,  Cotwniculus,  and 
Ammodron  us ;  or  those  of  the  sub-family  Coccotkravstince  with  those  of  the  sub-family 
■  llince.  Compare,  also,  in  the  Sylvicolida .  the  species  of  D<  ndi  acn  with  those  of  Geo- 
(hhjpis.  Also  note  the  very  high  rank  of  the  species  of  sEgiolhus,  Pinicola,  and  I 
trqphanes,  and  the  wide  extent  of  their  habitats.  Compare  further,  in  Falconida,  the 
species  of  Falconince,  with  their  long  pointed  wings  and  compact  firmly  knit  muscular 
bodies,  giving  unequalled  powers  of  flight,  and  their  extensive  habitats,  in  several  in- 
stances embracing  a  whole  hemisphere,  with  the  comparatively  short-winged,  sluggish, 
and  clumsy  species  of  Bulconince,  of  a  much  lower  type  of  structure  and  much  narrower 
range. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  251 

evidence  already  given  in  the  special  discussion  of  each  case,  but  by 
the  fact  of  the  near  approximation  of  their  habitats,  and  by  general 
principles. 

The  thirteen  species  of  land  mammalia  common  to  North  America 
and  the  Old  World  embraced  in  the  fauna  of  Massachusetts  comprise 
all  thus  distributed  now  known,  except  two  or  three  very  boreal  ones. 
The  faunae  of  the  two  continents  are  really  quite  different, —  not  totally 
so,  as  has  been  claimed,  —  though  represented  largely  by  genera  and 
families  common  to  the  two.  These  and  the  circumpolar  species  show 
that  a  close  relationship  exists  between  them,  the  resemblance  being, 
in  fact,  far  greater  than  between  the  faunae  of  Southern  Mexico  and 
Canada.  The  difference  between  the  fauna?  of  the  subtropical  and  cold 
temperate  zones  on  either  continent  is  many  times  greater  than  between 
the  faunae  of  the  temperate  and  boreal  regions  of  North  America  and 
the  same  regions  of  the  Old  World.* 

But  four  species  have  been  attributed  to  the  States  adjoining  Massa- 

*  The  distribution  of  vegetable  life  in  zones,  differing  from  each  other  in  general  char- 
acter and  corresponding  in  their  limitation  with  climatic  or  isothermal  zones,  and  their 
similar  succession  at  different  altitudes  on  mountain  slopes  and  in  different  latitudes  at 
the  ordinary  level  of  the  land,  was  partially  very  early  recognized,  but  first  full}'  demon- 
strated only  half  a  century  ago,  by  Baron  Alexander  von  Humboldt.  It  was  somewhat 
later  before  it  was  clearly  shown  that  the  same  law  holds  in  respect  to  the  distribution 
of  terrestrial  animal  life,  which  was  done  in  1845  by  Professor  Louis  Agassiz,1  and 
somewhat  later  still  Professor  Dana  disclosed  its  presence  in  the  distribution  of  ma- 
rine life,  in  his  admirable  essay  on  the  geographical  distribution  of  the  crostacea.2 
Yet  most  recent  writers  who  have  given  attention  to  the  geographical  distribution 
of  animals  appear  to  have  overlooked  this  grand  fact,  and  hence  have  been  led  to 
adopt  a  highly  artificial  division  of  the  earth's  surface  in  respect  to  its  primary  ontologi- 
cal  regions.  While  geographical  botanists  have  so  generally  recognized  the  influence 
of  climate,  and  especially  of  temperature,  in  determining  the  limits  of  distribution  of 
plants  in  latitude  and  in  altitude,  zoologists,  with  only  a  few  exceptions,  have  very 
imperfectly  appreciated  these  important  influences  upon  the  distribution  of  animals. 
While  the  relation  of  the  present  distribution  of  life  to  the  existing  means  of  communi- 
cation between  the  different  bodies  of  land  and  to  the  earlier  conditions  in  this  respect 
are  of  the  highest  importance  in  investigations  of  this  kind,  if  this  is  the  only  element 
taken  into  account,  as  is  sometimes  the  case,  climatic  influences  being  for  the  time  over- 

1  "  Note  sur  la  Distribution  G^ographique  des  Animaux  et  de  l'Homrae."  Bulletin 
de  la  Societe"  des  Sciences  Naturelles  de  Neuchatel,  Tom.  I,  1845.  See  also,  by  the  same 
author,  a  paper  on  the  "  Geographical  Distribution  of  Animals,"  in  the  Edinburgh  New 
Philosophical  Journal,  Vol.  XLVI,  1850,  pp.  1-25.  Also  his  "  Sketch  of  the  Natural 
Provinces  of  the  Animal  World  and  their  Relation  to  the  different  Types  of  Man,"  in 
Nott  and  Gliddon's  Types  of  Mankind,  1854,  p.  lviii. 

2  U.  S.  Expl.  Exped.  Reports,  Crustacea,  Vol.  II,  1852,  pp.  1451-1500. 


252  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

chusetts  that  have  not  been  detected  in  the  latter.  Two  of  them  — 
Didelphys  virginiana  Shaw,  and  Lepus  glaciulis  Leach,  the  former 
occurring  in  Southern  New  York,  and  the  other  attributed  to  Northern 
Maine,  and  known  to  occur  in  Newfoundland  *  —  are  not  likely  to  occur 
here.  The  other  two,  Sorex  Thompsonii  Baird  f  and  Blarina  augusti- 
ceps  Baird,$  —  the  latter  described  from  a  specimen  taken  at  Burling- 
ton, Vermont,  and  the  other  reported  from  the  same  locality,  from 
Halifax,  N.  S.,  and  Maine,§ — are  of  a  highly  questionable  character. 
What  has  been  called  Sorex  Thompsonii  (the  young  probably  of  either 
S.  Forsteri  or  S.  Cooperi)  doubtless  occurs  here. 

looked,  the  argument  is  one-sided,  only  half  the  truth  is  reached,  and  the  general  view  is 
a  distorted  one.1 

As  I  have  already  remarked  above,  the  mutual  resemblance  between  the  faunae  and 
florae  of  the  boreal  portions  of  North  America  and  those  of  the  Europeo-Asiatic  con- 
tinent is  exceedingly  great,  amounting  in  the  arctic  portion,  as  was  long  since  pointed 
out,2  almost  to  identity.  In  the  Arctic  province,  which  occupies  the  woodless  tracts  in 
the  extreme  north  of  both  continents,  more  than  four  fifths  of  the  species  found  on  the 
one  continent  occur  on  the  other.  While  a  few  of  the  small  number  that  inhabit  this 
region  are  restricted  to  it,  the  larger  part  range  much  farther  to  the  southward,  the 
majority  even  over  the  colder  part  of  the  north  temperate  zone,  and  several  throughout 
this  zone.  Besides  the  mutual  floral  and  faunal  resemblance  between  the  two  northern 
continents  imparted  by  this  wide  distribution  of  the  circuinpolar  species,  this  resem- 
blance is  increased  by  the  large  number  of  genera  that  are  circumpolar,  besides  those 
that  embrace  the  circumpolar  species,  and  the  occurrence  of  other  forms,  both  specific 
and  generic,  that  are  closely  allied.  It  is  also  true  that  among  the  forms  restricted  to 
each  continent  are  a  few  family  groups;  yet  the  number  of  these,  as  of  species  and  gen- 
era, that  occur  in  the  tropical  and  not  in  the  colder  temperate  regions  on  either  continent 
is  far  greater  than  that  of  those  peculiar  to  either  of  the  two  northern  continents.  Con- 
sequently to  apply  as  ontologico-geographic  designations  such  terms  as  "  Palseogean 
Creation"  to  the  Eastern  world  and  "Neogean  Creation"  to  the  Western,  virtually  im- 
plies the  ignoring  of  the  real  close  affinity  of  the  life  of  the  whole  northern  hemisphere 
at  the  northward,  and  the  vast  difference  between  that  of  the  tropical  and  the  cooler 
north  temperate  regions  on  the  same  continent.  But  a  further  discussion  of  this  point 
is  uncalled  for  now,  and  is,  moreover,  the  more  out  of  place  here,  since  I  shall,  I  trust, 
soon  have  an  opportunity  to  treat  it  in  detail  in  a  more  legitimate  connection. 

*  Quad.  N.  Am.,  Vol.  I,  p.  248.  t  N.  Am.  Mam.,  p.  34. 

t  Ibid.,  p.  47. 

$  Proc.  Bost.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  IX,  p.  169. 

i  See  Murray's  Geog.  Distrib.  of  Mammals ;  Wallace's  Malay  Archipelago,  etc. 
2  See  Agassiz's  papers,  cited  above. 

Cambbidge,  October,  1869. 


ERRATA. 

Page  144,  lines  11  and  12,  for  riparia  read  riparius. 

147,  line    9  from  bottom,  for  dorsata  read  dorsatus. 

148,  "  15,  for  fourth  read  sixth  ;  for  third  read  fifth. 
152,  "  27,  after  species  insert  of  ttiis  group. 
155,  "  .32,  for  fulvus  read  vulgaris. 
187,  "      9  from  bottom,  for  Murry  read  Murray. 

191,  "      6,  for  Isabdlinus  read  isabellinus. 

192,  "    37,  for  Murry  read  Murray. 
207,    "      7,  for  Gray  read  Tomes. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  25'i 


No.  9. — Preliminary  Report  on  the  Echini  and  Star-fishes 
dredged  in  deep  water  between  Cuba  and  the  Florida  Reef, 
by  L.  F.  de  Pourtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey ;  pre- 
pared by  Alexander  Agassiz. 

(Communicated  by  Professor  B.  Peikce,  Sur't  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.) 

I.    Catalogue  of  the  Echini. 

Cidaris  annulata  Gray,  Proc.  ZoSl.  Soc,  1855. 

Syn.  Cidaris  metularia  Lutk.  (non  Lam.)  Bid.  til  Kunds.  om  Echin. 
Liifken  has  adopted  for  the  common  West  India  species  the  name  of  C. 
metularia  Lam.,  which  he  compares  carefully  with  Cidaris  tribuloides.  It 
is  evident  from  his  descriptions  that  his  C.  tribuloides  is  the  Cidaris  metula- 
ria Lam.  ;  he  says  himself  that  he  may  not  have  had  the  true  C.  tribuloi- 
des Lam.  From  a  direct  comparison  with  original  specimens  of  Lamarck 
of  both  these  species,  kindly  sent  the  Museum  by  Professor  Valenciennes, 
there  is  no  doubt  that  both  C.  tribuloides  Lam.  and  Cidaris  metularia  Lam. 
inhabit  the  Red  Sea;  the  latter,  however,  has  a  much  more  extensive 
range,  and  occurs  as  far  as  the  Sandwich  Islands,  being  quite  common  in 
the  East  Indian  archipelago.  The  Cidaris  metularia  Lam.  is  also  identical 
with  the  species  which  I  named  Gymnocidaris  minor  in  the  Museum  Bul- 
letin (1863).  Not  having  at  the  time  had  the  opportunity  of  examining 
series  of  different  ages,  I  find  that  the  differences  which  had  been  con- 
sidered as  specific  are  simply  different  stages  of  growth.  I  have  adopted 
for  our  West  India  species  the  name  given  by  Gray,  satisfied  that  he 
possessed,  as  far  as  I  could  judge  from  his  description,  specimens  of  the 
only  littoral  species  thus  far  found  in  the  West  Indies. 
Littoral  to  116  fathoms. 

Dorocidaris  abyssicola  A.  Ac,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

This  species  has  the  general  facies  of  Cidaris  hystrix.  We  find  consider- 
able variation  in  specimens  collected  in  different  localities,  —  valuable,  from 
the  number  of  specimens  collected,  in  determining  the  nature  of  individual 
variation  in  this  genus,  and  confirming  the  view  to  which  I  had  been  brought 
from  the  study  of  young  Cidarida?,  that  the  spines,  much  as  they  may  ap- 
parently vary  in  shape,  especially  round  the  mouth,  yet  present  excellent 
characters  not  only  to  distinguish  species,  but  are  also  useful  as  a  guide  in 


254  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

separating  groups  of  species  which  are  generally  found  closely  allied. 
From  the  study  of  young  specimens  I  have  been  led  to  modify  the  views 
I  had  taken  of  the  nature  of  genera  among  Cidaridae,  and  as  the  group 
requires  a  complete  revision,  I  will  not  attempt  at  present  to  alter  the  gen- 
era proposed  in  the  Bulletin,  hoping  to  make  the  changes  in  the  general 
revision  of  the  order.  With  reference  to  Orthocidaris,  to  which  this  species 
is  temporarily  referred,  I  would  mention  that,  whether  valid  or  not,  the  name 
is  preoccupied,  having  been  employed  by  Cotteau  a  few  months  before  the 
publication  of  the  Bulletin.*     (The  same  is  the  case  with  Temnocidaris.) 

Test  depressed ;  the  spines  are  not  as  distinctly  fluted  and  crenated  as 
in  C.  hystrix  ;  they  are  often  worn  perfectly  smooth,  and  attain  their  great- 
est diameter  at  about  one  fifth  the  length  of  the  spine  from  the  base  ;  the 
milled  ring  is  finely  striated,  as  well  as  the  neck  of  the  spine,  which  is  sharp- 
ly defined.  The  mamelon  of  the  primary  tubercles  is  small,  deeply  cut  at 
its  base,  high,  the  mammillary  boss  not  prominent,  the  scrobicule  deeply 
sunk  ;  the  scrobicular  circle  and  interambulacral  miliaries  being  prominent- 
ly raised,  the  secondary  tubercles  of  the  scrobicular  circle  are  but  slightly 
larger  than  the  miliaries,  diminishing  regularly  in  size  towards  the  sutures 
of  the  plates,  which  are  clearly  and  sharply  cut;  the  same  is  the  case  with 
the  sutures  of  the  ambulaeral  plates ;  each  plate  carries  a  larger  exterior 
tubercle  with  a  smaller  one  nearer  the  abaetinal  edge,  and  sometimes  a 
third  and  fourth  miliary  between  the  two.  The  poriferous  zone  is  nar- 
row, but  slightly  undulating  and  occupying  half  the  ambulaeral  plate.  The 
sutures  of  the  plates  of  the  abaetinal  system  are  marked  by  distinctly  cut 
lines,  instead  of  the  wavy  double  line  characteristic  of  C.  hystrix;  the  abae- 
tinal svstem  is  large,  the  ocular  plates  heart-shaped,  the  genital  plates  ir- 
regularly octagonal ;  the  large  sides  of  the  plate  adjoining  the  anal  system 
are  separated  by  five  long  wedge-shaped  anal  plates,  forming  the  base 
of  the  smaller  plates  of  the  anal  system. 

From  40  to  270  fathoms. 

Salenocidaris  varispina  A.  Ag.,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

The  composition  of  the  plates  of  the  anal  system  in  young  Echini,  ex- 
plains most  unexpectedly  the  homology  of  the  sub-anal  plate  of  Salenia, 
and  proves,  from  a  different  point  of  view, that  the  position  of  the  anal 
opening  can  in  no  wise  form  a  guide  by  which  we  can  determine  any  geo- 
metrical axis  of  Echini,  but  that  the  only  part  of  the  abaetinal  system  which 
has  a  constant  structural  relation  to  the  axis  is  the  madreporic  body,  which 

*  Dnjardin  and  Iliipe  refer  its  Mediterranean  representative  to  Leiocidaris  Des. 
(PJiyllacanthua  Br.),  with  which  it  has  nothing  in  common,  as  the  pores  are,  not  joined 
bv  furrows.    I  would  substitute  for  Orthocidaris  Ac.nou  Cott.  the  name  Dorocidaris. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  255 

at  once  gives  us  the  key  to  the  position  of  an  anterior  and  posterior  side 
among  Sea-urchins.  The  correctness  of  this  view  is  fully  maintained  from 
the  analysis  of  the  abactinal  system  of  a  living  Salenia  here  described,  which 
shows  that  the  sub-anal  plate  is  the  homologue  of  the  first  anal  plate  of 
young  Echini,  (which  in  many  cases  remains  decidedly  larger  in  older  stages, 
—  Toreumatica,  Genocidaris,  Trigonocidaris,)  and  shows  that  the  abac- 
tinal system  of  Salenia  is  entirely  homologous  with  the  abactinal  system  of 
the  Echinoids,  the  original  plate  only  retaining  a  greater  preponderance 
than  has  thus  far  been  noticed  in  other  genera.  The  remaining  part  of  the 
anal  system  was,  in  the  fossil  species,  undoubtedly  covered  by  small  plates, 
as  in  the  living  species ;  and  that  this  was  the  structure  of  the  anal  system 
is  shown  by  Wright,  who  has  figured  the  abactinal  system  of  Acrocidaris, 
and  removed  the  genus  to  Salenida?  on  account  of  the  presence  of  a  sub- 
anal  plate.  This  feature,  which  seemed  so  characteristic  of  a  small  group  of 
Echini,  is  one  which  alone  has  no  systematic  value,  so  that  we  must,  I  think, 
hereafter  consider  the  Salenidae  simply  as  a  sub-family  of  Cidaridas,  as 
the  description  of  the  species  dredged  in  Florida  by  Mr.  Pourtales  will 
clearly  show. 

The  general  appearance  of  Salenocidaris  is  that  of  a  young  Dorocidaris 
•abyssicola.  The  primary  spines  are  enormous,  — twice  the  diameter  of  the 
test  in  length,  of  a  brilliant  white  color,  and  of  all  shapes.  Some  of  them 
are  uniformly  tapering,  others  swelling  at  about  one  third  the  distance 
from  the  base,  others  flattened  and  curved,  but  all  finely  longitudinally 
serrated  with  sharp  spines,  irregularly  arranged  along  the  body  of  the 
spines.  The  secondary  spines,  as  well  as  the  greater  number  of  the  spines 
of  the  ambulacra,  as  far  as  the  ambitus,  are  short,  club-shaped,  sometimes 
curved  and  flattened,  longitudinally  striated  with  slight  serrations.  These 
short  spines  give  to  the  median  interambulacral  and  ambulacral  zone  the 
aspect  of  the  corresponding  zones  of  Cidaris  ;  but  they  are  not,  as  in  Cidaris, 
arranged  in  a  circle  round  the  base  of  the  primary  spines.  These  small 
spines,  as  well  as  the  whole  abactinal  area,  are  covered  with  prominent 
dark  violet  pigment  cells,  standing  in  striking  contrast  to  the  white  pri- 
mary spines.  The  abactinal  system  has  the  structure  of  that  of  Salenia, 
but  the  position  of  the  anal  system  is  that  of  Hyposalenia.  As  we  know 
nothing  of  the  spines  of  either  of  these  genera,  it  is  better  for  the  present  to 
establish  a  new  genus  founded  upon  this  peculiarity  of  the  abactinal  system, 
and  the  imbricated  buccal  membrane,  which  is  covered  thickly  with  plates 
arranged  somewhat  as  they  are  in  Echinocidaris ;  the  ten  buccal  plates  are 
sparingly  covered  by  pedicellarias.  The  primary  tubercles  of  the  interam- 
bulacral area  are  large,  arranged  in  two  vertical  rows  in  the  two  areas ; 
those  of  the  ambulacral  area  are  smaller,  and  diminish  rapidly  towards  the 
abactinal  pole  ;  the  median  interambulacral  space  is  occupied  by  two  ver- 


2oG  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

tical  rows  of  small  secondary  tubercles.  The  primary  tubercles  of  botb  areas 
are  imperforate,  but  distinctly  crenulated.  At  the  actinostome  the  ambu- 
lacra flare  slightly,  somewhat  as  in  Hemicidaris.  The  pores  are  small, 
placed  in  pairs  far  apart,  one  above  the  other,  so  that  there  seems  to  be,  as 
far  as  I  could  see,  but  a  single  pair  of  pores  for  each  ambulacral  plate, 
though  near  the  mouth  they  are  somewhat  closer.  As  in  Salenia,  the  in- 
dentations of  the  actinostome  are  very  slight.  The  abactinal  system  covers 
nearly  the  whole  of  the  abactinal  part  of  the  test;  the  anal  system  is  eccen- 
tric. There  is  a  marked  difference  in  the  size  of  the  genital  plates,  the 
three  posterior  ones  being  much  larger  than  the  two  anterior  ones ;  the 
reverse  is  the  case  of  the  ocular  plates.  In  the  largest  genital  plate  there 
is  a  trace  of  the  madreporic  body,  corresponding  to  the  position  assigned  to 
it  by  Forbes,  Mtiller,  and  Wright,  and  which  cuts  the  symmetrical  axis  of 
the  sub-anal  plate  at  an  angle ;  this  is  the  case  also  with  the  angle  made  by 
the  axis  of  the  madreporic  bady  and  the  first  anal  plate  of  young  Echini ; 
the  position  of  the  axis  passing  through  the  anal  plate  has  no  definite 
relation  to  the  madreporic  body.  The  anal  opening  is  covered  by  small 
plates,  as  in  other  Echini.  The  whole  abactinal  system  is  studded  with 
embryonic  spines,  which  are  longest  along  the  exterior  edge  of  the  abactinal 
system,  thus  separating  it  most  distinctly  from  the  test.  The  sutures 
between  the  plates  are  deeply  cut  with  deep  pits  at  the  angles  of  junction 
of  the  genital  and  sub-anal  plate  and  of  the  ocular  and  genital  plates. 
The  three  larger  genital  plates  have  also  pits  in  the  middle  of  their  line  of 
junction  with  the  sub-anal  plate.  The  genital  openings  are  large,  placed 
in  the  middle  of  the  plates. 

Off' Double  Head  Shot  Key,  315  fathoms. 

Diadema  antillarum  Phil.,  Wieg.  Archiv,  1845. 

Syn.  Diadema  antillarum  Lutk.,  Bid.  til  Kunds.  om  Echin. 
Littoral  to  17  fathoms. 

Csenopedina  cubensis  A.  Ag.,  nov.  gen.  ct  sp. 

This  species  is  a  living  representative  of  the  genus  Hemipedina  of 
Wright  (as  emended  by  Desor,  Wright  having  included  in  it  species  of 
other  genera  of  Pseudodiadematidas).  It  differs  from  its  fossil  representa- 
tive by  the  peculiar  arrangement  of  the  pores,  which  have  a  tendency  to 
arrange  themselves  in  lateral  arcs  of  three  pairs.  The  general  outline  of 
the  test  is  that  of  Cyphosoma.  It  has,  like  Orthopsis,  Echinopsis,  Hemi- 
pedina, perforate  tubercles  not  crenulated.  It  reminds  us  of  Pseudo- 
diadema  in  having  tubercles  nearly  of  the  same  size,  and  has,  like  Phymo- 
soma,  only  two  rows  of  tubercles  extending  from  pole  to  pole,  while  the 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  257 

flatness  of  the  abactinal  part  of  the  test,  and  the  great  development  of  the 
abactinal  system,  remind  us  of  some  forms  of  Hemipedina,  as,  for  instance, 
Heinipedina  Guerangeri  Cott.  et  Trig.  The  actinal  opening  is  large,  with 
sharp  cuts  for  the  passage  of  long,  narrow  gills.  The  spines  are  long,  mod- 
erately stout,  as  long  as  the  diameter  of  the  test,  longitudinally  striated, 
resembling  the  spines  of  some  species  of  Hemipedina  figured  by  Wright. 
The  pores  are  arranged  in  connected  vertical  arcs,  of  three  to  four  pairs. 
There  are  two  rows  of  perforate  primary  tubercles  in  the  ambulacral  area, 
decreasing  rapidly  in  size  towards  apex,  and  placed  close  together.  They 
are  somewhat  smaller  than  those  of  the  intcrambulacral  area.  There  are 
one  or  two  small  imperforate  tubercles  at  the  base  of  the  larger  ones.  The 
poriferous  zone  is  broad  and  well  defined,  spreading  slightly  at  actinostome. 
The  perforate  interambulacral  tubercles  are  arranged  in  two  primary  rows, 
separated  from  the  poriferous  zone  by  a  row  of  small  imperforate  tubercles, 
with  two  or  three  similar  irregular  rows  between  the  larger  tubercles 
in  the  median  interambulacral  zone.  The  plates  of  the  abactinal  sys- 
tem are  large,  with  straight  sides,  the  genital  are  heptagonal,  carrying 
five  to  six  small  tubercles,  and  as  many  still  smaller  ones.  The  ocular 
plates  are  pentagonal,  with  a  large  ocular  pore  surrounded  by  an  arc  of 
small  tubercles.  The  plates  covering  the  large  anal  system  are  very 
numerous  and  minute.  The  anus  is  situated  in  the  very  centre.  The 
teeth  resemble  those  of  Echinocidaris.  The  buccal  membrane  is  strength- 
ened round  the  mouth,  close  to  the  teeth,  by  ten  large  plates  (perforated 
for  buccal  tentacles),  occupying  nearly  the  whole  membrane,  with  eight  to 
ten  very  much  smaller  ones  between  the  large  plates  and  test.  The  color 
of  the  large  spines  is  of  a  dull  yellowish  green,  while  the  smaller  spines, 
as  well  as  test  and  abactinal  plates,  have  a  more  yellowish  tint. 
From  138  to  270  fathoms. 

Echinocidaris  punctulata  Desml.,  feud.  Echin. 

Syn.  Echinocidaris  punctulata  A.  Ac,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 
"        "        Davisii  A.  Ac  "  "  " 

"         "        punctulata  Lutk.,  Bid.  til  Kunds.  om  Echin. 
"         "     Holmes,  P.  F.  PI.  2,  fig.  5. 
Anapcsus  carolinus  Holmes,  P.  P.  F.  PI.  2,  fig.  2. 

The  specimens  collected  by  Mr.  Pourtales  seem  to  show  conclusively 
that  the  species  distinguished  as  E.  Davisii  in  the  second  number  of  this 
Bulletin  is  only  a  local  variety.  All  Echinocidaridae  are  difficult  to  distin- 
guish, as  there  is  great  variation  in  the  same  species,  in  the  number  and 
arrangement  of  the  tubercles  ;  and  the  characters  by  which  E.  Davisii  was 
separated  from  E.  punctulata  are  found  in  the  large  series  of  young  speci- 
33 


258  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

mens  collected  by  Mr.  Pourtales  at  Cape  Fear.  North  Carolina,  to  have  no 
permanence.      Liitken  considers  the  Echinocidaris  pustulosa   Lam.  as  a 

nominal  species  ;  quite  a  number  of  specimens  of  it  were  brought  home 
by  the  Thayer  Expedition  from  Brazil.  It  may  be  that  a  larger  series 
than  we  possess  will  prove  its  identity  with  E.  punctulata,  but  from  the 
material  at  hand  I  should  consider  it  a  good  species,  closely  allied  to  E. 
sequituberculata.  I  am  inclined  to  think  that  the  various  West  Coast 
species  of  this  genus  will  be  limited  to  two,  or  at  the  utmost  three,  species ; 
namely,  E.  stellata  and  E.  nigra,  perhaps  E.  spatuligera. 
Littoral  to  125  fathoms. 

Podocidaris  sculpta  A.  A*;.,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

This  genus  has  the  general  facies  of  young  Echinocidaris,  with  a  de- 
pressed abactinal  surface  as  in  Astropyga,  the  ambulacra  rising  in  ridges 
above  the  surface.  The  large  spines  are  confined  to  the  lower  surface,  the 
primary  tubercles  scarcely  extending  beyond  the  ambitus.  These  tubercles 
alone  carry  a  large,  smooth  mamelon,  while  the  rest  of  the  test  is  covered 
with  rudimentary  spines,  arranged,  however,  in  regular,  vertical  rows,  four 
of  which  form  a  distinct,  raised  band  in  the  median  interambulacral  zone, 
flanked  by  three  more,  less  well  defined,  while  in  the  narrow  ambulacral 
zone  there  are  but  two  such  rows,  close  to  the  poriferous  zone,  which  is  very 
narrow,  the  pores  being  arranged  in  a  single  vertical  row.  The  rudimen- 
tary, knob-shaped  spines,  strongly  serrate,  are  not  carried  upon  a  mam- 
elon, but  rise  directly  from  the  test,  as  in  very  young  Sea-urchins,  and  are 
connected  at.  their  base  by  a  ridge,  leaving  thus  a  more,  or  less  quadrangular 
pit  in  the  space  between  four  tubercles.  This  ridge  is  particularly  promi- 
nent between  the  spines  of  the  median"  interambulacral  rows,  while  in  the 
more  irregular  rows  the,  ridges  are  less  marked,  forming  simply  depressions 
in  the  test,  running  irregularly.  The  pits  in  the  ambulacral  zone  are  very 
marked,  and  are  connected  into  an  irregular  groove  extending  along  the 
whole  ambulacral  zone,  the  ridges,  starting  from  the  base  of  the  tubercles, 
extending  only  partway  across  the  ambulacral  area,  like  spurs  and  rounded 
knobs.  The  whole  surface  of  the  test  is  covered  with  long-stemmed,  articu- 
lated pedicellarise,  which  have  a  distinct  mamelon  for  their  support,  sur- 
rounded by  a  sort  of  scrobicular  circle,  the  base  of  the  pedicellaria-  forming 
a  ball-and-socket  joint  with  the  tubercle,  while  there  is  a  thin  muscular  mem- 
brane holding  them  in  place,  as  in  true  spines,  —  an  additional  proof  that 
pedicellarise  are  only  modified  spines,  as  was  made  probable  by  their  iden- 
tical mode  of  development  with  spines,  observed  in  the  Star-fishes  and 
Spatangoids.  The  abactinal  system,  placed  in  a  depression  of  the  abacti- 
nal part  of  the  test,  resembles  that  of  Echinocidaris,  having  only  four  anal 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  259 

plates,  with  large  genital  and  ocular  plates,  which,  however,  are  not  bare 
as  in  that  genus,  but  carry  small,  rudimentary,  knob-shaped  spines.  The 
genital  openings  are  near  the  anal  system.  The  buccal  membrane  carries 
ten  large  quadrangular  plates,  with  rounded  edges  placed  near  the  test,  the 
whole  space  between  them  and  the  mouth  being  covered  by  small  plates ; 
the  rest  of  the  membrane  is  bare.  The  actinal  opening  is  large,  the  cuts 
slight,  and  the  pores  are  not  arranged  in  ares  near  the  mouth  as  in  Echino- 
cidaris.  The  spines  are  sharp,  (hit  spindle-shaped,  with  a  prominent  ridge 
running  along  the  middle  of  the  upper  surface,  the  section  is  triang- 
ular, the  longest  side  being  the  under  side,  which  is  convex,  the  shorter 
upper  sides  being  concave.  The  spines  are  finely  granulated  longitudinally 
with  a  slightly  serrate  edge.  The  large  spines,  as  well  as  the  knobs  of  the 
rudimentary  spines,  are  sometimes  beautifully  colored  by  dark  violet  pig- 
ment cells,  following  the  arrangement  of  the  granulation.  The  pedicellaria; 
have  the  same  coloration.  The  tentacles,  to  judge  from  alcoholic  specimens, 
must  have  been  very  large,  though  not  possessed  of  a  powerful  disk  ;  the 
test,  when  prepared  to  show  the  structure,  was  of  a  delicate  cream  color, 
upon  which  the  brilliant  coloration  of  the  knob-shaped  spines  stood  out  in 
bold  relief. 

From  138  to  315  fathoms. 

Eehinometra  Michelini  Des.,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 

Syn.  Eehinometra  Michelini  A.  Ag.  (non.  Lutk.)  Bull.  Mus.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 
Eehinometra  lucunter  Lutic,  Bid.  (non.  Lam.) 

"  lobata  Blaix.,  Article  Oursin. 

Helioridaris  mexicana  Auct.  (non.  Ag.) 
Heliocidaris  CastidnauJi  IIupe  in  Casteln. 

From  an  examination  of  typical  specimens  of  Eehinometra  lucunter 
Lam.  it  became  evident  that  Lamarck's  species  was  the  common  Eehinome- 
tra, having  such  an  extensive  range  in  the  Pacific  and  Indian  Oceans ; 
extending  from  the  Sandwich  Islands  to  the  Red  Sea.  It  is  with  some 
doubt,  however,  that  the  above  name  has  been  adopted  for  our  common 
"West  India  species,  the  varieties  of  which  have  served  as  the  type  of 
many  species  ;  the  large,  somewhat  oblong,  swollen-sided  adult,  with  short 
stout  spines,  has  been  the  Eehinometra  lobata  Blaix.,  the  flatter,  more 
circular  variety,  with  long  slender  spines,  has  even  been  referred  to  a  differ- 
ent genus  Heliocidaris  by  Ilupe.  Authors  generally  have  referred  the 
young  flat  stage  to  Heliocidaris  mexicana  Ag.  It  is  somewhat  remarkable 
that  with  the  extensive  geographical  distribution  of  this  species  (the 
whole  coast  of  Brazil,  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  Caribbean  Sea,  West  India 
Islands,  Bahamas,  and  Bermudas)  it  should  be  so  limited  in  bathymetri- 
cal  range. 

Littoral,  to  G  to  7  fathoms. 


£60  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Noti:. — Verrill  has  insisted,  in  his  notes  on  Radiata,  on  referring  Helio- 
cidaris  mexicana  Ag.  to  Anthocidaris  LiJTK.,  while  he  places  Toxoeidaris 
mexicana  A.  Ag.  in  Toxopneustes  ;  I  do  not  see  upon  what  grounds. 
The  specimens  in  the  Natural  History  Society  of  Boston  to  which  he  refers 
are  only  one  of  the  younger  stages  of  the  long-spined  variety  of  Echinometra 
Michelini  Des.  (A.  Ag.),  and  have  nothing  in  common  with  Ileliocidaris. 
In  the  second  place,  Anthocidaris  LiJTK.  is  synonymous  with  Toxoeidaris  A. 
Ag.  ;  so  that  it  is  perfectly  natural  that  the  two  species  he  quotes  should 
belong  to  different  genera,  one  being  a  young  Echinometra,  the  other  a 
true  Toxoeidaris  A.  Ac,  Anthocidaris  Lutk.  I  cannot  see  the  propriety 
of  the  changes  made  by  Verrill  in  the  limitation  of  Toxopneustes,  by  sub- 
stituting Euryechinus  for  a  group  of  Echini,  which  are  perfectly  well  known 
by  all  writers  on  Echinoderms  as  Toxopneustes.  For  the  following  rea- 
sons it  seems  to  me,  even  granting  all  his  premises,  that  the  changes  he 
proposes  are  not  warranted.  The  type  of  a  genus  at  the  time  the  Monog. 
d.  Echinides  was  written  was  never  used  in  the  restricted  sense  now  com- 
mon, but  was  coextensive  with  a  group  of  species.  When  Toxopneustes 
was  first  proposed,  it  was  applied  to  a  so-called  typical  species  which 
future  investigations  showed  did  not  belong  to  the  genus.  The  author 
took  the  earliest  opportunity  possible  to  point  out  his  mistake  by  substi- 
tuting for  it  another  type,  and  giving  a  description  which  applies  not  only 
to  Toxoeidaris  as  Mr.  Verrill  would  hare  it,  but  also  to  all  the  species  since 
removed  as  Sphairechinus  by  Desor.  Desor,  who  had  edited  the  Cata- 
logue Riisonne,  and  probably  knew  accurately  what  group  of  Echini 
was  defined  as  Toxopneustes,  was  the  first,  in  his  Synopsis,  to  limit 
Toxopneustes  by  removing  from  it  certain  species  as  Sphserechinus,  and 
restrict  Toxopneustes  to  such  forms  as  (T.  neglectus)  T  drobachiensis 
Ag.,  but  still  including  the  species  which  I  have  since,  in  the  Bulletin  of 
the  Museum,  separated  as  Toxoeidaris.  All  these  limitations,  even  were 
they  not  accepted,  have  the  priority  over  a  similar  limitation  which  Verrill 
makes  twelve  years  after  a  proper  limitation  of  the  genus  has  been  recog- 
nized, and  eighteen  years  after  a  mistake  (upon  which  Mr.  Verrill  bases 
the  whole  of  his  proposed  changes)  has  been  corrected  by  the  author  him- 
self; nothing,  moreover,  is  gained  in  accuracy  by  the  change  proposed  by 
Verrill,  T.  tuberculatum  being  probably  only  a  nominal  species,  and  one 
concerning  which  we  have,  at  any  rate,  no  authentic  information  sufficient 
to  form  the  basis  of  a  sweeping  reform.  At  the  present  rate  of  retrospec- 
tive application  of  the  laws  of  priority,  we  are  fast  drifting  into  the  most 
absurd  anachronism  by  applying  the  present  condition  of  our  knowledge 
of  any  group  to  works  written  twenty  or  thirty  years  ago  in  an  entirely 
different  spirit,  when  the  idea  of  type,  genera,  etc.  had  a  totally  distinct 
signification  from  what  it  has  at  the  present  day. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  261 

Echinometra  viridis  A.  Ag.,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 

Syn.  Echinometra  Michclini  Lutk.  (non.  A.  AG.,necDES.)  Bidrag. 
"       plana  A.  Ag.,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 

As  in  Echinometra  Michelini  Des.  there  is  a  Hat  long-spined  variety 
of  Echinometra  viridis,  distinguished  formerly  as  Echinometra  plana,  but 
which  the  full  series  now  in  the  Museum  collection  shows  decidedly  to  hold 
the  same  relation  to  E.  viridis  which  Heliocidaris  mexicana  AtJCT.  holds 
to  E.  Michelini. 

Same  range  as  former  species,  much  less  common. 

'chinus  gracilis  A.  Ag.,  nov.  sp. 

This  species  holds  an  intermediate  position  between  E.  Flemingii  Ball 
and  E.  melo  Lam.,  to  both  of  which  it  is  allied.  Like  the  former,  it  is  sub- 
ject to  great  variations  in  the  ratio  of  the  longitudinal  and  vertical  diame- 
ter of  the  test.  The  primary  tubercles  are  larger  than  those  of  E.  melo, 
but  smaller  than  those  of  E.  Flemingii.  The  spines  in  the  proportion  they 
bear  to  test  are  similar  to  those  of  E.  melo,  as  well  as  the  general  pattern 
of  coloration,  consisting  of  bands  of  green  made  up  of  irregularly  shaped 
lozenges  running  in  vertical  rows,  diminishing  in  intensity  towards  acti- 
nostome,  the  intermediate  spaces  forming  brilliant  white  or  straw-colored 
bands.  In  one  of  these  white  bands  is  placed  the  poriferous  zone,  and 
each  primary  row  of  tubercles  is  placed  in  a  similar  band.  Thus  the  test 
is  divided  into  twenty  bands  alternately  green  and  white  ;  the  poriferous 
zones  and  two  principal  rows  of  tubercles  being  separated  by  these  dark- 
green  lozenges,  giving  the  test  a  most  graceful  pattern  of  coloration.  The 
shape  of  the  genital  plates  of  the  abactinal  system,  which  is  compact  and 
circular,  is  a  pointed  pentagon  somewhat  as  in  E.  melo,  while  in  Flem- 
ingii they  are  heptagonal.  The  anal  system  is  made  up  of  a  large  num- 
ber of  small  plates.  The  ten  large  plates  of  the  buccal  membrane  are 
quadrangular  with  rounded  corners,  carrying  stout  pedicellaria)  similar  to 
those  of  E.  melo.  The  position  and  general  arrangement  of  the  tubercles 
is  similar  to  E.  melo  ;  the  large  tubercle  is  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  in- 
terambulaeral  plate,  which  carries  in  addition  short  horizontal  rows  of 
two  or  three  minute  tubercles,  the  row  near  the  horizontal  suture  being 
the  most  prominent.  In  the  ambulacral  zone  the  main  tubercle  has  a 
similar  position;  the  small  tubercles  are  placed  close  to  the  median  su'ure, 
and  form  irregular  vertical  rows.  This  species  attains  a  considerable 
size  ;  specimens  are  in  our  collection  measuring  2. GO  inches  in  diameter, 
and  another  2.75  inches  in  height,  exceeding  somewhat  the  transverse 
diameter. 

From  93  to  200  fathoms. 


282  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Echinus  Flemingii  Ball,  Forbes  Brit.  Surf. 

Among  the  Echini  dredged  by  Mr.  Pourtales  is  a  single  small  specimen 
which  I  am  unable  to  distinguish  from  specimens  of  the  same  size  of  E. 
Flemingii.  It  may  be  that,  when  more  extensive  series  of  the  young  of 
E.  melo,  E.  Flemingii,  anil  E.  gracilis,  described  above,  have  been  com- 
pared, that  we  shall  find  these  species  to  be  only  local  varieties,  though  I 
am  not  inclined,  from  the  material  at  my  command,  which  is  quite  ample, 
to  adopt  this  view,  but  rather  suppose  that  we  have  here,  side  by  side,  two 
allied  species,  one  of  which  has  an  extensive  range.  Grube  already  con- 
siders E.  melo  and  E.  Flemingii  as  identical ;  I  suspect  he  has  only  found 
the  two  species  side  by  side,  as  they  are  both  known  to  inhabit  the  Medi- 
terranean. 

In  195  fathoms. 

Genocidaris  maculata  A.  Ao.,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

This  genus  is  established  for  a  small  Sea-urchin,  the  living  representative 
of  Opechinus,  which  Desor  separated  from  Temnopleurus.  The  spines 
resemble  in  their  structure  those  of  Temnopleurus,  but  are  short ;  the 
Sea-urchin  with  its  spines  resembling  a  Psainmechinus,  and  having,  like 
it,  a  large  number  of  tubercles,  of  nearly  uniform  size,  closely  crowded 
together,  but  of  a  peculiar  chiselled  structure  (so  that  it  may  be  said  that 
this  genus  is  a  Psammechinus  among  Temnopleur'uke),  there  is  one  principal 
row  in  the  ambulacral  and  interambulacral  area  larger  than  the  others.  The 
poriferous  zone  is  narrow  ;  the  pores  are  arranged  in  an  unbroken  vertical 
row  separated  by  an  arched  ridge.  The  mamelon  of  the  primary  tuber- 
cles is  smooth,  imperforate.  Near  the  base  of  the  tubercle  the  test  is  orna- 
mented by  cuts  specially  marked  near  the  suture  of  the  plates,  and  the 
small  tubercles  are  frequently  connected  by  a  ridge  with  the  main  tuber- 
cles, the  ridge  forming  spokes  radiating  from  a  hub,  similar  to  the  structure 
of  Glyphocyphus  radiatus,  and  some  species  of  Ecb.inocypb.us.  The  genera 
Opechinus,  Temnotrema,  Trigonocidaris,  and  Genocidaris  form  a  transition 
between  Psammechinus  and  Temnopleurus.  The  actinal  membrane  is  bare, 
with  the  exception  of  the  ten  small  circular  buccal  plates.  The  actinal 
opening  is  not  large,  with  slight  indentations  ;  the  test  is  irregularly  covered 
will)  pedicellariaj,  having  a  blunt  head  surmounting  a  long,  slender  stem, 
articulating  upon  a  shorter,  stout  rod.  The  abactinal  system  is  peculiar,  as 
we  find,  in  the  largest  specimens  even,  which  appear  fully  developed,  but 
a  single  circular  plate,  slightly  conical,  occupying  nearly  the  whole  anal 
system,  with  the  exception  of  a  small  crescent-shaped  slit,  covered  by  four 
very  small  plates.  This  genital  plates  arc  large  pentagonal,  with  a  deep 
groove,  in  which  is  situated  the  genital  opening,  having  on  the  anal  edge  a 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  263 

cluster  of  three  or  four  small  tubercles  ;  the  ocular  plates  are  also  pentago- 
nal, elongated  horizontally.  The  color  of  the  test  is  greenish  (in  alcohol), 
mottled  with  dark  violet  patches  ;  the  spines  are  of  the  same  greenish 
tinge,  banded  irregularly  with  reddish,  transverse  bands..  In  other  speci- 
mens we  have  the  same  pattern  of  coloration,  in  different  shades  of  green, 
with  white  spots  irregularly  scattered  over  the  surface. 
From  30  to  160  fathoms. 

Trigonocidaris  albida  A.  Ao.,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

This  genus  is  allied  to  Genocidaris.  The  principal  tubercles  have  the 
same  structure ;  but,  in  addition,  the  whole  test  is  covered  by  a  reticulation 
of  ridges,  similar  to  those  of  Podocidaris,  extending  from  the  base  of  the 
different  tubercles,  both  primary  and  secondary,  and  uniting  them  all  in  a 
complicated,  raised  system  of  network,  with  irregularly  shaped  cells,  the 
ridges  leaving  more  or  less  deep  pits,  giving  the  test  the  appearance  of 
having  been  gouged  out  in  spots.  The  spines  are  long,  slender,  somewhat 
transparent,  longitudinally  striated,  with  slight,  transverse  striation.  The 
abactinal  system  resembles  that  of  Caenopedina,  but  the  anal  system  is  cov- 
ered by  only  four  triangular  plates,  one  of  which  is  much  larger  than  the 
others.  Prom  the  fact  that  in  the  youngest  specimens  examined  we  find 
them  already,  I  am  tempted  to  suppose  they  never  increase  in  number, 
and  remain  as  they  are,  as  in  Echinocidaris.  The  actinal  membrane  is,  as 
in  Lytechinus,  entirely  covered  by  a  number  of  rather  large  plates  irregu- 
larly arranged,  the  ten  buccal  plates  being  but  slightly  larger  than  the 
others.  The  actinal  opening  is  of  moderate  size,  slightly  indented ;  the 
auricles  are  exceedingly  slender,  and  disconnected  at  the  extremity. 
There  are  but  two  principal  rows  of  primary  tubercles,  both  in  the  ambu- 
lacral  and  interambulacral  zone,  with  from  five  to  six  minute  tubercles 
seated  upon  the  connecting  ridges  in  the  latter  zone,  and  two  to  three  upon 
each  plate  in  the  former.  The  poriferous  zone  is  narrow  ;  the  pores  are 
placed  obliquely  in  an  unbroken  vertical  zone,  three  to  each  ambulacral 
plate,  and  separated  by  ridges  running  from  the  ambulacral  tubercles  to  the 
interambulacral  zone,  similar  to  those  joining  the  tubercles.  The  test,  as 
well  as  the  spines,  are  almost  white,  the  latter  having  only  a  slight  tinge  of 
yellow  when  largest.  The  whole  test  is  covered  with  pedicellaria?,  having  a 
sharp-pointed  head  articulated  upon  a  long,  slender  thread,  seeming  scarcely 
capable  of  supporting  the  head. 
From  40  to  270  fathoms. 


264:  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Lytechinus  variegatus  A.  Ac,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 

8vn.  Lytechinus  carolinus  Ag.,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 

"        "      atlanticus  A.  Ac     "  "  " 

Echinus  varicgatus  I!av,  Cat.  Echin.  S.  C. ;  P.P.  Foss.  PI.  2,6^1. 

"     "     variegatus  Lam.,  An.  s.  V. 
Psilechinus  variegatus  Lime,  Bidrag. 
Psammechinus  exoletus  McCr.,  PI.  Foss.  S.  C,  PI.  2,  fig.  G. 

Soon  after  the  publication  of  the  second  number  of  the  Museum  Bulletin, 
Dr.  Lutken  called  my  attention  to  the  identity  of  L.  carolinus  and  L.  atlan- 
ticus with  E.  variegatus.  The  extensive  series  of  this  species  collected  by 
Professor  Agassiz  in  Brazil,  the  West  India  Islands,  and  dredged  by  Mr. 
Pourtales,  have  satisfied  mc  of  the  correctness  of  his  view,  the  variations 
due  to  age  or  locality  being  astonishing.  It  has,  like  the  common  Echino- 
metra,  a  great  geographical  range  identical  with  it,  but  at  the  same  time 
has  a  somewhat  more  extensive  bathymetrical  distribution. 

Littoral,  to  34  fathoms. 

Tripneustes  ventricosus  Ac,  Agas.  Cat.  Ilais. 

Young  sjiecimens  of  Tripneustes  show  the  correctness  of  the  analysis  of 
the  arrangement  of  the  pores  made  by  Dr.  Lutken.  Each  ambulacral 
plate  has  only  three  pairs.  The  original  Heliechinus  Gouldii  GiR.,  Proc. 
Bost.  Soc.  N.  II.  1850,  is  nothing  but  a  young  Tripneustes. 

Littoral,  to  10  fathoms. 

Clypeaster  rosaceus  Lam.,  An.  s.  Vert. 

It  is  quite  remarkable  that  of  a  species  so  common  as  this  no  young  small 
enough  to  show  any  very  striking  difference  from  the  adult  should  have 
been  collected,  while  of  nearly  all  the  more  common  species  complete  series 
of  all  sizes  were  obtained. 

Littoral,  to  5  fathoms. 

Stolonoclypus  prostratus  Ac,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 
Syn.  Clypeaster  prostratus  Lime,  Bidrag. 

This  genus  is  distinguished  from  the  true  Clypeaster  by  the  character  of 
the  internal  pillars  connecting  the  actinal  and  abactinal  part  of  the  test, 
which  is  totally  different,  in  all  the  Hat  Clypeastroids  allied  to  Clypeaster 
placunarius  Lam.,  from  that  of  Clypeaster  rosaceus  Lam.,  being  slender, 
often  needle-shaped  points,  instead  of  heavy,  solid  columns,  as  in  true  Clypeas- 
ter. Rhaphidoclypus cannot  be  maintained  ;is  an  independent  genus  ;  it  is 
only  the  yroung  type  of  Stolonoclypus  which  presents  some  striking  peculiari- 
ties, and  the  species  upon  which  the  genus  was  based  will  probably  turn  out  to 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  265 

be  young  specimens  of  a  species  of  true  Stolonoclypus,  to  judge  by  analogy 
with  the  young  of  this  Florida  species,  which  undergo  very  great  changes 
durino-  their  growth,  resembling  to  such  an  extent  Echinocyamus  pusillus 
Leske  of  Europe,  that  for  some  time  I  considered  the  young  as  identical 
with  that  species. 

Littoral  to  olb  fathoms. 

Stolonoclypus  Ravenelii  A.  Ac,  nov.  sp. 

The  presence  of  a  true  Laganum  in  the  West  Indies  has  been  often  men- 
tioned by  various  writers  on  Echinoderms,  but  it  has  invariably  been  pre- 
sumed to  be  founded  upon  mistaken  localities  (Rumphia  Lesueuri)  or  a 
confusion  with  young  specimens  of  Stolonoclypus  prostratus.  Mr.  Pourtales 
has  dredged,  from  a  depth  of  thirty-four  fathoms,  a  small  Clypeastroid  of  about 
two  inches  in  length,  which  has  the  facies  of  a  Laganum  to  such  an  extent 
that  it  would  pass  for  one  without  an  examination  of  the  internal  structure. 
The  outline  is  pentagonal,  with  rounded  corners  ;  the  pentagon  is  equilat- 
eral, and  more  regular  than  in  any  spacies  of  Laganum,  the  central  part 
of  the  test  rising  abruptly  from  the  extremity  of  the  ambulacral  rosette. 
The  test  has  a  thick,  rounded  edge,  and  it  may  be  that  specimens  of  this 
species  have  been  collected  by  those  who  have  referred  to  the  presence  of 
a  Laganum  in  the  West  India  Islands.  Hupe  speaks  of  Laganum  latissimum 
as  found  on  the  coast  of  Brazil  ;  it  certainly  cannot  be  the  Clypeaster 
latissimus  Lam.,  which  Agassiz  distinctly  says  is  allied  to  C.  scutiformis, 
although  by  mistake  it  was  subsequently  referred  to  Laganum  in  the 
Catalogue  Raisonne,  and  which  is  found  in  the  East  Indies.  The  specimen 
collected  by  Mr.  Pourtales  is  evidently  the  young  of  a  large  Stolonoclypus 
collected  by  Mr.  Ravenel  off  Charleston  Harbor,  which,  from  want  of 
additional  material,  remained  undescribed  in  the  Museum  collection.  It 
does  not  differ  in  outline  (.although  measuring  five  and  a  half  inches  in 
length)  from  the  smaller  specimen  ;  has  the  same  thick,  rounded  edge,  with 
abruptly  rising  test  near  the  extremity  of  the  ambulacral  rosette.  The 
rosette  is  not  raised  as  in  other  species  of  Stolonoclypus,  but  is  flush  with 
the  rest  of  the  test  ;  the  whole  lower  part  of  the  test  is  flat,  as  in  Laganum. 
In  the  smaller  specimen  the  rosette  is  harp-shaped,  well  opened  at  the 
extremity,  as  in  Echinarachnius,  while  in  the  adult  this  is  the  case  only  in 
the  anterior  ambulacrum  ;  the  others  are  brought  close  together  at  the  ex- 
tremity. The  ambulacral  rosette  extends  to  within  one  third  the  distance 
of  the  apex  from  the  edge.  The  poriferous  zone  is  much  broader  than  in 
S.  prostratus.  The  furrows  are  more  numerous  and  more  closely  crowded 
together  than  in  any  other  species  of  Stolonoclypus.  In  the  younger  speci- 
men the  lower  surface  is  covered  with  spines  only  upon  the  interambulacral 
31 


2G5  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

area.  This  is  narrow,  leaving  the  broad,  bare  bands  of  the  ambulacral 
areas  colored  light  yellow,  giving  this  species  a  striking  appearance.  The 
tubercles  of  the  upper  part  of  the  test  are  quite  small,  closely  croAvded 
together;  they  increase  in  size  in  the  interambulacral  spaces  of  the  lower 
surface.  The  color  of  the  spines  is  greenish  yellow  in  the  smaller,  and  in 
the  larger  specimen  the  color  was  duller. 
Oil'  Charleston  bar  ;  Florida  in  34  fathoms. 

Mellita  testudinata  Klein,  Nat  Disp.  Echin. 

Svn.  Mellita  pen tapora  Lutk.,  Bid. 

Mellita  quinquefora  Ac,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 
"      ainpla  Holmes,  Rav.  Cat. 

The  large  series  collected  by  the  Thayer  Expedition  along  the  whole 
coast  of  Brazil  show  that  this  species  has  a  wide  geographical  range,  and  is 
liable  to  great  variations,  indicating  that  the  characters  -which  are  described 
as  separating  M.  quinquefora  and  JV1.  testudinata  have  no  permanent 
value. 

Littoral,  to  7  fathoms. 

Mellita  hexapora  Ac,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 

Syn.  Mellita  hexapora  Luticen,  Bid. 

caroliniana  Rav.,  Cat. ;  PI.  Foss.  S.  C,  PI.  1,  fig.  4. 

Littoral,  to  270  fathoms. 

Encope  Michelini  Ac,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 

Syn.  Encope  Michelini  Ac,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No.  2. 

"        aberrans  Martens,  Wieg.  Archiv.  XXXIII.  I.  p.  112. 

The  extensive  suite  of  Encopidae  brought  home  by  the  Thayer  Expedition 
from  different  points  of  Brazil,  and  more  particularly  the  series  of  all  sizes 
of  Encope  emarginata  which  the  Museum  owes  to  the  kindness  of  Dr.  Fritz 
Miiller,  of  I)  jsterro,  has  satisfied  me  that  Liitken  is  correct  in  uniting  under 
one  name,  tint  of  E.  emarginata,  most  of  the  nominal  species  he  mentions 
(E.  Valeneiennesii,  subclausa,  oblonga,  E.  quinqueloba  Esn.  and  Grube),  to 
which  we  would  add  the  nunc  given  by  Beval,  E.  Griesbachii.  E.  tetra- 
pora  Gmel.  must  remain  doubtful,  as  the  original  cannot  be  found  in  any 
Museum.  Yet  I  cannot,  agree  with  him  in  referring  to  the  same  species 
Encope  Michelini  Ac,  in  which  the  position  of  the  apex  is  totally  differ- 
ent from  that  of  any  of  the  other  species  referred  to  E.  emarginata,  as  is 
readily  seen  by  the  excellent  profile  given  in  Agassiz  Mon.  d.  Scut.,  PI. 
6*,  fig.  1".  Nor  can  I  agree  with  him  in  referring  to  Encope  emarginata 
E.   grandis    Ac,  a  species   found   in  the   Gulf  of  California,  and   Encope 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  267 

Agassizii  Mich.,  identical  with  it.  There  is  a  second  species  also  found  on 
the  West  Coast,  which  Verrill  has  described  as  E.  occidentals,  and  which 
is  identical  with  Encope  tetrapora  Ac  non  Gmel.  From  a  careful  com- 
parison of  specimens  of  E.  cyclopora,  micropora,  and  perspectiva,  there  is 
no  doubt  that  these  are  only  nominal  species,  all  identical  with  Verrill's 
E.  occidentalis  ;  and  as  the  name  micropora  seems  to  be  the  most  appro- 
priate, it  would  be  the  best  name  to  retain. 
Littoral  to  1 1  fathoms. 

Encope  emarginata  Ac,  Agass.  Cat  Rais. 

Syn.  Encope  Valenciennesii  Ag.,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 
"       subclausa  "  "       " 

"       oblonga  "  "        " 

"       quinqueloba  "  "        " 

"       Giiesbaehii  Beval.,  Acad,  do  Brux. 
"       emarginata  Lutk.,  p.  p.  Bidrag. 
Moulinsia  cassidulina  Ag.,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais.  (young  ! ) 
"  "  Lutk.,  Bidrag. 

Dr.  Liitken,  in  his  discussion  of  Encope  emarginata,  has  given  fio-ures 
of  young  Encope  after  the  appearance  of  the  posterior  interambulacral 
lunule.  Younger  specimens  in  our  collection,  before  the  appearance  of 
this  posterior  lunule,  show  that  Moulinsia  is  only  a  young  Encope  emargi- 
nata. As  in  my  account  of  young  Echini  I  have  given  a  full  description  of 
the  changes  Encope  undergoes  during  its  growth,  I  will  only  recall  them 
here  to  justify  the  synonymy  adopted. 

Littoral  to  7  fathoms. 

Echinoneus  semilunaris  Lam.,  An.  s.  v. 
Syn.  Echinoneus  semilunaris  Lutk.,  Bid. 

clegans  A.  Ag.,  Bull.  M.  C.  Z.,  No  2. 

Liitken,  like  myself,  has  only  been  able  to  recognize  one  species  in  the 
We  •  India  Islands.  As  is  well  known,  the  difficulty  of  distinguishing  the 
species  in  this  genus  is  very  great ;  the  more  so,  as  thus  far  only  tests  with- 
out spines  have  been  used  in  the  determination  .of  species.  Mr.  Pourtales 
has  collected  one  specimen  at  Carysfort  Reef  with  its  spines  and  tentacles, 
which  gives  us  the  first  opportunity  of  making  a  direct  comparison  with 
specimens  from  the  Sandwich  Islands  (the  true  E.  cyclostomus)  still  retain- 
ing the  anal  and  buccal  membranes.  As  far  as  I  am  able  to  discriminate 
between  the  test  of  these  two  species,  the  Pacific  species  is  remarkable  for 
the  narrowness  of  its  poriferous  zone,  the  pores  being  placed  in  close  con- 
tact, separated  by  a  ridge  carrying  small  tubercles,  while  in  the  specimens 


268  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

of  E.  semilunaris  the  poriferous  zone  is  much  broader.  It  has  also  (taking 
the  same  point  of  the  test  in  specimens  of  the  same  size)  larger  tubercles, 
and  a  greater  number  of  large,  glassy  tubercles,  while  the  miliaries  are  closely 
crowded  together.  In  E.  cyclostomus,  on  the  contrary,  the  primary  tuber- 
cles, as  well  as  the  glassy  tubercles,  are,  proportionally,  much  smaller  and 
farther  apart,  the  miliaries  being  more  numerous.  From  the  examination 
of  the  alcoholic  specimen  from  Florida,  I  could  not  come  to  any  satis- 
factory conclusion  concerning  the  function  of  the  glassy  tubercles  ;  they  are 
not  primary  tubercles  in  the  course  of  growth,  as  they  are  fully  as  large, 
and  the  primary  tubercles,  when  young,  always  appear  at  first  as  opaque 
tubercles.  They  carry  no  special  spines.  On  living  specimens  their  func- 
tion will  probably  be  ascertained.  Similar  glassy  tubercles  often  appear 
on  the  edge  of  very  young  Clypeastroids  (Stolonoclypus  prostratus),  which 
disappear  in  older  stages.  Desor  has  given  figures  of  the  spines;  but  in 
addition  to  these,  the  test  is  thickly  covered  with  stout  pedicellariae  carried 
upon  moderate  peduncles.  The  tentacles  do  not  differ  (as  far  as  could  be 
judged  from  this  alcoholic  specimen,  where  they  still  were  tolerably  ex- 
panded) from  the  tentacles  of  our  ordinary  Echini,  having  prominent 
suckers.  The  tentacles  retain  the  same  structure  from  the  mouth  to  the 
apical  system.  On  the  lower  surface,  especially  round  the  mouth  and  anal 
system,  the  spines  are  longer  and  more  slender  than  on  the  remaining  por- 
tions of  test.  The  anal  system  will,  I  think,  furnish  good  characters  for  the 
determination  of  species,  if  we  can  judge  from  the  striking  differences  the 
arrangement  of  the  plates  of  the  anal  system  presents  in  the  two  thus  far 
examined.  In  the  Pacific  species  the  anal  opening  is  more  pear-shaped  ; 
the  anus  is  placed  near  the  blunt  end,  surrounded  by  a  number  of  small 
plates  arranged  concentrically  round  it,  and  extending  as  a  narrow  band  of 
small,  slender,  elongated  plates  between  the  single  rows  of  large  plates, 
extending  on  each  side  along  the  other  extremity  of  the  anal  system.  This 
row  of  large  plates  consists  of  five  large  plates,  diminishing  in  size  from  the 
centre  of  the  row  towards  either  extremity,  and  carry  a  fevf  large  tubercles 
bearing  spines.  In  the  West  India  species,  on  the  contrary,  the  anal  sys- 
tem is  more  elliptical,  the  anus  being  placed  almost  in  the  centre,  sur- 
rounded by  a  smaller  number  of  small  plates  radiating  from  it  irregularly. 
The  single  rows  are  made  up  of  four  plates,  leaving  a  triangular  space 
covered  by  small  plates  between  them  and  the  anus.  The  rest  of  the  anal 
system  is  covered  by  much  larger  polygonal  plates  than  in  the  Pacific 
species.  The  buccal  membrane  is  covered  by  small  quadrangular  plates, 
arranged  in  rows  radiating  from  the  mouth,  diminishing  in  size  towards  the 
opening  of  the  mouth  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  membrane.  The  absence 
of  teeth  is  fully  confirmed  by  an  examination  of  this  specimen.  The  close 
structural  resemblance  between  the  young  of  Echinolampadai  and  Echino- 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  269 

neus  shows  that  Echinoneus  has  no  affinity  whatever  with  the  Galeritidae, 
with  which  the  genus  has  always  been  associated,  but  that  it  is  a  true  em- 
bryonic Cassidulus  allied  to  Echinolampada?  and  Caratomus,  already  sug- 
gested by  Desor  to  be  a  true  Cassidulus,  and  not  a  Galerites.  This  affin- 
ity the  examination  of  young  Echinolampadoe  proves  undoubtedly.  The 
removal  of  Echinoneus,  Caratomus,  and  all  the  allied  edentate  forms  of 
Galerites  now  reduces  the  family  to  one  of  great  homogeneity,  and  suggests 
again  the  question  of  their  affinity  to  true,  regular  Echinoids  in  a  more  for- 
cible manner  than  before.  We  must,  however,  wait  till  we  find  a  living 
representative  of  Galerites,  to  have  the  question  fully  decided.  I  am 
inclined,  in  the  mean  while,  to  associate  the  Galeritida?  having  teeth  with  the 
true  Echinoids,  and  consider  them  as  forming  among  Echinoids  a  prophetic 
type  of  the  Clypeastroids,  with  which  they  have  many  points  of  resem- 
blance. 
Littoral. 

Echinolampas  caratomoides  A.  Ac,  nov.  sp. 

Fragments  of  an  Echinolampas  were  dredged  in  the  first  expedition,  in- 
dicating the  presence  of  a  species  which  must  attain  a  length  of  at  least  two 
inches.  In  the  second  expedition  an  entire  specimen,  measuring  a  little 
over  an  inch,  was  dredged  from  a  depth  of  thirty-five  fathoms.  H  resembles 
in  outline  E.  Richardii  Desml.  found  in  Senegal,  but  differs  from  it  by  the 
peculiar  structure  of  the  ambulacral  rosette,  which  is  not  strictly  petaloid 
(the  large  fragments  have  the  same  structure),  the  two  lines  of  pores  of  each 
ambulacrum  having  a  different  development.  In  the  posterior  pair,  the 
anterior  zone  is  fully  developed,  forming  one  side  of  the  petal,  while  the 
other  zone  is  not  quite  half  as  long.  It  is  the  same  with  the  anterior  pair 
of  ambulacra,  but  the  anterior  zone  is  the  shorter.  In  the  odd  ambula- 
crum the  left  poriferous  zone  is  the  shortest.  In  the  continuation  of  the 
ambulacra  from  the  rosette  to  the  mouth  it  is  always  the  exterior  pore 
•which  is  continued  from  each  zone,  and  not  pairs  of  pores,  as  is  uniformly 
represented  in  all  drawings  of  fossil  Echinolampadje.  The  floscelle  round 
the  mouth  is  most  distinct,  but  in  this  specimen  the  bourrelets  were  not  yet 
developed,  formed  as  yet  only  by  simple  accumulations  of  small  tubercles 
closely  crowded  together.  In  still  younger  specimens  the  resemblance  of  the 
opening  of  the  actinal  system  to  that  of  Clypeastroids  is  much  greater,  show- 
ing plainly  that  the  distinction  of  a  suborder,  founded  upon  the  presence 
of  the  bourrelets  and  phyllodes,  as  separating  the  Echinolampadse  from  the 
Spatangoids  cannot  be  maintained,  and  is  simply  an  embryonic  feature 
which  may  be  more  or  less  developed.  The  peculiar  bare  space  of  the  ac- 
tinal part  of  the  test,  so  characteristic  of  Pygorhynchus,  and  upon  which 
Desor  lays  so  much  stress,  is  well  developed,  though  in  older  specimens  of 


270  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Echinolampadae  it  can  be  traced  only  as  a  faint,  indistinct  narrow  band. 
The  young  of  this  Ecliinolampas  resemble  Caratomus  to  such  an  extent 
(see  the  description  of  the  young  stages)  that  the  larger  specimens  were 
considered  as  living  representatives  of  Caratomus.  The  series  collected  by 
Mr.  Pourtales  in  his  second  expedition  shows  conclusively  that  Echinolam- 
pas passes  at  first  through  a  stage  strikingly  similar  to  Echinoneus  and 
subsequently  most  closely  allied  to  Caratomus. 

Note.  —  Uesmoulins  has  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  Senegal 
species  should  be  named  E.  Laurillardi  Des.ml.,  the  name  Richardii  hav- 
ing been  applied  by  him  to  a  fossil  species  from  the  tertiaries  of  Bordeaux, 
from  which  it  is  different. 

From  35  to  1G0  fathoms. 

Rhyncholampas  caribbsearum  A.  Ac,  nov.  gen. 

Syn.  Cassidulus  caribboearum  Lam.,  An.  s.  Vert. 
Cassidulus  caribbasarum  Lutk.,  Bid. 
Nucleolites  Richardii  Duch.,  Antill.  (non  Desml.) 

Lamarck's  genus  Cassidulus,  as  established  in  1801.  contains  in  it  two  dis- 
tinct types  :  Cassidulus  lapis  cancri  and  the  species  from  the  West  Indies; 
Cassidulus  Marmimi  has  very  justly  been  separated  as  a  distinct  genus, 
Rhynchopygus  by  Desor,  but  this  still  leaves  Cassidulus  of  Lamarck  com- 
posed of  two  types,  for  either  of  which  the  name  Cassidulus  might  properly 
be  retained,  but  as  Cassidulus  is  preoccupied  among  Mollusca,  I  would  pro- 
pose to  retain  temporarily  Cassidulus  for  the  fossil  species  allied  to  C.  lapis 
cancri,  and  leave  to  some  palaeontologist  the  task  of  properly  limiting  that 
genus,  and  separate  from  Cassidulus  under  the  name  of  Rhyncholampas  a 
genus  including  Cassidulus  caribbsearum  and  its  West  Coast  representative, 
which  was  originally  named  Pygorhynchus  pacificus  in  theMuseum  Bull. 
No.  2.  This  view  is  the  one  Liitken  adopted  at  first,  but  afterwards  he  has 
referred  these  two  species  to  Rhynchopygus,  a  change  which  docs  not  seem 
judicious,  and  which  his  own  excellent  analysis  and  comparison  of  Cassidu- 
lus and  Rhynchopygus  does  not  justify.  Mr.  Pourtales  brought  home 
fragments  of  this  species,  showing  that  it  must  equal  in  size  its  pacific  rep- 
resentative. As  it  has  been  figured  frequently,  and  described  so  well  by 
Liitken,  T  will  only  call  attention  to  a  few  points  of  difference  between  the 
East  and  West  Coast  species.  The  bare  actinal  band  of  the  West  India 
species  is  deeply  pitted  with  longitudinal  round  and  elliptical  pores,  the 
edges  surmounted  by  minute  tubercles,  carrying  extremely  delicate  spines, 
resembling  in  every  respect  the  s(jjructure  of  the  microscopic  spines  of  the 
fascioles  of  the  true  Spatangoids.  The  spines  in  fascioles  cannot  be  called 
pedicellaria;,  although  it  is  the  universal  practice:  they  arc  true  spines,  hav- 
ing all  t lie  structure  of  embryonic  spines,  —  in  fact,  true  pedunculated  pedi- 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  271 

cellar:a3  among  Spatangoids  are  not  found  in  fascioles  at  all ;  they  are 
found  round  the  mouth  principally,  and  also  on  the  surface  of  the  test. 
The  plates  of  the  anal  system,  arranged  in  three  rows,  are  broader  and 
longer  than  in  "the  Pacific  species,  where  they  are  arranged  in  two  rows 
only,  the  outer  row  being  the  largest.  In  the  pacific  species  the  pits  of  the 
smooth  band  are  reduced  to  a  few  indistinct  impressions,  the  whole  band 
being  thickly  covered  by  minute  silk-like  spines.  The  floscelle  is  most  dis- 
tinct also,  while,  owing  to  the  sculpture  of  the  bare  band  round  the  mouth 
in  the  West  India  species,  its  outline  cannot  be  traced. 
Fragments  in  106  fathoms. 

Neolampas  rostellatus  A.  Ac,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

Outline  from  above  resembling  Echinolampas  more  elongated,  three 
large  genital  openings  ;  the  left  anterior  one  atrophied,  placed  closely  to- 
gether, madreporic  body  restricted  to  a  narrow  ridge  separating  them. 
Seen  in  profile,  the  test  rises  gradually  from  the  anterior  extremity  to- 
wards the  apical  system,  attaining  its  greatest  height  between  it  and  the 
posterior  extremity  ;  this  is  sharply  truncated  anteriorly,  as  in  some  species 
of  Catopygus.  The  lower  extremity  is  concave,  undulating ;  the  anal  sys- 
tem is  large,  elliptical,  occupying  the  whole  of  the  posterior  truncated  end, 
somewhat  as  m  Botriopygus,  the  test  being  turned  in  like  the  finger  of  a 
glove,  while  the  anus  opens  at  the  end  of  a  long  slender  tube,  extending 
well  beyond  the  outline  of  the  test,  starting  from  the  upper  part  of  the  anal 
membrane,  which  is  covered  by  small  plates,  gradually  diminishing  in  size 
and  eventually  firmly  soldered  together  to  form  the  base  of  the  anal  tube. 
Test  thin,  mouth  placed  near  anterior  extremity,  having  a  well-developed 
floscelle  and  prominent  bourrelets.  The  test  is  covered  by  minute  tubercles 
of  different  sizes,  not  separated  into  primaries  and  miliaries,  as*in  Echinolam- 
pas. The  tubercles  are  not  sunk,  but  stand  out  prominently  from  the  test. 
The  spines  are  straight,  very  fine,  resembling  those  of  the  Scutellida?. 
There  is  no  ambulacral  rosette  so  prominent  in  all  Echinolampadas.  From 
an  external  examination  alone  it  would  be  difficult  to  trace  the  course  of 
the  ambulacra,  but  from  the  interior  we  easily  see  one  pore  for  each  am- 
bulacral plate  extending  from  the  floscelle  to  the  apical  system,  and  appear- 
ing as  most  minute  pores  when  seen  from  outside.  In  fact,  the  structure  of 
all  the  ambulacra  is  here  identical  with  the  structure  of  the  ambulacra  be- 
tween the  rosette  and  the  mouth  in  other  Echinolampadae.  The  color  of 
this  Sea-urchin  is  a  yellowish  green,  and  I  am  convinced  it  is  not  the  young 
of  any  other  Echinolamp,  in  spite  of  its  size  (^  of  an  in.),  owing  to  the  great 
development  of  the  bourrelets,  which  in  other  Echinolampadaj  appear  only 
after  the  specific  characters  are  fully  formed  and  the  main  features  of  the 
adult  attained. 

From  100  to  125  fathoms. 


272  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Pourtalesia  miranda  A.  Ac,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

A  single  specimen  of  this  interesting  genus  was  dredged  at  a  depth  of 
349  fathoms.  It  is  a  living  representative  of  Infulaster  of  the  cretaceous 
period,  holding  the  same  relation  to  it  which  llhynehopygus,  with  its  projec- 
tion covering  the  anus,  holds  to  Echinolampas,  if  the  posterior  part  of  the 
test  of  the  former  were  drawn  out  into  a  long  spout.  The  outline  of  this 
genus,  and  of  Infulaster,  is  very  peculiar,  and  at  first  sight  no  one  would 
take  for  a  -Sea-urchin  the  elongated,  bottle-shaped  body  with  its  thin  and 
transparent  test.  It  is  more  like  a  Holothurian  ;  the  anus  is  nearly  at  one 
extremity,  while  the  mouth  is  placed  at  the  other.  The  short,  vertical 
diameter,  as  compared  to  its  length ;  the  absence  of  any  feature  which 
would  indicate  the  presence  of  a  petaloid  ambulacral  rosette ;  the  long, 
slender,  curved  spines,  far  apart,  supported  upon  peculiar  tubercles,  mark 
this  genus  as  one  of  the  most  interesting  which  have  been  brought  to  light 
by  Mr.  Pou^tales.  It  forms  a  valuable  link  in  our  appreciation  of  the  affin- 
ities of  Spatangoids  proper  with  Spatangoids  in  which  the  mouth  is  not 
labiate.  Seen  from  above,  the  outline  is  bottle-shaped,  the  neck  being  the 
posterior  extremity.  At  the  base  of  the  neck  the  test  carries  a  deep  pit, 
surmounted  at  its  anterior  extremity  by  a  rostrum  projecting  from  the 
test,  and  under  this,  at  the  bottom  of  the  pit,  is  placed  the  anus.  Seen  in 
profile,  the  anterior  extremity  is  almost  vertically  cut  off",  the  test  arching 
regularly  from  the  apical  system  to  the  rostrum,  where  it  is  abruptly  cut  off, 
forming  a  regular  curve  to  the  posterior  extremity,  which  extends  beyond 
the  anal  system  like  a  snout  thickened  at  the  end,  surmounted  at  its 
extremity  by  an  accumulation  of  minute  deep  violet-colored  tubercles, 
which  carry  no  spines.  The  lower  surface  is  convex,  regularly  arched  from 
the  posterior  to  the  anterior  extremity.  The  posterior  pair  of  ambulacra 
extend  on  both  sides  of  an  elongated  plastron  to  the  base  of  the  snout-like 
prolongation,  where  they  curve  sharply  upwards,  and  follow  close  to  the 
abactinal  part  of  the  test,  along  a  marked  wedge-shaped  ridge,  extending 
from  the  apical  system  into  the  rostrum,  protecting  the  anus,  to  the  apical 
system,  situated  almost  at  the  summit  of  the  nearly  vertical  anterior  ex- 
tremity. The  pair  of  anterior  ambulacra  take  a  similar  course,  but  curve 
more  regularly,  and  do  not  extend  beyond  the  median  line  towards  the 
posterior  end.  The  odd  ambulacrum  is  made  up  of  two  lines  of  pores  far 
apart,  situated  in  the  deep  anterior  groove.  The  abactinal  system  consist- 
ing of  four  large  genital  openings,  placed  close  together,  with  the  mad- 
reporic  body  tolerably  well  defined  in  the  centre,  is  situated  at  the  origin 
of  the  anterior  groove,  this  is  flanked  by  prominent  ridges  extending 
from  the  apical  system,  gradually  disappearing  towards  the  mouth,  placed 
at  the  other  extremity  of  the  anterior  groove,  which  increases  in  depth  on 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  273 

the  lower  surface,  resembling,  in  fact,  the  anal  groove  of  Echinobrissus,  and 
allied  genera  with  inverted  position.  The  actinal  system  is  elliptical  in  the 
trend  of  the  groove,  very  large,  with  sharply  defined  edges  covered  by  very 
minute  plates.  There  are  no  indications  of  a  floscelle.  The  odd  ambulacrum 
carries  lar^e,  thick  tentacles,  with  a  slightly  lobed  disk,  while  the  tentacles 
of  the  other  ambulacra  are  peculiar.  They  are  placed,  one  for  each  plate,  far 
apart,  branching  at  the  extremity,  strengthened  by  a  rod  separating  in  the 
three  branches,  each  terminating  by  a  well-marked  disk.  There  is  no  peta- 
loid  portion  in  the  ambulacra ;  they  are  all  simple  pores  from  the  mouth  to 
the  apical  system.  The  spines  are  long,  curved  at  the  base,  as  in  Spatan- 
goids,  but  the  tubercles  to  which  they  are  attached  have  not  a  sunken, 
scrobicular  area.  The  mamelon  is  small,  crenulated,  perforate,  surrounded 
by  a  large  granulated,  scrobicular  area,  and  raised  above  the  surface  of  the 
test,  to  which  the  milled  ring  is  attached  by  a  very  flexible  muscular  mem- 
brane. There  are  smaller  spines  of  a  similar  structure  scattered  irregularly 
over  the  test,  but  quite  distant.  The  whole  appearance  of  the  test  is  bare, 
and  it  is  only  on  the  ridges  along  the  anterior  groove,  round  the  mouth  and 
anus,  that  the  small  spines  are  closely  packed  together.  Ridiating  from 
the  apex  towards  the  mouth,  and  extending  along  the  abactinal  plastron, 
there  are  masses  of  pigment  cells  forming  lines  of  dark  violet  spots,  also  a 
similar  series  of  spots  round  the  extremity  of  the  anal  prolongation  of  the 
test,  particularly  marked  on  the  edge  of  the  pit  leading  to  the  anal  open- 
ing. From  the  above  description  it  is  evident  that  Infulaster  and  the 
Ananchytidae  must  have  had  a  structure  allied  to  that  of  Pourtalesia,  and 
are  embryonic  Spatangoids,  still  retaining  some  features  of  Clypeastroids, 
while  the  features  characteristic  of  young  Spatangoids  are  prominently 
developed. 

Off  the  Tortugas  in  349  fathoms. 

Lissonotus  fragilis  A.  Ac,  nov.  gen.  et  sp. 

This  genus  has  the  general  outline  of  Maretia,  but  is  somewhat  more 
elongate.  It  must,  from  the  description  of  Grube,  be  closely  allied  to 
Platybrissus,  but  the  presence  of  a  subanal  fasciole,  as  well  as  a  slight  an- 
terior groove,  readily  distinguish  the  two  genera,  in  addition  to  the  presence 
of  a  rudimentary  rosette  in  Platybrissus,  wanting  in  this  genus.  The  mouth 
is  not  labiate,  but  pentagonal,  with  a  well-developed  floscelle,  while  the  re- 
maining portion  of  the  ambulacra,  extending  to  the  apical  system,  are  simple 
pores,  one  for  each  ambulacral  plate,  so  that  the  ambulacral  areas,  seen 
from  above,  are  scarcely  perceptible,  marked  only  by  the  somewhat  more 
closely  packed  minute  tubercles  covering  the  ambulacral  plates.  Seen  in 
profile,  the  test  is  regularly  arched  anteriorly,  from  the  lower  side  to 'the 
apex,  running  then  almost  horizontally,  and  abruptly  bevelled  at  the  pos- 
35 


274  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

terior  extremity.  The  central  plastron  is  small,  triangular,  surmounted  by 
an  elliptical  subanal  fasciole.  The  spines  of  the  lower  surface  are  large 
and  few  in  number,  confined  entirely  to  the  edge  of  the  test,  leaving  broad, 
bare  bands  in  the  ambulaeral  areas  and  adjoining  parts,  while  on  the  rest  of 
the  test  the  tubercles  are  minute,  carrying  small,  fine  spines,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  three  large,  curved  spines  (Lovenia-like)  near  the  circumference, 
placed  in  the  anterior  extremity  of  the  test.  The  tubercles  are  also  somewhat 
larger  on  the  edge  of  the  anterior  groove,  and  more  closely  packed  in  the  pos- 
terior interambulacral  space,  from  the  apex  to  the  anal  system,  than  in  re- 
maining parts  of  the  test.  The  plates  of  the  two  posterior  ambulacra  are 
broad,  while  all  the  other  ambulacra  are  made  up  of  smaller  plates.  There 
are  three  large  genital  openings  ;  the  right  anterior  one  is  obliterated.  The 
anal  system  is  transversely  elliptical,  its  membrane  covered  by  minute  gran- 
ulation ;  an  indistinct  branch  of  the  subanal  fasciole  extends  along  the 
lower  side  of  the  opening ;  the  anus  itself  opens  in  a  short,  delicate  tube, 
similar  to  that  of  Neolampas,  but  shorter.  The  whole  test  is  mottled  with 
dark  spots;  the  ground  color  is  grayish,  with  a  purplish  tinge. 
From  320  to  368  fathoms. 

Brissus  columbaris  Ag.,  Cat.  Rais. 
Littoral. 

Meoma  ventricosa  Lutk.,  Bidrag. 

Syn.  Brissus  ventricosus  Ac,  Cat.  Rais. 
"  panis  Grube,  Neue  Echin. 
"     spatiosus  McCb.,  P.  PI.  Foss.  S.  C,  PI.  3,  fig.  1. 

Liitken  first  referred  this  species  to  the  genus  Meoma  of  Gray,  established 
for  a  presumed  Australian  species,  M.  grandis.  Liitken  also,  in  1863,  called 
my  attention  to  the  generic  identity  of  Kleinia  nigra  A.  Ac,  with  Meoma, 
which  I  had  with  doubt  referred  to  Kleinia.  This  mistake  I  was  led  into 
by  the  fact  that  Gray  himself  did  not  refer  Brissus  ventricosus  to  Meoma, 
but  still  retained  it  in  a  section  of  Brissus.  This  shows  how  little  reliance 
can  be  placed  upon  the  subdivisions  which  Gray  so  frequently  introduces 
in  his  genera  (often  copied  without  any  attempt  at  a  more  accurate  discrimi- 
nation of  the  species  from  similar  headings  in  the  Catalogue  Ilaisonne), 
when  two  species  as  closely  allied  as  Meoma  ventricosa  and  Meoma  grandis 
are  placed  in  two  genera,  or  when  in  the  subdivisions  of  Echinocardium,  as 
another  instance,  Echinocardium  ovatum  is  placed  in  the  subdivision  of 
the  genus  with  "  deep,  odd,  ambulaeral  groove"  instead  of  being  placed  in 
the  same  subdivision  as  E.  gibbosum.  The  genus  Kleinia  I  am  unable  from 
Gray's  figures  and  descriptions  to  distinguish  from  Brissopsis.  Meoma  grandis 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  275 

Gray,  I  am  also  inclined,  from  a  careful  comparison  of  the  figures  of  Gray, 
to  consider  as  identical  with  Meoma  nigra  (Kleinia  nigra  A.  Ag.),  as  the 
locality  quoted  by  Gray  is  undoubtedly  erroneous,  Captain  Belcher,  as 
Liitken  mentions  in  his  "  Bidrag,"  having  visited  Central  America;  and  the 
fact  that  we  have  in  the  British  Museum,  brought  back  by  Belcher,  an 
Agassizia  subrotunda  Gray,  and  a  Meoma  grandis  Gray,  marked  "Aus- 
tralia," neither  of  which  can  be  distinguished  from  Agassizia  ovulum  and 
Meoma  nigra,  found  upon  the  West  Coast  of  Central  America,  seem  to 
indicate  without  much  dcubt  an  error  in  the  localities  of  the  specimens  of 
Gray's  Catalogue. 

Littoral,  to  85  fathoms. 

Plagionotus  pectoralis  Ag.,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 

Syn.  Plagionotus  pectoralis  Lutk.,  Bidrag. 
Gray,  Cat. 
"  Desorii  Gray        " 

"  Holmesii,   Ravenellianus  McCr.,  PI.  Foss.   S.  C,    PI.  3, 

figs.  2,  3. 

I  am  unable  to  appreciate  the  grounds  upon  which  Gray  distinguishes  P. 
Desorii  Gr.  from  P.  pectoralis  Ag.  The  figure  he  quotes  as  basis  for  his 
species  is  taken  from  the  original  Spatangus  pectoralis  Lam.,  which  came 
from  Bahia. 

The  identity  of  the  pliocene  and  post-pliocene  species  here  cited,  as  well 
as  in  the  synonymes  of  the  preceding  and  following  species,  is  of  course 
problematical ;  yet  the  differences  indicated  by  McCrady  do  not  indi- 
cate as  great  a  range  of  variation  as  we  find  in  living  species.  I  have 
quoted  the  figures  for  the  sake  of  calling  attention  to  them.  There 
are,  in  addition,  other  tertiary  species  described  by  Michelin  and  by  Guppy, 
coming  from  the  Gulf  and  the  West  India  Islands  ;  but  as  those  represented 
in  our  collections  are  not  accompanied  by  figures,  I  have  not  attempted  to 
point  out  their  affinities. 

Littoral  and  fragments  from  115  fathoms. 

Brissopsis  lyrifera  Ag.,  Agass  Cat.  Rais. 

The  only  difference  to  be  traced,  after  a  careful  comparison,  between 
Florida  and  European  specimens  is  the  existence  of  a  distinct  branch  of  the 
subanal  fasciole  extending  round  the  anal  system  to  the  peripetalous 
fasciole.  In  European  specimens  there  are  traces  of  this  branch,  but  it  is 
not  distinctly  and  sharply  defined  as  in  the  Florida  specimens.  The  subanal 
fasciole  seems,  from  all  I  can  gather  after  an  examination  of  Spatangoids 
in  various  stages  of  growth,  the  only  one  subject  to  changes,  and  it  is  not 


276  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

remarkable  that  we  should  have  in  Brissopsis  similar  variations,  in  the 
sub-anal  fasciole,  to  these  upon  which  Trosehel  has  founded  his  genera  Abatus 
Hamaxitus  and  Atrapus,  —  changes  which,  in  Brissopsis  at  least,  are  due  to 
different  stages  of  growth.  The  character  of  continuity  of  the  adjoining 
pairs  of  ambulacra,  which  Desor  assigns  to  Toxobrissus  as  a  distinguishing 
feature,  does  not  constitute  a  sufficient  basis  for  its  separation  from  Brissop- 
sis. This  character  is  more  and  more  apparent  according  to  the  size  of 
the  specimens ;  so  much  so,  that  we  should  place  Brissopsis  lyrifera,  when 
young,  in  Brissopsis,  but  when  full  grown  it  would  most  decidedly  pass  for 
a  Toxobrissus.  If  the  subanal  fasciole  is  really  absent  in  Toxobrissus,  it 
cannot,  as  Liitken  considers  it,  be  identical  with  Kleinia.  It  may  be  that 
other  characters  will  yet  be  traced  to  separate  it  from  Brissopsis ;  if  not, 
then  Kleinia  and  Toxobrissus  will  both  become  synonymous  with  Brissopsis. 
From  55  to  15G  fathoms. 

Agassizia  excentriea  A.  Ao.,  nov.  sp. 

Syn.  Agassizia  porifcra  McCr.,  PI.  Foss.  S.  C,  PI.  1,  fig.  5. 

I  am  somewhat  inclined  to  consider  this  species  as  the  Agassizia  porifera ; 
but  not  having  any  original  specimens  for  comparison,  and  the  drawings 
of  Ravenel  and  McCrady  showing  rather  striking  differences,  I  will  not  take 
their  identity  for  granted,  and  compare  it  only  with  the  West  Coast  repre- 
sentative, from  which  it  can  at  once  be  recognized  by  the  position  of  the 
apical  system,  which  is  much  more  eccentric  posteriorly  ;  on  this  account 
the  disparity  between  the  odd  anterior  pair  of  ambulacra  anil  the  posterior 
pair  is  greater  than  in  that  species.  The  interambulacral  plastron  is  ellipti- 
cal, and  with  this  exception  the  arrangement  and  proportion  of  the  tuber- 
cles is  that  of  A.  ovulum  Lutk.  The  peripetalous  fasciole  does  not  pass  be- 
low the  ambitus,  and  the  posterior  fasciole  makes  a  sharp  angle  under  the 
anal  opening. 

I  am  unable  to  distinguish  Agassizia  scrobiculata,  of  which  authentic  spe- 
cimens are  in  the  Museum  collection,  from  A.  ovulum.  I  must  say,  however, 
that  Valenciennes's  drawings  in  the  Venus  are  not  very  faithful,  and,  from 
an  identification  based  upon  his  figures  alone,  specific  diilerences  would 
readily  become  apparent. 

From  36  to  115  fathoms. 

Echinocardium  ovatum  Gray,  Cat.  Brit.  M. 

Syn.  Amphidctus  ovatus  Ac,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 

E.  orthonotus  McCr.,  P.  Foss.  S.  C,  PL  2,  fig.  1. 

An  examination  of  young  specimens  of  Echinocardium  cordatum  shows 
that  the  generic  distinction  which  I  attempted  to  make  between  Amphide- 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  277 

tus  and  Echinocardiuin,  based  upon  the  isolation  of  the  anal  from  the  sub- 
anal  fasciole,  and  thus  separating  the  group  with  a  deep  anterior  groove  from 
these  with  a  slight  anterior  groove  is  untenable.  The  presence  of  three  spe- 
cies of  Echinocardiuui  on  both  sides  of  the  Atlantic  is  certainly  remark- 
able, but  I  am  unable  to  distinguish  the  fragments  of  specimens  unmistak- 
ably identical  with  a  fine  specimen  of  Echinocardium  ovatum  collected  at 
Charleston,  S.  C,  in  the  Museum  collection,  from  European  specimens  of 
this  species. 

Off  Charleston  bar ;  Florida  in  1 28  fathoms. 

Echinocardium  lsevigaster  A.  Ag.,  nov.  sp. 

The  existence  of  several  species  of  Echinocardium  having  the  outline  of 
Echinocardium  cordatum,  but  the  slight  odd  ambulacral  groove  of  Echino- 
cardium ovatum,  is  an  additional  proof  of  the  identity  of  Echinocardium 
and  Amphidetus,  as  they  had  been  limited  in  the  Museum  Bulletin,  No.  2. 
The  present  species,  of  which  but  a  single  specimen  was  collected,  is  closely 
allied  to  the  Mediterranean  E.  gibbosum.  Not  having  sufficient  material  to 
make  a  thorough  comparison,  which  may  prove  their  identity,  I  give  the 
points  of  difference  observed  in  the  specimens  compared.  The  abactinal 
ridge  between  the  posterior  ambulacra  is  quite  prominent,  extending  as  a 
well-marked  rostrum  over  the  anal  opening  ;  this  is  pear-shaped.  The  ar- 
rangement of  the  anal  plates  is  similar  to  that  of  E.  ovatum  ;  the  apical  por- 
tion of  the  odd  ambulacrum  is  narrow,  the  fasciole  being  elongated,  ellipti- 
cal ;  the  sides  of  the  test  slope  up  very  gradually  from  the  ambitus ;  the 
apex  is  anterior  to  the  centre  ;  the  whole  upper  surface  of  the  test  is  covered 
by  minute  tubercles,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  large  ones  along  the  edge 
of  the  ambulacral  groove.  The  bare  spaces  of  the  ambulacra  on  the  lower 
surface  are  very  broad,  the  subanal  plastron  projects  beak-like  from  the 
posterior  extremity,  which  is  nearly  vertically  truncated,  but  the  beak  is 
not  as  prominent  as  in  E.  gibbosum,  where  it  becomes  a  striking  feature. 
From  79  to  121  fathoms. 

Echinocardium  Kurtzii  Gir.,  Proc.  Bost.  Soc,  1852. 

Syn.  Echinocardium  ampliflorum  McCr.,  P.  Foss.  S.  C,  PI.  2,  fig.  2. 

"  "  pothicum  McCr.        "      "         "         PI.  2,  fig.  3. 

"     ?  "  cordatum  Gray,  Cat.  B.  M. 

Girard  has  described  as  Echinocardium  Kurtzii  a  species  from  Charleston 
(it  occurs  also  in  N.  C.)  closely  allied  to  the  European  E.  cordatum.  Frag- 
ments of  it  were  collected  by  Mr.  Pourtales,  and  it  may  be  interesting  to 
compare  our  American  species,  of  which  the  Museum  possesses  excellent 
series,  with  E.  cordatum,  with  which  future  investigations  may  yet  prove  it 
identical,  as  the  differences  are  confined  almost  entirely  to  a  portion  of  the 


278  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

test,  subject  to  the  greatest  variation  in  Spatangoids.  These  consist  in  the 
greater  prominence  of  the  posterior  abactinal  interambulacral  ridge  ;  the 
anal  opening  is  almost  circular,  and  covered  by  a  larger  number  of  plates 
than  in  the  European  species,  where  they  are  larger  and  few  in  number. 
The  extremity  of  the  subanal  plastron  also  projects  beak-like,  and  is  more 
prominent,  though  not  as  much  as  in  E.  lievigaster. 
Littoral,  to  8j  fathoms. 

Schizaster  cubensis  D'Oru.,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 

Fragments  of  a  true  Schizaster,  allied  to  S.  gibbcrulus,were  collected. 
These  are  referred  with  same  doubt  to  the  above  species  ;  especially  if  the 
determination  of  Dujardin  is  correct,  who  refers  it  to  Periaster,  and  must 
have  had  access  to  the  original  specimen.  The  fragments  have,  however, 
the  distinctive  mark,  given  in  the  Catalogue  Raisonne,  of  having  the  anterior 
ambulacrum  much  less  sunken  than  in  S.  canuliferus,  —  a  character  which 
has  nothing  to  do  with  Periaster. 

Fragments  from  80  fathoms. 

Moera  atropos  Mich.,  Rev.  Mag.  de  Zool. 

Syn.  Schizaster  atropos  Ac,  Agass.  Cat.  Rais. 
Schizaster  lachesis  Gir.,  Proc.  B.  S.,  1850. 
Moera  lachesis  Des.,  Synops. 
Mcera  atropos  Lutk.,  Bidrag. 

Fragments  of  this  species  were  dredged  from  a  depth  of  80  fathoms. 
Girard  has  attempted  to  separate  specimens  from  Texas,  of  slightly  more 
elongated  outline,  as  a  distinct  species.  The  color  of  M.  atropos  when  alive  is 
yellowish.  The  spines,  where  more  thickly  clustered,  are  brownish  ;  they  are 
short  except  where  they  cover  the  sunken  ambulacra,  which  are  entirely  hid- 
den by  the  spines  meeting  from  both  sides.  On  the  lower  surface,  the  inter- 
ambulacral plastron  is  covered  by  long  spines,  which  as  they  wear  out  at  the 
extremity  become  spatula-shaped.  On  the  side  of  the  ambitus,  and  the  upper 
lateral  part  of  the  posterior  ambulacra,  the  spines  attain  a  great  length,  es- 
pecially towards  the  mouth,  where  they  are  most  closely  crowded  together. 
Gray  is  particularly  unfortunate  in  his  subdivision  of  this  genus;  he  has, 
like  Michelin,  divide:  1  Schizaster,  but  into  three  genera  (following  exactly 
the  three  typ  ss  of  the  Cat.  Rais.).  "Nina"  having  for  its  type  S.  canalife- 
rus,  while  S.  gibberulus,  which  is  most  closely  allied  to  it  and  cannot  be  sep- 
arated generically,  figures  as  Brisaster,  and  the  most  abnormal  of  the  Schi- 
zasterida*  is  retained  as  Schizaster.  Michelin's  subdivisions,  made  at  the 
same  time,  have  been  adopted  here. 

The  attempts  made  thus  far  to  restore  old  generic  names,  in  vogue  before 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  279 

Lamarck,  and  limit  them  to  genera,  as  we  understand  them  now,  have 
been  most  confusing.  Not  that  I  would  ignore  writers  who,  like  Brey- 
nius,  Leske,  Klein,  Linck,  were  often  far  in  advance  of  many  modern 
publications,  but  when  the  so-called  restoration  amounts  to  sweeping 
out  of  existence  genera  which  are  well  understood,  and  properly  de- 
fined, and  have  been  current  in  literature  for  more  than  half  a  century, 
and  replacing  them  by  generic  names  of  doubtful  limitation,  I  can  consider 
such  radical  changes  as  anything  but  progress  and  justice.  It  seems  to  me 
that  unless  these  changes  are  made  •  ich  as  much  discretion  and  judgment 
as  they  have  been  made  by  Desor  in  his  Synopsis,  applying  the  old  name 
to  a  subdivision,  and  retaining  at  the  same  time  the  current  name  for  a 
portion  of  the  genus  thus  subdivided,  they  are  not  calculated  to  advance 
our  knowledge  of  Echinoderms.  For  instance,  the  attempt  to  substitute 
Echinanthus  (which  includes  genera  as  widely  different  as  Echinolam- 
pas,  Conoclypus  and  Clypeaster)  for  Clypeaster,  while  D'Orbigny  consid- 
ered Echinolampas  as  identical  with  Echinanthus;  the  adoption  of 
either  view  involves  endless  confusion,  and  Dasor's  solution  is  so  natural 
that  we  must,  as  a  general  rule,  take  his  definitions,  in  spite  of  the 
priority  of  this  and  many  other  restorations  proposed  by  Gray,  which  are 
liable  to  similar  objections- 
Littoral,  to  80  fathoms. 


II.    On  the  Young  Stages  of  Echini. 

From  the  large  number  of  small-sized  Echini  collected  by  Mr. 
Pourtales  it  became  necessary,  in  order  to  study  them  intelligently,  to 
examine  the  young  of  as  many  species  as  possible,  and  obtain  some 
criterion  by  which  to  determine  this  collection  accurately.  As  the  results 
to  which  this  examination  has  led  me  form  the  basis  of  the  preceding 
descriptions,  it  is  not  out  of  place  to  give  the  proofs,  as  far  as  they  can 
be  given  by  a  short  resume  and  without  figures,  of  the  conclusions  to 
which  I  have  been  led  by  the  study  of  these  young,  leaving  for  a  more 
elaborate  paper  a  detailed  description,  as  well  as  figures,  of  the  changes 
here  mentioned,  which  these  young  undergo.  Some  of  the  specimens 
collected  by  Mr.  Pourtales  are  so  small  that  they  must  have  absorbed 
their  Pluteus  very  recently  before  their  capture.  This  collection,  taken 
in  connection  with  the  Museum  materials,  gave  the  means  of  studying 
the  changes  due  to  growth  of  the  following  species :  — 

Cidaris  annulata  Gray. 

Dorocidaris  abyssicola  A.  Ag. 


280  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Diademu  antillarum  Phil. 

Garelia  cincta  A.  Ag. 

Eehinocidaris  punctulata  Desml. 
"  sequituberculata  Ag. 

Echinometra  VanBrunti  A.  Ag. 

Toxopncustes  drobachiensis  Ag. 

Echinus  Flemingii  Ball. 
"         melo  Lam. 
"         gracilis  A.  Ag. 

Sphaereehinus  brevispinosus  Des 

Teranotrema  sculptum  A.  Ag. 

Toreumatica  concava  Gray. 

Genocidaris  maculata  A.  Ag. 

Trigonocidaris  albida  A.  Ag. 

Lytechinus  variegatus  A.  Ag. 

Tripneustes  ventricosus  Ag. 

Boletia  granidata  A.  Ag. 

Echinocyamus  angulosus  Leske. 

Clypeaster  rosaceus  Lam. 

Stolonoclypus  prostratus  A.  Ag. 

Echinaraclinius  parma  Gray. 

Encope  emarginata  Ag. 

Mellita  testudinata  Kl. 
"       hexapora  Ag. 
"       longifissa  Mich. 

Fibularia  volva  Ag. 

Echinolampas  caratomoides  A.  Ag. 

Echinocardium  cordatum  Gray. 

Brissops'is  lyrifera  Ag. 

Agassizia  excentrica  A.  Ag. 

I  doubt  if  without  the  aid  of  the  information  gained  by  the  study  of 
these  young  Echini  a  satisfactory  report  of  this  collection  could  have 
been  made.  The  changes  some  species  undergo  arc  so  great  that 
nothing  would  have  been  more  natural  than  to  place  the  two  extremes 
of  the  series  not  only  in  different  specie-:,  but  often  in  different  genera, 
and  even  in  different  families.  As  a  necessary  consequence,  the  study 
of  these  young,  showing  what  we  may  consider  differences  due  only  to 
growth,  will  load  to  the  elimination  of  numerous  species  and  genera, 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  281 

nnd  give  us  hereafter  a  much  more  accurate  hasis  in  our  limitation  of 
genera,  species,  and  the  higher  subdivisions.  But  it  would  be  out  of 
place  here  to  do  more  than  hint  at  this  reform,  especially  as  I  trust  soon 
to  publish,  in  our  Illustrated  Catalogue,  a  Revision  of  the  Echini, 
which  has  been  undertaken,  with  the  collections  in  the  Museum  and  of 
the  Smithsonian  as  a  basis.  I  shall  always  consider  myself  fortunate  to 
have  had  the  opportunity  —  thanks  to  the  liberality  of  the  Superinten- 
dent of  the  Coast  Survey  —  of  examining  this  collection,  forming  the 
most  valuable  addition  to  our  knowledge  of  recent  Echinoids  since  the 
collections  of  the  same  order  made  by  Stimpson  in  tiie  Pacific. 

In  Toxopneustes  drobachiensis  Ac  soon  after  resorption  of*  the  Plu- 
teus  the  young  Sea-urchin  has  few  large  tubercles  with  mamelon,  limited 
to  the  ambitus  (Podocidaris  and  Podophora-like).  The  next  Mage  has 
two  principal  rows  »f  large  tubercles  occupying  tl»d  whole  test  (Cidaris- 
like,  no  miliaries),  increasing  in  number  as  they  grow  older,  the  spines 
gradually  passing  from  a  condition  similar  to  those  of  Rhabdocidaris, 
Cidaris,  Echinocidaris,  and  finally  to  Toxopneustes-like  spine?,  as  fast 
as  the  primary  tubercles  are  formed,  retaining  their  embryonic  features 
most  strongly  while  the  spines  are  directly  connected  to  the  test,  as  in 
Podocidaris.  In  the  earlier  stages  the  actinal  opening  is  large  (Echino- 
cidaris-like),  without  indentations  (Cidaris-like),  occupying  nearly  the 
whole  of  the  actinal  surface.  As  the  test  increases  this  opening  becomes 
proportionally  smaller,  and  slight  cuts  are  formed  (Psammechinus-like). 
The  anal  system  is  at  first  closed  by  a  single  subanal  plate,  appearing 
before  the  formation  of  the  genital  and  ocular  plates ;  it  remains  for  a  con- 
siderable period  more  prominent  than  the  other  plates,  which  are  added 
to  cover  the  enlarged  anal  system.  The  symmetrical  axis  of  the  sub- 
anal  plate  does  not  hold  a  fixed  relation  to  the  madreporic  body,  being 
opposite  different  genital  plates  in  various  stages  of  growth.  This  cor- 
responds to  the  oblique  position  of  the  subanal  plate  in  Salenida\ 
when  we  take  as  starting-point  the  madreporic  body.  The  abactinal 
system  subsequently  passes  through  a  stage  reminding  us  of  Echinoci- 
daris and  Trigonocidaris,  only  there  are  five  instead  of  four  anal  plates. 
The  poriferous  zone  is  at  first  narrow,  the  pores  arranged  in  vertical 
rows ;  subsequently  they  are  slightly  arched  vertically  ;  they  next  sep- 
arate into  horizontal  arcs  of  a  smaller  number  of  pores,  increasing 
rapidly  in  number  with  age,  and  in  small  specimens  we  can  trace  their 
mode  of  formation,  as  the  arcs  near  the  ambitus  are  similar  to  those  of 
36 


282  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

the  adult,  while  those  next  the  abactinal  system  are  similar  to  the 
younger  stages.  The  plates  of  the  poriferous  zone  increase  indepen- 
dently of  the  inter-ambulacral  'plates.  The  different  stages  of  growth 
represent  in  the  younger  stages  Cidaris,  next  Hemicidaris,  then 
Pseudodiadema,  Echinocidaris,  Heliocidaris.  The  same  general  changes 
take  place  in  Toxopneustes  lividus,  but  the  turban  shape  (Cidaris 
state)  of  the  young  test  is  more  striking  than  in  T.  drobachiensis. 

In  Cidaris  the  difference  between  old  and  young  stages  "is  almost 
entirely  limited  to  the  proportionally  larger  size  of  the  spines,  and 
the  more  prominent  serrations  (recalling  Salenocidaris).  The  abactinal 
system  early  assumes  the  character  of  the  adult ;  in  fact,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  smaller  number  of  coronal  plates,  the  above  differences  in 
the  spines  are  the  only  important  changes  undergone  in  this  genus. 
The  same  holds  good  for  Diadema  and  Garelia,  in  both  of  which  the 
spines  are  proportionally  larger,  and  being  so  much  less  numerous  gives 
to  young  Diadematidae  a  peculiar  facies  (D.  calamaria-like).  We  find 
also  in  young  Diadema  characters  in  the  actinal  membrane  differing 
from  the  adult ;  the  peculiar  grouping,  in  five  separate  clusters,  of  the 
buccal  ambulacral  plates  which  appear  first,  is  soon  lost  by  the  en- 
croachment of  the  smaller  interambulacral  plates,  and  in  older  speci- 
mens the  plates  become  deeply  imbedded  in  the  buccal  membrane. 
The  pores  at  first  are  placed  in  a  vertical  row  in  very  young  speci- 
mens;  they  then  become  arranged  in  arcs  of  three  or  four  pairs;  with 
increasing  age  the  median  rows  of  interambulacral  tubercles  assume 
the  arrangement  found  in  the  adult.  Owing  to  the  rapid  growth  of  the 
spines  in  the  young,  the  extremity,  and  frequently  the  greater  part  of 
the  spine  almost  to  the  base,  is  hollow  ;  but  as  the  young  increase  in 
age  they  become  more  solid  at  the  base,  and  further  up  in  proportion 
to  their  age.*     Garelia  is  a  good  genus,  as  has  been  acknowledged  by 

*  The  genus  Echinodiadema  of  Verrill  is  founded  upon  structural  peculiarities  of 
young  Diadema  mexicanum.  Complete  series  of  the  young  Diadema  antillarum,  from 
one  tenth  of  an  inch  in  diameter  upwards,  show  that  :  the  slight  cuts,  the  shape  of  the 
abactinal  system,  the  presence  of  small  scales  covering  the  anal  system  (few  in  number 
in  very  small  specimens),  the  trigeminate  arrangement  of  the  pores,  the  hollowness  (gen- 
erally upper  extremity  only)  of  the  spines,  due  to  the  mode  of  growth  and  subsequent 
solidification  from  the  base  upwards  in  Diadematidte,  the  arrangement  of  the  tubercles, 
the  peculiar  grouping  of  the  plates  of  the  buccal  membrane,  —  features  upon  which  the 
genus  has  been  characterized,  —  are  found  in  young  Diadematidae.  I  have  carefully 
examined  the  type  of  Mr.  VerriU's  species,  as  well  as  young  of  Diadema  mexicanum, 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  283 

Bolsche,  in  letters  subsequently  to  the  "Nachtrag"  to  his  Diadematidaj, 
in  Wiegman's  Archiv.  Tlie  spines  are  solid,  already  longitudinally  stri- 
ated in  the  youngest  specimens  examined,  differing  totally  in  their  struc- 
ture from  those  of  Echinothrix  or  Diadema.  This  shows  plainly  that 
in  these  embryonic  Echini  (Cidaridae,  Diadematidae)  the  structure  of 
the  spines  forms  a  good  basis  for  the  discrimination  of  groups  notwith- 
standing their  apparent  great  changes  of  form.  These  do  not  extend 
to  the  nature  of  the  ornamentation,  which  remains  very  constant,  and 
will  prove  of  great  value  in  fossil  Echini. 

Nowhere  among  the  young  regular  Echini  have  I  found  such  great 
changes  in  the  shape  and  proportions  of  the  test  and  spines  as  in  Echi- 
nometra.  We  frequently  find  specimens  of  the  same  size,  where  in  one 
case  the  outline  is  almost  circular,  the  test  flattened,  covered  with  long 
slender  spines,  while  in  the  other  the  test  is  lobed,  swollen,  high,  sur- 
mounted by  numerous  short  stout  spines.  These  and  all  intermediate 
stages,  complicated  by  the  greater  or  smaller  number  of  primary 
tubercles,  the  arrangement  of  the  arcs  of  the  poriferous  zone  undergoing 
changes  exactly  similar  to  those  described  in  Toxopneustes,  are  found 
retained  in  specimens  of  very  different  size.  This  has  given  rise  in  a 
great  measure  to  the  confused  synonymy  attached  to  our  most  common 
species,  and  renders  their  identification,  if  based  upon  meagre  material, 
almost  hopeless. 

In  young  Echinocidaridoa  we  have  already  in  the  youngest  stages  four 
anal  plates.  The  abactinal  system  of  very  young  specimens  is  remarkably 
prominent,  occupying  more  than  one  half  the  abactinal  part  of  the  test. 
The  whole  test  is  deeply  pitted  (Trigonocidaris-like)  ;  the  rudimentary 
tubercles,  covering  the  greater  part  of  the  abactinal  part  of  the  test,  are 
connected  "by  ridges,  which  are  gradually  resorbed  and  reduced  to  the 
granulation  found  upon  the  coronal  plates  of  the  genus.  The  primary 
tubercles  are  at  first  limited  to  the  ambitus,  surmounted  by  short  stout 
spines  (Podophora-like),  gradually  becoming  more  slender  and  propor- 
tionally longer  with  increasing  age  (the  opposite  of  what  takes  place  in 
Toxopneustes,  Cidaris,  and  mo-t  young  Echini).  The  rudimentary 
spines  are  not  seated  upon  tubercles;  they  are  club-shaped  (identical 

of  D.  antillarum,  and  additional  specimens  of  the  so-called  Echinodiadema  coronatum, 
which  has  convinced  me  that  Verrill's  species  is  only  a  young  Diadema  mexicanum,  the 
structural  differences  noticed  being  found  in  all  young  Diadematidce  I  have  had  occasion 
to  examine  (D.  antillarum,  D.  paucispinum,  and  I),  mexicanum). 


234  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

in  structure  to  those  of  Podoeidaris).  The  poriferous  zone  has  in  the 
earliest  stages  the  structure  found  in  the  adult,  only  it  does  not  widen 
at  the  aetinostome.  The  ratio  of  the  actinostome  to  test  doe9  not  vary 
greatly  in  different  stages  of  youth  ;  the  edge  of  the  actinal  system  form- 
ing the  groove  of  the  gills  is  turned  back  but  slightly  in  young,  the  lips 
taking  the  place  of  cuts  becoming  more  prominent  (Boletia-like)  with  in- 
creasing age.  The  separation  of  Echinocidaris  and  Arbacia  to  represent 
the  groups  with  bare  or  crowded  interambulacra  is  not  natural,  depend- 
ing upon  the  greater  or  less  resorption  of  the  rudimentary  tubercles 
formed  in  the  earlier  stages.  It  is  very  common  to  find  young  of 
Echinocidaris  punctulata  which  would  pass  for  young  of  Arbacia,  and 
young  Arbacia  requituberculata  which  would  pass  for  young  Echin- 
ocidaris. Owing  to  the  independent  growth  of  the  plates  of  the  porif- 
erous zone,  we  have  either  three  or  four  pairs  of  pores  for  each  am- 
bulacral  plate ;  the  same  is  the  case  with  other  Oligoporidae,  as  limited 
by  Desor,  showing  that  the  division  he  has  made,  convenient  though  it 
is  as  a  key  for  the  easier  grouping  of  genera,  is  yet  not  strictly  reliable, 
the  mode  of  growth  of  many  Polyporida)  showing  in  their  young  stages 
that  they  have  but  a  small  number  of  pores  (Tripneustes,  Mespilia)  for 
each  ambulacral  plate  which  places  them  among  the  Oligoporidae;  but, 
owing  to  the  independent  growth  of  the  plates  of  the  poriferous  zone  in 
older  stages,  they  seem  to  belong  to  the  Polyporidie. 

In  Echinus,  Sphaerechinus,  Lytechinus,  we  find  in  the  younger  stages 
the  same  unbroken  vertical  arrangement  of  the  pores,  taking  next  a 
vertically  arched  form,  still  connected,  and  then  assuming  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  adult.  In  these  genera  the  anal  system  is  at  first  covered 
by  one  plate,  aud  undergoes  changes  similar  to  those  of  Toxopneustes, 
by  the  addition  of  four  smaller  plates,  and  so  on,  the  original  subanal 
plate  retaining  long  a  greater  prominence.  The  miliaries  are  formed  in 
these  genera  as  well  as  Toxopneustes  by  radiating  ridges  arising  from 
the  base  of  the  primary  tubercles,  forming  a  sort  of  star,  then  they  swell 
at  the  distal  extremity,  forming  a  set  of  club-shaped  spokes  round  the 
main  tubercle;  these  are  little  by  little  separated  from  it,  and  become 
independent  elliptical  tubercles  at  first,  and  then  miliaries  or  secondary 
tubercles.  The  ten  large  buccal  plates  of  the  actinal  membrane  are  the 
first  to  appear.  Small  plates  (in  genera  in  which  they  are  found  in  the 
adult)  are  next  formed  between  them  and  the  teeth  (Echinus-like), 
while  afterwards  they  cover  the  whole  membrane,  as  in  Lytechinus 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  285 

Psammechinus,  Trigonoeidaris,  appearing  between  the  ten  plates  and 
the  test.  This  mode  of  growth  is  totally  unlike  the  growth  of  the 
buccal  plates  of  the  Cidaridae,  where  these  plates  perform  the  part  of 
ambulacral  and  interambulacral  plates,  and  appear  near  the  test  at  first, 
forming  in  full-grown  specimens  rows  made  up  of  more  than  two  plates, 
a>  in  the  Palaechinidae,  suggesting  that  the  test  of  Palaechinidae  must  have 
been  made  up  of  plates  homologous  to  the  buccal  plates  of  Cidaris. 
The  test  of  course  would  then  have  been  capable  of  considerable  com- 
pression and  change  of  outline,  as  is  the  case  in  Astropyga  and  Astero- 
soma.  This  similarity  is  very  striking  in  young  Cidaridae,  where  the 
number  of  coronal  plates  is  small,  and  the  young  Sea-urchin  seems  to 
consist  almost  entirely  of  an  abactinal  and  an  actinal  system,  separated 
by  a  narrow  band  of  coronal  plates.  Let  this  narrow  band  of  coronal 
plates  disappear  entirely,  and  the  buccal  plates  take  a  correspondingly 
great  development,  and  we  have  a  Palaechinus  made  up  of  small  ambu- 
lacral and  interambulacral  plates  consisting  of  several  rows,  and  con- 
tinuous from  the  teeth  to  the  abactinal  system,  similar  to  that  discovered 
by  Meek  and  Worthen,  the  whole  test  surmounted  by  short  spines, 
articulating  upon  a  more  or  less  distinct  mamelon.  The  structural 
features  of  the  buccal  membrane  of  Cidaridae  entitle  them  to  a  higher 
rank  than  that  of  a  family,  in  the  suborder  of  Echinoids,  intermediate 
between  the  Palaechinidae  and  Echinidae  proper. 

In  the  Temnopleuridoe  (Toreumatica)  the  subanal  plate  remains  very 
prominent  in  adult  specimens ;  the  anal  system  in  the  young  is  covered 
by  one  large  elliptical  plate ;  as  the  anal  system  enlarges,  numerous 
minute  plates  surround  the  larger  plate,  which  always  retains  its 
peculiar  ornamentation,  and  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  other  by 
its  size  and  shape.  In  Temnotrema,  on  the  contrary,  the  anal  system 
undergoes  changes  identical  with  those  of  Toxopneustes,  Echinus,  and 
the  like.  In  Toreumatica,  the  pits  at  the  angles  of  the  plates  appear  at 
first  like  rectangular  openings,  which,  as  the  specimens  grow  older,  be- 
come little  by  little  connected  by  grooves,  growing  deeper  and  more 
prominent  wTith  advancing  age.  The  same  is  the  case  in  Temnotrema; 
the  pits,  however,  are  never  so  marked  in  the  adult,  becoming  simply 
comma-shaped.  The  miliaries  in  both  these  genera  are  formed  as  in 
other  genera  by  ridges  appearing  at  first  connected  with  the  base  of  the 
primary  tubercles.  In  Trigonoeidaris  the  young  differ  from  the  old  in 
having  larger  pits,  less  numerous  and  lower  ridges,  and  but  few  sec- 


286  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

on<lary  tubercles,  the  principal  rows  of  ambulacra!  and  interambula- 
cral  tubercles  being  very  prominent.  The  buccal  membrane  and  abactinal 
system  present  no  striking  differences,  the  anal  plates  being  only  four 
in  number  in  all  the  specimens  collected.  In  Genocidaris,  of  which  an 
extensive  series  was  collected,  we  find  in  the  smallest  specimens  a  few 
large  spines,  resembling  the  spines  of  young  Dorocidaris  abyssicola, 
equalling  in  length  the  diameter  of  the  test.  As  the  specimens  increase, 
the  spines  lose  their  spindle-shaped  form  and  their  serrate  edge  ;  they 
become  more  pointed  and  elongate,  diminishing  rapidly  in  proportion  to 
the  size  of  the  test,  and  soon  take  the  proportions  they  have  in  the 
adult.  The  actinal  opening  is  very  large  at  first,  the  test  in  young 
specimens  being  a  narrow  ring  when  seen  from  the  actinal  side.  The 
primary  tubercles  are  few  in  number,  with  remarkably  prominent  ridges 
radiating  from  them,  leaving  deep  pits  between  the  ridges.  With  in- 
creasing size  these  ridges  become  miliaries  and  secondary  tubercles,  the 
pits,  however,  remaining  round  the  boss  of  the  primary  tubercles  in  both 
the  areas  ;  so  that  the  test  passes  through  stages  in  which  it  resembles 
at  first  young  Psammechinus,  then  a  Psammechinus  with  deep  grooves 
radiating  from  the  tubercles,  and  finally  with  deep  pits  round  their  base. 
The  subanal  plate  retains  always  its  preponderance,  and  the  embryonic 
character  of  the  anal  system  (retained  in  the  generic  name)  is  a  marked 
feature  of  this  interesting  Sea-urchin.  The  actinal  opening  rapidly  be- 
comes smaller,  and  resembles  that  of  Psammechinus.  In  fact,  Geno- 
cidaris might  be  called  a  Psammechinus  among  Temnopleuridai,  while 
Toreumatica  is  the  Lytechinus  of  the  family. 

The  changes  taking  place  in  the  arrangement  of  the  pores  in  Trip- 
neustes  and  Boletia  are  similar  to  those  observed  in  Echinus  ;  at  first  a 
simple  vertical  row,  then  arcs  laterally  curved,  then  three  pairs  of  pores 
for  each  ambulacral  plate,  in  oblique  open  curves,  and  finally  almost 
horizontal  curves,  the  pores  appearing  to  be  placed  in  independent 
vertical  rows.  Hipponbe  of  Gray  cannot  be  retained,  the  name  being 
preoccupied  by  Audouin,  and  as  Hipponoe  and  Tripneustes  are 
identical,  the  name  Tripneustes  can  be  retained  to  include  the  species  of 
both  these  genera. 

Among  the  Clypeastroids  we  find  in  the  young  during  their  growth 
greal  changes  of  form  and  structure  taking  place.  In  young  Kchin- 
arachnius  the  outline  is  elliptical,  the  test  is  arched,  high,  the  anus  is 
placed  in  a  slight  depression  of  the  test,  and,  seen  in  profile,  we  are  re- 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  1>7 

minded  of  the  general  aspect  of  Pygorhynchus.  There  are  but  two 
principal  rows  of  large  tubercles  in  each  area,  extending  from  apex  to 
mouth,  so  that,  seen  from  above,  the  young  Echinarachnius  has  much 
the  facies  of  an  Echinometra.  The  mouth  is  large,  pentagonal,  its 
radius  being  half  the  radius  of  the  test.  The  ambulacral  rosette  is 
reduced  to  two  pairs  of  pores,  — -  simple  perforations  of  the  test,  one  in 
each  poriferous  zone  for  each  ambulacrum.  This  extraordinary  shape 
and  structure  the  young  do  not  retain  long ;  they  soon  become  pyriform  ; 
the  blunt  extremity  being  the  posterior,  the  test  becomes  greatly  flattened 
and  the  anus  approaches  the  edge.  The  rosette  is  now  composed  of 
three  and  two  pairs  of  simple  pores  in  each  poriferous  zone  for  each 
ambulacrum,  the  anterior  ambulacrum  having  only  two  pairs  in  each 
zone.  The  tubercles  are  proportionally  smaller,  though  there  are  still  but 
two  rows  in  each  area,  but  further  apart.  In  the  next  stage  we  find  the 
rudimentary  rosette  composed  of  four  and  five  pairs  of  pores  close  to- 
gether and  two  or  three  distant  pairs  of  pores,  in  the  following  ambula- 
cral plates,  one  pair  in  each  plate,  which  in  subsequent  stages  increase 
in  number  and  extend  almost  to  the  edge  of  the  test.  The  test  has  be- 
come quite  flattened,  the  lower  side  is  concave,  undulating,  the  ambu- 
lacral zones  are  now  much  narrower  than  the  interambulacral  ones. 
Each  plate  still  has  only  one  tubercle ;  the  lines  of  separation  between 
the  two  zones  run  straight  from  the  edge  of  the  test  to  the  apex.  It  is 
only  in  somewhat  older  stages,  when  the  rosette  loses  its  radiating  outline, 
and  assumes  a  slightly  petaloid  shape,  that  we  find  the  angle  formed  at 
the  base  of  the  petal  in  the  ambulacral  zone,  from  which  point  the 
ambulacral  plates  widen  rapidly  ;  each  plate  now  carries  from  two  to 
six  smaller  tubercles.  The  outline  is  quite  pentagonal,  the  lower  sur- 
face concave,  but  little  undulating,  the  anus  placed  near  the  edge,  and 
covered,  as  in  all  preceding  stages,  by  one  plate  ;  the  anal  system  in 
older  specimens  has  five  plates,  the  plate  first  formed  remaining  some- 
what the  largest.  As  the  young  Echinarachnius  increases  in  size  its  out- 
line becomes  more  circular,  and  in  specimens  measuring  one  fifth  of  an 
inch  in  diameter  has  the  general  appearance  of  the  adult.  The 
furrows  joining  the  ambulacral  pores  appear  soon  after  the  first  traces 
of  a  true  rosette  are  seen ;  they  become  deeper  and  the  pores  separate 
in  proportion  with  the  petaloid  structure  of  the  abactinal  part  of  the 
ambulacrum.  The  tubercles  are  proportionally  much  smaller  and  more 
numerous,  and  soon  after  the  ambulacra  have  a  well-developed  rosette, 
bear  nearly  the  ratio  to  the  plates  which  they  have  in  the  adult. 


288  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Young  specimens  of  Mellita  hexapora,  measuring  ^  of  an  inch  in  di- 
ameter, are  almost  circular,  with  a  thickened  raised  edge,  as  in  Laganum, 
and  a-;  yet  have  no  lunules.  The  rosette  is  simply  a  series  of  radiating 
pores,  three  and  two  in  each  poriferous  zone,  for  each  ambulacrum,  ex- 
tending but  a  short  distance  from  the  apex.  The  ambulacra!  and  inter- 
ambulacral  plates  are  of  the  same  size,  hexagonal,  forming  twenty  equal 
zones,  carrying  but  a  single  large  tubercle  in  the  centre  of  each  plate  ; 
8een  from  below  the  surface  is  deeply  concave,  the  mouth  much  larger  in 
proportion  to  the  test  than  in  adult  specimens,  and  we  see  forming  from 
this  side  the  posterior  intcrambulacral  lunule  as  a  deep  pit,  at  one  ex- 
tremity of  which  is  placed  the  anus  near  the  mouth,  about  one  third  the 
distance  from  the  edge  of  the  test.  We  find  also  rudimentary  phyllodes 
made  up  of  a  few  of  the  small  pores,  which  eventually  extend  in  the  am- 
bulacral  furrows  to  the  edge  of  the  test,  but  are  now  restricted  to  a  small 
number  clustered  round  the  mouth.  The  outline  in  a  subsequent  stage 
becomes  slightly  pentagonal,  the  plates  elongate;  the  lunule  pierces 
through  to  the  abactinal  side ;  the  rosette  is  also  radiating,  made  up  of 
five  to  six  pairs  of  pores  for  each  poriferous  zone.  The  ambulacral 
area  is  now  slightly  narrower  than  the  intcrambulacral  zones.  When 
the  posterior  lunule  has  become  a  small  round  opening,  encroaching 
upon  the  plates  of  the  posterior  interambulacral  area,  extending  as  a 
lobe  beyond  the  outline  of  the  test,  the  rosette  is  slightly  petaloid. 
There  are  from  two  to  five  tubercles  on  each  plate ;  they  are  quite 
elongate,  having  lost  their  hexagonal  outline ;  the  lower  surface  is 
flat,  and  on  the  lower  side  the  ambulacra  have  broadened  very  rap- 
idly, the  interambulacra  forming  narrow  bands  carrying  larger  tuber- 
cles between  the  ambulacral  zones.  The  edge  of  the  test  is  still 
quite  thickened,  and  it  is  only  when  the  young  Mellita  has  attained 
somewhat  less  than  half  an  inch  in  diameter  that  the  ambulacral 
lunules  appear  as  pits,  seen  at  first  from  the  lower  side  only,  and 
gradually  forcing  their  way  through  the  test.  The  posterior  inter- 
ambulacral lunule  increases  rapidly  in  size ;  the  test  and  the  groove  in 
which  (lie  anus  is  placed  become  somewhat  separated  from  it,  being 
simply  a  depression  in  the  continuation  of  the  lunule.  After  the  ap- 
pearance  of  the  lunules  as  slight  pits,  which  develop  unequally,  not  ap- 
pearing simultaneously,  the  changes  are  limited  to  the  increase  in  size 
of  the  lunules  and  of  the  poriferous  ambulacral  zone  on  the  lower  side; 
the  outline  and  tjcneral  faciei,  with  the  exception  of  the  larger  size  of 
the  tubercles,  being  that  of  the  adult. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  289 

The  general  character  of  the  changes  undergone  by  Echinarachnius 
and  Mellita  hexapora,  as  far  as  they  relate  to  the  transformations  of  the 
ambulacral  rosette,  the  growth  of  the  tubercles,  the  changes  in  the  pro- 
portions of  the  relative  breadth  of  the  ambulacral  and  interambulacral 
zones,  are  identical  in  Mellita  testudinata  and  Encope  emarginata. 
What  is  remarkable  in  Mellita  testudinata  is  that  the  mode  of  forma- 
tion of  the  ambulacral  lunules  is  not  identical  with  that  of  M.  hexapora. 
The  interambulacral  lunule  alone  is  developed  from  a  depression  formed 
on  the  lower  surface  pushing  its  way  through  the  test,  while  the  am- 
bulacral lunules  are  the  result  of  the  closing  in  of  notches  appearing  on 
the  edge  of  the  test,  which  remain  open  until  the  Mellita  has  attained  a 
considerable  size,  —  three  quarters  of  an  inch  and  sometimes  more  ;  long 
after  the  arrangement  of  the  plates,  the  shape  of  the  rosette,  the  size  of 
the  tubercles,  and  the  extent  of  the  poriferous  zone  on  the  lower  surface 
have  the  character  of  the  adult,  In  fact,  the  mode  of  development  of 
Encope  and  of  Mellita  testudinata  (also  M.  longifissa)  are  far  more 
closely  allied  than  that  of  the  two  species  of  Mellita  of  the  types  of 
hexapora  and  testudinata. 

In  Encope  emarginata  we  have,  as  in  Mellita,  an  early  stage  in  which 
no  posterior  interambulacral  lunule  exists.  The  outline  of  these  young 
Encopidre  is  not  Laganum-like,  as  in  Mellita,  but  is  elliptical,  as  in 
very  young  Echinarachnius  ;  the  ambulacral  zones  extending  uniformly 
from  edge  to  apex,  are  narrower  than  the  interambulacral.  The  plates 
of  both  areas  carry  one  to  two  large  tubercles  and  a  couple  of  very  small 
ones.  The  ambulacral  pores  extend  from  the  apex  to  the  mouth.  One 
pair  of  pores,  not  connected  by  grooves,  is  situated  in  the  suture  of  each 
ambulacral  plate.  The  outline  seen  from  above  is  deeply  scalloped  —  in 
fact,  it  is  a  Moulinsia,  —  and  the  figure  given  by  Agassiz  in  the  Mono- 
graphic des  Scutelles  is  only  a  young  Encope  emarginata.  The  posterior 
interambulacral  lunule  commences  as  a  pit  from  the  lower  side,  and  by 
the  time  the  young  Encope  has  attained  a  diameter  of  three  quarters  of 
an  inch,  the  lunule  is  seen  from  above,  also  as  a  small  elliptical  opening. 
The  edge  of  the  test  is  deeply  scalloped,  especially  at  the  median  am- 
bulacral sutures,  where  notches  soon  appear,  and  the  young  Encope 
gradually  takes  a  deeply  lobed  outline.  These  cuts  may  or  may  not  close, 
and  thus  we  have  the  basis  of  the  great  number  of  species  established 
upon  the  depth  of  lobes,  the  presence  or  absence  of  certain  lunules, 
which  are  nothing  but  features  of  the  young  either  retained  in  the 
37 


290  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

adult  or  greatly  exaggerated.  The  ambulacral  rosette  is  formed  as  in 
Mellita  and  Echinarachnius  by  the  independent  growth  of  the  upper 
part  of  the  ambulacra]  area,  which  in  Clypeastroids  grows  more 
rapidly  than  the  rest  of  the  test,  from  the  moment  the  pores  are  joined 
by  grooves,  the  {dates  crowding  upon  one  another,  and  pushing  them  or 
part  of  them  towards  the  edge  of  the  test.  In  the  Scutellae  the  pairs  of 
pores  of  the  rosette  are  placed  in  the  sutures  of  the  ambulacral  plates, 
while  in  the  Clypeastroids,  besides  the  pair  of  pores  in  the  sutures  an 
additional  pair  pierces  the  middle  of  each  ambulacral  plate. 

The  development  of  Stolonoclypus  prostratus  and  flat  Clypeastroids 
of  the  type  of  Clyp.  placunarius  is  most  instinctive,  tending  to  show  that 
in  connection  with  the  development  of  the  Scutellidae  above  described, 
we  must  probably  introduce  a  complete  reform  among  the  genera 
recognized  as  Lenita,  Scutellina,  Runa,  Echinocyamus,  and  other 
minute  Echinoids,  which  may  eventually  prove  to  be  nothing  but  the 
young  of  other  Clypeastroids,  as  Mellita,  Scutella,  Laganum,  Stolonocly- 
pus, Clypeaster,  Encope,  and  the  like  ;  but  want  of  sufficient  material 
prevents  me  from  entering  into  this  comparison  more  in  detail.  Though 
we  know  now,  from  what  has  been  said  above,  that  the  Scutellidae  pass 
through  phases  which  cannot  be  distinguished  from  Moulinsia,  Fibu- 
laria,  Runa,  Scutellina,  and  the  Clypeastroids  proper  pass,  as  I  shall 
show  below,  through  a  stage  of  growth  identical  with  Echinocyamus. 
For  similar  reasons  I  am  inclined  to  consider  Fibularia  as  the  early 
stage  of  some  Clypeastroid.  The  absence  of  partitions  in  some  species,  I 
think,  cm  easily  be  accounted  for,  as  they  are  developed  only  later.  We 
have  a  species  of  Fibularia  from  the  Sandwich  Islands,  in  which  there 
are  no  partitions  when  very  small,  while  in  the  adult  these  partitions 
are  most  rudimentary.  Greater  material  than  I  possess  is  necessary 
to  elucidate  the  affinity  of  the  genus,  which  certainly  has  all  the 
features  of  immature  Clypeastroids. 

Among  the  Echini,  collected  in  great  numbers  by  Mr.  Pourtales,  was 
a  small  species  showing,  on  careful  examination,  the  facies  of  Echinocy- 
amus, and  which,  after  a  minute  comparison  with  Echinocyamus  pusillus, 
I  could  only  distinguish  from  it,  by  its  more  circular  outline,  larger 
tubercles,  less  crowded  and  thinner  interior  partitions;  observing,  how- 
ever, in  the  horizontal  sutures  of  the  ambulacral  plates,  rows  of  minute 
pores,  extending  from  the  imperfect  rosette  to  the  mouth,  I  at  once 
saw  that  it  must  be  a  young  Clypeaster,  and  on  comparing  them  with 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  291 

young  Stolonoclypus  prostratus,  measuring  half  an  inch  in  length,  rec- 
ognized a  similar  arrangement  in  the  ambulacral  zone,  below  the  rosette. 
It  was  now  plain  that  our  Florida  Echinocyamus  was  only  a  young 
Stolonoclypus  prostratus,  which  in  the  earlier  stages  is  identical  in  every 
structural  feature  with  Echinocyamus;  for  European  specimens  of 
Echinocyamus  show  the  presence  of  similar  horizontal  rows  of  pores,  as 
in  our  young  Stolonoclypus  from  Florida.  I  am  well  aware  that  no  Cly- 
peaster  has  been  found  in  European  seas,  yet  we  have  evidently  such 
an  incomplete  knowledge  of  the  marine  Fauna,  existing  at  great  depths, 
to  judge  from  the  collections  made  by  Mr.  Pourtales,  that  negative 
evidence  can  no  longer  be  admitted  in  opposition  to  such  positive  proof 
as  we  find  in  Florida.  The  larvae  referred  by  Miiller  to  Echinocyamus 
were  net  raised  by  artificial  fecundation  ;  they  do  not  resemble  Spatan- 
goid  or  Clypeastroid  larvae,  but  seem  closely  allied  to  true  Echinidae 
larvae.  Can  they  not  be  larvae  of  Cidaris  hystrix  and  of  Cidaris  papil- 
lata  —  which  would  account  for  the  presence  of  such  forms  in  the  North 
Sea  and  Mediterranean — rather  than  be  referred  to  Echinocyamus  ? 
Very  small  specimens  varied  in  the  number  of  the  tubercles  on  each 
plate,  the  number  of  pores  of  the  imperfect  rosette,  the  changes  being 
similar  in  kind  to  those  observed  in  the  Scutellidae.  From  the  Echi- 
nocyamus stage  they  become  more  pentagonal ;  the  concavity  of  the 
lower  side  increases,  the  partitions  increase  by  the  addition  of  needle- 
shaped  processes,  and  they  soon  attain  the  shape  and  structure  given 
by  Liitken  in  his  figures  of  young  Stolonoclypus  prostratus.  The 
tubercles  increase  more  rapidly  near  the  edge  of  the  test,  and  a  re- 
markable feature  of  these  stages  is  the  presence  of  minute  glassy 
tubercles  similar  to  those  of  Echinoneus,  developing  side  by  side  with 
young  tubercles,  the  function  of  which  is  as  obscure  as  it  is  in  Echi- 
noneus. and  which  are  not  found  in  older  specimens. 

The  development  of  Echinolampas  has  thrown  unexpected  light 
upon  the  affinities  of  the  toothless  Galerites  and  of  the  Cassidulida-.  It 
shows  conclusively  that  Echinoneus  is  only  a  permanent  embryonic 
stage  of  Echinolampas,  thus  becoming  allied  to  the  Cassidulida^,  and  that 
it  has  nothing  in  common  with  the  Galerites  as  I  would  limit  them, 
confining  them  entirely  to  the  group  provided  with  teeth.  This  re- 
duces the  type  to  a  most  natural  division,  and  from  what  we  now  know 
of  the  simple  nature  of  the  ambulacra  of  all  Echini  in  their  early  stages, 
I  would  not  give  to  this  feature  the  significance  which  it  has  received, 


292  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

but  would  be  inclined  to  unite  the  toothed  Galerites  with  Echinidae  proper 
in  the  same  suborder,  as  a  prophetic  family,  approaching  the  Clypeas- 
troids  by  the  separation  of  the  anus  from  the  apical  system,  and  retain- 
ing the  teeth  and  general  symmetrical  structure  of  the  regular  Echini. 
Though  I  am  aware  that  the  great  development  of  Galerites  in  former 
geological  periods,  and  the  relation  of  the  anus  and  test,  may,  on  further 
acquaintance  With  living  representatives,  entitle  them  to  rank  as  a  sub- 
order intermediate  between  the  Echini  proper  and  Clypeastroids.  Young 
Echinolampadas,  measuring  a  trifle  over  one  eighth  of  an  inch,  are 
elliptical,  resembling  Echinoneus,  with  a  large  transverse  elliptical 
mouth,  the  anus  placed  in  the  truncated  posterior  extremity  above  the 
ambitus.  The  outline  in  profile  is  almost  globular,  each  plate  of  the 
narrow  ambulacral  zone  carries  a  single  principal  tubercle,  surrounded 
by  a  circle  of  miliaries.  The  pores  are  arranged  in  a  vertical  row  of  a 
single  line  of  pores,  three  or  four  for  each  plate,  extending  from  mouth 
to  apex.  The  interambulacral  plates  are  elongated  horizontally,  and 
carry  from  one  to  three  principal  tubercles,  with  numerous  small 
miliaries  arranged  in  circles  round  the  primaries,  or  irregularly  scat- 
tered. In  specimens  twice  the  size  of  the  above,  the  test  is  less  ellipti- 
cal, more  flattened,  and  the  first  trace  of  a  rudimentary  rosette  appears 
as  a  short  row  of  double  pores  extending  from  the  apex,  consisting  of 
from  eight  to  nine  pairs,  only  in  one  of  the  poriferous  zones  of  each  of 
the  pairs  of  ambulacra  —  in  the  anterior  zone  of  the  posterior  pair  and 
the  posterior  zone  of  the  anterior  pair  of  ambulacra  —  the  odd  ambula- 
crum remains  simple.  In  specimens  measuring  above  half  an  inch  this 
rudimentary  one-sided  rosette  has  increased  in  length,  and  traces  of  the 
second  row  of  double  pores  are  seen  in  the  simple  zones  near  the  apex. 
In  specimens  measuring  an  inch  these  rows  have  grown  to  be  half  as 
long  as  the  arc  of  the  rosette  first  formed  ;  the  same  structure  has  also 
extended  to  the  abact'mal  part  of  the  odd  ambulacrum.  The  elliptical 
outline  is  entirely  lost  in  these  specimens,  the  shape  having  gradually 
become,  more  circular,  pentagonal,  and  ovoid.  At  the  same  time  the 
miliary  tubercles  increase  rapidly  in  number,  forming  clusteis  of 
.small  tubercles,  embossing  the  plates  of  both  areas.  Tin'  anal  .-v>tem  is 
covered  by  three  large  triangular  plates,  the  anus  opening  near  the 
edge  of  the  system,  in  a  narrow  slit  covered  by  very  minute  plates. 
The  mouth,  as  the  young  increase  in  size,  becomes  more  and  more 
sunken.     The  buccal    membrane  is   covered  with   minute   plates,  the 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  298 

mouth  opening  in  the  centre.  There  are  as  yet  no  signs  of  phyllodes 
or  of  bourrelets,  which  appear  only  later,  the  bourrelets  being  at  first 
accumulations  of  small  tubercles  between  the  phyllodes.  When 
measuring  about  half  an  inch  in  length,  the  young  Echinolampas  re- 
sembles Caratomus  to  such  an  extent  that  this  stage  was  considered 
for  a  time  a  living  representative  of  Caratomus.  The  larger  series  col- 
lected by  Mr.  Pourtales,  in  his  second  expedition,  showed  conclusively 
the  relationship  to  Echinolampas,  and  proves  the  correctness  of  the 
step  taken  by  Desor  in  removing  Caratomus  and  allied  genera  from 
the  Galeritidaj,  and  placing  them  among  the  Cassidulida\  on  account  of 
the  semipetaloid  nature  of  the  apical  portion  of  the  ambulacra.  Pedi- 
cellaria1  with  a  short  stem  are  irregularly  scattered  over  the  test ;  the 
spines  resemble  those  of  Clypeastroids,  being  short,  slender,  straight,  the 
secondary  spines  silk-like.  The  tentacles,  as  far  as  could  be  ascertained 
from  alcoholic  specimens,  are  provided  with  a  powerful  sucking  disk, as 
long  as  they  retain  the  aspect  of  Caratomus. 

Among  Spatangoids  proper,  the  examination  of  young  specimens 
shows  that  they  undergo  great  changes  in  outline  during  their  growth, 
that  the  posterior  part  of  the  test  is  especially  subject  to  variation,  that 
the  position  of  the  anus  is  exceedingly  variable  in  one  and  the  same 
species,  that  the  mouth  is  not  labiate  in  the  young  as  in  the  adult,  that 
the  peripetalous  fascioles  and  lateral  fascioles  do  not  change  in  their 
limits,  but  that  the  subanal  and  anal  fascioles  are  liable  to  great  modifi- 
cations during  their  growth,  and  cannot  be  used  as  distinguishing  features 
of  generic  value,  while  the  permanence  of  the  peripetalous  and  lateral 
fascioles  is  of  great  systematic  value.  The  ambulacral  petaloids  also  are 
greatly  modified  with  age,  generally  becoming  confluent,  while  in  the 
young  they  are  remarkably  distinct  and  the  pores  not  conjugated.  The 
semitre  are  not  covered  by  regular  pedicellarhv,  as  is  universally  stated 
to  be  the  case.  We  find  on  the  fascioles  minute  tubercles  carrying 
embryonic  spines.  Trosc'.iel  was  the  first  to  call  attention  to  this,  and 
Muller  has  subsequently,  in  his  Embryology  of  the  Echinoderms,  given 
accurate  figures  of  the  spines  of  the  fascioles  of  S.  canaliferus,  in  Ids 
sixth  Memoir,  Plate  VII.  figs.  7-9.  Yet  these  observations,  dating 
back  to  1852,  seem  to  have  escaped  the  attention  of  recent  writers,  who 
persist  in  stating  that  the  fascioles  carry  true  pedicellariae.  These  are 
found  irregularly  scattered  over  the  test,  generally  more  abundantly 
round  the  mouth.     From  the  examination  of  the  pedicellariae  made  in 


204  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

s  ime  of  the  genera  of  this  collection  (Podocidaris),  there  can  now  be 
uo  doubt  that  pedicellariae  are  nothing  but  modified  spines;  (he  exist- 
ence of  pedicellariae  surmounting  a  tubercle  and  moved  by  the  same 
mechanism  as  spines,  as  well  as  the  mode  of  formation  of  the  pedicel- 
lariae, as  observed  in  Asteracantbion  and  Spatangoids,  by  Miiller  and 
myself,  proves  conclusively  that  they  are  only  more  sensitive  spines, 
performing  the  functions  of  scavengers  or  of  providers,  according  to 
their  position. 

The  Cassiduloid-shaped  mouth  of  young  Spatangoids,  as  well  as  the 
existence  of  several  Spatangoids,  both  fossil  and  recent,  in  which  the 
mouth  has  a  similar  structure,  is  as  convincing  a  proof  as  necessary  of 
the  correctness  of  uniting  Cassiduloids  and  Spatangoids  in  the  same  sub- 
order, though  the  name  given  by  Albin  Gras,  of  "  Irregular,"  is  hardly 
what  could  be  desired. 

Young  Bris-opsis  lyrifera,  less  than  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in  length,  are 
cylindrical,  the  mouth  having  a  flat,  crescent-shaped  edge,  the  test  trun- 
cated vertically  at  the  posterior  edge,  surrounded  by  a  prominent  ellip- 
tical sub-anal  fasciole ;  the  peripetalous  fasciole  is  elliptical,  undulating; 
the  anus  is  placed  near  the  posterior  extremity  of  the  fasciole.  The  odd 
ambulacrum  carries  four  or  five  large  tentacles  with  lobed  disk;  the  pores 
of  the  odd  ambulacrum  are  single,  not  in  pairs  ;  the  other  ambulacra  are 
short,  straight,  well  defined,  consisting  of  three  and  four  pairs  of  pores 
not  yet  conjugated.  In  older  specimens  the  posterior  edge  of  the  mouth 
becomes  labiate,  the  anus  approaches  the  subanal  fasciole,  which  sends 
out  a  rudimentary  anal  branch,  eventually  uniting  with  the  peripetalous 
fasciole,  the  outline  of  which  becomes  more  pentagonal,  undulating, 
and  elongated  with  the  increasing  size  of  the  petaloid  ambulacra.  The 
posterior  edge  becomes  more  bevelled  witli  age,  the  subanal  plastron 
more  prominent,  tin-  lateral  pairs  of  ambulacra  gradually  tend  to  unite, 
passing  from  a  strictly  Brissopsis  outline  to  one  considered  hitherto 
characteristic  of  Toxobrissus.  The  spines  ;n  all  young  Spatangoids  are 
strikingly  larger  in  proportion  to  their  size  than  in  the  adult. 

In  Echinocardium  cordatum  the  changes  of  the  mouth,  of  the  out- 
line of  the  internal  ainbulacral  fa-eiolc,  and  the  gradual  confluence  of 
the  lateral  ambulacra  are  similar  to  those  of  Brissopsis;  the  posterior 
extremity  undergoes  the  greatesl  change  in  outline;  the  subanal  plas- 
tron h  very  prominent;  in  fact,  the  outline  of  young  E.  cordatum  recalls 
K.  jibbosum.      The  subanal  fasciole  and  anal  branch  are  at  first  united, 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  295 

but  as  the  specimens  increase  in  size,  the  anal  branch  separates  from  it. 
The  odd  ambulacral  pores  are  at  first  two  single  rows  of  pores,  which 
by  closer  crowding  eventually  alternate,  but  are  not  arranged  in  pairs. 

The  young  Agassizia,  a  quarter  of  an  inch  in  length,  is  a  flat  elliptical 
Spatangoid  resembling  Gualteria.  The  peripjetalous  and  lateral  fascioles 
have  the  same  general  limits  as  in  the  adult,  but  the  arrangement  of  the 
pores  in  all  the  ambulacra  is  identical ;  there  is  but  a  single  pore  for 
each  ambulacral  plate,  as  it  exists  in  the  anterior  pair  and  odd  ambulacra 
of  the  adult ;  the  ambulacral  grooves  are  not  yet  formed,  the  anterior 
groove  alone  being  slightly  indicated  ;  the  mouth  is  not  labiate. 

The  great  number  of  Spatangoid  genera  established  upon  differences 
in  the  subanal  fasciole,  the  existence  or  absence  of  the  anal  branch,  the 
depth  of  the  ambulacral  grooves,  the  confluence  or  distinctness  of  the 
lateral  ambulacra,  all  based  upon  characters  subject  to  great  variation 
during  growth,  show  the  necessity  of  a  careful  revision  of  the  whole 
group  of  Spatangoids  with  the  data  here  furnished  ;  and  such  closely 
allied  genera  as  Maretia,  Spatangus,  Hemipatagus,  and  Macropneus- 
tes  ;  Eupatagus,  Plagionotus,  and  Metalia;  Meoma  and  Linthia  ;  Agas- 
sizia, Prenaster,  and  Periaster ;  Gualteria  and  Brissopsis ;  Tripylus, 
Desoria,  Abatus,  and  many  others,  must  be  re-examined  and  critically 
revised  before  we  can  attempt  an  arrangement  of  Spatangoids  into 
natural  families. 

The  subordinal  divisions  usually  adopted  since  their  introduction  by 
Albin  Gras  do  not  seem  satisfactory,  if  tested  by  our  present  infor- 
mation. In  the  first  place,  the  whole  classification  is  based  upon  the 
separation  of  the  anus  from  the  abactinal  system.  From  what  the 
Embryology  of  Echini  has  taught  us,  the  position  of  the  anus  has  not 
the  physiological  importance  attributed  to  it  by  authors  who  have  so 
generally  received  this  classification.  The  unstable  position  it  occupies 
in  the  same  animal  at  different  stages  of  growth  —  at  one  stage  opening 
next  to  the  mouth,  then  on  the  margin,  and  finally  opening  in  the 
central  part  of  the  apical  system  in  the  adult  —  should  make  us  hesitate 
to  adopt  a  single  anatomical  feature  as  our  sole  guide.  In  the  first 
place  the  order  of  Perischocchinida?,  a  most  natural  one,  is  founded 
upon  characters  derived  from  the  structure  of  the  interambulacral  and 
ambulacral  systems.  The  other  two  suborders,  regular  and  irregular, 
usually  recognized,  can  scarcely  be  called  natural.  The  suborder  of 
regular  Echini  is  more  satisfactory  than  the  other,  though,  from  what  I 


296  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

have  said  of  the  Galeritt  -  with  teeth,  I  should  be  inclined  to  add  them 
to  the  suborder  as  one  of  its  three  subdivisions,  which,  as  here  limited, 
are  the  Cidarida3,  the  Echinidae  proper,  and  the  Galerites.  The  sub- 
order of  "irregular"  Echini,  after  the  withdrawal  of  the  Galerites,  still 
contains  the  Clypeastroids.  From  the  structure  of  the  ambulacral  system, 
they  have  some  affinity  with  the  Spatangoids  ;  yet  the  presence  of  par- 
titions and  teeth,  combined  with  petaloid  ambulacra,  seem  to  con- 
stitute good  subordinal  characters  for  the  Clypeastroids  as  contrasted 
with  the  Spatangoids  proper,  which  include  all  edentate  forms,  taking 
in  also  the  edentate  genera  formerly  placed  among  Galerites  as  well  as 
the  Cassidulidae,  sometimes  regarded  as  independent  suborders. 

III.    Baihymetrical  and  Geographical  Distribution. 

The  accompanying  table  (pp.  208  and  299)  shows  at  a  glance  the 
principal  features  of  distribution  of  the  different  zones  of  depth.  We 
can  distinguish  a  strictly  littoral  fauna,  extending  from  tide-mark  to  gen- 
erally less  than  10  fathoms,  though  a  few  of  the  species  characteristic  of 
this  zone  extend  to  a  depth  of  34  and  40  fathoms.    This  fauna  consists  of 

Diadema  an  till  arum. 
Echinometra  Michelini. 

"  viridis. 

Lytechinus  variegatus. 
Tripneustes  ventricosus. 
Clypeaster  rosaceus. 
Stolonoclypus  Ravenellii. 
Mellita  testudinata. 
Encope  Michelini. 

"         emarginata. 
Echinoneus  semilunaris. 
Brissus  columbaris. 

A  second  set  (if  specie-.  less  numerous,  extends  from  the  shore  to  a 
much  greater  depth,  —  from  <so  to  about  120  fathoms.     They  are 

Cidaris  annulata. 
Echinocidaris  punctulata. 
Meoma  ventricosa. 
Plagionotus  pectoralis. 
Mccra  atropos. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  2Jh 

At  a  depth  of  30  to  40  fathoms  commences  a  third  set  of  specie-,  the 
majority  ranging  to  about  160  fathoms,  though  two  species  range  to 
270  fathoms,  marked  *,  and  a  few  species  commence  at  a  greater  depth, 
SO  to  90  fathoms.     These  species  are 

*  Dorocidaris  abyssicola. 
Echinus   gracilis. 
Genocidaris   maculata. 

*  Trigonocidaris  albida. 
Rhyncholampas  caribbsearum. 
Echinolampas  caratomoides. 
Neolampas  rostellatus. 
Brissopsis  lyrifera. 
Agassizia  excentrica. 
Echinocardium  ovatum. 

"  lrevigaster. 

"  Kurtzii. 

Schizaster  cubensis. 
At  a  depth  of  about  140  fathoms,  extending  to  over  310  fathoms,  are 
found  most  interesting  species  : 
Caenopedina  cubensis. 
Podocidaris  sculpta. 
Echinus  Flemingii. 

While  near  the  lowest  depth  reached  by  the  above  species  we  strike 
upon  a  peculiar  fauna  recalling  types  of  the  cretaceous  period,  extend- 
ing from  315  fathoms  to  the  greatest  depth  attained  in  the  straits  be- 
tween Florida  and  Cuba.     These  are 

Salenocidaris  varispina. 

Pourtalesia  miranda. 

Lissonotus  fragilis. 

Two  species —  Stolonoelypus  prostratus  and  Mellita  hexapora  —  have 
t!ie  greatest  bathymetrical  range,  extending  from  the  shore,  the  one  to 
270  fathoms  and  the  other  to  325  fathoms.  I  would  state,  however,  that 
it  is  only  the  young  which  have  this  great  range;  the  adult  specimens  are 
limited  to  a  quite  shallow-  zone.  —  about  40  fathoms.  In  the  young  of 
our  common  northern  Cuvieria  the  reverse  takes  place,  the  young  being 
quite  common  at  low-water-mark,  while  young  Echinarachnius  and 
T.  drobachiensis  are  found  at  a  much  greater  depth  than  the  adult.  1 
38 


298 


BULLETIN    OF   THE 


■a  o 
2  ■<* 


I 


o 
co 

CO 

co 

o 

CO 

CI 

co 

o 

CO 

o                                  in 

CO                                                      CO 

o 
o 
co 

3               O                                 O 
co             r^                            t~ 
7*               CI                                 CN 

o 

(N 

o 
to 

IN 

o 
■* 

CN 

CN 

O 

o 

CN 

m 
en 

o 
co 

o 

CO                    CO 

co      m      co 

CN   — ■ 

O 

CO 

en 

o 
co 

1 

-r 

CO 

<* 

CO 

£>      1 

CN     1                          r- 

O 

CO 

o 

3 

1     1                                1 

C 

C 

£ 
c 

c 

'C 

e 

< 

1 

•J 

c 
C 

£ 

C 

►4 

<      i  2      »             i  i  < 

-i  d  i  e  ^  c  ^      ^. 

'  2  1  1   ?  o  a  ■?  g  •§   |   «  1 

•g       a       ««       H       as       H                 2      .2       2      >5       rr 

o        c-        O        CJ       Tv        u                  </l                 r-;        o       ..- 
5     'S      a     ■£     g     £             ^5       §     .to     c. 

S      .3       SJ       o       o       o                ~                 o        —        > 
»     Q     O     W     ft*     W             W             O     ~      - 

i      -; 

<          w 

m         -r 

3     3    H 

S    ^     2 

o          <"          £ 

3      "C         g         C 

C        £        O 
°         w        tn 
>        o        = 

s  :  g 
1  1  1 

C       o       o 

0 

< 

--■ 
- 

S3 

a 

MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


299 


1                                   s 

1                   1 

O 

CO 

o 

CO 

o 
o 

CO 

8      g 

o 

CM 

o 

o 

CN 

°              1 

o 

o 

o 
to 

O                                                                                              --0 

so                                                                     o 

o 

co      — • 

CM        CN 

o 

CN 

Li 

irt 

o 
o 

co 

I 

Ifl 

co 

o 

CO 

to 

o 

CI 

o 
to 

1 

| 

o 

m 

co 

1Q 

o 

CM 

co 

o 

- 

^  i 

r» 

o 
5 

J 

IS 

6     <j 

^     <i       •                                                         *      u 

Z      <        G      3         ■                                                        ~        <      < 

J^S.<-o              ■     <3            •<     C5    <J     «     « 
-      .; -j     <!      |       E      |       »      <      j      5      :b     .2       6      <       §      ^     *>      £ 
5     **    .J     S      *      £      3     .3     "g     »     .2      rt      S      „     -g      ?     .tj>    £     -g 
3    *.   a     -ir-     5     s     £<    g     g     |     s    -S     S.   %     8     |    ~    M    •§ 

22S«§i^g)g3g^^.2«a            & 

,2           a             -     -     j?     S      o     .2     -C     J     .2     ™      cr    -                    - 

300  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

have  given  the  greatest  depth  of  living  young,  as  the  dead  tests  may 
have  been  dropped  by  fishes  or  carried  by  currents.  The  character  of 
the  Echinian  fauna,  on  the  three  belts  developed  by  the  soundings  of  Mr. 
Pourtales,  are  tolerably  well  defined;  the  first  zone  being  littoral,  and 
extending  to  90  fathoms,  is  characterized  by  species,  the  majority  of 
which  do  not  range  beyond  40  fathoms,  with  a  few  species  ranging 
somewhat  beyond,  to  about  120  fathoms. 

The  second  zone  (from  90  to  250  fathoms)  is  characterized  by 
species  extending  into  the  first  somewhat  and  attaining  a  range  of  about 
270  fathoms,  with  an  admixture  of  a  few  species  extending  from  140  to 
310  fathoms. 

The  third  zone  contains  the  typical  deep-sea  species  of  Florida, 
extending  from  315  to  500  fathoms. 

Although  we  have  not  a  sufficient  number  of  soundings  to  establish 
homogeneous  zones  of  geographical  and  bathymetrical  range,  an 
analysis  of  the  above  grouping  of  species  shows  us  something  analo- 
gous to  the  distribution  of  animal  and  vegetable  life  in  latitude  and 
height ;  the  oceanic  distribution  being  of  course  an  identity  for 
northern  latitudes  and  southern  depth,  or  a  representation  by  species 
closely  allied. 

For  instance,  we  find  littoral,  as  far  north  as  North  Carolina,  Moera 
atropos,  Echinocardium  Kurtzii,  and  as  far  as  the  southern  part  of 
Cape  Cod  Echinocidaris  punctulata,  species  which  in  Florida  have  a 
range  in  depth  to  125  fathoms.  Of  their  range  further  north  we  know 
nothing. 

The  following  North-European  species  —  Cidaris  papillata,  Schizas- 
ter  fragilis,  Echinus  Flemingii,  Echinocardium  ovatum,  E.  cordatum, 
Echinocyamus  ?  pusillus,  Brissopsis  lyrifera  —  are  represented  by  their 
allies  or  by  the  identical  species:  viz.  Dorocidaris  abyssicola,  Schizaster 
cubensis,  Echinus  gracilis,  E.  Flemingii,  Echinocardium  ovatum,  E. 
Kurtzii,  Stolonoclypus  prostratus,  Brissopsis  lyrifera,  which  have 
a  range  somewhat  more  extensive  than  the  previous  species.  These 
same  species,  with  the  addition  of  Brissus  columbaris,  Echinocardium 
la-vigaster,  Diadema  antillarum,  and  Echinocidaris  punctulata,  are  again 
the  representatives  of  a  Mediterranean  fauna  strikingly  similar,  consist- 
ing of  Cidaris  hystrix,  Schizaster  canaliferus,  Echinus  nielo,  Echinocar- 
dium cordatum,  Echinocyamus  ?  pusillus,  Brissopsis  pulvinata,  Brissus 
Scillae,  Echinocardium   gibbosum,  Diadema    europaeum,    Echinocidaris 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


301 


jequituberculata.  The  specific  representation  on  both  sides  of  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama  is  becoming  every  day,  as  far  as  Echinoderms  are 
concerned,  more  strikingly  identical.  Since  the  list  given  by  Mr.  Verrill, 
several  species  have  come  to  light,  and  the  following  comparative  list 
of  species  on  both  sides  of  the  Isthmus,  extending  from  Peru  to  the 
Gulf  of  California  on  the  Pacific,  and  including  on  the  Eastern  side 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  Florida,  the  northern  coast  of  South  America,  the 
West  Indies  and  Bahamas,  may  not  be  out  of  place.  (I  have  examined 
all  the  species  here  named.)  This  list  would  undoubtedly  be  greatly 
increased  by  additional  dredging. 


Eastern  Fauna. 

[Caribbean.) 

Cidaris  annulata  Gray 
Dorocidaris  abyssicola  A.  Ac 
Salenocidaris  varispina  A.  Ac 
Diadema  antillarum  Phil. 

Csenopedina  cubensis  A.  Ac 
Echinocidaris  punctulata  Desml. 
Podocidaris  sculpta  A.  Ac 
Echinometra  Michelini  Des. 
viridis  A.  Ag. 
Echinus  gracilis  A.  Ag. 
"       Plemingii  Ball. 
Genocidaris  maculata  A.  Ag. 
Trigonocidaris  albida  A.  Ac 

Lyteclrinus  variegatas  A.  Ag. 


Tripncustes  ventricosus  Ac 
Clypeaster  rosaceus  Lam. 
Stolonoclypus  prostratus  Ag  . 

Ravenellii  A.  Ac 
Mellita  testudinata  Kl. 

"      hexapora  Ag. 
Encope  Michelini  Ag. 

"       emarginata  Ac 

Echinoneus  semilunaris  Lam. 
Echinolampas  caratomoides  A.  Ac 


Western  Fauna. 

[Panamic.) 
Cidaris  Thouarsii  Val. 


Diadema  mexicanum  A.  Ag. 
Astropyga  venusta  Ver. 

Echinocidaris  stellata  Ag. 

Echinometra  Van  Brunti  A.  Ac 
rupicola  A.  Ag. 


Toxocidaris  mexicana  A.  Ac 
Lytechinus  semituberculatus  A.  Ac 

Psammechinus  pictus  Ver.  is  the  young. 
Boletia  rosea  A.  Ag. 
Tripneustes  depressus  A.  Ac 


Stolonoclypus  rotundus  A.  Ag. 
Mellita  longifissa  Mich. 

"      pacifica  Ver. 
Encope  grandis  Ac 

"      micropora  Ag. 
Echinoglycus  Stokesi  Gray. 


302  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Eastern  Fadna.  Western  Fauna. 

Rhyneholampas  caribbiearum  A.  Ag.        Rhyncholampas  pacificus  A.  Ao. 
Neolampas  rostellatus  A.  Ag. 
Pourtalesia  miranda  A.  Ag. 
Lissonotus  fragilis  A.  Ag. 

Lovenia  sp. 
Brissus  columbaris  Ag.  Brissus  obesus  Ver. 

Mcoma  ventricosa  Lijtk.  Meoma  grandis  Gray. 

Plagionotus  pectoralis  Ag.  Plagiouotus  nobilis  A.  Ag. 

Agassizia  excentrica  A.  Ag.  Agassizia  6crobiculata  Val. 

Brissopsis  lyrifcra  Ag. 
Echinocardium  ovatum  Gray. 

"  laevigaster  A.  Ag. 

"  Kurtzii  Gir. 

Schizaster  cubensis  D'Orb. 
Moera  atropos  Mich.  Mcera  clotho  Mien.* 

With  the  exception  of  three  Panama  species,  all  the  West  Coast  species 
have  representatives  on  the  Eastern  Coast.  The  Eastern  species  which 
have  not  as  yet  been  found  represented  on  the  West  Coast  are  the  deep- 
water  species  of  Mr.  Pourtales's  collection,  and,  what  is  very  peculiar,  a 
few  species,  like  Clypeaster  rosaceus,  Echinoneus  semilunaris,  Echino- 
cardium Kurtzii,  and  Echinolampas,  belonging  to  genera  which  have  a 
most  extensive  range,  —  in  fact,  an  almost  cosmopolitan  one,  —  are  found 
everywhere  in  the  great  Indo-Pacific  belt,  and  its  continuation  on  the 
West  Coast,  of  Africa,  extending  also  to  the  temperate  zones,  on  both 
sides  of  this  equatorial  belt. 

The  relation  of  the  Caribbean  Fauna  with  the  existing  geographical 
distribution  of  Echini  is  shown  by  the  accompanying  faunal  table  (p. 
303),  including  only  strictly  representative  species. 

We  have  in  Genocidaris  maeulata  and  Trigonocidaris  albida  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Temnopleuridae,  thus  far  limited  almost  entirely  to  the 
Indian  and  China  seas.  The  littoral  species  having  the  most  limited 
bathy metrical  range  are  those  which  have  the  widest  geographical 
distribution.  They  are  Tripneustes  ventricosus,  Diadema  antillarum, 
( Jidaris  annulata,  Echinomctra  Michelini,  Lytechinus  variegatus,  Mellita 
testudinata,  Encope  emarginata.  Some  of  these  species  extend  from 
the    southern  part  of  Brazil  to  the  Bermudas.     They  all   belong  to 

*  Astriclypeus  Manni  Verkill  is  found  in  Japan.  Mr.  VerriU  did  not  know  tho 
exact  origin  of  his  specimen. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


303 


Caribbean. 

a 

a 

a 

03 

o  § 
3  o 

1  ha 

—  S 

1 

a 

OIG 

o 

0 

a 
2 

a 
1    «j 

c 
a 

o    • 
ton 

-  - 

Dorocidaris  abyssicola  A.  Ag 

•  *  • 

•  #  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

Diadema  antillarum  Phil 

•  *  ■ 

•  *  • 

•  *  ■ 

■  *  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

Echinocidaris  punctulata  Desml 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  " 

Echinometra  Michelini  Des 

•  *  • 

•*• 

•  *  • 

•   *  • 

.... 

Tripncustes  ventricosus  Ag 

■  *  ■ 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

Stolonoclypus  prostratus  Ad 

■  #  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

Rhvncholampas  caribbaeanim  A.  Ag.  . . . 

Brissus  columbaris  Ag 

Meoma  ventricosa  Lutk   

•  #  • 

•  *  ■ 

•  *  • 

Plagionotus  pectoralis  Ag 

1 

Brissopsis  Iyrifera  Ag 

Agassizia  excentrica  A.  Ag 

1 

1 

Echinocardium  ovatum  Gray 

la^vigaster  A.  Ag 

Kurtzii  Gir 

Schizaster  cubensis  D'Orb 

-| 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

•  *  • 

804  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

genera  having  representatives  in  the  great  tropical  helt  surrounding 
the  globe,  formed  by  the  Indo-Pacific,  Mediterranean,  Senegalian,  West 
Indian,  Panamic,  and  Polynesian  fauna),  —  such  as  Cidaris,  Diadema, 
Echinometra,  Tripneustes,  Clypeaster,  Stolonoclypus,  Echinolampas, 
Echinoneus,  Brissus,  the  species  of  which  have  a  great  geographical 
range,  and  are  represented  by  the  following  species:  — 

Cidaris  metularia,  Tripneustes  sardicus,  Echinometra  lucunter, 
Diadema  Savignyi,  Clypeaster  Rangianus,  Stolonoclypus  placunarius, 
Echinolampas  oviformis,  Echinoneus  cyclostomus,  Brissus  carinatus,  all 
of  which  have  an  immense  geographical  distribution. 

The  effect  which  currents  play  in  shaping  the  geographical  distribu- 
tion of  marine  animals  is  very  great ;  we  have  an  example  in  the  Gulf 
Stream  and  the  northern  branch  of  the  Amazonian  current  flowing  into 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  which  account  fully  for  the  great  range  of  the 
more  common  littoral  species.  The  Japanese  current  makes  itself  felt 
as  far  as  San  Diego,  two  species  of  Echini  extending  in  the  Northern 
Pacific  from  the  northern  part  of  Japan  along  Kamtchatka,  the  Aleutian 
Islands,  Sitka,  Vancouver's  Island,  the  one  as  far  as  Cape  Mendocino 
(T.  drobachiensis),  the  other  (Dendraster  excentricus)  to  San  Diego. 
The  Indo-Pacific  equatorial  current  has  undoubtedly  been  the  main 
agent  of  the  extensive  geographical  range  of  such  species  as  Cidaris 
metularia,  Echinoneus  cyclostomus,  Heterocentrotus  mammillatus,  Dia- 
dema Savignyi,  Tripneustes  sardicus,  Echinolampas  oviformis,  Brissus 
carinatus,  Stolonoclypus  placunarius. 

The  effect  of  currents  in  thus  extending  the  distribution  of  marine 
animals  would  act  very  differently  upon  the  several  classes  of  the 
animal  kingdom,  and  its  efficiency  depends  to  a  great  extent  upon  the 
nature  of  their  earlier  stages,  and  upon  their  habits  during  that  period. 
The  time  during  which  the  Pluteus  of  Echini  remains  helpless  at  the 
mercy  of  the  currents  is  considerable :  from  early  spring  till  late  in  the 
summer  is  the  usual  time  required  for  the  full  growth  of  the  Pluteus  in 
many  species  of  Sea-urchins,  and  the  distance  which  the  young  could  thus 
be  transported,  even  by  a  sluggish  current,  during  a  single  season,  must 
be  considerable,  even  under  the  most  unfavorable  circumstances. 

Various  writers  have  attempted  to  retrace,  in  former  geological 
periods,  the  probable  course  of  the  currents  and  their  effect  upon  the 
geographical  distribution  of  marine  animals  ;  they  all  agree  in  repre- 
senting up  to  the  cretaceous  period  an  unbroken    equatorial  current, 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  305 

passing  through  Central  Asia,  Arabia,  the  northern  part  of  Africa,  and 
connecting  with  the  Pacific  by  a  narrow  strait  through  the  Isthmus 
of  Panama.  The  existence  of  this  connection  in  the  cretaceous  period 
is  placed  beyond  doubt  by  the  presence  of  an  Ananchytes,  which  I  am 
unable  to  distinguish  from  Ananchytes  radiata,  collected  on  the  Isthmus 
of  Panama,  and  now  in  the  Museum  of  Yale  College,  kindly  loaned 
me  for  examination  by  Professor  Verrill.  From  the  small  number  of 
identical  species,  either  of  Mollusca,  Crustacea,  or  Fishes,  recorded  on 
both  sides  of  the  Isthmus,  this  connection  must  have  been  very  imper- 
fect at  a  comparatively  recent  geological  period,  —  since  the  existence 
of  the  present  Faunas. 

The  question  naturally  arises,  Have  we  not  in  the  different  Faunae 
of  both  sides  of  the  Isthmus  a  standard  by  which  to  measure  the 
changes  which  these  species  have  undergone  since  the  raising  of  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama  and  the  isolation  of  the  two  Faunae  ?  If  the  up- 
heaval of  the  isthmus  has  been  gradual,  it  must,  of  course,  have  cut 
off  the  deep-water  species  on  both  sides  of  the  isthmus,  and  gradually 
have  isolated  the  more  shallow,  till  the  littoral  species  also  became 
separated.  As  a  natural  consequence,  the  deeper  we  go,  the  farther 
back  in  time  we  must  expect  to  find  the  representation,  —  a  result  which 
is  strikingly  confirmed  by  the  nature  of  the  deep-water  Fauna  of  the 
West  Indies.  Unfortunately  we  have  not,  as  in  the  case  of  the  lit- 
toral Fauna1,  a  standard  of  comparison.  At  the  same  time,  with 
the  gradual  closing  of  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  the  greater  part  of 
Central  Asia,  of  the  Arabian  Peninsula,  and  of  Northern  Africa  was 
emerging  from  the  sea,  reducing  ■  the  range  of  the  equatorial  current, 
and  thus  confining  the  course  of  the  currents  much  as  they  are  at  the 
present  time.  This  would  thus  cause  a  limitation  in  the  range  of  the 
species  formerly  having  the  greatest  distribution,  and  extend  that  of 
those  which  were  more  local. 

If  migration  on  land  when  continents  were  joined  together,  and 
subsequent  variations  after  their  isolation  through  submergence,  has 
been  the  main  agent  in  the  distribution  of  the  existing  terrestrial 
Faunae,  we  must  acknowledge  a  similar  agency  to  currents  in  the  dis- 
tribution of  marine  Fauna? ;  and  by  the  submergence  or  rise  of  various 
portions  of  the  continents,  we  shall  be  able,  if  we  can  trace  these 
changes,  to  reconstruct  within  certain  limits  the  altered  courses  of  the 
main  oceanic  currents,  and  get  some  idea -of  the  probable  geographical 
35 


306  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

distribution  at  different  geological  epochs.  The  greater  the  bathy- 
metrical  range  of  littoral  species,  the  longer  will  such  species  remain 
unaffected,  while  deep-sea  species  may  early  become  isolated  and  re- 
main as  outliers  as  it  were,  —  mementos  of  a  former  condition  of  cur- 
rents, or  even  of  a  previous  geological  period.  The  careful  analysis  of 
the  Fauna  of  a  given  point,  its  comparison  with  other  Fauna},  and  accu- 
rate bathy metrical  data,  would  go  far  towards  reconstructing  the  Natural 
History  of  the  sea  in  former  ages,  and  showing  its  relation  to  the 
present  and  past  times. 

The  representative  species  of  Echini,  Echinocardium,  Psammechinus, 
Schizaster,  in  the  Arctic  and  Antarctic  boreal  zones  would  be  con- 
sidered as  the  living  representatives  of  a  cosmopolitan  Fauna  existing 
at  the  time  when  the  great  equatorial  current  flowed  unbroken  round 
the  globe,  sending  branches  north  and  south  along  Eastern  North  and 
South  America,  along  Eastern  Japan  and  Australia,  and  the  eastern 
coast  of  Africa;  while  the  tropical  species  of  the  genera  Diadema,  Cly- 
peaster,  Echinoneus,  Echinolampas,  &c,  existing  at  that  time,  had  a 
more  limited  equatorial  geographical  distribution.  The  subsequent 
period  of  isolation  of  Atlantic  and  Pacific  currents  is  shown  by  the 
existence  of  truly  Atlantic  and  Pacific  species ;  while  as  we  go  down  in 
depth  we  go  back  also  in  time,  and  find  at  first  representatives  of 
the  genera  found  in  our  Tertiaries,  while  at  greater  depth  the  species 
are  representatives  of  genera  found  in  the  Cretaceous.  A  more  de- 
tailed comparison  than  can  be  given  here  of  the  Caribbean  Fauna,  with 
the  fossils  of  the  tertiary  and  cretaceous  deposits  of  our  coasts,  would  be 
most  interesting ;  but  unfortunately  the  materials  thus  far  collected  are 
too  fragmentary,  and  we  must  await  a  careful  geological  survey,  accom- 
panied by  deep  dredgings  of  a  considerable  extent  of  coast,  before  we 
shall  have- the  data  needed  to  follow  up  the  important  results  to  be 
gained  in  this  way  for  palaeontology  and  geography,  of  which  our 
present  incomplete  materials  give  us  such  an  interesting  glimpse. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  307 

IV..    List  of  the  Star-Jishes. 

Asterina  minuta  Gray,  Synopsis;  Ann.  Mag.  Vol.  VI,  1841 

Syn.  Asteriscus  brasiliensis  Lutk.,  Vidensk.  Medd.  1859. 

"       stellifer  Mob.,  Neue  Seesterne. 
Littoral,  to  7  fathoms. 

Pteraster  militaris  M.  T.,  Syst.  d.  Asteriden. 
From  120  to  125  fathoms. 

Pentaeeros  gigas  Ag. 

Syn.  Pentaeeros  grandis,  reticulatus,  gibbus  Gray,  Synops. 

Oreaster  reticulatus,  0.  aculeatus,  M.  T.,  Syst. 

Oreaster  gigas  Lutk. 
Littoral,  to  128  fathoms. 

Astropecten  antillensis  Lutk. 
Littoral,  to  147  fathoms. 

Astropecten  articulatus  Lutk.,  Vidensk  Med.  1864. 

Syn.  Asterias  articulata   Say.,  Journ.  Acad.  Nat.  Sciences,  Phila.  1825. 
Littoral,  to  5  to  6  fathoms. 

Astropecten  variabilis  Lutk. 

Littoral,  to  7  fathoms. 

I  have  thus  far  only  met  with  three  species  of  Astropecten  from  Florida  and 
the  West  Indies,  though  as  many  as  six  or  seven  nominal  species  are  known. 
The  names  of  Liitken  are  given  for  want  of  authentic  6pecimens  of  the  others. 

Luidia  clathrata  Lutk. 
Littoral,  to  101  fathoms. 

Luidia  alternata  Lutk. 

40  fathoms. 

Ophidiaster  (Linckia  Lutk.)  ornithopus  Val. 

Syn.  O.  ornithopus  M.  T.,  Syst.  d.  Ast. 

"  "  Lutk. 

Littoral,  to  26  fathoms. 

Ophidiaster  flaccidus  Lutk. 
Littoral,  to  123  fathoms. 


-308  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Othilia  spinosa  Gray,  Synops. 

Syn.  Echinaster  spinosus  M.  T.,  Syst. 
Littoral,  to  6  fathoms. 

Othilia  braziliensis  Ac 

Syn.  Echinaster  braziliensis  M.  T.,  Syst. 
Littoral,  to  5  or  6  fathoms. 

Aster ac an thion  mexicanum  Lutk. 
From  80  to  120  fathoms. 

Asteracanthion  tenuispinum  Lutk. 
Syn.  Asterias  tenuispina  Lam. 
Asterias  atlantica  Ver.,  Trans.  Con.  Ac. 
From  120  to  174  fathoms. 

With  the  exception  of  the  Pteraster  and  Asteracanthion  tenuispinum, 
the  bathymetrical  and  geographical  distribution  of  the  Star-fishes  does 
not  show  any  striking  features.  The  presence  of  a  northern  and  of  a 
Mediterranean  species  in  Florida  is  fully  in  accordance  with  the 
results  derived  from  other  classes  ;  as  with  Echini  and  Ophiurans, 
we  find  the  young  in  much  deeper  water  than  the  adults.  This  is  particu- 
larly well  shown  in  a  series  of  Pentaceros  gigas ;  the  smallest  specimens 
(Pteraster-like  in  shape)  are  from  128  fathoms,  more  advanced  stages 
(Goniodiscus-like)  are  from  68  fathoms,  a  still  more  advanced  stage 
from  42  fathoms.  The  same  is  the  case  with  Luidia  clathrata  and 
Astropecten  antillensis. 

Cambridge,  October,  1869. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  309 


No.  10.  —  Preliminary  Report  on  the  Ophiuridce  and  Astrophy- 
tidai  dredged  in  deep  zvater  between  Cuba  and  the  Florida  Reef, 
by  L.  F.  de  Pourtales,  Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.  Pre- 
pared by  Theodore  Lyman. 

(Communicated  by  Professor  B.  Peirce,  Sup't  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.) 

I.     General  Remarks. 

From  the  small  circle  of  the  Caribbean  waters  there  are  now  known 
sixty-three  species  of  Ophiurans  and  Astrophytons,  nearly  all  of  which 
are  critically  determined.  The  standard  work  of  Muller  and  Troschel, 
published  in  1842,  did  not  contain  a  greater  number  of  well-defined 
species  from  the  whole  world !  Considering  their  number  and  their 
bathymetric  range  (which  goes  nearly  to  400  fathoms)  we  are  justified 
in  looking  upon  their  faunal  data  as  of  real  importance.  First,  then, 
considered  within  their  own  peculiar  sea  dominion,  to  what  depths  do 
these  species  descend,  and  to  what  shallows  do  they  rise  ?  A  glance  at 
the  following  table  will  reply.  Those  species  with  which  naturalists 
have  been  most  familiar  as  "  West  Indian  "  are  pretty  much  littoral. 
The  abundant  forms  of  Ophioeoma  echinata,  Ophiura  cinerea,  Ophiactis 
Miilleri,  &c,  swarm  among  the  sponges  and  madrepores  of  the  warm 
shallows.  A  few  descend  to  35  or  40  fathoms,  as  if  to  reach  a  hand  to 
their  deep-sea  relations ;  such  are  Ophiura  brevispina  and  Ophiolepis 
clegans  ;  there  are  even  two,  Opldostigma  isacanthum  and  Amphiura 
tenera,  that  have  been  found  respectively  at  75  and  128  fathoms.  But 
these  are  exceptions,  for  if  the  dredge  sometimes  brings  up  a  littoral 
brittle-star,  it  is  a  straggler  and  not  an  inhabitant.  Between  15  and  75 
fathoms  there  is  a  mixed  region  where  dwell  the  more  venturesome 
of  the  littoral  species  and  certain  new-comers,  that  either  recall  the 
European  fauna  {Ophiogh/pha  aeerrata)  or  seem  a  continuation  of 
the  littoral  types  {Ophiactis  plana,  Ophiocnida  olivacea).  It  is  be- 
low 100  and  even  200  fathoms  that  the  really  neio  types  are  found. 
The  seven  new  genera  herein  described  have  all  a  maximum  depth  of 
more  than  100  fathoms,  and  only  one,  Ophiothamnus,  runs  into  less 
than  75  fathom--.  All  the  species  below  250  fathoms  are  either  of  new 
genera,  or  are  singular  forms  of  old  genera  {Ophiocjhjpha  falcifera, 


110 


BULLETIN    OF    THE 


2  rt 


•a     5     fc 


a      "ja, 


to 
<5 


0     "2 


a, 
O 


O     C 


x      -s      ^ 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


511 


t— 

^« 

<N 

(N 

CO 

m 

CO 

co 

o 

t~ 

■M 

t^ 

CO 

<x 

O 

o 

*f 

co 

o 

1 

7 

in 

t» 

o 

CM 

C4 

in 

«^ 

to 

m 

c 

3 

c 

3 

r- 

—" 

c^ 

CO 

CO 

7 

7 

T 

1    1    1 

7 
i                             i 

—- V 

II - 

c~i 

s 

sH 

g 

JUJ 

^  3 

>-> 

v? 

'5 

^  5 

.2  3 

3  — ^ 

1-j' 

s 

>-> 

E 

j 

^ 

3 

i-T 

^ 
J 

rt 

s 

'5 
o 

s 

o 

u 

si. 

C3 

03 

o 

rt 

£3 

72 

3 

p4 

rt 

T 

"5 

o 

^ 

CJ 

S 

3 

^3 

j| 

_5 

s 

tc 

s 

3 

c 

'z 

.to 

o 

tn 

rt 

o 

o 

3 

g 

~ 

to 

Hjj 

o 

= 

o 

o 

rt 

S 

.2 

o 

CJ 

^5 

a, 

S 

Ch 

a. 

a. 

a, 

C* 

O 

O 

° 

O 

O 

O 

o 

<^ 

312 


BULLETIN   OF   THE 


« 


B  >. 
e  to 

►-a 


go 


03    O 


-      £ 


£      j" 


J       & 


^      £     J 


o      J 


*      b      S      ~     ~      S 


■-pa 


g      g     -S 


o    o    o    o    o 


■=      =     - 


c  _■ 
c  — 

■3     . 

I  a 

£  2 
e'g. 


so 
'E-s 


C    g 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


01    0v 


S       S 


a 


«  M 


o  § 
z.  g 
Sf5 


-a 

o»  S 


3.2 

»>3 


Si! 

toe 


i-)       2 


J)         3         53=         .= 


si      g 


S       5       > 
«       £      9 


o 


2    I 


oS         = 


a-3 

<*  5 


>-  o 


S  1    2  5 


.s      .s       b 


O      O      -< 


40 


.314  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Ophiactis  humilis,  &c).  If,  therefore,  these  zones  of  sea  hottora  were 
to-morrow  turned  to  stone,  we  should  find  a  certain  separation  of  species, 
but  there  would  be  overlapping  species  that  would  connect  the  fossils, 
as  of  one  formation.  Such  are  the  vertical  relations.  The*  horizontal 
relations  can  only  partially  be  known,  except  in  the  direction  of  the 
European  coast,  because  there  have  been  no  considerable  dredgings  on 
the  American  side,  either  to  the  north  or  the  south,  and  comparisons 
must  be  made  only  with  the  littoral  forms.  It  is  well  known  that  a  few 
of  the  Florida  Ophiurans  {Ophiactis  Krebsii,  Opltiolepis  elegans,  &c.) 
have  been  found  as  fur  as  Charleston,  S.  O,  while  in  the  direction  of 
Brazil  many  species  are  found  ( Ophiomyxa  flaccida,  Ophiactis  Krebsii, 
Ophionereis  reticulata,  Ophiothrix  violacea,  Opltiolepis  ])aucispina, 
Ophiura  cinerea,  0.  appressa,  Amp>hiura  Hiisei,  Ophiopsila  Riisei). 
One  species,  Ilemipholis  cordifera,  has  been  collected  in  Charleston  and 
in  Rio,  but  not  yet  between  those  points. 

Naturalists  seem  to  overlook  the  fact,  that,  although  the  edges  of 
the  Caribbean  fauna  spread  thus  wide,  they  encounter  two  other 
fauna?,  north  and  south.  At  Charleston,  Ophiothrix  angulata  and 
Amphiura  atra  are  forms  not  seen  on  the  Florida  coast,  while  at  Rio 
the  Ophiura  Januarii,  Ophioceramis  Januarii,  and  several  species  of 
Amphiura  attest  a  region  of  new  marine  life.  It  is  already  well  known 
that  the  littoral  Ophiuran  fauna?  of  North  and  Middle  Europe  and  the 
Gulf  of  Mexico  are  not  comparable  with  each  other,  even  the  genera 
being  often  different.  How  is  it  with  the  deep-sea  forms  ?  One  species 
is  identical,  —  Ophiomyces  frutectosus, —  and  this,  strangely  enough,  was 
never  seen  by  human  eye  until  within  a  few  months.  Two  other  spe- 
cies may  be  identical,  —  Astrophyton  arborescens  and  Amphiura  tenera 
(=:  elegans?).  One  species  is,  in  the  true  sense,  representative, — 
Ophioglypha  acervata  (comp.  0.  albida).  The  remaining  fifty-nine 
species  are,  so  far  as  we  now  know,  Caribbean.  As  to  the  Panama 
fauna,  the  similarity  between  the  opposite  sides  of  the  Isthmus  has 
already  been  shown  by  Liitken,  Verrill,  and  myself.  The  correspond- 
ence of  the  twelve,  twin  species  shown  in  the  following  table  is  some- 
thing more  than  casual :  — 

Caribbean  Fauna.  Panama  Fauna. 

Ophiura  cinerea  Lym.  Ophiura  teres  I.vm. 

Ophiolepis  elegans  Ltk.  Ophiolepis  variegata  Ltk. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


315 


Caribbean  Fauna. 

Ophiozona  impressa  Lyia. 
Opbiocoma  pumila  Ltk. 
Ophiactis  Krebsii  Ltk. 

Amphiura  tenera  Ltk. 

Ampliiura  Riisei  Ltk. 
Ophiophragmus  septus  Lym. 
Ophiocnida  scabriuscula  Lym. 
Hemipholis  cordifera  Lym. 
Ophionereis  reticulata  Ltk. 
Ophiothrix  violacea  M.  and  T. 


Panama  Fauna. 

Ophiozona  pacifica  Lym. 
Opbiocoma  Alexandri  Lym. 
Ophiactis  virescens  Orst.  and  Ltk. 
Amphiura  violacea  Ltk. 

"  puntarense  Ltk. 

"  microdiscus  Ltk. 

Amphiura  grisea  Ljn. 
Ophiophragmus  marginatus  Lym. 
Ophiocnida  hispida  Lym. 
Hemipholis  affinis  Ljn. 
Ophionereis  annulata  Lym. 
Ophiothrix  spiculata  LeC. 


How  is  it  that  the  vast  Pacific  fauna,  common  to  the  waters  between 
Zanzibar  and  the  Sandwich  Islands  and  between  Loo  Choo  and  the 
Kingsmill  group,  changes  its  character  near  Panama,  and  takes  on  a 
•partial  Caribbean  form  ?  We  might  think  that  the  mingling  of  the 
two  oceans,  before  the  upheaval  of  the  isthmus,  was  the  origin,  and 
that  the  differences  between  these  species  was  the  measure  of  their 
variation  since  the  cretaceous  period.  But  then  the  Caribbean  forms 
appear  on  the  Pacific  side,  while  the  Pacific  forms  seem  not  to  come 
over ;  and  no  matter  whether  there  is  or  is  not  a  difference  of  level 
between  the  oceans,  it  would  scarcely  have  availed  to  prevent  a  mix- 
ture in  both  directions  by  storms,  or  by  currents.  It  is  also  perfectly 
credible  that  water-birds  should  mix  the  faunas  across  an  isthmus 
which  has  a  minimum  width  of  twenty-eight  miles,  just  as  they  con- 
vey fish  eggs  to  distant  and  isolated  ponds.  But  again  there  is  the 
same  objection  as  before.  I  must  therefore  content  myself  with  saying 
that  of  these  twelve  pairs  of  species  there  are  several  that  would  prob- 
ably be  considered  only  as  varieties,  if  they  lived  in  the  same  waters. 
Speculation  is,  after  all,  of  small  value,  because  the  facts  are  insufficient, 
and  because  there  is  a  prospect  of  getting  many  more  facts.  For  ex- 
ample, all  the  diligent  dredging  on  the  European  coasts  had  failed  to 
show  a  species  of  brittle-star  identical  with  the  Caribbean  ;  but,  almost 
at  the  same  time,  two  expeditions  bring  up,  from  a  depth  of  only  75 
fathoms,  a  species  new  to  science  and  common  to  the  two  sides  of  the 
warm  Atlantic.     Such  is  the  value  of  negative  evidence  ! 


816  BULLETIN    OF   THE 


1 1.   Descriptions  of  New  Genera  and  Species,  with  Critical  Remarks. 

Here  follow  descriptions  of  seven  new  genera  and  twenty-one  new 
species.  There  were,  besides,  two  specimens  of  Ophiothrix,  brought 
up  from  110  and  20G  fathoms.  The  one  had  the  disk  completely  hid- 
den by  little  thorny  stumps,  showing  only  the  points  of  the  radial 
shields ;  the  arm-spines  were  long,  slim,  and  very  jagged ;  the  other 
specimen  had  a  small,  compact  disk,  with  naked  radial  shields  spotted 
with  green,  and  green  cross  lines  on  the  arms;  in  the  centre  of  the  disk, 
spines ;  arm-spines  short  and  very  jagged.  Both  were  young,  and  I 
did  not  choose  to  add  to  the  present  complication  of  this  difficult  genus 
by  describing  them.  The  Ophiothrix  violacea  displays  certain  varia- 
tions at  a  depth  that  are  not  seen  in  shallows,  but  I  believe  the  species 
is  the  same.  There  also  were  two  species  of  Arnphiura,  probably  new, 
bat  too  imperfect  to  describe ;  and  one  soft-bodied  little  thing  that  may 
be  the  young  of  Ophiomitra,  or  may  be  new. 

OPHIURID^I. 

Ophioglypha  acervata  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Marks.  —  Three  arm-spines  of  unequal  lengths  ;  the  middle  one 
commonly  shortest  ;  towards  the  tip  of  the  arm  the  spines  are  longer  as 
compared  with  the  side  arm-plates.  Under  arm-plates  with  a  peak  or 
point  without.  Those  papilla;  of  the  "  arm-comb,"  which  are  beneath  the 
disk,  are  flat  and  square,  so  as  to  form  an  even  close-set  row. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  9  mm.  Length  of  arm 
(broken)  about  40  mm.*  Mouth  papilla;  seven  to  each  angle,  of  which  the 
innermost  is  central,  lying  just  below  the  teeth,  and  of  similar  form,  so 
that  it  might  as  properly  be  considered  a  true  tootth  ;  the  mouth-papilla  on 
each  side  is  of  the  same  shape,  but  the  two  outer  ones  are  flattened,  angu- 
lar, much  wider  than  long,  with  a  cutting  edge  re-enteringly  curved,  or 
notched.  Teeth  three,  four,  or  even  five,  shaped  like  a  blunt  spear-head, 
swelling  in  the  middle,  and  rounded.  Mouth-shields  as  long  as  broad  ; 
broader  without  than  within  ;  outer  side  cleanly  curved,  irmer  side  making 
an  angle;  length  to  breadth  1.8  :  1.8.  Side  mouth-shields  narrow,  and  of 
equal  width,  meeting  within,  and  thence  running  along  the  inner  angle  of 
the  mouth-shield  to  the  head  of  the  genital  slit.     First  under  arm-plate  as 

*  The  arm  is  doubtless  much  longer  than  this,  usually.  In  some  smaller  specimens 
it  ran  out  in  a  thread-like  way,  something  after  the  manner  of  0.  robusta. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  317 

large  as  any  ;  broader  than  long;  of  a  rounded  diamond-shape,  with  a  dis- 
tinct, rounded  peak  without;  length  to  breadth  .C  :  .9.  Second  plate 
touching  the  first ;  third  plate  barely  separated  from  the  second  by  the 
juncture  of  the  under  arm-plates  ;  fourtli  plate  well  separated  from  its  suc- 
cessor, as  are  all  those  beyond.  Fifth  plate  bounded  within  by  two  re- 
entering curves,  which  come  to  a  point  on  the  median  line  ;  without,  it  has 
a  little  peak  in  the  centre  which  gives  it  a  faintly  tri-lobed  appearance ; 
the  laterals  are  short  and  straight ;  length  to  breadth  .5  :  .8.  The  plates 
beyond  this  one  have  a  similar  form,  but  continually  grow  smaller  by  the 
increased  encroachment  of  the  side  arm-plates.  Side  arm-plates  meet  be- 
low at  the  third  under  arm-plate  ;  and,  above,  at  the  ninth  upper  arm-plate  : 
their  upper  edges  are  re-enteringly  curved,  which  gives  a  peculiar  shape  to 
the  upper  arm-plates.  These  last  are,  near  the  disk,  broader  without  than 
within,  with  a  strongly  curved  and  thickened  outer  side ;  and  their  laterals 
are  curved  by  reason  of  the  peculiar  form  of  the  side-plates  ;  further  out, 
where  they  do  not  touch  each  other,  they  come  to  a  point,  within  ;  length  to 
breadth  (sixth  plate)  .8  :  .7.  Disk,  above,  covered  with  crowded,  irregular, 
flattened  scales,  none  of  which  are  much  swelled,  so  that  the  surface  is  nearly 
smooth.  The  primary  plates  are  not  conspicuous  either  by  size  or  thick- 
ness, except  the  central  one,  which  is  very  distinct,  nearly  round,  and  .6 
mm.  in  diameter.  Radial  shields  large,  thick,  and  conspicuous ;  irregular 
pear-seed  shape,  and  strongly  diverging;  length  to  breadth  2  :  1.4;  they 
are  entirely  separated  by  a  very  irregular  wedge  of  scales,  which  some- 
times consists  of  a  double  row ;  sometimes  of  a  mixture  of  a  single  and 
double  row,  respectively  of  larger  and  smaller  scales.  The  large,  thick 
radial-scales  carry  all  the  papilla;  of  the  arm-comb,  which  are  about  twenty 
in  number  on  each  side  and  of  two  sorts ;  those  seen  from  above  are  sharp 
and  diverge  from  each  other ;  those  seen  from  below  are  flat  and  square, 
so  as  to  form  an  even,  close-set  row;  there  are  about  ten  of  each  kind,  and 
those  at  the  ends  of  the  row  differ  most.  The  arm-comb  is  continued,  along 
the  edge  of  the  genital  slit,  by  a  row  of  about  seventeen  very  fine  papilla;. 
On  the  upper  arm-plates  within  the  notch  is  a  row  of  fine  papilla;  corre- 
sponding to  those  of  the  arm-comb.  The  scales  of  the  interbrachial  spaces 
below  are  thin  and  crowded.  Arm-spines  cylindrical,  blunt,  scarcely  ta- 
pering; lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate  (eighth  joint)  .4,  .2,  .3  :  .5. 
Further  out  on  the  arm  they  are  proportionately  much  longer,  and  towards 
the  last  third  of  the  length  the  lowest  spine  is  nearly  or  quite  as  long  as 
the  side  arm-plate  ;  there,  also,  they  are  more  slender,  and  taper  to  a  fine 
point.  Twelve  tentacle  scales  on  the  first  pore,  seven  being  on  the  side 
next  the  interbrachial  space ;  six  scales  on  the  second  pore ;  five  on  the 
third  ;  four  on  the  fourth ;  three  on  the  fifth  ;  two  on  the  sixth ;  and  one 
scale  on  the  joints  beyond  that. 


318  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Color,  in  alcohol,  light  gray. 

Variations.  —  A  specimen  with  a  disk  of  G  mm.  had  the  arm-spines 
nearly  equal  (the  lowest  rather  shortest),  and  three  fourths  as  long  as  the 
side  arm-plate.  In  general  the  middle  spine  is  shortest,  but  in  a  consider- 
able series  examined  numerous  variations  were  to  be  seen  ;  rarely,  the 
spin<  s  on  some  part  of  the  arm  were  equal  ;  yet,  even  then,  they  would  be 
of  unequal  lengths  on  other  parts.  A  specimen  with  a  disk  of  '.'<  mm.,  had 
the  under  arm-pl  ites  comparatively  smaller,  but  still  exhibiting  in  one  way 
or  another  the  characteristic  peak  or  lobe  on  the  outer  side;  the  fourth 
plate  was  broad,  regular,  heart-shape,  but  with  a  little  point  within  where 
the  outer  sides  of  the  side  arm-plates  joiner]  on  the  median  line  ;  the  tenth 
plate  was  similar,  but  the  outer  side  being  wavy  gave  greater  distinctness 
to  the  little  lobe  ;  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  disk,  a  greater  proportionate 
space  was  occupied  by  the  primary  plates,  though  none  of  them  touched 
each  other;  the  radial  shields  were  quite  separated  by  two  large  rounded 
plates  ;  the  notch  of  the  disk  only  included  a  part  of  one  upper  arm-plate, 
and  the  side  arm-plates  met  above,  at  the  third  joint  from  the  disk.  In  a 
very  young  specimen,  having  a  disk  only  1  mm.  in  diameter,  nearly  all  the 
surface  of  the  upper  disk  was  covered  by  six  large,  round  primary  plates, 
one  in  the  centre  and  one  opposite  each  arm  ;  immediately  round  the 
centre  plate  were  five  small  ones,  situated  opposite  the  interbrachial  spaces  ; 
over  each  arm  were  two  very  small  radial  shields  like  scales,  and,  in  the 
interbrachial  space,  on  the  edge  of  the  disk,  a  large  plate  ;  finally,  there 
was  one  more  small  plate  in  each  interbrachial  space,  making  a  total  of 
thirty-one  pieces.  The  notch  of  the  disc  was  scarcely  indicated.,  and  there 
was  no  arm-comb.  Below,  the  interbrachial  spaces  were  almost  filled  by 
the  mouth-shields.  The  side  arm-plates  bore  three  short  spines  about  one 
third  the  length  of  the  joint  resembling  those  of  0.  albida,  and  met  both 
above  and  below,  on  all  the  joints;  although  the  upper  and  lower  arm- 
platen  wen;  well  defined  and  had  nearly  their  true  shapes. 

This  species,  brought  up  in  numbers  from  30  to  125  fathoms,  is  of  high 
interest  ;  first,  because  it  seems  not  to  live  in  company  of  any  species  of  the. 
same  genus;  and  secondly,  because  it  much  resembles  Ophioghjplia  albida, 
so  widely  distributed  in  the  North  European  seas  and  in  the  Mediterranean. 
It  i<,  however,  distinguished  by  the  different  form  of  the  arm-!  pines,  arm- 
comb,  and  underarm-plates.  Ophiogh/pJia  Grubei  has  very  similar  under 
arm-plates  (if  Heller's  drawing  is  accurate),*  but  differs  in  the  arm-spines 
and  in  the  curious  swelling  of  the  upper  arm-plates.  Mr.  Ljungman  kindly 
examined  the  specimens  and  derided  that  they  did  not  agree  with  any  of 
the  numerous  varieties  of  0.  alb'ula,  with  which  he  is  familiar      He  also 

«   S  '  K.;-.  Akad.  der  Wisseus.  XLVT,  p.  415,  pi.  II,  figs.  13-16. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  319 

stated  that  '  >.  Grub  i  was  only  a  variety.    I  examined  specimens  of  0.  albida 
dredged  by  the  "  Josephine "  at  the  Azores,  and  they  were  as  different 
from  0.  acercata  as  those  of  Scandinavia. 
Several  localities,  in  from  o()  to  125  fathoms. 

Opliioglypha  falcifera  Lyman,  sp.  now 

ecial  Marks.  —  Three  arm-spines,  the  middle  one  is  a  strong  hook, 
turned  upwards.  Arm-comb  single,  running  along  the  genital  plate  and 
along  the  outer  edge  of  radial  shield,  above  the  arm. 

I:  scrij  lion  of  Spt  imen. — •  D!sk  4.5  mm.  Arm  10  mm.  Width  of  arm, 
1  nun.  Mouth-papilla?  very  short  and  broad  and  so  closely  soldered  as  to 
i  p;  ear  like  a  plain  line  ;  usually,  however,  there  may  be  distinguished  four 
on  each  side,  of  which  the  two  outer  are  longest;  besides  these,  there  is 
a  central,  inner  one,  not  soldered  with  the  rest,  having  a  blunt  diamond 
shape,  somewhat  like  the  teeth,  under  which  it  lies. 

Mouth-shields  rounded  heart-shape,  with  a  wide  curve  without,  and  a  de- 
cided obtuse  angle  within  ;  length  to  breadth  1.1  :  .8.  Side  mouth-shields 
rather  narrow,  meeting  within,  and  extending  outwards  to  the  lateral  cor- 
ner of  the  mouth-shield.  Under  arm-plates,  near  base  of  arm,  as  long  as,  or 
longer  than,  broad;  much  wider  without  than  within;  bounded  without  by  a 
curve,  within  by  a  small  angle  whose  sides  are  re-entering  curves,  and  on  the 
sides  by  re-entering  curves;  a  little  further  out  the  curves  of  the  inner  an«Ie 
and  of  the  side  of  the  plate  are  blended  in  one,  and  the  plate  then  resem- 
bles a  broad  wedge  with  curved  outlines.  This  wedge  widens  and  shortens 
as  it  is  found  further  out  on  the  arm,  so  that,  near  the  end,  it  consists  of  a 
very  obtuse  angle  without,  and  of  a  wavy  border  within,  having  a  little 
central  peak;  length  to  breadth  (4th  joint)  .4  :  .4.  Side  arm-plates  meet- 
ing everywhere  below,  and  also  above,  beyond  the  first  joint  from  the  disk. 
Their  line  of  juncture  at  the  fourth  joint  is  equal  to  half  the  length  of  the 
under  arm-plate ;  the  total  length  of  the  joint  being  .G  mm.  This  propor- 
tion rapidly  increases,  and,  near  end  of  arm,  this  line  is  double  or  treble 
the  length  of  the  under  arm-plate  Upper  arm-plates  fan-shape,  bounded 
without  by  a  curve  and  within  by  two  re-entering  curves,  which  meet  on  the 
median  line;  length  to  breadth  .4  :  .5.  Disk  covered  above  by  numerous 
rounded  scales  in  concentric  rows,  each  row  standing  higher  than  that  out- 
side :  the  central  primary  plate  is  highest  of  all,  and  has  a  diameter  of  .8  mm. 
Among  these  are  a  few  smaller,  irregular  scales.  There  are  three  of  these 
concentric  circles,  whereof  the  outermost  includes  the  radial  shields,  which 
are  of  a  rude  pear-seed  form,  touching  near  their  outer  third,  so  that  thev 
diverge  widely  within,  and  less  widely  without,  firming  a  notch  in  the  disk 
which  includes  part  of  an  upper  arm-plate  ;  length  to  breadth  .8  :  .8.  They 
are  separated  within  by  part  of  a  large  scale,  which  has  a  rude  diamond 


320  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

form.  Below,  the  disk  is  covered  by  half  a  dozen  plates,  in  each  interbra- 
chial  space,  arranged  in  two  concentric  rows  ;  besides  which  a  wide  genital 
plate  runs  along  the  slit,  bearing  on  its  edge  a  row  of  short,  stout,  rounded 
papillae,  which  run  from  the  second  under  arm-plate  upwards  along  the 
outer  edge  of  the  radial  shield  to  a  point  about  opposite  the  lateral  corner 
of  the  upper  arm-plate.  Arm-spines  three,  very  short  and  small ;  lengths 
to  that  of  under  arm-plate  (3d  joint)  .2,  .2,  .2  :  .4.  At,  and  beyond  the 
first  joint  outside  the  disk,  the  middle  spine  takes  on  the  form  of  a  broad, 
strong  hook,  having  two  curved  teeth  on  the  upper  edge.  At  the  tip  of 
the  arm  there  are  but  two  spines,  of  Avkich  the  upper  is  the  hook.  Tenta- 
cle scales  of  the  mouth-tentacles  six  ;  three  on  each  side  of  a  very  narrow 
incision,  which  is  squeezed  between  the  side  mouth-shield  (which  bears 
three  of  the  scales)  on  one  side,  and  the  large  first  under  arm-plate  and  the 
outermost  mouth-papilla  on  the  other  side.  Second  pore  with  six  scales, 
arranged  round  a  narrow  oval ;  third  pore,  two  scales,  side  by  side  ;  and 
those  beyond,  only  one  scale,  which,  at  some  distance  out  on  the  arm,  is 
very  minute  and  difficult  to  be  seen. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  white. 

Variations.  —  Another  smaller  specimen  had  the  disk  3  mm.  and  the  arm 
9  mm.  The  mouth-shields  were  proportionately  longer  than  in  the  first 
mentioned,  —  a  variation  common  to  the  whole  genus. 

Two  specimens,  in  377  fathoms,  south  of  Rebecca  Channel. 

The  plates  on  the  disk  indicate  that  these  specimens,  although  by  no 
means  fully  grown,  are  yet  large  enough  to  show  the  adult  characters. 
Thus  O.  Sarsii,  with  a  disk  of  4.5  mm.  (see  LUtken  Addit.  ad  Hist.  Oph.  Pt. 
T,  PI.  I,  fi"-.  3),  is  more  young,  in  this  respect,  than  O.falcifera,  and  yet  has 
taken  on  all  the  parts  needed  for  ready  recognition  of  the  species.  We 
may  look  for  an  adult  of  this  curious  species  about  the  size  of  0.  Sarsii,  or 
rather  smaller,  and  having  a  large  number  of  small  plates  on  the  disk.  The 
stout,  double-toothed  hook,  as  a  middle  arm-spine,  is  only  an  embryonic 
organ  carried  forward.  In  the  very  tip  of  the  arm  of  0.  accrcata  I  have 
found,  on  the  last  fourteen  joints,  only  two  spines;  and  of  these  the  upper 
one  was  flattened,  and  bore  on  its  upper  edge  (just  as  in  0. /ale  if  era) 
about  nine  microscopic,  hooked  teeth.  It  may  be  that  the  fully  grown 
O.falcifera  has  the  middle  hook,  at  the  base  of  the  arm,  so  overgrown  as 
to  form  a  stumpy  spine. 

Ophiocten  depressum  Lyman,  sp.  nov.  * 

Special  marks.  —  Disk  very  thin  and  flat,  with  a  sharp  edge.  The 
granules  of  the  disk  are  numerous,  but  irregularly  scattered ;  none  on  the 

*  This  species  departs  a  good  deal  from  the  typical  Ophiocten.     The  disk  granulution 
is  not  continuous,  but  scattered;  there  are  no  combs  of  spines  on  the  outer  edges  of  the 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  321 

interbrachial  species,  below.     A  row  of  papillae  along  the  outer  end  of  the 
radial  shield  and  the  edge  of  the  disk.     Two  arm-spines. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  8  mm.  Length  of  arm 
(broken)  about  50  mm.  Mouth-papilla;  seventeen  to  twenty-one  to  each 
angle:  of  these,  usually  three  are  rounded,  tapering,  spear-head  shape,  and 
point  to  the  centre  of  the  mouth,  being  placed  at  the  apex  of  the  angle ; 
the  remainder  are  much  smaller,  and  are  flat  and  squarish ;  they  form  a 
connected  row,  the  two  outermost  usually  borne  on  the  edge  of  the  side 
mouth-shield,  the  remainder  on  the  mouth-frames.  Teeth,  four ;  flat,  deli- 
cate, long,  and  tapering  to  a  point.  Mouth-shields  broad,  rounded  heart- 
shape,  with  a  little  peak  within.  Side  mouth-shields  long  and  narrow; 
they  begin  at  the  junction  of  the  first  under  arm-plate  with  the  side  arm- 
plate  of  the  second  joint,  and  run  thence  across  the  end  of  the  genital  slit, 
meeting  nearly,  or  quite,  at  the  inner  point  of  the  mouth-shield.  Under 
arm-plates  in  contact  with  each  other  along  the  whole  basal  part  of  the  arm. 
First  plate  small,  round  hexagonal,  longer  than  broad,  and  wedged  between 
the  outer  ends  of  the  neighboring  side  mouth-shields.  Second  plate  nar- 
rowed within,  and  bounded  by  six  sides;  as  follows:  outer  side  nearly 
straight ;  laterals  short  and  straight ;  inner  laterals  re-enteringiy  curved,  to 
admit  the  large  tentacle  pores,  and  converging  on  the  inner  side,  which  is 
straight  and  very  short.  Fifth  plate  as  broad  as  long;  outer  side  slightly 
re-enteringly  curved ;  inner  side  a  little  curved ;  laterals  nearly  straight, 
inner  laterals  short,  and  a  little  re-enteringly  curved ;  length  to  breadth 
.6  :  .6.  Two  thirds  out  on  the  arm,  the  side  arm-plates  meet  below,  along 
a  line  about  one-half  as  long  as  the  under  arm-plate,  which  is  there  tri- 
angular, with  its  sides  a  little  curved,  and  the  apex  directed  inward.  Side 
arm-plates  robust,  but  not  meeting  below  or  above  till  near  the  end  of  the 
arm.  Upper  arm-plates  four-sided,  broader  than  long  ;  outer  side  curved  ; 
inner  side  re-enteringly  curved;  laterals  straight;  length  to  breadth  (4th 
plate)  .6  :  .8.  The  first  upper  arm-plate  is  very  small,  and  fits  in  the  little 
notch  made  by  the  outer  ends  of  the  radial  shields.  Two  thirds  out  on  the 
arm  the  plates  have  the  same  form,  though  much  more  elongated.  Disk 
covered,  above  and  below,  with  numerous  rather  large  plates  of  very 
irregular  outline,  all  of  which,  except  those  of  the  lower  surface,  are  more 
or  less  studded  with  small,  smooth  granules ;  on  the  under  surface  is  an 
irregular  double  row  of  granules,  extending  round  the  inner  end  of  the 
genital  slit,  and  along  the  genital  plates  as  far  as  the  third  joint  of  the  arm  : 
a  row  of  large  granules,  or  short,  stout  papillae,  runs  along  the  edge  of  the 

basal  upper  arm-plates ;  the  ann-eomb  of  papillae  is  continued  along  the  edge  of  the  disk ; 
the  side  arm  plates  do  not  join  below;  the  first  pair  of  pores  of  the  arm-tentacles  are  sur- 
rounded by  scales.    Nevertheless,  I  am  not  clear  enough  as  to  the  generic  differences  in 
this  group  to  make  a  separation. 
41 


322  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

disk,  and  over  the  arm  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  radial  shield.  The  edge 
of  the  disk,  in  each  interbrachial  space,  is  composed  above  of  three  plates, 
and  below  of  six. 

Radial  shields,  of  a  very  irregular  triangular  form,  with  the  point  inward  ; 
thoy  nearly,  or  quite,  touch  without,  but  immediately  diverge  and  are  sep- 
arated by  a  wedge  of  one  small,  one  large,  and  part  of  another  large  plate; 
length  to  breadth  1.5  :  .8.  Two  small,  rounded,  tapering  arm-spines;  the 
lower  slightly  longer;  lengths  to  that  of  under  arm-plates  (5th  joint) 
A  ,  .5  :  .6.  Tentacle  scales,  on  second  joint,  six  to  each  pore,  arranged  in 
an  oval,  three  on  each  side;  on  third  joint,  two,  arranged  side  by  side; 
on  joints  beyond  that,  one.  They  all  have  the  same  shape  of  a  small, 
thickened  scale,  but  those  towards  tip  of  arm  are  proportionately  larger. 
The  mouth  tentacles,  of  the  first  joint,  have  scales  on  either  side,  in  form 
of  an  incision,  somewhat  as  in  Ophioglypha :  on  the  side  next  the  jaw,  the 
two  mouth-papilla?  that  stand  on  the  side  arm-plate  are  tentacle  scales; 
and,  on  the  side  next  the  mouth  slit,  there  are  two  more,  which  stand  on  a 
little  plate,  the  homologue  of  a  side  arm-plate,  running  upwards  into  the 
mouth  slit  from  the  first  under  arm-plate. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  light  brown. 

Two  specimens,  off  Double-headed  Shot  Keys,  in  315  fathoms. 

Ophiomusium,  gen.  now* 

Teeth  :  no  tooth-papilla;;  mouth-papilla:  soldered  in  a  continuous  row,  so 
that  their  former  outlines  are  scarcely  to  be  seen.  Disk  covered  by  plates 
and  radial  shields,  all  of  which  are  intimately  soldered,  forming  a  surface 
like  porcelain.  Upper  and  under  arm-plates  minute  :  side  arm-plates  meet- 
ing above  and  below;  swelled,  intimately  soldered  with  the  neighboring 
parts.  No  tentacle  pores  beyond  the  basal  arm-joints.  Small  arm-spines 
on  outer  edge  of  arm-plates.     Two  genital  slits  in  each  interbrachial  space. 

In  the  nature  ot  its  covering,  this  singular  genus  has  some  affinity  with 
Ophiolepis,  as  now  restricted.  But  it  is  unique  in  having  no  tentacle  pores 
on  the  greater  part  of  the  arm. 

Ophiomusium  eburneum  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Marks. —  Two  \cvy  small,  blunt  arm-spines,  less  than  one  third 
as  long  as  the  arm-joint.  No  tent  icles  beyond  the  first  two  joints.  Surface 
of  the  disk  and  arm-plates  microscopically  granulated. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  9  mm.  Length  of  arm 
25  mm.  Width  of  arm  1  mm.  The  mouth  papillae,  though  closely  soldered 
to.  each  other,  may  be  distinguished,  in  a  partly  dry  specimen,  by  the  light 

*  6</>is,  snake;  ^vtrelov,  mosaic. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  323 

lines  between  them  ;  there  are  seventeen  to  each  angle,  of  which  the 
outer  one  is  tooth-like  and  minute,  and  may  be  partially  detached  from 
the  rest ;  the  innermost,  odd  one  is  diamond-shaped,  and  lies  immediately 
under  the  teeth  ;  the  others  are  squarish.  Teeth  four,  Hat,  pointed,  nar- 
row ;  sometimes  not  placed  regularly  over  each  other.  Mouth-shields 
small,  of  a  truncated  diamond  shape,  the  truncation  directed  outward  ; 
length  to  breadth  .8  :  .(J.  Side  mouth-shields  broader  without  than  within, 
where  they  meet,  extending  outwards  beyond  the  mouth-shield,  and  join- 
ing the  first  side  arm-plate;  length  1.2  mm.  Disk  smooth  above,  and  below, 
and  covered  with  a  close  mosaic  of  rounded  scales,  so  intimately  soldered 
that  their  outlines  are  indistinct.  Radial  shields  blunt  pear-seed  shaped, 
widely  separated  by  a  group  of  small  disk  scales ;  length  to  breadth 
1.8  :  1.2;  they  swell  a  little  above  the  level  of  the  others,  and  their 
surface,  under  the  microscope,  is  composed  of  smooth  grains,  as  is  that  of 
all  the  arm  and  disk  plates.  In  the  interbrachial  space,  between  the  pairs 
of  radial  shields,  a  single  large  scale  occupies  the  margin  of  the  disk. 
Under  arm-plates  three-sided  and  very  small ;  the  outer  side  is  nearly 
straight,  the  laterals  are  re-enteringly  curved  and  meet  in  a  point  within ; 
length  to  breadth  (5th  joint)  .5  :  .4.  Further  out  they  rapidly  become 
smaller,  and,  towards  the  tip  of  the  arm,  are  scarcely  to  be  seen.  Side 
arm-plates  very  thick  and  swollen,  meeting  above  and  below,  from  the 
very  innermost  joint ;  at  the  fifth  joint,  their  line  of  juncture  is  as  long  aa 
the  under  arm-plate;  and,  further  out,  they  constitute  almost  the  whole  of 
the  joint.  Upper  arm-plates  very  small ;  longer  than  broad,  diamond 
shape,  with  the  outer  angle  shorter  than  the  inner  one ;  length  to  breadth 
(2d  joint  from  disk)  .8  :  .6.  Genital  slits  extending  from  the  outer  corner 
of  the  mouth-shield  to  a  point  about  two  thirds  the  distance  to  the  margin 
of  the  disk  ;  they  are  very  narrow,  and  are  bounded  by  two  genital  plates, 
which  grow  wider  at  their  outer  end,  and  are  placed  in  a  single  line  ; 
moreover,  there  is  a  very  narrow  plate  between  the  inner  part  of  the  slit 
and  the  side  arm-plate.  Arm-spines  two,  very  short,  scarcely  tapering,  cut 
square  oil"  at  the  end,  nearly  equal ;  lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate 
(5th  joint)  .3,  .3  :  1.  Near  the  tip  of  the  arm  the  under  spine  is  toothed,  and 
hooked  at  the  end,  and  the  upper  spine  somewhat  rough.  There  are 
tentacle-scales  on  the  second  and  third  joints,  one  to  each  pore  ;  beyond 
this,  neither  tentacles  nor  scales ;  these  scales  are  small,  curved,  and 
broader  than  long,  and  are  situated  close  to  the  inner  angle  of  the  little 
under  arm-plate,  which  gives  them  the  look  of  being  crowded  towards  the 
centre  of  the  arm.     The  tentacles  are  short  and  small. 

Color  in  alcohol,  white. 

Variations.  ■ —  A  young  one  had  the  disk  1.8  mm.,  the  arm  C  mm.  The 
scales  of  the  upper  disk  were  swollen  and  distinct,  though  closely  soldered 


324  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

together ;  in  the  centre  a  large  rosette  of  primary  plates,  a  large  round 
one  in  the  centre;  a  large,  rounded  pentagonal  one  in  each  brachial  space; 
a  small  narrow  one,  wedged  between  these  last,  in  each  interbrachial  space. 
Outside  this  rosette  were  the  radial  shields,  touching  each  other ;  and, 
finally,  there  were  two  narrow  plates,  on  a  radiating  line,  in  each  inter- 
brachial space  between  the  pairs  of  radial  shields,  making  thirty-one  plates 
on  the  upper  surface.  Below  there  were  only  three  plates  in  each  inter- 
brachial space,  arranged  side  by  side.  The  mouth-shields  were  broad, 
heart-shape  ;  the  side  mouth-shields  and  mouth-papillae  nearly  as  in  the 
adult.  Of  under  arm-plates  there  were  but  two  (including  the  one  at  the 
corner  of  the  mouth-slit)  :  of  upper  arm-plates,  only  one,  on  the  first  joint. 
There  were  tentacles  on  the  second  and  third  joints,  just  as  in  the  adult, 
and  none  beyond.  The  place  where  upper  and  lower  arm-plates  will 
appear  is  indicated  by  a  depression,  just  where  the  side  arm- plates  meet  ; 
and  in  this  depression  appears  a  little  papilla,  or  lump,  which  at  last 
takes  on  the  form  of  a  true  plate.  Thus,  a  larger  specimen  with  a  disk  of 
3  mm.  ami  arm  of  10  mm.  had  already  nine  upper  and  three  lower  arm- 
plates,  but  none  beyond.     Oil  Sand  Key.  270  and  325  fathoms. 

Ophiacantha  nieridionalis  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Opkiacantlia  pentacrinus?  Liitken,  Addit.  ad.  Hist.  Ophiur.  Pt.  Ill,  18G9,  p.  46. 

Special  Marks,  —  Disk  closely  beset  with  minute  stumps,  each  bearing  a 
crown  of  fine  thorns.  Six  long,  very  slender  arm-spines.  Arms  five  or 
six  times  as  loDg  as  the  diameter  of  the  disk,  rounded  and  slender. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  4  mm.  Length  of  arm 
22  mm.  Seven  mouth-papillae  to  each  angle  of  the  mouth;  three  on  each 
side,  which  are  short,  bluntly  tapering,  stout,  and  separated  from  each 
other,  and  one  situated  immediately  below  the  teeth,  which  it  resembles  in 
form.  Teeth  three,  short,  ilat  and  wide,  with  a  much  curved  cutting  edge. 
Mouth-shields  between  a  diamond  and  a  heart  shape,  much  broader  than 
long,  with  the  outer  side  nearly  straight,  except  a  projection  at  the  middle 
point,  and  a  rounded  angle  within  ;  length  to  breadth  .4  :  .7.  Side  mouth- 
shields  wide  and  strong,  nearly  straight,  meeting  within,  and  resting  with- 
out, on  the  rudimentary  first  arm-plate,  which  is  conspicuous  and  strong. 
Under  arm-plates  separated  by  the  side  plates  along  the  whole  arm,  wider 
without  than  within;  bounded  without  by  a  clean  curve,  on  the  .-ides 
by  a  slightly  re-entering  curve,  and  within  by  an  obtuse  angle;  nowhere  do 
they  present  a  sharp  corner,  their  outline  being  much  rounded.  Length 
(1th  joint)  A  mm.  Side  arm-plates  meeting  above  ami  below,  their  line 
of  juncture  being,  at  the  base  of  the  arm,  quite  as  long  as  the  lower  arm- 
plate.  Upper  arm-plates  small,  not  as  wide  as  the  arm,  strongly  curved 
without,  and   with   an   angle   within,  so   that    they  form  a   sort  of  broad 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  325 

diamond-shape.  Disk  completely  covered,  above  and  below,  with  very 
minute  stumps,  each  of  which  bears  a  crown  of  microscopic  thorns;  on  the 
back  of  the  disc  there  are  about  250  to  a  square  mm.  Radial  shields 
entirely  obscured,  except  just  over  the  arms,  where  their  outer  ends  are 
indicated  by  two  little  swellings.  Arm-spities  rounded,  tapering,  transpar- 
ent, and  very  slender ;  under  the  microscope  they  appear  finely  prickly  ; 
on  the  basal  joints  six,  of  which  the  upper  three  are  much  the  longest ; 
lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate  (4th  joint)  1.5,  1.8,  1.8,  1.2,  1.,  .8  :  .4. 
The  two  joints  within  the  disk  have  but  three  spines,  which  arc  short,  equal, 
flattened  at  their  base,  and  quite  rough.  The  end  joints  have  three  spines, 
also  quite  rough,  and  proportionately  shorter  and  stouter  than  those  of  the 
basal  joints,  but  there  are  no  hooks,  or  toothed  spines.  Tentacle  scales  flat 
and  sharp  pointed,  one  to  each  pore.  Color,  in  alcohol,  pale  blue  gray  for 
the  disk,  and  white  for  the  arms.  The  description  given  by  Liitken  of  0. 
peraacrimis  corresponds  pretty  nearly  to  this  species.  Tliere  is,  however,  one 
arm-spine  less  in  0.  meridionalis,  and  the  underarm-plates  appear  to  be  of  a 
different  shape.  Only  a  comparison  of  originals  can  determine  the  doubt. 
In  23  7  and  327  fathoms. 

Ophiomitra  Lyman,  gen.  now* 

Testh  :  numerous,  snull,  nearly  equal  mouth-papillae ;  no  tooth-papilhe. 
Disk  flat,  circular,  and  erect,  covered  with  scales  and  radial  shields,  and 
beset  with  thorny  spines,  or  stumps.  Arm-spines  rough.  Side  arm-plates 
large  ami  nearly  or  quite  meeting  above  and  below. 

So  far  as  concerns  the  arms  and  the  chewing  apparatus,  this  is  an 
Opliiacanlha  :  but  the  disk,  with  its  naked  scales  and  conspicuous  radial 
shields,  s-epaiafes  it  from  that  genus,  which  is  characterized  by  the  long, 
very  narrow,  radial  shields,  covered,  together  with  the  disk,  by  a  thick  skin 
bearing  more  or  less  thorny  appendages. 

Ophiomitra  valida  Lyman,  sp.  now 

Special  Marks.  —  Disk  beset  with  thorny  stumps  ;  arm-spines  about  9  ; 
the  upper  ones  a  little  tapering,  the  lower  ones  flattened. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  — Diameter  of  disk  12  mm.  Length  of  arm 
about  GO  mm.  Mouth-papilla;  stout,  rounded,  tapering  to  a  blunt  point; 
from  10  to  11  to  each  angle  of  the  mouth  ;  of  which  one  or  two  point 
directly  inward.  Teeth  long,  Hat,  tapering  to  a  blunt  point ;  8  in  number. 
Mouth-shields  small,  of  a  rounded  diamond  form,  with  a  peak  within  ; 
length  to  breadth  1.5  :  l.S.  The  madreporic  shield  has  an  ill-defined  cir- 
cular depression.  Side  mouth-shields  large,  meeting  within,  of  a  rude 
oval  shape.     They  are  quite  as  huge  as  the  mouth-shields  proper.     Under 

*  5<£ts,  a  snake;  juiYpa,  a  cnp. 


326  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

arm-plates  broader  without  than  within,  and  broader  than  long;  on  Cth 
jointjlength  to  breadth  1  :  1.3.  The  plates  lying  within  the  disk  are  much 
squeezed,  laterally,  by  the  large  tentacles  and  their  scales;  beyond  the 
disk  they  have  a  more  regular  shape,  with  the  outer  side  strongly  curved. 
Side  arm-plates  rather  prominent,  meeting  above,  but  not  below.  Upper 
arm-plates  wide  fan-shape,  with  outer  side  strongly  curved,  and  coming  to 
a  point  within.  Length  to  breadth  1:  1.7.  Disk,  with  a  well-marked, 
round  outline,  standing  oil'  the  bases  of  the  arms;  all  its  upper  surface, 
except  the  radial  shields,  beset  with  little,  rounded,  thorny  knobs  or 
stumps,  about  -J  mm.  high  ;  they  have  a  short,  club  form,  like  a  folded  toad- 
stool, and  bear  a  thorny  crown  ;  there  are  about  eight  of  these  stumps  to  a 
;  tpuare  mm.,  where  they  are  thickest.  Interbrachial  spaces  below  have  like- 
wise a  few  of  these  stumps.  The  sealing  of  the  disk,  in  a  partly  dried 
specimen,  is  easily  seen.  Radial  shields  of  a  blunt  pear-seed  shape,  with  a 
rather  irregular  and  ill-defined  outline;  they  are  slightly  separated,  and 
are  naked  ;  length  to  breadth  2.2  :  1.5.  Genital  slits  large  and  extending 
nearly  to  the  margin  of  the  disk.  Arm-spines  rough,  and  resembling 
those  of  the  smoother  species  of  Opliiolhrix  ;  the  five  upper  ones  slender, 
rounded,  tapering  gradually;  the  four  lower  ones  somewhat  flattened, 
scarcely  tapering,  blunt;  lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate  (6th 
joint)  3.8,  3.5,  2.5,  2.5,  2.2,  2.2,  2.,  1.8,  l.S  :  1.  Tentacle  scales,  two  on 
the  first  pores;  after  that  only  one;  those  at  base  of  arm  are  large,  thin, 
longer  than  broad  and  cut  square  oil"  at  the  tip  :  those  further  out  are 
much  smaller  and  tend  to  become  pointed,  in  alcohol,  the  specimens  are 
of  a  uniform  faded  straw-color. 

I  ili  a  —  A  specimen  with  a  disk  of  9  mm.  had  only  eight  arm-spines 
next  the  disk,  and  seven  a  little  further  out  on  the  arm.  The  uppermost 
spine  is  sometimes  shorter  than  the  second,  but  (he  rest  usually  follow  the 
p  oportions  laid,  down.  In  huge  specimens  the  upper  arm-plates  have 
their  outer  curve  very  prominent. 

This  species  has  a  rough  resemblance  to  Opliiolhrix  ro  da:  and  the 
genus  has  affinities  with  Opliiolhrix.  The  lowest  arm-spine,  on  the  very  tip 
joints,  is  a  little  curved  and  is  strongly  toothed  on  one  edge,  so  as  to  form 
a  pat  tial  hook. 

Dredged  off  Sand  Key,  Florida,  in  120  fathoms. 

Ophiomitra  sertata  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

S  cciul  Marks.  —  Disk  with  small  radial  shields  and  beset  with  small 
spines  and  grains.     Sixteen  mouth-papilla?. 

otion  of  a  Specimen. —  Diameter  of  disk  11  mm.     Length  of  arm 

about  55  mm.     "Width  of  arm  between  the  joints  2  mm.     Mouth-papilla; 

.•   en  i  i  each  m  mth-angle;  two  outer  ones  thin  and  nearly  as  wide 


MUSEUM  OF  COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.         327 

as  long,  with  the  end  cut  square  off;  the  next  five  thin,  narrow,  sharp; 
the  innermost  one  lies  under  the  teeth,  and,  with  its  mate  from  the  other 
side,  forms  a  pair  of  papillae  much  stouter  than  the  rest  and  having  a  spear- 
head shape.  Tteth  five  ;  the  lowest  one  similar  to  the  pair  of  mouth-papillae 
just  below  it  ;  the  other  four  flat,  rather  stout,  with  a  curved  cutting  e  Ige. 
Mouth-shields  broad  heart-shape,  with  a  slight  peak  without ;  length  to 
breadth  1.2:  1.5:  just  along  their  outer  edge,  in  the  interbrachial  space, 
are  five  or  six  little  spines.  Side  mouth-shields  stout,  broader  without  than 
within,  running  along  the  inner  side  of  the  mouth-shield  and  meeting 
within  ;  they  enclose  the  lateral  corners  of  the  mouth-shield  by  a  little 
curved  projection.  Under  arm-plates  a  little  broader  than  long;  bounded 
without  by  a  clean  curve,  on  the  sides  by  slightly  re-entering  curves,  and 
within  by  two  curves  which  meet  in  a  little  peak  on  the  median  line.  Side 
arm-plates  stout,  with  a  prominent  ridge  for  the  spines,  meeting  above  and 
below,  even  at  the  first  Joint  ;  they  do  not,  however,  encroach  much  more 
as  they  get  further  out  on  the  arm  ;  and  it  is  only  near  the  tip  that  they 
occupy  as  much  as  half  of  its  upper  surface.  Upper  arm- plates  broad-tri- 
angular, the  outer  side  cleanly  curved,  and  the  lateral  sides  straight  and 
meeting  within  in  a  sharp  point;  length  to  breadth  (4th  plate)  .8  :  1.  Disk 
above  beset  with  rounded,  rough  grains,  mingled  with  delicate,  rounded 
spines,  .8  mm.  long,  and  shaped  like  those  of  the  arm  ;  through  this  cover- 
ing appear  the  delicate  di^k  scales  ;  and.  just  over  each  arm,  a  pair  of  short 
radial  shields,  of  a  blunt  pear-seed  shape  ;  these  are  smooth,  but  are  sepa- 
rated from  each  other,  and  from  the  arm  below,  by  bands  of  grains  and 
spines;  length  to  breadth  1.5  :  1.  In  the  interbrachial  spaces  below,  the 
spines  and  grains  are  less" numerous.  Genital  slits  large  and  occupying  the 
full  length  of  the  interbrachial  space;  the  edge  next  the  interbrachial 
space  is  bounded  by  the  five  disk  scales.  Arm  spines  seven,  all  rough, 
slender,  and  regularly  tapering ;  upper  ones  cylindrical,  lower  ones,  espe- 
cially the  lowest,  a  little  flattened  ;  lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate 
(6th  joint)  3.3,  2.5,  2.3,  2.2,  1.8,  1.5,  1  :  .8.  Tentacle  scales  large  and  reg- 
ularly oval,  length  .5  mm.  Color,  in  alcohol,  disk  blue  gray,  arm  yellow 
gray.     A  single  specimen,  off  Double-headed  Siiot  Keys  in  315  fathoms. 

Ophioohondrus,  gen.  nov.* 

Teeth  and  mouth-papilhe :  no  tooth-papillae.  Disk  granulated;  con- 
tracted, so  that  the  interbrachial  spaces  are  re-enteringly  curved,  and  are 
further  much  reduced  by  the  encroachment  of  the  stout  arms.  Side  mouth- 
ids  wide  and  thick  and  meeting  within.  Side  arm-plates  meeting  be- 
low, and  there  closely  soldered  so  as  to  form  a  continuous  belt.  ,  Two  gen- 
ital slits  in  each  interbrachial  space. 

*  60i?,  snake;  x°^po;,  granule. 


328  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Opbiochonclrus  couvolutus  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

ial  Maries.  —  Six  nearly  equal,  rounded,  tapering  arm-spines.  Ra- 
dial shields  twice  as  long  as  wide  and  considerably  separated.  Seven 
mouth-papillae.     One  tentacle  scale. 

1  >■  icription  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  7.5  mm.  Length  of  arm 
24  mm.  Mouth-papilla1  seven,  all  short,  stout,  and  flattened  ;  the  two  outer 
ones  on  each  side  squarish  ;  the  third  more  tapering,  like  a  blunt  tooth  ; 
the  innermost  one  lying  just  under  the  teeth,  and  similar  to  them,  except 
that  it  is  more  pointed.  Teeth  four,  flat,  squarish,  with  a  cutting  edge  a 
little  curved  at  its  corners.  Mouth-shields  broader  than  long,  rounded 
heart-shape  ;  length  to  breadth  .8  :  1.2.  Side  mouth-shields  large  and 
stout,  meeting  closely  within  :  wider  without,  where  they  are  soldered  to  the 
first  side  arm-plates.  Underarm-plates  wide  oval,  with  a  slightly  re-enter- 
ing curve  without,  strongly  separated  by  the  side  arm-plates;  length  to 
breadth  (Cth  joint)  .5  :  1.  Side  arm-plates  large,  thick  and  swollen,  not 
joined  above,  but  meeting  below,  even  at  the  base  of  the  arm,  where  they 
are  so  soldered  together  that  their  line  of  juncture  cannot  be  seen;  their 
surface  is  rough,  contrasting  with  that  of  upper  and  under  plates,  which  is 
smooth.  Upper  arm-plates  broad  fan-shape,  with  the  wide  curved  side 
outward  ;  the  two  lateral  sides  are  straight,  and  converge  to  the  inner  side, 
which  is  very  short ;  the  first  upper  plate  is  more  or  less  covered  by  the 
encroachment  of  the  disk;  length  to  breadth  (3d  plate)  1  :  1.4.  Three 
fourths  out  on  the  arm  the  upper  plate  is  long  wedge-shaped,  with  a  curved 
outer  side;  this  shape  is  determined  by  the  juncture  above  of  the  side 
arm-plates.  Interbrachial  spaces  below,  and  upper  surface  of  disk,  except 
radial  shields,  closely  granulated  with  minute,  rough,  nearly  equal  grains, 
about  150  to  a  square  mm.  Radial  shields  widely  separated ;  long  oval, 
wider  without  than  within  :  length  to  breadth,  2  :  1.  The  disk  rises  well 
above  the  arms,  on  which  it  encroaches  somewhat  by  growing  out  on  them 
in  a  sloping  direction,  as  is  often  seen  in  Ophiura.  Over  the  arm  there  is  a 
slight  irregular  notch  in  the  disk.  Arm-spines  short,  rounded,  tapering, 
moderately  stout,  nearly  equal  ;  second  one  from  top  a  little  the  longest  ; 
lowest  one  somewhat  the  shortest.  Second  joint,  two  spines;  third  joint, 
three;  sixth  joint,  six;  lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate,  .6,  .7,  .6, 
.6,  .6,  .5  :  .5.  At  the  very  tip  of  the  arm  the  under  spine  becomes  some- 
what hooked  on  its  side  and  end.  Tentacle  scale,  one,  small,  short,  and 
tooth-like. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  light  yellow. 

Variations.  —  A  small  specimen  brought  up  in  the  same  cast  is  supposed 
to  be  the  young  of  this  species.  Disk  2  mm.  Arms  1G  mm.  The  upper 
surface  of  the  disk  is  entirely  occupied  by  the  eight  radial  shields,  which 
are  lu-oad  wedge-shape,  and  have  the  outer  side  bevelled,  so  as  to  make  a 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  329 

notch  or  re-entering  angle  in  cadi  interbrachial  space.  In  the  centre  of 
the  disk,  and  on  the  dividing  lines  between  the  shields,  are  a  few  rough 
grains  or  rather  thorny  stumps,  of  which  each  shield  bears  one  or  more 
near  its  outer  end.  Interbrachial  space  below  wholly  occupied  by  the 
very  stout  and  swollen  side  mouth-shields,  and  the  mouth-shield  which 
closely  fills  the  angle  made  by  them.  Under  arm-plates  bounded  without 
by  a  curve,  on  the  sides  by  re-entering  curves,  and  within  by  an  angle. 
Side  mouth-shields  stout  and  meeting  above  and  below.  Upper  arm-plates 
fan-shape,  with  a  curve  without  and  a  sharp  angle  within.  Arm-spines 
(2d  joint  from  disk)  six  ;  the  three  upper  ones  shaped  as  in  the  adult ;  the 
three  lower  much  shorter  and  stouter,  and  suddenly  swollen  at  the  base ; 
on  the  joints  just  beyond,  five  spines,  which  are  short  and  stout.  The 
chewing  apparatus  and  other  characters  are  nearly  as  in  the  specimen  first 
described.  It  will  be  seen  that,  in  character  of  arm-spines,  armature  of 
disk,  and  proportionate  length  of  arm,  this  specimen  differs  much  from  its 
supposed  adult ;  but  I  shall  consider  it  as  the  young  form,  unless  interme- 
diate stages  shall  prove  it  a  distinct  species. 

Both  specimens  from  off  Chozera,  Cuba,  in  270  fathoms. 

This  animal  has  a  tendency  to  roll  the  tips  of  the  arms  upon  themselves, 
which,  with  the  contracted  disk  and  the  character  of  the  arm-plates,  give 
it  the  look  of  a  young  Astrophjton. 

Ophiactis  humilis  Lyman. 

Special  Marks.  —  Disk  covered  with  coarse  scales,  which  are  beset  with 
short  spines  and  short  thorny  club's.  Five  spines,  the  two  uppermost  much 
the  longest. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  4  mm.  Length  of  arm  11 
mm.  Seven  long,  rough,  stout,  spine-like  tooth-papilla?  .2  mm.  long,  stand- 
ing well  apart ;  the  innermost  one  is  broader  and  flattened,  and  very  like 
the  teeth,  below  which  it  stands.  Three  teeth,  which  are  flat,  longer  than 
broad,  with  their  cutting  edge  bluntly  pointed.  Mouth-shields  broad  heart- 
shape,  broader  than  long,  curved  without,  bounded  within  by  two  re-enter- 
ing curves;  length  to  breadth  .3  :  .5.  Side  mouth-shields  large,  extending 
outward  as  far  as  the  outer  corner  of  the  mouth-shields ;  and  loosely  joined 
within,  along  a  line  equal  nearly  to  the  length  of  the  mouth-shield  itself 
Underarm-plates  broader  without  than  within  ;  bounded  without  by  a  slight 
curve,  within  by  an  obtuse  angle,  and  on  the  sides  by  re-entering  curves  ; 
length  (3d  plate)  .3  mm.  Side  arm-plates  large,  meeting  below  along  a  line 
equal  to  more  than  half  the  length  of  the  lower  arm  plate ;  and  above, 
equal  to  the  whole  length  of  an  upper  arm-plate.  Upper  arm-plates  thick, 
but  small,  only  about  half  as  wide  as  the  arm  itself;  heart-shaped,  being 
curved  without  and  pointed  within.  Disk  covered  with  coarse,  somewhat 
42 


330  BULL''.  I IX    OF    THE 

irregular,  overlapping  scales,  of  which  there  are  five  or  six  in  a  line  from 
the  centre  to  the  margin  of  the  disk.  These  scales  are  beset  with  numerous 
bodies  of  two  sorts;  the  first  are  short,  stout,  rough  spines,  similar  in  size 
and  shape  to  the  mouth-papillae  ;  the  second  are  shorter  but  much  thicker 
and  have  a  thickened  club  form.  In  the  interbrachial  spaces  below  these 
spines  are  more  scattered.  Over  each  arm  the  outer  points  of  the  radial 
shields  can  just  be  seen  ;  the  rest  is  covered.  Five  rough,  rounded,  tapering, 
rather  stout  arm-spines;  lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate  (4th  joint) 
1.7,  1 .5,  .8,  .7,  .G  :  .3.  Towards  the  end  of  the  arm  there  still  are  five  spines, 
and  the  two  upper  ones  much  the  longest.  Tentacle  scales,  one  to  each 
pore  ;  on  the  first  two  pairs  of  pores  long,  flat,  and  spine-like,  resembling  the 
mouth-papilla;  ;  on  the  joints  beyond,  smaller  and  proportionately  shorter. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  light  bfown. 

Variations.  —  The  two  specimens  from  125  fathoms  had  no  spines  on  the 
disk,  and  only  a  few  of  the  club-shaped  grains. 

In  125  and  324  fathoms. 

This  species,  with  0.  clavigera  Ljung.,  stands  at  one  extremity  of  the  genus 
and  approaches  Ophiacanlha  just  as  0.  Krebsii,  at  the  other  extremity,  tends 
towards  Amphiura.  The  typical  Ophiactis  of  Liitken  is  distinguished  by 
great  radial  shields,  fiat  arms,  stumpy  arm-spines,  and  feebly  developed 
mouth-frames  ;  its  scaling  is  heavy,  and  the  arm-plates  are  large  and  con- 
spicuous; and,  as  such,  it  was  set  off  from  Amphiura.  Ophiacantha  is  dis- 
tinguished by  the  development  of  thorny  appendages  on  the  disk,  which 
cover  it  closely  ;  feeble  upper  and  lower  arm-plates  ;  long,  rough  arm- 
spines  ;  a  stout  chewing  apparatus,  which  is  somewhat  like  that  of  Ophiocoma, 
except  the  absence,  of  tooth-papilla;;  and  very  slender  linear  radial  shields 
covered  with  skin. 

O.  clavigera  is  remarkable  for  its  high  arched  disk. 

Ophiactis  plana  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Marls.  —  Disk  scales  smooth,  without  spines  or  grains.  Four 
mouth-papilla;  to  each  angle.  Side  mouth-shields  touching  the  under  arm- 
plate. 

I>  cription  of a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  3.5  mm.  Length  of  arm 
10  mm.     Mouth-papillae,*  two  to  each  angle,  situated  at  the  outer  corner 

*   I'   has  been  explained  (see  remarks  on  Amphiura)  that  this  papilla  is  really  the 
cle  scale  of  tl  pair  of  mouth  tentacles.     In  describing  Ophiactis  there  has 

been  some  confusion  in  this  re  pect:  thus,  Mr.  Ljungman  says  of  0.  carnea,  "  papillae 
binaj "  ifour  to  each  angle),  "alteram  sum  mo  sinu  orali  collocata";  but  this 
tentacle  scale  of  the  first  pair  of  mouth-tentacles;  and  at  that  rate  the 
-  usually  described  as  having  lour  papillce  to  each  mouth-angle  ought  to  he  reck- 
as  having  six,  because  these  tentacle  scales  of  the  first  pair  arc  commonly  over- 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  331 

of  the  slit ;  large,  round,  scale-like.  Teetli  four,  flat,  a  little  swelled,  with  a 
convex  cutting  edge,  which  in  the  lowest  one  (and  to  a  less  degree  in  those 
above)  has  a  little  lobe  at  its  inner  point.  Mouth-shields  small,  swelled, 
broad  heart-shape  ;  length  to  breadth  .2  :  .3.  Side  mouth-shields  small  and 
narrow,  not  meeting  within  ;  soldered  without  to  the  inner  lateral  side  of 
the  second  under  arm-plate.  Under  arm-plates  nearly  pentagonal,  with 
the  angle  directed  inward,  and  truncated,  making  a  very  short  sixth  side  ; 
outer  side  curved ;  laterals  re-enteringly  curved  ;  inner  laterals  straight ; 
length  to  breadth  (5th  plate)  .3  :  .3.  Side  arm-plates  stout,  meeting  above 
and  nearly  below.  Upper  arm-plates  as  wide  as  the  arm,  broader  than  long, 
bounded  without  by  a  clean  curve,  within  by  a  very  obtuse  angle  ;  length  to 
breadth  (3d  plate)  .3  :  .4.  Disk  covered  above  and  below  with  neatly  im- 
bricated scales,  which  are  rather  larger  near  the  centre,  where  there  are 
about  30  to  a  square  mm.  Radial  shields  slender  pear-seed  shape  ;  a  little 
bent  so  ?.s  to  present  a  concave  side  to  each  other  ;  separated  for  nearly  or 
quite  their  length  by  a  wedge  of  two  or  more  elongated  scales  ;  length 
to  breadth  .8  :  .4.  No  grains  or  spines  on  the  disk  scales,  which  are 
quite  smooth.  Arm-spines  smooth,  moderately  stout,  rounded,  regularly 
tapering  to  a  blunt  point ;  nearly  equal  ;  lengths  to  that  of  the  under 
arm-plate  (5th  joint)  .5,  .5,  .5  :  .3.  One  large,  round  tentacle  scale,  which 
resembles  the  mouth-papilla.     Color,  in  alcohol,  pale  brown. 

This  species  is  distinguished  from  others  by  its  lobed  teetli  and  the  entirely 
naked  disk  scales.  It  belongs  to  the  group  that  have  the  side  mouth-shields 
joining  the  under  arm-plate.  Off  Carysfort  Reef,  117  fathoms;  off  Key 
West,  140  fathoms;  off  Boca  Grande,  125  fathoms;  off  Tortugas,  13  fathoms. 

Opliiactis  loricata  Lyjian,  sp.  now 

Special  Marks. —  Side  mouth-shields  with  their  outer  side  touching  the 
side  arm-plate,  and  the  first  and  second  under  arm-plates.  Radial  shields 
small.     Upper  and  lower  arm-plates  long.      Six  arms. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  2  mm.  Length  of  arm 
7  mm.  Mouth-papillae  usually  four  to  each  mouth-angle,  two  on  each  side 
mouth- shield,  of  which  the  inner  is  very  small  and  spine-like,  but  situated 
at  the  same  level.  Sometimes  this  second  minute  one  is  wanting,  some- 
times it  is  nearly  as  large  as  the  outer.  These  variations  may  be  looked 
for,  because  these  creatures  are  peculiarly  liable  to  mutilation,  so  that,  of 
five  specimens  dredged,  only  one  was  perfect  and  symmetrical.  Teeth, 
four;  the  upper  one  more  sharp  and  narrow;  the  lowest  sometimes  divided 
into  two  papilla?.  In  the  teeth,  again,  there  seems  some  variation.  Mouth- 
shields  small,  broad  oval,  rather  swollen.  Side  mouth-shields  stout,  long 
triangular,  nearly  meeting  within  ;  the  inner  corner  of  the  outer  side  (its  in 
just  where  the  first  and  second   under  arm-plates   touch  each  other;   the 


332  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

outer  side  itself  rests  against  the  first  side  arm-plate.  Under  arm-plates 
longer  than  broad  ;  touching  each  other  ;  bounded  within  by  a  truncated 
angle,  without  by  a  curve,  and  on  the  sides  by  re-entering  curves.  Side  arm- 
plates  not  meeting  either  above  or  below.  Upper  arm-plates  much  broader 
without  than  within  ;  as  long  as,  or  longer  than,  broad ;  bounded  without 
by  a  curve,  on  the  sides  by  straight  converging  lines.  Disk  finely  scaled 
below;  above  covered  with  irregular,  rather  coarse  and  swollen  scales, 
some  of  which  bear  little,  stout  spines.  Radial  shields  broad  wedge-shape, 
small,  their  length  not  more  than  one  fifth  the  diameter  of  the  disk ;  touch- 
ing each  other  only  at  their  outer  end  ;  strongly  diverging  and  separated 
by  a  wedge  of  two  scales,  placed  end  to  end.  Near  base  of  arm,  four  short, 
stout,  rough,  nearly  equal  arm-spines ;  further  out,  three  ;  one  stout  tentacle 
scale.  Color,  in  alcohol,  brown.  In  the  covering  of  the  disk,  and  espe- 
cially the  size  and  position  of  the  radial  shields,  this  species  resembles  the 
figures  of  O.  Ballii  and  0.  abyssicola ;  *  but  the  upper  and  lower  arm-plates 
are  quite  different,  and  0.  Ballii  has  five  arm-spines ;  and  the  upper  arm- 
spine  of  0.  abyssicola  is  much  the  longest.  0.  virens  has  the  side  mouth- 
shields  joined  in  a  continuous  ring.f  There  is  a  single  specimen  of  a  dif- 
ferent species,  dredged  in  45  fathoms,  which  comes  perhaps  nearer  to  one 
of  the  above  European  species ;  but  I  propose  to  disregard  it  until  I  can 
have  originals  for  careful  comparison.^ 
In  110  fathoms. 

Amphiura  semiermis  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Murks.  —  No  scales  on  disk  underneath.  Six  mouth-papillae  to 
each  mouth-angle,  of  which  two  are  above  the  others,  in  the  mouth-slits. 
Side  mouth-shields  broail  triangular  and  meeting  within. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  4  mm.  The  arms  were 
broken,  but  their  length  seemed  to  have  been  about  30  mm.  Mouth- 
papillaj  six  to  each  angle  of  mouth  ;  a  pair  at  the  point  of  the  angle, 
which  are  stout  and  rounded  and  run  upwards  to  the  teeth  ;  one  spini- 
form  on ;  the  inner  edge  of  the  side  mouth-shield  ;  and  one  intermediate 
on  each  side,  also  spiniform,  and  situated  high  up  in  the  mouth-slit. 
Teeth  three,  flat,  strong,  squarish,  with  a  slightly  curved  cutting  edge. 
Mouth-shields  rounded  oval,  with  a  slight  point  within  ;  length  to  breadth 
.5  :  .4.  Side  mouth-shields  broad  triangular,  large,  meeting  within  ;  they 
extend  nearly  to  the  median  line  of  the  arm  and  overlap  the  first,  rudi- 

•  S:irs,  Ovcrsigt  af  Norses  Echinodermer,  Tab.  II. 

t  Ljungman,  Ophiuroidea  Viventia,  p.  323. 

|  In  Catalogue  No.  1,  of  Museum  of  Comp.  Zoology,  I  have  placed  0.  abyssicola 
under  Ophiocnida,  because  I  mistook  the  drawing  given  by  Sars.  I  have  not  the  same 
excuse  for  my  blunder  in  putting  0.  Ballii  there,  for  I  had  seen  a  specimen  at  Berlin. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  333 

mentary  under  arm-plate ;  under  arm-plates  nearly  pentangular,  but 
there  is  a  very  short  inner  side,  because  the  inner  laterals  do  not  meet  on 
the  median  line  ;  they  are  bounded  without  by  a  slight  curve  ;  on  the 
sides  by  curves  a  little  re-entering;  the  inner  laterals  are  also  somewhat 
re-enteringly  curved  :  length  to  breadth  (5th  plate)  .5  :  .4.  Side  arm- 
plates  quite  large,  and  encroaching  both  above  and  below  ;  nearly  meeting 
above.  Upper  arm-plates  rounded,  with  a  peak  within  ;  they  do  not  cover 
the  whole  upper  surface,  but  on  each  side  appear  the  side  arm-plates ; 
length  to  breadth  (3d  plate  from  disc)  .5  :  .5.  Disk  finely  scaled  above, 
naked  below ;  scales  rather  larger  towards  middle  of  disk ;  near  its  edge 
there  are  about  140  to  a  square  mm.,  all  thin,  and  overlapping.  Radial 
shields  narrow,  broader  without  than  within  ;  their  sides  overlapped  by 
the  disk  scales ;  nearly,  or  quite,  touching  without;  diverging  a  little 
within ;  separated  near  their  outer  ends  by  a  single  long  scale,  and,  further 
inward,  by  a  bunch  of  the  imbricated  disk  scales,  length  to  breadth  1  :  .3 ; 
they  vary  somewhat,  accordingly  as  they  are  more  or  less  encroached  on 
by  the  disk  scales.  Just  outside  and  below  each  of  them  is  a  small  radial 
scale.  Arm-spines,  near  base  of  arm,  five ;  further  out,  four ;  stout, 
rounded,  tapering  to  a  point,  swelled  at  the  base ;  the  two  upper  ones 
slightly  longer  and  more  slender  ;  lengths  to  that  of  under  arm-plate  (5th 
joint)  .5,  .5,  .4,  .4,  .4  :  .5.  Tentacle  scales  two,  small,  broader  than  long, 
curved ;  placed  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  one  on  the  lateral  side  o*f 
the  under  arm-plate,  the  other  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  side  arm-plate. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  disk  greenish  gray,  arms  yellowish. 

A  single  specimen,  from  377  fathoms,  south  of  Rebecca  Channel. 

The  specimen  was  somewhat  injured,  and  therefore  I  wait  better  exam- 
ples before  separating  the  species  from  Amphiura,  from  which  it  differs  by 
its  naked  disk  underneath,  just  as  does  Hemipholis.  Otherwise,  it  be- 
longs to  the  Amphiura  group,  in  which  arc  found  the  well-known  European 
A.  Chiajii  and  the  Florida  A.  Stimpsonii.  This  group  is  commonly  de- 
scribed as  having  one  mouth-papilla  at  the  outer  corner  of  the  mouth-slit, 
and  another  high  up  in  the  mouth-slit  itself.  As  the  term  mouth-papilla  is 
understood,  this  description  is  not  true.  The  papilla  at  the  outer  corner 
of  the  mouth-slit  is  the  tentacle  scale  of  the  second  pair  of  mouth-tentacles ; 
that  within  the  mouth-slit  is  the  tentacle  scale  of  the  first  pair  of  mouth- 
tentacles.  The  scale  of  the  second  pair  of  tentacles  may  easily  be  found  in 
such  genera  as  Ophiocoma,  but  naturalists  do  not  there  speak  of  it,  because 
it  is  hidden  by  the  continuous  row  of  true  mouth-papilla?.  The  group, 
therefore,  should  not  be  spoken  of  as  having  six  mouth-papillae,  but  as 
having  two  mouth-papilhe  at  the  apex  of  the  angle,  and  one  large  scale  to 
each  of  the  mouth-tentacles.  Its  species  are,  moreover,  characterized  by 
the  number  of  the  arm-spines,  which  are  rarely  less  than  five  and  occa- 


334  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

sionally  as  many  as  eight,  while  the  other  group  has  three  or  four.  "When 
we  can  be  sure  of  the  full  value  of  the  characters  these  two  divisions  will 
doubtless  appear  as  geiierically  distinct. 

Amphiura  grandisquama  Lyman,  pp.  nov. 

Special  Marks.  —  Five  arm-spines,  the  lowest  much  the  longest,  and  a 
little  bent.  One  rounded  tentacle  scale,  larger  than  is  usual  in  the  genus. 
Six  mouth-papillae  to  each  mouth-angle,  of  which  two  are  above  the  others 
in  the  mouth-slits. 

Description  <>f  u  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  Gram.  The  arms,  which 
were  broken,  had  been  not  far  from  28  mm.  long.  Of  the  six  mouth- 
papilla?,  to  each  mouth-angle,  the  innermost  are  stout  and  rounded,  and 
stand  side  by  side  at  the  apex  of  the  angle,  running  upwards  to  the  teeth  ; 
the  outer  ones  are  very  stout  and  taper  to  a  blunt  point,  and  one  stands 
on  the  inner  edge  of  each  side  mouth-shield  ;  the  intermediate  ones  are 
smaller  and  sharp  spiniform,  and  are  high  up  in  the  mouth-slit.  Teeth 
flat,  rather  stout,  with  a  cutting  edge,  a  little  curved.  Mouth-shields 
broad,  rounded  diamond  shape,  more  obtuse  without  than  within  ;  length 
to  breadth  .5  :  .1.  Side  mouth-shields  long  triangular,  small,  not  meet- 
ing within.  Under  arm-plates  broader  without  than  within  ;  bounded 
without  by  a  curve  ;  on  the  sides  by  re-entering  curves,  which  incline 
toward  the  median  line  ;  the  inner  laterals  arc  short  and  nearly  meet  on 
the  median  line,  so  that  the  inner  side  is  very  small  ;  length  to  breadth 
(6th  plate)  .5  :  .5.  Side  arm-plates  encroaching  somewhat  both  above  and 
below.  Upper  arm-plates  extending  quite  across  the  arm,  broader  than 
Long;  they  have  a  clean  curve  without,  and  a  broken  curve  within,  and 
these  meet, on  either  side,  in  an  obtuse  point;  length  to  breadth  (3d  plate 
from  disk)  .5  :  .6.  Disk  covered  with  fine,  overlapping  scales,  above  and 
below,  which  are  coarsest  near  the  centre  of  the  disk,  anil  finest  under- 
neath ;  near  the  edge,  above,  there  are  about  100  to  a  square  mm.  Radial 
shields  narrow;  wider  within  than  without,  their  side  turned  toward  the 
other  nearly  straight ;  the  opposite  side  curved;  they  are  separated  by  a 
narrow  wedge;  of  two  or  three  long  scales;  length  to  breadth  1  :  .1  :  their 
size  varies  with  the  encroachment  of  the  disk  scales.  Arm-spines  five; 
further  out  on  arm,  four  ;  rounded,  tapering  regularly,  little  or  not  at  all 
swelled  at  the  base;  lowest  one  longest,  and  generally  a  little  bent; 
lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate  (7th  joint)  .0,  .7,  .7,  .7,  1  :  .5. 
Tentacle  scale  large,  and  round  oval,  resembling  that  in  Ophionereis ; 
length  to  that  of  the  under  arm-plate  .2  :  ■■•■  Color, in  alcohol,  pale  brown, 
with  alight  spot  at  the  outer  end  of  each  radial  shield. 
(  Ml  Tennessee  Reef,  in  1 7-1  fathoms. 
The  species  belongs  to  the  same  group  as  its  neighbor,  A.  Stimpsonii,  but 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  335 

is  readily  distinguished  by  its  larger  tentacle  scales,  and  longer,  more 
tapering  arm-spines.  A.  Sundi  ualli  is  also  similar,  but  has  the,  side  niouth- 
sliields  meeting  within,  and  very  broad,  and  the  arm-spines  more  stumpy. 
I.  Slimpsonii,  hitherto  only  known  by  Liitken's  description  (Addit.  ad  Hist. 
Ophiur.,  Part  II,  p.  116)  has  the  proportions  of  the  disk  and  arms  much 
as  in  A.  grand isquama.  The  mouth-shields  are  longer  than  broad;  the 
side  mouth-shields  small  and  narrow,  meeting  within,  closely  soldered  to 
the  surrounding  parts,  and,  at  their  outer  end,  to  a  very  small  rudimentary 
under  arm-plate  ;  at  base  of  arm,  one  very  small  tentacle  scale  ;  further 
out,  none  at  all ;  radial  shields  closely  joined  at  their  outer  ends ;  within, 
separated  by  a  couple  of  long  scales:  five  short,  stumpy  arm-spines. 

Remarks  on  the  Croups  in  the  Genus  Am.ph.iura.  —  Any  one  who  is  really 
familiar  with  the  range  of  species  in  this  genus  will,  on  the  one  hand, 
recognize  striking  differences,  while,  on  the  other,  he  will  find  a  real  diffi- 
culty in  dividing  the  groups  in  away  to  bear  criticism.  Liitken  very  prop- 
erly set  off  the  genus  Ophiactis :  and  I  have  since  separated  the  Amphiu- 
rcr  with  spiny  disks  under  the  name  Ophiocnida,  and  those  with  a  fence 
of  scales  round  the  discs  as  Ophiophragmus.  Professor  Agassiz  had  already 
recognized  the  generic  position  of  the  species  with  a  naked  disk  below, 
under  the  name  of  Hemipholis.  Mr.  Ljungman  *  further  distinguishes  a 
genus  Amphipholis,  of  which  the  type  is  -1.  Januarii,  which  seems  to  belong 
with  such  species  as  A.  elegans  (Amphiura  squamala  Ltk.)  and  A.  tenera. 
It  is  by  no  means  clear  on  what  characters  Mr.  Ljungman  grounds  this  new 
genus;  because,  after  giving  a  number  of  characters  common  to  nearly  the 
whole  of  the  old  genus,  he  concludes  with  this  distinction  :  "  A  generibus 
Hemipholide  et  Amphiura  numero  et  dispositione  papillarum  oralium  dif- 
fert."  But  the  species  which  he  includes  under  AmpJiipholis  do  not  at  all 
agree  among  themselves  in  the  number  or  disposition  of  their  mouth-pa- 
pilla?;  e.g.  A.  tenera,  A.  occidentalis,  and  A.  atra.  There  certainly  is  a 
group  which  includes  Amphiura  elegans  (squamata),  A.  tenera,  A.  riolacea, 
and  -1.  pvgetana,  whereof  the  members  are  not  only  closely  allied  gener- 
ically,  but  are  even  difficult  to  distinguish  specifically,  though  coming  from 
faunae  the  most  widely  separated.  Thus,  Mr.  Ljungman  gives  A.  elegans 
as  coming  from  the  shores  of  Northwestern  Europe,  and  also  the  Cape  of 
Good  Hope,  (!).  And  since  this  species  has  been  shown  to  vary  so  consid- 
erably in  its  arm-spines,  it  seems  difficult  to  separate  it  any  longer  from 
A.  tenera  of  the  West  Indies;  and,  further,  from  A.  riolacea,  A.  microdis- 
cus,  and  .1.  Punlarenai  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  America.  Should  all,  or  a 
part,  of  these  species  prove  identical,  -we  must  look  upon  this  animal  as  the 
common  thread  that  binds  together  distant  faunas,  just  as  characteristic 

*  Ljungman,  Ofversigt  af  Kongl.  Yet.  Akad.  Forhand.,  1S6G,  p.  165. 


33G  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

fossils  determine  stratified  rocks  in  different  parts  of  the  world.  This  idea 
of  community  of  existence  gets  some  strength  from  the  varying  depths  at 
which  A.  lenera  is  found  (i  to  128  fathoms),  while  its  northern  represent- 
ative, A.  squamata  or  elegans,  is  found  from  the  Mediterranean,  on  the 
east,  to  Cape  Cod,  on  the  west ;  and  from  low  water  to  three  hundred 
fathoms*  (var.  tenuispina).  The  new  genus  Amphilepis  Ljung.f  seems 
better  grounded.  It  contains  the  new  species  A.  norvegica,  and  is  charac- 
terized by  only  four  mouth-papillae  to  each  angle  and  by  absence  of  ten- 
tacle scales.  However  this  may  be,  there  are  groups  in  Amphiura  quite  as 
clearly  marked  generically  as  is  Amphilepis,  and  especially  that  already  re- 
ferred to  as  including  A.  grandisquama,  which  is  characterized  by  having 
only  two  mouth-papilla:  placed  just  under  the  teeth,  a  deficiency  made  up 
by  the  development  of  the  tentacle  scales  of  the  two  pairs  of  mouth-ten- 
tacles;  furthermore,  the  many-spined  Amphiurce  (4  to  8)  are  all  found  in 
this  group.  Its  species,  eighteen  in  all,  are  embraced  in  the  table  on  pp. 
838  and  339. 

I  by  no  means  wish  to  suggest,  because  so  many  minor  differences  are 
thus  indicated,  that  an  equal  number  of  generic  differences  should  be  recog- 
nized ;  on  the  contrary,  no  naturalist  has  a  right  to  take  such  a  step,  unless 
he  has  had  most  of  the  species  under  his  own  eye  for  critical  comparison. 

Next  to  A.  planhpina  stands  the  genus  Hcmipholis,  which  has  two 
species,  —  H.    cordifera    Lym.   and   //.   affinis    Ljn.J      Ophiocnida    and 

*  Sars,  Over  det  dyriske  Livs  Udbredning  i  Havets  dybder,  1868. 

t  Ljungman,  Ophiuroidea  Viventia,  p.  322. 

J  Its  synonyme  is  //.  gracilis,  Vll.  Professor  Verrill  (Proceed.  Boston  Soc.  Nat. 
Hist.  XII,  391)  thinks  that  he  .has  priority  in  the  name,  because,  in  a  separate  publica- 
tion of  Ljungman's  Ophiuroidea  Viventia,  there  is  a  note  by  Loven  dated  May  18,  1867. 
But  this  note  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  original  publication  which  is  in  the  Ofversigt 
af  Kongl.  Vetenskaps-Akademiens  Forhandlingar,  1866,  No.  9.  Ljungman's  paper  was 
read  November  14,  1866.  Venill's  was  read  January,  1867,  and  published  in  Trans. 
Connecticut  Academy,  March,  1867.  This  whole  matter  of  priority  in  descriptions  is 
of  no  sort  of  interest  to  science,  except  as  a  matter  of  registration.  Nor  is  it  profitable 
to  enter  on  the  question  of  what  constitutes  publication.  But  we  may  say,  that  the  par- 
tial distribution  of  loose  sheets  of  an  incomplete  paper,  though  a  useful  and  praisewor- 
thy custom,  constitutes  no  greater  claim  for  priority  than  the  reading  of  a  paper  before 
an  ancient  and  distinguished  Academy,  and  th<>  speedy  publication  of  that  paper  in  its 
complete  and  connected  form.  There  are  now  many  zoologists  who  seem  to  think  that 
species  must  be  continually  "  reported,"  just  like  stocks  at  the  brokers'  board.  Agas- 
siz  showed,  twenty-throe  years  ago,  in  his  preface  to  the  Nomenclator  Zoologicus,  that  the 
"  authorities"  placed  after  names  were  merely  references  of  registration,  and  not  marks 
of  praise  to  the  authors.  Thus  when  we  read  Ophioderma  longicauda  Mull,  and  Trosch., 
it  means  not,  "  The  illustrious  zoologists  Johannes  Miiller  and  F.  II.  Troschel  had  the 
honor  to  give  the  above  (wrong!)  name  to  this  species  " ;  but,  "  If  you  look  in  the  System 
der  Asteriden,  you  will  find  what  Miiller  and  Troschel  thought  or  knew  of  this  species." 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  337 

Ophiophragmus  are  distinguished,  not  by  the  chewing  apparatus,  but  by 
the  covering  of  the  disk.  The  former  has  four  species,  —  0.  hispida  Lym., 
0  brachiala  Lym.,  0.  scabriuscula  Lym.,  0.  olivacea  Lym.*  The  latter  has 
five  species,  —  0.  septus  Lym.,  0.  Wurdemani  Lym.,  0.  marginatus  Lym., 
O.  antarcticus  Ljn.,  O.  gibbosus  Ljn. 

Finally,  to  complete  that  part  of  Miiller  and  Troschel's  genus  Ophiolepis, 
which  centres  in  Amphiura,  we  must  mention  Ophiosligma  and  Ophiactis. 
The  latter  approaches  Amphiura  in  one  direction  (G>.  Krebsii),  Ophiopholis 
in  another  (0.  Kroyeri),  and  Ophiacantha  in  a  third  (0.  clavigera).  See 
description  of  Ophiactis  humilis. 

Amphiura  pulchella  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Marks.  —  Six  mouth-papillfe  to  each  angle,  the  inner  pair  thick 
and  running  upward  to  the  teeth.  Radial  shields  very  narrow,  and  closely 
joined  for  nearly  their  whole  length. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disc  3.2  mm.  The  arm  was 
broken  off  at  21  mm.,  but  had  apparently  been  about  28  mm.  long. 
Mouth-papillae  three  on  each  side,  all  on  the  mouth-frames  ;  the  two 
outer  ones  small,  rounded,  and  scale-like  ;  the  innermost  one  thickened 
and  running  upwards  to  the  teeth.  Mouth-shields  longer  than  broad,  rather 
narrower  within  than  without.  Side  mouth-shields  very  narrow  within, 
where  they  meet ;  much  broader  without,  where  they  touch  the  minute 
first  under  arm-plate  with  their  corner.  Under  arm-plates  separated  ;  as 
broad  as  long,  pentagonal  with  the  angle  inward  ;  lateral  sides  re-enter- 
ingly  curved  ;  outer  side  nearly  straight  on  the  first  three  or  four  plates ; 
beyond  that,  with  a  decided  notch  in  the  outer  side.  Side  arm-plates 
meeting  below  and  (after  the  second  joint)  above  also;  the  separation,  how- 
ever, of  the  upper  and  under  plates  is  narrow  ;  length  of  third  plate 
.2  mm.  Upper  arm-plates  broader  than  long,  of  an  oval  form,  with  the 
inner  curve  greater  than  the  outer.  Beyond  the  second  joint  they  are 
slightly  separated.  Disk  closely  covered  with  minute  imbricated  scales, 
of  which  there  are  about  100  to  a  square  mm.,  where  they  are  smallest,  on 
the  upper  surface.  In  the  centre  is  a  distinct  circle  of  five  round  primary 
plates,  with  a  sixth  in  the  middle.  Radial  shields  narrow,  and  sunk  in  the 
disk,  joined  for  their  entire  length  closely,  except  just  at  their  inner 
extremities;  length  to  breadth  .9  :  .2.  Arm-spines  three;  short,  smooth, 
rounded,  tapering,  nearly  equal ;  lengths  to  that  of  under  arm-plate  .3,  .3, 
.3  :  .2.     One  small,  nearly  circular  tentacle  scale. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  disk  greenish  gray,  arms  lighter. 

In  39  fathoms. 

*  To  these  should  apparently  be  added  Ophiophragmus  Loveni  Ljn.  and  0.  echinatus 
Ljn.     Why  he  placed  them  thus,  and  still  admitted  the  genus  Ophiocnida,  is  not  clear. 


338 


BULLETIN   OF   THE 


d 
1-1 

o 

S3 
0 

•3 

a 

V 

-z 
- 

as 

13 

_2 

en 
o 

03 
Oh 

03 

cj 

d 

3 
5 

1) 

U 

0J 

a, 

o 

c3 

c3 
1-1 

03 
03 

6 

— 

- 

O 

PS 

W 

C3 

y< 

c 

8 
"S 

o> 

tj] 

3 
W 

'r? 

o 

E 

d 
B 

E 
o 
u 

S 

d 

u 

03 
« 

03 

O 

3 

y, 

V 

O 

'3 

to 

CJ 

03 

N 

o 

B 

d 

— 

-- 

co 
B 

d 

X 

"3. 
S 

o 

a 

3 

5 
S 

Is 

CO 

B 

eg 
03 

£ 

03 

CO 

oi 

to 

03 

d 

E 

c 

o 
oT 

o 

03 

CO 

03 
o 

s 

— 

as 

1 

<J 

<J 

< 

< 

<j 

> 

<< 

<* 

<^ 

<* 

-^ 

«> 

<< 

<J 

«^ 

<; 

<< 

5    c 

3     _^ 


x    2    o  J5 


"S.  s 


Ph     (0 

s 


B     g" 

'S<  a. 


—    5    P  -5    P 


■&  s 


S  I  2  I  •& 


=u  a 


A      B      - 


x   H 


a 

,H 

- 

? 

i 
p 

3 

i  - 

•- 

o    s 

>,    d 


I]  >  i '  1 : 1  '1   (i'\   | 


£      t-, 


■np:.is  Dpnjll  >J  .mi,  )     \>[i:.n  .)[.n:jU0}  O^J 


■soukIs-uub  s-f  :  I1  ■»l";.'\,i|i  /CiSuoxjs 
S  ;  ',■;::  i  qjriOUI  JO  S.licd  <>\\j  •  'ijl  jo  SDJBOS  0]  .rju.n  .H[)  '.  i[J00J 
ot[)  .i  pun  isnf  a;|]iih:iI-i[)iioui  jo  an:<I  v  ajuo  t^iav  se.miqdaiy 


.52  d. 

Pi 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


339 


r-T      =,     Cj 


a 

u 

o 

- 

W 

C 

t. 

Ph 

i* 

k! 

Sz; 

b: 

>, 

c 

o 

F-l 

A 

K 

2 

m 

rt 

CG 

CI 

:l 

c. 

^    «    _     ii    2     t>       r^ 


-   hV 


J  - 

<5  .a 

£  1 

Hi  g 

C3  >^    r" 


I  i     1  -s 

j  -s  ...  «-a  s  a 


■3    B    ^i 
o     -       - 


»  JZ5  *  < 


<<   r£ 


tJ  3^ 


«  i-l 


c    —    o   .!£    <u 


•-r     o     c     50     f 


o     ~   ~    ^ 


.<  <<  <j  «j  <<  <j  <<  <j  «i 


^      ££  P5 


CJ       S- 
O       0 


<<<<<<<*$< 


<=     p.  ■" 


■3  ^ 


5    e 


^  c  s  °  " 


_ r 

s> 

C5 

r 

CO 

u 

0 

O 

£ 

O 

E 

93 

0 
03 

J3 

0 

- 

„r" 

— 

c 

> 

0 

~ 

- 

a 

o9 

aj 

c 

i 

H 

R 

.0 

«     g-~ 


a  E 

f£  « 

2     -3 


0   Is 
H 


a     K 

o  pa 

?,     (3 


x  ?     o 


o     .-  «    — 


6        -5 


Ci  _ 


«    V„  ~ 


&    to  B    p.  .-   ,y    -        •- 


,-a 


o    o    ,. 


J  ^1 

^     o     ~  fi 

«    o     .  g 

Fj  ""  bt 

£    K    §  .2 

I  $  g§ 

*  §  <B 

0     B     c 


bo 


"S  "5    a    <r  § 


>>        & 


rs     oo  — 1    s 


£  .2 


3    E 

^    o 


E    « 

O  F= 

H  f3 


E-l- 
E    «  fZ;^ 


X  CO 


340  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

Despite  the  number  of  Amphiurce  described  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
and  waters  of  Brazil,  the  species  seem  well  defined  and  distinct ;  and 
there  is  promise  of  many  more.  This  genus  is  remarkable  fort  he  well- 
defined  specific  differences  it  presents  in  the  character  and  position  of  its 
side  mouth-shields,  arm-plates,  mouth-papilhe,  radial  shields,  &c.  For 
example,  no  other  Amphiura  presents  the  following  combination  found  in 
A.  pulchella :  1.  Three  mouth-papilla?  on  a  side,  the  innermost  thick- 
ened. 2.  Slender  radial  shields,  closely  joined.  3.  Upper  and  lower  arm- 
plates  separated.     4.  Three  arm-spines.     5.  One  tentacle  scale. 

Ophiocnida  olivacea  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Spcciul  Marks.  —  Radical  shields  deeply  sunk  in  the  disk,  long  and 
narrow.  Disk  puffy,  with  a  narrow  notch  over  each  arm.  At  the  base  of 
the  arm  two  tentacle  scales,  of  which  one  is  small  and  stands  on  the  side 
arm-plate,  the  other  long  spiniform  and  borne  on  the  lateral  side  of  the 
under  arm-plate. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  12  mm.  Length  of  arm 
about  85  mm.  Mouth-papilla?,  twelve  to  each  angle,  arranged  in  three 
sets :  first,  two  small,  flat,  tooth-like  papillae,  one  at  each  outer  corner  of 
the  mouth-slit,  standing  well  above  the  outer  end  of  the  side  mouth-shield 
(these,  of  course,  are  the  tentacle  scales  of  the  mouth-tentacles)  ;  secondly, 
four  sharp,  stout,  rounded,  tapering  papilla?  on  each  side,  standing  in  a  row, 
which  runs  from  the  middle  point  of  the  side  mouth-shield,  upwards  and 
inwards,  along  the  mouth-frames  to  a  level  with  the  second  tooth  ;  of  these 
the  outer  one  is  largest,  .7  mm.  long;  thirdly,  two  stout,  conical  papilla? 
standing  on  the  point  of  the  mouth-frames,  and  directed  inward,  but  inclined 
from  each  other,  so  that  they  have  the  appearance  of  a  blunt  fork.  Teeth 
six,  of  which  the  lowest  is  pointed  somewhat  like  the  mouth-papilla?  next 
to  it ;  the  other  five  are  flat,  squarish,  with  a  curved  cutting  edge.  Mouth- 
shields  small,  of  a  broad,  rounded  heart-shape  ;  length  to  breadth  1.4  :  .7. 
Side  mouth-shields  narrow  and  small,  pointed  within  (where  they  nearly 
meet),  broader  without,  where  they  run  to  the  lateral  corner  of  the  mouth- 
shield.  Under  arm-plates  longer  than  broad,  bounded  within  by  a  nearly 
straight  line,  on  the  sides  by  re-entering  curves,  and  without  by  two  little  re- 
entering curves,  which  join  in  a  small  peak  on  the  median  line  ;  length  to 
breadth  (10th  joint)  .8  :  .G.  Inside  the  disk  these  plates  are  especially  en- 
croached on  by  the  tentacles,  which  are  very  large,  and  occupy  much  of  the 
under  surface  of  the  arm.  Side  arm-plates  moderately  prominent,  and  con- 
spicuous from  below  by  reason  of  the  narrow  under  arm-plates  ;  they  do  not, 
however,  meet,  except  at  the  very  tip  of  the  arm,  where  they  come  together 
above.  Upper  arm-plates  broader  than  long,  a  little  broader  without  than 
within  ;  all  their  sides  nearly  straight;  the  outer  one  lightly  curved  ;  length 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  341 

to  breadth  (3d  joint  from  disk)  .8  :  1.1.  Towards  the  tip  of  the  arm  they 
are  triangular,  with  the  outer  side  curved,  and  the  apex  directed  inward. 
Disk  covered  with  fine  scales  and  radial  shields  ;  the  former  nearly  hidden 
by  the  skin,  except  on  the  lower  surface.  Radial  shields  very  narrow,  and 
joined  for  their  whole  length  ;  pointed  within,  swollen  at  their  outer  ends  ; 
length  to  breadth  2  :  .5.  They  are  sunk  below  the  puffy  surface  of  the  disk, 
and  are  placed  at  the  inner  point  of  a  notch  in  the  disk,  which  exists  over 
each  arm  ;  this  inlacing  of  the  soft  disk  is  as  deep  as  one  or  two  arm-plates, 
portions  of  which  are  thus  exposed,  together  with  their  spines,  which  are  bent 
outward  by  the  overlying  disc  margin.  The  sides  of  the  notch  are  formed 
of  an  upward  prolongation  of  the  genital  plate.  The  entire  disk  is  pretty 
evenly  beset  with  very  slender,  sharp  spines  about. G  mm.  long.  Genital 
slits  with  a  distinct  genital  plate,  whose  edge  is  visible  for  its  whole  length, 
and  which  turns  over  and  widens  at  each  end,  especially  at  the  outer,  where 
it  runs  upwards  above  the  arm.  Arm-spines,  outside  the  disk  and  near  base 
of  arm,  nine,  whereof  the  two  lowest  are  stout,  rounded,  pointed,  and 
longer  than  the  others  ;  the  next  four  flattened,  tapering,  and  most  slender  ; 
the  three  highest  also  flattened  and  tapering,  but  rather  stouter  ;  lengths  to 
that  of  under  arm-plate  (10th  joint)  1.1, 1.1,  .9,  .7,  .7,  .7,  .7,  .7,  .7  :  .8.  On 
the  second  joint  only  two  spines  ;  on  the  other  joints,  within  the  disk,  about 
three.  Near  tip  of  arm,  four  spines,  lowest  longest,  slender,  tapering, 
rounded,  rather  longer  than  the  joint.  Tentacle  scales  two,  —  one  short, 
sharp,  tooth-like  and  about  .4  mm.  long  (10th  joint),  standing  on  the  edge 
of  the  side  arm-plate  ;  the  other  slender,  sharp,  spiniform,  and  borne  on  the 
lateral  edge  of  the  under  arm-plate;  length  (10th  joint)  .6  mm.  The 
former  of  these  scales  is  found  to  the  very  tip,  where  it  takes  on  the  form  of 
a  pointed  oval  ;  but  the  spiniform  scale  is  only  seen  on  the  first  third  of  the 
arm,  where  it   disappears,    having    grown  gradually    shorter  and  smaller. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  dull  olive  for  the  disk  ;  arms,  light  olive  brown. 

Three  specimens,  in  79  fathoms,  off  Alligator  Reef;  and  two  arms,  in  40 
and  in  117  fathoms,  off  Carysfort  Reef. 

Ophiothamnus  Lyman,  gen.  nov  * 

Teeth  :  no  tooth-papillcc :  mouth-papilla?,  of  which  the  outer  is  much  the 
broadest.  Side  mouth-shields  long  and  stout,  extending  outside  the  mouth- 
yhields,  and  making,  with  them,  a  conspicuous  raised  pentagon.  Side  arm- 
plates  Large,  meeting  above  and  below,  and  bearing  slender,  rough  spines 
on  their  sides.  Disk  puffed,  and  overlying  the  bases  of  the  arms,  covered 
with  scales  and  radial  shields,  which  are  beset  with  spines. 

This   genus,    by   its    arm-plates    and    chewing    apparatus,   is   allied    to 

*  5'^ts,  a  snake;  0J.;xvo<;,  a  thicket. 


342  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

Amphiura;    by   its  spinous   disk   and    rough   spines,   to   Ophiacantha   and 
Ophiomitra. 

Ophiothamnus  vicarius*  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Mints.  —  Disk  beset  with  numerous  slender  spines.  Seven  or 
eight  arm-spines;  the  upper  ones  longest,  and  all  slender  and  tapering. 
Seven  inouth-papillse. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  3.5  mm.  Length  of  arm 
20  mm.  Mouth-papillae,  seven  to  eaeh  angle,  whereof  the  innermost  one 
stands  immediately  below  the  teeth,  and  is  just  like  them;  of  the  three 
papilla:  on  eaeh  side,  the  two  inner  ones  are  together  about  as  broad  as  the 
outer  one.  The  seven  make  an  even,  crowded  row,  and  are  all  stout.  Teeth 
four,  short,  broad,  flat,  with  the  cutting  edge  slightly  curved,  the  upper- 
most one  thinnest.  Mouth-shields  small,  .3  mm.  long,  pointed  within,  a  little 
curved  -without,  making  a  sort  of  heart-shape ;  they  are  closely  wedged  into 
the  angle  formed  by  the  union  of  the  s'de  mouth-shields.  Side  mouth- 
shields  large  and  strong,  .5  mm.  long,  meeting  within,  and  extending  well 
outside  the  mouth-shield  proper  ;  they  bear  the  outer  wide  mouth-papilla;, 
while  the  other  mouth-papillae  are  attached  to  the  mouth-frames,  except  the 
central  innermost  one,  which  grows  on  the  jaw  itself.  Under  arm-plates 
wider  without  than  within  ;  outer  side  curved  slightly,  laterals  encroached 
upon  by  the  tentacle  scales;  inner  side  making  a  small  peak  or  angle; 
length  (4th joint),  .3  mm.  The  first  underarm-plate  is  oblong,  and  tightly 
pressed  between  the  bases  of  the  side  mouth-shields.  Side  arm-plates  large, 
and  rather  prominent,  meeting  above  and  below  ;  their  line  of  juncture 
below  is  about  half  as  long  as  the  under  arm-plate.  Upper  arm-plates, 
.3  mm.  long  :  outer  side  cleanly  curved,  and  nearly  as  wide  as  the  arm  :  within 
they  are  bounded  by  outer  curves  of  the  preceding  side  arm-plates,  which 
give  them  the  appearance  of  having  a  peak.  Disk  beset,  above  and  below, 
with  long  slender  spines,  which  arc  more  numerous  on  the  upper  surface, 
where  their  length  is  ..'>  mm.,  while,  in  the  lower  interbraehial  spaces,  the 
longest  are  ,3  mm.  In  a  dry  specimen,  tie  somewhat  coarse  and  irregular 
scaling  of  the  disk  is  everywhere  visible.  Radial  shields,  roughly  semicir- 
cular, so  that,  together  they  make  a  round  figure:  their  outline,  however, 
is  not  regular,  and  they  have  a  slight  swelling  at  their  outer  point;  they 
touch  eaeh  other  near  the  disk  margin  ;  but,  within,  are  separated  by  one, 
anl  sometimes  by  two,  large  scales;  en  their  edges  they  often  have  two  or 
thn  e  spines.  Ann-spines  slender,  rounded,  gradually  tapering,  sharp,  all 
similar  in  shape,  upper  ones  longest  ;  close  to  the  disk  they  are  much  lon- 
ger than  just  beyond;  fourth  joint,  eight  spines,  whose  lengths  are,  to  that 

•    s  i  cnlli  d  becau-c  it  seems  to  replace  the  common  Ophiothrix  of  the  shallower 


MUSEUM    01*    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  343 

of  the  lower  arm-plate,  as  1.1,  1.1,  1.3,  .9,  .7,  .G,  .G,  .5:. 3.  Seventh  joint 
longest  spines,  .5  mm.,  and  the  rest  are  not  much  shorter.  On  the  first  two 
or  three  joints  beyond  the  disk  the  two  ranges  of  spines  meet  on  the  median 
line  of  the  arm  above.  The  second  arm-joint  has  but  three  spines,  and  of 
these  the  lowest  is,  as  an  exception,  longest,  namely,  .G  mm.  Tentacle  scales 
blunt,  pear-seed  shape,  the  apex  outward  ,  further  out  on  the  arm  they  grow 
more  pointed  ;  their  length  is  about  half  that  of  the  under  arm-plate.  The 
color,  in  alcohol,  is  pale  brown  for  the  disk,  and  light  straw  for  the  arms. 

Variations.  —  The  chewing  apparatus  shows  few  exceptions :  sometimes, 
however,  the  central  inner  mouth-papilla  is  somewhat  narrower  than  the 
teeth  above  it :  very  rarely  one  of  the  small,  side  mouth-papilla;  is  wanting. 
The  number  and  lengths  of  the  disk  spines  is  not  always  the  same;  and 
especially  are  those  near  the  margin  sometimes  shorter.  In  the  lamer 
specimens  the  second  joint  has  four  spines. 

Among  numerous  specimens  there  was  found  one  that  had  scarcely  any 
spines  on  the  disk,  and  those  very  short;  while  the  radial  shields  were 
buried  by  the  disk  scales,  except  their  outer  ends.  The  arm-spines  were 
essentially  the  same;  on  the  fifth  joint,  lengths  to  that  of  the  under  arm- 
plate,  1.,  1.,  .8,  .8,  .8,  .G,  .G,  .5.:  .3. 

Numerous  specimens,  in  15  to  135  fathoms. 

Ophiornyees  Lyman,  gen.  nov* 

Teeth:  no  tooth-papillae ;  numerous  wide,  flat  mouth-papilla?,  which  are 
turned  downwards  and  outwards,  and  arranged  in  two  or  more  imbricated 
rows,  covering  the  whole  mouth-angle.  Side  mouth-shields  large,  and 
meeting  above.  Disk  finely  scaled,  without  visible  radial  shields.  Arm- 
spines  within  the  disk  shorter,  stouter,  and  of  a  different  character  from 
those  of  the  joints  further  out. 

This  singular  genus  stands  quite  by  itself,  unless  we  compare  its  curious 
mouth-papilhe  with  the  spatula-like  tentacle  scales  of  Opldopsila.  All  the 
specimens  I  have  seen  had  a  tendency  to  raise  the  arms  above  the  disk, 
vertically  ;  which  shows  that  the  muscular  tension  must  have  some  peculiar 
proportion. 

Ophiornyees  rnirabilis  Lyman. 

Special  Marks.  —  Six  arm-spines,  nearly  equal;  on  the  second  joint 
a  connected  row  of  ten  short,  ll  it  arm-spines,  running  across  the  under 
side  of  the  arm.  two  of  these  spines  being  on  the  under  arm-plate,  and  four 
on  each  side  arm-plate. 

Diameter  of  disk  about  G  mm.  Length  of  arm  17  mm.  The  inner 
mouth-papilla:  are  rounded,  sharp,  spinifoffla,  and  eight  or  ten  in  number; 

*  6£i?,  a  snake;  fiv/cTj?,  a  mushroom. 


344  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

they  form  an  irregular  row  about  the  inner  mouth-angle,  and  usually  are 
turned  more  or  less  downwards.  The  outer  mouth-papillae  are  all  more  or 
less  widened  and  flattened  ;  arranged  rudely  in  four  radiating  rows,  but  so 
spreading  and  overlapping  as  to  almost  hide  the  whole  outer  part  of  the 
mouth-angle.  There  are  five  or  six  to  each  side  (ten  or  twelve  to  each 
mouth-angle)  all  foliate  in  form  (much  like  the  wooly  fur  gus  that  grows 
from  dead  trees)  the  outer  ones  largest,  and  sometimes  1  niij.  wide.  Teeth 
five,  flat,  sharp,  spear-head  shaped.  Mouth-shields  very  small,  diamond 
shape,  and  almost  totally  hidden  by  the  mass  of  papilla:  ai.d  spines  about 
them.  Side  mouth-shields  large,  meeting  within,  witii  a  vaoant  space  be- 
tween their  enclosed  angle  and  the  mouth-shield  proper.  They  carry  all 
the  characteristic  foliate  mouth-papilla?,  and  are  very  much  larger  than 
the  mouth-shield.  The  lower  and  inner  point  of  the  jaw,  which  in  most 
Ophiurans  is  scarcely  to  be  seen,  is  here  quite  large,  and  carries  all,  or 
nearly  all,  the  spine-like  mouth-papillse.  Under  arm-places  much  wider 
without  than  within  ;  outer  side  curved,  with  a  lateral  projection  from  each 
corner,  which  joins  the  side  arm-plate;  laterals  strongly  re-enteringly 
curved,  by  the  encroachment  of  the  tentacle  pores,  which  are  very  large  ; 
inner  side  making  a  sharp  angle  ;  length  of  plate  (Oth)  to  greatest  breadth 
.5  :  .5.  Side  arm-plates  meeting  above  and  below;  above  they  cover 
almost  the  whole  surface,  the  upper  arm-plate  being  reduced  to  a  mini- 
mum. Upper  arm-plates  with  a  curved  outer  fide;  the  inner  side  with 
a  rounded  angle  ;  they  occupy  only  a  small  spot  of  about  half  the  width 
of  the  arm,  between  the  bases  of  the  arm-spines.  Disk  uniformly  covered 
with  very  fine,  thin  scales,  about  fifty  to  a  square  mm.  Scattered  over  the 
upper  surface  are  a  very  few  short,  delicate  spines  ;  in  the  lower  interbra- 
chial  spaces,  just  outside  the  mouth-shield,  a  group  of  little  flat  papil'ac. 
Arm-spines  on  joints  beyond  the  disk  six;  the  three  upper  ones  slender, 
rounded, tapering;  the  three  lower  a  little  flattened  and  more  blunt;  upper 
spines  longer;  the  longest  (6th  joint)  .7  mm.  Within  the  disk  the  spines 
have  an  entirely  different  form.  Second  joint  with  an  unbroken  row  of 
ten  equal,  short,  flat,  scale  like  papilla?,  whereof  two  are  on  the  under  arm- 
plate,  and  four  on  each  side  arm-plate.  Third  and  fourth  joints  the  same, 
except  that  the  papilla;  get  more  rounded  and  longer,  and  that  the  fourth 
joint  has  only  three  en  each  side  arm-plate.  Tentacle  scales  of  second 
joint  two;  of  a  shape  similar  to  the  outer  mouth-papilla;,  and  lying  on  the 
side  of  the  pore  opposite  the  under  arm-plate.  All  succeeding  joints  have 
but  one  scale,  which  lies  on  the  inner  angle  of  the  under  arm-plate.  The 
two  scale-like  spines  on  the  under  arm-plate  disappear  beyond  the  sixth  joint ; 
they  may,  indeed,  be  considered  tentacle  scales  just  as  properly  as  arm- 
spines.  Some  species  of  Ophioglypha  give  similar  instances.  The  tentacle 
scales,  except  those  of  the  second  joint,  are  flat,  oblong,  and  similar  to  the 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  345 

arm-spines  which  lie  within  the  disk  ;  far  out  on  the  arm  they  grow  some- 
what pointed. 

Color,  in  alcohol,  uniform  pale  gray. 

The  chief  variations  noticed  were  in  the  shape  of  the  singular  outer 
mouth-papilla;,  which  are  sometimes  more  spreading  in  their  form,  or  nar- 
rower. The  number  of  these,  as  well  as  of  the  inner  mouth-papilla?,  va- 
ries by  one  or  two,  for  each  angle  of  the  mouth. 

OfT  Sand  Key,  Florida,  in  237  to  306  fathoms. 

The  specimens,  many  of  which  had  cast  their  disks,  were  singularly  dis- 
torted, probably  by  the  change  of  pressure  from  so  considerable  a  depth. 
The  arms  were  twisted  upwards,  so  that  they  made  a  parallel  bunch,  in  the 
midst  of  which  was  the  disc,  much  elongated.  By  this  torsion  the  mouth 
parts  were  all  turned  outwards,  and  almost  inverted.  This  singular 
twisting  is  unusual. 

The  species  may  readily  be  distinguished  from  0.  fruteclosus  by  the 
fewer  spines  and  their  comparative  equality. 

Ophiomyces  frutectosus  Lyman. 

Special  Marks.  —  Twelve  arm-spines,  of  which  the  uppermost  is  close  to 
the  median  line  of  the  arm.  The  five  upper  ones  are  short  and  sharp ; 
the  next  three  long,  tapering,  slender  ;  the  last  four  shorter,  flattened,  and 
equal. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  7  mm.  Length  of  arm 
about  28  mm.  The  inner  mouth-papilla?  are  rounded,  stout,  spiniform, 
seven  or  eight  in  number ;  they  form  an  irregular  row  about  the  inner 
mouth-angle,  and  are  often  turned  more  or  less  downward.  The  outer 
mouth-papilla?  are  flattened  and  broad  ;  wider  at  their  ends,  which  are  cut 
square  off,  than  at  their  bases ;  rudely  arranged  in  four  radiating  rows,  but 
inclining  downwards  and  outwards,  and  so  overlapping  as  to  cover  the 
outer  part  of  the  mouth-angle,  like  tiles  ;  there  are  fourteen  or  sixteen  to 
each  mouth-angle;  the  longest  are  .7mm.,  and  are  outside.  Teeth  four 
(rarely  five),  short,  flat,  stout,  with  a  curved,  cutting  edge.  Mouth-shields 
very  small,  diamond-shaped,  and  almost  hidden  by  the  numerous  spines 
and  papilla?  about  them.  Side  mouth-shields  completely  hidden  by  the 
outer  mouth-papilla?.  Under  arm-plates  nearly  as  wide  within  as  without ; 
their  lateral  sides  with  a  strong  re-entering  curve  from  the  encroachment 
of  the  large  tentacle  pores ;  length  to  breadth  (6th)  .6  :  .5.  Side  arm- 
plates  meeting  above,  but  not  below ;  near  the  base  of  the  arm  they  barely 
meet  above.  Upper  arm-plates  very  thin  and  delicate,  except  a  median, 
thickened  crest;  their  outer  side  strongly  curved,  their  inner  side  with  a 
slight  peak  ;  they  occupy  only  about  half  the  width  of  the  arm;  length  to 
breadth  .5:  1.2.  Disk  covered  with  fine,  slightly  thickened  scales;  about 
44 


346  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

70  to  a  square  mm.  In  the  centre  of  the  disk  they  are  somewhat  larger  ; 
and,  in  the  interbraehial  spaces  below,  much  more  minute  ;  everywhere 
they  are  closely  imbricated  and  somewhat  irregular  in  size.  The  entire 
disk,  above  and  below,  is  beset  with  a  considerable  number  of  very  fmo, 
sharp,  slender  spines  ;  the  longest  about  .8  mm. ;  just  outside  the  mouth 
shields  is  a  patch  of  stouter  and  blunter  spines.  Arm-spines,  on  the  joints 
just  outside  the  disc,  twelve,  arranged  from  the  median  line  of  the  arm 
above  to  the  tentacle  pore  below.  The  uppermost  spines  are  very  short  and 
sharp,  and  project  over  the  succeeding  upper  arm-plate.  The  sixth,  seventh, 
and  eighth  spines  long,  slender  and  tapering  ;  the  four  lowest  spines  not  so 
long,  but  stouter,  blunt,  flattened,  and  smallest  at  the  base.  Lengths  to 
that  of  the  under  arm-plate  (Gth  joint)  3.,  .3,  .4,  .4,  .5, 1.,  1.,  .8.  .G,  .6,  .G,  C, :  .G. 
On  the  joints  within  the  disk,  the  lower  spines  arc  wider,  blunter 
and  more  flattened  ;  while  the  upper  ones  are  slender,  but  not  so  long  as 
those  on  the  joints  beyond  the  edge  of  the  disk.  Third  joint  with  twelve 
spines ;  the  six  lower  ones  are  arranged  on  the  side  arm-plate,  nearly  at 
right  angles  with  the  length  of  the  arm,  but  here  the  side  arm-plate  makes 
a  sudden  bend  outwards  and  upwards,  and  this  part  bears  six  slender,  sharp 
spines,  of  which  the  upper  ones  are  somewhat  the  shortest  ;  all  these  last 
are  difficult  of  detection,  wedged,  as  they  are  between  the  arm  and  the 
lower  side  of  the  disk.  Tentacle  scales  two  to  each  pore.  On  the  first 
five  or  six  joints  the  scales  are  shaped  just  like  the  peculiar  outer  mouth- 
papilla?,  and  are  attached  to  the  under  arm-plate  near  the  curved  margin 
of  the  pore.  On  the  joints  beyond,  the  inner  scale  is  pointed  oval  in 
shape,  and  attached  to  the  side  arm-plate  next  the  lowest  spine,  while  the 
outer  scale  is  more  elongated  and  is  attached  to  the  under  arm-plate.* 
Close  to  the  end  of  the  arm  the  inner  scale  only  remains,  and  gets  some- 
what more  pointed.     In  alcohol,  grayish  straw  color. 

A  single  specimen  off  Sand  Key,  Florida,  in  100  fathoms;  others  in  77 
and  1G0  fathoms. 

This  species,  when  examined  with  a  lens,  presents  a  confused  mass  of 
thousands  of  spines  and  papilla?  of  all  shapes  and  sizes;  ami  it  is  only  by 
patient  study  that  all  its  parts  can  be  properly  referred.  It  is  distinguished 
from  O.  nrirabilis  by  its  numerous  arm-spines  and  by  the  different  shape  of 
the  outer  mouth-papillae.  It  showed  the  same  tendency  to  twist  the  arms 
upwards,  above  the  disk. 

By  the  kindness  of  Dr.  Smitt  and  Mr.  Ljungman,  naturalists  of   the 

*  It  will  be. noticed  that  the  parts  here  called  outer  tentacle  scales  are,  under  0.  mira- 
bilis,  I.ym.,  termed  arm-spines,  because,  in  that  specie-;,  they  are  continuous  with  the 
arm-spines  and  have  the  fame  shape.  This  is  done  to  show  that  arm-spines  and  ten- 
tacle scales  are  homologous  parts,  and  are  differently  named  only  to  indicate  their  form 
or  position. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE    ZOOLOGY.  347 

Swedish  frigate  "  Josephine,"  I  was  shown  the  Ophiuridae  dredged  in  117 
fathoms  on  the  newly  discovered  Josephine  Bank,  southwest  of  Lisbon ; 
and  among  them  I  recognized  two  fine  specimens  of  t/us  very  species  !  We 
have,  therefore,  the  same  animal  living  on  two  sides  of  the  Atlantic, 
and  separated  by  nearly  seventy  degrees  of  longitude,  but  not  yet 
discovered  in  the  many  deep  dredgings  made  off  the  British  and  Scandina- 
vian coasts. 

Mr.  Ljungman  describes  the  color  of  the  living  creature  as  white  under- 
neath ;  yellow  bars  on  the  arms,  two  or  four  joints  wide ;  a  reddish  spot 
at  the  insertion  of  each  arm  ;  a  purple-gray,  five-sided  patch  on  the  back 
of  the  disc.  According  to  M.  de  Pourtales,  the  arms  are  white  with  an 
orange  dorsal  stripe;  disk  pink,  with  a  greenish  star;  spines  white,  with 
orange  specks  at  their  bases. 


ASTROPHYTID^I. 

Ophiocreas  Lymax,  gen.  nov.* 

Disk  and  arms  uniformly  covered  with  soft  skin  bearing  microscopic 
grains.  Disk  small :  its  interbrachial  outlines  re-enteringly  curved  ;  five 
pairs  of  narrow,  rather  high,  radial  ribs,  running  from  the  margin  quite  to 
the  centre.  Arms  simple,  very  long  and  smooth ;  the  joints  indicated  by 
very  slight  depressions.  Small  arm-spines  standing  just  above  the  tentacles. 
Teeth  :  one  or  more  tooth-papilla? ;  mouth-papilla?  arranged  in  a  clump  on 
the  side  of  the  mouth-frame,  and  above  its  lower  edge.  Two  genital  slits, 
nearly  as  long  as  the  disk  is  high. 

This  genus  belongs  to  the  Astrophytidte,  as  the  insertion  of  the  arms  in 
the  disk,  the  character  of  the  skin  covering,  and  presence  of  radial  ribs 
show  ;  but  in  its  chewing  apparatus  it  presents  more  the  characters  of  the 
Ophiuridae.     It  stands  near  Astroschema,  which,  however,  has  no  teeth. 

Ophiocreas  lumbrieus  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Marls.  —  Radial  ribs  running  quite  to  the  centre  of  the  disk. 
Two  arm-spines,  the  lower  longer.  Arms  gradually  tapering,  and  nearly 
twenty  times  as  long  as  the  diameter  of  the  disk.  Skin  beset  with  scattered 
microscopic  thorny  grains. 

Description  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  12  mm.  Length  of  arm 
230  mm.  Height  of  arm  near  base  3  mm.  ;  width  of  arm  2.5  mm. 
Mouth-papilla?  nine  or  ten,  forming  a  close,  irregular  clump  of  rounded 
grains  on  the  side  of  the  mouth-frame  ;  none  of  them  are  as  low  as  the 
under  surface  of  the  mouth,  and  are  scarcely  to  be  seen  without  forcing 

*  o<£i9,  snake;  /cpe'as,  flesh. 


348  BULLETIN    01    HIE 

i:  open.  Tcctli  ten,  very  stout  and  uniform,  except  the  lowest  and 
uppermost,  which  are  smaller;  all  arc  flat,  a  little  longer  than  broad, 
with  a  curved  outer  edge,  coming  to  a  point  on  the  median  line,  nearly  of 
uniform  thickness.  Under  the  teeth  are  from  one  to  three  tooth-papillae 
of  irregular  form.  The  joints  of  the  arms  arc  easily  seen,  even  in  alcoholic 
specimens,  being" marked  by  the  interior  bones,  which  are  indicated  through 
the  skin.  The  arms  themselves  arc  high  and  arched  ;  narrow  below  and 
divided  into  ridges  by  the  bases  of  the  spines :  they  are  even  and  without 
depressions  between  the  joints  (except  when  the  specimen  is  dried).  The 
arms  keep  a  uniform  size  for  some  time,  and  then  taper  very  gradually. 
Arm-spines  rounded,  tapering,  blunt,  a  little  rough,  but  covered  by  the 
skin  ;  there  are  two  on  nearly  all  the  pores,  but  none  on  the  first;  one  on 
the  second  and  third,  and  two  on  the  fourth,  whereof  the  upper  one  is 
very  small ;  lengths  to  that  of  the  arm  joint,  1.2,  2.2  :  1.5.  At  the  tip  of 
the  arm  both  spines  have  three  or  four  little  hooks  on  their  edge.  Disk 
with  five  pairs  of  narrow,  prominent,  radial  ribs,  which  diverge  from  the 
centre,  where  they  meet,  and  run  quite  to  edge,  over  the  arms  ;  the  mar- 
gins of  the  disk  are  re-enteringly  curved,  and  its  sides  slope  from  the  upper 
edge  downwards  towards  the  mouth  region.  The  genital  slits  extend  from 
near  the  upper  edge  of  the  disk  to  the  mouth-ring  below.  Over  the  whole 
disk  and  arms  are  scattered  microscopic  thorny  grains,  which  adhere  lightly 
to  a  thin  epidermal  coat,  which  seems  to  carry  the  coloring  matter.  In 
alcohol  the  animal  is  of  a  dull  flesh  color,  except  the  interbrachial  spaces 
on  the  sides  of  the  disk,  which  are  purplish  brown. 

Variations.  —  A  young  one  with  a  disk  of  4.5  mm.  had  arms  only  one 
half  as  loner  as  the  specimen  just  described,  to  wit  :  50  mm.,  from  which  it 
appears  that  the  arms  increase  in  a  greater  proportion  than  the  disk.  The 
teeth  were  only  six  ;  the  grains  of  the  skin  were  less  thorny  and  more 
closely  set  than  in  the  adult.  Among  many  examined,  the  largest  indi- 
vidual had  the  disk  1  7  mm.  in  diameter,  and  thirteen  teeth,  of  which  the 
two  lowest  were  broken,  so  that  each  looked  like  two  or  three  papillae  side 
by  side  ;  below  iheso  there  was  a  small  single  papilla. 

In  l  ■_'.">  to  130  fathoms. 

Astrophyton  mucronatum  Lyman,  sp.  nov. 

Special  Marks.  —  Radial  ribs  high,  and  beset  with  strong  conical  spines, 
a  few  of  which  are  also  found  as  far  out  as  the  third  fork  on  the  upper  side 
of  the  arm.     One  madroporie  body. 

,'/  cription  of  a  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  39  mm.  Length  of  arm 
and  distances  of  its  forks  from  each  other:  — 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  049 


1st 

fork 

to 

2d 

12 

mm. 

2d 

" 

it 

3d 

20 

it 

3d 

u 

it 

4  th 

17 

u 

4th 

K 

(< 

5th 

21 

11 

5th 

tt 

u 

6  th 

17 

it 

6th 

(( 

K 

7th 

16 

11 

7th 

tt 

« 

8th 

15 

it 

8th 

(( 

tt 

9  th 

14 

(( 

9th 

ti 

u 

10th 

15 

u 

10th 

It 

u 

11th 

13 

u 

11th 

u 

tt 

12th 

13 

it 

12th 

u 

(( 

13th 

12 

it 

13th 

(1 

« 

14th 

12 

tt 

14th 

(( 

tt 

15th 

18 

it 

15th 

a 

11 

16th 

8 

tt 

16th 

« 

11 

17th 

9 

it 

17th 

u 

11 

18th 

9 

tt 

18th 

(( 

11 

end 

16 

tt 

Total   . 

2.3  7 

mm. 

Teeth  :  tooth-papilla^  and  mouth-papilla?  sharp,  slender,  spiniform  ;  those 
standing  in  the  place  of  teeth  are  about  nine,  arranged  partly  in  a  single, 
partly  in  a  double  vertical  row;  the  longest  1.5  mm.  Those  near  the  outer 
corner  of  the  mouth-slit  are  smaller,  stouter  proportionately,  and  irregularly 
crowded;  length  not  over  .5  mm.  One  madreporic  shield,  like  a  small 
pimple,  about  2  mm.  long,  placed  in  a  depression  near  the  inner  angle  of  the 
interbrachial  space.  Top  and  sides  of  arms,  down  to  the  tentacle  scales, 
covered  with  a  smooth  mosaic  of  flat,  irregular,  rounded  grains.  Lower 
surface  of  arm,  between  the  tentacle  pores,  smooth.  Skin  of  the  lower  surface 
of  the  disk  studded  with  flat,  smooth  grains,  somewhat  rounded;  from  six  to 
nine  to  a  square  mm.  but  not  confluent  so  as  to  form  a  mosaic.  The  space 
between  the  upper  and  lower  surfaces  of  the  disk  is  quite  concave  and  very 
distinct,  its  skin  being  nearly  naked  and  only  covered  by  scattered  micro- 
scopic grains.  Whole  upper  surface  of  disk  covered  with  a  mosaic  of  grains 
like  that  of  the  arms ;  in  addition  to  which  the  high  radial  ribs  and  the 
round  space  enclosed  by  the  inner  ends  of  the  ribs,  bear  stout,  smooth,  conical 
spines,  the  largest  1.5  mm.  high  ;  of  these  there  are  ten  or  twelve  to  each 
rib,  arranged  in  an  irregular  double  row;  those  in  the  centre  of  the  disk  are 
crowded  and  smaller ;  the  same  spines  form  a  row  along  the  top  of  the  arm, 
as  far  as  the  third  fork ;  they'are  smaller  than  those  of  the  disk,  and  there  is 
usually  one  to  each  joint.  Toward  the  end  of  arm  each  joint  is  marked  by 
an  annular  ridge,  which  consists  of  a  double  row  of  grains,  each  bearing  a  mi- 


350  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

nute,  usually  simple,  sickle-shaped  hook  ;  these  correspond  to  arm-spines,  hut 
gradually  disappear  towards  the  base  of  the  arm,  where,  however,  the  double 
rows  of  grains  are  still  to  be  recognized.  Tentacle  spines  short,  small,  tooth- 
like ;  on  most  of  the  pores  two,  but  some  within  the  disk  have  three.  Gen- 
ital slits  large  10  mm.  long,  and  extending  from  the  under  to  the  upper 
skin  of  the  disk. 

Variations.  —  Another  specimen  of  about  the  same  size  had  some  small 
spines  in  the  interbrachial  spaces  of  the  upper  disk,  and  from  nine  to  fourteen 
spines  on  each  radial  rib.  On  the  under  surface  of  the  disk  the  granulation 
of  the  skin  near  the  mouth  was  prolonged  into  the  under  surface  of  the 
arms,  between  the  tentacle  pores. 

Florida,  in  120  and  125  fathoms. 

Astrogomphus  Lyman,  pen.  now* 

Disk  with  ten  low,  very  narrow  radial  ribs,  running  nearly  to  its  centre, 
and  beset  with  numerous  spines.  Arms  simple.  Skin  of  arms  and  disk 
covered  by  a  mosaic  of  small  flat  grains  ;  the  joints  of  the  former  distin- 
guished by  ridges,  each  of  which  consists  of  belts  of  granules,  some  of  them 
bearing  minute  hooks.  Arm-spines  like  thorny  stumps,  and  arranged  in 
clumps  just  above  the  tentacle  pores.  Teeth:  tooth-papilla?  and  mouth- 
papillse  all  similar  and  spiniform.  Two  genital  slits  in  each  interbrachial 
spaee. 

Astrogomphus  belongs  with  the  simple-armed  Astrophytons.  In  the  dis- 
tinctness of  its  disk,  and  the  character  of  the  surface  of  its  arms,  it  some- 
what resembles  Trichaster,  while  its  dentition  is  rather  like  that  of 
Astroporpa. 

Astrogomphus  vallatus  Lyman. 

Special  Marks.  —  The  whole  upper  disk  beset  with  short,  very  stout 
spikes,  arranged  rudely  in  concentric  rows;  under  surface  paved  with 
smooth,  Hat  grains,  except  a  fence  of  stout  papilla1,  which  runs  between  the 
lower  sides  of  the  arms,  where  they  join  the  disk. 

Description  of  n  Specimen.  —  Diameter  of  disk  17  mm.  Length  of  arm 
100  mm.  Width  of  arm  next  the  disk  li.a  mm. ;  height  of  arm  3  mm. 
Mouth-papilla1  and  tooth-papilla  similar  to  each  other,  short,  sharp,  stout; 
mouth-papillae  about  ten  on  each  side,  arranged  in  two  irregular  rows,  one 
above  the  other;  toot h-papilhe  about  twelve,  arranged  in  irregular  pairs 
along  the  point  of  the  jaw;  the  longest  are,  .8  mm.  ;  and  both  mouth  and 
tooth  papillae  are  spiniform,  sharp,  rounded,  and  perfectly  smooth.  Arms 
high  and  rounded  above,  flattened  below;  they  are  divided  by  depressions 

*  aarrjp,  star;  yofi0os,  spike. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  351 

into  joints,  except  on  the  lower  surface,  which  is  smooth,  and  is  uniformly 
paved  with  small  flat  grains,  looking,  under  the  lens,  like  a  rough  mosaic. 
Each  of  the  raised  joints  is  covered  by  a  belt  of  four  rows  of  grains  run- 
ning across  the  arm ;  the  two  middle  rows  have  smaller  grains,  each  of 
which  bears  a  little  saw,  having  four  or  five  teeth,  and  at  its  end  a  strong 
hook;  the  two  outer  rows  have  larger  grains,  without  any  appendages. 
Each  depression  between  the  joints  is  paved  with  two  or  three  cross-rows 
of  more  or  less  flattened  grains,  similar  to  the  smooth  grains  of  the  raised 
joints.  Towards  the  end  of  the  arm  the  raised  joints  consist  only  of  the 
double  row  of  grains  bearing  the  saw-hooks.  Disk,  above,  covered  with  a 
mosaic  of  smooth,  flat  grains,  from  which  rise  a  great  number  of  short, 
blunt,  tapering,  very  stout  spikes,  the  longest  .8  mm. ;  they  are  arranged 
in  about  seven,  more  or  less  distinct,  concentric  circles,  growing  confused 
at  the  centre  of  the  disk,  where  there  is  a  space  about  3  mm.  in  diameter, 
from  the  periphery  of  which  spring  the  ten  radiating  ribs,  which  are  very 
narrow,  though  somewhat  broader  over  the  bases  of  the  arms ;  over  these 
ribs  run  the  circles  of  spikes,  giving  them  a  rough,  spinous  appearance. 
The  interbrachial  spaces  below  have  a  strikingly  smooth  appearance,  though 
really  covered  with  minute,  rounded,  flattened  grains  of  several  sizes. 
Between  the  bases  of  the  arms,  below,  and  connecting  the  first  groups  of 
arm-spines,  runs  a  little  fence  of  three  irregular  rows  of  little,  crowded 
spikes,  more  blunt  and  rounded  than  those  of  the  upper  disk.  Just  outside 
one  of  these  fences  lies  the  madreporic  plate,  which  is  small  and  elongated, 
and  has  about  a  dozen  large  pores  in  an  irregular  row.  The  disk  about 
the  mouth  is  quite  flat  and  smooth,  so  that  the  animal,  seen  from  below,  is 
laid  out  in  regular  patterns ;  in  the  centre  the  stellate  mouth  rough  with 
spines ;  outside  this  a  five-sided  smooth  region,  which  is  prolonged  on  each 
arm;  outside  this  a  five-sided  fence  of  spikes,  which  separates  the  mouth 
region  from  the  interbrachial  spaces,  and  is  prolonged  by  the  bunches  of 
arm-spines  along  the  side  of  the  lower  surface  of  each  arm ;  again  outside 
is  the  smooth  interbrachial  space,  where  the  genital  slits  run  from  the  edge 
of  the  disk  (marked  by  a  margin  of  spikes)  about  two  thirds  of  the  way  to 
the  interbrachial  fence  of  spikes.  Arm-spines  equal,  rounded,  a  little  bent, 
suddenly  contracting  at  the  end,  where  they  bear  a  bunch  of  four  or  five 
thorns ;  they  are  arranged  side  by  side,  in  close  clumps,  at  the  angle  made 
by  the  under  surface  and  side  of  the  arm;  length  of  the  longest,  1.2  mm. 
The  first  tentacle  pore  has  one  little  simple  spine  ;  the  second  has  four 
thorny  spines;  the  third,  and  several  beyond,  five;  then  the  number  is 
four ;  towards  the  end  of  the  arm  it  diminishes  to  three,  two,  and  one. 
Near  the  tip,  where  there  are  but  two,  these  spines  have  hooks  at  their 
ends,  and  at  the  very  end  there  is  but  one  spine,  which  is  like  the  saw-hook 
borne  by  the  grains  on  the  back  of  the  arm.  Color  in  alcohol,  yellow  gray, 
or  straw  color. 


352  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Variations.  —  A  smaller  specimen,  with  a  disk  of  10  mm.,  presented  no 
important  differences.  The  spikes  on  the  ribs  of  the  disk  were  proportion- 
ately larger ;  the  concentric  circles  of  spikes  were  ill  marked ;  the  arm-spines 
were  more  thorny. 

In  94  to  119  fathoms. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  0O8 

As  this  number  of  the  Bulletin  was  going  to  press  I  received  from  Dr. 
Liitken  his  Addit amenta  ad  Historiam  Ophiuridarum,  Part  III,  18G9, 
in  which  he  enters  into  a  critical  discussion  of  the  relations  of  the  gen- 
era of  Ophiurans.  The  work  is  done  with  that  ability  and  thoroughness 
which  usually  characterize  the  Scandinavian  naturalists  above  all  others 
of  Europe.  This  is  not,  however,  the  place  to  give  a  review  of  the 
paper,  and  I  shall  merely  notice  a  few  points  that  particularly  concern 
the  Caribbean  fauna. 

Two  interesting  genera  are  added  to  those  known,  from  the  West 
Indies, —  Ophionema,  which  stands  in  the  Amphiura  group  next  to 
Ophiopeltis,  from  which  it  differs  by  having  no  disk  scales  at  all,  and  by 
having  all  the  arm-spines  of  the  same  form;  and  Ophionephthi/s,  which 
is  in  the  same  group,  and  characterized  by  a  disk  covered  partly  by 
naked  skin,  while  there  is  a  frame  of  scales  round  each  pair  of  radial 
shields,  and  a  line  of  them  along  the  cdge-of  the  disk.  The  species  are 
Ophionema  intricata  and  Ophionephthys  UmicoJa.  There  is  also  an 
Ophiacantha  {0.  pentacrinus)  which,  as  the  description  will  show,  is 
very  near  to,  if  not  identical  with,  my  0.  mcridionalis.  In  treating  of 
Opkiactis  clavigera  Ljn.,  Dr.  Liitken  has  run  against  the  precise 
difficulty  I  have  (see  Ophiactis  humilis)  ;  and  the  anomalous  posi- 
tion of  the  species  is  shown  by  the  fact  that,  while  he  places  it  with 
Ophiacantha,  I  incline  to  retain  it  with  Ophiactis.  The  real  trouble  is, 
that  so  many  new  forms  are  constantly  discovered,  that  the  limits  of  the 
old  genera  are  as  constantly  found  to  be  defective,  particularly  when 
those  limits  are  established  on  characteristics  more  or  less  partial.  For 
example,  take  Dr.  Liitken's  description  of  Ophiactis:  "  Squarruc  disci 
spinulis  brevibus  plus  minus  obsitae.  Brachia  5  -  G  satis  brevia.  Spina? 
laterales  5-7,  papilla  ambulacris  1,  orales  1  -2."  Now,  then,  what  is  to 
be  done  with  0.  plana,  that  has  no  disk  spines  ?  Or  what  should  we  do 
with  a  species  that  had  two  tentacle  scales,  or  four  arm-spines?  Or 
what  is  the  meaning  of  "  satis  brevia,"  as  applied  to  the  arms?  I  am 
free  to  acknowledge  that  my  own  genera  Ophiophragmus  and  Ophiocni- 
da,  among  the  Amphiura,  could  be  catechized  in  like  manner  ;  but  I  do 
not  see  that  Amphipholis  Ljn.  is  a  better  substitute.*  In  fact,  Dr. 
Liitken,  with  his  usual  modest  judgment,  alludes  to  the  transition  state 
of  his  classification  when  he  says:  "Je  ne  doute  nullement  aussi  que 

*  See  rem::;ks  on  the  genus  Amphiura,  p.  335. 


354  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

des  decouvertes  ulterieures   ne  conduisent  a  un  systeme  encore    plus 
naturel  et  plus  satisfaisant." 

The  Ophiothrix  violacea  of  the  Caribbean  is  said  to  be  different  from 
the  similar  form  found  on  the  coast  of  South  Brazil.  This  is  to  be 
taken  with  great  caution,  considering  that  many  Caribbean  species  go  as 
far.  Nevertheless,  as  pointed  out  in  the  Introduction  to  this  Bulletin, 
there  are  also  species  apparently  peculiar  to  the  Brazil  coast. 

Cambridge,  November,  1869. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  o&O 

No.  11.  — List  of  the  Crinoids  obtained  on  the  Coasts  of  Florida 
and  Cuba,  by  the  United  States  Coast  Survey  Gulf  Stream 
Expeditions,  in  1867,  18G8,  1869.  By  L.  F.  de  Pourtales, 
Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey. 

(Communicated  by  Professor  B.  Pierce,  Sup't  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.) 

Antedon  Hagenii  Pourt.  (Comatula  Hagenii  Pourt.,  Bull. 
Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  No.  6.)  This  species  approaches  nearer  A.  rosacea 
than  any  of  the  other  species  found  in  this  region  ;  it  differs,  however, 
in  some  important  parts,  such  as  the  form  of  the  centrodorsal  plate,  of 
the  ovaries,  of  the  joints  of  the  cirrhi,  &c.  The  arms  are  round,  more 
flexible,  and  can  be  coiled  entirely  over  the  back. 

Found  from  94  to  195  fathoms. 

Antedon  meridionalis  A.  Ag.  This  species  ha3  long  been 
known,  from  the  coast  of  South  Carolina,  under  the  manuscript  name 
of  Comatula  Holmesi  Ag.,  but  appears  to  have  never  been  described. 
The  above  name  was  given  to  it  by  Mr.  A.  Agassiz  in  the  "  Sea-side 
Studies  of  Natural  History." 

Ten  arms,  centrodorsal  plate  flat,  with  about  15  cirrhi  around  its 
circumference.  These  are  rather  short,  formed  of  9  or  10  joints 
somewhat  compressed  laterally,  the  3d,  4th,  and  5th  longest.  The 
last  joint  with  a  strong  claw,  penultimate  with  an  opposing  point. 
Radials  very  short,  the  first  almost  concealed  by  the  central  plate. 
Axial  radial  also  short  and  triangular.  First  brachials  short  and  in 
contact  with  each  other  in  a  pair  by  nearly  their  whole  side.  First 
syzygiuin  at  the  3d  brachial.  Joints  —  of  which  there  are  generally  four 
to  a  syzygium  —  very  oblique,  with  raised  and  serrated  edges.  First 
pinnule  rather  long;  the  5  or  G  first  joints  webbed  by  the  perisora. 
The  succeeding  pinnules  rather  short,  increasing  again  to  the  middle 
of  the  arm,  formed  of  15  or  16  joints,  of  which  the  5  or  6  first  ones 
are  short  triangular.  Mouth  eccentric,  anus  central  ;  small  calcareous 
concretions  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  mouth  and  brachial  channels. 

Color  purple  or  yellow,  or  variegated  of  those  two  colors.  Diameter, 
when  fully  expanded,  4  or  5  inches. 

One  specimen  in  35  fathoms  west  of  the  Tortugas,  and  a  large  number 
off"  French  Reef  in  45  fathoms.  It  is  also  found  off  the  coast  of  South 
Carolina,  but  the  Alectro  dentata  Say,  from  the  coast  of  New  Jersey, 


356  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

appears  to  be  a  different  species,  —  at  least,  as  far  as  his  description 
goes. 

Antedon  armata  Pourt.  Ten  arms ;  centrodorsal  plate  flat, 
rather  large,  bearing  about  fifteen  cirrhi  on  its  circumference.  Cirrhi 
of  about  20  joints,  shorter  than  their  diameter;  all  except  the  3  or  4 
first  ones  provided  with  a  short  spine  on  the  concave  side ;  last  joint 
with  a  claw,  and  penultimate  with  an  opposing  spine.  First  radial  pro- 
truding from  the  ceutrodorsal  plate  ;  second  radial  nearly  as  long  as 
broad  ;  radial  axial  pentagonal.  First  brachials  nearly  scpiare,  barely 
in  contact  by  their  lower  corners  ;  second  brachial  with  a  large  socket 
lor  the  first  pinnule,  which  is  twice  as  long  and  more  than  twice  as 
thick  as  the  second  ;  of  its  9  or  10  joints  the  4th  is  remarkably  long, 
forming  about  one  fourth  of  the  total  length  ;  the  other  pinnules  are 
rather  short,  and  are  formed  of  the  same,  number  of  cylindrical  joints. 
Joints  oi'  the  arms  smooth,  oblique,  edges  not  prominent.  Seven  or 
eight  joints  form  a  syzygium. 

One  specimen  only  was  dredged  in  35  fathoms,  west  of  the  Tortugas. 
The  spiny  cirrhi  make  it  resemble  Antedon  (  Comatula)  Milbcrti  Miiller, 
said  to  be  from  North  America,  but  the  other  characters  do  not  agree. 

Antedon  cubensis  Pourt.  Ten  arms ;  mouth  central.  Cen- 
trodor.-al  plate  conical,  covered  with  cirrhi  nearly  to  the  tip.  Cirrhi 
very  long  and  slender,  of  28  cylindrical  joints.  First  radial  concealed 
by  the  centrodorsal  plate,  second  very  short ;  axial  radial  pentagonal  or 
shield-shape.  First  brachials  very  short.  Arm-joints  with  imbricated, 
serrated  edges;  five  to  seven  forming  a  syzygium.  First  pinnule  not 
much  longer  than  the  second,  the  others  rather  short  and  slender,  con- 
sisting of  about  ten  joints,  and  increasing  in  length  towards  the  end  of 
the  arm. 

Two  specimens  in  450  fathoms  on  the  coast  of  Cuba.  It  resembles 
somewhat  A.  Sarsii,  but  differs  from  it  by  its  flatter  centrodorsal  plate, 
and  by  an  entirely  different  shape  in  the  1st  and  2d  brachials,  particu- 
larly the  second,  which  has  not  the  projection  into  the  first  brachial, 
like  A.  Sarsii. 

Antedon  rubiginosa  Pourt.  Ten  arms;  mouth  central.  Cen- 
trodorsal plate  slightly  convex,  bearing  15  to  20  cirrhi  in  one  or  two  rows 
around  the  circumference  ;  each  cirrhus  of  10  nearly  cylindrical  joints, 
the  3d,  1th,  and  5th  longest,  the  penultimate  with  an  opposing  point. 
First  and  second  radials  visible,  the  latter  about  half  as  long  as  broad; 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  357 

the  axial  pentagonal  depressed  in  the  middle  into  a  shallow  pit  marked 
with  a  hlack  spot.  A  similar  pit  on  several  of  the  brachials,  which  are 
long  with  imbricated  and  serrated  edges.  Buccal  membrane  filled  with 
calcareous  concretions.  First  pinnule  much  longer  than  the  succeeding 
ones.  All  the  pinnules  are  very  slender,  with  fine  spines  on  every  joint, 
forming  also  a  verticil  at  their  distal  end.  The  spines  are  directed  for- 
wards near  the  beginning  of  the  pinnule,  but  gradually  curve  back,  and 
the  last  joint  terminates  with  several  hooked  claws  ;  color  rusty  red,  with 
a  black  dorsal  stripe  on  every  arm  and  black  ambulacral  furrow. 

One  small  specimen  was  dredged  in  9  fathoms  off  Orange  Key,  Ba- 
hama Bank,  and  several  arms  of  a  large  specimen  near  the  Tortugas  in 
17  fathoms. 

Antedon  brevipinna  Pourt.  ( Comatula  brevipinna  Pourt.,  Bull. 
Mus.  Comp.  Zobl.  No.  G.)  "Was  not  obtained  again  since  the  first  speci- 
men was  dredged  in  1867. 

Still  another  species  was  noticed,  but  the  specimen  was  too  mutilated 
for  description. 

Pentacrinus  Miilleri  Oersted.  Joints  of  the  stem  of  a  Penta- 
crinus  were  dredged  up  off  Havana  in  270  fathoms,  and  again  in  3 If) 
and  471  fathoms  off  Double-headed  Shot  Keys.  No  trace  of  it  was 
found  on  the  Florida  side  of  the  Gulf  Stream. 

A  few  of  the  joints,  showing  the  mark  of  the  attachment  of  cirrhi,  and 
being  double,  show  that  they  belong  to  this  species,  and  not  to  P.  asteria 
Linn.,  in  which  the  cirrhiferous  joints  are  single. 

Rhizocrinus  lofotensis  Sars.  (Bourgueticrinw  Hotessieri 
d'  Orb.,  Pourt.  in  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  No.  7.)  This  crinoid  has  been 
obtained  again  several  times  during  the  season's  work  of  I860  ;  always 
in  the  foraminiferous  bottom  of  the  trough  of  the  straits,  in  depths  vary- 
ing from  237  to  450  fathoms.  An  interesting  addition  to  our  knowledge 
of  its  geographical  distribution  is  its  occurrence  on  the  "  Josephine  Bank," 
a  new  discovery  of  the  Swedish  Frigate  Josephine  between  the  coast 
of  Portugal  and  the  Azores. 

During  the  stay  of  that  ship  in  Boston  Harbor,  Dr.  Smitt  had  the 
kindness  to  show  me  his  dredging  collections,  among  which  I  saw  this 
species,  also  Echinocncumis  typica,  Pteraster  militaris,  and  perhaps  a  few 
others,  representatives  of  the  Gulf  Stream  deep-sea  fauna,  which  we 
know  to  occur  also  on  the  coast  of  Norway. 

Cambridge,  November,  18C9. 


358 


BULLETIN   OF   THE 


450 

-471 
-450 

o 

CO 

c 

T 

o 

CO 

o 
o. 

CO 

o 

00 

cn 

© 

CN 

I 

o 

CN 

O 
CN 

1 

CO 
CN 

o 

CM 
CN 

200 

180 
-195 

o 

© 

O 
CN 

o 

o 

o 

CO 

•* 

O 
to 

o 

•*      CO 

o 

CN 

1                   r- 

1 

o 

5 

1 

Antedon  Hagenii  Pourt. 

mcridionalis  A.  Ac 

armata  Pourt. 

cubensis  Pourt. 

rubiginosa  Pourt. 
Pentacrinus  Miilleri  Oerst 
Rhizocrinus  lofotensis  Sars 

MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  359 


No.  12.  —  List  of  Holothuridce  from  the  Deep-Sea  Dredgings  of 
the  United  States  Coast  Survey.  By  L.  F.  de  Pourtales, 
Assist.  U.  S.  Coast  Survey. 

(Communicated  by  Professor  B.  Peirce,  Sup't  U.  S.  Coast  Survey.) 

The  Holothurians  obtained  in  deep  water  off  the  Florida  reef  are 
few  in  number,  and  are  very  closely  allied  to,  if  not  identical  with, 
those  of  the  deep-sea  fauna  of  Norway. 

The  littoral  species  so  abundant  on  the  reef,  and  in  the  shallow  waters 
encompassed  by  it,  do  not  appear  to  extend  into  even  moderate  depths 
outside,  —  at  least,  they  were  never  found  in  the  dredge. 

Cuvieria  operculata  Pourt.  (C.  squamata  Koren  ?  Bull.  Mus. 
Comp.  Zool.  No.  7.) 

A  satisfactory  comparison  of  the  two  species  could  not  be  made  from 
want  of  well-determined  specimens  of  the  northern  species.  From  C. 
Fabricii  it  is  easily  distinguished  by  the  suckers  on  the  ventral  disk, 
which  in  C.  operculata  are  always  in  a  single  row  on  the  circumference 
of  the  soft  disk,  and  a  single  row  in  the  marginal  plates,  whilst  in  C.  Fab- 
rieii they  form  a  dense  band  of  three  or  four  rows.  Two  rather  muti- 
lated specimens,  without  names,  in  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology, 
received  from  Professor  Sars,  and  which  are  probably  C.  squamata, 
have  the  suckers  disposed  as  in  C.  operculata.  The  granulation  of  the 
scales  in  the  latter  is  finer  than  in  the  two  northern  species. 

It  is  not  very  rare  in  120  to  135  fathoms. 

Thyonidium  conchilegum  Pourt.  Ibid.  =  Th.  pellucidum 
Vahl.  ? 

Thyonidium  gemmatum  Pourt.  One  young  specimen  off  Tor- 
tugas,  in  sixteen  fathoms. 

Echinocucumis  typica  Sars.     In  320  to  350  fathoms. 

Cucumaria  frondosa  Gunner.  A  rather  small  specimen  of 
Ilolothurian,  dredged  in  118  fathoms,  cannot  be  distinguished  from  this 
species  by  any  satisfactory  characters.  The  skin  contains  only  a  few 
calcareous  needles  and  no  plates.  Its  color  was  milk-white  with  yellow 
spots. 


360  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

Molpadia  borealis  Saks.  The  differences  between  my  only 
specimen  and  Sars's  description  and  figures  consist  in  the  smaller  num- 
ber of  calcareous  granules  and  in  the  calcareous  plates  being  somewhat 
more  symmetrical  in  shape.  I  do  not  think  the  differences  sufficient  to 
establish  a  new  species. 

In  my  specimen  the  buccal  disk  is  expanded  as  in  Sars's  figure,  but 
no  tentacles  are  visible.  In  the  places  they  ought  to  occupy  fifteen 
small  holes  can  be  counted.  Sars  never  saw  any  tentacles,  although  he 
kept  some  specimens  alive,  dredged  in  351  fathoms. 

Why  Selenka  should  have  made  out  this  species  to  be  the  same  as 
my  Molpadia  oolitica  I  cannot  well  understand.  My  original  speci- 
mens were  in  his  hands,  and  I  have  re-examined  them  lately.  The  cal- 
careous granules  of  M.  borealis  are  small  and  irregular,  in  M.  oolitica 
they  are  larger,  always  oval,  and  formed  of  concentric  layers.  The  for- 
mer has  retiform  calcareous  plates,  the  latter  none.  The  former  has 
no  visible  tentacles,  the  latter  has  always  distinct  simple  digitiform  ten- 
tacles, even  in  mutilated  specimens.  One  of  the  specimens  sent  from 
the  Cambridge  Museum  to  Mr.  Selenka  had  received  by  some  accident 
the  label  of  "  Cape  Palmas  ?  "  and  on  this  one  he  has  based  his  new  genus 
Embolus.  I  am  perfectly  satisfied  that  the  Embolus  pauper  Sel.  is  the 
same  thing  as  Molpadia  oolitica.  The  figures  he  gives  of  the  ccsopha- 
gial  ring  of  Molpadia  oolitica  and  of  a  calcareous  grain  of  Embolus 
pauper  are  both  taken  from  specimens  of  M.  oolitica.  The  absence  of 
oesophagial  ring  in  the  specimen  he  examined  is  accidental,  as  is  also 
the  absence  of  the  tail-like  prolongation  of  the  anal  extremity  of  the 
body. 

Cambridge,  November,  1869. 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY. 


361 


© 

o 

CO 

o 
m 

CO 

CO 

o 

-* 

co 

© 

| 

<N 

w 

o 

o 

CO 

o 

00 

cn 

o 

<£> 

CM 

o 

-* 

CM 

o 

CI 

M 

o 

o 

IN 

o 

co 

-~ 

o 

o 

"-' 

o 

•* 

co 

'-' 

1 

o 

CI 

1 

oo 

^* 

1 

1-1 

o 

| 

o 

"-■ 

o 

00 

o 

o 

o 

-* 

o 

CN 

o 

to 

"■"■ 

>-) 

H 

M 

H 

fc> 

« 

O 

« 

« 

C-i 

a 

o 

in 
M 

w 

5c 

o 

Pw 

a 

CO 

D 

o; 

to 
o 

g 

C3 

O 

tt 

rt 

•- 

oi 

rt 

CO 

O 

"3 

o 

B 

s 

-' 

^ 

J- 

o 

tx 

0 

o 

o 
a. 

o 

a 

rt 

o 

.5 

"5 

CJ 

o 

C3 

F 

T> 

o 

,r: 

O 

3 

J3 

cj 

3 

o 

H 

w 

o 

MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  363 


No.  13.  —  Report  upon  Deep-Sea  Dredgings  in  the  Gulf  Stream, 
during  the  Third  (raise  of  the  IT.  S.  Steamer  Bibb,  adJres.-oil 
to  Professor  Benjamin  Peirce,  Superintendent  U.  S.  Coast 
Survey,  by  Louis  Agassiz. 

(Communicated  uy  Professor  Peirce.) 

The  survey  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  including  soundings  and  dredgings 
in  deep  waters,  had  been  going  on  for  two  years  under  your  direction, 
when  I  was  invited  by  you  to  join  a  third  cruise.  The  surveying  party 
this  year,  as  before,  was  accommodated  on  board  the  United  States  Coast 
Survey  steamer  Bibb,  master  commanding  Robert  Piatt,  who  had  charge 
of  the  hydrographic  survey,  while  Assistant  L.  F.  Pourtales,  who  had 
hitherto  superintended  the  dredging  operations,  still  continued  to  direct 
the  same  work.  The  object  of  my  own  connection  with  the  present 
cruise  was  to  ascertain  how  far  the  last  investigations  covered  the 
ground  to  be  surveyed,  and  to  what  extent  and  in  what  direction 
further  researches  of  the  kind  were  desirable  in  the  same  region,  and 
likely  to  furnish  important  information.  The  work  of  M.  Pourtales 
had  been  so  eminently  successful,  the  results  obtained  in  this  short  time 
so  unexpected  and  of  such  high  scientific  value,  that  little  more  than 
a  repetition,  or  perhaps,  in  some  respects,  a  modification  of  his  results 
could  be  expected  from  my  participation  in  this  year's  operations. 
It  is  a  pleasure  for  me  to  state  that  our  cruise  —  extending  farther 
to  the  east  in  the  Gulf  Stream,  between  Cuba  and  the  Bahamas  on  one 
side  and  Florida  on  the  other,  than  those  of  previous  years  —  confirmed 
in  every  feature  the  conclusions  already  reached  by  M.  Pourtales.  His 
results  may  therefore  be  considered  as  settled  facts,  deserving  the  fullest 
confidence  of  the  scientific  world,  and  requiring  only,  in  order  to  obtain 
the  appreciation  they  deserve,  that  kind  of  publicity  which  illustrated  de- 
scription-; and  maps  can  give  them.  When  thus  made  known,  it  will  be  seen 
that  we  owe  to  the  Coast  Survey  the  first  broad  and  comprehensive  basis 
for  an  exploration  of  the  sea-bottom  on  a  large  scale,  opening  a  new  era 
in  zoological  and  geological  research.  I  speak  thus  emphatically,  be- 
cause the  data  hitherto  obtained  concerning  the  animals  of  the  deep 
sea  have  been  rather  isolated,  and  not  methodically  connected  with  one 


86  I  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

another,  and  with  a  .study  of  the  inhabitants  of  shallower  waters,  and  the 
immediate  seashore  ;  nor  have  the  previous  collections  been  made  over 
extensive  areas,  and  so  combined  that  every  newly  surveyed  point  was 
determined  with  reference  to  earlier  investigations,  as  was  the  case  with 
the  dredgings  of  the  last  two  years.  In  your  recent  surveys  of  the 
Gulf,  the  dredging  operations  have  been  pursued  over  an  area  so  large 
as  to  preclude  the  possibility  of  any  accidental  and  ill-considered  conclu- 
sions. 1  should  not  speak  in  such  terms  of  investigations  in  which  I 
have  had  a  share,  bad  not  the  main  results  been  secured  by  M.  Pour- 
tales  before  I  joined  the  cruise. 

There  can  be  no  doubt  now  that  the  area  occupied  by  the  reef 
which  rises  to  the  surface  of  the  ocean  has  a  peculiar,  independent 
fauna,  totally  distinct  from  that  of  deeper  waters.  To  this  area  belong 
those  species  of  corals  known  as  the  true  builders  of  coral-reefs,  and  to 
which,  in  a  previous  report  to  your  predecessor,  I  gave,  on  that  account, 
the  name  of  reef-builders.  The  range  of  this  fauna  in  depth  is  very 
limited  ;  it  does  not  extend  below  ten  fathoms,  and  is  mainly  occupied 
by  corals  acquiring  in  their  aggregate  communities  very  large  dimen- 
sions, such  as  Madrepora  palmata,  cervicornis,  and  prolifera,  Porites 
astrceoides,  Oculina  diffusa,  Eusmilia  fastigiata,  Astrcea  annularis  and 
cavernosa,  Tsophyllia  dipsacea,  Manicina  areolata,  Colpophyllia  gyrosa, 
Meandrina  mammosa,  and  other  species  of  the  genus,  Diploma,  cere- 
briformis,  Siderastrcea  radians  and  siderea,  Agaricia  agarieites,  Myce- 
dium  elephantotus,  Millepora  alcicomis,  the  coarser  and  larger  kinds 
of  Gorgonia,  and  a  host  of  animals  of  all  classes  living  in  and  upon  the 
reef,  among  which  Rhipidigorgia  flahellum,  Diadema  antillarum,  and 
Strombus  gigas  are  the  most  conspicuous.  From  this  region  (the  only 
one  of  the  kind  which  has  been  carefully  surveyed  by  naturalists)  I 
formerly  secured  those  large  and  beautiful  collections  of  corals  which 
now  adorn  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 

Beyond  this  area,  the  width  of  which  varies  along  the  coast  of 
Florida  from  a  few  miles,  in  (he  neighborhood  of  Cape  Florida,  to 
twelve,  fifteen,  or  twenty  miles  and  more  oil'  Cape  Sable,  we  find 
another  zone,  rather  sterile,  or  at  all  events  not  marked  by  that  rich- 
ness of  animal  and  vegetable  lif»!  which  characterizes  the  reef  range. 
The  bottom  of  this  second  zone  is  a  muddy  mass  of  dead  and  broken 
shells,  broken  coral.-,  and  coarse  coral-sand ;  it  is  chiefly  inhabited  by 
worms,  and  such  shells  as   by  their  nature   seek  soil  of  this   character, 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  365 

with  a  few  small  species  of  living  corals,  some  Haleyonarians,  and  a 
good  many  Alga?.  From  the  nature  of  the  bottom  of  this  zone,  espe- 
cially at  a  depth  of  from  twenty  to  forty  fathoms,  it  is  evident  that  a 
large  number  of  dead  Mollusks  and  Zoophytes  are  scattered  over  its 
surface  by  the  agency  of  the  currents  and  tides,  after  they  have  been 
broken  up. 

I  do  not  now  enumerate  the  particular  animals  and  plants  found 
in  this  and  the  other  submarine  regions  herein  described,  because  the 
work  of  identification  is  as  yet  very  incomplete  ;  moreover,  some  of 
the  most  common  and  characteristic  species  are  as  yet  neither  de- 
scribed nor  named,  and  would  therefore  be  necessarily  omitted  in  any 
list  of  the  characteristic  species  of  the  Gulf  Stream  fauna.  Indeed, 
for  the  present,  such  a  list  could  only  be  an  enumeration  of  species 
with  which  naturalists  have  become  acquainted  from  specimens  cast 
ashore,  and  would  give  no  idea  of  the  actual  living  fauna;  in  their 
natural  habitat.  On  that  account  it  is  particularly  desirable  that  the 
scientific  harvest  of  these  surveys  should  speedily  be  made  known, 
accompanied  by  the  fullest  illustrations* 

A  third  region  or  zone,  beginning  at  a  depth  of  about  fifty  or  sixty 
fathoms  and  extending  to  a  depth  of  from  two  hundred  to  two  hundred 
and  fifty  fathoms,  constitutes  a  broad  slanting  table-land,  beyond  which 
the  sea-bottom  sinks  abruptly  into  deeper  waters.  The  floor  of  this 
zone  is  rocky  ;  it  is,  in  fact,  a  limestone  conglomerate,  a  kind  of  luma- 
chelle,  composed  entirely  of  the  solid  remains  of  organized  beings,  a 
true  concretionary  limestone,  such  as  we  might  find  in  several  levels 
of  the  Jurassic  formation,  and  more  especially  in  that  horizon  which 
geologists  call  "  Coral  Rag."  We  have  here  a  plateau  extending  for 
more  than  a  hundred  miles,  beginning  off  the  Marquesas  and  stretch- 
ing to  Cape  Florida,  corresponding  to  Coral  Rag.  It  varies  from 
eight  to  ten,  twelve,  or  twenty  miles  in  width,  —  the  greatest  spread 
facing  Sombrero,  —  and  is  built  up  entirely  of  animals  now  living 
upon  its  surface,  and  constantly  increasing  the  thickness  of  the  bed 

*  The  corals  found  in  the  two  earlier  cruises  are  described  by  M.  Pourtales,  in  Num- 
bers 6  and  7  of  the  Bulletin,  pp.  103-141.  A  preliminary  report  on  the  Echinoderms 
is  printed  in  Number  9  of  the  Bulletin,  pp.  253-  361.  As  I  have  not  enumerated  the 
species  therein  described,  it  may  not  be  out  of  place  here  to  remark,  that,  though  I 
have  made  some  additions  smce,  this  report  was  prepared  before  Numbers  9,  10,  11, 
and  12  of  the  Bulletin  had  been  handed  in.  The  remarks  upon  the  growth  of  corals 
were  written  immediately  after  my  return  from  Florida,  in  May  last. 


366  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

by  their  accumulation.  Large  fragments  of  this  rock  were  brought 
up  by  the  dredge;  so  that  its  structure  and  characteristic  remains 
of  animals  could  be  studied  at  leisure.  I  do  not  know  that  there 
is  on  record  in  the  annals  of  our  science  a  more  direct  illustration 
of  the  manner  in  which  mountain  masses  of  calcareous  deposits  have 
been  accumulated  on  the  bottom  of  the  ocean.  The  animals  inhabiting 
this  plateau  are  innumerable,  and  as  varied  as  those  found  along  the 
shores  most  fertile  in  animal  productions.  A  great  variety  of  corals  oc- 
cur there,  all  of  small  size,  and,  strange  to  say,  belonging  to  genera  never 
known  before  from  our  sea-shores.  Their  aggregate  affinity  is  indeed 
not  with  the  living  corals,  but  rather  with  the  types  of  the  tertiary  and 
cretaceous  periods.  Echinoderms  are  equally  numerous ;  they  are  also 
small  as  compared  to  those  found  nearer  shore,  and  likewise  recall,  by 
their  zoological  affinities,  the  types  characteristic  of  the  cretaceous 
period.  Salenoid  and  Discoidea-like  forms,  never  known  among  living 
Echinoderms  before,  have  been  discovered  on  this  plateau.  Among 
mollusks  I  may  mention  one  species,  —  the  Valuta  Junonia,  hitherto 
considered  the  rarest  shell  from  the  southern  coasts  of  the  United  States, 
and  known  only  from  a  very  few  worn  specimens.  Of  that  species,  which 
is  particularly  interesting  on  account  of  its  close  affinity  with  Valuta 
Lamberti  of  the  Crag,  and  with  Valuta  mutdbilis  of  the  Miocene  beds 
of  Virginia  and  Maryland,  quite  a  number  of  living  specimens,  young  and 
old,  have  been  brought  up  by  the  dredge.  Two  species  of  Brachiopods, 
—  Terehratula  cubensis  Pourt.  and  Waldheimia  floridana  Pourt.  —  are 
extremely  common,  and  contribute  greatly  to  give  this  fauna  an  antique 
character.  Most  of  the  other  mollusks  have  not  yet  been  identified. 
Worms  and  Crustacea  abound  also,  and  a  few  fishes  unknown  to  me 
have  also  been  obtained.     All  these  are  still  undetermined. 

The  extraordinary  richness,  profusion,  and  variety  of  animal  life  dis- 
played upon  this  table-land  amazed  me,  not  only  on  account  of  the  pecu- 
liarity of  the  types,  but  from  the  vast  number  of  individuals  found  to- 
gether.  The  dredge  coming  up  from  such  a  depth,  laden  and  crowded 
with  all  sorts  of  living  creatures,  as  if  it  had  been  dragged  in  shoaler 
waters,  was  indeed  a  rare  and  startling  sight  for  a  naturalist.  Such  a  re- 
sult is  the  more  unexpected,  on  account  of  the  current  impression,  fostered 
by  Edward  Forbes's  and  Captain  RlcAndrew's  extensive,  dredging  oper- 
ations in  the  vEgean  Sea,  that  as  we  descend  below  the  surface  of  the 
ocean  animal  life  gradually  and  steadily  diminishes,  till  in  deep  waters 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  367 

it  entirely  fades  away.  As  we  have  already  seen,  this  is  not  the  case, 
and  Captain  McAndrew  has  himself  lately  helped  to  dispel  the  illusion. 
Nevertheless,  it  is  true  that  a  change  is  perceptible  in  the  character 
and  size  of  animals  inhabiting  respectively  deeper  and  deeper  waters, 
as  compared  with  those  of  the  shallow  coast  zone.  It  may  very  justly 
be  said  that  we  have  in  the  sea  something  corresponding  to  the  alpine 
and  subalpine  flora,  when  contrasting  higher  levels  with  the  plains  ; 
only  that  our  submarine  deep-water  flora,  or  rather  fauna,  consists 
mostly  of  creatures  hitherto  little  known,  or  even  entirely  unknown. 

It  is  a  surprising  fact  that  the  variety  of  marine  plants  does  not  keep 
pace  with  the  variety  of  animals  ;  they  make  a  poor  show  when  com- 
pared with  the  many  and  diversified  sea-weeds  found  in  the  littoral 
mud-flats  and  upon  shoal  rocky  bottoms.  The  sponges,  however,  thrive 
in  deep  waters  better  than  the  ordinary  algoe ;  but  the  large  and  val- 
uable sponges  now  gathered  in  such  quantity  along  the  whole  coast 
of  Florida  are  found  on  the  littoral  shoals  only.  In  deep  water  we 
find,  with  a  variety  of  larger  species,  a  great  number  of  small  species 
of  the  same  type,  and  among  them  a  diminutive  Hyalonema. 

Permit  me  a  suggestion  here.  You  have  repeatedly  commemorated 
the  discovery,  by  officers  of  the  Coast  Survey,  of  some  submarine  ledge 
or  ridge,  or  peculiar  configuration  of  the  sea-bottom,  by  associating 
their  names  with  the  field  of  their  operations.  It  would  be  appropriate 
and  just  that  this  extensive  coral  plateau,  the  characteristic  fauna  of 
which  M.  Pourtales  has  so  faithfully  explored,  should  bear  his  na^ie  and 
be  called  the  "  Pourtales  Plateau." 

To  the  seaward  of  this  coral  table-land,  the  bottom  sinks  rapidly  to 
a  depth  of  four  or  five  hundred  fathoms,  reaching  even  eight  hundred 
fathoms  and  more,  though  our  successive  dredgings  have  hardly  ex- 
tended beyond  seven  hundred  fathoms.  Over  the  whole  of  this  area, 
which  properly  constitutes  the  lower  floor  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  the 
sea-bottom  presents  a  uniform  accumulation  of  thick,  adhesive  mud,* 
in  which  animal  life  is  much  less  profuse  than  upon  the  coral  plateau. 
It  cannot,  however,  be  assumed  that  this  diminution  of  life  is  owing 

*  When  dried,  this  deep-sea  mud,  with  its  innumerable  and  characteristic  Forami- 
nifera,  remarkably  resembles  the  chalk-marls  of  the  cretaceous  formation.  The  green- 
sand  formation  I  have  not  investigated  myself,  but  it  has  been  minutely  studied  by  Mr. 
Pourtales,  who  has  ascertained  that  it  is  the  result  of  a  peculiar  alteration,  disintegra- 
tion, and  final  aggregation  of  Foraminifera. 


368  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

to  the  depth  and  consequent  pressure  of  the  water,  or  to  the  absence 
of  light,  but  rather  to  the  nature  of  the  soil ;  for  we  find  in  it 
many  animals  to  which  such  a  habitat  is  congenial,  —  a  variety  of 
worms,  for  instance,  and  such  shells  as  seek  muddy  bottoms.  I  have 
not  the  least  doubt  that  a  rocky  foundation  at  eight  hundred  or  even 
a  thousand  and  more  fathoms  would  yield  a  large  harvest  of  animals  ; 
unquestionably  fewer  than  are  found  in  shallower  waters,  but  yet  as 
varied  and  as  numerous  comparatively  as  are  the  Alpine  plants  on  the 
very  limits  of  perpetual  snow,  wherever,  in  various  latitudes,  that  vege- 
tation can  be  compared  with  the  flora  of  lower  levels.  If  we  have  not 
succeeded  in  finding  such  a  fauna  in  the  deepest  waters  of  the  Gulf 
Stream,  I  hold  that  the  cause  lies  chiefly  in  the  absence  of  rocky  bot- 
toms in  the  deepest  parts  of  the  basin  through  which  the  great  current 
of  our  southern  coast  flows.  The  character  of  the  mud  in  the  chan- 
nel of  the  Gulf  Stream  does  not  warrant  the  supposition  that  the 
mud  deposits  derived  from  the  turbid  waters  of  the  Amazons  and 
Orinoco  have  extended  as  far  north  as  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  even 
though  the  great  equatorial  current  sweeps  past  the  mouths  of  these 
rivers. 

There  is  one  subject  of  scientific  research,  the  connection  of  which 
with  deep-sea  soundings  cannot  fail  to  lead  to  unexpected  results. 
"When  attempting  to  explain  the  structure  of  the  stratified  rocks,  and 
many  other  phenomena  connected  with  the  general  appearance  of  the 
earth's  surface,  geologists  have  not  hesitated  to  ascribe,  in  a  general 
way,  the  facts  under  observation  to  the  agency  of  water ;  but  they 
have  rarely  entered  into  such  specific  details  as  would  establish  a 
causal  connection  between  all  these  facts,  and  the  cause  appealed  to. 
In  proportion  as  the  sea-bottom  becomes  more  extensively  known,  and 
the  character  of  the  materials  lying  beneath  the  water  and  their  mode 
of  arrangement  are  ascertained  with  greater  precision,  more  accurate 
comparisons,  in  consequence  of  which  current  views  may  have  to 
undergo  considerable  modifications,  will  certainly  be  made  between 
geological  formations  of  past  age-,  including  all  their  deposits  of 
various  kinds,  and  the  materials  at  present  scattered  in  special  ways 
over  the  ocean  floor. 

From  what  I  have  seen  of  the  deep-sea  bottom,  I  am  already  led  to 
infer  that  among  the  rocks  forming  the  bulk  of  the  stratified  crust  of 
our  globe,  from  the  oldest  to  the  youngest  formation,  there  are  probably 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  369 

none  which  have  been  formed  in  very  deep  waters.  If  this  be  so,  we 
shall  have  to  admit  that  the  areas  now  respectively  occupied  by  our 
continents,  as  circumscribed  by  the  two  hundred  fathom  curve  or 
thereabout,  and  the  oceans,  at  greater  depth,  have  from  the  beginning 
retained  their  relative  outline  and  position  ;  the  continents  having  at 
all  times  been  areas  of  gradual  upheaval  with  comparatively  slight 
oscillations  of  rise  and  subsidence,  and  the  oceans  at  all  times  areas  of 
gradual  depression  with  equally  slight  oscillations.  Now  that  the  geo- 
logical constitution  of  our  continent  is  satisfactorily  known  over  the 
greatest  part  of  its  extent,  it  seems  to  me  to  afford  the  strongest  evi- 
dence that  this  has  been  the  case ;  while  there  is  no  support  whatever 
for  the  assumption  that  any  part  of  it  has  sunk  again  to  any  very  great 
depth  after  its  rise  above  the  surface  of  the  ocean.  The  fact  that  upon 
the  American  continent,  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  the  geological 
formations  crop  out,  in  their  regular  succession,  from  the  oldest  azoic 
and  primordial  deposits  to  the  cretaceous  formation,  without  the  slightest 
indication  of  a  great  subsequent  subsidence,  seems  to  me  the  most  com- 
plete and  direct  demonstration  of  my  proposition.  Of  the  western  part 
of  the  continent  I  am  not  prepared  to  speak  with  the  same  confidence. 
Moreover,  the  position  of  the  cretaceous  and  tertiary  formations,  along 
the  low  grounds  east  of  the  Alleghany  range,  is  another  indication  of 
the  permanence  of  the  oeean  trough,  on  the  margin  of  which  these  more 
recent  beds  have  been  formed.  I  am  well  aware  that  in  a  compara- 
tively recent  period  portions  of  Canada  and  the  United  States,  which 
now  stand  six  or  seven  hundred  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  have 
been  under  water ;  but  this  has  not  changed  the  configuration  of  the 
continent,  if  we  admit  that  the  latter  is  in  reality  circumscribed  by 
the  two  hundred  fathom  curve  of  depth. 

Geologists  have  appealed  very  freely  to  oceanic  currents  as  ac- 
counting for  the  presence  of  loose  materials  upon  the  surface  of  the 
earth.  But  now  that  the  actual  mode,  of  distribution  of  such  loose  ma- 
terials, under  the  action  of  extensive  and  powerful  currents,  begins  to  be 
known,  those  who  explain  the  facts  in  this  way  are  bound  to  show  that 
their  arrangement  actually  agrees  with  the  effects  of  oceanic  currents. 
J  must  confess  that  I  have  looked  in  vain,  in  the  trough  of  the  Gulf 
Stream,  for  traces  of  the  characteristic  mud  which  pours  from  the 
mouth   of  the  Amazons  in  quantities  sufficient  to  discolor  the  waters 

of  the  ocean  for  a  great  distance  from  shore;  and  yet  the  equatorial 

47 


370  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

current  of  the  Atlantic  is  one  of  the  greatest  and  most  powerful  of  all 
known  currents. 

Another  side  of  this  subject  is  also  immediately  connected  with 
deep-sea  soundings.  Geologists,  and  especially  those  of  the  school  of 
Lyell,  have  again  and  again  assumed  the  slow  rising  of  extensive 
tracts  of  land  from  beneath  the  water,  and  taken  all  sorts  of  loose  ma- 
terials irregularly  scattered  over  the  surface  of  the  land  as  evidence  of 
its  former  submersion.  But  since  the  dredge  has  been  applied  to  the 
exploration  of  the  deep,  and  a  great  variety  of  animals,  in  a  profusion 
rivalling  that  of  shoal  waters,  have  been  brought  up,  not  only  from 
the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  land,  but  at  various  distances,  in  increas- 
ing depth,  from  one  to  two  and  even  many  hundred  fathoms,  no  ob- 
server is  justified  in  considering  extensive  deposits  of  loose  materials 
as  marine  in  which  no  trace  of  marine  organic  remains  are  found.  The 
very  mud  and  sand  of  the  deep  teem  with  innumerable  microscopic 
living  beings,  the  solid  parts  of  which  are  easily  detected  in  the  small- 
est samples  of  marine  deposits,  and  may  therefore  afford  a  satisfactory 
test  where  larger  animals  or  plants  are  wanting.  Now,  after  surveying 
the  whole  width  of  our  AVestern  prairies,  without  finding  anywhere  a 
sign  of  marine  animals  or  plants,  I  cannot  see  that  there  is  any  evidence 
of  their  marine  origin,  or  of  the  influence  of  oceanic  currents  in  accu- 
mulating or  distributing  the  loose  materials  scattered  over  those  vast 
plains.  On  the  other  hand,  I  have  ascertained  that  the  foundation  rock, 
upon  which  these  materials  rest,  is  everywhere  polished,  grooved,  and 
scratched  in  the  same  characteristic  manner  as  the  well-known  glaciated 
surfaces,  wherever  exposed.  I  have  seen  such  polished  rocks  in  the 
valley  of  the  River  Platte,  not  far  from  Omaha,  and  am  now  satisfied 
that  the  whole  extent  of  the  country,  between  the  Alleghanies  and  the 
Rocky  Mountains,  was  one  unbroken  glacier  bottom.  The  scratched 
pebbles  found  among  the  loose  materials  of  the  great  prairies  confirm 
this  view.  For  similar  reasons,  I  am  satisfied  that  the  valley  of  the 
Amazons  has  not  been  under  the  level  of  the  ocean  since  the  tertiary 
period. 

The  most  perplexing  feature  disclosed  to  me  by  our  deep-sea  dredg- 
ings  and  by  my  observations  of  the  sea-shones  along  the  Gulf  Stream, 
on  the  Florida  and  on  the  Cuba  side,  is  the  irregularity  of  the  strati- 
fication of  the  Spanish  banks  as  compared  with  the  deposits  on  the 
American  side. 


MUSEUM    OF    COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  371 

Taken  as  a  whole,  the  trough  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  between  Cuba 
and  Florida,  as  well  as  farther  east  and  north,  presents  features  in  its 
configuration  widely  different  from  the  relief  of  any  equally  extensive 
area  of  the  dry  surface  of  our  continents.  The  floor  of  this  basin  is 
gradually  and  slowly  shelving  from  the  Florida  coast  to  greater  and 
greater  depth,  while  on  the  Cuban  side  it  is  rapidly  rising  again.  The 
slope  is,  indeed,  so  rapid  on  the  Spanish  shore  that,  at  a  distance  of  less 
than  two  miles  from  the  abrupt  shore  bluffs,  the  depth  of  the  trough 
is  generally  from  3,000  to  4,000  feet,  and  here  and  there  reaches 
5,000  feet  at  a  slightly  greater  distance.  We  have  thus  here  a  slope  as 
steep  as  that  of  the  steepest  mountain  ranges  of  that  height,  and  even 
steeper  ;  and,  what  is  most  surprising,  the  great  inclination  of  this  floor 
is  not  the  result  of  uplifted  and  slanting  beds  of  rock,  but  unmistakably 
the  effect  of  the  abrading  action  of  the  great  current  upon  older  coral 
formations,  judging  from  the  aspect  of  the  shore  bluffs,  and  their  evident 
continuity  with  the  general  slope  from  the  water-edge  down  to- the 
greatest  depth  reached  with  the  plumb-line  and  the  dredge.  This  dif- 
ference in  the  inclination  of  the  slopes  on  the  American  and  on  the 
Cuban  sides  of  the  basin  obtains  for  more  than  one  hundred  miles,  — 
from  the  Tortugas  to  Cape  Florida,  —  with  the  peculiarity  only  that  in 
the  direction  of  Salt  Key  Bank  there  rises,  on  the  Cuban  side,  a  low 
ridge  from  the  deeper  part  of  the  trough,  trending  nearly  parallel  with 
the  coast.  Another  remarkable  feature  of  the  edge  of  the  jrreat 
Florida  reef  consists  in  its  having  a  less  abrupt  slope  to  the  seaward 
than  is  ascribed  to  all  the  coral  reefs  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Neverthe- 
less, the  seaward  slope  of  the  reef  is  really  steeper  than  the  shoreward 
slope  ;  and  this  is,  it  appears,  an  essential  element  in  the  growth  and  rise 
of  all  the  coral  reefs. 

But  while  the  great  coral  reef  of  Florida  presents  this  exceptional 
character,  the  Bahamas  and  the  reefs  to  the  northeast  of  Cuba  ex- 
hibit very  abrupt  slopes,  and  a  great  depth  is  reached  close  to  the 
shores  of  these  Banks ;  so  that  the  Bahamas  resemble  the  coral-reefs 
of  the  Pacific  much  more  than  the  reefs  of  the  coast  of  Florida. 

The  whole  group  of  banks  and  keys  embraced  between  Double- 
headed  Shot  Key,  Salt  Key,  and  Aneuilla  Key  is  a  very  instructive  com- 
bination of  the  phenomena  of  building  and  destruction.  The  whole 
group  is  a  flat  bank  covered  by  four  or  five  and  occasionally  six  fath- 
oms  of  water,   with  fine    sandy  bottom;  evidently  corals  reduced  to 


372  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

oblithes  of  various  sizes,  from  fine  powder  to  coarse  sand,  mingled  with 
broken  shells,  among  which  a  few  living  specimens  are  occasionally 
found.  The  margin  of  the  bank  is  encircled  on  several  points  by  rocky 
ridges  of  the  most  diversified  appearance,  and  at  others  edged  by  sand- 
dunes.  A  close  examination  and  comparison  of  the  different  keys  show 
that  these  different  formations  are  in  fact  linked  together,  and  represent 
various  stages  of  the  accumulation,  consolidation,  and  cementation  of  the 
same  materials.  On  the  flat  top  of  the  bank  the  loose  materials  are 
pounded  down  to  fine  sand  ;  in  course  of  time  this  sand  is  thrown  up 
upon  the  shoalest  portions  of  the  bank,  and  it  is  curious  to  notice  that 
these  shoalest  parts  are  its  very  edge,  along  which  corals  have  formed 
reefs  which  have  become  the  basis  of  the  dry  banks.  The  foundation 
rock,  as  far  as  tide,  wind,  and  wave  may  carry  the  coarser  materials, 
consists  of  a  conglomeration  of  coarser  oblithes,  rounded  fragments  of 
corals,  or  broken  shells,  and  even  larger  pieces  of  a  variety  of  corals 
and  conchs,  all  the  species  being  those  now  found  living  upon  the 
bank,  among  which  Strombus  gigas  is  the  most  common ;  beside  that, 
Astrcea.  annularis,  Siderastrcea  siderea,  and  Mcandrina  mammosa  pre- 
vail. The  shells  of  Strombus  are  so  common  that  they  give  great 
solidity  and  hardness  to  the  rock.  The  stratification  is  somewhat 
irregular,  the  beds  slanting  towards  the  sea  at  an  angle  of  about  seven 
degrees.  Upon  this  foundation  rock  immense  masses  of  Strombus, 
dead  shells,  and  corals  have  been  thrown  in  banks,  evidently  the 
beginning  of  deposits  similar  to  those  already  consolidated  below; 
but  there  is  this  difference  in  their  formation,  namely,  that  while  the 
foundation  rock  is  slightly  inclined,  and  never  rises  above  the  level 
of  high  water,  the  accumulation  of  loose  materials  above  water-level 
forms  steeper  banks,  varying  from  fifteen  to  twenty  and  thirty  degrees. 
In  some  localities  broken  shells  prevail  ;  in  other,  coarse  and  fine 
sand;  and  the  ridges  finis  formed,  evidently  by  the  action  of  high 
waves,  rise  fo  about  twelve  and  fifteen  feet.  This  is  evidently  the 
foundation  for  the  accumulation  of  liner  sand  driven  by  the  wind 
over  these  ridges  and  forming  high  sand-dunes,  held  together  by  a 
variety  of  plant-,  among  which  a  trailing  vine  (Batatas  Uttoralis), 
various  grasses,  and  shrubs  are  the  mosl  conspicuous.  These  dunes 
rise  to  about  twenty  feet ;  on  their  lea  side  and  almost  to  their  sum- 
mit grows  a  little  palmetto.  The  sand  of  the  dunes  is  still  loose,  but 
here  and  there  shows  a  tendency  to  incrustation  at  the  surface.     The 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  373 

slope  of  these  dunes  is  rather  steep,  sometimes  over  thirty  degrees, 
and  steeper  to  the  seaward  than  on  the  landward  side. 

In  the  interior  of  Salt  Key  there  is  a  pool  of  intensely  salt  water, 
the  tint  of  which  is  pinkish  or  flesh-colored,  owing  to  the  accumulation 
of  a  little  Alga.  When  agitated  by  the  wind,  this  pool  is  hedged  all 
round  by  foam  of  the  purest  white,  arising  from  the  frothing  of  the 
viscous  water.  Along  the  edge  the  accumulation  of  this  microscopic 
plant  forms  large  cakes,  not  unlike  decaying  meat,  and  of  a  very  offen- 
sive odor.  The  foundation  rock  of  this  key  is  exactly  like  what  Gressly 
described  as  the  "  facies  corallien  "  of  the  Jurassic  formation  ;  while 
the  deposit  in  deep  water,  consisting  chiefly  of  muddy  lime  particles, 
answers  to  his  "facies  vaseux." 

Double-headed  Shot  Key  is  a  long,  crescent-shaped  ridge  of  rounded 
knolls,  not  unlike  "  roches  moutonnees,"  at  intervals  interrupted  by 
breaks,  so  that  the  whole  looks  like  a  dismantled  wall,  broken  down  here 
and  there  to  the  water's  edge.  The  whole  ridge  is  composed  of  the  finest 
oolithes,  pretty  regularly  stratified,  but  here  and  there  like  torrential 
deposits  ;  the  stratification  is  more  distinctly  visible  where  the  rocks  have 
been  weathered  at  the  surface  into  those  rugged  and  furrowed  slopes 
familiarly  known  as  "  karren  "  in  Switzerland.  It  is  plain  that  we  have 
here  the  same  formation  as  on  Salt  Key,  only  older,  with  more  thor- 
oughly cemented  materials.  The  uniformity  of  the  minute  oolithes 
leaves  no  doubt  that  the  sand  must  have  been  blown  up  by  the  wind 
and  accumulated  in  the  form  of  high  dunes  before  it  became  consolidated. 
The  general  aspect  of  Double-headed  Shot  Key  is  very  different  from 
that  of  Salt  Key.  The  whole  surface  is  barren,  — not  a  tree,  hardly  a 
shrub,  and  the  scantiest  creeping  vegetation.  The  rock  is  very  hard, 
ringing  under  the  hammer,  and  reminds  one  of  the  bald  summits  of  the 
Jura,  such  as  Tete  de  Rang,  near  La-Chaux-de-Fond.  It  is  evident  that 
what  is  beginning  on  Salt  Key  has  here  been  not  only  completed,  but  is 
undergoing  extensive  disintegration  in  Double-headed  Shot  Key,  both 
by  the  action  of  atmospheric  agents  over  the  surface  and  by  the  action 
of  tides  and  winds  against  the  base  of  the  key. 

Among  these  older  oolithic  deposits,  forming  the  main  range  of 
Orange  Key  and  of  Double-headed  Shot  Key,  we  recognize  formations 
of  more  recent  date,  occupying  the  cavities  of  ancient  pot-holes,  which 
have  gradually  been  filled  with  materials  identical  with  those  of  the 
older  deposits.     The  pot-holes  themselves  show  nothing  very  peculiar ; 


374  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

there  are  many  such  upon  these  keys,  —  some  large  ones  many  yards  in 
diameter  and  others  quite  small,  —  evidently  formed  by  the  wearing  ac- 
tion of  loose  pieces  of  harder  coral  rocks  thrown  upon  the  key  by  great 
waves,  and  only  occasionally  set  in  motion  by  the  waters  dashing  over 
the  key  during  heavy  storms.  The  pot-holes  nearest  the  water-edge 
are  the  most  recent,  and  are  mostly  clean  excavations,  either  entirely 
empty  or  containing  sand  and  limestone  pebbles  lying  loose  at  the 
bottom  of  the  holes.  Some  of  these  excavations  are  circular,  others 
oblong,  still  others  have  the  form  of  winding  caves  opening  towards 
the  sea  or  upon  the  surface  of  the  key.  Beyond  the  reach  of  ordi- 
nary tides  and  of  the  waves  raised  by  moderate  winds,  the  pot-holes 
are  generally  lined  with  coatings  of  solid,  compact,  and  hard  lime- 
stone, varying  from  a  thin  layer  to  a  deposit  of  several  inches  in 
thickness,  and  following  all  the  sinuosities  of  the  cavities  in  which  they 
are  accumulating.  It  is  plain  from  their  structure  that  these  coatings 
are  a  subaerial  formation,  increasing  by  the  successive  accumulation  of 
limestone  particles  left  upon  the  older  rock  by  the  evaporation  of  water 
thrown  upon  the  key  when  the  ocean  is  so  violently  agitated  as  to 
dash  over  the  whole  key.  Frequently  the  hollow  of  these  coated 
pot-holes  is  further  filled  with  consolidated  oolithes  ;  or  thin  layers  of 
minute  oolithes  alternate  with  a  coat  of  compact  limestone,  throughout 
the  excavation,  which  often  has  been  filled  again  in  this  way  up  to  the 
general  level  of  the  surrounding  surface.  Occasionally  these  regen- 
erated surfaces  are  again  hollowed  out  by  the  action  of  storms,  and  the 
result  is  a  dismantled  pot-hole,  in  which  their  structure  and  the  mode 
of  their  filling  is  distinctly  exhibited. 

The  stratification  of  the  main  mass  of  these  keys  is  very  peculiar. 
Though  evidently  the  result  of  an  accumulation  of  oolithes  thrown  up 
by  high  waves,  the  beds  are  pretty  regular  in  themselves,  but  slant  in 
every  direction  towards  the  sea,  showing  that  they  were  deposited 
under  the  action  of  winds  blowing  at  different  times  from  every 
quarter.  It  is  further  noteworthy,  that,  while  the  thicker  layers  consist 
of  oolithes  readily  distinguishable  to  the  naked  eye,  there  are  at  inter- 
vals thin  layers  of  very  hard,  compact  limestone,  alternating  with  the 
oolithic  strata,  which  have  no  doubt  been  formed  in  the  same  manner 
as  the  coating  of  the  pot-holes. 

As  in  their  general  aspect  the  coral  formations  of  the  Cuban  side  of 
the  Gulf  Stream  differ  from  those  of  the  American  side,  so  do  also  the 


MUSEUM   OF    COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  375 

rooks  of  the  latter  differ  from  the  rocks  observed  upon  the  banks  of 
Salt  Key,  Double-headed  Shot  Key,  and  Orange  Key.  We  find  upon 
the  Florida  reefs,  as  well  as  between  the  innumerable  keys  stretching 
along  the  American  coast,  and  upon  the  coral  plateau  sloping  towards 
the  main  trough  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  extensive  beds  of  regularly  strati- 
fied rocks  of  various  kinds.  I  have  already  described  the  limestone 
conglomerate  of  the  Pourtales  plateau,  p.  365.  Such  a  formation  exists 
nowhere  else  within  the  range  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  unless  it  should  be 
hereafter  ascertained  that  a  similar  deposit  extends  along  the  submarine 
border  of  our  continent,  edging  the  American  wall  of  the  deeper  part 
of  the  Atlantic  trough.  But  in  the  shoal  waters  intervening  between 
the  coast  of  the  peninsula  of  Florida  and  the  keys  and  reefs  there 
exist  various  deposits  of  an  entirely  different  structure,  the  accumulation 
and  increase  of  which  is  constantly  going  on.  The  most  extensive  of 
these  formations  is  a  regularly  stratified  oolithic  rock,  the  grains  of 
which  vary  from  imperceptible  granules  to  larger  and  larger  oolithes, 
approaching  the  dimensions  of  pisolithes,  and  cemented  together  by  an 
amorphous  mass  of  limestone  mud.  The  oolithes  themselves  are  formed 
in  the  manner  first  described  by  Leopold  von  Buch.  Hard  particles  of 
the  most  heterogeneous  materials,  reduced  to  the  smallest  dimensions, 
and  tossed  to  and  fro  in  water  charged  with  lime,  are  gradually  coated 
with  a  thin  film  of  limestone,  and  then  another  and  another,  until  it 
sinks  to  the  bottom,  to  be  further  rolled  up  and  down  the  sloping  shore 
bottom  until  it  becomes  cemented  with  other  similar  grains,  and  forms 
part  of  the  growing  limestone  bed.  Of  course  the  finer  oolithes  are  seen 
nearest  the  shore  line,  and  it  is  instructive  to  see  at  low  tide  the  little 
ripples  of  successive  larger  oolithes  left  dry  as  the  water  subsides. 
Naturally  these  materials  are  frequently  thrown  up  along  the  beaches 
in  layers  of  varying  thickness,  and  in  course  of  time  become  cemented, 
and  are  transformed  into  solid  rock,  over  which  crusts  of  hard,  compact 
limestone  are  in  the  end  formed  by  the  evaporation  of  calcareous  water 
dashed  upon  the  dry  surfaces. 

In  very  shallow  waters,  which  are  not  powerfully  affected  by  tidal 
movements,  and  upon  the  bottom  of  which  no  oolithes  are  forming,  we 
find  extensive  beds  of  a  dull  amorphous  limestone,  formed  of  lime-mud, 
alternating  with  seams  of  a  more  compact,  hard  limestone,  in  which  a 
few  oolithes  may  occasionally  be  seen  that  were  floated  over  the  flats 
in   which    such    formations   are    going  on.      These    deposits   resemble 


376  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

the  marly  limestone  of  the  Oxford  beds.  Of  course  these  different 
rocks  may  alternate  with  one  another,  as,  owing  to  the  increase  of  the 
whole  formation,  the  conditions  for  the  deposition  of  one  kind  of  rock 
may  be  followed  by  those  favoring  another  combination.  Afnun,  in 
consequence  of  the  changes  in  the  direction  of  the  currents,  or  as  the 
result  of  a  heavy  gale,  considerable  deposits  which  have  been  goin"-  on 
regularly  for  a  long  time  may  suddenly  be  worn  away  and  destroyed, 
giving  rise  in  turn  to  the  formation  of  conglomerates  made  up  of  lime- 
stone fragments  of  various  structure,  united  together  into  very  pecu- 
liar conglomeratic  pudding-stone  with  angular  materials.  The  compact 
limestones  are  frequently  as  hard  as  the  hardest  limestones  of  the 
secondary  formation,  have  a  conchoidal  fracture  like  the  most  compact 
Muschelkalk  of  the  Triasic  period,  and  may  ring  under  the  hammer. 

Most  of  the  keys  consist  of  broken  corals  thrown  up  by  the  waves, 
including  fragments  of  shells,  sea-urchins,  and  occasionally  bones  of  sea- 
turtles  and  fishes.  At  the  Dry  Tortugas  and  at  the  Marquesas,  how- 
ever, some  of  the  keys  are  entirely  made  up  of  the  decomposed  frag- 
ments of  corallines  cemented  together.  The  crescent-shaped  joints  of 
a  large  species  of  Opuntia  are  most  prominent  among  them. 

Nowhere,  within  the  range  of  the  Gulf  Stream  and  its  borders,  have 
I  -<en  a  rock  which  could  be  supposed  to  have  been  formed  by  the 
materials  accumulating  in  the  greater  depth  of  its  trough,  such  as  I 
have  described  above,  p.  3C7.  And  no  rock  in  the  whole  Jurassic  for- 
mation could  have  been  formed  out  of  the  kind  of  materials  which  are 
found  in  the  deeper  parts  of  the  Atlantic  basin,  along  the  American 
shores ;  I  therefore  do  not  believe  that  any  of  the  rocks  of  the  Jura 
and  the  Suabian  Alp  have  been  deposited  in  very  deep  waters. 

The  extensive  area  occupied  by  the  keys  and  reefs  of  Florida,  in- 
cluding the  sloping  coral  plateau  of  the  American  side  of  the  Gulf  Stream 
bottom,  may  fairly  be  compared  to  the  Jurassic  formation,  as  it  stretches 
across  Central  Europe  and  farther  east  in  the  direction  of  the  Caucasus 
and  Himalaya  Mountains.  Indeed,  the  Jurassic  formation,  as  a  whole, 
bears  the  same  relation  to  the  older  deposits  upon  which  it  rests,  as  the 
modern  American  coral  formation  sustains  to  the  older  parts  of  the 
coast  of  our  continent.  During  the  geological  middle  ages,  the  Ju- 
rassic formation  was  the  submarine  margin  of  a  growing  continent,  as 
the  Pourtales  plateau  forms  at  present  the  southern  margin  of  North 
America. 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE  ZOOLOGY.  377 

These  facts  have  an  immediate  bearing  upon  the  question  of  the 
origin  of  submarine  basins  as  compared  with  the  inequalities  of  the 
mainland.  The  configuration  and  relief  of  our  continents,  as  far  as 
they  are  not  the  result  of  later  denudations,  have  been  determined  by 
uplifts  and  the  gradual  rise  of  the  land  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and 
hence  have  arisen  the  fractured  ridges  of  mountain  ranges,  with  their 
upright  crests ;  while  the  areas  of  the  great  oceanic  basins  are  surfaces 
of  depression  or  subsidence,  upon  which  prominent  inequalities  would 
of  necessity  be  wanting,  from  the  very  fact  that  the  breaks,  where 
any  occurred,  must  be  turned  downward.  If  this  view  is  correct,  it 
naturally  follows  that  the  main  outlines  and  circumscription  of  the  con- 
tinents and  of  the  oceans  must  have  been  determined  at  the  very  be- 
ginning of  the  formation  of  inequalities  upon  the  earth's  surface,  and 
remained  essentially  the  same  through  all  geological  ages,  varying  only 
as  to  their  relative  height  and  depth,  as  well  as  to  their  respective 
extension. 

Such  considerations  enable  us  now  to  raise  the  question  of  the  age 
of  the  Gulf  Stream.  Our  present  knowledge  of  the  atmospheric  and 
oceanic  currents  justifies  the  assumption  that,  —  owing  to  the  rotation 
of  the  earth  upon  its  axis,  and  taking  for  granted  that  the  latter  has 
never  changed  its  poles,  —  the  great  equatorial  currents,  fostered  by 
the  trade-winds,  must  flow  in  an  east-westerly  direction  and  be  fed 
by  northerly  and  southerly  polar  currents  slanting  westwards  towards 
the  equator.  As  long  as  the  chain  of  the  Andes  did  not  intercept 
the  Atlantic  equatorial  current,  it  must  have  been  continuous  with  the 
great  Pacific  current ;  and,  as  stated  by  A.  Agassiz,  in  another  report, 
p.  305,  there  is  palajontological  evidence  that  during  the  cretaceous 
period  the  through  channel  was  still  open.  I  may  add  that  I  have  my- 
self seen  the  evidence,  along  the  base  of  the  Eocky  Mountains,  and  on  the 
western  borders  of  the  Amazonian  Valley,  of  the  post-cretaceous  ele- 
vation of  the  great  mountain  range  which  rises  like  a  huge  barrier  on 
the  western  side  of  the  North  and  South  American  Continents,  dividing 
the  Pacific  water-shed  from  that  which  feeds  the  Atlantic.  We  are  thus 
justified  in  assuming  that,  even  during  the  cretaceous  period,  there  ex- 
isted a  great  North  Atlantic  current,  flowing  from  the  northeast  in  a 
southwest  direction,  and  that  the  Gulf  Stream  has  assumed  its  present 
course  in  the  opposite  direction  since  that  period  ;  that  is.  since  the  Rocky 

Mountains  and  Andes  have  joined  hands  across  Central  America.     This 

48 


378  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

result  adds  greatly  to  the  interest  excited  by  the  cretaceous  and  tertiary 
character  of  some  of  the  animals  discovered  by  M.  Pourtales  in  the 
deeper  parts  of  the  Gulf  Stream.  The  true  significance  of  this  fact  is, 
however,  too  foreign  to  this  report  to  justify  a  discussion  of  its  bearing 
upon  the  question  of  the  origir  of  the  present  faunae. 

It  would  be  ofnhe  highest  importance  to  ascertain,  by  actual  observa- 
tion, the  whole  extent  of  the  range  of  the  deep-sea  fauna  recently  dis- 
covered in  the  Gulf  Stream,  between  the  coasts  of  Florida  and  Cuba. 
To  secure  this  information  a  great  amount  of  dredging  must  be  done 
from  the  eastern  shores  of  the  United  States  to  the  deepest  waters  of  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  all  along  the  coast  from  Florida  to  our  Northern  States. 
Until  such  a  comprehensive  survey  has  been  carried  out,  we  can  only 
combine,  as  well  as  we  may,  the  scanty  data  on  hand,  in  our  attempt 
to  form  any  idea  of  the  northerly  extension  of  the  animals  now  known 
to  exist  in  that  part  of  the  Gulf  Stream  flowing  between  Florida,  Cuba, 
and  the  Bahamas.  Happily  the  English  and  the  Scandinavian  natural- 
ists have  already  collected  a  vast  amount  of  information  concerning  the 
marine  fauna;  of  the  coasts  of  Norway  and  the  British  Islands,  and  the  re- 
cent expeditions  undertaken  by  the  Swedish  and  by  the  English  govern- 
ments, with  a  view  of  exploring  the  greatest  depths  of  the  Atlantic 
Ocean,  cannot  fail  to  afford  the  most  valuable  means  of  comparison  be- 
tween the  fauna;  of  the  two  sides  of  the  Atlantic  in  different  latitudes. 
From  the  reports  of  the  British  Association  for  Advancement  of  Science, 
from  the  publications  of  Professor  Sars,  from  the  reports  of  Professors 
Carpenter,  Thompson,  and  Jeffreys,  and  from  the  private  communications 
received  from  Dr.  Smitt  and  Mr.  Ljungraan,  the  naturalists  of  the  Swedish 
man-of-war  Josephine,  which  recently  visited  the  harbor  of  Boston,  we 
have  been  able  to  ascertain  that  some  of  the  species  of  our  deep-sea 
animals  of 'Florida  are  found  far  to  the  north  of  the  British  Islands,  on 
the  western  coast  of  Norway,  and  near  the  Azores,  upon  the  newly  dis- 
covered "Josephine  Bank."  Now  all  these  stations  lie  in  the  course  of 
the  Gulf  Stream,  as  it  divides  into  a  northern  or  Scandinavian  and  a 
southern  or  Lusitanic  branch,  after  crossing  obliquely  the  Atlantic  Ocean 
from  our  own  shores,  in  the  direction  of  Ireland  ;  and  the  question  natu- 
rally arises,  Is  not  this  wide  distribution  of  the  Florida  deep-sea  fauna  to 
be  directly  ascribed  to  the  agency  of  the  Gulf  Stream?  It  can  hardly 
be  otherwise,  at  least  within  certain  limits.  But  at  the  same  time  we 
must  not  forget  that,  in  a  comparatively  recent  period,  the  main  motion 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  379 

of  the  North  Atlantic  must  have  been  in  a  north-southerly  direction,  and 
that  to  this  day  there  is  a  great  northern  current  of  cold  water  sweep- 
ing past  the  eastern  shores  of  the  United  States  ;  while  the  southern 
branch  of  the  Gulf  Stream  Hows  in  a  southerly  direction,  past  the  western 
shores  of  Southern  Europe ;  so  that  we  may  expect  a  strange  mixture  of 
arctic  and  subtropical  animals  in  the  great  unexplored  depths  of  the  At- 
lantic, between  America  and  Europe.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  zeal 
with  which  the  exploration  of  the  deep  ocean  has  begun  may  not  flag 
before  the  whole  problem  is  solved. 

One  of  the  most  important  results  of  this  year's  cruise,  though  not 
exclusively  derived  from  deep-sea  soundings,  deserves  a  special  men- 
tion in  this  Report. 

Taught  by  former  investigations,  upon  other  classes  of  animals,  that 
in  their  affinities  and  relative  standing  organized  beings  exhibit  direct 
relations  not  only  to  the  changes  they  undergo  while  growing,  but  also 
to  their  succession  in  past  ages,  and  to  their  present  distribution  upon 
the  surface  of  the  earth,  I  lost  no  opportunity  of  ascertaining  to  what 
extent  these  relations  may  also  be  traceable  among  the  corals.  From 
their  simpler  organization,  and  the  less  prominent  differences  which 
distinguish  their  numerous  representatives,  it  seemed  hardly  probable 
that  facts  could  be  ascertained  plainly  bearing  upon  these  questions; 
and  yet,  the  moment  I  proceeded  with  the  investigation,  I  perceived 
that  there  was  before  me  a  vast  field,  thus  far  entirely  unexplored, 
from  the  survey  of  which  much  valuable  information  could  be  se- 
cured. 

A  fortunate  circumstance  unexpectedly  favored  my  researches.  In 
consequence  of  injuries  to  a  breakwater  adjoining  Fort  Taylor,  a  large 
number  of  granite  blocks,  which  had  been  three  years  under  water, 
were  hauled  up  on  shore,  and  I  found  them  covered  with  a  great  num- 
ber of  specimens  of  different  species  of  corals,  in  various  stages  of 
growth.  The  surfaces  of  the  granite  were  still  so  clean  that  it  was 
possible  to  detect  the  smallest  young  corals  upon  them,  and  to  trace  so 
many  stages  between  them  and  larger  ones  as  to  leave  no  doubt  of 
their  specific  identity.  I  made,  with  the  assistance  of  M.  Pourtales,  a 
large  collection  of  these  young  corals,  which  I  afterwards  leisurely 
compared  with  one  another  and  with  adult  stocks  of  the  same  species. 
The  result  of  this  comparison  I  may  express  in  few  words :  Corals 
undergo  a  succession  of  changes  peculiarly  their  own,  and  yet  hardly 


380  BULLETIN   OF   THE 

less  marked  than  the  embryonic  changes  already  known  among  many 
animals.  If  we  combine  into  a  series  all  the  changes  thus  far  observed 
among  different  families  of  corals,  an  unmistakable  gradation  appears 
among  them,  akin  to  the  series  which  may  be  traced  among  other  animals 
in  their  adult  condition,  when  we  take  the  complication  of  their  structure 
as  a  standard  of  their  arrangement.  Combining  the  evidence  obtained 
from  adult  coral  stocks,  and  their  young  at  various  stages  of  growth,  it 
becomes  evident  that  the  representatives  of  the  class  of  Polyps  do  not 
stand  upon  the  same  structural  level  with  one  another ;  but  that  there 
are  higher  and  lower  types  among  them,  recognizable  without  the 
aid  of  embryological  data,  even  though  it  was  the  study  of  the  young 
which  led  me  to  the  recognition  of  their  relative  standing.  This  is 
not  the  place  for  a  discussion  of  the  principles  of  classification  of  Polyps. 
I  will  only  state,  what  I  trust  I  shall  be  able  to  prove  hereafter,  that 
the  Actinians  proper  stand  lowest ;  next  to  them  the  Madrepora- 
rians,  and  highest  the  Halcyonarians.  And  as  the  Madreporarians  form 
the  most  prominent  feature  in  the  coral  reefs,  I  may  add  that  among 
them  the  Turbinolians  stand  lowest,  the  Fungians  next,  then  the  Astras- 
ans,  and  highest  the  Madreporians.  Now  it  is  a  most  interesting 
fact  that  the  successive  changes  which  any  representative  of  these 
different  groups  exhibit  during  their  growth  recall  the  characteristic 
features  of  the  groups  immediately  below.  For  instance,  young  As- 
traeans,  before  assuming  their  solid  frame,  are  Actinia-like ;  their 
first  coral  frame  is  Turbinolia-like ;  and  from  that  stage  they  pass  into 
Fungia-like  condition,  before  they  assume  their  characteristic  Astraan 
features. 

I  will  only  describe  a  few  cases,  in  order  to  establish  this  correspond- 
ence of  growth  and  relative  standing  of  adults  upon  a  firm  scientific 
basis.  Besides  multiplying  through  eggs,  Actinia?  increase  also  by 
budding,  and  this  takes  place  by  a  spreading  of  their  base  of  attach- 
ment (abactinal  area),  from  the  margin  of  which  new  individuals  arise 
and  finally  detach  themselves.  Such  a  mode  of  enlargement  or  spread- 
ing of  a  simple  individual,  by  a  widening  of  its  base  of  attachment,  I 
have  observed  in  many  genera  among  Fungians,  Astrasans,  Oculines, 
and  Madrepores.  If  we  take,  for  instance,  a  Siderastrcea,  which,  by  the 
way,  is  a  Fungian,  and  not  an  Astraean,  as  is  shown  by  the  structure 
of  its  tentacles,  as  well  as  of  its  coral  stock,  we  find  that  the  large 
rounded  masses  formed  by  these    corals   are  at  first   thin,  spreading 


MUSEUM   OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  381 

disks,  which  only  increase  in  thickness  at  a  later  time.  The  genus 
Mycedium,  which,  even  in  its  perfect  condition,  constitutes  a  thin,  spread- 
ing blade,  may  be  compared,  making  allowance  for  the  generic  dif- 
ferences, to  a  young  spreading  stock  of  Siderastrcea.  In  Mycedium 
the  mode  of  growth  is  very  plain.  A  series  of  specimens  collected  by 
M.  Pourtales  shows  the  beginning  of  such  a  coral  community  to  be  a 
single  individual,  the  margin  of  which  gradually  spreads  ;  from  this 
spreading  edge  are  developed  additional  individuals  in  the  trend 
of  the  radiating  partitions  of  the  parent  individual,  spreading  in 
their  turn,  while  they  remain  connected  with  one  another  and  with  the 
central  individual ;  this  process  going  on  until  the  coral  stock  has 
assumed  its  ordinary  dimensions.  Let  us  now  conceive  that  the  indi- 
vidual Polpys,  united  as  a  coral-stock  in  Mycedium,  should  increase 
vertically,  as  well  as  spread  and  multiply  horizontally,  the  process  of 
elevation  beginning  in  the  centre,  we  should  have  a  Siderastrcea.  It  is 
worth  noticing,  further,  that  the  original  central  individual,  from  which 
the  Mycedium  community  arises,  is  a  diminutive  Fungia,  up  to  the  time 
when  new  individuals  arise  around  its  margin.  I  have  before  me  such 
young  Mycediums,  which  might  be  mistaken  for  small  specimens  of 
Fungiae,  such  as  have  been  figured  by  Stuchbury  and  Milne  Ed- 
wards. "We  are  therefore  justified  in  considering  the  genus  Fungia  as 
an  embryonic  form  of  the  type  of  Fungians,  when  we  compare  it  to 
Mycedium,  Agaricia,  or  Siderastrcea ;  and  the  propriety  of  assigning 
to  Fungia  proper  a  lower  position  in  a  natural  system  than  that  be- 
longing to  the  compound  types  of  the  family  must  be  obvious  to  all. 
The  genus  Zoopilus  is  only  a  Mycedium  in  which  the  individuals 
of  the  community  are  more  intimately  blended  together  than  in  Halo- 
mitra,  thus  forming  a  transition  to  Fungia  proper.  I  have  had  an 
opportunity  of  examining  also  the  growth  of  Agaricia.  "With  the 
exception  of  generic  differences  in  its  structure,  it  exhibits  in  its 
growth  the  same  features  as  Mycedium.  The  very  youngest  My- 
cediums exhibit  Turbinolian  affinities,  inasmuch  as  the  interseptal 
chambers  are  open  from  top  to  bottom  and  exhibit  neither  traverses 
nor  synapticules. 

Among  Astrreans  the  early  growth  of  a  community  takes  place 
in  the  same  manner  as  among  Fungians.  Naturalists  are  accustomed 
to  consider  the  formation  of  the  hemispheric  masses  of  these  corals  as 
arising  from  the  formation  of  vertical  buds  around   and  between   those 


382  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

which  preceded.  This  mode  of  enlargement  of  the  communities  ohtains 
really  in  later  periods  of  their  growth;  but  it  is  not  in  that  way  that 
the  foundation  of  the  community  is  laid.  Astrcea  annularis,  the  most 
common  species  among  the  Madreporariaus  of  Florida,  exhibits  the  for- 
mation of  these  stocks  very  plainly.  The  vast  number  of  young  stocks 
of  this  species  which  I  have  collected  in  every  stage  of  growth  leaves  no 
doubt  upon  the  subject.  A  simple  individual  Polyp  spreads  by  the 
elongation  of  its  radiating  partition,  Mycediu in-like,  in  every  direction, 
giving  rise  at  appropriate  distances  to  new  centres  or  individuals 
around  the  first  ;  and  this  goes  on,  without  a  marked  vertical  enlarge- 
ment of  the  new  individuals,  until  the  community  has  acquired  a  diameter 
of  several  inches  ;  just  as  in  the  cases  of  Mycedium,  Agaricia,  and  Sider- 
astrcea.  The  appearance  of  this  spreading  margin  of  the  youug 
Astrasa  stock  is  so  like  that  of  a  spreading  Fungian,  that,  if  detached 
from  the  well-defined  circular  individuals  occupying  the  centre  of  the 
disk,  it  would  unhesitatingly  be  taken  for  a  fragment  of  a  Fungian. 
It  is  only  at  a  later  time  that  in  Astrcea  annularis  the  members  of  the 
community  are  developed  in  a  vertical  direction,  and  the  community  as 
a  whole  is  enlarged  by  the  interpolation  of  new  individuals,  to  assume 
the  form  of  a  hemispheric  mass.  I  have  observed  the  same  mode  of 
growth  in  Astrcea  cavernosa,  in  Manicinia,  in  Symphyttia,  in  Favia,  in 
CvlpophyUia  and  in  Meandrina.  Of  Manicina  I  possess  a  series  of 
young  still  exhibiting  their  Turbinolian  characteristics,  with  interseptal 
chambers  open  from  top  to  bottom,  and  without  a  trace  of  traverses. 
The  corals  with  undulating  and  meandering  trenches  arise  also,  like 
compound  Fungians  and  compound  circular  Astrseans,  from  single  in- 
dividuals, with  circular  outlines  spreading  from  the  margin,  after  the 
fashion  of  Fungians,  just  as  much  as  Astra?a  proper.  The  peculiarities 
exhibited  by  each  type  cannot  well  be  described  without  figures  ;  I 
shall  therefore  not  attempt  here  a  detailed  report  of  all  the  facts 
I  have  observed,  reserving  a  fuller  statement  for  a  special  memoir. 
But  Mm  mi  rim  i  exhibits  some  features  so  particularly  intere-ting 
that  I  cannot  pass  on  without  giving  some  more  special  account  of 
them.  When  the  young  spreading  Meandrina  has  acquired  the  dimen- 
sions of  aboul  half  an  inch,  still  plainly  exhibiting  Fungian  character- 
istics, it-  marginal  extension  gives  rise  to  the  formation  of  iMilated 
clusters  of  rising  radiating  partitions,  which  stand  distinct  from  one 
another,  just  like  the  characteristic  hills  of  a  Hydnophora  :  in  fact,  the 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  383 

young  Meandrina  passes  from  a  Fungian  into  an  Hydnophora  state,  and 
in  its  farther  extension,  which  takes  place  when  the  community  has  about 
two  inches  in  diameter,  when  the  trenches  and  walls  begin  to  curve, 
while  the  margin  is  still  spreading  horizontally,  the  young  Meandrina 
assumes  the  appearance  of  an  Aspidiscus,  a  genus  of  the  cretaceous 
period  ;  in  truth,  it  then  resembles  Aspidiscus  and  Hydnophora  more 
than  any  adult  representative  of  its  own  genus.  We  have  here  the 
highest  complication  of  the  Astrasoid  type,  exhibiting  successively 
Fungian  characters,  common  Astraea  characters,  Hydnophora  charac- 
ters and  Aspidiscus  peculiarities,  before  it  assumes  its  own  prominent 
and  permanent  features.  The  Turbinolian  stage  I  have  had  no  oppor- 
tunity of  observing  in  Meandrina.  This  genus  seems  to  grow  more 
rapidly  than  other  Astrasans,  and  it  was  with  difficulty  I  secured  the 
earlier  Astrrean  and  Fungian  stages  of  its  growth. 

Zoologists  are  so  accustomed  to  consider  the  Oculinidce  and  Madre- 
poraidce  as  branching  corals,  that  they  may  be  surprised  at  the  announce- 
ment that  these  families,  like  the  Astrseans,  have  their  spreading  Fun- 
gian-like  stage  of  growth,  —  and  yet  I  have  before  me  a  complete  series 
of  Oculina  stocks,  among  which  small  clusters  of  individuals  in  simple 
juxtaposition  exhibit  the  earliest  condition  thus  far  observed  ;  others  con- 
sist of  flat  spreading  disks,  several  inches  in  diameter,  without  a  verti- 
cal branch ;  while  in  others  the  branches  seem  to  rise  as  small  knobs 
and  then  begin  to  assume  the  ramified  forms  under  which  the  Oculinas 
are  generally  represented  in  our  museums.  Even  our  most  branch- 
ing Madrepores,  such  as  Madrepora  prolifera  and  cervicornis,  form 
spreading  disks  before  they  rise  into  branching  stocks.  Madrepora 
palmata  is,  as  it  were,  an  overgrown  embryonic  condition  of  the  rami- 
fied species. 

This  summary  of  the  facts  concerning  the  growth  of  our  coral-stocks 
can  leave  no  doubt  respecting  the  correspondence  of  the  phases  of  growth 
of  the  Polyps  and  the  gradation  which  may  be  recognized  in  full-grown 
communities  of  these  animals.  If  we  extend  these  comparisons  to  the 
representation  of  the  class  in  earlier  geological  periods,  down  to  the 
present  time,  we  cannot  fail  to  perceive  that  the  series  exhibiting  their 
succession  in  time  coincides  also  with  that  of  their  relative  standing  and 
that  of  their  growth.  In  order  to  make  this  plain  it  would  be  necessary 
to  enter  into  a  discussion  upon  the  real  affinities  of  corals,  for  which 
this  is  not  the  place.    I  would  state,  however,  that  the  knowledge  I  have 


384  BULLETIN    OF    THE 

acquired  of  the  Fungian  affinities  of  Siderastraea  leaves  no  doubt  in  my 
mind  that  a  large  number  of  corals,  among  the  representatives  of  the 
Oolithic  series  generally  referred  to  the  family  of  Astraeans,  are  genuine 
Fungians  ;  thus  showing  a  preponderance  of  the  Fungian  type  at  a 
period  anterior  to  that  in  which  the  Astrrcans  became  more  numerous. 
That  the  genuine  Madreporians  are  of  still  later  date  in  geological 
history  has  long  been  known.  I  would  state  also  that  from  an  examina- 
tion of  the  soft  parts  of  several  representatives  of  the  family  of  Eupsam- 
midcB,  I  have  satisfied  myself  that  they  are  not  allied  to  the  true  Mad- 
repores, as  Milne  Edwards  and  Haime  supposed,  but  belong  in  the 
neighborhood  of  the  Turbinolians.  If  we  now  remember  that  the  Acale- 
phian  affinities  of  the  Tabulata  are  unquestionable,  and  that,  with  them, 
the  Rugosa  must  be  removed  from  the  class  of  Polyps  and  referred  to 
that  of  the  Acalephs;  and  if  we  further  take  into  consideration  the  fact 
that  Palceodiscus  belongs  to  the  type  of  Rugosa,  and  not  to  the  family  of 
Fungians,  it  becomes  evident  that  in  their  order  of  succession  from  the 
Mesozoic  era,  in  which  they  make  their  first  appearance,  the  great  types 
of  the  class  of  Polyps  have  succeeded  one  another  in  the  following  order  : 
first  Turbinolians,  next  Fungians,  next  Astraans,  and  last  Madrepores ; 
in  exactly  the  sequence  in  which  these  types  stand  to  one  another,  as 
far  as  their  structural  gradation  is  concerned,  and  in  exactly  the  same 
order  in  which,  during  their  growth,  these  corals  pass  from  one  stage  to 
another. 

If  we  now  turn  our  attention  to  the  distribution  of  these  animals  in 
the  ocean  at  different  depths,  it  is  equally  unquestionable  that  the  lowest 
types  —  Turbinolians  and  Eupsamrnida) —  range  in  the  greatest  depths, 
and  form  there  the  principal  feature  of  the  coral  population.  It  is 
equally  apparent,  from  the  facts  ascertained  by  the  dredgings  of  M. 
Pourtales,  that  the  various  types  of  Astrreans,  including  Stylaster,  Ocu- 
lina,  and  Parasmilia,  appear  next,  the  Stylasterians  and  Oculinians  as 
the  lowest  ranging  deepest,  and  that  Astraea  proper,  Manicina,  Mean- 
drina,  and  Colpophylia,  with  Porites,  are  already  types  of  shallower 
waters,  while  the  Madrepores  are,  of  all  the  genuine  corals,  those 
which  have  the  most  limited  bathymetric  range.  I  have  not  yet  suf- 
ficient data  upon  the  relative  standing  of  the  different  types  of  Ilal- 
cyonaria  to  extend  this  comparison  to  that  order  of  Polyps.  The  re- 
sults enumerated  above  are,  however,  already  sufficient  to  show  that 
in  the  relations  animals  exhibit  among  themselves  and  to  the  elements 


MUSEUM    OF   COMPARATIVE   ZOOLOGY.  385 

in  which  they  live,  there  are  other  connections  to  be  traced  besides 
those  arising  from  descent  or  the  struggle  for  existence. 

I  have  reasons  for  supposing  that  the  investigation  of  the  Gulf 
Stream,  as  presented  in  former  Reports  of  the  Coast  Survey,  has  not 
yet  reached  its  easternmost  boundary.  It  was  natural  that  the  earlier 
explorations  should  have  stopped  where  the  great  current  no  longer 
exhibits  its  characteristic  peculiarities,  and  that  its  eastern  range 
should  have  been  traced  with  less  minuteness  than  its  alternate  streaks 
of  warm  and  cold  water  nearer  shore.  But  now  that  the  influence  of 
the  Gulf  Stream  upon  the  geographical  distribution  of  organized  beings 
appears  distinctly  as  one  of  its  most  characteristic,  though  least  sus- 
pected features,  it  will  be  necessary  to  extend  the  survey  farther  out 
into  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

For  the  present  I  would  suggest  the  following  lines  for  soundings 
and  dredgings  :  — 

1°.  One  line  from  the  Atlantic  coast  in  Georgia  or  South  Carolina  to 
deep  water,  outside  the  range  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  chiefly  with  a  view 
of  tracing  the  northern  limits  of  the  fauna  of  Florida. 

2°.  One  line  from  the  Atlantic  coast  in  North  Carolina  or  Virginia  to 
the  Bermudas  and  beyond ;  with  the  special  view  of  connecting  the 
deep-water  fauna  of  the  Gulf  .Stream  with  the  shore  fauna  of  these 
islands  and  that  of  our  own  coast,  upon  which  Cape  Hatteras  marks 
the  limits  between  two  natural  zoological  littoral  provinces. 

3°.  One  line  from  Cape  Cod  or  from  the  coast  of  Maine,  in  a  south- 
east direction,  across  the  Gulf  Stream,  with  the  special  view  of  ascer- 
taining the  boundaries  between  the  shore  fauna  and  that  of  the  Gulf 
Stream  at  this  latitude.  This  line  would  afford  the  means  of  extensive 
comparisons  with  our  Acadian  fauna,  which  has  already  been  care- 
fully explored  as  far  as  Grand  Manan  by  Dr.  Stimpson,  Prof.  Verrill, 
and  myself.  Shorter  lines  from  Sandy  Hook  to  the  trough  of  the 
Guif  Stream  would  add  much  value  to  the  results  obtained  by 
dredgings  from  the  coast  of  Massachusetts  or  Maine  across  the  Gulf 
Stream. 

I  would  also  recommend  one  line  across  the  Caribbean  Sea,  from  Cu- 
mana  or  LaGuayra  to  Porto  Rico,  and  one  outside  of  the  Small 
Antilles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Orinoco  to  Antigua  ;  with  the  special 
view  of  ascertaining  the  area  over  which  the  mud  deposits  of  the 
Orinoco  spread,  and  how  far  they  affect  the  Caribbean  Sea. 

49 


386  BULLETIN    OF   THE 

But  the  most  important  line  beyond  our  immediate  shores,  con- 
nected with  the  past  history  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  would  be  one  from 
Panama  westward  into  the  deepest  waters  of  the  Pacific ;  for  dredgings 
in  that  direction  may  prove  that  the  deep-sea  fauna  is  identical  on  both 
sides  of  the  Isthmus,  and  that  therefore,  at  a  comparatively  recent 
epoch,  the  great  equatorial  current  of  the  Atlantic  extended  without 
serious  obstructions  over  parts  of  Central  America  to  the  Pacific 
Ocean. 

Cambridge,  November  16,  1869. 


DATE  DUE 

1111  OttH^S 

J^yt_T  v^*u9^ 

JUN  301998 

DEMCO    INC    38-2931 


Harvard   MCZ  Libra 


3   2044  066  303   181 


G